DS 


SSAA SRA AARAASSSRAIRNARA AAA SERAASSS|| WV SNS 


~ 


odode RARER SASNEANANR RARE RARER AMM 


aN 
ne 


a τ τς 
νι 
Ἄππιος ᾿ς 


ROR 


SN 


a! a ee τ τα τ τψιτεαςς tee ee τ ν τος SA CS ΔῊΝ 


> 


in Tine, ts, Se te te 


a ως 
+e 


SS 


." 
~~ 


a νὰν 
a te τε ννννς τ ον 


#4 'S, SS 
ΛΩΝ 


ime, ee ῊΝ 
ma ay 
Re eS 


AVAL AARRAARAR AS SESE TAA AERA ANA SE CLS 


FIP Ste i Fe 


Shs 


1 eS AAAS ARR RRA AAS RRA ὐ ἀῳνὰ νος οννοις 


a s 


SON 


ie ee 


AN 


ote es. am 


~~ τ κω ςκς ᾿ς ᾿ς ἘΠ 
+ τς τς Ἄν ᾿ 
ς ιν nh ie Ay a τι 
NS * Ἂ a ΟΝ ἊΝ τὰ 





he SS 
SN 


fF 
Fe 


SS 

ες - " ᾿ Ἢ 
’ ἊΝ ς τὰ Neh a ce 

aN κι ta “aM ate ts 


+ 7 ᾿ 
πον ς 
Xe Ἂς SS on ἐν » νῷ 
" ; eS 
. a ‘ TH CN 
Ae 5 
πων 


τῆς τς ᾿ς 
SS. 
ees 
ots 
ἄχ ον, 
“~ ~ τῷ 


WN 
. 


es . SS Ν 
SSN 


me. 
ον 
ὡς 
τὰ 


= Ἂ nr 
Re ες εις τ ϑενδι νος 
“SS 


Se 
; oF ἢ 
aS 


es . 
et. ESS pa, ὩΣ 


~ 


I) 
φ "ἢ 
is a, f 
OTe 
Ψ OP ἶ A: 

“ἢ ¢ 
pt 
yy 

hy Oey 
7, 


Le 
Yy 
Ay! 4: f 
A) 


Set Re SNS eS Ne 


Sees RES ELS 
~ ms δος . ae Pes ah ς AQ 5 SS ~ 


ῳ-» 
i, 


LSA 5: 
LiF ον 

MS ede 4 Vik y / Ci 
Lf oy pp Gee 





Yj , 77; 


Ψ..ῃῃψΡῃΡΡῃΡῃΡΡῃ, 

WALLA bf : é 
Hey yy, 7σξ Aff (/ 
ἂν» Ὄπ A PELISLLIP ISGP I 3 
SI phy We ESAS IRI Sp, iy tht 

Wy yyy 


He SS 


wh ἣ ᾿ς ς νὰν ha νὴ 7 Har ie ὙΝ i. 
ων me ᾿ Ἂς + en " ὰ τὰν ἢ ge ee he - - 
. = a ‘ . ” i i ea Ἂς τὰν ἔν, ἌΝ Ua ὡς, 
i. . os : ‘ RA 2 Boe No a SH 
ANS te ΝΞ Ν oe 3 hate Sy Sak τς =. a? ἧς Ἐπ ποὺς υ ate anes 
i b Sw Ν ἣ Ὡς τ, ν = ety = > es νος he ta ts ay Nae 
EN at pe Ὁ Ὁ ee ey νι he : SKS Sk eS A Ἢ τς Ὧν Ἂς - SRS aa Ἂ - 
. - Ὡς . 
> a hae ~~ ς ΤἈΝ ᾿ «᾿ς Ν᾽ Ν, ἊΝ ὩΣ ἢ ν δ ἢ ὦ : Ἢ ᾿ 
τς νἀ το ως ἐς μον Ὁ ἢν δ ἐνὸς x ἊΝ + δον Des Fs a SaaS we aS 
Ὰ Ὁ Ἂ 
ΟΝ . Ἂ 
ὴ ὃς ἃ ᾿ ct. 
aN ~~ »ν ee 


SSS 
ὡς 


SS 


SS 


ALS 


SS sa 


Ves 


,, 


SSS 


SSS 


. 2 
MS wCo wooo 
a ss Ἂς ἀν A aS re ke by hk a 


ἈΝ ΑΝΑΝ ΝΌΟΝ 


ἊΝ 
OR eS 


‘ee 


SS 
WSs 


LOH SS 
SO 


follies ὅν 


REESE LIBRARY 





τ es 
i 4. 


ΤΟΝΙΝΕΒΒΙΤΥ OF CALIFORNIA. 


OE i Sarg ΠΝ 


| ὡς τ lb AOE SS oe eS 

7. het Ὁ» ΓΝ " 

: 4 aS) cal ᾿ ; ᾿ 

Accessions No. 2SLG6E SheiPN acc τον 
a meres eae, a 


ἘΠῚ 








ee ee 


at ya! Ἢ 


_ 














f 


ioe 


das aia 


τ 


ie 
sm ual ae 


“Ne ts 


“ας 


τὴ ἀν, 















_ Digitized by the fa Archive 
- in. 2007 with funding ing from 


ΠΣ Microsoft’Gorporation - 






42. ea ee. Cy τς ἘΠ Re Pee: Ἔ 
τὰ ont tps: /Jarchive. orgidétails/harmonyoffourad 


. ͵ a Υ : 





7 Ἐν ‘ f / 
B b/e- N. / 6 g8 jo 445 Kar ne.Ljvu e@ 8, 5 €. εἰσὶ 
a f 


A 


HARMONY 


OF THE 


FOUR GOSPELS IN GREEK. 


. 


ACCORDING TO THE TEXT OF HAHN. 


NEWLY ARRANGED, WITH EXPLANATORY NOTES, 


BY 


EDWARD ROBINSON, ἢ. Ὁ. LL. Ὁ. 


Professor of Biblical Literature in the Union Theological Seminary, New-York ; 
Author of a Greek and English Lexicon of the New Testament, 
Biblical Researches in Palestine, etc, ete. 


~ 





BOSTON: , 
PUBLISHED BY CROCKER AND BREWSTER. 
LONDON: WILEY AND PUTNAM. 
1845. 


/ 
NBW-YORE : 
JOBN ¥. TROW AND 00. PRINTERS, 
% ANN STRERT. 


Entered, ing to Act of Congress, in the year 1845, by Epwarp Rozmnso, in the Clerk's 
ἜΚ of the Dintsice Court of be Southern District of New-York. 


“2524 EF 


BS256O 


Azite 


PREFACE. 


Tue experience of many years has not failed to impress upon 
the minds of most Biblical teachers, the advisableness of permitting 
the Harmony of the Gospel History to occupy a prominent place 
among the earliest studies of a Theological Seminary. ‘The sim- 
plicity of the language, the interest and importance of the events, 
and also the very difficulties, real or alleged, with which the sub- 
ject is environed, all mark this portion of the Word of God as 
particularly adapted for introducing the youthful student into the 
principles and practice of Biblical Interpretation. If the study 
of the Harmony be rightly carried out, there is thus laid a broad 
and solid ground-work, on which afterwards to erect a substantial 
and enduring structure of Biblical Science, “built upon the 
foundation of the Apostles and Prophets, Jesus Christ himself 
being the chief corner-stone.” 

In furtherance of these general views, no less than two editions 
of Archbishop Newcome’s Harmony have formerly appeared in 
this country ; one of them under my own superintendence. ‘These 
have already been long out of print, so that for some years it has 
been very difficult to obtain copies. Under these circumstances, 
and by the advice and request of leading Professors in several of 
our ‘Theological Seminaries, as well as from a feeling of necessity 
in the case of my own pupils, I was led to turn my attention to 
the supply of this acknowledged want. It soon, however, became 
apparent, that, rather than to engraft the changes and additions, 
which seemed necessary, upon any former work, it would be 
easier, and perhaps better, to prepare a new one. ‘The present 
volume, accordingly, was undertaken with these impressions ; and 
it is now given to the public, as a new and independent work, in 


iv PREFACE. 


the hope and with the prayer, that it may be found useful in its 
place, and thus aid in promoting the cause of που 
Education. ~ 

The public, wink will naturally be slow to expect any great 
amount of novelty in a work of this kind, on a subject which has 
been before the ablest minds of the Church during many centuries. 
Yet, in the lapse of centuries, and even of years, there is a con- 
stant progress in the discovery or observation of new facts and 
circumstances, bearing upon the social and also the physical history 
of the Hebrews and other ancient nations. ‘These all serve to 
enlarge the circle of Biblical knowledge ; they add to the appara- 
tus and means of the Interpreter and Harmonist; and thus 
enable him often to shed new light upon topics which before were 
dark or doubtful. . It may also be truly said, that in no former 
period, perhaps, has there been accumulated a greater amount of 
such facts and of such progress, than in the almost seventy years 
which have elapsed since the original publication of Newcome’s 
Harmony. Hence, ina similar work issued at the present day, 
the scholar may justly require, that it shall exhibit the results of 
al) these later investigations into language, manners and customs, 
history, geography, and the like, so far as they are well-founded ; 
and thus become, to a certain extent, the representative of the 
present state of Biblical science in this particular department. 
Such, accordingly, has been my aim in the preparation of this 
volume. I have also every where endeavoured faithfully to judge 
and write, according to the impressions left on my mind bya per- 
sonal inspection of most of the scenes of the Gospel History; a 
privilege enjoyed, I believe, by no previous Harmonist. 

If then the scholar shall find little or nothing of positively new 
matter in these pages, he will yet find, I trust, some new views, 
and also some new illustrations of old views, which are nowadays. 
assailed. ‘This is true especially in respect to the transactions 
during the last six months of our Lord’s life and ministry ; and the 
remark applies more particularly to the identification of the city 
Ephraim and the return of Jesus from that place through Perea ; 
to the important Passover question ; and to the mode of harmon- 
izing the several accounts of the Lord’s resurrection and its accom- 
panying incidents. All these and other like topics are discussed 


PREFACE. ν 


in the Notes; to which the reader is respectfully referred. The 
notation of place in connection with every section, though not 
wholly a new feature, is yet much more definitely carried out. 

The general uses and advantages of a Harmony, and the par- 
ticular objects aimed at in the present volume, are specified at the 
close of the Introduction to the Notes. A list of the most impor- 
tant Harmonies heretofore published, is given below. 

In the printing of the Text, which was very difficult, and in 
the correction of the proofs, great assistance has been rendered by 
two of my pupils, Messrs. W. C. French and A. H. Guernsey, 
themselves practical printers. 

That the labour bestowed upon this work may not be in vain, 
but may be blessed of God >to the furtherance of the study of his 


Word, is the sincere prayer of the Author. 
E. ROBINSON, 
Union THEOLOGICAL ig? 2t 
New- York, July, 1848. 





LIST OF HARMONIES. 


The following List comprises only the most important works of this class. For 
a more complete account of the literature of this department, the reader is re- 
ferred to the following works: Fanricius, Biblioth. Greca, ed. Harues, T. IV. 
p. 880 sq. Watcn, Biblioth. Theol. IV. p. 863 sq. Hast, Das Leben Jesu, 
§ 27. 2te Ausg. 


Tatian the Syrian, about A.D. 170, compiled a work entitled: τὸ διὰ τεσσάρων. 
This is lost; and the Latin version, so called, is regarded as spurious. See Biblioth. 
Patrr. Max. L. B. 1677. T. II. p. 203-12. Fabric. Cod. Apocr. N. T.I. p. 377. Mill 
Prolegom. in N. T. Lips. 1723. p. 388. Neander Kirchengesch.1. p. 764. 

Ammontus of Alexandria, about A. Ὁ. 220, is said also to have prepared a work 
called “Aguovia, in like manner lost. . 

A. OstanneR, Harmoniae Evang. Libri IV, Gr. et Lat. fol. Basil. 1537, 1561. 

Corn. Jansen, Concordia Evang. fol. Lovan. 1549. Antv. 1554. etc. Mechl. 1825. 
8vo. 2 Tom. 

R. Steruanus, Harmonia Evang. fol. Par. 1553. 


J. Catvin, Harmonia ex tribus Evangelistis composita, adjuncto seorsum Joanne, 
fol. Genev. 1553, and often. 


Vi LIST OF HARMONIES. 


M. Curmniti (Chemnitz) Harmonia quaiuor Evangg. quam P. Lyserus et J. 
GeRHARDUS, is continuavit, hic perfecit. fol. Hamb. 1704. 3Tom. The portion by 
Chemnitz was first printed at Frankf. 1593, ete. 


G. Caurxt, Quatuor Evangg. Scriptorum Concordia, 4to, Halberst. 1624, ete. Pub- 
lished without the author’s consent. 


T. Carrwriecut, Harmonia Evang. etc. 4to. Amst. 1627, 1647. 


J. Licutroor, Harmonia, Ordo, et Chronicon N. T. in Opp. ed. Leusden, fol. Tom. 
IL p.1. Ultraj. 1699.—English: Harmony, Chronicle, and Order of the N. 7. fol. 
Lond. 1655. Works, by Pitman, 8vo. Vol. IIT. Lond. 1822. 


B. Lamy, Harmonia 8. Concordia quatuor Evangg. 12mo. Par. 1689.—C mmentar. 
in Harm. 2 Tom. 4to. Par. 1699. 


J. Ctericus (Le Clerc), Harmonia Evangelica, etc. fol, Amst. 1699. 


Tornarp, Evang. Harmonia Gr. et Lat. fol. Par. 1707, posthumous.—French: Har- 
monie ou Concorde Evang. suivant la methode et avec les notes de feu M. Totnarp, 
Par. 1716. ‘ 


F’. Bormann, de Harmonie, ofte Overeenstemminge der vier ἢ. Evangelisten, 4to. 
Amst. 1712, 1739. 


J. R. Rus, Harmonia Evang. etc. Jena 1727-30. 3 Tom. in 4 Vol. ; 
J. A. Bence, Richtige Harmonie der vier Evangelisten, 8vo. Tib. 1736, 1747, 1766. 


J. Macxnicut, Harmony of the Four Gospels, 4to. 2 Vols. in 1. Lond, 1756, 1763, 
and often. wet 


J. Prrestiey, Harmony of the Evangelists in English, 4to. Lond. 1777. 


W. Newcome, Harmony of the Gospels in Greek, etc. fol. Dublin 1778.—Reprinted, 
8vo. Andover 1814, 1834. 


J. J. Griespacu, Synopsis Evangelior. Matth. Marc. et Lucae, etc. 8vo. Halae 1776, 
1797, 1809, 1822. 


J. Wuite, Diatessaron, etc. 8vo. Oxon. 1800. 


H. Pianck, Entwurf einer neuen synopt. Zusammenstellung der drey ersten Evangg. 
u. 8. w. 8vo. Gotting. 1809. 


De Werte er Licxe, Synopsis Evangelior. Matih. Marc. et Lucae, etc. 4to. Berol. 
1818. 


G. C. Μάττηλει, Synopse der vier Evangg. nebst Kritik u. 8. w. 8vo. Gotting. 1826. 

H. N. Ciausan, Quatuor Evangg. Tabulae synopticae, etc. 8vo. Hayniae (Copen- 
hag.) 1829. 

M. Roenpicer, Synopsis Evangelior. Matth. Marc. et Lucae, etc. 8vo. Halae, 1829, 
1839. , 

R. Cuapman, Greek Harmony of the Gospels, etc. with Notes, 4to. Lond. 1836, 

V. Reicuer, Quatuor sac. Evangelia in pericopas harmon. chronologice ordinatas 
dispertita, ete. 8vo, Prag. 1840. 


J. Geurincer, Synoptische Zusammenstellung des Gr. Textes der vier Evangelien. 
4to. Tub. 1842, 


CONTENTS 


AND 


SYNOPSIS OF THE HARMONY. 

















CONTENTS. ~ -|MATT. | MARK. | LUKE, | JOHN. 
Sect. | : Page. 
Taste for finding any Passage in the Harmony. xvii 
PART I. 
EVENTS CONNECTED WITH THE BIRTH AND CHILDHOOD 
OF OUR LORD. 
Time : About thirteen anda half years. 
1. Preface to Luke’s Gospel. 1 1, 1-4 
2.. An Angel appears to Zacharias.—Jerusalem. 1: 1.625 
3. An Angel appears to Mary.—Nazareth. 2 1, 26-38 
4. Mary visits Elizabeth.—Jutta. 2 1,)39-56 
5. Birth of John the Baptist.—Jutta. Dd 11, 57-80 
6. An Angel appears to Joseph.—_NVazareth. 4°11, 18-25 : : 
7. The Birth of Jesus.— Bethlehem. 4 2,.1-7 
8. An Angel appears to the Shepherds—Near Beth- 
lehem. 5. 2, 8-20 
9. The '¢ircumcision of Jésus, “and: his presentation in 
the Temple—Bethlehem. Jerusalem. 2, 21-38 
10. The Magi:-—Jerusalem. Bethlehem. 6 }2, 1-12 
11. The flight'into Egypt. .Herod’s cruelty. The re- 
turn.— Bethlehem. Nazareth. 6 ] 2, 13-23 2, 39. 40 
12. At twelve years of age Jesus goes to the Passover.— 
Jerusalem. 7 “2, 41-52 
13. The Genealogies. 8 41, 1-17 3, 28-38 
PART II. 
ANNOUNCEMENT AND INTRODUCTION OF OUR LORD’s ἢ 
PUBLIC MINISTRY. 
ΤΙΜῈ : About one year. 
14, The Ministry of John the Baptist —The Desert. The 
Jordan. 10 3, 1-12 | 1,1-8 |3, 1-18 
15. The Baptism of Jesus.— The Jordan. 12 3, 13-17] 1, 9-11 |3, 21-23 





SYNOPSIS OF THE HARMONY. 


\ 








CONTENTS. | marr, | MARK. | LUKE. | JOHN. 
Sect. a Page. 
16. The Temptation.—Desert of Judea. 12 4, 2-11 {1,1213 | 4, 1-13 | 
17. Preface to John’s Gospel. 14 1, 1-18 
18. Testimony of John the Baptist to Jesus.—Bethany . 
beyond Jordan. - 14 1, 19:34 
19. Jesus gains Disciples—The Jordan. Galilee? 15 1, 35-52 
20. The Marriage at Cana of Galilee. 16 2, 1-12 
PART IIL 
OUR LORD'S FIRST PASSOVER, AND THE SUBSEQUENT 
TRANSACTIONS UNTIL THE SECOND. 
Time: One year. 
21. At the Passover Jesus drives the Traders out of the 
Temple.—Jerusalem. 17 2, 13-25 
22. Our Lord's discourse with Nicodemus.—Jerusalem. 18 3, 1-21 
23. Jesus remains in Judea and baptizes. Further tes- 
timony of John the Baptist. 18 3, 22-36 
24. Jesus departs into Galilee after John’s imprisonment. 19]4,12 11,14. [4,14 4,19 
14, 3-5. |6, 17-20.| 3, 19.20. 
25. Our Lord’s discourse with the Samaritan woman. 
Many of the Samaritans believe on him.—Shechem 
or Neapolis. ν 20 4, 4-42 
26. Jesus teaches publicly in Galilee. 214,17 11,14.16 | 4, 14.15 14, 43-45 
27. Jesus again at Cana, where he heals the son of a No- 
bleman lying ill at Capernaum.—Cana of Galilee. 21 4, 46-54 
28. Jesus at Nazareth; he is there rejected, and fixes his 
abode at Capernaum. 99 14, 13-16 | 4, 16-31 
29. The call of Simon Peter and Andrew, and of James 
and John, with the miraculous draught of fishes.— 
Near Capernaum. 23 | 4, 18-22 | 1, 16-20 | 5, 1-11. 
30. The healing of a Demoniac in the Synagogue.— 
Capernaum. 24 1, 21-28 | 4, 31-37 
31. The healing of Peter’s wife’s mother, and many 
others.—Capernaum. 24 18, 14-17 | 1, 29-34 | 4, 3841 
32. Jesus with his Disciples goes from Capernaum 
throughout Galilee. 25 | 4, 23-25 | 1, 35-39 | 4, 42-44 
33. The healing of a Leper.—Galilee. 268, 2-4 . | 1, 40-45 | 5, 12-16 
34. The healing of a Paralytic —Capernaum. 2619,28 |2 1-12 | 5, 17-26 
35. The call of Matthew.—Capernaum. 289,9 9, 13. 14 | 5, 27.28 
PART IV. 
OUR LORD'S SECOND PASSOVER, AND THE SUBSEQUENT 
TRANSACTIONS UNTIL THE THIRD. 
Time: One year. 
36. The Pool of Bethesda; the healing of the infirm 
man; and our Lord’s subsequent discourse. —Jeru- 
salem. ~ 99 5, 1-47 
37. The Disciples pluck ears of grain on the Sabbath_— 
On the way to Galilee ? 31] 19, 1-8 |9, 93-98 | 6, 1-5 














SYNOPSIS OF THE HARMONY. 


ΙΧ 


























CONTENTS. MATT. | MARK, | LUKE. | JOHN. 
Sect. Page. 
38. The healing of the withered hand on the Sabbath.— 
Galilee. 32} 12, 9-14 |3,1-6 6, 6-11 
39. Jesus arrives at the Sea of Tiberias, and is followed 
by multitudes —Lake of Galilee. 32 | 12, 15-21 | 3, 7-12 
40. Jesus withdraws to the Mountain, and chooses the 
Twelve ; the multitudes follow him.— Near Caper- 
naum. 33 10,24 |3,13-19 |6, 12-19 
41. The Sermon on the Mount.—Near Capernaum. 3415, 18,1 6, 20-49 
42. The healing of the Centurion’s servant.—Caper- 
naum. 404 8, 5-13 7, 1-10 
43. The raising of the Widow’s son.— Nain. 41 7, 11-17 
44. John the Baptist in prison sends Disciples to Jesus.— 
Galilee: Capernaum ? 41 | 11, 2-19 7, 18-35 
45. Reflections of Jesus on appealing to his mighty 
Works.—Capernaum ? 42 #11, 20-30 
46. While sitting at meat with @ Pharisee, Jesus is 
anointed by a woman who had been a sinner.— 
Capernaum ? 43 7, 36-50 
47. Jesus, with the Twelve, makes a second circuit in 
Galilee? 44 8.1.3 
48. The healing of a Demoniac. The Scribes and 
Pharisees blaspheme.—Galilee. 44 719, 22-37} 3, 19-30 | 11,14.15. 
49. The Scribes and Pharisees seek a sign. Our Lord’s = 
reflections.—Galilee. 45 | 12, 38-45 11, 16. 
50. The true Disciples of Christ his nearest relatives.— δε 
Galilee. AT 19, 46-50} 3, 31-35 8, 19-21 
51. At a Pharisee’s table, Jesus denounces woes against 
the Pharisees and others —Galilee. 47 11, 37-54 
52. Jesus discourses to his Disciples and the multitude.— 
Galilee. 48 12, 1-59 
53. The slaughter of certain Galileans. Parable of the 
barren Fig-tree.—Galilee. 50 13, 1-9 
54. Parable of the Sower.—Lake of Galilee: Near Ca- 
pernaum ? 51913, 1-23 |4, 1-95 |8,4-18 
55. Parable of the Tares. Other Parables.—Near Ca- 
pernaum ? 54 913, 24-53 | 4, 26-34 
56. Jesus directs to cross the Lake. Incidents. The 
tempest stilled.—Lake of Galilee. 554 8, 18-27) 4, 3541 δ, one 
57. The two Demoniacs of Gadara.—S. E. coast of the 
Lake of Galilee. 57 g, 8.5, 5, 191 | 8, 26-40 
58. Levi’s Feast.—Capernaum. 59 9, 10-17 | 2, 15-22 | 5, 29-39 
59. The raising of Jairus’ daughter. The womanwitha ὁ 
bloody flux.—Capernaum. 60] 9, 18-26 | 5, 22-43 |8, 41-56 
60. Two blind men healed, and a dumb spirit cast out.— 
Capernaum ? 63 | 9, 27-34 
61. Jesus again at Nazareth, and again rejected. 63 | 13, 54-58 | 6, 1-6 
62. A third circuit in Galilee. The Twelve instructed 9, 35-38 
and sent forth.—Galilee. 64 10,1.5-42 6, 6-13 |9, 1-6 
11,1 
63. Herod holds Jesus to be John the Baptist, whom he ' 
had just before beheaded.—Galilee? Perea. 66 My] τὸ 2. a 9, 7-9 


B 


x SYNOPSIS OF THE HARMONY. 





CONTENTS. 


MATT. 


MARK, 


LUKE. 


JOHN. 





Sect. Page. 


64. The Twelve return, and Jesus retires with them 
across the Lake. Five thousand are fed.—Caper- 
naum. WN. E. coast of the Lake of Galilee. 


65. Jesus walks upon the water.—Lake of Galilee. 
Gennesareth. : 


66. Our Lord’s discourse to the multitude in the Syna- 
gogue at Capernaum. Many Disciples turn back. 
Peter’s profession of faith —Capernaum. 


PART V. 


FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER UNTIL HIS FINAL 


DEPARTURE FROM GALILEE AT THE FESTIVAL OF 
TABERNACLES. 


Time: Siz months. 


67. Our Lord justifies his Disciples for eating with 
unwashen hands. Pharisaic Traditions.—Caper- 
naum. 


68. The daughter of a Syrophenician woman is healed.— 
Region of Tyre and Sidon. 


69. A deaf and dumb man healed; also many others. 
Four thousand are fed.—The Decapolis. 


70. The Pharisees and Sadducees again require a sign. 
[See §49.]—Near Magdala. 


71. The Disciples cautioned against the leaven of the 
Pharisees, etc.— North-east coast of the Lake of 
Galilee. 


72. A blind man healed.—Bethsaida (Julias). 
73. Peter and the rest again profess their faith in Christ. 
[See ὃ 66.]|—Region of Cesarea Philippi. 


74. Our Lord foretells his own death and resurrection, 
and the trials of his followers.—Region of Cesarea 
Philippi. 

75. The Transfiguration. Our Lord’s subsequent dis- 
course with the three Disciples—Region of Cesa- 
rea Philippi. 


76. The healing of a Demoniac, whom the Disciples 
could not heal.— Region of Cesarea Philippi. 


77. Jesus again foretells his own death and resurrection. 
[See § 74.]—Galilee. 


78. The Tribute-money miraculously provided.—Caper- 
naum. 


79. The Disciples contend who should be greatest. Je- 
sus exhorts to humility, forbearance, and brotherly 
love.—Capernaum. 


80. The Seventy instructed and sent out.—Capernaum. 


81. Jesus goes up to the Festival of Tabernacles. His 
final departure from Galilee. Incidents in Sa- 
maria. 


82. Ten Lepers cleansed.—Samaria. 


67 


70 


71 


89 
89 





14, 13-21 


14, 22-36 


15, 1-20 


15, 21-28 


15, 29-38 
μὰ 8 


16, 13-20 


16, 91:98 


17, 1-13 
17, 14-21 
17, 22.23 


17, 24-27 


18, 1-35 








6, 30-44 


6, 45-56 


7, 1-28 


8, 13-21 
8, 22.26 


8, 27-30 


9, 33-50 


9, 10-17 


9, 18-21 
9, 22-27 


9, 28-36 
9, 37-43 


9, 43-45 


9, 46-50 
10, 1-16 


9, 51-56 





17, 11-19 








7, 2-10 


SYNOPSIS OF THE HARMONY. 


Xi 























CONTENTS. | MATT. | MARK. | LUKE. | JOAN. 
Sect. Page, 
PART VI. 
THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES, AND THE SUBSEQUENT 
TRANSACTIONS UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETH- 
ANY SIX DAYS BEFORE THE FOURTH PASSOVER, 
é Time: Siz months less one week. Ἢ 
83. Jesus at the Festival of Tabernacles. His public 
teaching.—Jerusalem. 90 7, : 1-53 
2 
84. The Woman taken in Adultery. ——Jerusalem. 92 8,211 
85. Further public teaching of our Lord. He reproves 
the unbelieving Jews, and escapes from their 
hands.—Jerusalem. 92 8, 12-59 
86. A Lawyer instructed. Love to our neighbour de- 
fined. Parable of the good Samaritan—Near 
Jerusalem. 94 10, 25-37 
87. Jesus in the house of Martha and Mary.—Bethany. 94 10, 38-42 
88. The Disciples again taught how to pray.—Near 
Jerusalem. 95 1], 1-13 
89. The Seventy return.—Jerusalem ? 95 10, 17-24 
90. A man born blind is healed on the Sabbath. Our 
Lord’s subsequent discourses.—Jerusalem. 96 9, 1-41 
10, 1-21 
91. Jesus in Jerusalem at the Festival of Dedication. ag 
He retires beyond Jordan.—Jerusalem. Bethany 
beyond Jordan. 98 10, 22-42 
92. The raising of Lazarus.—Bethany. 99 11, 1-46 
93. The counsel of Caiaphas against Jesus. He retires 
from Jerusalem.—Jerusalem. Ephraim. 100 11, 47-54 
94, Jesus beyond Jordan is followed by multitudes. The 
healing of the infirm Woman on the Sabbath_— 
Valley of Jordan. Perea. 101419, 1.2 |10,1 13, 10-21 
95. Our Lord goes teaching and journeying towards Je- 
rusalem. He is warned against Herod.—Perea. 101 13, 22-35 
96. Our Lord dines with a chief Pharisee on the Sabbath. 
Incidents.—Perea. ἡ 102 14, 1-24 
97. What is required of true Disciples. — Perea. 103 14, 25-35 
98. Parable of the Lost Sheep, ete. Parable of the Prodi- 
gal Son.— Perea. 104 15, 1-32 
99. Parable of the Unjust Steward.— Perea. 105 16, 1-13 
100. The Pharisees reproved. Parable of the Rich Man . 
and Lazarus.— Perea. 105 16, 14-31 
101. Jesus inculcates forbearance, faith, humility.— : 
Perea. 106 | 17, 1-10 
102. Christ’s coming will be sudden.— Perea. 107 17, 20-37 
103. Parables: The importunate Widow. The Phari- 
see and Publican.—Perea. 107 18, 1-14 
104. Precepts respecting divorce.—Perea. 108 }19, 3-12 | 10, 2-12 
105. Jesus receives and blesses little Children.— Perea. 109 }19, 13-15) 10, 13-16| 18, 15-17 
106. The rich Young Man. Parable of the Labourers 
in the Vineyard.—Perea. 109 §19, 16-30 | 10, 17-31 | 18, 18-30 





20, 1-16 


\ 


xii 


SYNOPSIS OF THE HARMONY. 








129. 


Transition to Christ’s final coming at the Day of 
Judgment, Exhortation to watchfulness. Para- 














CONTENTS. MATT. | MARK. } LUKE. | JOHN. 
Sect. . Page. 
107. Jesus a third time foretells his Death and Resurrec- 
tion. [See § 74, §77.]—Perea. 12 { 20, 17-19 | 10, 32-34 | 18, 31-34 
108. James and John prefer their’ ambitious request.— 
Perea. 4 112 } 20, 20-28 | 10, 35-45 
109. The healing of two blind men near Jericho. — 113 }20, 29-34) 10; 46-52 ng ies 
110. The visit to Zaccheus. Parable of the ten Minae.— 
Jericho. 114 19, 2-28 
111. Jesus arrives at Bethany six days before the Pass- ree 
over.— Bethany. 115 13.1.81} 
PART VII. 
/ 
OUR LORU’S PUBLIC ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM, AND THE 
SUBSEQUENT TRANSACTIONS BEFORE THE FOURTH 
PASSOVER. 
Time: Five days. 
112. Our Lord’s public Entry into Jerusalem.—Bethany, 
Jerusalem. 116 al 1|. 11, 1-11 | 19, 29-44 | 12, 12-19 
113. The barren Fig-tree. The cleansing of the Tem- ’ , 
pane: ὶ i 21, 12.13. | 11, 12-19} 19, 45-48 
ple.—Bethany, Jerusalem 118 Lg? ’ aL s7s8 
114. The barren Fig-tree withers away.— Between Beth- - 
any and Jerusalem. 119 21, 20-22! 11, 20 26 
115. Christ’s authority questioned. Parable of the Two | 
Sons.—Jerusalem. 120 }21, 23-32 | 11, 27-33 | 20, 1-8 
116. Parable of the wicked Husbandmen.—Jerusalem. 121 } 21) 33-46 | 12, 1-12 | 20, 9-19 
117. Parable of the Marriage of the King’s Son.—Jeru- 
salem. 123 } 22, 1-14 
118. Insidious question of the Pharisees: Tribute to 
Cesar.—Jerusalem. 123 ἢ 22, 15-22 | 19, 13-17 | 20, 20-26 
119. Insidious question of the Sadducees: The Resur- 
rection.—Jerusalem. 124 f 22, 23-33 | 12, 18-27 | 20, 27-40 
120. A Lawyer questions Jesus. The two great Com- 
mandments.—Jerusalem. 126 § 22, 34-40 | 12, 23-34 
121. How is Christ the Son of David ?—Jerusalem. 126 } 22, 41-46 | 12, 35-37 | 20, 41-44 
122. Warnings against the evil example of the Scribes 
and Pharisees.—Jerusalem. 127 } 23, 1-12 | 12,38, 39 | 20, 45. 46 
123. Woes against the Scribes and Pharisees. Lamenta- 
tion over Jerusalem.—Jerusalem. 128 | 23, 13-39] 12,40 [20,47 
124. The Widow’s mite.—Jerusalem. 129 12, 41-44 | 21, 1-4 
125. Certain Greeks desire to seé Jesus.—Jerusalem. 199 12, 20-36 
126. Reflections upon the unbelief of the Jews.—Jeru- 
salem. 130 (2,37-50 
‘127. Jesus, on taking leave of the ‘Temple, foretells its 
destruction and the persecution of his Disciples.— 
Jerusalem. Mount of Olives. 131 [24, 1-14 | 13, 1-13 | 21, 5-19 
‘128. The signs of Christ’s coming to destroy Jerusalem, 
and put an end to the Jewish State and Dispen- 
sation.— Mount of Olives. 132 ] 24, 15-42 | 13, 14-37 | 21, 20-36 





SYNOPSIS OF THE HARMONY. 


ΧΗ 























CONTENTS. MATT. | MARK. | LUKE. | JOHN. 
Sect. Page. 
bles: The ten Virgins. The five Talents,— Mount vor" 
of Olives. 135 25, 1-30 
130. Scenes of the Judgment. Day.— Mount of Olives. 137 25, 31-46 
131. The Rulers conspire. The supper at Bethany. 
Treachery of Judas.—Jerusalem. Bethany. 137 }26, 1-16 |14, 1-11 | 22,1-6 | 12,28 
132. Preparation for the Passover.—Bethany. Jeru- 
salem. . 139 | 26, 17-19 | 14, 12-16 | 22, 7-13 
PART VIII. 
THE FOURTH PASSOVER; OUR LORD’S PASSION; AND 
THE ACCOMPANYING EVENTS UNTIL THE END OF THE 
JEWISH SABBATH. 
5 Time: Two days. 
133. The Passover Meal. Contention among the 
Twelve.—Jerusalem. ς 141 [260,90 [14,17 et 
134. Jesus washes the feet of his Disciples—Jerusalem. 142 13, 1-20 
135. Jesus points out the Traitor. Judas withdraws.— 
Jerusalem. 142 9 26, 21-25 | 14, 18-21] 22, 21-23 | 13, 21-35 
136. Jesus foretells the fall of Peter, and the dispersion of 
the T'welve.—Jerusalem. 144 } 26, 31-35 | 14, 27-31} 22, 31-38 | 13, 36-38 
: 1 Cor. 
137. The Lord’s Supper.—Jerusalem. 145 | 26, 26-29 | 14, 22-25 | 22, 19. 20 | 11, 23-25 
138. Jesus comforts his Disciples. The Holy Spirit Join 
promised.—Jerusalem. 145 14, 1-31 
139. Christ the true Vine. His Disciples hated by the 
world.—Jerusalem. 147 15, 1-27 
140. Persecution foretold. Further promise of the Holy 
Spirit. Prayer in the name of Christ.—Jerusalem. 148 16, 1-33 
141. Christ’s last prayer with his Disciples —Jerusalem. 149 17, 1-26 
142. The agony in Gethsemane.—Mount of Olives. 150 } 26, 30. plo 22, 39-46 | 18, 1 
143. Jesus betrayed, and made prisoner.— Mount of Ol- 
ives. 151 ] 26, 47-56 | 14, 43-52 | 92, 47-53 | 18, 2-12 
144. Jesus before Caiaphas. Peter thrice denies him.— * 
Jerusalem. 153 | 26,57.58. | 14,53.54. 95, 54-62 | 18,13-18. 
: Ἶ 69-75 66-72 25-27 
145. Jesus before Caiaphas and the Sanhedrim. He 
declares himself to be the Christ ; is condemned 
and mocked.—Jerusalem. 155 26, 59-68 | 14, 55-65 | 92, 63-71 | 18, 19-24 
146. The Sanhedrim lead Jesus away to Pilate—Jeru- 
salem. 157 a, i 9,}15,1-5 |93,1-5 | 18, 23-38 
147. Jesus before Herod.—Jerusalem. 158 = 23, 6-12 
148. Pilate seeks to release Jesus. The Jews demand 
Barabbas.—Jerusalem. 158 ἴ97, 15-26 | 15, 6-15 | 23,13-25 | 18, 39,40 
149. Pilate delivers up Jesus to death. He is scourged 
and mocked.—Jerusalem. 160 | 97, 26-30 | 15, 15-19 19, 1-3 
150. Pilate again seeks to release Jesus —Jerusalem. . 161 19, 4-16 
A 
151. Judas repents and hangs himself—Jerusalem. 161 } 27, 3-10 1, 18. 19 
‘ ς J 
152. Jesus is led away to be crucified.—Jerusalem. 162 } 27, 31-34 | 15, 20-23 | 23, 26-33 19, 16.17 
153. The Crucifixion. —Jerusalem. 163 § 27, 35-38 | 15, 24-28 19, 18-24 


93,33.34. 
38 


X1V 


’ SYNOPSIS OF THE HARMONY. 














CONTENTS. | MATT. | MARK. | LUKE. | JOHN. 
Sect. Page. : 
154. The Jews mock at Jesus on the Cross. He com- 
mends his Mother to John.—Jerusalem. 164} 27, 39-44) 15, 29-32 τ νὰ 19, 95.97 
155. Darkness prevails. Christ expires on the cross.— 
Jerusalem. ‘ 165 § 27, 45-50 | 15, 33 37) 23, 44-46 | 19, 28-30 
156. The vail of the Temple rent, and graves opened. 
Judgment of the Centurion. The Women at the 
Cross.—Jerusalem. 166 } 27, 51-56] 15, 38-41 2% 
157. The taking down from the Cross. The burial.— 
Jerusalem. 166 | 27, 57-61 | 15, 42-47 | 23, 50-56 | 19, 31-42 
158. The Watch at the Sepulchre.—Jerusalem. 168 } 27, 62-66 
PART IX. 
OUR LORD’S RESURRECTION, HIS SUBSEQUENT APPEAR- 
ANCES, AND HIS ASCENSION. 
Time: Forty days. 
159. The Morning of the Resurrection. —Jerusalem. 169 }28, 2-4 | 16,1 
160. Visit of the Women to the Sepulchre. Mary Mag- 
dalene returns.—Jerusalem. 169 }28, 1 16, 2-4 | 24,1-3 | 20,1.2 
161. Vision of Angels in the Sepulchre—Jerusalem. 170 [98,5.17 |16,5-7 | 24,48 
162. The Women réturn to the City. Jesus meets 
_ them.—Jerusalem. 170428, 8-10 | 16,8 | 24, 9-11 
163. Peter and John run t6 the Sepulchre.—Jerusalem. 17] : 24,12 [90,310 
164. Our Lord is seen by Mary Magdalene at the Sep- 
ulchre.—Jerusalem. 171 16, 9-11 20, 11-18 
165. Report of the Watch.—Jerusalem. 172428, 11-15 
166. Our Lord is seen of Peter. Then by two Disciples 1 Cor. 
on the way to Emmaus.—Jerusalem. Emmaus. 172415,5. | 16, 12.13} 24, 13-35 
167. Jesus appears in the midst of the Apostles, Thomas 1 Cor. 
being absent.—Jerustlem. 173]15,5. | 16, 14-18 | 24, 36-49 | 20, 19-23. 
168. Jesus appears in the midst of the Apostles, Thomas 90, 94.99 
being present.—Jerusalem. 174 ’ 
169. The Apostles go away into Galilee. Jesus shews 
himself to seven of them at the Sea of Tiberias.— Marr. 
Galilee. 17528, 16 21, 1-24 
170. Jesus meets the Apostles and above five hundred 1 Cor. 
Brethren on a Mountain in Galilee.—Galilee. 176 } 28, 16-20 15, 6. 
171. Our Lord is seen of James; then of all the Apos- Anus 1 Cor. 
tles—Jerusalem. 176]1, 3.8 5, 17, 
A 
172. The Ascension.—Bethany. 177]1, 9-12 | 16, 19,20| 94, 50-59 : 
OHN 
173. Conclusion of John’s Gospel. 177 eal 














CONTENTS OF THE NOTES. 


Sect. Page 
INTRODUCTION. ᾿ , ~ 3 : . ὡς 70 
: PART I. 
1-6. Miscellaneous. ' ἐπι κι ‘ ὶ ‘ ; : 180 
7. Our Lord’s Nativity. . ; p ; : : ὃς jee Le 
10. The Magi,ete. . ; Ἶ : : : 183 
13. The Genealogies. : ; ; ‘ : ; ‘ ey | 
PART II. 
14-20. Miscellaneous. . ; F : e : : : 187 
PART III. 

9.1: The Cleansing of the Temple. F : ae j ‘ . 188 
23-29. Miscellaneous. ‘ : : ς Σ : ; 189 
PART IV. 

36. The Festival in John 5,1. Was it the Passover ? ξ : ἢ » 190 
37-40. Miscellaneous. : : : , Ἶ : ᾿ ᾿ 192 
41. The Sermon on the Mount. : ‘ : er Α ; 4 195 
42-48. Miscellaneous. : : : ; : 4 hot ὁ ἣν 193 
49. Three days and three nights. . ’ " : : 3 εἷ, 394 
51-56. Miscellaneous. ; ; ; ; ; ; f ; . 194 
57. The two Demoniacs of Gadara. . ; : ‘ Ἢ αν (ν 
58-66. Miscellaneous. : ; ‘ 5 ᾿ 2 é 195 

PART V. 
67-75. Miscellaneous. : ‘ ὰ : : Α : . 196 
80. The Seventy sent out. Whither? é ; : : : 197 
81,82. Miscellaneous. ; , : : ‘ ; ; +: 2OT 
PART VI. 
Intrropuctory Nore: Order of John and Luke. . ‘ : : 198 


83-90. Miscellaneous. ‘ : : : 4 F : . 902 


XVi 


Sect. 
91. 
93. 


94-108. 


109. 
111. 


112-126. 
127-130. 
131. 
132. 


133-143. 
144. 
145-157. 


159. 
160. 
161, 162. 
163. 
164. 
166-169. 
170. 
171. 
172. 


CONTENTS OF THE NOTES. 


Festival of Dedication. 

The city of Ephraim. Where? 
Miscellaneous. Ξ 
The blind men at Jericho. 

Our Lord’s arrival at Bethany. 


PART VII. 


Inrropuctory Note: Schedule of Days. 
Miscellaneous. 

Our Lord’s discourse on ti Mount of Olives. 
The Supper at Bethany. 

The first Day of unleavened eka: 


PART VIII. 
Inrropuctory Notr.—Tue Passover. 
“ = I. Time of killing the sapebal ἜΠΗ 
εὐ ἐξ II. Time of eating the Passover. 
ss ad III. Festival of unleavened Bread. Ἶ 
« “ IV. Other paschal Sacrifices. The firet-fruits, The 
Khagigah. 
as δὲ V. The paschal Supper. 
He oa VI. Did our Lord, the night in which ba was bisedagert 
eat the Passover with his Disciples? 
$ i VII. Examination of passages in John’s Gospel. 
“ « VIII. Early historical Testimony. . 
Miscellaneous. A ; ‘ - 
Peter’s denials of Christ. 
Miscellaneous. 
PART IX. 
Inrropuctrory Nore. Order of events. 
Miscellaneous. P : 
Visit of the Women. Sun-rising. 
Miscellaneous. ἑ 2 : 
Peter and John in the Bepibslice. Ἢ ᾿ ° 


Our Lord’s appearance to Mary Magdalene. Use of πρῶτον and ὕστερον. 


Miscellaneous. 


Our Lord’s interview. with his Disciples o ona Mountain i in Galilee. 


Other appearances of Jesus. 
The Ascension. 


Page. 
203 
203 
205 
205 
206 


207 
208 
208 
210 
211 


211 
211 
212 
212 


213 
214 


214 
216 
223 
224 
225 
226 


228 
230 
230 
231 
232 
232 
233 
233 
234 
234 


4. Ac ΒΒ... E 


FOR FINDING ANY PASSAGE IN THE HARMONY. 


















































υ MATTHEW. 
Chap. | Verse. |Sect.| Page. Chap. | Verse. |Sect.| ~ Page. Chap. | Verse. | Sect.| Page. 
τ i} 1-17) 13] 8,9 xiii. | 1-23} δ4) 51-53 Xxii.| 41-46 | 121 | 126, 127 
18-25; 6] 4 24-53| 55] 54,55 | xxiii.|) 1-12 | 122) 127 
ii. | 1-12} 10] 6 54-58} 61} 63 13-39 | 123.| 128, 129 
13-23} 1] 6, 7 xiv.| 1,2 | 68] 66 xxiv.| 1-14} 127 131, 132: 
iii. | 1-12| 14] 10-12 3-5 | 24) 19 15-42 | 128 | 132-135 
13-17} 15] 12 6-12} 63] 66, 67 43-51 | 129 | 135, 136. 
iv. | 1-11) 16} 12, 13 13-21) 64} 67-69 xxv.| 1-30) 129 | 136, 137 
12 24) 19 22-36| 65) 70,71 31-46 | 130 | 137 
13-16) 28 | 22, 23 xv.| 1-20] 67| 74-76 | xxvi.| 1-16 | 131} 137-139 
17 26| 21 21-28) 68) 76 17-19 | 132 |, 139, 140: 
18-22) 29 |. 23, 24 29-38| 69| 77,78 20 133 | 141 
23-25 82] 25, 26 _ (39 70| 78 21-25 | 135 | 142, 143: 
v. | 1-48} 41) 34-36 xvi. | 1-4 | 70| 78 26-29 | 137 | 145 
vi. | 1-34] 41] 36-38 4-12| ¥2| 78,79 30. | 142) 150 
vii. | 1-29; 41} 38-40 13-20| 78] 79,80 31-35 | 136 | 144 
Vili. | 1 41} 40 21-28 | .74] 80, 81 36-46 | 142 | 150, 151 
2-4 | 33| 26 xvii.| 1-13] 75) 81-83 47-56 | 143 | 152, 153° 
5-13| 42| 40 14-21| 76 83, 84 57, 58 | 144 | 153, 154 
14-17| 31] 24, 25 22,231 77 85 59-68 | 145 | 155, 156. 
18-27 | 56 | 55, 56 24-27 | 8) 85 69-75 | 144 | 154,155 
28-34 | 67 57,58 | xviii.| 1-35] 79) 85-88 | xxvii.| 1,2 | 146} 157 
ix. | 1 57 | 59 xix.| 1,2 | 94/101 3-10 | 151 | 161,162 
2-8 | 84) 27, 28 3-12 | 104 | 108, 109 11-14 | 146 | 157, 158. 
9 | 35| 28 13-15 | 105 109 15-26 | 148 | 159, 160 
10-17; 58 | 59, 60 16-30 | 106 | 109-111 26-30 | 149 | 160,161 
18-26 | 69] 60-62 xx.| 1-16/106 | 111, 112 31-34 | 152 | 162, 163 
921-94 60] 63 17-19 | 107 | 112 35-38 | 153 | 163 
35-38} 62| 64 20-28 | 108 | 112, 113 39-44 | 154 | 164 
x.{ 1 62} 64 29-34 | 109 | 113, 114 45-50 | 155 | 165 
2-4 | 40] 33, 34 xxi. | 1-11 | 112 / 116-118 51-56 | 156 | 166 
aa 5-42) 62} 64-66 12,13}113/119 57-61 | 157 | 167, 168 
Sic, 1 62} 66 14-17 | 112 | 118 62-66 158 | 168 
| 2-19} 44) 41, 42 18,19} 113/118 XXvili.| 1 160 | 169 
τ΄ 190-30) 45| 42, 43 20-22 | 114 119, 120 2-4 | 159| 169 
xii. | 1-8 | 37] 31 23-32 | 115 | 120, 121 5-7 | 161} 170 
᾿ 9-14} 88] 32 33-46 | 116 | 121-123 8-10 | 162 170, 171 
115-21} 39] 32,33 | xxii.| 1-14] 117/123 11-15 | 165 | 172 - 
122-27 48 | 44, 45 15-22 | 118 | 123,124 16 169 | 175 
-138-45| 49] 45, 46 23-33 | 119} 124, 125 16-20 | 170 | 176. 
| 46-50} 50| 47 34-40 | 120 | 126 


XViil 


TABLE 


FOR FINDING ANY PASSAGE IN THE HARMONY. 








MARK. 
Chap. | Verse. |Sect.| Page Chap. | Verse. | Sect. Page Chap. | Verse. Sect. | Page. 
i. | 1-8 | 14] 10,11 vii. | 24-80| 68] 76 xii. 141-44 124 | 129 
9-11] 15] 12 31-37} 69]. 77 xiii, | 1-13] 127 | 131, 182 
12,13] 16) 12,13 | viii. | 1-9 | 69] 77,78 14-37 | 128 | 182-135 
14 24) 19 10-12; 70] 78 xiv. | 1-11) 191 137-139 
14,15] 26) 21 13-21] 71] 78, 79 12-16 | 132 | 139, 140 
16-20] 39) 23, 24 22-26) 72] 79 17 133 141 
21-28] 30| 24 27-30 | 73} 79,80 18-21] 135 142, 143 
29-34} 3511 24,25 31-38 | 74) 80,81 22-25 | 137 | 145 
35-39| 32 | 25 ix.) =f 74! 81 26 142 | 150 
40-45) 33 26 2-13| 75] 81-83 27-31 | 136 | 144 
ii. | 1-12] 34| 26-28 14-29| 76| 83, 84 32-42 | 142 | 150, 151 
13,14] 35 | 28 30-32! 77] 85 43-52 | 143 | 152, 153 
15-22] 58 | 59, 60 33 78} 85 53, 54 | 144 | 153, 154 
23-28 | 37] 31 33-50 | 79} 85-87 55-65 | 145 | 155, 156 
iii. | 1-6 | 38} 32 %. ΒΝ οἶ 94/101 66-72 | 144 | 154, 155 
7-12| 39] 32,33 2-12 | 104) 108 xv. | 1-5 | 146/ 157, 158 
13-19} 40} 33, 34 13-16 | 105; 109 6-15 148 | 159, 160 
19-30 | 48) 44, 45 17-31 | 106 | 109-111 15-19 | 149: 160, 161 
31-35 | 50! 47 32-34 | 107/112 - 20-23 | 152 | 162, 163 
iv. | 1-25| 54) 51-53 35-45 | 108) 112, 113 24-28 | 153 | 163 
260-394} 551 54 46-52 | 109] 113, 114 29-32 | 154 164 
835-41} 56 | 55, 56 xi. | 1-11 | 112) 116-118 33-37 | 155 | 165 
v. | 1-21) 57 | 57-59 12-19 | 113} 118, 119 38-41 | 156 | 166 
22-43 | 59 | 60-62 20-26 | 114} 119, 120 42-47 | 157 | 167, 168 
vi. | 1-6 | 61} 68 27-33 1151 120, 121] xvi. | 1 159 | 169 
6-13 | 62 | 64-66 xii. | 1-12  116| 121-123 2-4 | 160} 169, 170 
14-16| 68 66 13-17 | 118} 123, 124 5-7 | 161) 170 
17-20| 24} 19 18-27 | 119] 124, 125 8 162 | 170 
21-29) 68} 66, 67 28-34 [120] 126 9-11 | 164 | 171, 172 
30-44 | 64 | 67-69 35-37 | 121| 126, 127 12, 13 | 166 | 172, 173 
45-56 | 65 | 70,71 38, 39 | 122} 127 14-18 | 167 | 173, 174 
vii. | 1-23 67 | 74-76 40 [123] 128 19, 20 172} 177 
LUKE 
i. | 1-4 1 1 v. | 1-11] 29] 23,24 4 viii. |26-40| 57) 57-59 
5-25| 2 1,2 12-16| 33) 26 ᾿ 41-56; 59) 60-62 
26-38; 3| 2 17-26 | 34] 26-25 ix. | 1-6 | 62} 64-66 
39-56| 4] 2,3 27,28| 35] 28 7-9 | 63| 66 
57-80; 5| 3,4 29-39 | 58] 59, 60 10-17| 64| 67-69 
Lie} 1-7 7; 4 vi. | 1-5 | 837) 31 18-21} 78) 79,80 
8-20; 8/ 5 6-11] 38] 32 22-27| 74) 80,81 
21-38| 9| 5,6 12-19| 40| 33, 34 28-36| 75 |- 81-83 
39,40; 11; 7 20-26) 41) 34 37-43| 76) 83, 84 
41-52| 12) 7,8 27-30| 41) 36 43-45| 77| 85 
iii. | 1-18) 14] 10-12 31 41) 38 46-50} 79} 85, 86 
19,20; 24| 19 32-36 | 41) 36 51-56; 81 
21-23 15| 12 37-49] 41) .38, 39 57-62) 56] 55, 56 
23-38; 13| 8,9 vii. | 1-10} 42] 40 x. | 1-16; 80 
iv. | 1-13) 16] 12,13 11-17} 43) 41 17-24| 89] 95,96 
14 24} 19 18-35 | 44) 41,42 25-37} 86 
14,15] 26) 21 36-30] 46| 43 38-42| 87| 94,95 
16-31) 28 | 22 viii, |. 1-3 | 47| 44 xi. | 1-13; 88] 95 
391-37} 801 24 4-18} δ4] 51-53 14,15; 48) 44 
38-41) 31 | 24, 25 19-21} 50) 47 16 49| 45 
423-44] 32| 25 22-25! 56| 55, 56 17-23) 481] 44, 45 

























































































TABLE FOR FINDING ANY PASSAGE IN THE HARMONY. xix 
LUKE CONTINUED. 
Chap. | Verse. | Sect. Page. Chap. | Verse. | Sect. | Page. { Chap. | Verse. |Sect.| Page. 
xi. | 24-28| 49) 46 xix. [290-44 112. 116-118] xxii. | 54-62 | 144 | 153-155 
29-36| 49} 45,46 45-48 | 113 | 119 63-71 | 145 | 155, 156 
37-54| 51) 47,48-]| xx. | 1-8 |115 120,121] xxiii. | 1-5° | 146 157, 158 
xii. | 1-59) 52) 48-50 9-19.| 116 | 121-123 6-12 | 147 | 158 
xiii. | 1-9 | 53) 50 | 20-26 | 118 | 123, 124 13-25 | 148 | 158-160 
10-21; 94/101 27-40 | 119 | 124, 125 26-33 | 152 | 162 
22-35; 951101, 102 41-44 | 121 | 126, 127 33, 34 | 153 | 163 
xiv. | 1-24) 96/102, 103 45, 46 | 122 | 127 35-37 | 154 |-164 
25-35| 97 | 103 47 123 | 128 38 153 | 163 
xv.| 1-32) 98/104,105] xxi. | 1-4 | 124) 129 39-43 | 154 | 164, 165 
xvi.} 1-13; 99/105 5-19 | 127 | 131, 132 44-460 155 165. 
_ [14-81 100 | 105, 106 20-36 | 128 | 132-135 45 156 | 166 | 
xvii. } 1-10; 101/106 37, 38 | 113 | 119 47-49 | 156 | 166. 
11-19} 82] 89 xxii, | 1-6 | 131 | 137-139 50-56 | 157 | 167, 168 
‘| 20-37 | 102 | 107 7-13 | 132 | 139, 140] xxiv. | 1-3 | 160 | 169, 170 
xviii. } ~1-14| 103 | 107, 108 14-18 | 133 | 141 4-8 [101] 170 
15-17 | 105 | 109 19, 20 | 137 | 145 9-11} 162/171 
18-30 | 106 | 109-111 (21-23 | 135 | 142, 143 12 163 | 171 
31-34 107 | 112 24-30 | 133 | 141 13-35 | 166 | 172, 173 
35-43 | 109 | 113, 114 31-38 | 136 | 144, 145 36—49 | 167 | 173, 174 
xix.| 1 109 | 114 390-46 142 | 150, 151 50-53 | 172 |177 
2-28| 110| 114, 115 47-53 | 143 | 152, 153 , : 
JOHN 
i.f 1-18} 17] 14 ix. | 1-41| 90] 96,97 4 xviii. | 13-18 | 144 | 153, 154 
190-34 18] 14, 15 ‘x. | 1-21] 90] 97,98 19-24 | 145 | 155 
35-52; 19} 15 22-421 91] 98,99 25-27 | 144| 154, 155 
ii.} 1-12] 20] 16 xi. | 1-46| 92] 99, 100 28-38 | 146, 157, 158. 
13-25| 21) 17 47-54| 93)| 100, 101 39, 40 | 148 | 159 
iii, | 1-21] 22) 18 55-57 | 111} 115 xix. | 1-3 | 149/160 
22-36| 29] 18, 19 sr. [Ὁ 111} 115 4—16 | 150} 161 
iv.|. 1-3 | 24) 20 2-8 | 131] 138 16, 17| 152} 162 
4—42| 25] 20, 21 9-11} 111] 115 18-24 | 153 | 163, 164 
43-45} 26] 21 12-19 | 112) 116-118 25-27 | 154 | 165 
46-54) 27] 21,22 20-36 | 125 | 129, 130 28-30 | 155 | 165 
v.| 147} 36] 29-31 37-50 | 126 | 130 31-42| 157 | 166-168 
vi.| 1-14} 64] 67-69 xiii. | 1-20 | 134] 142 xx.| 1,2 | 160} 169, 170 
15-21); 65] 70 21-35 | 135 | 142, 143 3-10} 163/171 ὁ 
22-71| 66] 71-73 36-38 | 136 | 144 11-18 | 164 | 171, 172 
YW. | 1: 660] 73 xiv.| 1-31] 138 145, 146 19-23 | 167 | 173, 174 
2-10) 81] 89 Xv. |) 1-27 | 139} 147 24-29 | 168 | 174 
11-53} 83} 90,91 xvi.| 1-33 140] 148, 149 30, 91 173 | 177 
viii. | 1 83} 91 Xvii.| 1-26] 141| 149,150} xxi.| 1-24] 169 175, 176 
2-11| 84] 92 Xvili.| 1 | 142} 150 25 173 | 177 
12-59! 85! 92-94 2-121 143! 151-153 
ACTS. 1 CORINTHIANS. 
| 3-8 |171| 176 xi, | 23-25 | 137 145, xv. | 6 | 170 1765 
} 9-12) 172 | 177 xv.; 5 {| 166,172 7 171; 176. 
[18,19 151 161, 162 15 [167178ὃὕὄ "ἘΠ 













































































on wa. Tie) 5 ρος 
~ fae te TD Pe day LLY PRET 
ἵν ὩΣ oem 
δ a8 P by re ise Ϊ 
J ‘ a) 
< . OH ait ase c: ς 
* + 
Oy) 3 Ἵ a ν [ . 
- ΧΙ . δ᾿ Ὡ 
=€ Taek. ἢ nev ϑα Sucoke 8 - 
us ~ AS arty 
+ a ᾿ - ,. 
᾿ bet ‘ 
Ὗ * Mi ; Ἢ 
- 
ν Π a * 
i ΣΙ i Pa 
. 









‘ee! ce τὴ ὦ 
aeettie 





oe i abies 
oe aa 
{ 


a ry ee Re Ni Blue 


᾿ Υ ~ ροῦν 
no 7 ee 
: i Ὶ ᾿Ξ 
cel, . as 45% 
᾿ 4d ΒΡ; τοὶ ‘ - ve 
o> + eS 
<2 ᾿ ἔν Γ 
sre Ὧν ye 
ΠΥ - τῷ 4 τ 
πὰ... Ἷ 
, : : 
+ a 
“ ἘΣ ie 


: δῶ" Ὶ os 
Py , 
7) Σ ΄ 
ἔς gt σαν aie τῶ" 
ϊ 


“Ὁ 


τὰ εὐ ἜΤΟΣ ange ἫΝ avs uy 


rr 


a inte 
ay οὗτων ns 
~ 


« s 


ψ-ς͵ 
ΕΞ = 
aes Ser oe tease 
ον 
Ἃ 





νἀ a ἐπι 
SS ἕ, ra Ἢ 
af κ᾽ i - af | 
ee epee” f° Gah me iiacket | 
δ pe <> DEES er oes t. 5, foes EB hu Ds Bed ini 
ies , Av att δι πὸ baet Hed: abt ἘΕΕῚ ey eee 
Ἢ as a aah ae τ ἢ π ee ¥ Shi δι ft ie τὰ 


nen δ Ψ y: 











eo 
| 
= ae 
ἘΠΕῚ 
= 
s 


ies, byor% £S-3 Bie 8: + at 
he , “ἘΦ . ' Ou * Save repay! ἜΣ » 
τα ανν drag maps 2 ἊΝ ᾿ fore 88. Ὁ Pen eee | ταὶ 
Ἂν eee eee ire ators oy 
i ee eos Stas Se ae 
ORL | LE: eee εἰ κε} 6 
ἐσόγιν ἀξ". eee rete aS iP. 
Eter ὑέσθι: .- Ε΄ ΚΙ πο ἐλ 
δ τ ΠΕ}. ΒΗ Bi telery cen 
ys ἐ On es Ὲ, ἀξ Ὁ θα ὄ Mi; 
aie | ont! Os Cj Oia 
ee okt EL i 
' 2 Letty 


Md 


«Ὡς ἕ. - 


pay {Feat as : : : τ ὦ ΞΞΞΞΕΣ τ 


ι δ 
ro 
- 
er 
, 
brie -. 
: 
ζω 
» 


te 
we 





» ᾿ 
ἐξ 5. 




















=~ 
5.5 
cant isd peptide 


ex 
pe 
igh 
tts 
jay? 
a 
ΒΞ 


κε δ ἅνμο 


aoe 
ee 
Mate 
By, 
tc 
δε 
259 





_ 
af 
= 
«αὐ 
ee 
at 
emt “ 
¥ o 
oe 
Pa a 
= 
"τ 
-- 


“Ὁ 


“τ is ~ as 
Ὲ “πε 
“ 
ΜῊΝ 
ae i 
-_ 
x 
— 
hire 
4, 


Ἢ 
tie ΡΣ 
- 
Piel y 
eS ῥῶ 
ΕΣ ' 
mee δὲ 
Ὡς oe 
; 
Ἢ νὰν» 
“.“-ἢ 
ἧς 
eee 
Ὡς 
πὸ 










aa 


Eur με rg 








PART LI. 





EVENTS CONNECTED WITH THE BIRTH AND CHILDHOOD OF OUR LORD. 


Time; About thirteen and a half years. 
§ 1. Preface to Luke’s Gospel. 


Luxe I. 1—4. 


3 
1 ΤΕ κπειδήπερ πολλοὶ ἐπεχείρησαν ἀνατάξασϑαι διήγησιν περὶ τῶν πεπληροφορημέ- 
2 γῶν ἐν ἡμῖν πραγμάτων, καϑὼς παρέδοσαν ἡμῖν οἱ ἀπὶ ἀρχῆς αὐτόπται καὶ ὑπηρέ- 
3 ται γενόμενοι τοῦ λόγου" ἔδοξε κἀμοί, παρηκολουϑηκότι ἄνωϑεν πᾶσιν ἀκριβῶς, 
4 χαϑεξῆς σοι γράψαι, κράτιστε Θεόφιλε, ' ἵνα ἐπιγνῷς περὶ ὧν κατηχήϑης λόγων 
τὴν ἀσφάλειαν. 


§ 2. An Angel appears to Zacharias.—Jerusalem. , 


Luxe 1. 5—25. 
~ ? ~ ~ 
5 Ἐγένετο ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις Howdov tov βασιλέως τῆς Ιουδαίας ἱερεύς τις ὀνόματι 
, > > , > , 4. A > @ 3 “« ; 3 , ‘ 
Ζαχαρίας ἐξ ἐφημερίας ᾿4βιά, καὶ ἡ γυνὴ αὐτοῦ ἐκ τῶν ϑυγατέρων “Aapwr, καὶ 
ν᾽» oem F , με \ 4 > , > , ~ ~ 
6 τὸ ὄνομα αὐτῆς Ελισαβετ. Ησαν δὲ δίκαιοι ἀμφότεροι ἐνώπιον tov ϑεοῦ, πο- 
~ ~ ‘ ~ 
7 ρευόμενοι ἐν πάσαις ταῖς ἐντολαῖς καὶ δικαιώμασι τοῦ κυρίου ἄμεμπτοι. Καὶ οὐκ 
x διὰ ὦ, , , “3 , x ~ Ss , 4 > 
ἥν αὑτοῖς τέχνον, καϑότι ἡ EhioaBer ἢν στεῖρα, καὶ ἀμφότεροι προβεβηκότες ἐν 
“0 ~ 3 - ~ ~ 
8 ταῖς ἡμέραις αὑτῶν ἦσαν. ᾿Εγένετο δὲ ἐν τῷ ἱερατεύειν αὐτὸν ἐν τῇ τάξει τῆς 
9 ἐφημερίας αὐτοῦ ἔναντι τοῦ ϑεοῦ,! κατὰ τὸ EGOS τῆς ἱερατείας ἔλαχε τοῦ ϑυμιᾶσαι 
~ 4 ~ ~ ~ ~ 
10 εἰςελϑὼν εἰς τὸν ναὸν τοῦ κυρίου" καὶ πᾶν TO πλῆϑος ἦν τοῦ λαοῦ moocEryOuEVOY 
~ & ~ 4 A ~ ++ ~ 
11 ἔξω τῇ ὥρᾳ τοῦ ϑυμιάματος" “Npdy δὲ αὐτῷ ἄγγελος κυρίου, ἑστὼς ἐκ δεξιῶν 
~ , ~ , é πο , ’, 2. 7 \ , 

12 τοῦ ϑυσιαστηρίου tov ϑυμιάματος " καὶ eragayIn Ζαχαρίας ἰδών, καὶ φόβος 

αι 29> oa \ \ wa co» ‘ ~ , 
13 ἐπέπεσεν ἐπὶ αὐτόν. Εἶπε δὲ πρὸς αὐτὸν ὁ ἄγγελος" μὴ φοβοῦ, Ζαχαρία" 
ε ‘ 4 
διότι εἰρηκούσϑη ἡ δέησίς cov, καὶ ἡ γυνή cov ᾿Ελισάβετ γεννήσει υἱόν σοι, καὶ 
᾽ὔ .»» > ~ > , Le . , A 3 , 4 
14 χαλέσεις τὸ Ὄνομα αὑτοῦ Ιωαννην. Καὶ sora χαρὰ σοι καὶ ἀγαλλίασις, καὶ 
15 πολλοὶ ἐπὶ τῇ γενέσει αὐτοῦ χαρήσονται. Ἔσται γὰρ μέγας ἐνώπιον τοῦ κυρίου" καὶ 
οἶνον καὶ σίκερα οὐ μὴ πίῃ" καὶ πνεύματος ἁγίου πλησϑήσεται ἔτι ἐκ κοιλίας 

‘ Δ ~ ‘ 4 ~ enw ὁ NC ee, , 9M \ \ 
16 μητρὸς αὑτοῦ. Kat πολλοὺς τῶν υἱῶν Logank ἐπιστρέψει ent κύριον tov δον 


1 


2 EVENTS CONNECTED WITH [Part I. 





LUKE I. 
> ~ ~ ᾿ 
11 αὐτῶν. Καὶ αὐτὸς προελεύσεται ἐνώπιον αὐτοῦ ἐν πνεύματι καὶ δυνάμει Πλίου, 
» A ~ 
ἐπιστρέψαι καρδίας πατέρων ἐπὶ τέκνα, καὶ ἀπειϑεῖς ἐν φρονήσει δικαίων, ἑτοιμά- 
18 , Η , a 4 7 r ‘ ie 2 4 
σαι κυρίῳ λαὸν κατεσκευασμένον. Και εἶπε Ζαχαρίας πρὸς tov ἄγγελον * κατὰ 
τί γνώσομαι τοῦτο ; ἐγὼ γάρ εἶμι πρεσβύτης, καὶ ἡ γυνή μου προβεβηκυῖα ἐν ταῖς 
~ A ~ 
19 ἡμέραις αὑτῆς. Καὶ ἀποχριϑεὶς ὁ ἄγγελος εἶπεν αὐτῷ " ἐγώ εἰμι Γαβριὴλ ὁ 
~ ~ ‘ ε - 
παρεστηκὼς ἐνώπιον τοῦ ϑεοῦ, καὶ ἀπεστάλην λαλῆσαι πρός σε καὶ εὐαγγελίσα- 
20 σϑαί σοιταῦτα. Καὶ ἰδού, ἔσῃ σιωπῶν καὶ μὴ δυνάμενος λαλῆσαι, ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέ 
ἰ σοι ταῦτα. Καὶ ἰδού, ἔσῃ v καὶ μὴ δυνάμενος λαλῆσαι, ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας 
- τ « , 
γένηται ταῦτα, AVP ὧν οὐκ ἐπίστευσας τοῖς λόγοις μου, οἵτινες πληρωϑήσονται 
e > 4 ‘ [ὦ ~ es J ce A ~ ‘ , ‘A > ’ 
21 εἰς τὸν καιρὸν αὑτῶν. Καὶ ἣν ὃ λαὸς προςδοκῶν τὸν Ζαχαρίαν, καὶ ἐθαύμαζον 
~ ~ ~ > ~ ~ 
22 ἐν τῷ χρονίζειν αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ ναῷ. ᾿Εξελϑὼν δὲ οὐκ ἠδύνατο λαλῆσαι αὐτοῖς " καὶ 
" - ~ ‘ 7 ~ 
ἐπέγνωσαν, OTL ὀπτασίαν ἑώρακεν ἐν TH VAM" καὶ αὐτὸς ἦν διανεύων αὐτοῖς, καὶ 
, , A 9᾽ ’ ε > , ; . & , -~ ; > -~ 
23 διέμενε κωφός. Καὶ ἐγένετο ὡς ἐπλήσϑησαν αἱ ἡμέραι τῆς λειτουργίας αὐτοῦ, 
~ ~ ‘ 
24 ἀπῆλϑεν εἰς tov οἶκον αὑτοῦ. Mera δὲ ταύτας τὰς ἡμέρας συνέλαβεν ᾿Ελισάβετ 
~ ~ σ σ 
25 ἡ γυνὴ αὐτοῦ, καὶ περιέχρυβεν ἑαυτὴν μῆνας πέντε, λέγουσα " ὅτι οὕτω μοι πε- 
, ς ΄ SR ἐν φιν ~ > ~ ἊΨ» , Bs δὰ , 
ποίηκεν ὁ κύριος ἐν ἡμέραις, aig ἐπεῖδεν ἀφελεῖν τὸ ὄνειδός μου ἐν ἀνθρώποις. 


§ 3. An Angel appears to Mary.— Nazareth. 


Loxe 1. 26—38. 
23 Ἐν δὲ τῷ μηνὶ τῷ ἕκτῳ ἀπεστάλη ὁ ἄγγελος Γαβριὴλ ὑπὸ τοῦ ϑεοῦ εἰς πόλιν τῆς 
τ 
27 Γαλιλαίας, 7 ὄνομα Ναζαρέτ, ! πρὸς παρϑέρον μεμνηστευμένην ἀνδρί, ᾧ ὄνομα 
23 Ἰωσήφ, ἐξ οἴκου Aavid* καὶ τὸ ὄνομα τῆς παρϑένου Μαριάμ. Καὶ sigehOov ὁ 
ἄγγελος πρὸς αὐτὴν eine’ χαῖρε, κεχαριτωμένη ὁ κύριος μετὰ σοῦ" εὐλογημένη 
29 σὺ ἐν γυναιξίν. Ἡ δὲ ἰδοῦσα διεταράχϑη ἐπὶ τῷ λόγῳ αὐτοῦ, καὶ διελογίζετο, 
30 ποταπὺς εἴη ὃ ἀσπασμὸς οὗτος. Καὶ εἶπεν ὁ ἄγγελος αὐτῇ μὴ φοβοῦ, Μα- 
31 ριάμ᾽ εὗρες γὰρ χάριν παρὰ τῷ ϑεῷ. Καὶ ἰδού, συλλήψῃ ἐν γαστρὶ καὶ τέξῃ 
~ ~ τ 
32 υἱόν, καὶ καλέσεις τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦν. Οὗτος ἔσται μέγας καὶ υἱὸς ὑψίστου 
, ‘ , ϑ , c Ἁ A , a ~ 4 > in 
κληϑήσεται" καὶ δώσει αὑτῷ κύριος ὃ ϑεὸς τὸν ϑρόνον Aavid τοῦ πατρὸς αὑτοῦ 
Ἂ , FA LEN ’ \ > ‘ >~ Ws , So ae 
38 χαὶ βασιλεύσει ἐπὶ τὸν οἶκον ᾿Ιακὼβ εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας, καὶ τῆς βασιλείας αὐτοῦ οὐκ 
” ᾿ b A ‘ Α 4A » A ~ Ν ~ > % 6 
31 ἔσται τέλος" Εἶπε δὲ Μαριὰμ πρὸς τὸν ἄγγελον" πῶς ἔσται τοῦτο, ἐπει ἄνδρα 
35 οὐ γινώσκω ; Καὶ ἀποκχριϑεὶς ὁ ἄγγελος εἶπεν αὐτῇ" πνεῦμα ἅγιον ἐπελεύσεται 
Φ 
36 ἐπὶ σέ, καὶ δύναμις ὑψίστου ἐπισκιάσει σοι" διὸ καὶ τὸ γενρώμενον ἅγιον κληϑήσε- 
- ~ A 
rat υἱὸς ϑεοῦ. Καὶ ἰδού, ᾿Ελισάβετ, ἡ συγγενής cov, καὶ αὐτὴ συνειληφυῖα υἱὸν 
- “ ΦῈΡ σ 
37 ἐν γήρει αὑτῆς" καὶ οὗτος μὴν ἕκτος ἐστὶν αὐτῇ τῇ καλουμένῃ στείρᾳ. “Οτι οὐκ 
, 4 ~ ~ ~ ~ ‘ heres, oF , , ° 
38 ἀδυνατήσει παρὰ τῷ ϑεῷ πᾶν ῥῆμα. Εἶπε δὲ Μαριάμ" ἰδού, ἡ δούλη κυρίου 
, ‘ Δ «2 , K ὟΣ. 7λ9 > 3 > “ὦ cw λ 
γένοιτό μοι κατὰ τὸ ῥῆμά σου. Καὶ ἀπῆλϑεν ἀπὶ αὐτῆς ὁ ἄγγελος. 


§ 4, Mary visits Elizabeth —Judia. 
Luxe I. 39—56, 


39 *Avacraca δὲ Μαριὰμ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις ἐπορεύϑη εἰς τὴν ὀρεινὴν μετὰ 
40 σπουδῆς, εἰς πόλιν Ιούδα. Καὶ eigii0ev εἰς τον οἶκον Ζαχαρίου καὶ ἠσπάσατο 











4 17. Comp. Mal. 3, 23 sq. > 33. Comp. Mic. 4, 7. 


δὲ 3, 4, 5.] OUR LORD’S BIRTH AND CHILDHOOD. 3 





LUKE 1. 
A ~ 
41 τὴν Ἐλισάβετ. Καὶ ἐγένετο ὡς ἤκουσεν ἡ ᾿Ελισάβετε τὸν ἀσπασμὸν τῆς Μαρίας, 
3 , A , > ~ , ἊΝ ἂν Le , , ἐ- » ¢ 3 , 
ἐσκίρτησε τὸ βρέφος ἐν TH κοιλίᾳ αὐτῆς " καὶ ἐπλήσϑη πνεύματος ἁγίου ἡ Ehtoa- 
42 βετ,! καὶ ἀνερών ἤ μεγάλῃ καὶ εἶπεν" εὐλογημένη σὺ ἐν γυναιξί, καὶ εὐλ 
,| καὶ ἀνεφώνησε φωνῇ μεγάλῃ καὶ εἶπεν" εὐλογημένη σὺ ἐν γυναιξί, καὶ εὐλο- 
, ¢ A ~ ’ Α , ~ σ μὲ € , ~ 
43 γημένος ὃ καρπὸς τῆς κοιλίας σου. Καὶ πόϑεν μοι τοῦτο, we ἔλϑῃ ἡ μήτηρ τοῦ 
44 χυρίου μου πρός μὲ; ᾿Ιδοὺ γάρ, ὡς ἐγένετο ἣ φωνὴ τοῦ ἀσπασμοῦ σου εἰς τὰ ὦτά 
> ’ > > , \ , > ~ ’ ‘ ’ ¢ , 
45 μου, ἐσκίρτησεν ἕν ἀγαλλιάσει τὸ βρέφος ἕν τῇ κοιλίᾳ μου. Koi μακαρία ἡ πιστεύ- 
σ wy. ’ ~ , > « ‘ , 4 
46 σασα, τι ἔόσται τελείωσις τοῖς λελαλημένοις αὑτῇ παρὰ κυρίου. Καὶ εἶπε 
oes , ¢ , ‘ ΄ ! ἡ > , ι ~ + 959 Cite 
47 Μαριάμ᾽ μεγαλύνει ἡ ψυχή μου τὸν κύριον, ' καὶ ἠγαλλίασε τὸ πνεῦμά pov ἐπὶ τῷ 
- ~ ge ΔΨ ! a > , Φ {4 A , Med , c ~ > ‘ 
48 ϑεῷ τῷ σωτῆρι μου, ori ἐπέβλεψεν ἐπὶ τὴν ταπείνωσιν τῆς δούλης αὑτοῦ. ἰδοὺ 
~ ~ ~ ~ 7 ~ 
49 γάρ, ἀπὸ TOV νῦν μακαριοῦσί μὲ πᾶσαι αἱ γενεαί " ὅτι ἐποίησέ μοι μεγαλεῖα ὃ δυ- 
a? ~ ~ ~ bag 
50 γατός, καὶ ἅγιον TO ὄνομα αὐτοῦ" καὶ TO ἔλεος αὐτοῦ εἰς γενεὰς γενεῶν τοῖς 
51 φοβουμένοις αὐτόν. ᾿Εποίησε κράτος ἐν βραχίονι αὑτοῦ " διεσκόρπισεν ὑπερηφά- 
52 γους διανοίᾳ καρδίας αὐτῶν. Καϑεῖλε δυνάστας ἀπὸ ϑρόνων καὶ ὕψωσε 
53 ταπεινούς. Πεινῶντας ἐνέπλησεν ἀγαϑῶν καὶ πλουτοῦντας ἐξαπέστειλε κενούς. 
5455 ᾿ΑΙντελάβετο ᾿Ισραὴλ παιδὸς αὑτοῦ, μνησϑῆναι ἐλέους ' (καϑὼς ἐλάλησε πρὸς 
A ’ὔ € ~ ~ 3 A A ~ , > ~ > A »»-" a + 
56 τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν) τῷ -ABoacu καὶ τῷ σπέρματι αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα." Ἔμεινε 
- A ~ ~ A ~ 
δὲ Μαριὰμ σὺν αὐτῇ ὡςεὶ μῆνας τρεῖς, καὶ ὑπέστρεψεν εἰς TOY οἶχον αὑτῆς. 


ᾧ 5. Birth of John the Baptist.—Jutta. 


Luxe 1. 57—S0. 
~ ~ ~ 4 
5] Τῇ δὲ “EliodBer ἐπλήσϑη ὃ χρύνος τοῦ τεκεῖν αὐτήν, καὶ ἐγέννησεν υἱόν. 
- UM» « A e ΤΩΝ 2 ἐν σ 3 a , \ ii 
58 Kat ἤκουσαν οἱ περίοικοι καὶ οἱ συγγενεῖς αὐτῆς, ott ἐμεγάλυνε κύριος TO ἔλεος 
«ς ~ > > ~ ‘ , Φ,Ν ἦ0 A ΨΩ 3 ~ > , [4 , 
59 αὑτοῦ μὲτ αὐτῆς, καὶ συνέχαιρον αὑτῇ. Καὶ ἐγένετο ev τῇ ὀγδόῃ ἡμέρᾳ, 
~ , v2 > 8 ~ ~ 
ἦλϑον περιτεμεῖν τὸ παιδίον" καὶ ἐκάλουν αὐτὸ ἐπὶ TH ὀνόματι TOV πατρὸς αὐ- 
~ A ~ ~ , 
60 τοῦ Ζαχαρία». Καὶ ἀποχριϑεῖσα ἡ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ εἶπεν" οὐχί, ἀλλὰ κληϑήσεται 
> , 4 bs A > δι ς gv 2 , > > ~ , a ~ 
61 ᾿Ιωάννης. Καὶ εἶπον πρὸς αὑτὴν" ort οὐδεὶς ἔστιν ἕν τῇ συγγενείᾳ σου, OS καλεῖ- 
mo Ῥ , > , \ ~ ‘ 3 ~ ‘ i> Bn , ~ 
62 ται τῷ ὀνόματι tovtm. Evevevoy δὲ τῷ πατρὶ αὑτοῦ, τὸ τί av ϑέλοι καλεῖσϑαι 
> , A > Pe ἡ , ow , 3 , > A Ν᾿ “4 3 
63 αὑτὸν. Kat αἰτήσας πινακίδιον ἔγραψε λέγων" ]Ιωαννῆς ἔστι τὸ ὁνομὰ αὖ- 
~ > , ἢ > ἢ v4 , > ~ 7 φ ς 
64 του. καὶ ἐπ ΘΈΜΑ παντες. -4»εῴχϑη δὲ τὸ πῆμα αὕτου TEAQAXOT LG και ἤ 
65 γλῶσσα αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐλάλει εὐλ ογῶν τὸν ϑεόν. Καὶ ἐγένετο ἐπὶ πάντας φόβος τοὺς 
περιοικοῦντας αὐτούς " καὶ ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ ὀρεινῇ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας διελαλεῖτο πάντα τὰ 
66 ῥήματα ταῦτα. Καὶ ἔϑεντο πάντες οἱ ἀκούσαντες ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὑτῶν λέγον- 
ἢ A , ~ x 4 " , “ 2 > ~ ‘ 
67 reg’ τί ἄρα τὸ παιδίον τοῦτο ἔσται; καὶ χεὶρ κυρίου HY pet αὑτοῦ. Kai Za- 
, ¢ 4 > PP , , Coe A , ’ > 
68 χαρίας ὁ πατὴρ αὑτοῦ ἐπλήσϑη πνεύματος ἁγίου, καὶ προεφήτευσε λέγων" Evio- 
ry , ¢ \ ~? U σ 3 , or) 9 , , ~ ~ 
γητὸς κύριος ὁ ϑεὸς tov Ισραηλ, ort ἐπεσκέψατο καὶ énoiyss λύτρωσιν TH λαῷ 
- ‘ ~ ~ a” bg ~ 
69 αὑτοῦ καὶ ἤγειρε κέρας σωτηρίας ἡμῖν ἐν TH οἴκῳ Aavid τοῦ παιδὸς αὑτου, 
Ἁ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 
1 ! καϑὼς ἐλάλησε διὰ στόματος τῶν ἁγίων τῶν an αἰῶνος προφητῶν αὑτοῦ, 
~ ~ 4 ~ ~ ~ 
7172 ! σωτηρίαν. ἐξ ἐχϑρῶν ἡμῶν καὶ EX χειρὸς πάντων τῶν μισούντων ἡμᾶς, ! ποιῆσαι 
73 ἔλεος μετὰ τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν: καὶ eine διαϑήκης ΡΝ αὑτοῦ, ὅρκον ὃ ov 
74 ὥμοσε πρὸς ᾿“΄Ϊβραὰμ τὸν πατέρα ἡμῶν cov δοῦναι ἡμῖν ' ἀφόβως ἐκ χειρὸς τῶν 
3 ~ CV, ε , , eR LS een ὙΗ͂ΝΥ. 4 , Me: 
15 ἐχϑρῶν ἡμᾶν ῥυσθϑέντας λατρεύει» avt@!' ἐν ὁσιότητι καὶ δικαιοσύνῃ ἐνώπιον 








@ 54, 55. Comp. Is. 41, 8. 9. Gen. 22, 1654. b 73. Gen. 22, 16 sq. 


4 EVENTS CONNECTED WITH [Part I. 





LUKE 1. 
76 αὐτοῦ πᾶσας τὰς ἡμέρας [τῆς ζωῆς] ἡμῶν. Kat ov, παιδίον, προφήτης ὑψίστου 
κληϑήσῃ" προπορεύσῃ γὰρ πρὸ προφώπου κυρίου, ἑτοιμάσαι ὁδοὺς αὐτοῦ, 
ΤΊ 78! τοῦ δοῦναι γνῶσιν σωτηρίας τῷ λαῷ αὐτοῦ ἐν ἀφέσει ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν ' διὰ 
79 σπλάγχνα ἐλέους ϑεοῦ ἡμῶν, ἐν οἷς ἐπεσκέψατο ἡμᾶς ἀνατολὴ ἐξ ὕψους, ' ἐπι- 
“pave τοῖς ἐν σκότει καὶ σκιᾷ ϑανάτου καϑημένοις, τοῦ κατευϑῦναι τοὺς πόδας 
80 ἡμῶν εἰς ὁδὸν εἰρήνης. To δὲ παιδίον ηὔξανε καὶ ἐχραταιοῦτο πνεύματι" καὶ 
ἦν ἐν ταῖς ἐρήμοις ἕως ἡμέρας ἀναδείξεως αὐτοῦ πρὸς τὸν ᾿Ισραήλ. 


§ 6. An Angel appears to Joseph.— Nazareth. 


4 
Marra. I. 18—25. 
~ A ~ ~ ~ 
18 Tov δὲ ᾿]ησοῦ Χριστοῦ ἡ γέννησις οὕτως ἦν. ΜΜνηστευϑείσης γὰρ τῆς μη- 
A > ~ , ~ 3 ’ ‘\ ba ~ > 7 c / > 8 
τρὸς αὐτοῦ Μαρίας τῷ ᾿Ιωσήφ, πρὶν ἢ συνελϑεῖν αὐτούς, εὑρέϑη ἐν γαστρὶ 
19 ἔχουσα ἐκ πνεύματος ἁγίου. ᾿Ιωσὴφ δὲ ὁ ἀνὴρ αὐτῆς, δίκαιος ὧν καὶ μὴ ϑέ. 
20 λων αὐτὴν παραδειγματίσαι, ἐβουλήϑη λάϑρα ἀπολῦσαι αὐτήν. Ταῦτα δὲ αὖ- 
~ 3 , > ees , a > , 39 ἦν , > , 

τοῦ ἐνθυμηϑέντος, ἰδού, ἄγγελος κυρίου κατ ὄναρ ἐφάνη αὐτῷ λέγων" ᾿Ιωσήφ, 
«ι oh ‘ - - A ‘ ~ ἢ A 4 > ν ~ 
υἱὸς Aavid, un φοβηϑῇς παραλαβεῖν Μαριὰμ τὴν γυναῖκά σου" τὸ γὰρ ἕν αὐτῇ 
‘ > , , > CP κα ‘ cr 4 , \ 7 > “ 
21 γενγηϑὲν ἐκ πνεύματός ἐστιν ἁγίου" τέξεται δὲ υἱόν, καὶ καλέσεις τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 
> ~ | ‘ ld A ‘ ¢e a DR ~ « ~ > ον ~ a 
22 ᾿Ιησοῦν" αὐτὸς γὰρ σώσει τὸν λαὸν αὑτοῦ ἀπὸ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν αὐτῶν. Τοῦτο de 

σ ’ σ - δι 4 « Ἁ - , A ~ , , 
ohov γέγονεν, wa πληρωϑῇ τὸ ῥηϑὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ κυρίου διὰ τοῦ προφήτου λὲγον»- 

“ἃ ἰδ , c , > A σε ‘ cr s λέ ὃ # 
23 τος ἃ ἰδού, ἡ παρϑένος ἐν γαστρὶ ἕξει καὶ τέξεται υἱόν, καὶ καλέσουσι τὸ ὄνομα 
24 αὐτοῦ ᾿Εμμανουήλ, ὅ ἐστι μεϑερμηνευόμενον, pe? ἡμῶν ὁ ϑεός. Διεγερϑεὶς δὲ 
~ ’ ~ a 
ὁ ᾿Ιωσὴφ ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου ἐποίησεν ὡς προςέταξεν αὐτῷ ὁ ἄγγελος κυρίου" καὶ 
~ = τ 
25 παρέλαβε τὴν γυναῖκα αὑτοῦ, ' καὶ οὐκ ἐγίνωσκεν αὐτήν, ἕως οὗ ἔτεκε τὸν υἱὸν 
αὑτῆς τὸν πρωτότοχον, καὶ ἐκάλεσε τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ ᾿]ησοῦν. 


§ 7. The birth οἵ Jesus— Bethlehem. 


Luxe Il. 1—7. 

1 Ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ἐκείναις, ἐξῆλϑε δόγμα παρὰ Καίσαρος Avyov- 
2 στου, ἀπογράφεσϑαι πᾶσαν τὴν οἰκουμένην. «ὕτη ἡ ἀπογραφὴ πρώτῃ ἐγένετο 
3 ἡγεμονεύοντος τῆς Συρίας Κυρηνίου. Καὶ ἐπορεύοντο πάντες ἀπογράφεσϑαι, 
4 ἕκαστος εἰς τὴν ἰδίαν πόλιν. ᾿Ανέβη δὲ καὶ ᾿Ιωσὴφ ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαΐας, ἐκ πό- 

λεως Ναζαρέτ, εἰς τὴν ᾿Ιουδαίαν, εἰς πόλιν Δαυΐδ, ἥτις καλεῖται Βηϑλεέμ, διὰ 
5 τὸ εἶναι αὐτὸν ἐξ οἴκου καὶ πατριᾶς Δαυΐδ, ! ἀπογράψασϑαι σὺν Μαριὰμ τῇ 
6 μεμνηστευμένῃ αὐτῷ γυναικί, οὔσῃ ἐγκύῳ. ᾿Ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν τῷ εἶναι αὐτοὺς ἐκεῖ, 
7 ἐπλήσϑησαν αἱ ἡμέραι τοῦ τεχεῖν αὐτήν. Καὶ ἔτεκε τὸν υἱὸν αὑτῆς τὸν πρω- 

τότοκον, καὶ ἐσπαργάνωσεν αὐτὸν καὶ ἀνέχλινεν αὐτὸν ἐν τῇ φάτνῃ, διότι οὐκ 

ἦν αὐτοῖς τόπος ἐν τῷ καταλύματι. 





δ 29. In 7.011. » 


δὲ 6, 7, 8, 9.] OUR LORD’S BIRTH AND CHILDHOOD. 5 





§ 8. An Angel appears to the Shepherds.— Near Bethlehem. 


Luxe II. 8—20. 
" A , ¥ 3 ~ , ~ 7 © ἴα ~ 4 , 
8 Kat ποιμένες ἤσαν ἕν τῇ χώρᾳ τῇ αὐτῇ ἀγραυλοῦντες καὶ φυλάσσοντες φυ- 
A ~ 4A ci Ψ A , Φ ~ wea , A ’ 3 , 3 
9 λακὰς τῆς νυκτὸς ἐπὶ τὴν ποίμνην αὑτῶν. Καὶ ἰδού, ἄγγελος κυρίου ἐπέστη αὖ- 
10 τοῖς, καὶ δόξα κυρίου περιέλαμψεν αὐτούς " καὶ ἐφοβήϑησαν φόβον μέγαν. Καὶ 
ἷ΄- he AE ἘΣ ὦ» . “ κ Je A , 3 , δι Ὁ ‘ 
εἶπεν αὑτοῖς ὃ ἄγγελος" μὴ φοβεῖσϑε" Wov γάρ, εὐαγγελίζομαι ὑμῖν χαρὰν με- 
Ud σ a7 ‘ ~ Led σ LAO ¢ ν , , σ 3 
11 γάλην, ἥτις ἔσται παντι τῷ λαῷ ὅτι ἐτέχϑη ὑμῖν σήμερον σωτήρ, ὅς ἐστι Χρι- 
+i ; > , oh ‘ ~ Se: A ~ « ’ ’ 
12 otog κύριος, ἕν πόλει Aavid. Καὶ τοῦτο ὑμῖν τὸ σημεῖον" εὑρήσετε βρέφος 
18 ἐσπαργανωμένον κείμενον ἐν φάτνῃ. Καὶ ἐξαίφνης ἐγένετο σὺν τῷ ἀγγέλῳ πλῆ- 
~ > , 5 ΠΥ Σ \ A " , , CR 
14 Fog στρατιὰς οὐρανίου, aivovrtwmy tov Deov καὶ λεγόντων δόξα ἐν υψίστοις 
~ ἈΠ SS a eA es , > , ΠΥ fk Gites ὦ ἌΡ᾽ 3 
15 ϑεῷ, καὶ ἐπι γῆς εἰρήνη ev ἀνϑρώποις εὐδοκία. Και ἔγένετο, ὡς ἀπῆλϑον an 
αὐτῶν εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν οἱ ἄγγελοι, καὶ οἱ ἄνϑρωποι οἱ ποιμένες εἶπον πρὸς ἀλ- 
λήλους" διέλϑωμεν δὴ ἕως Βηϑλεὲμ καὶ ἰδωμὲν τὸ ῥῆμα τοῦτο τὸ γεγονός, ὃ 6 
΄ > , ¢ ~ » ee , , ee ~ 4 \ a 
16 κυριος ἐγνώρισεν ἡμῖν. Koinhdov σπεύσαντες καὶ ἀνεῦρον τήν τε Μαριὰμ καὶ 
A > \ ‘ A , 4 2 ~ ? 3 ’ A ’, 4 
17 τὸν Iaonp καὶ τὸ βρέφος κείμενον ἐν τῇ φάτνῃ. ᾿Ιδόντες δὲ διδγνώρισαν περὶ 
, ~ εἢ ~ , 3 ~ A ~ , ’ 4 , «ε 
18 τοῦ ῥήματος tov λαληϑέντος αὑτοῖς περὶ τοῦ παιδίου τούτου. Καὶ πᾶντες οἱ 
ἀκούσαντες ἐθαύμασαν περὶ τῶν λαληϑέντων ὑπὸ τῶν ποιμένων πρὸς αὐτούς. 
19 ‘H δὲ Μαριὰμ πάντα συνετήρει τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα συμβάλλουσα ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὖ- 
~ Ψ 4 , « , , A > ~ \ ‘ » ἃ ~ 
20 τῆς. Καὶ ὑπέστρεψαν οἱ ποιμένες δοξάζοντες καὶ αἰνοῦντες tov ϑεὸν ἐπὶ πᾶ- 
ΓΕ \ A 3 , ι 2 , 
σιν οἷς ἤκουσαν καὶ εἶδον, καϑὼς ἐλαλήϑη πρὸς αὐτούς. 


§ 9. The circumcision of Jesus, and his presentation in the Temple.—Bethlehem, 
Jerusalem. 


Luxe II. 21—38. 
A ~ ~ A 
21 Kat ὅτε ἐπλήσϑησαν ἡμέραι ὀκτὼ τοῦ περιτεμεῖν αὐτόν," καὶ ἐκλήϑη τὸ ὄνο- 
; ~> ~ A ‘ e 3 - > , A ~ ~ aT 8 9 
μα αὐτοῦ Incovs, τὸ κχληϑὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ ἀγγέλου πρὸ τοῦ συλληφϑῆναι αὐτὸν ἐν 
'τῇ κοιλίᾳ. 
ΕῚ [2 
Γ ες Ὁ » ~ > 4 4 ᾿ ' 
22 Καὶ ὅτε ἐπλήσϑησαν αἱ ἡμέραι τοῦ καϑαρισμοῦ αὐτῶν, κατὰ τὸν νγύ- 
a , > , ΒΝ 5 « ~ αν’ ’ ! A 
23 μον Mwvotag ἀνήγαγον αὑτὸν εἰς Tegocdhuua, παραστῆσαι τῷ κυρίῳ, '(xadag 
γέγραπται ἐν νόμῳ κυρίου "" 
24 χκληϑήσεται,)}" καὶ τοῦ δοῦναι ϑυσίαν κατὰ τὸ εἰρημένον ἐν νόμῳ κυρίου," ζεῦγος 
; Ἃ , ‘ ~ ΠΣ: με A 2 8 , 
25 τρυγόνων ἢ δύο νεοσσοὺς περιστερῶν. Καὶ ἰδού, ἦν ἄνϑρωπος ἐν Ἱερουσαλήμ, 
: t 7 , ἥν ae τ ’ ee ’ , 
@ ὄνομα Svpswv: καὶ 0 ἄνϑρωπος οὗτος δίκαιος καὶ εὐλαβής, προςδεχόμεγνος 
- A ~ σ vee \ 7 ~ 
26 παράκλησιν τοῦ ᾿Ισραήλ, καὶ πνεῦμα ἅγιον ἦν ἐπὶ αὐτόν" καὶ ἦν αὐτῷ κεχρημα- 
’ {ἢ ~ , ~ ¢ Ose 88 0 cs Mw 4 
TIOMEVOY ὑπὸ TOV πνευματος τοῦ ayiov, μὴ ἰδεῖν Davrator, now ἢ ἰδῃ τὸν Χρι- 
ΟἿ 4 : ’ Κ Α 7λ9 4 ~ , > ae ee © ~ ~ δ. ~ A 
στὸν κυρίου. Καὶ ἤλϑεν ἐν τῷ πνεύματι εἰς τὸ ἱερόν" καὶ ἐν τῷ εἰφαγαγεῖν τοὺς 
γονεῖς τὸ παιδίον ᾿Ιησοῦν, τοῦ ποιῆσαι αὐτοὺς κατὰ τὸ εἰϑισμένον τοῦ νόμου 
4 > ~ ! A “ὦΝὨ 3g ἡ re. > ‘ > , € ~ 4 > , A 
28 περὶ αὐτοῦ, |! καὶ αὐτὸς ἐδέξατο αὐτὸ εἰς τὰς ἀγκάλας αὑτοῦ, καὶ εὐλόγησε τὸν 
29 ϑεὸν καὶ eine’ νῦν ἀπολύεις τὸν δοῦλόν σου, δέσποτα, κατὰ τὸ ῥῆμά σου ἐν εἰ- 
, σ ἜΣ toute: ’ 4 Bec 2 ae , \ ’ 
30 81 ρηγῃ" ort εἶδον οἱ ὀφϑαλμοῖ μου τὸ σωτήριον GOV, ὁ ἡτοίμασας κατὰ προς- 


σ ~ ~ ~ 
ὅτι πᾶν ἄρσεν διανοῖγον μήτραν ἅγιον τῷ κυρίῳ 





8. 21. Gen. 17, 12. Lev. 12, 3. ν 23, Ex. 13,2. Comp. Num. 8, 16. 17. 
© 24. Lev. 12, 6.8. 


6 EVENTS CONNECTED WITH [Parr 1. 





LUKE Il. 
32 wor πάντων τῶν λαῶν, ' φῶς εἰς ἀποκάλυψιν ἐθνῶν καὶ δόξαν λαοῦ cov Ἶσρα- 
33 ἡλ. Καὶ ἦν ᾿Ιωσὴφ καὶ ἡ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ ϑαυμάζοντες ἐπὶ τοῖς λαλουμένοις περὶ 
84 αὐτοῦ. Καὶ εὐλόγησεν αὐτοὺς Συμεών, καὶ εἶπε πρὸς Μαριὰμ τὴν μητέρα 
αὐτοῦ" ἰδού, οὗτος κεῖται εἰς πτῶσιν καὶ ἀνάστασιν πολλῶν ἐν τῷ ᾿Ισραὴλ καὶ 
3 »Ἥ > ’ a A ~ A > ~ ‘ A Ld € ἥν 
35 εἰς σημεῖον ἀντιλεγόμενον " καὶ σοῦ δὲ αὐτῆς τὴν ψυχὴν διελεύσεται ῥομφαία 
36 ὅπως ἂν ἀποκαλυφϑῶσιν ἐκ πολλῶν κἀρδιῶν διαλογισμοί. Καὶ ἦν ”Avva προ- 
~ ’ , 3 - > , a ~ > « , ~ 
φῆτις, ϑυγάτηρ Pavovnd, ex φυλῆς Aono, αὑτὴ προβεβηκυῖα ἐν ἡμέραις πολλαῖς, 
37 ζήσασα ἔτη μετὰ ἀνδρὸς ἑπτὰ ἀπὸ τῆς παρϑενίας αὑτῆς," καὶ αὕτη χήρα ὡς 
ἐτῶν ὀγδοήκοντα τεσσάρων, ἣ οὐκ ἀφίστατο ἀπὸ τοῦ ἱεροῦ, νηστείαις καὶ δεήσε- 
38 σι λατρεύουσα νύχτα καὶ ἡμέραν. Καὶ αὕτῃ αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ ἐπιστᾶσα ἀνϑωμολο- 
γεῖτο τῷ κυρίῳ καὶ ἐλάλει περὶ αὐτοῦ πᾶσι τοῖς προςδεχομένοις λύτρωσιν ἐν ‘Te- 
ρουσαλήμ. 


§ 10. The Magi.—Jerusalem, Bethlehem. 


Marra. II. 1—12. 

1 Tov δὲ Ἰησοῦ γεννηϑέντος ἐν Βηϑλεὲμ τὴς ᾿Ιουδαίας ἐν ἡμέραις Ἡρώδου τοῦ 
2 βασιλέως, ἰδού, μάγοι ἀπὸ ἀνατολῶν παρεγένοντο εἰς “]εροσόλυμα λέγοντες" ποῦ 
ἔστιν ὃ τεχϑεὶς βασιλεὺς τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων ; εἴδομεν γὰρ αὐτοῦ τὸν ἀστέρα ἐν τῇ 
3 ἀνατολῇ, καὶ ἤλθομεν προςκυνῆσαι αὐτῷ. “Axovoag δὲ Ἡρώδης 6 βασιλεὺς 
4 ἐταράχϑη, καὶ πᾶσα Ἱεροσόλυμα μετ αὐτοῦ, | καὶ συναγαγὼν πάντας τοὺς ἀρ- 
χιερεῖς καὶ γραμματεῖς τοῦ λαοῦ, ἐπυνθάνετο nag αὐτῶν, ποῦ ὁ Χριστὸς γεν- 
δ᾽ νᾶται. Οἱ δὲ εἶπον αὐτῷ- ἐν Βηϑλεὲμ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας " οὕτω γὰρ γέγραπται διὰ 
6 τοῦ προφήτου" καὶ σὺ Βηϑλεέμ, γῆ ᾿Ιούδα, οὐδαμῶς ἐλαχίστη εἶ ἐν τοῖς ἦγε- 
μόσιν ᾿Ιούδα- ἐκ σοῦ γὰρ ἐξελεύσεται ἡγούμενος, ὅςτις ποιμανεῖ τὸν λαόν μου, 
τὸν ᾿Ισραήλ. Τότε Ἡρώδης λάϑρα καλέσας τοὺς μάγους ἠκρίβωσε παρ᾽ αὐτῶν 
8 τὸν χρόνον τοῦ φαινομένου ἀστέρος, ' καὶ πέμψας αὐτοὺς εἰς Βηϑλεὲμ εἶπε" 
πορευϑέντες ἀχριβῶς ἐξετάσατε περὶ τοῦ παιδίου" ἐπὰν δὲ εὕρητε, ἀπαγγείλατέ 
9 μοι, ὅπως κἀγὼ ἐλϑὼν προςκυνήσω αὐτῷ. Οἱ δὲ ἀκούσαντες τοῦ βασιλέως 
ἐπορεύϑησαν, καὶ ἰδού, ὁ ἀστήρ, ὃν εἶδον ἐν τῇ ἀνατολῇ, προῆγεν αὐτούς, ἕως 
10 ἐλϑὼν ἔστη ἐπάνω οὗ ἦν τὸ παιδίον. ᾿Ιδόντες δὲ τὸν ἀστέρα ἐχάρησαν χαρὰν 
11 μεγάλην σφόδρα. Καὶ ἐλϑόντες εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν εἶδον τὸ παιδίον μετὰ Μαρίας 
τῆς μητρὸς αὐτοῦ, καὶ πεσόντες προςεκύνησαν αὐτῷ, καὶ ἀνοίξαντες τοὺς ϑη- 
σαυροὺς αὑτῶν προφήνεγκαν αὐτῷ δῶρα, χρυσὸν καὶ λίβανον καὶ σμύρναν. 
12 Καὶ χρηματισϑέντες κατ ὄναρ, μὴ ἀνακάμψαι πρὸς Ἡρώδην, δι᾿ ἄλλης ὁδοῦ 

ἀνεχώρησαν εἰς τὴν χώραν αὑτῶν. 


§ 11. The flight into Egypt. Herod’s cruelty. The return.—Bethlehem, Nazareth. 
Marru. II. 15—23. 


13 ᾿Αγαχωρησάντων δὲ αὐτῶν, ἰδού, ἄγγελος κυρίου φαίνεται κατ ὄναρ τῷ ᾿Ιωσὴφ 
λέγων" ἐγερϑεὶς παράλαβε τὸ παιδίον καὶ τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ, καὶ φεῖγε εἰς Αἴ. 





® 34. Comp. Is. 8, 14. > 6. Mic. 5, 1. 


§§ 10, 11, 12.] OUR LORD’S BIRTH AND CHILDHOOD. Ἴ 





ΜΑΤΊΤΗ. IL. 
ὦ - Δ ” ~ 
" yurtor, καὶ ἰσϑι ἐκεῖ, ἕως ἂν εἴπω σοι" μέλλει γὰρ ᾿Ηρώδης ζητεῖν τὸ παιδίον, 
14 τοῦ ἀπολέσαι αὐτό. ὋὉ δὲ ἐγερϑεὶς παρέλαβε τὸ παιδίον καὶ τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ 
, a , > » . &¢ > ~ 7 ~ ~ « , 

15 γυχτός, καὶ ἀνεχώρησεν εἰς Atyvatov’ καὶ ἦν ἐχεῖ ἕως τῆς τελευτῆς ᾿Πρώδου, 
σ - Ve ἊΝ « ‘ ~ , A ~ , , “ἃ ὃ δ. ἃ 
ἵνα πληρωϑῇ τὸ ῥηϑὲν ὑπὸ τοῦ κυρίου διὰ τοῦ προφήτου λέγοντος “ἃ ἐξ Αἰγύπτου 
ἌΧ ᾿ ᾿ ag 3 , € , 5 » σ > , ae” ~ , 

16 ἐκάλεσα tov υἱὸν mov. Tore Hoewdns ἰδὼν, ott ἐνεπαίχϑη ὑπὸ τῶν μάγων, 
ἐθυμώϑη λίαν" καὶ ἀποστείλας ἀνεῖλε πάντας τοὺς παῖδας τοὺς ἐν Βηϑλεὲμ 
καὶ ἐν πᾶσι τοῖς ὁρίοις αὐτῆς, ἀπὸ διετοῦς καὶ κατωτέρω, κατὰ τὸν χρόνον, ὃν 
3 ’ A ~ , , 3 , 3 € A ¢ 4 ἐ ’ ~ 

17 ἠχρίβωσε παρὰ τῶν μάγων. Tore ἐπληρωϑὴ τὸ ῥηϑὲν ὑπὸ ‘Iegeuiov tov προ- 

, ij b ‘ D Ws ~ > , ~ ‘ ‘ 2 A 

18 φήτου λέγοντος “ φωνὴ ἕν Pana yxovody, ϑρῆνος καὶ κλαυϑμὸς καὶ ὀδυρμὸς 

, € \ , A , 4 ..» ‘ > A 7 H~ σ 
πολὺς" Puynd κλαίουσα τὰ τέκνα αὐτῆς " καὶ οὐκ ἤϑελξ παρακληϑῆναι, ote 

19 οὐκ εἰσί. Τελευτήσαντος δὲ τοῦ “Πρώδου, ἰδού, ἄγγελος κυρίου κατ ὄναρ 

~ A 

20 φαίνεται τῷ ᾿Ιωσὴφ ἐν Aiyuaty | λέγων " ἐγερϑεὶς παράλαβε τὸ παιδίον καὶ τὴν 
μητέρα αὐτοῦ, καὶ πορεύου εἰς γῆν ᾿Ισραήλ᾽ τεϑνήκασι γὰρ οἱ ζητοῦντες τὴν ψυ- 

21 χὴν τοῦ παιδίου.’ ὋὉ δὲ ἐγερϑεὶς παρέλαβε τὸ παιδίον καὶ τὴν μητέρα αὐτοῦ, 

- , , σ΄ ᾿ς 55. 

22 καὶ ἦλϑεν εἰς γῆν ᾿Ισραήλ. “Anovoug δέ, ὅτι ᾿Αρχέλαος βασιλεύει ἐπὶ τῆς 

Ὃς 9 , 3 q.. 2 , ~ A 
Ιουδαίας aves Howdov tov πατρὸς 
αὐτοῦ, ἐφοβήϑη ἐκεῖ ἀπελϑεῖν" χρη- Luxe II. 39, 40. 

4 ‘ >» ᾽ , > ἃ ¢ .2 μὰ σ A 4 ἐν 
ματισϑεὶς δὲ κατ ὄναρ ἀνεχώρησεν εἰς 39 Καὶ ὡς ἐτέλεσαν ἅπαντα τὰ κατὰ τὸν 
~ A 
23 τὰ μέρη τῆς Γαλιλαίας. Καὶ ἐλϑὼν νόμον κυρίου, ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς τὴν Γα- 


κατῴκησεν εἰς πόλιν λεγομένην 'Ναζα- λιλαίαν, εἰς τὴν πόλιν αὑτῶν Νιαζα- 
ρέτ- ὅπως πληρωϑῇ τὸ ῥηϑὲν διὰ τῶν 40 ρέτ. Τὺ δὲ παιδίον ηὔξανε καὶ ἐχρα- 
προφητῶν, ὅτι Ναζωραῖος κληϑήσε- ταιοῦτο πνεύματι, πληρούμενον σο- 
ro.” φίας καὶ χάρις ϑεοῦ ἦν ἐπὶ αὐτό. 


§ 12, At twelve years of age Jesus goes to the Passover.—Jerusalem. 


Loxe II, 41—52. 

2 > , ε ~ > ~ ἐν, > [2 ᾿ A ~ € ~ ~ ’ 

41 Kai ἐπορεύοντο οἱ γονεῖς αὐτοῦ xat ἔτος εἰς ᾿Ιερουσαλὴμ τῇ ἑορτῇ τοῦ πά- 
. \ @ ΡΨ. of + ed , > Ud 3 ~ ΨᾺΆ ἃ ld A 
42 σχα. “Kou ove ἐγένετο ἑτῶν δώδεκα, ἀναβάντων αὐτῶν εἰς “Ιεροσόλυμα κατὰ 

- - ‘ / se 
43 τὸ ἔϑος τῆς ἑορτῆς ' καὶ τελειωσάντων τὰς ἡμέρας, ἐν τῷ ὑποστρέφειν αὐτοὺς 
«ς 2 3 ~ € ~ > Cy 3 ‘ A > ” > \ Ase ; 3 
ὑπέμεινεν ᾿Ιησοῦς ὁ παῖς ἐν ερουσαλήμ᾽ καὶ οὐκ ἔγνω ᾿Ιωσὴφ καὶ ἡ μήτηρ αὖ- 
~ or ri 
44 τοῦ. Nopisartes δὲ αὐτὸν ἐν τῇ συνοδίᾳ εἶναι, ἦλϑον ἡμέρας ὁδὸν καὶ ἀνεζή- 
» ‘ ~ ~ ‘ 

45 tovy αὐτὸν ἐν τοῖς συγγενέσι καὶ ἐν τοῖς yrootoic. Καὶ μὴ εὑρόντες αὐτὸν 
» ἕ , + She \ ~ > , “ΜΠ ἃ + δα. , ~ 
46 ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἱερουσαλὴμ ζητοῦντες αὐτόν. Καὶ ἐγένετο we? ἡμέρας τρεῖς, 

τ ~ ~ ~ 4 
εὗρον αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ καϑεζόμενον ἐν μέσῳ τῶν διδασκάλων καὶ ἀκούοντα αὖ- 
- δ 1.9 - ? , 2 , \ , 3 , 3 ra Adapt Ἔν 
47 τῶν καὶ ἐπερωτῶντα αὐτούς. ᾿Εξίσταντο δὲ πάντες οἱ ἀκούοντες αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ 
~ , Wy oe , δον τὴν γὼ ἢ oN 3 , A 
48 τῇ συνέσει καὶ ταῖς ἀποχρίσεσιν. χὐτοῦ. Καὶ ἰδόντες αὐτὸν ἐξεπλάγησαν, καὶ 
» » σ ἢ 
πρὸς αὐτὸν ἡ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ εἶπε' τέχνον, τί ἐποίησας ἡμῖν οὕτως ; ἰδού, ὁ πα- 
, ΠΑ ll J , > coe! « pars 5 ‘ i 3 ? γ᾽, 3 ~ ? 
49 τήρ cov κἀγὼ ὀδυνώμενοι ἐζητοῦμεν os. Kou εἶπε πρὸς αὐτούς" τί ὁτι ἐζητεῖτέ 
3 A 4 3 - ~ , ~ F , A Ρ] A ? ; 
50 μὲ ; οὐκ ἤδειτε, OTL ἐν τοῖς τοῦ πατρὸς μου δεῖ εἶναί μὲ; Καὶ αὐτοὶ οὐ συνηκὰν 


"οὐδὸν 





*'15, Hoa, 11, 1. > 18. Jer. 31, 15. Comp. Jer. 40, 1. 
¢ 23. Heb. Is, 11, 1. Comp. Is. 53, 2. Zech. 6, 12. Rev. 5, 5. 


EVENTS CONNECTED WITH 


[Parr I. 





aaa 


LUKE It. 
4 ~ a ~ ~ 
51 τὸ ῥῆμα, ὃ ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς. Καὶ κατέβη μετ αὐτῶν καὶ ἦλϑεν εἰς Ναζαρέε, 


‘ -΄ ~ 
καὶ ἦν ὑποτασσόμενος αὐτοῖς. 


Καὶ ἡ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ. διοεήρει" πάντα τὰ ῥήματα 


52 ταῦτα ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὑτῆς. Καὶ ᾿Ἰησοῦς προέκοπτε σοφίᾳ καὶ ἡλικίᾳ καὶ χάριτι 


παρὰ ϑεῷ καὶ ἀνθρώποις. 


§ 13.—The Genealogies. 


Marth. 1. 1—17. 
1. Biprog γενέσεως ᾿Ιησοῦ “Χριστοῦ, 
υἱοῦ Δαυΐδ, υἱοῦ “ABoaau. 


Luxe ΠῚ. 23—38, inverted. 
38 Tov ϑεοῦ, τοῦ “Adc, τοῦ 279, τοῦ 
37 Ἐνώς, ! τοῦ Καϊνάν, τοῦ Μαλελεήλ, 
τοῦ ᾿Ιαρέδ, τοῦ Ενώχ, τοῦ Μαϑουσά- 


86 λα,! τοῦ Adusy, τοῦ Νῶε, τοῦ Σήμ, τοῦ ᾿Αρφαξάδ, τοῦ Kai- 
35 γάν,! τοῦ Sada, τοῦ ᾿Ἐβέρ, τοῦ Φαλέκ, τοῦ “Ῥαγαῦ, τοῦ Σε- 


2 ᾿Αβραὰμ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Ισαάκ" ᾿Ισαὰκ 
δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Ιακώβ' ᾿Ιακὼβ δὲ 
ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Ιούδαν καὶ τοὺς ἀδελ- 

8 φοὺς αὐτοῦ. ᾿Ιοὔδας δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν 

. Φαρὲς καὶ τὸν Ζαρὰ ἐκ τῆς Θάμαρ" 
Φαρὲς δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν Ἐσρώμ᾽ Ἐσ- 

4 ρὼμ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿ράμ' “Agap δὲ 
ἐγέννησε tov ᾿Αμιναδάβ" ᾿Αμιναδὰβ 
δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν Ναασσών᾽" Ναασσὼν 

5 δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν Σαλμών- “Σαλμὼν δὲ 
ἐγέννησε τὸν Bool ἐκ τῆς “Ραχάβ᾽' 
Boot δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Ωβὴδ ἐκ τῆς 

6 ‘Povd* ᾿Ωβὴδ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿]εσσαί" 
᾿Ιεσσαὶ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν Ζ4αυϊδ τὸν βα- 
σιλέα " Δαυΐδ δὲ ὁ βασιλεὺς ἐγέννησε 
τὸν Σολομῶνα ἐκ τῆς τοῦ Οὐρίου. 

T Σολομὼν δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Ῥοβοάμ" 
“Ῥοβοὰμ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿4βιά- ᾿Αβιὰ 

8 δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿4σά"᾽ “δὰ δὲ ἐγέννη- 

oe τὸν Ἰωσαφάτ᾽ ᾿Ιωσαφὰτ δὲ ἐγέννη- 
σε τὸν ᾿Ιωράμ' ᾿Ιωρὰμ δὲ ἐγέννησε 

9 τὸν ᾿Οζίαν" ᾿Οζίας δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν 
᾿Ιωάϑαμ᾽ ᾿Ιωάϑαμ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν 
"Ayal “Ayal δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Εζεκί- 

10 αν" Ἐζεκίας δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν Μανασ- 
σῆ᾽ Μανασσῆς δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν Aposy* 

11 Apo δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Ιωσίαν" ‘Too 
σίας δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Ϊεχονίαν "καὶ 


34 ρούχ,! τοῦ Ναχώρ, τοῦ Θάρα, τοῦ 
᾿Αβραάμ, τοῦ ᾿Ισαάκ, τοῦ ᾿Ιακώβ, 


33 σοῦ ᾿Ιούδα, τοῦ Φαρές, τοῦ ᾿Εσρώμ, 
τοῦ “Agcy, tov ᾿ΑΔμιναδάβ, 


32 τοῦ Naacowr, τοῦ Σαλμών, τοῦ Boot, 
τοῦ ᾿Ωβήδ, τοῦ ᾿]εσσαΐί, 


31 τοῦ Δαυΐδ, τοῦ Ναϑάν, τοῦ αττα- 
ϑά, τοῦ Μαϊγάν, τοῦ Medea, 


80 τοῦ ᾿Ελιακείμ, τοῦ ᾿Ιωνάν, τοῦ ᾽Ιω- 
, ~ ? , ~ , 
ong, τοῦ ‘Lovda, τοῦ Συμεὼν, 


29 τοῦ Aevi, τοῦ Ματϑάτ, τοῦ ἸΙωρείμ, 
τοῦ Ἐλιέζερ, τοῦ ᾿Ιωσή, 


§ 13.] OUR LORD'S BIRTH AND CHILDHOOD. 9 





MATTH. 1. LUKE Ill. 
τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τῆς μετοικξ- 28 τοῦ Ἤρ, tov ᾿Ελμωδάμ, tov Κωσάμ, 
12 σίας Βαβυλῶνος. Μετὰ δὲ τὴν με. τοῦ ᾿“4δδί, τοῦ Μελχί, 
τοικεσίαν Βαβυλῶνος Ieyoving ἐγέν- 
γῆσε τὸν Σαλαϑιήλ᾽ ΖΣαλαϑιὴλ δὲ 27 τοῦ Νηρί, τοῦ Σαλαϑιήλ, τοῦ Ζορο- 
13 ἐγέννησε τὸν Ζοροβάβελ" Ζοροβάβελ. βαβελ, τοῦ ἱῬησά, τοῦ ᾿Ιωαννᾶ, 
δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿Αβιούδ- ᾿Αβιοὺδ δὲ 26 cov’ Iovda, τοῦ ᾿Ιωσήφ, τοῦ Σεμεΐ, τοῦ 
ἐγέγνησε τὸν ᾿Ελιακείμ" ᾿Ελιακεὶμ δὲἃ Ματταϑίου, τοῦ Μαάϑ, 
14 ἐγέννησε τὸν ᾿ζώρ᾽" "Aloe δὲ ἐγέννη- 
σε τὸν Σαδώκ᾽ Σαδὼκ δὲ ἐγέννησε 25 τοῦ Ναγγαί, τοῦ Ἔσλί, τοῦ Ναούμ, 
τὸν ᾿“Ιχείμ᾽ ᾿Αχεὶμ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν τοῦ “Anode, τοῦ Ματταϑίου, 
15 Ἐλιούδ- ᾿Ελιοὺδ δὲ ἐγέννησε tov’ Ελε- 
alu’ Ἐλεάζαρ δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν Ματ- 24 τοῦ ᾿Ιωσήφ, τοῦ ᾿Ιαννά, τοῦ Μελχί, 
ϑάν: Ματϑὰν δὲ ἐγέννησε τὸν ’Iu- τοῦ Aevi, τοῦ Ματϑάτ, 
16 x0iB ᾿Ιαβὼβ δὲ ἐγέννησε. τὸν ᾿Ιωσὴφ 
τὸν ἄνδρα Μαρίας, ἐξ ἧς ἐγεννήϑη 23 Καὶ αὐτὸς ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς---ὦν, ὡς ἔνομι 
1 ᾿Ἰησοῦς ὃ λεγόμενος «Χριστός. Πᾶ- Cero, υἱὸς ᾿Ιωσήφ, τοῦ ᾿Ηλί, 
σαι οὖν αἱ γενεαὶ ἀπὸ ᾿Α΄βραὰμ ἕως 
Δαυΐδ γενεαὶ δεκατέσσαρες " καὶ ἀπὸ Δαυὶδ ἕως τῆς μετοικεσίας Βαβυλῶνος 
γενεαὶ δεκατέσσαρες " καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς μετοικεσίας Βαβυλῶνος ἕως τοῦ Χριστοῦ 
γενεαὶ δεκατέσσαρες. 


PART II. 





ANNOUNCEMENT AND INTRODUCTION OF OUR LORD’S PUBLIC MINISTRY. 


Time: About one year. 


§ 14. The Ministry of John the Baptist The Desert. The Jordan. 


Luxe III. 1—13S. 


τὰ E, ἔτει δὲ πεντεκαιδεκάτῳ τῆς ἡγεμονίας Τιβερίου Καίσαρος, ἡγεμοψεύοντος 
Ποντίου Πιλάτου τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας καὶ τετραρχοῦντος τῆς Γαλιλαίας Ἡρώδου, Φι- 
λίππου δὲ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ τετραρχοῦντος τῆς ᾿Ιτουραίας καὶ Τραχωνίτιδος χώ- 
2 pus καὶ “Τυσανίου τῆς ᾿4βιληνῆς τετραρχοῦντος, ' ἐπὶ ἀρχιερέως "Avra καὶ Καϊά- 


1 


Marra. III. 1—12. 


A ~ 
Ἐν δὲ ταῖς ἡμέραις 
ἐχείναις παραγίνεται 


᾿Ιωάννης 6 βαπτιστής, 
κηρύσσων ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 


2 τῆς Ἰουδαίας! καὶ λέγων" 


μετανοεῖτε᾽ ἤγγικε γὰρ 
ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν. 


3 Οὗτος γάρ ἐστιν 6 ῥηϑεὶς 


ὑπὸ Ἡσαΐου τοῦ προφή- 
του λέγοντος ἢ φωνὴ 
βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ᾽ 
ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν κυ- 
ρίου" εὐθείας ποιεῖτε τὰς 


4 τρίβους αὐτοῦ. “Αὐτὸς 


δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιωάννης εἶχε τὸ ἔν- 
δυμα αὑτοῦ ἀπὸ τριχῶν 
καμήλου καὶ ζώνην δερ- 
ματίνην περὶ τὴν ὀσφὺν 
αὑτοῦ" ἡ δὲ τροφὴ αὐ- 


1 


4 


2 


3 


6 


Marx I. 1—8. 

᾿Αρχὴ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου 
᾿Ιησοῦ Χριστοῦ, υἱοῦ τοῦ 
ϑεοῦ---ἐγένετο! ᾿Ιωάννης 
βαπτίζων ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ καὶ 
κηρύσσων βάπτισμα με- 
τανοίας εἷς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρ- 
τιῶν---ὡς γέγραπται ἐν 
τοῖς προφήταις “ ἰδού, 
ἐγὼ ἀποστέλλω τὸν ἄγ- 
γελόν μου πρὸ προςώ- 
που σου, ὃς κατασκευάσει 
τὴν ὁδόν σου [ἔμπροσϑέν 
cov]* φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν 
τῇ ἐρήμῳ " ἑτοιμάσατε 
τὴν ὁδὸν κυρίου" εὐϑεί- 
ac ποιεῖτε τὰς τρίβους 
αὐτοῦ.-- Hy δὲ ᾿Ιωάννης 
ἐνδεδυμένος τρίχας καμή- 


3 


4 


5 


> ~ ὧν wel. 
Pa éyeveto ῥῆμα Deov ἐπι 
> 4 ‘ , 
Ἰωάννην tov Ζαχαρίου 
«" > ~ me me 8 
υἱὸν ἕν τῇ ἐρήμῳ. Kat 
3 > ~ ‘ , 
nA Dev εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν περί- 
3 , 
χῶρον Ιορδάνου 
κηρύσσων βάπτισμα με- 
τανοίας εἰς ἄφεσιν ἅμαρ- 
τιῶν, ' ὡς γέγραπται ἐν 
βίβλῳ λόγων ἩΗσαΐου τοῦ 
προφήτου λέγοντος ὃ φω- 
vy βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρή- 
μῳ᾿ ἑτοιμάσατε τὴν ὁδὸν 
κυρίου, εὐθείας ποιεῖτε 
A , > ~ ~ 
τὰς τρίβους αὐτοῦ. Πᾶ- 
a , 
oa φάραγξ πληρωϑήσε- 
ται, καὶ πᾶν ὅρος καὶ 
βουνὸς ταπεινωϑήσεται " 
»» ‘ ‘ > 
καὶ ἔσται TH σκολιὰ εἰς 
~ ‘ ~ 
εὐθεῖαν καὶ αἱ τραχεῖαι 


τοῦ 


Lov καὶ ζώνην δερματί- 6 εἰς ὁδοὺς λείας " καὶ ὄψε- 


——— 





. 2. Mal. 3, 1. Is. 40, 3. 


> 8 οἷο, Is. 40, 3 sq. 


δ 14.] 


ANNOUNCEMENT OF OUR 


11 


LORDS MINISTRY. 





MATTH. IIL. MARK I. 
ἂν F > , 4 , 
τοῦ ἣν ἀκρίδες καὶ μέλι 
EA 
5 ἄγριον. Tore ἐξεπορεύ- 
8το πρὸς αὐτὸν “]εροσό- 
λυμα καὶ πᾶσα ἡ Ιουδαία 
καὶ πᾶσα ἡ περίχωρος 
6 τοῦ ᾿Ιορδάνου, ' καὶ ἐβα- 
πτίζοντο ἐν τῷ ᾿]Ιορδάνῃ 
τον > ~ 9 , ΕΞ 
ὑπ αὐτοῦ, ἐξομολογου- τῶ»ν.--- 
μενοι τὰς ἁμαρτίας αὗ- 
~ 4 ~ 
7 τῶν. “dav δὲ πολλοὺς τῶν Dagwai- 
Α , > , 2 
ων καὶ «Σαδδουκαίων ἐρχομένους ἐπὶ 
τὸ βάπτισμα αὑτοῦ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " γεν- 
ψήματα ἐχιδνῶν, τίς ὑπέδειξεν ὑμῖν φυ- 
8 γεῖν ἀπὸ τῆς μελλούσης ὀργῆς ; Ποιή- 
μ᾿ A Ε - 
Gute ovr καρπὸν ἄξιον τῆς μετανοίας, 
Ι 4 A δοξ λέ 7 > ¢ are , 
9! xa μὴ δοξητὲ λέγειν ὃν δαυτοῖς  πατἕ- 
ww \ "A , ἃ 2 , ᾿ A « - 
oa ἔχομεν tov “΄βρααμ᾽ λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, 
σ , € A 3 ~ , ’ 
ὅτι δύναται ὁ ϑεὸς ἐκ τῶν λίϑων τού- 
ει ὦ ’ ~ > , ” 
10 τῶν ἐγεῖραι τέκνα τῷ Αβρααμ. “Hdy 
4 ..¢€ See ‘ 4 ΄ ~ 
δὲ καὶ ἡ ἀξίνη πρὸς τὴν ῥίζαν τῶν δέν- 
~ wih ¥ 
δρων χεῖται" πᾶν οὖν δένδρον μὴ ποι- 
- A A 
οὔν καρπὸν καλὸν ἐκκόπτεται καὶ εἰς 
πῦρ βάλλεται. 


4 « 
γήν περὶ τὴν ὀσφὺν αὖ- 
~ A b] , > ,ὔ 
τοῦ καὶ ἐσϑίων ἀκρίδας 


10 εἰς πῦρ βάλλεται. 


LUKE Ill. 

' - ‘ A , 
ToL πᾶσα σὰρξ TO σωτῆ: 
ριον τοῦ ϑεοῦ. 


A ‘ 
ὅ καὶ μέλι ἄγριον. --- Καὶ 
Sf , ‘ ὯΝ § ~ 8Δ 2 id 
ἐξεπορεύετο πρὸς αὑτὸν πᾶσα ἡ ]ουδαία 
A ι ἐπὶ BS ~ A > , 
χώρα καὶ ot Legocodvpita, καὶ ἐβαπτί- 
ζοντο πάντες ἐν τῷ ᾿Ιορδάνῃ ποταμῷ va 
- > 
αὐτοῦ, ἐξομολογούμενοι τὰς ἁμαρτίας av- 


LUKE III. 


7 Ἔλεγεν οὖν τοῖς ἐκπορευομένοις ὄχλοις 


βαπτισϑῆναι vt αὐτοῦ" γεννήματα 
> ~ ee κ , Φ w ~ 7 4 
ἐχιδνῶν, τίς ὑπέδειξεν ὑμῖν φυγεῖν ἀπὸ 


8 τῆς μελλούσης ὀργῆς ; Ποιήσατε οὖν 


‘ 3 - 4A 
καρποὺς ἀξίους τῆς μετανοίας, καὶ 
A + 7 > « ~ 3 
μὴ ἄρξησϑε λέγειν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς" πατέρα 
” e.g ΤΙ , cy > we 
ἔχομεν τὸν ABouu’ λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, 
[χὰ , « A 3 ~ , , 
ort δυναται ὃ Seog ἐκ τῶν λίϑων τού- 


9 τῶν ἐγεῖραι τέκνα τῷ ABoudu. “Hdy 


. 4 ‘ é = 

δὲ καὶ ἡ ἀξίνη πρὸς τὴν ῥίζαν τῶν 
, ~ ᾿Ξ “ + , A 

δένδρων κεῖται" πᾶν οὖν δένδρον py 

~ A 

ποιοῦν καρπὸν καλὸν ἐχκόπτεται καὶ 
ον 

Καὶ ἐπηρώτων αὖ- 
" crx , " ἜΣ Ἢ 4 

τὸν οἱ ὄχλοι λέγοντες" τί οὐν ποιήσο- 


3 Α A ~ ~ 
11 μὲν; “Aroxgiderg δὲ λέγει αὐτοῖς" ὁ ἔχων δύο χιτῶνας μεταδό- 
ἂν 4 ΜῊΝ 
12 τῷ τῷ μὴ ἔχοντι, καὶ ὁ ἔχων βρώματα ὁμοίως ποιείτω. Ἦλϑον 
‘ 4 ~ ~ Ἢ 4 ᾿ \ > Sa ͵ 
δὲ καὶ τελῶναι βαπτισϑῆναι, καὶ εἶπον πρὸς αὐτόν" διδάσκαλε, 


13 τί ποιήσομεν ; Ὃ δὲ εἶπε πρὸς αὐτούς" μηδὲν πλέον παρὰ TO 


14 διατεταγμένον ὑμῖν πράσσετε. ᾿Επηρώτων δὲ αὐτὸν καὶ στρα- 


τευόμενοι λέγοντες " καὶ ἡμεῖς τί ποιήσομεν ; καὶ εἶπε πρὸς αὖ- 
4 Α. ~ ~ 
τούς" μηδένα διασείσητε μηδὲ συκοφαντήσητε, καὶ ἀρκεῖσϑε τοῖς 
~ ~ Ἁ - - 
15 ὀψωνίοις ὑμῶν. Προςδοκῶντος δὲ τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ διαλογιζο- 


- « “« A ~ 
μένων πάντων ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὑτῶν περὶ tov ᾿Ιωάννου, μήπο- 


MATTH. 1Π1.. 


MARK I. 


τε αὐτὸς εἴη 6 Χριστός, 


7 Καὶ ἐχήρυσσε λέγων" 16} ἀπεχρίνατο 6 ᾿Ιωάν- 


1 


"πὸ 


Ἐγὼ μὲν βαπτίζω ὑμᾶς 8 ---ἐγὼ μὲν 


3 σ > , 
ἐν υδατι εἰς μετανοιαν, 


Θ΄... δὰ ἌΝ ww 
7 υμᾶς ἐν υδατι "---ερχεξται 


2? 7 , δι. 
ἐβάπτισα νῆς umaoct λέγων" eyo 


Ἶ 
σ ~ 
μὲν ὕδατι βαπτίζω ὑμᾶς" 


12 καὶ πυρί. 


« § 32 , > , 
ὁ δὲ ὀπίσω μου ἐρχῆμε- 
3 
γος ἰσχυρότερός μου ἐσ- 
, t 3 2 A) χε A 
τίν, OV οὐχ εἰμι ἱκανὸς 
‘ e , , 
τὰ ὑποδήματα βαστα- 
σαι" αὐτὸς ὑμᾶς βαπτί- 
σει ἐν πνεύματι ἁγίῳ 
Fu % , 
Ov τὸ πτῦον 


€ «2 ‘ , > , 
ὁ ἰσχυρότερός μου Ont- 
t ἃ ἃ 
σω μου, OV οὐκ εἰμι ἷχα- 
A , ~ A 
vos xvpag λῖσαι τὸν 
~ , 
ἱμάντα τῶν ὑποδημάτων 


~ \ Ἁ 
8 αὐτοῦ --αὐτὸς δὲ βα- 


~ , 
πτίσει ὑμᾶς ἐν πνεύματι 
ἁγίῳ. 


ἔρχεται δὲ ὁ ἰσχυρότερός 
μου, οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἱκανὸς 
λῦσαι τὸν ἱμάντα τῶν 
ὑποδημάτων αὐτοῦ" αὖ- 
τὸς ὑμᾶς βαπτίσει ἐν 
πνεύματι ἁγίῳ καὶ πυρί. 


17 Ov τὸ πτύον ἐν τῇ χειρὶ 


12 


ANNOUNCEMENT 


AND INTRODUCTION 


OF [Parr II. 





13 


14 


15 


16 


17 


— 


MATTH. III. 


3 ~ ‘ > ~ A ~ _\ 

ἐν τῇ χειρὶ αὑτοῦ, καὶ διακαϑαριεῖ τὴν 
σ ~ ~ 

ἅλωνα αὑτοῦ, καὶ συνάξει τὸν σῖτον 
€ ~ > ‘ > , 4 . ee 4 

αὑτοῦ sig τὴν ἀποϑήκην, τὸ δὲ ἄχυ- 

A 
ρον κατακαύσει πυρὶ ἀσβέστῳ. 


LUKE ΠῚ. 


αὐτοῦ, καὶ διακαϑαριεῖ τὴν ἅλωνα 
αὑτοῦ, καὶ συνάξει τὸν σῖτον εἰς τὴν 
ἀποθήκην αὑτοῦ, τὸ δὲ ἄχυρον κα- 
τακαύσει πυρὶ ἀσβέστῳ. , 


18 Πολλὰ μὲν οὖν καὶ ἕτερα παρακα- 
᾿ λῶν εὐηγγελίζετο τὸν λαόν. 


§ 15. The Baptism of 716β08.--- ΤἼ.6 Jordan. 


Marrs. III. 13—17. 


Τότε παραγίνεται 6 9 Kai ἐγένετο ἐν ἐκείναις 21 


᾿Ιησοῦς ἀπὸτῆς Γαλιλαί- 
φι' 8 A 2 > , ‘ 

ας ἕπιτον Ιορδάνην πρὸς 
τὸν Ιωάννην, τοῦ βαπτι- 
σϑῆναι ὑπ αὐτοῦ. ‘O 
δὲ ᾿Ιωάννης διεκώλυεν 
a 8 , 3." ’ 
avtov λέγων" ἐγὼ χρεί- 


Marx I. 9—11. 


ταῖς ἡμέραις, ἦλϑεν ᾽]η- 
σοῦς ἀπὸ Ναζαρὲτ τῆς 
Γαλιλαίας, καὶ ἔβα- 
πτίσϑη ὑπὸ ᾿Ιωάννου εἰς 
τὸν ᾿Ιορδάνην. 


Loxe III. 21—23. 

Ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν τῷ βα- 
πτισϑῆναι ἅπαντα τὸν 
λαὸν καὶ ᾿Ιησοῦ βαπτι- 
σϑέντος 


Υ͂ ¢ A ~ ~ ‘ i. δὰ , > 
av ἔχω ὑπὸ σοῦ βαπτισϑῆναι, καὶ ov ἔρχῃ πρός μὲ; “Amoxgl- 
4 A «3 ~ 4 > , 4 » 7 A 
ϑεὶς δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπε πρὸς αὐτόν" ἄφες ἄρτι" οὕτω γὰρ 
πρέπον ἐστὶν ἡμῖν πληρῶσαι πᾶσαν δικαιοσύνην. τότε ἀφίη- 


σιν αὐτόν. Καὶ βαπτι- 


MARK I. 


σϑεὶς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἀνέβη 10 Καὶ εὐθέως ἀναβαίνων 


> ‘ > ‘ ~ @ ‘ 
evdvg ἀπὸ τοῦ ὑδατος 
- 3 , > ’ 

καὶ ἰδοῦ, ἀνεῴχϑησαν 
~ 4A 
αὐτῷ οἱ οὐρανοί, καὶ 
»} A ~ ~ ~ 
εἶδε TO πνεῦμα TOV ϑεου 


" ~ 4 Se 9's ᾿. = 
καταβαῖνον ace. megt- 11 ἐπ᾿ αὕτον. 


A > 
στεράν, καὶ ἐρχόμενον ἐπὶ 
> , δι ν , 
αὐτόν. Ket ἰδου, φω- 
γὴ ἐκ τῶν οὐρανῶν λέ- 
t 
γουσα" οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ 
> 
υἱός μου ὁ ἀγαπητός, ἐν 
tT 152 αἡ ἢ 
ᾧ εὐδόκησα. 


A ~ σ 
ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕδατος εἶδε 
σχιζομένους τοὺς οὐρα- 
A 4 ~ 
VOUS καὶ TO πνεῦμα ὡςεὶ 
περιστερὰν καταβαῖνον 
Καὶ. φωνὴ 
τῶν οὐὖρα- 
δ A « c? ε 
νῶν σὺ εἶ ὁ υἱός μου ὃ 
> , > . Sev 
ἄγαπητος, ἕν ᾧ evdoxn- 
σα. 


Tf > 
ἐγένδτο ἐκ 


καὶ προςζευχομένου ἀνε- 
φχϑῆναι τὸν οὐρανόν, 


‘ ~ - 
22 Ἰχαὶ καταβῆναι τὸ πνεῦ- 


vA ~ 
μα τὸ ἅγιον σωματικῷ 
εἴδει, ὡςεὶ περιστεράν, 
> > Le! A ‘ > 
ἐπὶ αὐτὸν καὶ φωνὴν ἐξ 
οὐρανοῦ γενέσϑαι λέγου- 
σαν" σὺ εἶ ὃ υἱός μου ὃ 
? , > ‘ ° ld 
ἀγαπητὸς, ἕν cor ηυδὸ- 
κησα. 
Α Ύ 
Καὶ αὐτὸς ἣν 6° In- 


σοῦς ὡςεὶ ἐτῶν τριάκοντα ἀρχόμενος--- 


§ 16. The Temptation Desert of Judea. 


Marra. IV. 1—11. 


Τότε ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς ἀνή- 12 


χϑη εἰς τὴν ἔρημον ὑπὸ 
τοῦ πρτεύματος, πειρα- 
σϑῆναι ὑπὸ τοῦ διαβό- 


Mark I. 12, 13. 


Kai εὐϑὺς τὸ πνεῦμα 1 
ὅδ | > , > ‘ 
avtov ἐχβάλλει εἰς τὴν 
13 ἔρημον. 


Καὶ ἦν [ἐκεῖ] 
ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ ἡμέρας τεσ- 


Luxe IV. 1—13. 

᾿Ιησοῦς δὲ πνεύματος 
ἁγίου πλήρης ὑπέστρε- 
ψεν ἀπὸ τοῦ ᾿Ιορδάνου, 
καὶ ἤγετο ἐν τῷ πνεύ- 





§§ 15, 16.] OUR LORD’S PUBLIC MINISTRY. 13 
MATTH. IV. MARK 1. LUKE IV. 
2 lov. Καὶ νηστεύσας ἡμέ. σαράκοντα, mepatous- ματι εἰς τὴν ἔρημον 


Α 
ρας τεσσαράκοντα καὶ 
νύχτας τεσσαράκοντα, 
σ 
ὕστερον ἐπείνασε. 


κόνουν αὐτῷ. 


MATTH. 
3 Καὶ προςελϑὼν 
᾿. 5 «A ~ ~ 
Cov εἶπεν" εἰ υἱὸς εἶ tov ϑεοῦ, 
ΜΡ Ὁ ε , φ A , 
εἰπὲ, Wwe οἱ λίϑοι οὗτοι ἄρτοι γέ- 
4 
4 γωνται. Ὁ δὲ ἀποκριϑεὶς εἶπε" γέ- 
“ἃ Ἵ Φ' DM , , 
γραπται ἃ οὐκ ἐπὶ ἄρτῳ μόνῳ ζήσε- 
€ Fs 3 Fa % ae, ad 
ται ὃ ἄνϑρωπος, ἀλλ ἐπι MAYTL ῥημα- 
τι ἐκπορευομένῳ διὰ στόματος ϑεοῦ. 
5 Τότε παραλαμβάνει αὐτὸν ὁ διάβολος 
5 Α 
εἰς τὴν ἁγίαν πόλιν, καὶ ἵστησιν αὐτὸν 


IV. 


~ , 
αὐτῷ ὁ πειρά- 


“page ΑΜ, \ ’ “-ε ΜΕΤ ‘ , 

6 ἐπὶ τὸ πτερύγιον τοῦ ἱεροῦ, | καὶ λέγει 
> ~ any’ “ ~ ~ , 
αὐτῷ εἰ υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ ϑεοῦ, βαλε σεαυ- 
a ~ 
τὸν κάτω" γέγραπται γάρ" ὅτι τοῖς 
ἀγγέλοις αὑτοῦ ἐντελεῖται περὶ σοῦ, 
Α - ~ 
καὶ ἐπὶ χειρῶν ἀροῦσί σε, μήποτε προς- 
7 χόψῃς πρὸς λίϑον τὸν πόδα σου. Ἔφη 
αὐτῷ ὁ “Incovs' πάλιν γέγραπται" 
4 

οὐκ ἐκπειράσεις κύριον TOY ϑεόν σου. 


8 Πάλιν παραλαμβάνει αὐτὸν ὁ διάβο- 
aw A 4 

hos εἰς ὅρος ὑψηλὸν λίαν, καὶ δείκνυ- 

σιν αὐτῷ πάσας τὰς βασιλείας τοῦ 

, ‘ ‘ , > ~ ! ‘ 

9 χύσμου καὶ τὴν δόξαν αὑτῶν, ' καὶ 

λέγει αὐτῷ " ταῦτα πάντα σοι δώσω, 


10 ἐὰν πεσὼν προςκυνήσῃς μοι. Τότε 
λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς " ὕπαγε ὀπίσω 
_ pov, σατανᾶ" γέγραπται γάρ" χύ- 
ριον τὸν ϑεόν σου προςχυνήσεις καὶ 
11 αὐτῷ μόνῳ λατρεύσεις. Τότε ἀφίη- 
σιν αὐτὸν ὁ διάβολος " καὶ ἰδού, ἄγγε- 
λοι προςῆλϑον καὶ διηκόνουν αὐτῷ. 


Α ~ ~ 

γος ὑπὸ τοῦ σατανᾶ, 
49 We ~ , 
καὶ ἣν μετὰ τῶν ϑηριί- 
4 Φ + F 

ὧν, καὶ οἱ ἄγγελοι διη- 


2! ἡμέρας τεσσαράκοντα 
πειραζόμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ 
4 
διαβόλου. καὶ οὐκ ἔφα- 
ot > ~ «ε , 
γεν οὐδὲν ἕν ταῖς ἡμέ- 
ραις ἐκείναις, καὶ ovr- 
~ ~ σ 
τελεσϑεισῶν αὐτῶν ὕστερον ἐπείνασε. 
3 Καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὁ διάβολος " εἰ υἱὸς 
εἶ τοῦ ϑεοῦ, εἰπὲ τῷ λίϑῳ τούτῳ, ἵνα 
4 ἘΠ 
4 γένηται ἄρτος. Καὶ ἀπεχρίϑη ᾽1η- 
~ 4 
σοῦς πρὸς αὐτὸν λέγων" γέγραπται "ἃ 
σ 2 a> , , ¢ + 
OTL οὐκ ἐπὶ ἄρτῳ μόνῳ ζήσεται ὁ ἄν- 
\ ‘ - 
ϑρωπος, ἀλλ ἐπὶ παντὶ ῥήματι ϑεοῦ. 
9 —Kui ἤγαγεν αὐτὸν εἰς “]ερουσαλήμ, 
A ‘ 
καὶ ἔστησεν αὐτὸν ἐπὶ τὸ πτερύγιον 
~ ~ 4 > ~ 
TOV ἱεροῦ καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ᾽ εἰ υἱὸς εἶ 
τοῦ ϑεοῦ, βάλε σεαυτὸν ἐντεῦϑεν χκά- 
σ » 
10 τω ' γέγραπται γάρ ὅτι τοῖς ἀγ- 
~ ~ 4 - ~ 
γέλοις αὐτοῦ ἐντελεῖται περὶ σοῦ, TOV 
re ! , ¢ bes ~ 
11 διαφυλάξαι σε, | καὶ ort ἐπὶ χειρῶν 
~ ‘ 
ἀροῦσί σε, μήποτε προφκόψῃς πρὸς 
12 λίϑον τὸν πόδα cov. Καὶ ἀποχρι- 
᾿ - oti ae € OF “a .e” ® a” 
Seg εἶπεν αὑτῷ ὁ Inoovg’ oz εἰρη- 
ται οὐκ ἐχπειράσεις κύριον τὸν 9ε- 
, ΄ινφ A > Is « , 
5 ov σου.---Καὶ ἀναγαγὼν αὐτὸν ὁ διά- 
βολος εἰς ὄρος ὑψηλὸν ἔδειξεν αὐτῷ 
πάσας τὰς βασιλείας τῆς οἰχουμένης 
> ~ , ‘ 4 > ~ 
6 ἐν στιγμῇ yoovov. Και εἴπεν αὑτῷ 
A , A 
ὁ διάβολος" σοὶ δώσω τὴν ἐξουσίαν 
Wsy ~ 
ταύτην ἅπασαν καὶ τὴν δόξαν αὐτῶν" 
σ > Α Φυσίιίον , 
ὅτι Euor παραδέδοται, καὶ ᾧ ἐὰν ϑὲ- 
, SLL A .᾽ 3A 
7 dow, δίδωμι αὐτὴν" σὺ οὖν sav προς- 
κυνήσῃς ἐνώπιόν μου, ἔσται σου πᾶ- 
4 ~ 
8 σα. Kat ἀποχριϑεὶς αὐτῷ εἶπεν ὃ 
- [χὰ - 
᾽Ιησοῦς " [ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου, σατανᾶ "] 
0 4 5 
γέγραπται" προςφκυγήσεις κύριον τὸν 
r Ae 
ϑεόν σου, καὶ αὐτῷ μόνῳ λατρεύσεις. 
et ’ A 
13 - -Καὶ συντελέσας marta πειρασμὸν 
ς , > , ὅν. i cc oe “« A 
ὁ διάβολος ἀπέστη ἀπ avtov ἄχρι 
καιροῦ. 





5. 4 Deut. 8, 3. 
© 7 etc. Deut. 6, 16. 


> 9 δίς, Ps. 91, 11. 
4 10 εἰς. Deut. 6, 13. 


14 ANNOUNCEMENT AND INTRODUCTION OF [Parr II. 





§ 17. Preface to John’s Gospel. 
é Joun I. 1—18. 
~ F A tT ; 
12 Ἔν ἀρχῇ ἦν ὁ λόγος, καὶ 6 λόγος ἦν πρὸς τὸν ϑεόν, καὶ ϑεὸς ἦν ὁ λόγος. Οὗτος 
- > > ~ 4 A , , > > ἂν ιὧ ee Α A ? ee Pe > 
3 ἣν ἐν ἀρχῇ πρὸς τὸν Geov. Ilavta di αὑτοῦ ἐγένετο, καὶ χωρις αὑτοῦ ἐγένετο οὐ- 
ᾷ « ,ὕ 3 ᾧ, ἐἦν Δ, ἫΝ + 2 ae A ᾿ς = ~ > " 4 
45 8s ἕν, ὁ γέγονεν. Εν αὑτῷ Coon HY, καὶ ἢ ζωὴ ἥν τὸ φῶς τῶν ἀνϑρώπων᾽" καὶ 
‘ ~ aks = , , a es. ἃ > > , ” 
6 τὸ φῶς EY τῇ σχοτίᾳ φαίνει, καὶ ἣ σχοτία αὑτὸ οὐ κατέλαβεν. Ἐγένετο ἃ»- 
> , A ~ » 5 “ 39 ’; τ - 3 
7 ϑρωπος ἀπεσταλμένος παρὰ ϑεοῦ, ovoue αὐτῷ ᾿Ιωάννης" οὗτος ἦλϑεν εἰς μαρ- 
8 τυρίαν, ἵνα μαρτυρήσῃ περὶ τοῦ φωτός, ἵνα πάντες πιστεύσωσι δι᾿ αὐτοῦ. Οὐκ 
- > ~ A ~ > 9.9 ’ A ~ ’ εἰ A ~ ‘ > 
9 ἢν ἐχεῖνος TO φῶς, ἀλλ wa μαρτυρήσῃ περί τοῦ φωτός. “Hy τὸ φῶς τὸ ἀλη- 
, a , + 5 ᾽; > A , > ~ ’ 
10 ϑινὸν, ὁ φωτίζει παντὰ ἄνϑρωπον, ἐρχόμενον Eig τὸν χόσμον. Εν τῳ κοσμῷ 
ok ee , > > ~ > , Πὰν Ld 574 > »” > , » 
11 ἥν, καὶ ὁ κόσμος δι αὑτοῦ ἐγένδτο, καὶ ὁ κόσμος αὑτὸν οὐκ ἔγνω. Eig τὰ Wie 
νι > σ ~ 
12 71.98, καὶ οἱ ἴδιοι αὐτὸν ov παρέλαβον. Ὅσοι δὲ ἔλαβον αὐτόν, ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς 
3 > , , ~ , ~ , > \ ws > ~ ! a > > 
13 ἐξουσίαν τέχνα ϑεοῦ γενέσϑαι, τοῖς πιστεύουσιν εἰς TO OvOMA αὐτοῦ, ' οἱ οὐκ ἐξ 
αἱμάτων οὐδὲ ἐκ ϑελήματος σαρκὸς οὐδὲ ἐκ ϑελήματος ἀνδρός, ἀλλ᾿ ἐκ ϑεοῦ 
3 , S72 7 ‘ € > (δ ΑΝ , > ε ~ συ δ 
14 ἐγεγνήϑησαν. Και ὃ λόγος σὰρξ ἐγένετο. καὶ ἐσχήνωσεν ἐν ἡμῖν, καὶ ἐϑεασάμε- 
Ga τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ, δόξαν ὡς μονογενοῦς παρὰ πατρός, πλήρης χάριτος καὶ 
3 , > , ~ A 5 - Α , , 5 τ ἊΨ Δ 
15 ἀληϑείας. ᾿]ωάννης μαρτυρεῖ περὶ αὑτοῦ καὶ κἔχραγε λέγων" οὗτος ἤν, ov 
ε» , > , »” , , σ er ap 5 A 
16 εἶπον" ὁ ὀπίσω μου ἐρχόμενος ἐμπροσϑὲν μου yeyover, OTL πρῶτος μου ἢν. Kost 
> ~ , > ~ ¢ - , 3. ἢ A , > A , σ 
17 ἐκ τοῦ πληρώματος αὐτοῦ ἡμεῖς πάντες ἐλάβομεν, καὶ χάριν art χάριτος. Ort 
ὁ νόμος διὰ Μωῦσέως ἐδόϑη, ἡ χάρις καὶ ἡ ἀλήϑεια διὰ ᾿]ησοῦ Χριστοῦ éyéve- 
Α > 4 | ee ® , e A ep. e a > ‘A , ~ 
18 zo. (θεὸν ovdeig ἑώραχξ πώποτε᾽ ὁ μονγογενῆς υἱὸς, ὃ ὧν εἰς TOY κόλπον TOV 
πατρός, ἐκεῖνος ἐξηγήσατο. 


§ 18, Testimony of John the Baptist to Jesus.— Bethany beyond Jordan. 
Joun I. 19—34, 


19 Καὶ αὕτη ἐστὶν 4 μαρτυρία tov ᾿Ιωάννου, ὅτε ἀπέστειλαν οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι ἐξ 
20 Ἱεροσολύμων ἱερεῖς καὶ Aevitac, ἵνα ἐρωτήσωσιν αὐτόν" σὺ τίς εἶ; Καὶ ὧμο- 
΄ ‘ > > , ‘ € , σ > > 4 > 4 c , Ἁ 
21 λόγησε καὶ οὐκ ἠρνήσατο, καὶ ὡμολόγησεν" OTL οὐκ εἰμι ἐγὼ ὃ Χριστὸς. Και 
> , > ld ’ 4 3 , , ‘ , > Dif « , , 
ἠρώτησαν αὐτόν" τί οὖν ; ᾿Ηλίας εἶ ov; καὶ λέγει" οὐκ εἰμί. 6 προφήτης εἶ σύ ; 
8 af , a 7 ᾽ - , 7 > , ~ ~ , 
22 χαὶ ἀπεχκρίϑη" ov. Εἶπον οὖν αὐτῷ" τίς εἶ; ἵνα ἀπόκρισιν δῶμεν τοῖς πέμψασιν 
e ~ , , ‘ ~ » 5. Ἁ A ~ > ~ δ > ᾽ 
23 ἡμᾶς" τί λέγεις περὶ σεαυτοῦ; Ἔφη ἐγὼ φωνὴ βοῶντος ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ evdvra- 
24 τε τὴν ὁδὸν κυρίου, καϑὼς εἶπεν Ἡσαΐας 6 προφήτης." Kai οἱ ἀπεσταλμένοι 
- > ~ , ! \ > , ν 2 \ .f eR | Br , 
25 ἦσαν ἐκ τῶν Φαρισαίων, ' καὶ ἠρώτησαν αὐτὸν καὶ εἶπον αὐτῷ " τί οὖν βαπτί- 
26 ζεις, εἰ σὺ οὐκ εἶ ὁ Χριστὸς οὔτε ᾿Ηλίας οὔτε 6 προφήτης ; ᾿“πεχρίϑη αὐτοῖς 
©? , , a. @ , δι δὲ “ a ¢ ~ > 
ὁ ᾿Ιωάννης λέγων" ἐγὼ βαπτίζω ἐν ὕδατι, μέσος δὲ ὑμῶν ἕστηκεν, ον ὑμεῖς οὐκ 
1 δι. 9 eee > , a ν , , Φ ὃ. 4. ὦ 
41 οἴδατε, ' αὐτός ἐστιν ὁ ὀπίσω μου ἐρχόμενος, ὃς ἔμπροσϑέν μου γέγονεν, OV ἐγὼ οὐκ 
28 εἰμὶ ἄξιος, ἵνα λύσω αὐτοῦ τὸν ἱμάντα τοῦ ὑποδήματος. Ταῦτα ἐν Βηϑανίᾳ ἐγένετο 
- ll 
29 πέραν τοῦ Logddvov, ὅπου ἦν ᾿Ιωάννης βαπτίζων. Τῇ ἐπαύριον βλέπει [ὁ *Iody- 
WEG ~ > , A We ‘ , Ν᾿ « > ‘ ~ ~ ¢ ” 
γης] tov Ἰησοῦν ἐρχόμενον πρὸς αὑτόν, καὶ λέγει" We, ὃ ἀμνὸς τοῦ ϑεοῦ, ὃ αἰρῶὼν 





Δ 23. Is, 40, 3. 


§§ 17, 18, 19.] OUR LORD’S PUBLIC MINISTRY. 16 





JOHN I. 
4 ς , ~ , t ; τ 
80 τὴν ἁμαρτίαν τοῦ κόσμου. Οὗτός ἐστι, 'περὶ οὗ ἐγὼ εἶπον" ὀπίσω μου ἔρχεται 
3. ἢ a d Ἷ ᾿ δ - 
31 ἀνήρ, ὃς ἔμπροσϑέν pov γέγονεν, ὅτι πρῶτός μου ἦν. Κἀγὼ οὐκ ἤδειν αὐτόν" 
3 > ¢ ~ ~ ~ ~ σ 
ἀλλ ἵνα φανερωϑῇ τῷ ᾿Ισραήλ, διὰ τοῦτο ἦλϑον ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ ὕδατι βαπτίζων" 
32 K A > , bi , ’ὔ - σ , A ~ ~ € 
at ἐμαρτύρησεν ᾿Ιωάννης λέγων" ὅτι τεϑέαμαι τὸ πνεῦμα καταβαῖνον ὡς 
‘ 3 ~ 
33 περιστερὰν ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, καὶ ἔμεινεν ἐπὶ αὐτόν. Kayo οὐκ ἤδειν αὐτόν" ἀλλ᾿ ὃ 
4 / σ ~ a Ἃ a ~ 
πέμψας μὲ βαπτίζειν ἐν ὕδατι ἐκεῖνός μοι εἶπεν" Ep ὃν ἂν ἰδὴς τὸ πνεῦμα 
~ ‘ , > τ 
καταβαῖνον καὶ μένον ἐπὶ αὐτόν, οὗτός ἐστίν ὃ βαπτίζων ἐν πνεύματι ἁγίῳ. 
24 Ke RAG ἃ τ , Y ct 8 3 « e\ ~ bad 
24 Kayo ewmpaxa, καὶ μεμαρτύρηκα, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ϑεοῦ. 


§ 19. Jesus gains Disciples— The Jordan. Galilee? 


Joun I. 35—82, 
~ 4A ~ ~ ~ 
35 36 Τῇ ἐπαύριον πάλιν εἱστήκει ὁ ᾿Ιωάννης καὶ ἐκ τῶν μαϑητῶν αὐτοῦ δύο. Και 
37 ἐμβλέψας τῷ ᾿]Ιησοῦ περιπατοῦντι λέγει" ἰδὲ, ὁ ἀμνὸς τοῦ ϑεοῦ. Καὶ ἤκουσαν 
38 αὐτοῦ οἱ δύο μαϑηταὶ λαλοῦντος, καὶ ἠκολούϑησαν τῷ ᾿]ησοῦ. Στραφεὶς δὲ 6 
39° ~ ‘ ͵ ἂν Δ ὁ ὦ “ , RT 2 ~ «ον 
Inoovs καὶ ϑεασάμενος αὐτοὺς ἀκολουϑοῦντας λέγει αὑτοῖς " ' ci ζητεῖτε ; οἱ δὲ 
40 εἶπον αὐτῷ " ῥαββί, (ὃ λέγεται ἑρμηνευόμενον, διδάσκαλε,) ποῦ μένεις ; «4 ἔγει 
> -“ ” ΑΝ -. A - - ’ 4 3 > ~ of 
αὐτοῖς " ἔρχεσϑε καὶ ete. ἤλϑον καὶ εἶδον mov μένει" καὶ παρ αὑτῷ ἔμειναν 
Ἵ 
41 τὴν ἡμέραν ἐχείνην. ὥρα ἦν ὡς δεκάτη. Ἣν ᾿ΑἸνδρέας, ὁ ἀδελφὸς Σίμωνος 
- ~ A , 
Πέτρου, εἷς ἐκ τῶν δύο τῶν ἀκουσάντων παρὰ ᾿Ιωάννου καὶ ἀκολουϑησάντων 
3 - Fof . ~ 4 ? A A a ? A ’ > ~ 
42 αὐτῷ. Εὑρίσκει οὗτος πρῶτος tor ἀδελφὸν tov ἰδιον Σίμωνα, καὶ λέγει αὑτῷ " 
43 εὑρήκαμεν τὸν Μεσσίαν (0 ἐστι μεϑερμηνευόμενον Χριστός). Καὶ ἤγαγεν αὐτὸν 
πρὸς τὸν Inoovr. ἐμβλέψας δὲ αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς εἶπε" σὺ εἶ Σίμων, ὁ υἱὸς ᾿Ιωνᾶ, 
44 σὺ χληϑήσῃ Κηφᾶς (ὃ ἑρμηνεύεται Πέτρος). Τῇ ἐπαύριον ἠϑέλησεν ἐξελϑεῖν 
4 ~ ~ 
sig τὴν Γαλιλαίαν, καὶ εὑρίσκει Φίλιππον καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς " ἀκολούϑει 
o- μα / : 
45 μοι. Ἦν δὲ 6 Φίλιππος and Βηϑσαϊδά, ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ᾿Αὐνδρέου καὶ Πέτρου. 
¢e 5 “ “« Ὁ ᾿ ow ~ 
46 Εὑρίσκει Φίλιππος τὸν Ναϑαναὴλ καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ - ov ἔγραψε Μωΐῦσῆς ἐν τῷ νόμῳ 
4 ra ~ rd , 3 - 4 «" ~ > , A B A ? 4 
47 καὶ οἱ προφῆται, εὑρήκαμεν, ᾿]ησοῦν τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ᾿]ωσήφ, τὸν an0 Ναζαρέτ. Καὶ 
εἶπεν αὐτῷ Ναϑαναήλ᾽ ἐκ Ναζαρὲτ δύναταί τι ἀγαϑὸν sivas; λέγει αὐτῷ 
~ A \ 
48 Φίλιππος" ἔρχου καὶ ide. Εἶδεν ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς tov Ναϑαναὴλ ἐρχόμενον πρὸς 
ee ἡ ‘ , ‘ 3 ~ an 3 a. 9 , > εξ , 2 x 
αὐτόν, καὶ λέγει περὶ αὐτοῦ" ἰδὲ, ἀληϑῶς ᾿Ισραηλίτης, ev ᾧ δόλος οὐκ ἔστι. 
49 “έγει αὐτῷ ΝΝαϑαναήλ᾽ πόϑεν με γινώσκεις ; ἀπεκρίϑη ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ" 
50 πρὸ τοῦ σε Dilinnov φωνῆσαι, ὄντα ὑπὸ τὴν συκῆν, εἶδόν σε. ᾿Α΄πεκρίϑη Na- 
ϑαναὴλ καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ " ῥαββί, ov εἶ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ϑεοῦ, ov εἶ ὁ βασιλεὺς τοῦ ᾿Ισραήλ. 
“ ~ 7 ~ ~ 
51 ᾿Απεκρίϑη Inoovs καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ᾽ ὅτι εἶπόν σοι" εἶδόν σε ὑποκάτω τῆς συκῆς, 
52 U x » , A K ‘ γί , ee eA δι. | λ , ξ “ὦ > ΄ 
πιστεύεις ; μείζω τούτων ὄψει. Καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ " ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἀπάρτι 
4 ~ ~ 4 
ὄψεσϑε τὸν οὐρανον ἀνεῳγότα καὶ τοὺς ἀγγέλους τοῦ ϑεοῦ ἀναβαίνοντας καὶ 
καταβαίνοντας ἐπὶ τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου." 





8. 52, Comp. Gen. 28, 12. 


16 INTRODUCTION OF OUR LORD’S MINISTRY. [Part IL. 





§ 20. The Marriage at Cana of Galilee. 


ἐ Joun II. 1—12, 
1 Καὶ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ τρίτῃ γάμος ἐγένετο ἐν Kava τῆς Γαλιλαίας, καὶ ἦν ἡ μήτηρ 
2 τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ ἐκεῖ. ᾿Εκλήϑη δὲ καὶ ὁ Ἰησοῦς καὶ οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸν γάμον. 
3 Καὶ ὑστερήσαντος οἴνου λέγει ἡ μήτηρ τοῦ ᾿]ησοῦ πρὸς αὐτόν" οἶνον οὐκ ἔχουσι. 
? 2 “eee ἃ αν ἃ. ‘ A , , 4 σ « σ , « 
45 “2ἐγει αὑτῇ ὁ ]Ζησοὺς" τί ἔμοι καὶ σοί, γύναι; οὕπω ἥκει y ὥρα μου. «““ἐγει ἢ 
, > ~ ~ , = σ Ἃ , ¢ ~ , 3 A> -Ρ τ , 
6 μήτηρ αὑτοῦ τοῖς διακόνοις" 0,τι ἂν λέγῃ ὑμῖν, ποιήσατε. σαν δὲ ἐκεῖ ὑδρίαι 
λίϑιναι ἕξ κείμεναι κατὰ τὸν καϑαρισμὸν τῶν ᾿]Ιουδαίων, χωροῦσαι ἀνὰ μετρη- 
Α ; S| ~ , > ~ « 3 ~ , 4 c , σ 4 
7 tag δύο ἢ τρεῖς. Asya αὑτοῖς ὁ Inoovg: γεμίσατε τὰς ὑδρίας ὕδατος. καὶ 
δὲ ἐν 8. “ἍΝ. ὧν ” S47 ar τὸ , ow ‘ , ~ 
8 ἐγέμισαν αὑτὰς ἕως ἄνω. Καὶ λέγει αὑτοῖς" ἀντλήσατε νῦν καὶ φέρετε τῷ 
> , ‘ A . « τὸ ὦ , c > , 4 σ 
9 ἀρχιτρικλίνγῳ- καὶ ἤνεγκαν. ‘Rg δὲ ἐγεύσατο ὁ ἀρχιτρίκλινος τὸ ὕδωρ οἶνον 
, ΑΝ τῶν , 9... € gh , Ὗ ε » , A 
γεγενημένον, (καὶ οὐκ ἤδει moder ἐστίν, οἱ δὲ διάκονοι yOsiour, οἱ ἡντληκότες τὸ 
σ ~ 4 , « > ; ! A , > ᾿ς, ΜΆ ~ a+ 
10 vdeg,) φωνεῖ τὸν νυμφίον ὃ ἀρχιτρίκλινος | καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ " πᾶς ἄνϑρωπος 
πρῶτον τὸν καλὸν οἶνον τίϑησι, καὶ ὅταν μεϑυσϑῶσι, τότε τὸν ἐλάσσω" σὺ τετή- 
11 gyxac τὸν καλὸν οἶνον ἕως ἄρτι. Ταύτην ἐποίησε τὴν ἀρχὴν τῶν σημείων ὃ 
» ~ 5 ~ ~ ’ A 23 , \ , ¢ ~ Wes Peer" y 
Ἰησοῦς ἐν Kava τῆς Γαλιλαίας, καὶ ἐφανέρωσε τὴν δόξαν αὑτοῦ" καὶ ἐπίστευ- 
4 ~ 
σαν εἰς αὐτὸν οἱ μαϑηται αὐτοῦ. 
δι. τ» , > \ , “Ὁ ΠΝ , >» A 2 ‘ 
12 Mera τοῦτο κατέβη εἰς Καπερναοὺμ αὑτὸς καὶ ἢ μήτηρ αὑτοῦ καὶ οἱ ἄδελφοι 
αὐτοῦ καὶ οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐκεῖ ἔμειναν οὐ πολλὰς ἡμέρας. 


PART IIT. 


OUR LORD'S FIRST PASSOVER, AND THE SUBSEQUENT TRANSACTIONS. 
| UNTIL THE SECOND. 


Time: One year. 





§ 21. At the Passover Jesus drives the Traders out of the Temple.—Jerusalem. 


Joun II. 13—25. . 
3 Kui ἐγγὺς ἦν τὸ πάσχα τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων, καὶ ἀνέβη εἰς ἱἹεροσόλυμα 6 ᾿]ησοῦς. 
t 3 ~ ~ ~ , 
14 Καὶ εὗρεν ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ τοὺς πωλοῦντας βόας καὶ πρόβατα καὶ περιστερὰς καὶ 


.15 τοὺς κερματιστὰς καϑημένους. Καὶ ποιήσας φραγέλλιον. ἐκ σχοινίων πάντὰς 


ἐξέβαλεν ἐ &% τοῦ ἱεροῦ, τά TE πρόβατα καὶ τοὺς βόας, καὶ τῶν κολλυβιστῶν ἐξέ. 
16 yee τὸ κέρμα καὶ τὰς τραπέζας ἀνέστρεψε, ! καὶ τοῖς τὰς περιστερὰς πωλοῦσιν 
εἶπεν" ἄρατε ταῦτα ἐντεῦϑεν᾽ μὴ ποιεῖτε τὸν οἶκον τοῦ πατρός MOV οἶκον ἐμ- 

1 Beis 3 ἢ ‘ ¢ 4 ee πέψις , Ea] apt aD SS 
πορίου. ᾿Εμνήσϑησαν δὲ οἱ μαϑήται αὐτοῦ, ore γεγραμμένον ἐστίν “ἃ ὁ ζῆλος 
~  .γ , , > ¢ ως «» ~ ΚΑ Pe aw 
18 τοῦ οἰκου σου χαταφάγεταί με: Anexoidnoar οὖν ot ᾿]ουδαῖοι καὶ εἶπον αὐτῷ" 
gt ak, , Ct ἃ ~ ὦ 3 , ν᾽ ~ 4 3 
19 τί σημεῖον δειχνύεις ἡμῖν, ote ταῦτα ποιεῖς ; “Anexoidy ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὖ- 


on ~ 4 A ‘ ~ \ > ΤᾺ 4 ἡ >. ~ ie > mS 
20 τοῖς Avoate τὸν ναῦν τοῦτον, “OL ἕν τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερῶ avtov. Εἶπον our 


«71 ~ , s Ὁ ἡ 3 , € ‘ < A A > 
οἱ Lovdaiors τεσσαράκοντα καὶ ἐξ ἔτεσιν muodouydy 0 ναὸς οὗτος, καὶ σὺν ἕν 
: : ἐς “ $y ~ ~ ~ 
21 τρισὶν ἡμέραις ἐγερεῖς αὐτὸν ; ᾿Εχεῖνος δὲ ἔλεγε περὶ τοῦ ναοῦ τοῦ σώματος αὖ- 
22 J ~ “O FT | ee ὃ 5 ° ~ 9 , 9 oases ὃ A > ~ 4 ~ 
tov.. Ore οὖν ἠγέρϑη ἐκ νεχρῶν, ἐμνήσϑησαν οἱ μαϑηήται αὐτοῦ, ore τοῦτο 
= ~ ~ ~ ν᾽ τ ~ 
ἔλεγε, καὶ ἐπίστευσαν τῇ γραφῇ καὶ τῷ λόγῳ; ᾧ εἶπεν ὁ ᾿Πσοῦς. 
. « ἀῶ ΑΕ, ~ 
23 ‘Qe δὲ ἦν ἐν τοῖς “Iegocodvpoig ἐν τῷ πάσχα ἐν. τῇ ἑορτῇ, πολλοὶ ἐπίστευσαν 
24 εἰς τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ, ϑεωροῦντες αὐτοῦ τὰ σημεῖα, ἃ ἐποίει. Αὐτὸς δὲ ὁ tr 
25 cove οὐχ ἐπίστευσεν ἑαυτὸν αὑτοῖς διὰ τὸ αὐτὸν γινώσκειν πάντας," καὶ ὅτι OV 
χυείαν εἶχεν, ἵνα τις μαρτυρήσῃ περὶ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου" αὐτὸς γὰρ ἐγίνωσκε, τί i ἦν 
"ἐν τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ. 





“ἃ 17. Ps. Ὁ9, 10. 
3 


18 FROM OUR LORD’S FIRST PASSOVER [Parr IIL. 





§ 22. Our Lord’s discourse with Nicodemus.—Jerusalem. 
Joun ΠῚ. 1—21. 


"Hy δὲ ἄνϑρωπος ἐκ τῶν Φαρισαίων, Νικόδημος ὄνομα αὐτῷ, ἄρχων τῶν 
2 ᾿Ιουδαίων" 1 οὗτος ἦλϑε πρὸς αὐτὸν νυχτὸς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ οῥαββί, οἴδαμεν, 
ὅτι ἀπὸ ϑεοῦ ἐλήλυϑας διδάσκαλος: οὐδεὶς γὰρ ταῦτα τὰ σημεῖα δύναται ποι- 
~ a ‘ ~ 3A 4 AF 38 AN 3 > ~ > , the ἢ ~ ‘ 
3 εἶν, & σὺ ποιεῖς, ἐὰν μὴ ἡ ὁ ϑεὸς μετ αὐτοῦ. “AmexpiOy ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν 
δ΄ ee Be. a. 8 , 24 ἢ - ῃ > ?- on ~ ‘\ 
αὐτῷ any ἀμὴν λέγω σοι, ἐὰν μὴ τις γεννηϑῇ ἄνωϑεν, ov δύναται ἰδεῖν τὴν 
4 βασιλείαν τοῦ ϑεοῦ. Aéyer πρὸς αὐτὸν ὁ Νικόδημος" πῶς δύναται ἄνϑρωπος 
γεννηϑῆναι γέρων ov; μὴ δύναται εἰς τὴν κοιλίαν τῆς μητρὸς αὑτοῦ δεύτερον 
ὅ εἰςελϑεῖν καὶ γεννηϑῆναι; “Anexoidn ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς" ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω σοι, ἐὰν μή τις 
“ > 7 4 , > , > ~ 5 ‘ , 4» 
γενφηϑῇ ἐξ vdatos καὶ πνευμαξῦς, οὐ δυναται εἰρβλ θεῖν #6 τὴν βασιλειὰν τοῦ 
6 θεοῦ. To γεγεννημένον ἐκ τῆς σαρκὸς σάρξ ἐστι, καὶ τὸ γεγεννημένον ἐκ τοῦ 
7 πνεύματος πνεῦμά ἐστι. Μὴ ϑαυμάσῃς, ὅτι εἶπόν σοι" δεῖ ὑμᾶς γεννηϑῆναι 
8 ἄνωϑεν. Τὸ πρόυμα ὅπου ϑέλει πνεῖ, καὶ τὴν φωνὴν αὐτοῦ ἀκούεις, GL οὐκ 
οἶδας, πόϑεν ἔρχεται καὶ ποῦ ὑπάγει" οὕτως ἐστὶ πᾶς ὁ γεγεννημένος ἐκ τοῦ 
9 πνεύματος. “Anexoi0n Νικόδημος καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ: πῶς δύναται ταῦτα γενέ- 
10 σϑαι; “Ἵπεκρίϑη ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ " σὺ εἶ ὁ διδάσκαλος τοῦ ᾿Ισραήλ, καὶ 
11 tavta οὐ γινώσχεις ; ; “μὴν ἃ ἀμὴν λέγω σον ὅτι ὃ οἴδαμεν λαλοῦμεν καὶ ὃ ἑωρά- 
12 καμὲν Μαρευροῦμεν, καὶ τὴν μαῤτυρίαν ἡμῶν οὐ. λαμβάνετε. Εἰ τὰ ἐπίγεια 
εἶπον ὑμῖν καὶ οὐ πιστεύετε" πῶς, ἐὰν εἴπω ὑμῖν τὰ ἐπουράνια, πιστεύσετε ; 
‘ > % ? , > \ "> 4 Pu See .5 ~, ἃ ~ , ¢ ΟἾΔΑ 
13 Kai ovdeig ἀναβέβηκεν εἰς tov οὐρανὸν, εἰ μὴ ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβᾶς, ὁ υἱὸς 
~ 9% , 5 oN > OR ~ A Ye so ~ “ὦ \ »»" > ~ 
14 τοῦ ἀνϑρώπου, 0 ὧν ἕν τῷ οὐρανῷ. Καὶ καϑὼς Μωῦσῆς vywoe τὸν ὄφιν ἐν τῇ 
a a.” » τῷ ἤψαι δεῖ τὶ id ~ » / 2 ~ =e ; , >. 2 
15 ἐρήμῳ," οὑτῶς υψωϑῆναι δεῖ τον υἱὸν του ἀνϑρώπου, | Wa πᾶς ὁ πιστεύων εἰς αὖ- 
A AS ee jue “2592 ἡ ‘ δ᾽ σ Act αν ε ᾿ς A ᾿ 
16. τὸν μὴ φὐτόληε ay ἀλλ ἐχῃ ζωὴν αἰώνιον. Ούυτω γὰρ my eee o ϑεὸς τὸν κό-' 
σμον, ὥςτε τὸν υἱὸν αὑτοῦ τὸν ἱμονθγενῆ ἔδωκεν, ἵνα. πᾶς ὃ πιστεύων εἰς αὐτὸν 
17 μὴ ἀπόληται, ἀλλ ἔχῃ ζωὴ» αἰώνιον. Οὐ γὰρ ἀπέστειλεν ὁ ϑεὸς τὸν υἱὸν αὖ- 
τοῦ εἰς τὸν κόσμον, ἵνα κρίγῃ τὸν κόσμον, GAR ἵνα σωϑῇ ὁ κόσμος δὲ αὐτοῦ. 
18O πιστεύων εἰς αὐτὸν οὐ κρίνεται, ὁ δὲ μὴ πιστεύων, ἤδη. κέχριται, ὅτι μὴ 
19 πεπίστευκεν εἰς τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ μονογενοῦς υἱοῦ τοῦ ϑεοῦ. Aven δέ ἐστιν ἡ 
, σ ᾿ ~~ 347 > & , Nt ig cw ~ 
κρίσις, ὅτι τὸ φῶς ἐλήλυϑεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον, καὶ ἠγάπησαν οἱ ἄνϑρωποι μᾶλλον 
Δ ~-. T ~ ~ A ~ 
20 τὸ σχότος, ἢ τὸ φῶς: ἦν. γὰρ πονηρὰ αὐτῶν τὰ ἔργα. Πᾶς γὰρ 6 φαῦλα 
πράσσων μισεῖ τὸ φῶς, καὶ οὐκ. ἔρχεται πρὸς τὸ φῶς, ἵνα μὴ ἐλεγχϑῇ τὰ ἔργα 
21 αὐτοῦ᾽ ὁ δὲ ποιῶν τὴν ἀλήϑειαν ἔρχεται πρὸς τὸ φῶς, ἵνα φανερωϑῇ αὐτοῦ τὰ 
ἔργα, ὅτι ἐν ϑεῷ ἐστιν εἰργασμένα. 


: 


§ 23. Jesus remains in Judea and baptizes. Further testimony of John the Baptist. 
Joun ΠΙ. 22—36, 
22. Μετὰ ταῦτα ἦλϑεν ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς καὶ οἱ μαϑηταὶ "αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν ᾿]ουδαίαν γῆν, 
23 nut ἐκεῖ διέτριβε μετ αὐτῶν καὶ ἐβάπτιζεν. "Hy δὲ καὶ ᾿Ιωάννης βαπείζων ἐν 
Aivesy, ἐγγὺς τοῦ Σαλείμ, ὅτι ὕδατα πολλὰ ἦν ἐκεῖ" καὶ παρεγίνοντο καὶ ἐβα- 





5. 14͵ Comp, Num 21, 8 sq. 


UNTIL THE SECOND. ᾿ 19 


$§ 22, 23, 24. 


! 





JOHN Hl. 
ὲ ΜΡ - 
2425 πτίζοντο" οὔπω γὰρ ἦν βεβλημένος εἰς τὴν φυλακὴν ὁ ᾿Ιωάννης. ᾿Ἐγένετο οὖν 
, ~ : ~ ῷ ~ 4 
26 ζήτησις ἐκ τῶν μαϑητῶν ᾿Ιωάννου μετὰ ᾿]ουδαίων περὶ καϑαρισμοῦ. Καὶ ἢλ- 
‘ \ 3 ? . ‘ 5 > 5 0 t , 8 % 4 ~ , ~ 
Dov πρὸς tov ᾿Ιωάννην καὶ εἶπον αὐτῷ" ῥαββί, ὃς nv μετὰ σοῦ πέραν τοῦ 
3 ὔὕ t A , 54 τ Ie Ν , o” \ 
Ἰορδάνου, ᾧ ov μεμαρτυρηκας, We, οὗτος βαπτίζει, καὶ martes ἔρχονται πρὸς 
27 αὐτόν. “Anexoidy ᾿Ιωάννης καὶ εἶπεν ov δύναται ἄνϑρωπος λαμβάνειν οὐδέν, 
‘ 32. Ὁ )α᾽ , ee, Fay ~ ΡΈΕΙ Ἢ 3,0 Ἂν Φ τ κ᾿ te y ~ σ 
28 ἐὰν μὴ ἢ δεδομένον αὑτῷ ἐχ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ. Αἄὐτοι ὑμεῖς μοι μαρτυρεῖτε, OTL 
᾿ ᾽ FU go. πὸ , 2449 αὶ 3 , 2 \ 9 ae, 
εἶπον ov εἰμὶ ἐγὼ ὁ Χριστός, GLA οτι ἀπεσταλμένος εἰμὶ ἔμπροσϑεν ἐκείνου. 
tf) "ὶ A , , 4. τὸν» ς \ , “ , oN § ἃ: 8 
29. Ὃ ἔχων τὴν νύμφην vuugiog ἐστίν, ὃ δὲ φίλος τοῦ νυμφίου, ὁ EOTYXMS καὶ 
, ~ ~ ᾿ ~ σ “ “ 
ἀχούων αὐτοῦ, χαρᾷ χαίρει διὰ τὴν φωνὴν τοῦ νυμφίου αὕτη οὖν ἡ χαρὰ ἡ 
30.31 ἐμὴ πεπλήρωται. Ἐκεῖνον δεῖ αὐξάνειν, ἐμὲ δὲ ἐλαττοῦσϑαι. Ὃ ἄνωϑεν. 
ε ~ ~ ~ ~ 4 ~ 
ες ἀρχόμενος ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστίν" ὁ ὧν ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἐκ τῆς γῆς ἐστὶ καὶ ἐκ τῆς 
- ~ ~ ~ κα ᾽ Α 
32 γῆς λαλεῖ" ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἐρχόμενος ἐπάνω πάντων ἐστί, | καὶ ὃ ἑώρακε καὶ 
. x ~ ~ VA , > ~ 29. ~ , ε ᾿ 
33 ἤκουε, τοῦτο μαρτυρεῖ, καὶ THY μαρτυρίαν αὐτοῦ οὐδεῖς λαμβάνει. Ὃ λαβῶν 
aus eer ae 3 , Ps e ee. δι. ἃ ra) ae ee 
34 αὐτοῦ τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἐσφράγισεν, OTL ὁ ϑεὸς ἀληθής ἐστιν. Ov γὰρ ἀπέστειλεν 
ς 4 . εὖ “ «ς. ~ > A > , , ὅν \ 4 ~ 
ὁ ϑεός, τὰ ῥήματα tov ϑεοὺ λαλεῖ" ov yao & μέτρου δίδωσιν ὁ ϑεὸς τὸ πνευ- 
εν : ἀπο ἢ “ον ΠῚ Ne ; PNG. ets τ  πε 
35 36 μα. Ὁ πατὴρ ἀγαπᾷ τὸν υἱὸν καὶ πάντα δέδωκεν ἕν τῇ χειρὶ αὐτου. O πι- 
3 ? 9 4 οὐ νὸν 4 ΠῚ δ, an XS - Wi δαὶ 2,3. 3, ὧν ie 
στεύων εἰς τὸν υἱὸν ἔχει ζωὴν αἰώνιον, ὁ δὲ ἀπειϑῶν τῷ υἱῷ οὐκ ὄψεται ζωήν, 
9442 ς 93 " ~ ~ , be ee 
᾿ς ἀλλ᾽ ἡ Ooyn tov ϑεοῦ μένει ἐπ αὐτὸν. 


δ 24, Jesus departs into Galilee after John’s imprisonment. 


Luxe IV. 14, 
Καὶ ὑπέστρεψεν ὁ 
᾿Ιησοῦς ἐν τῇ δυνάμει 
φοῦ πνεύματος εἰς τὴν 
Γαλιλαίαν," - 
Luxe ΠῚ, 19, 20. 
19 Ὃ δὲ ἩΗρώδης ὁ τετράρ- 


Marx I. 14, 
Μετὰ δὲ τὸ παραδο- 14 
ϑῆναι τὸν ᾿Ιωάννην ἦλ- 
Sev ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς εἰς τὴν 
Γαλιλαίαν--- 
Marx VI. 17—20. 
17 Αὐτὸς γὰρ ὁ ἩΗρώδης ἀ- 


~ Marra. IV. 12. 
12 2Axovoug δὲ ὁ Ἰησοῦς, 14 
ὅτι ᾿Ιωάννης παρεδόϑη, 
ἀνεχώρησεν εἰς τὴν Γὰ- 
λιλαίαν. 
Marrs. XIV. 5-ὅ. 
.3 Ὃ γὰρ ᾿Ηρώδης κρατή- 


. ἀδελφοῦ αὑτοῦ. 


4 > , ” 
σας tov Imavyny ἔδησεν 


3 
αὐτὸν καὶ ἔϑετο ἐν φυ- 


Loni διὰ ᾿Ηρωδιάδα τὴν 
γυναῖκα Φιλίππου τοῦ 


“Ἔλεγε 


ποστεΐλας ἐχράτησξε τὸν 
5 , \ oo» az, 
Touveny καὶ ἔδησεν av- 


τὸν ἐν φυλακῇ διὰ How- 
διάδα τὴν γυναῖκα Di- 


λίππου τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ av- 
--»  -Ἐσ 
TOV, ὅτι αὐτὴν ἐγάμη- 


γὰρ" αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιωάννης " 18 σεν. Ἔλεγε γάρ 0’ Ἰωάν- 


> μὲ , w 
οὐκ ἔξεστί σοι ἔχξιν 
4 ᾿ 
αὐτήν. Καὶ ϑέλων αὐ- 
Υ - , 
τὸν ἀποκτεῖναι ἐφοβή- 


wg τῷ Ἡρώδῃ" ὅτι 
> BA , Υ \ 
οὐκ ἔξεστί σοι ἔχειν τὴν 
γυναῖχα τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ 


χης, ἐλεγχόμενος ὑπὶ αὖ- 
τοῦ περὶ ᾿Ἡρωδιάδος 
τῆς γυναικὸς! Φιλίππου] 
τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ καὶ 
περὶ πάντων ὧν ἐποίη- 
σὲ πονηρῶν ὁ ‘Howdys, 


~ 4 
20 Ἱπροςέϑηχε nat τοῦτο ἐπὶ 


~ 4 ᾽ A 
πᾶσι καὶ κατέχλεισε τὸν 
3 5 : .5 ~ ~ 

Ἰωάννην ev τῇ φυλακῇ. 


ϑη τὸν ὄχλον, ὅτι ὡς 19 σου. “IT δὲ ᾿Ηρωδιὰς ἐνεῖχεν αὐτῷ καὶ ἤϑελεν ad- 


A ~ ‘ 
προφήτην αὐτὸν εἶχον. 20 τὸν ἀποχτεῖναι" καὶ οὐκ ἠδύνατο. Ὁ yao ΤΠΙρώδης 
3 ~ a) νὰ , In A 8.ϑ κ᾿ # , 
ἐφοβεῖτο tov ᾿Ιωάννην, εἰδὼς avtov ἄνδρα δίκαιον 
«7 . s, : 4 τ ~ 4. ἃ ᾿ 
καὶ ἅγιον" καὶ συνετήρει αὐτόν, καὶ ἀκούσας αὐτοῦ πολλὰ ἐποίει, 


a καὶ tn > ~ ey 
καὶ ἡδέως αὑτοῦ ἤκουε. 


20 FROM OUR LORD’S FIRST PASSOVER [Parr III. 





Joun IV. 1—3. 
1 Ὡς οὖν ἔγνω ὁ κύριος, ὅτι ἤκουσαν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι, ὅτι ᾿Ιησοῦς πλείονας μαϑη- 
2 τὰς ποιεῖ καὶ βαπτίζει, ἢ ΤΙωάννης,, (καίτοιγε Ἰησοῦς αὐτὸς οὐκ ἐβάπτιζεν, ἀλλ᾽ 
3 οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ,) ! ἀφῆκε τὴν ᾿Ιουδαίαν καὶ ἀπῆλϑε πάλιν εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν. 


§ 25. Our Lord’s discourse with the Samaritan woman. . Many of the Samaritans be- 
lieve on him.—Shechem or Neapolis. 


| Joun IV. 4—42, 
4.5 Ἔδει δὲ αὐτὸν διέρχεσϑαι διὰ τῆς Σαμαρείας. Ἔρχεται οὖν εἰς πόλιν τῆς 
“Σαμαρείας λεγομένην Συχάρ, πλησίον τοῦ χωρίου, ὃ ἔδωκεν ᾿Ιακὼβ ᾿Ιωσὴφ τῷ 
6 υἱῷ αὑτοῦ. “Hy δὲ ἐκεῖ πηγὴ τοῦ ᾿Ιακώβ. ὁ οὖν ᾿Ιησοῦς κεκοπιακὼς ἐκ τῆς 
[ _ -« ~ 
7 ὁδοιπορίας ἐχαϑέζετο οὕτως ἐπὶ τῇ πηγῇ ὥρα ἦν wget ἕκτη. Ἔρχεται γυνὴ 
> ~ > ~ A ~ ~ ~ 
8 ἐκ τῆς Σαμαρείας ἀντλῆσαι ὕδωρ. λέγει αὐτῇ ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς" δός μοι πιεῖν. (Οἱ 
9 γὰρ μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ ἀπεληλύϑεισαν εἰς τὴν πόλιν, ἵνα τροφὰς ἀγοράσωσι.) Ag’ 
Tv ~ ‘ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 
yet οὖν αὐτῷ ἡ γυνὴ ἡ Σαμαρεῖτις" πῶς ov lovdaios ὧν παρ᾽ ἐμοῦ πιεῖν αἰτεῖς 
aw ‘ , > \ ~ > ~ , 
οὐσῆς γυναικὸς «Σαμαρείτιδος ; (ov yao ovyyowrtus. Iovdaior Lapagetrats.) 
10 ‘Anexgidn ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῇ" εἰ ἤδεις τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ ϑεοῦ καὶ τίς ἐστιν 
« , / ~ A bb! » 3 ; ν»»ν» a+ A ~ 
ὃ λέγων σοι" δὸς μοι πιεῖν" ov ἂν ἤτησας αὑτόν, καὶ ἔδωχεν ἂν σοι ὕδωρ ζῶν. 
, ee ae U , » a ” ‘ A 7 βο 0 , , 
11 “έγει αὐτῷ ἡ γυνή" κύριε, οὔτε ἄντλημα ἔχεις, καὶ TO φρέαρ ἐστὶ βαϑύ᾽" πόϑεν 
αν ἥ, , Ψ 4 ~ A A ~ ‘ See οὐ , a » 
12 οὐν ἔχεις τὸ vdwe τὸ ζῶν; My σὺ μείζων εἶ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν ᾿Ιαχώβ, ὃς ἔδω- 
nev ἡμῖν τὸ φρέαρ καὶ αὐτὸς ἐξ αὐτοῦ ἔπιε καὶ οἱ υἱοὶ αὐτοῦ καὶ τὰ ϑρέμματα 
13 αὐτοῦ; “Amexoi dn ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῇ" πᾶς ὁ πίνων ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος τούτου 
Ὶ "' ~ 4 ~ 
14 διψήσει πάλιν, ' ὃς δ᾽ ἂν πίῃ ἐκ τοῦ ὕδατος, ov ἐγὼ δώσω αὐτῷ, οὐ μὴ διψήσῃ 
> 4 35“ 3 4 ‘ 4 “ ’ > ~ 7 ae > > ~ A σ 
είς τὸν αἰῶνα" ἀλλὰ to vdwp ὁ δώσω αὑτῷ, γενήσεται ἕν αὐτῷ πηγὴ υδατος 
« , > ‘ 2s " 4 πὰ" €> νυν , 7] ~ 
15 ἁλλομένου εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον. Ayer πρὸς αὐτὸν ἡ γυνή" πῦύριε, δὸς μοι τοῦτο 
᾽ν ' ~ πὶ 
16 τὸ ὕδωρ, ἵνα μὴ διψῶ, μηδὲ ἔρχωμαι ἐνθάδε ἀντλεῖν. “έγει αὐτῇ ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς " 
17 ὕπαγε, φώνησον τὸν ἄνδρα σου καὶ ἐλϑὲ ἐνθάδε. “Anexgidn ἡ γυνὴ καὶ εἶπεν" 
18 οὐκ ἔχω ἄνδρα. λέγει αὐτῇ ὁ Inoovs: καλῶς εἶπας" ὅτι ἄνδρα οὐκ ἔχω. Πέν- 
\ 4 ” Pa a ” > ” 4. ᾧ ~ > ‘ ” 
ze γὰρ ἄνδρας ἔσχες, καὶ νῦν ὃν ἔχεις, οὐκ ἔστι Cov ἀνήρ" τοῦτο ἀληϑὲς εἴρη- 
᾽ ~ ~ 7 
19 20 xag. Adyer αὐτῷ ἡ γυνή" κύριε, ϑεωρῶ, ὅτι προφήτης εἶ σύ. Οἱ πατέρες 
- ~ ~ st σ 
ἡμῶν ἐν τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ προφεκύνησαν, καὶ ὑμεῖς λέγετε, ὅτι ἐν “]εροσολύμοις 
21 ἐστὶν ὁ τόπος, ὅπου δεῖ προςκυνεῖν. Adyet αὐτῇ ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς " γύναι, πίστευσόν μοι, 
ὅτι ἔρχεται ὥρα, ὅτε οὔτε ἐν τῷ ὄρει τούτῳ οὔτε ἐν ᾿]εροσολύμοις προφκυνήσετξϑ 
- » ~ ~ ~ a a 
22 τῷ πατρί. Ὑμεῖς προςκυνεῖτε ὃ οὐχ oldare* ἡμεῖς προςφκυνοῦμεν ὃ οἴδαμεν" ὅτι 
ε , > ~ > , > , > >” Ld ‘ ~ > σ Γ 
23 ἡ σωτηρία ἐκ τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων ἐστίν. Add ἔρχεται ὥρα καὶ νῦν ἔστιν, OTE οἱ 
ἀληϑινοὶ προςχυνηταὶ προςχυνήσουσι τῷ πατρὶ ἐν πνεύματι καὶ ἀληϑείᾳ " καὶ 
34 γὰρ ὁ πατὴρ τοιούτους ζητεῖ τοὺς προφχυνοῦντας αὐτόν. Πρεῦμα ὁ ϑεός, καὶ 
25 τοὺς προςχυγοῦντας αὐτὸν ἐν πνεύματι καὶ ἀληϑείᾳ δεῖ προρφκυνεῖν" Ayer αὐ- 
μή ~ 
τῷ ἡ γυνή" οἶδα, ὅτι Μεσσίας ἔρχεται, ὁ λεγόμενος Χριστός" ὅταν ἔλϑῃ exein 
~ ~ , ~ : ene a ~ 
26 γος, ἀναγγελεῖ ἡμῖν πάντα. Aryer αὐτῇ ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς " ἐγώ εἰμι, ὁ λαλῶν σοι, 
‘ ᾿,"" , 7 « ‘4 > ~ ‘ > , μὲ ‘ ΕἾ 
27 Καὶ ἐπὶ τούτῳ λϑον οἱ μαϑηται avtov, και ἐθαύμαζον, ὃτι μετὰ γυναικὸς 
~ Ἅ ~ ~~ 7~ 7 
28 ἐλάλει" οὐδεὶς μέντοι εἶπε" τί ζητεῖς ἣ τί λαλεῖς per αὐτῆς; ~ Agijxer οὖν 
τὴν ὑδρίαν αὑτῆς ἡ γυνὴ καὶ ἀπῆλϑεν εἰς τὴν πόλιν καὶ λέγει τοῖς ἀνθρώποις" 





§§ 25, 26, 27.] UNTIL THE SECOND. 21 








JOHN Iv. 
29 ! δεῦτε, ἰδέτε ἄνϑρωπον, ὃς εἶπέ μοι πάντα, ὅσα ἐποίησα" μήτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ 
30 31 Xeuor0s 5 Ἐξῆλϑον ἐ ἐκ τῆς πόλεως καὶ ἤρχοντο πρὸς αὐτόν. Ἔν δὲ τῷ με- 
> ~ 
32 ταξὺ ἠρώτων αὐτὸν οἱ μαϑηταὶ λέγοντες " ῥαββί, φάγε. ‘O δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " 
s 4 -“ ” ~~ a ¢ ‘~ > " : Ya - ε 4 ‘ > 
33 ἐγὼ βεῶσυ me φαγεῖν» ἣν ὑμεῖς οὖν οἰδατε. ἘΜΗ͂Σ οὐν οἱ acai ποῦν ἀλ- 
34 λήλους" μήτιρ ἤνεγκεν αὐτῷ φαγεῖν ; Agvet αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς " ἐμὸν βοῶμά ἐ ἔστιν, 
35 ἵνα ποιῶ τὸ θέλημαν τοῦ πέμψαντός ue, καὶ τελειώσω αὐτοῦ τὸ ἔργον. Οὐχ 
ὑμεῖς λέγετε, ὅτι ἔτι τετράμηνός ἐστι, καὶ ὁ ϑερισμὸς ἔρχεται ; ἰδού, λέγω ὑμῖν, 
} .Δ 2% 3 ‘ δ᾽. ἂν 4 ’ \ , μή ae eA A 
ἐπάρατε τοὺς ὀφϑαλμοὺς ὑμῶν καὶ ϑεάσασϑε τὰς χώρας, OTL λευκαί εἶσι πρὸς 
\, 7 ΜὋ.} 6 A , 4 ’, \ > A > 
36 ϑερισμὸν ἤδη " καὶ ὃ θερίζων μισϑὸν λαμβάνει καὶ συγἄγει καρπὸν εἰς ζωὴν αἱ- 
, ¢ Φ' ὁ , ¢ ~ , eg ye 2 ‘ , ¢ ee 
37 ὠγιίον, We χαὶ ὃ σπείρων ὁμοῦ χαίρῃ καὶ ὁ ϑερίζων. Ev γὰρ τούτῳ ὁ λογος 
38 ἐστὶν 6 ἀληϑινός, ὅτι ἄλλος ἐστὶν ὁ σπείρων καὶ ἄλλος ὁ ϑερίζων. Ἔγω ἀπέ- 
- a yA. 4 ~ 
στειλα ὑμᾶς ϑερίζειν, ὃ οὐχ ὑμεῖς κεχκοπιάκατε" ἄλλοι κεκοπιάκασι καὶ ὑμεῖς εἰς 
τ δ Be , a 7 ee 
39 τὸν κόπον αὐτῶν εἰφρεληλύϑατε. "Ex δὲ τῆς πόλεως ἐχείνης πολλοὶ ἐπίστευσαν 
εἰς αὐτὸν τῶν “Σαμαρειτῶν διὰ τὸν λόγον τῆς γυναικὸς pagry ρούσης ὅτι eins 
40 μοι πάντα, ὅσα ἐποίησα. ‘Qo οὖν ἦλϑον πρὸς αὐτὸν οἱ Σαμαρεῖται, ἠρώτων 
~ ~ ve ‘ 4 “3 , 
41 αὐτὸν μεῖναι mag αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἔμεινεν ἐκεῖ δύο ἡμέρας. Καὶ πολλῷ πλείους 
~ ~ σ > , A ‘ 
42 ἐπίστευσαν διὰ τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ. Ty τε γυναικὶ ἔλ exon’ ὅτε οὐκέτι διὰ τὴν 
σὴν λαλιὰν πιστεύομεν" αὐτοὶ γὰρ ἀκηκόαμεν, καὶ οἴδαμεν, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν 
ἀλ nh ὁ σωτὴρ τοῦ κόσμου, 0 Χριστός. | 


ξ 20. Jesus teaches publicly in Galilee. 


Joun IV. 43—45, 
43 Μετὰ δὲ τὰς δύο ἡμέρας ἐξῆλϑεν ἐχεῖϑεν καὶ ἀπῆλϑεν εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν. 
~ ec - 
44 Αὐτὸς γὰρ Inoovs ἐμαρτύρησεν, ort προφήτης ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ πατρίδι τιμὴν οὐκ ἔχει. 
45 Ὅτε οὖν ἦλϑεν εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν, ἐδέξαντο αὐτὸν οἱ Γαλιλαῖοι; πάντα ἑωρακότες 
[ ᾽ 
ee , Hare U4 > ~ ¢ ~ 4 > τ ‘ 3 > \ « , 
ἃ ἐποίησεν ἐν ‘Fegocodvmorg ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ" καὶ αὐτοὶ γὰρ ἦλϑον εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν. 


Marru. IV. 17. Markl. 14. 15... 6. Luxe IV. 14, 15. 
17’Ano τότε ἤρξατο ὁ ᾽]η- 14 --κηρύσσων τὸ εὐαγγέλιον 14 ---χαὶ φήμη ἐξῆλϑε καϑ' 
σοῦς κηρύσσειν καὶ λέ. τῆς βασιλείας τοῦ ϑεοῦ ὅλης τῆς περιχώρου πε- 
Σ Pe. Tan Lay sie , ΜΑΣ ὅτου σὰ ι > A 
yey’ μετανοεῖτξ᾽ nyyt- 15" χαὶ λέγων" ὅτι πεπλη- 15 ρὲ αὑτοῦ. Καὶ αὕτος 
κε γὰρ ἡ βασιλεία τῶν ρωται ὁ καιρὸς καὶ γγι- ἐδίδασχεν ἐν ταῖς συνα- 
οὐρανῶν. xev ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ ϑεοῦ: γωγαῖς αὐτῶν δοξαζό- 
μετανοεῖτε καὶ πιστεύ.ς μενος ὑπὸ πάντων. 


3 ~ > , 
eve ἐν τῶ ευαγγελίῳ. 


Ζ 


᾿ῷ 27. Jesus again at Cana, where he heals the son of a Nobleman lying ill at Caper- 
naum.—Cana of Galilee. 


᾽ Υ δι > “ ᾿ 3 \ we τ , ? 3 , 8 
46 ἢλϑεν ovy [ὁ [Ιησοῦς] παλιν εἰ: τὴν Κανᾶ τῆς Γαλιλαίας, ὅπου ἐποίησε τὸ 
A - ἘΚ; ΄ Ἐν ε «" 3 , > ΄ ’ ‘nt 
47 υδωρ οἶνον. καὶ ἣν τις βασιλικός, ov O υἱὸς ἡτϑένει, ἐν Καπερναούμ. Οὗτος 
> ΄ σ > ~ 7 > ~ 3 , > y= , > ~ 4 
ἀκουσας, ott Inoovs yxev ἐκ τῆς Ιουδαίας εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν, ἀπῆλϑε πρὸς 
‘ ~ - 
αὗτον καὶ ἠρώτα αὐτόν, ἵνα καταβῇ καὶ ἰάσηται αὐτοῦ τὸν υἱόν" ἤμελλε γὰρ 
3 , T - Σ - ‘ » 
48 ἀποϑνήσχειν. Εἶπεν οὖν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς πρὸς αὐτόν" ἐὰν μὴ σημεῖα καὶ τέρατα ἰδῆτε, 


22 | ‘FROM OUR LORD’S FIRST PASSOVER [Parr III. 





JOHN Iv. 

49 ov μὴ πιστεύσητε. Aéyst πρὸς αὐτὸν ὁ βασιλικός" κύριε, κατάβηθι πρὶν 
50 ἀποϑανεῖν τὸ παιδίον μου. Aéyee αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, πορεύου" 6 υἱός σου ζῇ. 

καὶ ἐπίστευσεν ὁ ἄνϑρωπος τῷ λόγῳ, ᾧ εἶπεν αὐτῷ ᾿Ιησοῦς, καὶ ἐπορεύετο. 
51 Ἤδη δὲ αὐτοῦ καταβαίνοντος οἱ δοῦλοι αὐτοῦ ἀπήντησαν αὐτῷ καὶ ἀπήγγειλαν 
52 λέγοντες." ὅτι ὁ “Ὁ σου ζῇ. ᾿Ἐπύϑετο οὖν παρ αὐτῶν τὴν ὥραν, ἐν ἧ κομψό- 

τερον ἔσχρ᾽ καὶ εἶπον αὐτῷ" ὅτι χϑὲς ὥραν ἑβδόμην. ἀφῆκεν αὐτὸν ὁ πυρετός. 
ὅ8 Ἔγνω οὖν ὁ πατήρ, ὅτι ἐν ἐκείνη τῇ ὥρᾳ, ἐν ἧ εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς" ὅτι ὁ 
54 υἱός σου ζῇ. καὶ ἐπίστευσεν αὐτὸς καὶ ἡ οἰκία αὐτοῦ ὅλη. Τοῦτο πάλιν δεύτε- 

ρον σημεῖον ἐποίησεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐλϑὼν ἐκ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν. 


§ 28. Jesus at Nazareth; he is there rejected ; and fixes his abode at Capernaum, 


Luxe IV. 16—31. 


1. Καὶ ἦλϑεν εἰς τὴν Nalager, ov ἦν τεϑραμμένος" καὶ eso κατὰ τὸ εἰω- 
ϑὺς αὐτῷ ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τῶν σαββάτων εἰς τὴν συναγωγήν, καὶ ἀνέστη ἀναγνῶναι. 

17 Καὶ ἐπεδόϑη αὐτῷ βιβλίον Ἡσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου" καὶ ἀναπτύξας τὸ βιβλίον 
18 εὗρε τὸν τόπὸν οὗ ἦν γεγραμμένον ὃ πνεῦμα κυρίου ἐπὶ ἐμέ, οὗ εἵνεκεν ἔχρισέ 
μὲ εὐαγγελίσασϑαι πτωχοῖς, ἀπέσταλκέ με [ἰάσασϑαι τοὺς συντετριμμένους τὴν 
καρδίαν,] κηρύξαι αἰχμαλώτοις ἄφεσιν καὶ τυφλοῖς ἀνάβλεψιν, ἀποστεῖλαι :τε- 
19:0 ϑραυσμένους ἐν ἀφέσει, ' κηρύξαι ἐνιαυτὸν κυρίου δεκτόν. Καὶ πτύξας τὸ 
βιβλίον ἀποδοὺς τῷ ὑπηρέτῃ ἐκάϑισε, καὶ πάντων ἐν τῇ συναγωγῇ οἱ ὀφϑαλμοὶ 

21 ἦσαν ἀτενίζοντες αὐτῷ. Ἤρξατο δὲ λέγειν πρὸς αὐτούς " ὅτι σήμερον πεπλή- 
22 ρωται ἡ γραφὴ αὕτη ἐν τοῖς ὠσὶν ὑμῶν. Καὶ πάντες ἐμαρτύρουν αὐτῷ, καὶ 
᾿ἐϑαύμαζον ἐπὶ τοῖς λόγοις τῆς χάριτος τοῖς ἐκπορευομένοις ἐκ τοῦ στόματος 
28 ΜΑΣ καὶ ἔλεγον' οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν 6 υἱὸς ᾿Ιωσήφ; Καὶ εἶπε mode αὐτοῦς" 
πάντως ἐρεῖτέ μοι τὴν παραβολὴν ταὐτην᾽ ἰατρέ, ϑεράπεῦσον σεαυτόν" ὅσα 
ἠκούσαμεν γενόμενα ἐν τῇ Καπερναούμ, ποίησον καὶ ὧδε ἐν. τῇ πατρίδι 

24 σου. Εἶπε δέ ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐδεὶς προφήτης δεκτός ἐστιν ἐν τῇ πα- 
25 τρίδι αὑτοῦ. “En ἀληϑείας δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν, πολλαὶ χῆραι ἦσαν ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις 
Ἠλίου ἐν τῷ ᾿Ισραήλ, ὅτε ἐκλείσϑη ὁ οὐρανὸς ἐπὶ ἔτη τρία καὶ μῆνας ἕξ, ὡς 
28 ἐγένετο λιμὸς μέγας ἐπὶ πᾶσαν τὴν γῆν" καὶ πρὸς οὐδεμίαν αὐτῶν ἐπέμῳϑη 
27 ᾿Ηλίας, εἰ μὴ εἰς Σάρεπτα τῆς Σιδῶνος πρὸς γυναῖκα χήραν" Καὶ πολλοὶ 
λεπροὶ ἦσαν ἐπὶ ᾿Ελισσαίου τοῦ προφήτου ἐν τῷ ᾿Ισραήλ᾽ καὶ οὐδεὶς αὐτῶν 
28 ἐκαθαρίσϑη, εἰ μὴ Νεεμὰν ὁ Σύρος" Καὶ ἐπλήσϑησαν πάντες ϑυμοῦ ἐν τῇ ᾿ 
29 συναγωγῇ ἀκούοντες ταῦτα. Καὶ ἀναστάντες ἐξέβαλον αὐτὸν ἔξω τῆς πόλεως, 
καὶ ἤγαγον αὐτὸν ἕως τῆς ὀφρύος τοῦ ὄρους, ἐφ᾽ οὗ ἡ πόλις αὐτῶν φκοδόμητο, 

80 εἰς τὸ κατακρημνίσαι αὐτόν" αὐτὸς δὲ 


Μᾶάαττη. IV. 13—16. διελϑὼν διὰ μέσου αὐτῶν ἐπορϑύετο. 
13 Καὶ καταλιπὼν τὴν Ναζαρέτ, ἐλϑὼν 31 Καὶ κατῆλϑεν εἰς Καπερναούμ, πόλιν 
κατῴκησεν εἰς Καπερναοὺμ τὴν παι τῆς Γαλιλαίας.--- 


ῥαϑαλασσίαν ἐν ὑρίοις Ζαβουλὼν ; 
14 καὶ Νεφϑαλείμ' ἵνα πληρωϑῇ ῥηϑὲν διὰ “Ἡσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου Atyor- 





© 17, 18. Is. 61, 1. Comp. 18. 58,6, > 25,26. 1 Κ.17,1.9.  ° 27. 2K.5, Μ. 


§§ 28, 29.] UNTIL THE SECOND. . 23 





MATTH. Iv. 

γῆ Ζαβουλὼν καὶ γῆ Νεφϑαλείμ, ὁδὸν ϑαλάσσης, πέραν τοῦ ᾿Ιορδάνου; 

16 Γαλιλαία τῶν ἐθνῶν, ! ὁ λαὸς ὁ καϑήμενος ἐν σκότει εἶδε φῶς μέγα " καὶ τοῖς 
καϑημένοις ἐν χώρᾳ καὶ σκιᾷ ϑανάτου φῶς ἀνέτειλεν αὐτοῖς. 


15 tog* γ 


G 


§ 29. The call of Simon Peter and Andrew, and of James and John, with the miracu- 
lous draught of fishes.— Near Capernaum. 
Luxe V. 1—11. ῖ 


3χπ. \ “ΟΝ ων » ᾿ ~ ow ~ ~ 
1. “Eyéveto δὲ ἐν τῷ τὸν ὄχλον ἐπικεῖσϑαι αὐτῷ τοῦ ἀκούειν τὸν λόγον τοῦ ϑεοῦ, 


2 καὶ αὐτὸς ἦν ἑστὼς παρὰ τὴν λίμνην Γεννησαρέτ καὶ εἶδε δύο πλοῖα ἑστῶτα 
παρὰ τὴν λίμνην " οἱ δὲ ἁλιεῖς ἀποβάντες ἀπὶ αὐτῶν ἀπέπλυναν τὰ δίκτυα. 
3 Ἐμβὰς δὲ εἰς ἕν τῶν πλοίων, ὃ ἦν τοῦ Σίμωνος, ἠρώτησεν αὐτὸν ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς 
4. ἐπαναγαγεῖν ὀλίγον" καὶ καϑίσας ἐδίδασκεν ἐκ τοῦ πλοίου τοὺς ὄχλους. ὡς. 
δὲ ἐπαύσατο λαλῶν, εἶπε πρὸς τὸν Σίμωνα " ἐπανάγαγε εἰς τὸ ᾿βάϑορ, καὶ χα- 
5. λάσατε τὰ δίκτυα ὑ ὑμῶν εἰς ἄγραν. Καὶ ἀποκριϑεὶς ὁ Σίμων. εἶπεν αὐτῷ " ἐπι- 
στάτα, δὲ ὅλης τῆς νυχτὸς κοπιάσαντες οὐδὲν ἐλάβομεν" ἐπὶ δὲ τῷ ῥήματί σου 
Matra. IV. 18—22. Marx I. 16—20. 

18 Περιπατῶν δὲ[ δ᾽ Τησοῦς] 16 Περιπατῶν δὲ παρὰ τὴν 
παρὰ τῆν ϑάλασσαν ϑάλασσαν τῆς ΓΕΑλι- 
τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἶδε dio λαίας εἶδε Σίμωνα καὶ 
ἀδελφούς, Σίμωνα τὸν 7 

᾿ λεγόμενον Πέτρον καὶ 
᾿Ανδρέαν τὸν ἀδελφὸν 


6 χαλάσω τὸ δίκτυον. Kat 
τοῦτο ποιήσαντες συνέ- 
κλεισαν ἰχϑύων πλῆϑος᾽ 
mony * διεῤῥήγνυτο δὲ τὸ 
δίκτυον αὐτῶν, ! καὶ κα- 
τέγευσαν τοῖς μετόχοις 


F 


31 λούϑησαν αὐτῷ. 


αὐτοῦ, βάλλοντας ἀμφί- 
βληστρον εἰς τὴν ϑάλασ- 
σαν" ἦσαν γὰρ ἁλιεῖς. 


᾿Ανδρεαν τον ἀδελφὸν 
αὐτυῦ, ἀμφιβάλλοντας 
ἀμφίβληστρον ἐν τῇ Ou- 
λάσσῃ ᾿ ἦσαν γὰρ ἁλιεῖς. 


τοῖς ἐν τῷ ἑτέρῳ πλοίῳ, 
τοῦ ἐλϑόντας συλλαβέ- 
σϑαι αὐτοῖς" καὶ ἦλϑον, 

\ oo» > , ae 
καὶ ἐπλήσαν ἀμφότερα 
τὰ πλοῖα, [ὥςτε βυϑίζε. 


8 σϑὰι αὐτά. ᾿Ιδὼν δὲ Σίμων Πέερος προξέπεσε τοῖς τόνασι χοῦ Ἰησοῦ 


9 λέγων" ἔξελϑε an ἐμοῦ, ὅτι ἀνὴρ ἁμαρτωλός εἶμι, κύριε. 


Θάμβος γὰρ 


, ees | A , A A > ~ 9» & ~ ++ af > , 

περιέσχεν αὐτὸν καὶ πάντας τοὺς σὺν αὐτῷ ἐπὶ TH ἄγρᾳ τῶν ἰχϑύ- 
t A ‘ ‘ ‘ 

10 ὧν, ἢ συνέλαβον," ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ ᾿Ιάκωβον καὶ ᾿Ιωάννην, υἱοὺς Ζεβε- 


Α 
ὀπίσω μου, καὶ ποιή- 


oo ὑμᾶς ἁλιεῖς ἀνϑρώ- 
20 mov. 


Oi δὲ εὐϑέως 
> ’ A ; 3 
ἀφέντες τὰ δίχτυα ἤκο- 
. A 
Και 
προβὰς ἐκεῖϑεν εἶδεν ἀλ- 


λους δύο ἀδελφούς, ᾿Ιάκωβον τὸν τοῦ 
Ζεβεδαίου καὶ Ιωάννην τὸν ἀδελφὸν αὐ- 
~ > - ’ A ’ ~ 
τοῦ,ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ μετὰ Ζεβεδαίου TOV πα- 
} 39 “ὦ , A , e , . ᾿ ‘ 
τρὸς αὐτῶν καταρτίζοντας τὰ δίχτυα 20 τίζοντας τὰ δίκτυα" καὶ 


19 Καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς" δεῦτε 17 Καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ In- 


σοῦς " δεῦτε ὀπίσω μου, 
καὶ ποιήσω ὑμᾶς γενέ- 
σϑαι ἁλιεῖς ἀνθρώπων. 


18 Καὶ εὐθέως ἀφέντες τὰ 


, ς ~ > , 
δίχτυα αὐτῶν nxodov- 


19 ϑησαν αὐτῷ. 


,ὔ a F a 
δαίου, οἱ ἤσαν κοινῶνοι 

~ , A 
τῷ Σίμωνι. καὶ εἶπε 
προς τὸν Σίμωνα o Ϊη- 
σοῦς" μὴ φοβοῦ" ἀπὸ 
τοῦ νῦν ἀνθρώπους. ἔσῃ 
ζωγρῶν. . 


Καὶ προβὰς ἐκεῖϑεν 


ὀλίγον εἶδεν ᾿Ιάκωβον τὸν τοῦ Ζεβε- 

Α 3 

δαίου καὶ ᾿Ιωάννην τὸν ἀδελφὸν av- 
~ 4 ~ . ; 

τοῦ, καὶ αὐτους ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ καταρ- 


εὐθέως 





ἃ 14 εᾳ. Is. 8, 23, 9, 1. 


24 





22 αὐτούς. 


FROM OUR LORD’S FIRST’ PASSOVER [Parr ΠῚ. 

MATTH. IV. MARK I. LUKE V.. 
ee ‘ >. | oe 9 > , 4 a ‘ ΄ 4 
αὑτῶν" χαὶ ἐχάλεσεν ἐχάλεσεν αὑτοὺς. καὶ 11; Kat καταγαγοντὲς τὰ 


A 
Οἱ δὲ εὐθέως 
‘ ~ ‘ 
ἀφέντες τὸ πλοῖον καὶ 
τὸν πατέρα αὑτῶν ἦκο- 
. 


ἀφέντες τὸν πατέρα αὗ- 
τῶν Ζεβεδαῖον ἐν τῷ 
πλοίῳ μετὰ τῶν μισϑω- 


ΦΨ en, ee _ ὦ» > ie 
. πλοῖα emi τὴν γῆν, ἀφὲν- 
4 A > , 
τὲς ἅπαντα ἡκολουϑη- 


σαν αὐτῷ. 
λούϑησαν αὐτῷ. τῶν. ἀπῆλϑον ὀπίσω 


αὐτοῦ- 
§ 30. The healing of a Demoniac in the Synagogue,— Capernaum. 


Marx I. 21—28. Luxe IV. 31—37. 


χσ 4 χσ 3 ~ 
21 Kat εἰςπορεύονται εἰς Καπεργαούμ᾽ 31 —xai ἦν διδάσκων αὐτοὺς ἐν τοῖς 
. a Z Ἢ ᾿ oe 
καὶ εὐθέως τοῖς σάββασιν εἰςελϑὼν εἰς 32 σάββασι. Kai ἐξεπλήσσοντο ἐπὶ τῇ 
ΤΩΝ ‘ g/ ae 3. ~ ia: ΑΨ > 2 πᾶν a ae, Wd 
22 τὴν συναγωγὴν ἐδίδασκε. Καὶ ée- διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ, oz ἕν ἐξουσίᾳ ἣν ὁ λόγος 
πλήσσοντο ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ" ἦνγὰρ αὐτοῦ. he 
, $a > A . 9 Ὁ ἐφ ” A 
διδάσκων αὑτοὺς ὡς ξξουσίαν ἔχων καὶ 
7 
Kai ἦν ἐν 33 
τῇ συναγωγῖ, αὐτῶν ἄνθρωπος ἐν 
πνεύματι ἀκαϑάρτῳ, καὶ ἀνέκραξε 
94 1 λέγων" ἔα, τί ἡμῖν καὶ σοί, ᾿]ησοῦ 


23 οὐχ ὡς οἱ γραμματεῖς. Καὶ ἐν τῇ 

συναγωγῇ ἦν ἄνϑρωπος ἔχων πνεῦμα 

δαιμονίου ἀκαϑάρτου, καὶ ἀνέχραξε 

34 en , Ι , Sa γον 4 

φωνῇ peyahy' λέγων" ἔα, τί ἡμῖν και 

Ναζαρηνέ; ἦλϑες ἀπολέσαι ἡμᾶς. σοί, Ἰησοῦ Ναζαρηνέ; ἦλϑες ἀπολέ- 

~ ~ ~ δ ΕΝ 

25 οἶδά σε τίς εἶ, ὁ ἅγιος τοῦ ϑεοῦ. Καὶ σαι ἡμᾶς" οἶδά σὲ τίς εἶ, ὁ ἅγιος τοῦ 

᾿ἐπετίμησεν αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς λέγων" φι- 35 ϑεοῦ. Καὶ ἐπετίμησεν αὐτῷ ὁ ᾽]η- 

36 μώϑητι καὶ ἔξελϑε ἐξ αὐτοῦ. Καὶ σοῦς λέγων" φιμώϑητι καὶ ἔξελϑε ἐξ 

σπαράξαν αὐτὸν τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἀκά. αὐτοῦ" καὶ ῥῖψαν αὐτὸν τὸ δαιμόνιον 

A , : “~ , 5 ῳ- 3 A , G~ 9-3 a) ae A 

ϑαρτον καὶ χράξαν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ ἐξῆλ- εἰς τὸ μέσον ἐξῆλϑεν ἀπὶ αὐτοῦ μηδὲν 

27 dev ἐξ αὐτοῦ. Καὶ ἐθαμβήϑησαν 36 βλάψαν αὐτόν. Καὶ ἐγένετο ϑάμβος 
, ~ ες" A 

πάντες, ὥςτε συζητεῖν πρὸς αὑτοὺς ἐπὶ πάντας, καὶ συνελάλουν πρὸς ἀλ- 

~ τ 
λέγοντας" τί ἐστι τοῦτο ; τίς ἡ διδα- λήλους λέγοντες " τίς ὁ λόγος οὗτος ; 
a ε 4 7 σ ΦύγΦ , σ 39... 9 , ‘ ? > , 

χὴ ἡ καινὴ αὐτῇ; ot κατ ἐξουσίαν ὅτι ἐν ἐξουσίᾳ καὶ δυνάμει ἐπιτάσσει 

καὶ τοῖς πνεύμασι τοῖς ἀχαϑάρτοις τοῖς ἀκαϑάρτοις πτεύμασι, καὶ ἐξέρ- 

37 χονται; Καὶ ἐξεπορεύετο ἦχος περὶ 

αὐτοῦ εἰς πάντα τόπον τῆς περιχώ- 
ρου. 


ἐπιτάσσει, καὶ ὑπακούουσιν αὐτῷ ; 
28 Ἐξῆλθε δὲ ἡ ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εὐϑὺς εἰς 
ὅλην τὴν» περίχωρον τῆς Γαλιλαίας. 


§ 31. The healing of Peter’s wife’s mother, and many others.—Cpernaum. 


Marr. VIII. 14—17. Marx I, 29—34. 

141 Kai ἐλθὼν ὁ Ἰησοῦς £9 Kai εὐθέως ἐκ τῆς ov- 38 
εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν Πέτρορ γναγωγῆς ἐξελϑόντες ἦλ- 
εἶδε τὴν πενϑερὰν αὐ Dov εἰς τὴν οἰχίαν Σί- 
τοῦ βεβλημένην καὶ πυ- μωνος καὶ Avdgéov με- 
ρέσσουσαν. τὰ ᾿Ιακώβου καὶ ᾿Ιωάν- 

30 γου. “HH δὲ πενϑερὰ Si- 
μωνος κατέχειτο πυρέσ- 


Luxe IV, 38—41. 

᾿Αναστὰς δὲ ἐκ τῆς 
συναγωγῆς εἰςῆλϑεν εἰς 
τὴν οἰκίαν Σίμωνος. 
πεγϑερὰ δὲ τοῦ Σίμω- 
γος ἦν συγεχομέγη πυρε- 
τῷ μεγάλῳ, καὶ ἠρώτη- 
σαν αὐτὸν περὶ αὐτῆς. 


§§ 


30, 31, 32.] UNTIL THE SECOND. 25 





16 


17 


37 
38 


“0.5 
© 


23 


henna 


MATTH. VIII. MARK I. LUKE Iv. 
Kai ἥψατο σουσα᾽ καὶ εὐθέως λέ- 39 Καὶ ἐπιστὰς ἐπάνω αὐὖ- 
τῆς χειρὸς αὐτῆς, καὶ γουσιν αὐτῷ περὶ αὐτῆς. τῆς ἐπετίμησε τῷ πιρε- 
ἀφῆκεν αὐτὴν ὁ πυρε- 3 


a 


‘ ~ ‘ > ~ ᾽ 
Καὶ προςελϑὼν ἤγειρεν τῷ, καὶ ἀφῆκεν αὐτήν" 
’ 4 ‘ ‘ ~ ~ 4 ~ 
Tog" καὶ ἠγέρϑη καὶ αὐτὴν χρατήσας τῆς χε- παραχρῆμα δὲ ἀναστᾶ- 
, > ~ ‘ 8 ἂν % Rise , > ~ , 
διηκόνει αὑτοῖς. 00g αὐτῆς καὶ ἀφῆκεν 40 σὰ διηκόνει αὑτοῖς. -Av- 
¢ ‘ ~ , 
αὐτὴν ὁ πυρετὸς εὐθέως, γοντος δὲ τοῦ ἡλίου πάν- 
‘ ~ ad 
καὶ διηκόνει αὐτοῖς. τες, ὅσοι εἶχον ἀσϑε- 


A 7 ~ , ’ 
᾿Οψίας 33 ᾿Οψίας δὲ γενομένης, ὅτε νοῦντας νύσοις ποιχί- 
δὲ Bs ot - , ᾿ ὅδ ¢ nd send 4 ν 7 ee ’ . 
8 γενομένης moocirvey- ἔδυ 0 ἥλιος, ἔφερον πρὸς ais, ἤγαγον αὐτοὺς 
‘> , A «ea 
nav αὐτῷ δαιμονιζομέ. αὐτὸν πάντας tTovgxa- πρὸς αὐτόν᾽ ὁ δὲ eM 
~ 4 ~ ~ 

vous πολλούς" καὶ sé nog ἔχοντας καὶ τοὺς ἑχάστῳ αὐτῶν τὰς χεῖ-. 


w 


‘ , , f deh a: ae Wo} , 
βαλε τὰ πνεύματα λόγῳ, 33 SumorCoperorvg’ καὶ ἢ ρᾶς emtDeig ἐϑεράπευσεν 
A ’ ‘ ~ ’ σ 3 ’ > , > τ , - 4 
καὶ πάντας τοὺς κακῶς πόλις Oly ἐπισυνηγμένη 41 αὐτοὺς. ᾿Εξήρχετο δὲ 
Ν ‘ 
ἔχοντας ἐϑεράπευσεν᾽ 24 ἦν πρὸς τὴν ϑύραν. Καὶ καὶ δαιμόνια ano πολ- 
σ - + ~ ’ 4 
ὅπως πληρωϑῇ τὸ ῥη- ἐϑεράπευσε πολλοὺς και λῶν χράζοντα καὶ λέγον- 
Α A ~ ~ σ 
ϑὲν διὰ Ἡσαΐου τοῦ κῶς ἔχοντας ποιχίλαις τα ὅτι σὺ εἶ [ὁ Χρι- 
A 4 ‘ ~ ~ 
προφήτου λέγοντος ὃ γφόσοις, καὶ δαιμόνι. στὸς] ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ϑεοῦ. 
ὃν ᾿ς v > , yh dee a9 % 9° ~ > a” 
αὑτὸς tag acdersing πολλὰ ἐξέβαλε, καὶ οὐκ καὶ ἐπιτιμῶν οὐκ Elo 
« ~ ow ν A ‘ , 4 - ‘ , 4.9 Ἢ ~ 7 ” 
ἡμῶν ἔλαβε καὶ tag νό- role λαλεῖν τὰ δαιμόνια, αὐτὰ λαλεῖν, ort ἤδεισαν 
ε ‘ ‘ 
σους ἐβάστασεν. ὅτι ἔδεισαν αὐτόν. τὸν Χριστὸν αὐτὸν εἶναι. 


§ 32. Jesus with his Disciples goes from Capernaum throughout Galilee. 


Mark I. 35—39. Luxe IV. 42—44. 
4 . ‘ 9 Α 5 
Καὶ πρωΐ ἔννυχον λίαν ἀναστὰς ἐξ: 42. ΓΡΓενομένης δὲ ἡμέρας ἐξελϑὼν ἐπο- 
- λιν" > ” , / , > ” , ‘ cw 
ἤλϑε καὶ ἀπῆλϑεν εἰς ἔρημον τόπον, ρεύϑη εἰς ἔρημον τόπον, καὶ οἱ ὑχλοι 
ἃ 0 , ‘A , τ ba "»ἥ , 3 , ἃ, a > 
κἀκεῖ προςηύχετο. Καὶ κατεδίωξαν ἐπεζήτουν αὑτὸν, καὶ ἡλϑον ἕως av- 
- - ~ ~ ‘ ~ 
αὐτὸν ὁ Σίμων καὶ οἱ pet αὐτοῦ. τοῦ, καὶ κατεῖχον αὑτὸν τοῦ μὴ πορεύ- 
‘ ~ Ὁ ~ ‘ 4 
Καὶ εὑρόντες αὐτὸν λέγουσιν αὐτῷ" ὅτι 43 ἐσϑαι an αὐτῶν. ὋὉ δὲ εἶπε πρὸς 
~ ~ “ ‘ ~ 
πάντες ζητοῦσί σε. Καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς" αὐτούς" ὅτι xal ταῖς ἑτέραις πό- 
mn” 3 4 ᾽ , , ᾽ , ? Δὰν 
ἄγωμεν εἰς TUS ἔχομενας κωμοπόλεις, λεσιν εὐαγγελίσασϑαῖ μὲ δεῖ τὴν βασι- 
7 > ~ »ἭἍ Pak Φ - ‘ δ , é , ~ enw Σ σ > οι ~ ᾽ , 
(Ve κακεῖ “NOVEM εἰς τοῦτο γάρ ἐξελή- λείαν τοῦ ϑεου" Ort εἰς τοῦτο ἀπέ- 
αν 4 Qe" F ~ 
Avda. Kut ἣν κηρύσσων εἰς τὰς 44 σταλμαι. Καὶ ἢν κηρύσσων ἐν ταῖς 
‘ ᾽ - Φ a A ~ - ’ 
συναγωγὰς αὐτῶν, εἰς odnv τὴν ΓΓαλι- συναγωγαῖς τῆς Γαλιλαίας. 


λαίαν, καὶ τὰ δαιμόνια ἐχβάλλων. 
Matra. IV. 23—25. 
Kai περιῆγεν ὅλην τὴν Γαλιλαίαν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, διδάσκων ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς ai- 
τῶν καὶ κηρύσσων τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς βασιλείας καὶ ϑεραπείων πᾶσαν νόσον καὶ 


~ ~ - om ἢ ~ ~ σ A - , 
24 πᾶσαν μαλακίαν ἐν τῷ λαῷ. Καὶ ἀπῆλϑεν ἡ ἀκοὴ αὐτοῦ εἰς ὕλην τὴν Συρίαν" 


‘ , ~ ‘ - ‘ ΄ 

καὶ προφἤγέγκαν αὐτῷ πάντας τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας, ποικίλαις νόσοις καὶ βασά- 
A ὃ Α = 

vols συνεχομένους, καὶ δαιμονιζομένους καὶ σεληνιαζομένους καὶ παραλυτιχούς " 





® 17. Is. 53, 4, 
4 


26 FROM OUR LORD’S FIRST PASSOVER [Parr III. 





MATTH. IV. 
4A ~ ~ 
25 καὶ ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτούς. Kai ἠκολούϑησαν αὐτῷ ὄχλοι πολλοὶ and τῆς Γαλι- 
, A , Ἂν 4 , 3 , ‘ , ~> , 
λαίας καὶ Δεκαπόλεως καὶ “εροσολύμων καὶ Ιουδαίας καὶ πέραν tov Ιορδάνου. 


§ 33. The healing of a Leper.— Galilee. 


Marra. VIII. 2—4. Marx I. 40—45. Luxe V. 12—16. 
r A 4 ~ 
2 Kai ἰδού, λεπρὸς ἐλ- 40 Καὶ ἔρχεται πρὸς ad- 12 Kai ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ εἶ- 
~ 4 ~ ~ ~ 
Dav moogexvyer αὐτῷ τὸν λεπρὸς παραχαλῶν vee αὐτὸν ἐν μιᾷ τῶν 
? , >\ 7 - 72% A ~ ’ ΩΣ , > A 
λέγων" κύριε, ἐὰν ϑέλῃς, αὐτὸν καὶ γονυπετῶν πόλεων, καὶ ἰδού, ἀνὴρ 
΄ , , 2 "Ἢ ‘ , Θ᾿" Iw ‘ 
δύνασαί μὲ καϑαρίσαι. αὐτὸν καὶ λέγων αὐτῷ πλήρης λέπρας" καὶ ἰδὼν 
σ »»" , ’ A 3 ~ A Be | 
ott, ἐὰν ϑέλῃς, δύνασαί τὸν “Incovr, πεσὼν ἐπὶ 
A 
41 μὲ xadagica. Ὃ δὲ πρόφωπον ἐδεήϑη αὐ- 
3 a 7 ‘ ~ , ὃ , a4 
]ησοῦῖς σπλαγχνισϑεὶς τοῦ λέγων" κύριε, ἐὰν 
A ~ σ 
ἐχτείγας τὴν χεῖρα ywa- ϑέλῃς, δύνασαί μὲ κα- 
΄ - ~ ν᾿ - 
3 Καὶ ἐχτείνας τὴν χερα το αὐτοῦ καὶ λέγει ad- 18 ϑαρίσαι. Καὶ ἐχτείνας 
σ ? ~~ ae SD ~ aah , , ‘ ~ 7 > ~ 
ἥψατο αὑτοῦ ὃ Lyoovg τῷ" ϑέλω, καϑαρίσϑητι. τὴν χεῖρα ἥψατο αὐτοῦ 


aa 


, ’ ‘ ~ ” 
λέγων" ϑέλω, καϑαρί- 42 Καὶ εἰπόντος αὐτοῦ εὐ εἰπών" ϑέλω, καϑαρί- 
σϑητι. καὶ εὐϑέως ἐχατ ϑέως ἀπῆλϑεν ἀπὶ αὐ σϑητι. καὶ εὐθέως ἡ 

~ ~ A ~ 
ϑαρίσϑη αὐτοῦ ἡ λέπραᾳ. τοῦ ἡ λέπρα, καὶ exa- λέπρα ἀπῆλϑεν an αὖ- 


43 ϑαρίσϑη. Καὶ ἐμβρι- τοῦ. 

μησάμενος αὐτῷ εὐϑέως 
4 Καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ “Iy- 44 ἐξέβαλεν αὐτὸν " καὶ λέ- 11 Καὶ αὐτὸς παρήγγειλεν 
σοῦς" ὅρα, μηδενὶ εἴπῃς γεῖι αὐτῷ" ὅρα, μηδενὶὲ αὐτῷ μηδενὶ εἰπεῖν" ah- 
ἀλλὰ ὕπαγε, σεαυτὸν μηδὲν εἴπῃς" ἀλλ᾿ ὕπαγε, λὰ ἀπελϑὼν» δεῖξον σεαυ- 
δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ, καὶ προς- σεαυτὸν δεῖξον τῷ ἱερεῖ, τὸν τῷ ἱερεῖ, καὶ προςέ- 
ἕνεγχε τὸ δῶρον, ὃ προς- καὶ προφένεγκε περὶ τοῦ © vEYKE περὶ τοῦ καϑαρι- 
érats Μωὺσῆς, εἰς μαρ- καϑαρισμοῦ σου, ἃ προς- σμοῦ σου, καϑὼς προςἕ- 
᾿ς φύριον αὐτοῖς. ἔταξε Μωὺσῆς, εἰς wag- take Μωϊῦσοῆς, εἰς μαρ- 
45 τύριον αὐτοῖς." “O δὲ 15 τύριον αὐτοῖς." ΔΙιήρχε- 
ἐξελϑὼν ἤρξατο κηρύσσειν πολλὰ ᾿ το δὲ μᾶλλον ὁ λόγος περὶ 
καὶ διαφημίζειν τὸν λόγον, were αὐτοῦ, καὶ συνήρχοντο ὄχλοι πολλοὶ 
μηκέτι αὐτὸν δύνασϑαι φανερῶς εἰς ἀκούειν καὶ ϑεραπεύεσϑαι ὑπὶ αὐτοῦ 
πόλιν εἰςελϑεῖν" ἀλλ ἔξω ἐν ἐρήμοις 16 ἀπὸ τῶν ἀσϑενειῶν αὑτῶν. Αὐτὸς δὲ 
τόποις ἦν, καὶ ἤρχοντο πρὸς αὐτὸν ἦν ὑποχωρῶν ἐν ταῖς ἐρήμοις καὶ προς: 

πανταχόϑεν. ευχόμενος. 


§ 34. The healing of a Paralytic.—Capernaum, 


Marx II. 1—12., Loxe V. 17—26, 
‘ , 9 ~ 3 φΦ 200 > ~ ~ ε ~ A 
1 Kai πάλιν εἰςῆλϑεν cig Καπερ- 17 Kai ἐγένετο ἐν μιᾷ τῶν ἡμερῶν, καὶ 
‘ >¢ ~ sap ’ _ Φ 2 Δ ἢ , ‘ » ee , 
ψαοὺμ dt ἡμερῶν" καὶ ἠχούσϑη, ort αὑτὸς ἣν διδασκῶν" καὶ σὰν χαϑή- 
2 εἷς οὖχόν ἐστι. Καὶ εὐθέως συνή- μενοι Dagioaior καὶ τομοδιδάσκαλοι, 





5. 4 etc, Comp. Lev. 14, 2 sq. 


§§ 33, 34.] 


UNTIL THE 


SECOND. QT 





MARK Il. 

’ σ΄ ;; ~ 
χϑησαν πολλοί, ὥςτε μηκέτι χωρεῖν 
‘ 4 ᾿ ΔΝ A , \ 95 7 
μηδὲ τὰ πρὸς τὴν ϑυραν" καὶ ἐλάλει 

αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον. 


LUKE V. : 
a Ft 3 , s ld , 
οἱ ἤσαν ἐληλυϑότες ex πάσης κωμῆς 
τῆς Γαλιλαίας καὶ ᾿Ιουδαίας καὶ ‘Te- 
ρουσαλήμ᾽ καὶ δύναμις κυρίου ἦν εἰς 


Matra. IX. 2—8. - 
Kai ἰδού, προςέφε- 
ρον αὐτῷ παραλυτικὸν 
ἐπὶ χλίγνης βεβλημένον. 


MARK II. 
> \ sy > 

3 Kat ἔρχονται πρὸς αὐὖ- 

A 
TOV παραλυτικὸν φέρον- 
τες, αἰρόμενον ὑπὸ τεσ- 
A 
4 σάρων. Καὶ μὴ δυνά- 


~ 4 
18 τὸ (aout αὐτούς. Καὶ 
“ ἰδού, ἄνδρες φέροντες 
> ee , » 
ἐπὶ κλίνης ἄνϑρωπον, 
Δ ΄ , 
og ἣν παραλελυμένος, 
A 3% ἢ > Ἁ » 
καὶ ἐζήτουν αὑτὸν εἰς- 


μενοι προςεγγίσαι αὐτῷ 
διὰ τὸν ὄχλον, ἀπεστέγα- 
σαν τὴν στέγην, ὅπου ἦν, 
καὶ ἐξορύξαντες χαλῶσι 


~ ‘ ~ 3 7 
ἐγεγχεῖν καὶ ϑεῖναι ἐνώ- 
3 ~ pe GY A « μι 

19 πιον avtov. Καὶ μὴ εὑροντὲς ποιᾶς 
3 ig 3 , ᾿ A A 

εἰςενέγκωσιν αὑτόν, διὰ τὸν ὕχλον, 

᾽ ’ 3... [4 v ~ ‘ ~ 

ἀναβάντες ἐπὶ τὸ δῶμα διὰ τῶν 


A , > > t , ; ~ 3.1.4 \ ~ 
3 τὸν χράββατον, em @ κεράμων καϑῆκαν KUTOY σὺν τῷ κλινι- 
€ ‘ 
ὁ παραλυτικὸς κατέ- δίῳ εἰς τὸ μέσον ἔμπρο- 
x A 4 ~ ~ a 
MATTH. IX. ὅ χκειτο Ἰδὼν δὲ ὁ 20 σϑεν tov “Incov. Καὶ 


καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς τὴν 
πίστιν αὐτῶν εἶπε τῷ 
παραλυτικῷ: ϑάρσει, 
τέχνον" ἀφέωνταί σοι 
αἱ ἁμαρτίαι σου. Καὶ 
ἰδού, τινὲς τῶν γραμ- 
ματέων εἶπον ἐν ἑἕαυ- 
τοῖς οὗτος βλασφημεῖ. 


4 Καὶ ἰδὼν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς 
τὰς ἐνθυμήσεις αὐτῶν 
εἶπεν" ἵνα τί ὑμεῖς ἐν- 

~ A > 
ϑυμεῖσϑε πονηρὰ ν 
ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν ; 


5 Τί γάρ ἐστιν εὐκοπώτε- 
ρον, εἰπεῖν" ἀφέωνταί 
σοι αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰπεῖν" 
ἔγειραι καὶ περιπάτει; 


σ ~ σ 
6 Ἵνα δὲ εἰδῆτε, ὅτι 

> , # ¢ a) 
ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὃ υἱὸς 
~ 4 ~ 
τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐπὶ τῆς 
γῆς ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας" 


᾽ ~ ‘ , > 
]ησοὺς τὴν πίστιν av- 
τῶν λέγει τῷ παραλυ- 
Tix@* τέχνον, ἀφέωνταί 
σοι αἱ ἁμαρτίαι σου. 
3 
6 Hoav δέ 
, > ~ , 
γραμματέων ἐκεῖ καϑη- 


τινὲς τῶν 


A <? 
μενοι καὶ διαλογιζόμενοι 
3 ~ ~ 
ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις αὑτῶν' 

, τ 7 ~ 

7 ti οὗτος οὐτω λαλεῖ 

βλασφημίας ; τίς δύνα. 

ται ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας, 
ἘΝ 

8 εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ Geog; Καὶ 

3 ; 3 A = 3 
εὐϑέως ἐπιγνοὺς ὁ In- 
σοῦς τῷ πνεύματι αὑτοῦ, 
σ σ > ‘ , 
Ott ουτως autor διαλογι- 
ζονται ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, εἶπεν 
αὐτοῖς" τί ταῦτα δια- 
λογίζεσϑε ἐν ταῖς καρδί.- 

9 αἱἰς ὑμῶν; Ti ἐστιν 
εὐκοπώτερον, εἰπεῖν τῷ 
παραλυτικῷ " ἀφέωνταί 

, \ 
σοι αἱ ἁμαρτίαι, ἢ εἰ- 
~ °F. 
πεῖν" ἔγειραι καὶ ἀρόν σου 
A , 4 
τὸν χραββατον καὶ πε- 
’ a - 

10 ριπάτει; “Ive δὲ εἰδῆτε, 
σ “ὦ Ψ' » c cA 
ὅτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὁ υἱὸς 
τοῦ ἀνϑρώπου ἐπὶ τῆς 

- ? 
γῆς ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας" 


> A ‘ ? 3 - 
ἰδὼν τὴν πίστιν αὑτῶν 
NOM me ay 
εἶπεν αὐτῷ" ἄνϑρωπε, 
ἀφέωνταί σοι αἱ ἁμαρ- 
‘ 

21 τίαι σου Καὶ ἤρξαντο 
διαλογίζεσϑαι οἱ youp- 
ματεῖς καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι 

t 
λέγοντες " τίς ἐστιν οὐ- 
a ~ 
τος, ὃς λαλεῖ βλασφη- 
, 
pices ; δύναται 
ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας, εἰ μὴ 

22 μόνος ὁ ϑεός; ἜἘπι- 

« 3 ~ 

ὃ ᾿]1ησοὺς 
‘ A > 

τοὺς διαλογισμους αὖ- 

τῶν, ἀποχριϑεὶς εἶπε 

‘ tae , 
πρὸς wvtovg’ ti δια- 
λογίζεσϑε ἐν ταῖς καρ- 
δίαις ὑμῶν; 


, 
TiS 


γνοὺς δὲ 


Τί ἐστιν εὐκο- 
πώτερον, εἰπεῖν" ἀφέ- 


23 


ὠνταί σοι αἱ ἁμαρτίαι 
si ~ 
σου, ἢ εἰπεῖν " ἔγειρα καὶ 
περιπάτει; 
σ - 
24 Iva δὲ εἰδῆτε, 
σ 3 , Ν « «Α 
ott ἐξουσίαν ἔχει ὃ υἱὸς 
τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐπὶ τῆς 
γῆς ἀφιέναι ἁμαρτίας " 


28 FROM OUR LORD’S FIRST PASSOVER UNTIL THE SECOND. [Part ΠῚ. 





MATTH. IX. MARK Il, 


LUKE V. 
, , ~ , ~ ~ ~ 
(τότε λέγει τῷ maga- (λέγει τῷ παραλυτικῷ) (εἶπε τῷ παραλελυμένῳ") 
νον > A ΝΣ ς A ἐς ‘ > 
λυτιχῷ ") ἐγερϑεὶς ἀρόν 11 1 σοὶ λέγω" ἔγειραι καὶ σοὶ λέγω" ἔγειραι, καὶ 
" , ἣνν x \ ’ ’ Ν ‘ ts ἢ 
σου τὴν κλίνην καὶ ὕπαι ἀροντὸν χράββατόν cov ἄρας τὸ xhividior σου 


> ‘ , ,¢ > ‘ , , 3 \ , 
γε εἰς τὸν οἶχόν Gov. καὶ ὑπαγε εἰς τὸν οἶκόν πορεύου εἰς τὸν οἴχόνσου. 


7 Καὶ ἐγερϑεὶς ἀπῆλϑεν 12 cov. Καὶ ἠγέρϑη εὐ- 25 Καὶ παραχρῆμα ἄνα- 


> ‘ - ἥ΄. ὧν , ιν" ‘ , ‘ > 2 ~ 

εἰς τὸν οἶκον savrov. ϑέως καὶ ἄρας τὸν χράβ. στὰς ἐνώπιον αἷτῶν, 
3.. “ 3 

βατον ἐξῆλϑεν ἐναντίον ἄρας ip ᾧ κατέκειτο, 
πάντων, ἀπῆλϑεν εἰς τὸν οἶκον 

€ ~ , ‘ 
αὑτοῦ δοξάζων τὸν 

A σ 

8 ᾿Ιδόντες δὲ οἱ ὄχλοι ὥςτε ἐξίστα- 26 ϑεόν. Καὶ ἔκστασις 
> ’ 4 3g ἡ , ‘ γ΄ δ 9 4 
ἐθαύμασαν καὶ s0Ea- σϑαι πάντας καὶ δοξά-. ἔλαβεν ἅπαντας, καὶ 


‘ ‘ 
σαν tov ϑεὸν tov δόντα Ce τὸν ϑεὸν λέγοντας. ἐδόξαζον τὸν ϑεόν" καὶ 
3 , ’ - σ > , σ » 5 , , , 
ἐξουσίαν τοιαύτην τος ott οὐδέποτε οὕτως ei- ἑπλήσϑησαν φύβου, de- 

σ 
ἀνϑρώποις. δομεν. γοντες " ὅτι εἴδομεν πα- 
ράδοξα σήμερον. 


§ 35. The call of Matthew.—Capernaum. 


Matru. IX. 9. Marx II. 13, 14. Luxe V. 27, 28... 
* 9 Kut παράγων ὁ Ἴη- 1' Καὶ ἐξῆλϑε πάλιν 2t Kai μετὰ ταῦτα ἐξῆλ- 
σοῦς ἐχεῖϑεν εἶδεν ἄν. παρὰ τὴν ϑόάλασσαν' De καὶ ἐθεάσατο τελώ- 
~ , a. 
ϑρωπον καϑήμενον ἐπὶ καὶ πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος ἴρχετο γὴν ὀτόματι Aeriv καϑή- 
A , ~ A > , 4 So 7 » >a 4 , 
τὸ τελώτιον, Ματϑαῖον πρὸς αὐτόν, καὶ ἐδίδα. μενον Emi τὸ τελώνιον, 
΄ ‘ oo. 
λεγόμενον, καὶ λέγει αὐ- 14 oxev αὐτούς. Καὶ παρά. καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ" ἀκο- 
~ ~ A 
τῷ ἀκολούϑει μοι. καὶ γων εἶδε Aevir, τὸν τοῦ 28 Lovde μοι. Καὶ καταλι- 
» 8 > , > , , ‘ σ > ‘ 
ἀναστὰς ἠκολούϑησεν “Alqaiov, χαϑήμενον nav anarta, ἀναστὰς 
~ A ~ 
αὐτῷ. ἐπὶ τὸ τελώνιον, καὶ ἠκολούϑησεν αὐτῷ. 
λέγει αὐτῷ ἀκολούϑει 
μοι. καὶ ἀναστὰς ἦχο- 
, > ~ 
Lovd nosy αὑτῷ. 


vA 


PART .EX. 


OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER, AND THE SUBSEQUENT TRANSACTIONS 
uy UNTIL THE THIRD. 


Time: One year. 


§ 36. The Pool of Bethesda; the healing of the infirm man; and our Lord’s 
subsequent discourse.—Jerusalem. 


Joun V. 1—47. 
~ T ~ 4 ~ 
Ὧν. ΑΕΓ ἣν ἑορτὴ τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων, καὶ ἀνέβη ὁ Inoovs εἰς ἱἹεροσόλυμα. 
» ~ \ a. = 
2 Ἔστι δὲ ἐν τοῖς ἱΙεροσολύμοις ἐπὶ τῇ προβατικῇ κολυμβήϑρα, ἡ ἐπιλεγομένη 
“ ee ~ A 
3 Ἑβραϊστὶ Βηϑεσδίά, πέντε στοὰς ἔχουσα. “Ev ταύταις κατέχειτο πλῆϑος πολὺ 
τῶν ἀσϑενούνεων, τυφλῶν, χωλῶν, ξηρῶν, ἐχδεχομένων τὴν τοῦ ὕδατος κίνησιν. 
4 Ayyehos γὰρ κατὰ καιρὸν κατέβαινεν ἑ ἐν τῇ κολυμβήϑρᾳ καὶ ἐτάρασσε τὸ ὕδωρ᾽ 
ὁ οὖν πρῶτος ἐμβὰς μετὰ τὴν ταραχὴν τοῦ ὕδατος ὑγιὴς ἐγίνετο, ᾧ ᾧ δήποτε 
5 κατείχετο νοσήματι. Ἦν δέ τις ἄνϑρωπος ἐκεῖ τριάκοντα καὶ ὀκτὼ ἔτη ἔχων 
6 ἐν τῇ ἀσϑενείᾳ. Τοῦτον ἰδὼν ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς κατακείμενον καὶ γνούς, ὅτι πολὺν ἤδη 
> ~~ A « ‘ , > , »] wes Δ, -2 Le 
7 yoovoy ἔχει, λέγει αὐτῷ" θέλεις ὑγιὴς γενέσϑαι; “Anexoidn αὐτῷ ὁ ἀσϑενῶν 
, + 3 μ᾿ . σ ~ Si , » 3 ‘ 
κύριε, ἄνϑρωπον οὐκ ἔχω, We, ὁταν ταραχϑῇ τὸ υδωρ, βάλῃ μὲ εἰς THY κολυμ- 
‘ > t % οΥ̓͂ δι δὰ «ἀρ \ 3 - , , 1 a 
8 βήϑραν" ev ᾧ δὲ ἔρχομαι ἐγώ, ἄλλος πρὸ ἐμοῦ καταβαίνει. AkyEr αὐτῷ ὃ 
3 ~ ” τ΄ ‘ , , ‘ , aR, ἢ 24 τὸ ee 
9 Injoovg: ἐγειραι, ἀρον τὸν κράββατον cov καὶ περιπάτει. Καὶ evd ews ἐγένετο vying 
C4 # abe A , . - \ , 4 A ’ ᾽ 
ὁ ἀνϑρωπος, καὶ HOE τὸν κῥαββατον αὑτοῦ καὶ περιεπάτει. ἣν δὲ δαββατὸν ey 
10 ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ. Ἔλεγον οὖν οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι τῷ τεθεῤαπευμένῳ᾽ σάββατόν ἐστιν" 
11 οὐκ ἔξεστί σοι ἄραι τὸν κράββατον. ‘Anexoidn αὐτοῖς" ὃ ποιήσας μὲ ὑγιῆ, 
12 ἐκεῖνός μοι εἶπεν" doov τὸν κράββατόν σου καὶ περιπάτει. ᾿Ηρώτησαν ove 
αὐτόν" τίς ἐστιν 6 ἄνϑρωπος ὁ εἰπών cor’ ἄρον τὸν χράββατόν σου καὶ περι- 
, ε u's ‘ 9 ὦ τῆς. ae ΤΥ ΎΩ, er 
13 mater; O δὲ ἰαϑεις οὐκ 108, τίς ἐστιν" ὁ γὰρ Ἰησοῦς eSevevoev ὄχλ ov ὄντος ἐν 
14 τῷ τύπῳ. Μετὰ ταῦτα sigiaxes αὐτὸν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ" 
a e A , ᾿ς , « a a A ~ 2 ’ , > ~ 
15 ie, ὑγιὴς γέγονας" μηχέτι ἁμάρτανε, We μὴ χεῖρον σοί τι γένηται. ‘Aniddep 
¢ » A > ’ ~ > 7 σ 3 ~ > « ’ 2.9 
ὁ ἄνϑρωπος xat ἀνήγγειλε τοῖς Jovduiorg, or ᾿]ησοῦς ἐστιν ὃ ποιήσας αὑτὸν 
~ ya ~ , ~ « \ > 
16 ὑγιῆ. Καὶ διὰ τοῦτο ἐδίωκον τὸν ᾿]ησοῦν οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι καὶ ἐζήτουν αὐτὸν ἀπο- 


[ 


“> ᾿ 


r ‘ 
Pt Gry. Cea, hen ἢ δι δ kee Man Mewes C we tg ml de Ὁ ς δῶρ ! 


al 


30 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [Parr IV. 





ΘΗΝ ν. 
~ [χὰ ~ 
17 κτεῖναι, ὅτι ταῦτα ἐποίει ἐν σαββάτῳ. Ὁ δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς ἀπεχρίνατο αὐτοῖς" ὁ 
18 πατήρ μον. ἕως ἄρτι ἐργάζεται, κἀγὼ ἐργάζομαι. Διὰ τοῦτο οὖν μᾶλλον ἐζή- 
toy αὐτὸν οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι ἀποκτεῖναι, ὅτι οὐ μόνον ἔλυε τὸ σάββατον, ἀλλὰ καὶ 
19 πατέρα ἴδιον ἔλεγε τὸν ϑεόν, i σὸν ἑαυτὸν ποιῶν τῷ ϑεῷ. “Ἵπεκρίνατο οὖν ὁ 
᾿]ησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς" ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐ δύναται ὁ υἱὸς ποιεῖν ἀφ 
ἑαυτοῦ οὐδέν, ἐὰν μή τι βλέπῃ τὸν πατέρα ποιοῦντα" ἃ γὰρ ἂν ἐκεῖνος ποιῇ, 
20 ταῦτα καὶ ὁ υἱὸς ὁμοίως ποιεῖ. Ὁ γὰρ πατὴρ φιλεῖ τὸν υἱὸν καὶ πάντα δείχνυ- 
σιν αὐτῷ, ἃ αὐτὸς ποιεῖ, καὶ μείζονα τούτων δείξει αὐτῷ ἔργα, ἵνα ὑμεῖς ϑαυ- 
21 μάζητε. Ὥςπερ γὰρ 6 πατὴρ ἐγείρει. τοὺς εχροὺς καὶ ζωοποιεῖ, οὕτω καὶ ὃ 
22 εἰὸς ovg ϑέλει ζωοποιεῖ. Οὐδὲ γὰρ ὁ πατὴρ χρίνει οὐδένα, ἀλλὰ τὴν κρίσιν 
23 πᾶσαν δέδωκε τῷ υἱῷ, ' ἵνα πάντες τιμῶσι τὸν υἱόν, χαϑὼς τιμῶσι τὸν πατέρα. 
34 ὁ μὴ τιμαῖρ τὸν υἱὸν οὐ τιμᾷ τὸν πατέρα τὸν πέμψαντα αὐτόν. Anip ὁ ἀμὴν 
λέγω 4 ὑμῖν, ὅτι ὁ τὸν λόγον μον ἀκούων καὶ πιστεύων τῷ πέμψαντί μὲ ἔχει ζωὴν 
αἰώνιον καὶ εἰς χρίσιν οὐκ ἔρχεται, ἀλλὰ μεταβέβηκεν ἐκ τοῦ ϑανάτου εἰς τὴν 
, 3 ‘ ΄ 4 ’ c ww ©@ ” σ A | wa σ € 5 dee ’ 
25 ζωήν. ᾿Α΄μὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι ἔρχεται ὥρα, καὶ νῦν ἐστιν, ὅτε οἱ γεχροὶ ἀκού- 
i ἤν Oy ? μιν, 
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ A , σ ‘ 
26 σονται τῆς φωνῆς tov υἱοῦ tov Feov, καὶ οἱ ἀκούσαντες ζήσονται. “Qemee γὰρ 
ὁ πατὴρ ἔχει ζωὴν ἐν ἑαυτῷ, οὕτως ἔδωκε καὶ τῷ υἱῷ ζωὴν ἔχειν ἐν ἑαυτῷ 
>» eae , ” 5. “ ‘ , ~ 4 «" > τ 3 , ‘ 
27 28 καὶ ἐξουσίαν ἔδωχεν αὐτῷ καὶ κρίσιν :moriv, ὅτι εἷὸς ἀνθϑρώπρυ ἐστί. My 
~ t ~ 
ϑαυμάζετε τοῦτο" ὅτι ἔρχεται ὥρα, ἐν ἧ πάντες οἱ ἐν τοῖς μνημείοις ἀκούσονται 
29 τῆς φωνῆς αὐτοῦ, ' καὶ ἐκπορεύσονται οἱ τὰ ἀγαϑὰ ποιήσαντες εἰς ἀνάστασιν 
~ ~ ‘ 
30 ζωῆς, οἱ δὲ τὰ φαῦλα πράξαντες εἰς ἀνάστασιν κρίσεως Οὐ δύναμαι ἐγὼ 
ing ~ € A 3 
ποιεῖν ἀπ᾿ ἐμαυτοῦ οὐδέν" καϑὼς ἀκούω, κρίνω, καὶ ἡ κρίσις ἡ ἐμὴ δικαία ἐστίν, 
ὅτι οὐ ζητῶ τὸ ϑέλημα τὸ ἐμόν, ἀλλὰ τὸ ϑέλημα τοῦ πέμψαντός μὲ [πατρός]. 
> 4 ϑι ~ δεν - « , > »” > , » 
3132 Εὰν ἐγὼ μαρτυρῶ περι ἐμαυτοῦ, ἡ μαρτυρία μου οὐκ ἔστιν ἀληϑής. “Adios 
~ ~ 4 σ b a « 
ἐστὶν ὁ μαρτυρῶν περὶ ἐμοῦ, καὶ οἶδα, ὅτι ἀληϑής ἐστιν ἡ μαρτυρία, ἣν μαρτυρεῖ 
Φ » ~ « ~ > , 4 3 / ‘ , wv” > 7 
33 περι ἕμου. Ὑμεῖς ἀπεσταάλκατε πρὸς shai tly καὶ μεμαρτυρὴχξ τῇ ἀληθεῖς, 
34 Ἐγὼ δὲ οὐ παρὰ ἀνθρώδου τὴν μαρευρίαν λαμβάνω, ἀλλὰ ταῦτα λέγω, ἵνα 
35 ὑμεῖς σωϑῆτε. Ἐκεῖνος ἦ Vi ὁ λύχνος ὃ 0 καϊόμενοῦ καὶ poise, ὑμεῖς δὲ ἠθελήσατε 
36 ἀγαλλιαϑῆναι πρὸς ὥραν ἐν τῷ φωτὶ αὐτοῦ. ᾿Εγὼ δὲ ἔγω τὴν μαρτυρίαν μείζω 
τοῦ ᾿Ιωάννου᾽ τὰ γὰρ ἔργα, ἃ ἔδωχέ μοι ὁ πατήρ, ἵνα τελειώσω αὐτά, αὐτὰ τὰ 
~ «ν᾿ ‘ ~ σ 3, ὃ 
37 ἔργα, ἃ ἐγὼ ποιῶ, μαρτυρεῖ περὶ ἐμοῦ, ὅτι ὃ πατήρ μὲ ἀπέσταλκε" καὶ ὁ πέμψας 
pe πατὴρ αὐτὸς μεμαρτύρηχε περὶ ἐμοῦ. οὔτε φωνὴν αὐτοῦ ἀκηκόατε πώποτε, 
~ “«“ ~ σ΄ 
838 οὔτε εἶδος αὐτοῦ ἑωράκατε, | καὶ τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἔχετε μένοντα ἐν ὑμῖν, ὅτι 
~ ~ Py ~ A , σ 
39 ὃν ἀπέστειλεν ἐχεῖνος, τούτῳ ὑμεῖς οὐ πιστεύετε. ᾿Ερευνᾶτε τὰς γραφάς, ὅτι 
~ ~ ‘ ~ ~ ΕἾ 
ὑμεῖς δοκεῖτε ἐν αὐταῖς ζωὴν αἰαΐνιον ἔχειν, καὶ ἐκεῖναί εἰσιν αἱ μαρτυροῦσαι περὶ 
- - σ ‘ Ν , i ’ 
40 41 ἐμοῦ" καὶ ov ϑέλετε ἐλϑεῖν πρός με, ἵνα ζωὴν ἔχητε. Δόξαν παρὰ ἀνϑρώ- 
᾽ , ! 3 >» « ~ μή ‘ » ~ ~ > Ν > «ς 
42 mov οὐ λαμβάνω, ' add ἐγνωκα ὑμᾶς, ὅτι τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ ϑεοῦ οὐκ ἔχετε Ev ἑαυ- 
- 3 ‘ 35 ἢ > ~ νῷ , ~ , ‘ > 2 , ὃ , . 54 
43 τοῖς. ᾿Εγὼ ἐλήλυϑα ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ πατρὸς μου, καὶ ov λαμβάνετε με΄ say 
~ ~ ~ ’ hed , ¢ -" 
44 ἄλλος ἔλϑῃ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τῷ ἰδίῳ, ἐχεῖνον λήψεσϑε. ΠΙῶς δύνασϑε ὑμεῖς πι- 
- , δι ὟΝ , ‘ ‘ ‘ , ‘ ‘ ~ , 
στεῦσαι, δόξαν παρὰ ἀλλήλων λαμβάνοντες, καὶ τὴν δόξαν τὴν παρὰ τοῦ moro” 
= a ᾿ - ΄ ‘ , ᾿ ὦ δι δὼ fo 
45 ϑεοῦ ov ζητεῖτε; Μὴ δοκεῖτε, ὅτι ἐγὼ κατηγορήσω ὑμῶν πρὸς τὸν πατέρα" ἔστιν 


ε : 





: ® 29. Comp. Dan. 12, 2. 


8.371 


UNTIL THE THIRD. 


91 





JOHN ν. 

46 ὁ κατηγορῶν ὑμῶν Μωῦοῆς, εἰς ὃν ὑμεῖς ἠλπίκατε. Εἰ γὰρ ἐπιστεύετε Μωῦοῇ, 

47 ἐπιστεύετε ἂν ἐμοί" περὶ γὰρ ἐμοῦ ἐκεῖνος ἔγραψεν. Εἰ δὲ τοῖς ἐκείνου γράμ- 
μασιν οὐ πιστεύετε, πῶς τοῖς ἐμοῖς ῥήμασι πιστεύσετε ; 


37. The Disciples pluck ears of grain on the Sabbath.— On the way to Galilee? 


Matra. XII. 1—8. 
1° Ἐν ἐχείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ 
5 3 ~ ~ 
ἐπορέύϑη ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς τοῖς 
r ~ ’ 
σάββασι διὰ τῶν σπορί- 
< ‘ A 3 
μων" οἱ δὲ μαϑηται αὖ- 
~ ὁ , + 
τοῦ ἐπείνασαν καὶ ἢ0- 
4 
ἕαντο τίλλειν στάχυας 
‘4 
καὶ ἐσϑίειν Οἱ δὲ Da- 
ρισαῖοι ἰδόντες εἶπον 
> ~ Sa AP Ce , 
αὐτῷ" ἰδοὺ, οἱ μαϑηται 


- .“ ? 
σου ποιουσιίνΨ, O OVX 


23 


24 


~ , 
ἔξεστι ποιεῖν ἐν σαββά- 


Ps > ~ 
τῳ. ‘O δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς" 
3 ’ 
οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε, τί ἐποίησε 
Δαυΐδ, 


ἈΠ > > ~ bh ned 
; HAL OL MET αὐτου; πῶς 


[χὰ 3 , 
ὃτε ἐπείνασε, 
>~ ᾽ ‘ 5 
εἰςῆλϑεν εἰς τὸν Οἶχον 
- - 4 A A 
τοὺ ϑεου, καὶ τοὺς ἂρ- 
~ ’ 
τους τῆς προϑέσεως 
Υ « > Med 
ἔφαγεν,. οἷς οὐκ ἕξον 
- > ~ ~ Igor 
ἢν αὐτῷ φαγεῖν, οὐδὲ 
- ~ > A 
τοῖς μετ αὐτοῦ, εἰ μὴ 
~. ¢ ~ , = | 
τοῖς ἱερεῦσι μόνοις ; ΠΗ 
~ , 
οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε ἐν τῷ νύ- 
σ - , 
μῳ," ote τοῖς σάββασιν 
ἀκ “ Δ ἕως 
οἱ ἱερεῖς ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ τὸ 
Lf ~ τ 
σάββατον BeBydovot, καὶ 
, 4 
ἀναίτιοί εἶσι; Ayo δὲ 
~ ὦ ~ ~ , 
ὑμῖν, ὅτι TOV ἱεροῦ μεί- 
‘ τ ν ὃ 
Cov ἐστὶν ὧδε. Εἰ δὲ 
5 ? & 2 ww 
ἐγνώχειτε, TL ἐστιν" ELe- 
‘ 
ον ϑέλω, καὶ ov ϑυσίαν “ὦ 


ΕῚ “Δ , i 
οὐκ ἂν κατεδιχασατξε 


8 τοὺς ἀναιτίους. Κύριος 


, > ~ ξ, 
γάρ ἔστι τοῦ σαββάτου 
. ct ~ > , 
ὁ ving Tov ἀνϑρωπου. 


25 


26 


Marx II. 23—28. 

“A a ὦ ν 

Kat ἐγένετο παραπο- 
ρεύεσϑαι αὐτὸν ἐν τοῖς 


- σάββασι διὰ τῶν σπορί- 


A A « 

por, χαὶ ἤρξαντο οἱ 
Α » ~ « Α 
μαϑηται αὑτοῦ odor 
ποιεῖν τίλλοντες τοὺς 
στάχυας. Καὶ οἱ Φα- 
ρισαῖοι ἔλεγον αὐτῷ" 
ma ~ ~ 
ἰδὲ, τί ποιοῦσιν ἐν τοῖς 
’ a ᾿" 

σάββασιν, ὃ οὐκ ἔξεστι ; 


A 
Kot αὐτὸς ἔλεγεν αὖ- 
τοῖς " οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνω- 

’ > , J 
τε, Ti ἐποίησε Aavid, 
7 , ow” > Kee , 
OTE χρείαν ἔσχε καὶ ἐπεί- 

A A 
VOGEY αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ μετ 
αὐτοῦ ἢ πῶς εἰςῆλϑεν 
εἰς τὸν οἶχον τοῦ ϑεοῦ 
ἐπὶ ᾿4βιάϑαρ τοῦ ἀρχι- 
ν A 4 

ENEWS καὶ τοὺς ἄρτους 
τῆς προϑέσεως ἔφαγεν, 
« » 
οὺς οὐκ ἔξεστι φαγεῖν 

A ~ ~ A 
εἰ μὴ τοῖς ἱερεῦσι, καὶ 
m” ~ ~ : \ > 
edcoxe χαὶ τοῖς σιν αὐ- 
~ “ 
τῷ οὖσι; 


4 ~ 
Καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς" τὸ 
σάββατον διὰ τὸν ἄν- 
ϑρωπον ἐγένετο, οὐχ ὁ 
A Ἁ Α / 
ἄνϑρωπος διὰ τὸ σάβ- 

σ , , 

βατιν. Kore χύριὸς 
ἐστιν ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀν- 

, A ~ X 
O.atov καὶ tov σαβ- 
Bo ov. 


1 


~ 


ow 


Luxe VI. 1—5. 
A 
"Eyéveto δὲ ἐν σαββά- 
z@ δευτεροπρώτῳ δια- 
? - > A A 
πορεύυέεσϑαι αὑτὸν διὰ 
τῶν σπορίμων, καὶ ἔτιλ- 
λον οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ 
\ , ν» 
TOUS σταχυὰς και σϑιον 
ψώχοντες ταῖς χερσί." 
Ἁ Α - 
Tweg δὲ τῶν Φαρισαίων 
εἶπον αὐτοῖς" τί ποιεῖτε, 
a 3 Ne ~ > 
9 οὐκ ἔξεστι ποιεῖν ἐν 
~ ~ A 
τοῖς σάββασι ; Καὶ ano- 
A A > ‘ 
κριϑεῖς πρὸς αὐτοὺς εἶ- 
4} ~ Ios ~ 
πεν ὁ ]ησοὺς οὐδὲ tov- 
a 
TO ἀνέγγωτε, ὃ ἐποίησε 
oh € , > | F 
[Aarvid, omote ἐπείνα- 
\ A 
σε; αὐτὸς καὶ οἱ μεῖ 
> ~ w+ b « »» 
αὑτοῦ ὑντὲς ;" ὡς ξιςῆλ- 
Dev εἰς τὸν οἶχον τοῦ 
- Α ‘ a4 
Oeov καὶ τοὺς ἄρτους 
,( Ἢ ’ μέ 
τῆς «προϑέσεως edaBe 
Ὁ ᾺΨ \ ty \ 
καὶ ἔφαγε καὶ eOcoxe καὶ 
~ ~ a“ 
τοῖς MET αὐτοῦ, OVE οὐκ 
Wee | ~ > ‘ , 
ἔξεστι φαγεῖν εἰ μὴ μό- 
νους τοὺς ἱερεῖς ; 


A ~ σ 
ὅ Καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς" ὅτι 


’ » 3 ς en “ 
κιριὸς ἔστιν ὃ υἱὸς TOV 
> ? A ~ 
ἀνϑρώπου καὶ tov σαβ- 
βάτου. 








271, Ὅδι!. 23, 25.” 


¢ 5, Num. 28, 9. 10. 18. 19. 


b 3. 1 Sam. 21, 1—7. 


ἃ ἡ, Hos. 6, 6. 


ὦ. 


92 


FROM OUR LORD'S SECOND PASSOVER 


[Parr IV. 





§ 38, The healing of the withered hand on the Sabbath.— Galilee. 


Matra. XII. 9—14. 

9 Kai μεταβὰς ἐκεῖϑεν, 
- > ‘ ‘ 
ἤλϑεν εἰς τὴν συναγωγὴν 

10 αὐτῶν. Καὶ ἰδού, ἄν- 
ϑρωπος ἦν τὴν χεῖρα 
” , qi ὦ , 
ἔχων ξηράν. καὶ ἐπηρώ- 
τησαν αὐτὸν λέγοντες " 
> "Ὁ - , 
εἰ ἔξεστι τοῖς σαββασι 
ϑεραπεύειν ; ἵνα κατη- 
11 γορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ. ‘O δὲ 
εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " τίς ἔσται 
90 « ~ » a 
ἐξ vuov ἄνϑρωπος, ος 
’ ao A 
ἕξει πρόβατον ἕν, καὶ 
ἐὰν ἐμπέσῃ τοῦτο τοῖς 
σάββασιν εἰς βόϑυνον, 
᾿οὐχὶ κρατήσει αὐτὸ καὶ 
- -τ 
12 ἐγερεῖ; Πύόσῳ οὺὐν δια- 
, » , 
φέρει ἄνϑρωπος προβα- 
σ - 
του; ὥςτε ἔξεστι τοῖς 
σάββασι καλῶς ποιεῖν. 
13 Τότε λέγει τῷ ἀνϑρώπῳ" 
ἔχτειρον τὴν χεῖρά σου. 
8 7 ‘ > 
καὶ ἐξέτεινε, καὶ ἀπο- 
, ¢ ‘ ¢ « 
κατεσταϑῆ vying ὡς ἢ 
ἄλλη. ᾽ 


14 
συμβούλιον ἔλαβον xat 
» ~ ce ϊ , ΄σ 
αὐτοῦ ἐξελϑόντες, ὁπὼς 
αὐτὸν ἀπολέσωσιν, 


Οἱ δὲ Φαρισαῖοι - 


Marx III. 1—6, 

1 Καὶ εἰςῆλϑε πάλιν εἰς 
τὴν συναγωγήν" καὶ ἦν 
ἐκεῖ ἀνϑιώπος ἐξηραμ- 
μένην ἔχων τὴν χεῖρα. 

2 Καὶ παρετήρουν αὐτόν, 

εἰ τοῖς σάββασι ϑερα- 

πεύσει αὐτόν, ἵνα κατη- 
γορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ. Καὶ 
λέγει τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ τῷ 
ἐξηριιμμένην ἔχοντι τὴν 
χεῖρα" ἔγειραι εἰς τὸ 

4 μέσον. Καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς" 
ἔξεστι τοῖς σάββασιν 
ἀγαϑοποιῆσαι ἢ κακο- 


oo 


ποιῆσαι; ψυχὴν σῶσαι 
ἣ ἀποκτεῖναι ; οἱ δὲ ἐσιώ- 
ὅ πων. Καὶ περιβλεψάμε- 
vog αὐτοὺς μετ ὀργῆς, 
συλλυπούμενος ἐπὶ τῇ 
πωρώσει τῆς καρδίας αὐ- 
τῶν, λέγει τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ" 
ἔχτεινον τὴν χεῖρά σου. 
χαὶ ἐξέτεινε, καὶ ἀποχα- 
τεστάϑη ἡ χεὶρ αἰτοῦ 
6 [ὑγιής, ὡς ἡ ἄλλη]. Καὶ 
ἐξελ ϑόντες οἱ «Φαρισαῖοι 
εὐθέως μετὰ τῶν How- 
διαγῶν συμβούλιον ἐποί- 
ουν κατ αὐτοῦ, ὕπως 
αὐτον ἀπολέσωσι. 


‘ 


Luxe VI. 6—11. 
‘ 
6 ᾿Ἐγένετο δὲ καὶ ἐν ἑτέρῳ 
σαββάτῳ εἰςελϑεῖν αὐὖ- 
A ‘ 
τὸν εἰς τὴν συναγωγὴν 
‘ , ohh 
καὶ διδάσκειν. καὶ ἣν 
5 ~ FF ‘ [4 
ἐκεῖ ἀνϑρωπος, καὶ ἢ 
τ > ~ ¢ ‘ Ψ{ 
χεὶρ αὐτοῦ ἡ δεξιὰ ἣν 
ξηρά, Παρετήρουν δὲ 
΄ ~ 
αὐτὸν» οἱ γραμματεῖς καὶ 
«ε ~ Ἢ 3 ~ 
οἱ (Ῥαρισαῖοι, εἰ ἕν τῷ 
σαββάτῳ ϑεραπέυσει, 
σ΄ 
ἵνα εὕρωσι κατηγορίαν 
8 αὐτοῦ. Αὐτὸς δὲ ἴδει 
‘ A > 
tovg διαλογισμοὺς av- 
~ A = ~ 53 , 
τῶν, καὶ εἰπε TH APO QW- 
πῳ τῷ ξηρὰν ἔχοντι τὴν 
χεῖρα " ἔγειραι καὶ στῆ- 
ϑι εἰς τὸ μέσον. ὁ δὲ 
> ‘ Ν 
ἀναστὰς ἔστη. Εἶπεν 
7 e <3 ~ ‘ 7 
οὐν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς πρὸς av- 
τούς" ἐπερωτήσω ὑμᾶς " 
»Ἶ νω ~ , 
τί ἔξεστι τοῖς σάββασιν ; 
~ δ: 
ἀγαϑοποιΐσαι ἢ κακο- 
ποιῆσαι; ψυχὴν σῶσαι 
ΒΥ 2 , ‘ 
ἢ ἀπολέσαι; Και πε- 
ριβλεψάμενος 
αὐτοὺς εἶπεν αὐτῷ" 
ἔκτεινον τὴν χεῖριά σου. 


.2 


mo) 


Θ 


πάντας 


« ob > , 4 
ὃ δὲ ἑποίησεν ovto, 
‘ > τ ε 
καὶ ἀποχατεσταϑὴ ἢ 
‘ > ~ « , « ε 
χεῖρ αὑτοῦ [ὑγιῆς,} ὡς ἡ 
11 ἄλλη. «Αὐτοὶ δὲ ἐπλή- 


σϑησαν ἀνοίας, καὶ διελάλουν πρὸς ἀλλήλους, τί ἂν ποιήσειαν τῷ ᾿]ησοῦ. 


§ 39. Jesus arrives at the Sea of Tiberias, and is followed by multitudes.—Lake of 


Galilee. 


Marrs. XII. 15—21. 


15 


‘ 
χλοι πολλοί, καὶ ἐθεράπευσεν αὐτοὺς 


πάντας. 


Ὃ δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς γνοὺς 
> " . ‘ , , > - Ν 
ἐχεῖϑεν" χαὶ ἡχολούϑησαν αὑτῷ ἢ- 


ἀνεχώρησεν Τ 


Mark IIT. 7---1ῷ. 
Kai ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς ἀνεχώρηπε μετὰ 
τῶν μαϑητῶν 


αὑτοῦ πρὸς τὴν 


δά) ασσαν, καὶ πολὺ πλῆϑος and τῆς 


Γαλιλαίας ἠχολούϑηταν αὐτῷ καὶ 


§§ 38, 39, 40.] UNTIL THE THIRD. 33 





MARK III. 
8 ἀπὸ τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας ! καὶ ἀπὸ “Ἱεροσολύμων καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς ᾿Ιδουμαίας καὶ πέραν 
τοῦ ᾿Ιορδάνου" καὶ οἱ περὶ Τύρον καὶ Σιδῶνα, πλῆϑος πολύ, ἀκούσαντες ὅσα 
9 ἐποίει, ἦλϑον πρὸς αὐτόν. Καὶ εἶπε τοῖς μαϑηταῖς αὐτοῦ, ἵνα πλοιάριον προς- 
10 καρτερῇ αὐτῷ διὰ τὸν ὄχλον, ἵνα μὴ ϑλίβωσιν αὐτόν. Πολλοὺς γὰρ ἐϑερά- 
11 πευσὲν, ὥςτε ἐπιπίπτειν αὐτῷ, ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψωνται, ὅσοι εἶχον μάστιγας" Καὶ 
τὰ πνεύματα τὰ ἀκάϑαρτα, ὅταν αὐτὸν ἐθεώρει, προςέπιπτεν αὐτῷ καὶ 
| MATTH. XII. ἔκραζε λέγοντα - ὅτι ov εἶ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ 
16 Καὶ ἐπετίμησεν αὐτοῖς, ἵνα μὴ 12 ϑεοῦ. ‘Kai πολλὰ ἐπετίμα αὐτοῖς, 
17 φανερὸν αὐτὸν ποιήσωσι. “Onwg ἵνα μὴ αὐτὸν φανερὸν ποιήσωσι. 
wegen OY τὸ ῥηθὲν διὰ ᾿Ησαΐου τοῦ 
18 προφήτου λέγοντος "5 ἰδού, ὁ παῖδ μου; ὃν ὑρέτισα, ὃ ἀγαπητός μου, εἰς ὃν 
εὐδόκησεν | ψυχή μου" ϑήσω τὸ πνεῦμά μου ἐπὶ αὐτόν, καὶ κρίσιν τοῖς ἔϑνεσιν 
19 ἀπαγγελεῖ. Οὐκ ἐρίσει οὐδὲ κραυγάσει, οὐδὲ ἀκούσει τις ἐν ταῖς πλατείαις τὴν 
20 φωνὴν αὐτοῦ" κάλαμον συντετριμμένον οὐ κατεάξει, καὶ λίνον τυφόμενον οὐ 
21 σβέσει " ἕώς ἂν ἐκβάλῃ εἰς νῖκος τὴν κρίσιν. Καὶ τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ ἔϑνη ἐλπιοῦσι. 


§ 40. Jesus withdraws to the Mountain, and chooses the Twelve ; the multitudes follow 
him.—Near Capernaum. 


Luxe VI. 12—19., 
9 , 4. 3 ~ ¢ , , 
Ἐγένετο δὲ & ταῖς ἡμέραις ταῦταις, 


ἐξῆλϑεν sig τὸ ὄρος προςεύξασϑαι" 
καὶ ἦν διανυκτερεύων ἐν τῇ προςευχῇ 


Manx III. 13--19. 

13 Kai ἀναβαίνει εἰς τὸ ὄρος καὶ προς- 12 
καλεῖται ovg ἤϑελεν. αὐτός" καὶ 
14 ἀπῆλϑον πρὸς αὐτόν. Καὶ ἐποίησε 


«J ~ 4, ὦ 
δώδεκα, ἵνα ὦσι MET αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἵνα 
3 ii > A Ul ! δ ν 
15 ἀποστέλλῃ αὐτοὺς κηρύσσειν,! καὶ ἔχειν 
; \ , 3 
ἐξουσίαν ϑεραπεύειν τὰς νόσους καὶ EX- 


13 τοῦ ϑεοῦ. Καὶ ὅτε ἐγένετο ἡμέρα προς- 


εφώνησε τοὺς μαϑητὰς αὑτοῦ, καὶ 
3 , 2.3 > ~ , a 
ἐχλεξάμεγος an αὐτῶν δώδεκα, ove 


~ A 
16 βάλλειν τὰ δαιμόνια. Καὶ ἐπέϑηκε τῷ καὶ ἀποστόλους ὠνγύ- 
a 
Marra. X. 2—4. Σίμωνι ὄνομα Πέτρον" 14 μᾶσε, ' Σίμωνα, ὃν καὶ 
2 Τῶν δὲ δώδεκα ἀποστό- 17 καὶ ᾿Ιάκωβον τὸν τοῦ 
λων τὰ ὀνόματά ἐστι. Ζεβεδαίου καὶ ᾿Ιωάννην 
~ ~ , \ 3 A ~ 3 , 
tavta* πρῶτος Σίμων τὸν ἄδελφον τοῦ Laxw- 
A 3 
ὁ λεγόμενος Πέτρος καὶ βου" καὶ ἐπέϑηκεν αὖ- 
"Ὁ ? 
᾿Ανδρέας ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐ. τοῖς ὀνόματα Βοανεργές, 
- 37 ἢ ε ~ oY: 2 «4 δ ας 
τοῦ: Ιάκωβος 6 τοῦ ὃ ἔστιν, υἱοὶ βροντῆς 
Ζεβεδαίου καὶ ᾿Ιωάννης 18 καὶ “Ardogav καὶ Φί- 
8 ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ" Diliz- λιππὸον καὶ Βαρϑολο- 
~ ~ Ἁ ~ 
πος καὶ Βαρϑολομαῖος: μαῖον καὶ Mardaior 
~ A ~ μὴ 
Θωμᾶς καὶ Ματϑαῖος καὶ Θωμᾶν καὶ ᾿Ιάκω-- 
ὁ τελώνης" ᾿Ιάκωβος Bor τὸν τοῦ ᾿“λφαίον, 
~ 4 ~ ‘ 7 
ὁ τοῦ Algaiov xaiAcB- καὶ Θαδδαῖον καὶ Σί- 
ΜῈ ς« 9 4 ς 4 ’ὔ 
βαῖος ὃ ἐπικληϑεις Oud- μωνὰ τὸν κανανίτην, 


IES , 4 

ὠνόμασδ ΠΠ]έτρον, καὶ 

᾿Ανδρέαν τὸν ἀδελφὸν 

> ~ 357 ἢ A 

αὑτοῦ, LaxwBov καὶ 

᾿Ιωάννην, Φίλιππον καὶ 

15 Μαρϑολομαῖον, " ατ- 

ϑαῖον καὶ Θωμᾶν; Ἰάκω- 

\ = Ψ 7 

Bov τὸν τοῦ ᾿Αλφαίου 

καὶ Σίμωνα τὸν καλού- 

16 μενον ζηλωτήν, ! ᾿Ιούδαν' 

᾿Ιακώβου καὶ ᾿Ιούδαν. 

3 , a Vu Φ χὴν 

Ἰσκαριώτην, 0g καὶ ἐγέ- 
veto προδότης" 





@ 18, Is, 42, 1 sq. Comp. Is. 11, 10. 
5 


34 


δεν 


ὡς, 


FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER 


[Part IV. 





MATTH. X. 


MARK ΠῚ. 


4 δαῖος " Σίμων ὁ κανανίτης καὶ ᾿Ιούδας 19' χαὶ ᾿Ιούδαν ᾿Ισκαριώτην, ὃς καὶ 


ae 
ὃ ᾿Ισκαριώτης, ὁ καὶ παραδοὺς αὐτόν. 


παρέδωκεν αὐτον.---- 


LUKE VI. 
‘ A ~ ~ ~ ~ 
17 Καὶ καταβὰς μετ αὐτῶν ἔστη ἐπὶ τόπου πεδινοῦ καὶ ὄχλος μαϑητῶν αὐτοῦ 
‘ ~ A ~ ~ ~ ~ 
καὶ πλῆϑος πολὺ τοῦ λαοῦ and πάσης τῆς "Ιουδαίας καὶ “Ἱερουσαλὴμ καὶ τῆς 
’ A ~ “ ΄ ~ ~ ~ ~ 
παραλίου Τύρου καὶ «Σιδῶνος, ot ἦλϑον ἀκοῦσαι αὐτοῦ καὶ ἰαϑῆναι ἀπὸ τῶν 
, ~ 
18 γόσων αὑτῶν, καὶ οἱ ὀχλούμενοι ὑπὸ πνευμάτων ἀκαϑάρτων " καὶ ἐθεραπεύοντο. 
4 ~ cw see ἢ σ > ~ [κέ , > > ~ 8s 4 
19 Καὶ πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος ἐζήτει ἀπτεσϑαι αὐτοῦ, ort δύναμις mag αὐτοῦ ἐξήρχετο, καὶ 
ἰᾶτο πάντας. 


41. The Sermon on the Mount.—Near Capernaum. 
Marr. V. 1.—VIII. 1. Luxe VI. 20—49. 
1 ᾿Ιδὼν δὲ τοὺς ὄχλους ἀνέβη εἰς τὸ 
ὄρος" καὶ καϑίσαντος αὐτοῦ προςῆλ- 


2 Sov αὐτῷ οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ. Καὶ ἀνοί. 20 Καὶ αὐτὸς ἐπάρας τοὺς ὀφϑαλ- 


4 ~ 
ξας τὸ στόμα αὑτοῦ ἐδίδασκεν αὐτοὺς 


μοὺς αὑτοῦ εἰς τοὺς μαϑητὰς αὑτοῦ 


- σ 
8 λέγων" μακάριοι οἱ πτωχοὶ τῷ πνεύ- ἔλεγε" μακάριοι οἱ πτωχοί, ὅτι ὑμε- 
ματι, ὅτι αὐτῶν ἐστιν ἡ βασιλεία τῶν τέρα ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ ϑεοῦ. 
~ ~ ~ ~ Co 
4 οὐρανῶν. Μακάριοι οἱ nevdovrtes, Μακάριοι οἱ πεινῶντες γῦν, ort χορ- 
σ 
5 ὅτι αὐτοὶ παραχκληϑήσονται. Μακά- τασϑήσεσϑε. Μακάριοι οἱ κλαίοντες 
~ ~ vd , 
ριοι οἱ πραεῖς, ὅτε αὐτοὶ κληρογομή- γῦν, OTL γελάσετξ. 
6 σουσι τὴν γῆν. Μακάριοι οἱ πεινῶντες 
4 ~ 4 Ul ΄ 3 Α Ul , € 
7 καὶ διψῶντες τὴν δικαιοσύνην, ὅτε αὐτοὶ χορτασϑήσονται. Meaxegvor ot 
3 , σ > A432 ’ , ε Ἁ ow ’ 
8 ἐλεήμονες, ore αὐτοὶ ἐλεηϑήσονται. Μακάριοι οἱ xadugor τῇ καρδίᾳ, 
σ 5 ‘ A A a , < > , og 3 4 «a 
9 ὅτι αὐτοὶ τὸν ϑεὸν ὄψονται. Μακάριοι οἱ εἰρηνοποιοί, ort αὕὗτοι υἱοὶ 
~ σ 
10 ϑεοῦ κληϑήσονται. Μακάριοι οἱ δεδιωγμένοι evexsv δικαιοσύνης, ὅτι 
αὐτῶν ἐστιν ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν. 
, , > σ > ’ , , ἢ σ ’ e ~ 
11 Μα͵ακάριοί ἐστε, ὅταν ὀνειδίσωσιν 22 Maxagioi ἔστε, ὁταν μισήσωσιν ὑμᾶς 


12 


« ~ ‘4 , A a” ~ 

ὑμᾶς καὶ διώξωσι, καὶ simmor πᾶν 
πονηρὸν ῥῆμα καϑ' ὑμῶν ψευδόμενοι, 
a > las ’ ‘ > ~ 
ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ. Χαίρετε καὶ ἀγαλλιᾶ- 

σ 4 ‘ [4 ~ A > ~ 

σϑελῦτι ὃ μισϑὸς ὑμῶν πολὺς ἐν τοῖς 
οὐρανοῖς" οὕτω γὰρ ἐδίωξαν τοὺς 
προφήτας τοὺς πρὸ ὑμῶν. 


23 υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνϑρώπου: 


Φ᾿ Φ At. @ 3 , 
ot ἄνϑρωποι καὶ ὁτὰν ἀφορίσωσιν 
ς ~ We , \ > , 4 
ὑμᾶς καὶ ὀνειδίσωσι καὶ ἐχβάλωσι τὸ 
ὄνομα ὑμῶν ὡς πονηρὸν ἕνεκα τοῦ 
Χάρητε ἐν 
5 , ~ ¢ , 4 , > 4 
ἐχείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ καὶ σχιρτήσατξ" ἰδοὺ 
γάρ, ὁ μισϑὸς ὑμῶν πολὺς ἐν τῷ οὐ- 
ρανῷ" κατὰ ταὐτὰ γὰρ ἐποίουν τοῖς 


U ε , > ἂν \ > Ve δὰ ~ , 4 >? \ 
προφήταις οἱ πατέρες αὐτῶν. Πλὴν οὐαὶ ὑμῖν τοῖς πλουσίοις, Ore ἀπέχετε τὴν πα- 
, a | 9:9 κὲ ὦ ς᾽ ' σ , Οὐ ν ε» eo... 
ράκλησιν ὑμῶν." Oves ὑμῖν, ot ἐμπεπλησμένοι, ott πεινάσετε. Οὕαι ὑμῖν; οἱ γε- 

~ ~ πὶ ~ n” 
26 λῶντες viv, ὅτι πενϑήσετε καὶ κλαύσετε. Οὐαί, ὅταν καλῶς ὑμᾶς εἴπωσι πάντες 
οἱ ἄνϑρωποι" κατὰ ταὐτὰ γὰρ ἐποίουν τοῖς ψευδοπροφήταις οἱ πατέρες αὐτῶν. 
ΜΑΎΤΗ. V. 
13 Ὑμεῖς ἐστε τὸ ἅλας τῆς γῆς" ἐὰν δὲ τὸ ἅλας μωρανϑῇ, ἐν τίνι ἁλισϑή- 
σεται; εἷς οὐδὲν ἰσχύει ἔτι, εἰ μὴ βληϑῆναι ἔξω καὶ καταπατεῖσϑαι ὑπὸ τῶν 


δι 





® 5, Comp. Ps. 37. 11. 22. 29. 


φάω. ὦ πων ἐπ ee alin ee ae 


§ 41] UNTIL THE THIRD. 35 





14 


26 


MATTH. V. 
> ~ ~ ~ ~ 
ἀνϑρώπων. Ὑμεῖς ἐστὲ τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου. ov δύναται πόλις κρυβῆναι 
aA » 4 I gt , 4 A , Μ᾽ 8 ετὺν A 
émave ὁροὺς κειμένη. Οὐδὲ καίουσι λύχνον καὶ τιϑέασιν αὑτὸν ὑπὸ τὸν 

, 4 ~ ~ ~ 
μόδιον, GAR ἐπὶ τὴν λυχνίαν, καὶ λάμπει πᾶσι τοῖς ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ. Οὕτω λαμ- 
ψάτω τὸ φῶς ὑμῶν ἔμπροσϑεν τῶν ἀνϑρώπων, ὅπως ἰδωσιν ὑμῶν τὰ καλὰ 
A « ~ ~ 4 σ 
ἔργα καὶ δοξάσωσι τὸν πατέρα ὑμῶν τὸν ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς. My νομίσητε, ὅτι 
5 ~ \ , Ἃ \ , > κε ~ ? A 
ἤλϑον καταλῦσαι τὸν νόμον ἢ τοὺς προφήτας" οὖκ ἤλϑον καταλῦσαι, ἀλλὰ 
“« 3 A ν᾿ , c w “ ν id e > 4 \ Ὁ on: τ ae a 
πληρῶσαι. “Aurny γὰρ λέγω ὑμῖν, ἕως ἂν mage, Oy ὁ οὐρανὸς καὶ ἡ γῆ, ἰῶτα ἕν 
xv , , > A , > A “« , σ xv , , a 3A 
ἤ μία κεραία οὐ μὴ παρέλϑῃ ἀπὸ “τοῦ νόμου, ἕως ἂν πάντα γένηται. Ὃς ἐὰν 
x , , OEE ~ , ~ > , ‘ , 7 4 3 
οὖν λύσῃ μίαν τῶν ἐντολῶν τούτων τῶν ἐλαχίστων καὶ διδάξῃ οὕτω τοὺς ἀνθρώ- 
πους, ἐλάχιστος κληϑήσεται ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τῶν οὐρανῶν" ὃς δ᾽ ἂν ποιήσῃ καὶ 
v3 zt . ~ ~ ~ ~ 
διδάξῃ, οὗτος μέγας κληϑήσεται ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τῶν οὐρανῶν. “Πέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, 
a 3A ~ ~ ~ Ἴ 
ὅτι ἐὰν μὴ περισσεύσῃ ἡ δικαιοσύνη ὑμῶν πλεῖον τῶν γραμματέων καὶ Φαρισαίων, 
‘ ᾿ ~ “« ν ~ 
οὐ μὴ εἰςέλϑητε sig τὴν βασιλείαν τῶν οὐρανῶν. ᾿Ηκούσατε, ὅτι ἐῤῥέϑη τοῖς 
2 , a 3 , a 2 Ὰ ; δὴ Lg ~ , > \ gt 
ἀρχαίοις * ov φονεύσεις" og 0 av qovevoy, ἔνοχος ἔσται τῇ κρίσει. “Ey δὲ 
, ~ σ ~ ( ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 
λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι πᾶς 6 ὀργιζόμενος τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὑτοῦ εἰκῇ, ἔνοχος ἔσται τῇ κρίσει" 
a 2 Ἃ 7] eis ~ ein gt ε 2. ὦ . ~ , a 2 Ἃ 
ὃς δ᾽ ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὑτοῦ" ῥακά, ἔνοχος ἔσται τῷ συνεδρίῳ" ὃς δ᾽ ἂν 
ω ~ 
εἴπῃ" μωρέ, ἔνοχος ἔσται εἰς τὴν yéervay τοῦ πυρός. ᾿Ἐὰν οὖν προςφέρῃς τὸ 
δῶρόν σου ἐπὶ τὸ ϑυσιαστήριον, κἀκεῖ μνησϑῇς, ὅτι ὁ ἀδελφός σου ἔχει τι κατὰ 
σοῦ" ἄφες ἐκεῖ τὸ δῶρόν σου ἔμπροσϑεν τοῦ ϑυσιαστηρίου, “καὶ ὕπαγε πρῶτον, 
διαλλάγηϑι τῷ ἀδελφῷ σου, καὶ τότε ἐλϑὼν πρόςφερε τὸ δῶρόν σου. Ἴσϑι 
~ ~ σ ~ ~ ~ 
εὐνοῶν τῷ ἀντιδίκῳ σου ταχύ, ἕως ὅτου εἶ ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ met αὐτοῦ" μήποτέ σε 
παραδῷ ὁ ἀντίδικος τῷ κριτῇ, καὶ 6 κριτής σὲ παραδῷ τῷ ὑπηρέτῃ, καὶ εἰς 
φυλακὴν βληϑήσῃ. “Apyy λέγω σοι, οὐ μὴ ἐξέλϑῃς ἐκεῖϑεν, ἕως ἂν ἀποδῷς τὸν 


27 28 ἔσχατον κοδράντην. ᾿Ηκούσατε, ὅτι ἐῤῥέϑη [τοῖς ἀρχαίοις] " οὐ μοιχεύσεις. ᾿Εγὼ 


29 


80 


31 
32 


39 


δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι πᾶς ὁ βλέπων γυναῖκα πρὸς τὸ ἐπιϑυμῆσαι αὐτῆς, ἤδη ἐμοίχευσεν 
} > ~ ’ ¢ ~ > \. © 3 , ε 4 , 

αὐτὴν ἔν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὑτοῦ. Εἰ δὲ 0 ὀφϑαλμὸς σου ὁ δεξιὸς σκανδαλίζει σε, 

” > A ‘ , ee ~ , , o ae, a ~ ~ 

ἔξελε αὑτὸν καὶ Pale ἀπὸ σοῦ" συμφέρει yao σοι, wa ἀπόληται ἕν τῶν μελῶν 

4 QA &; 4 ~ , ~ > , ‘ > 2 , 4 
σου, καὶ μὴ 010» TO σῶμα cov Bly dy εἰς γέενναν. Καὶ et ἡ δεξιά cov χεὶρ σκαν- 
A A _~ 
δαλίζει σε, ἔχκοψον αὐτὴν καὶ βάλε ἀπὸ σοῦ" συμφέρει γάρ σοι, ἵνα ἀπόληται 
~ 4 4 7 A ~ ~ - 

ἕν τῶν μελῶν σου, καὶ μὴ ὅλον τὸ σῶμά σου βληϑῇ εἰς γέενναν. ᾿Εῤῥέϑη δέ," 

δ᾽ σὰ σὰ , ᾿ “ εν , 2 ~ 9 , > ¢. mind 

OTL ὃς ἂν ἀπολύσῃ τὴν γυναῖκα αὑτοῦ, δότω αὐτῇ ἀποστάσιον. ᾿Εγὼ δὲ λέγω 
~ \ ret ~ 

ὑμῖν, ὅτι ὃς ἂν ἀπολύσῃ τὴν γυναῖκα αὑτοῦ παρεκτὸς λόγου πορνείας, ποιεῖ 

~ a A ~ 
αὐτὴν μοιχάσϑαι" καὶ ὃς ἐὰν ἀπολελυμένην γαμήσῃ, μοιχᾶται. Πάλιν ἠκούσατε, 
ὅτι ἐῤῥέϑη τοῖς ἀρχαίοις “ἃ οὐκ ἐπιορκήσεις, ἀποδώσεις δὲ τῷ κυρίῳ τοὺς ὅρκους 
5 A ‘ , c ~ δ Φ é gv ’ > ~ 3 ~ 7 re > A 

cov. ‘Ey δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν, μὴ ὁμῦσαι odws, μήτε ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ, ott ϑρόνος ἐστὶ 

τοῦ ϑεοῦ" " μήτε ἐν τῇ γῇ; ὅτι ὑποπόδιόν ἐστι τῶν ποδῶν αὐτοῦ" μήτε εἰς Ἵερο- 
, σ td 3 A ~ 7? , , 5 ~ ~ > , 

σόλυμα, ὅτι πόλις ἐστι τοῦ μεγάλου βασιλέως" μῆτε ἕν τῇ κεφαλῇ σου ὀμόσῃς, 

o > ? , , τ ΩΝ ” ~ 4+ 4 Ὁ ’ 8 ἂν 

ὅτι οὐ δύνασαι μίαν τρίχα λευκὴν ἢ μέλαιναν ποιῆσαι. “ἔστω δὲ 0 λόγος ὑμῶν" 

VOL ναί, οὗ οὔ" τὸ δὲ περισσὸν τούτων ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ ἐστιν. ᾿Ηκούσατε, ὅτι 

- ‘ 
ἐῤῥέθϑη" ὀφθαλμὸν ἀντὶ ὀφθαλμοῦ καὶ ὀδόντα ἀντὶ ὀδόντος. ᾿Εγὼ δὲ 





8. 21. Ex. 20, 13. Lev. 24, 21. > 27. Ex. 20, 14. ¢ 31. Deut. 24, 1. 
d 33. Ex. 20, 7. Lev. 19, 12. 6 38, Ex. 21, 24. Lev. 24, 20. 


36 FROM OUR LORD’S 


SECOND PASSOVER [Parr IV. 





MATTE. V. 

, c¢ w ~ ~ ~ 
λέγω ὑμῖν, μὴ ἀντιστῆναι. τῷ πονηρῷ" 
ἀλλ᾽ ὅςτις σὲ ῥαπίσει ἐπὶ σὴν δεξιάν 
σου σιαγόνα, στρέψον αὐτῷ καὶ τὴν 

40 ἄλλην" καὶ τῷ ϑέλοντί σοι κριϑῆναι 

‘ ~ ~ 
καὶ τὸν χιτῶνά σου λαβεῖν, ἄφες αὖ- 

“ 4 

41 τῷ καὶ τὸ ἱμάτιον. Καὶ ὅςτις oe 
> 
ἀγγαρεύσει μίλιον ἕν, ὕπαγε pet αὖ- 
42 τοῦ δύο. Τῷ αἰτοῦντί σε δίδου, καὶ 

‘ ~ 
τὸν ϑέλοντα ἀπὸ σοῦ δανείσασϑαι 

4 ~ 

43 μὴ ἀποστραφῇς. ᾿Ηκούσατε, ὅτι ἐῤ- 
Seo 2 > , A λ , 
ῥέϑη δ ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου, 

‘ , 

44 xa μισήσεις τὸν ἐχϑρόν cov. ᾿Εγὼ 
‘ , ς 3 ~ A > ‘ 
δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν - ἀγαπᾶτε τοὺς ἐχϑροὺς 
ς ~ ~ 
ὑμῶν, εὐλογεῖτε τοὺς καταρωμένους 
e ~ ~ ~ ~ sag 
ὑμᾶς, καλῶς ποιεῖτε τοῖς μισοῦσιν 
ς ~ ‘ ~ 
ὑμᾶς, καὶ προςεύχεσϑε ὑπὲρ THY ἐπη- 
Η , ~ ~ 
ρεαζόντων ὑμᾶς καὶ διωκόντων ὑμᾶς" 
σ ~ ~ 
45 onwg γένησϑε viol τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν 
~ 3 ~ ~ 
τοῦ ἐν οὐρανοῖς" ὅτι τὸν ἥλιον αὑτοῦ 

> , + Wee! 4 Δ ν , 
ἀνατέλλει ἐπι πονηροὺς καὶ ἀγαϑούς, 

‘ ; + , \ X97 
καὶ βρέχει ἐπὶ δικαίους καὶ ἀδίκους. 
> ‘ A ~ 

46 ᾿Εὰν γὰρ ἀγαπήσητε τοὺς ἀγαπῶντας 
ὑμᾶς, τίνα μισϑὸν ἔχετε; οὐχὶ καὶ 
47 οἱ τελῶναι τὸ αὐτὸ ποιοῦσι; Καὶ 
34 > , A 
ἐὰν ἀρκάσησθε τοὺς. ἀδελφοὺς 
ε ~ , 
ὑμῶν μόνον, τί περισσὸν ποιεῖτε ; 
‘ A 
οὐχὶ καὶ οἱ ἐθνικοὶ οὕτω ποιοῦσιν ; 


LUKE VI. 
29 Τῷ τύπτοντί oe ἐπὶ τὴν σιαγόνα 
, ἧς ΡΟ, 9 te ~ ἐὰρ 
wee? καὶ τη» BAA, καὶ ἄπο TOV αἱ- 
θονεός σου τὸ ἱμάτιον καὶ τὸν χιτῶνα 
μὴ κωλύσῃς. 


30 Παντὶ δὲ τῷ αἰτοῦντί σε δίδου, καὶ 
ἀπὸ τοῦ αἴροντος τὰ σὰ μὴ ἀπαί- 
τει.--- 

27 ᾿Αλλ ὑμῖν λέγω τοῖς ἀκούουσιν" ἀγα- 
πᾶτε τοὺς ἐχϑροὺς ὑμῶν, καλῶς ποι- 
εἴτε τοῖς μισοῦσιν ὑμᾶς, ' εὐλογεῖτξ 
τοὺς καταρωμένους ὑμῖν, προςεύχεσϑε 
ὑπὲρ τῶν ἐπηρεαζόντων ὑμᾶς.--- 


28 


4 > > ~ ‘ > 7~ 
32 Καὶ εἰ ἀγαπᾶτε τοὺς ἀγαπῶντας 
ὑμᾶς, ποία ὑμῖν χάρις ἐστί; καὶ γὰρ 
οἱ ἁμαρτωλοὶ τοὺς ἀγαπῶντας αὖ- 
a > ~ - & 3A > 
τοὺς ἀγαπῶσι. Καὶ sav ayado- 
ποιῆτε τοὺς ἀγαϑοποιοῦντας ὑμᾶς, 
ποία ὑμῖν χάρις ἐστί; καὶ γὰρ οἱ 
« ‘ A oe! ~ ‘ 
34 ἁμαρτωλοί τὸ αὑτὸ mover. Kos 


33 


ἐὰν δανείζητε mag ὧν ἐλπίζετε ἀπολαβεῖν, ποία ὑμῖν χάρις ἐστί; 
‘ ᾿ « ¢ A ε - is > , 
καὶ γὰρ οἱ ἁμαρτωλοὶ ἁμαρτωλοῖς δανείζουσιν, ἵνα ἀπολάβωσι 
4 4 > “ 4 > A ε ~ ‘ > ~ 
35 τὰ ἴσα. Πλὴν ἀγαπᾶτε τοὺς ἐχϑροὺς ὑμῶν καὶ ἀγαϑοποιεῖτε 
‘ » A > ‘ ” ε Ἁ « ~ 
καὶ δανείζετε μηδὲν ἀπελπίζοντες, καὶ ἔσται ὁ μισϑὸς ὑμῶν 
, ‘ 22 € , σ >. .8 , 3 
πολύς, καὶ ἔσεσϑε υἱοὶ ὑψίστου: ὅτι αὐτὸς χρηστός ἐστιν 


48 Ἔσεσϑε οὖν ὑμεῖς τέλειοι, ὥςπερ ὁ 
πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς τέλειός 
ἐστι. 


ἐπὶ τοὺς ἀχαρίστους καὶ πονηρούς. 
36 Γίνεσϑε οὖν οἰχτίρμονες, καϑὼς καὶ 
ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν οἰκτίρμων ἐστί. 


VI. 1 Προςέχετε τὴν δικαιοσύνην ὑμῶν μὴ ποιεῖν ἔμπροσϑεν τῶν ἀνϑρώπων πρὸς 
~ ~ ~ 4 ~ ~ 
τὸ ϑεαϑῆναι αὐτοῖς" εἰ δὲ μήγε, μισϑὸν οὐκ ἔχετε παρὰ TH πατρὶ ὑμῶν τῷ ἐν 


τοῖς οὐρανοῖς. 


Ὅταν οὖν ποιῇς ἐλεημοσύνην, μὴ σαλπίσῃς ἔμπροσϑέν σου, 


- ~ ~ ‘ ~ , o 
ὥςπερ of ὑποκριταὶ ποιοῦσιν ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς καὶ ἐν ταῖς ῥύμαις, ὅπως δοξα- 





5. 43, Comp. Lev. 19, 18, 


δ 41. UNTIL THE THIRD. 37 





Ὁ ὦ 


19 


20 
21 


MATTH. VI. 
σϑῶσιν ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων" ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἀπέχουσι τὸν μισϑὸν αὑτῶν. 
“Σοῦ δὲ ποιοῦντος ἐλεημοσύνην, μὴ γνώτω ἡ ἀριστερά σου, τί ποιεῖ ἡ δεξιά σου, 
σ - ~ ᾿ ~ 
! ὅπως ἦ cov ἡ ἐλεημοσύνη ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ καὶ 6 πατήρ σου, ὃ βλέπων ἐν TH xov- 
πτῷ, αὐτὸς ἀποδώσει σοι ἐν τῷ φανερῷ. Καὶ ὅταν προςεύχῃ, οὐκ ἔσῃ ὥςπερ οἱ 
ὑποχριταί" ὅτι φιλοῦσιν ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς καὶ ἐν ταῖς γωνίαις τῶν πλατειῶν 
~ σ x ~ « ~ 7 
ἑστῶτες προςεύχεσϑαι, ὅπως ἂν φανῶσι τοῖς ἀνθρώποις" ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι 
ἜΝ ‘ \ ¢ ~ ete , ” > | wh 
ἀπέχουσι τὸν μισϑὸν αὑτῶν. Lv δὲ oray προςεύχῃ, εἰςελϑε εἰς τὸ ταμιεῖόν σου, 
4 ~ ~ ~ ~ ‘ 
καὶ κλείσας τὴν ϑύραν σου. πρόφευξαι τῷ πατρί cov τῷ ἐν TH κρυπτῷ" καὶ ὁ 
πατήρ σου, ὁ βλέπων ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ, ἀποδώσει σοι ἐν τῷ φανερῷ. Προςευχό- 
A A , σ ς 9 ’ ~ Ul σ > ~ , 
μενοι δὲ μὴ βαττολογήσητε, ὠςπερ οἱ ἐϑνικοί" δοκοῦσι γάρ, ὅτι ἐν τῇ πολυλογίᾳ 
¢ - » ;; Ἁ 3 ε ~ 5 ~ A ς Ἁ ς ον ἡ 
αὐτῶν εἰςακουσϑήδονται. My οὖν ὁμοιωϑῆτε αὐτοῖς " οἶδε γὰρ ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν, 
γ ἃ ΓΟ ~ ~ σ +. ~ 
ὧν χρείαν ἔχετε, πρὸ TOV ὑμᾶς αἰτῆσαι αὐτόν. Οὕτως οὖν προςεύχεσϑε ὑμεῖς " 
, ἀπο soe ee Pe. aoe oe ’ . 7 , εἴὰ t ε , 
πάτερ ἡμῶν ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς, ἀγιασϑήτω τὸ Ovona σου" ἐλϑέτω ἡ βασιλεία 
ᾷ Ἂ “ ‘ Vo~ ow \ ~ 
σου" γενηϑήτω τὸ ϑέλημά σου ὡς ἐν οὐρανῷ καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς" " τὸν ἄρτον ἡμῶν 
- \ 4 ~ ~ 4 
τὸν ἐπιούσιον δὸς ἡμῖν σήμερόν" καὶ ἄφες ἡμῖν τὰ ὀφειλήματα ἡμῶν, ὡς καὶ 
~ ~ ~ A ~ 
ἡμεῖς ἀφίεμεν τοῖς ὀφειλέταις ἡμῶν" καὶ μὴ εἰφενέγχῃς ἡμᾶς εἰς πειρασμόν, ἀλλὰ 
- ~ ~ ~ ΄ - ‘ Ae € 
ῥῦσαι ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ tov πονηροῦ. [τι σοῦ ἐστιν 7 βασιλεία καὶ ἡ δύναμις καὶ ἡ 
δόξα εἰς τοὺς αἰῶνας - ἀμήν.] ᾿Εὰν γὰρ ἀφῆτε τοῖς ἀνθρώποις τὰ παραπτώ- 
~ ~ ~ A Α 4 ~ ~ 
ματα αὐτῶν, ἀφήσει καὶ ὑμῖν ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὃ οὐράνιος" ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἀφῆτε τοῖς 
~ 4 ~ 
ἀνϑρώποις TH παραπτώματα αὐτῶν, οὐδὲ ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν ἀφήσει τὰ παραπτώ- 
~ σ 
ματα ὑμῶν. Ὅταν δὲ νηστεύητε, μὴ γίνεσϑε, ὥςπερ οἱ ὑποκριταί, σκυϑρωποί. 
~ σ od ~ 
ἀφανίζουσι γὰρ TH πρόφωπα αὑτῶν, ὅπως φανῶσι τοῖς ἀνθρώποις νηστεύοντες " 
> A , co ως “ὦ >? ‘ 4 ye ee A gt , »” Ἕ 
ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, OTL ἀπέχουσι τὸν μισϑὸν αὑτῶν. Lv δὲ νηστεύων ἀλειψαί σου 
σ΄ “« ~ 
τὴν κεφαλὴν καὶ TO πρόφωπόν σου virpot,'! ὅπως μὴ φανῇς τοῖς ἀνϑρώποις 
~ ~ ~ ~ 4 
ynotEvoy, ἀλλὰ τῷ πατρί σου τῷ ἐν τῷ κρυπτῷ καὶ ὁ πατήρ σου, 6 βλέπων ἐν 
τῷ κρυπτῷ, ἀποδώσει σοι [ἐν τῷ φανερῷ]. Μὴ ϑησαυρίζετε ὑμῖν ϑησαυροὺς 
- ~ ~ "σ΄ Ἁ 
ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, ὅπου σὴς καὶ βρῶσις ἀφανίζει, καὶ ὅπου κλέπται διορύσσουσι καὶ 
, , i et A > > ~ σ + 4 » 
κλέπτουσι" ϑησαυρίζετε δὲ ὑμῖν ϑησαυροὺς ἐν οὐρανῷ, ὅπου οὔτε σὴς οὔτε 
~ 3 , τ , 3 U 2 oi , J 
βρῶσις ἀφανίζει, καὶ ὅπου κλέπται ov διορύσσουσιν οὐδὲ κλέπτουσιν. Onov 


, 9 ε A e ~ > ~ ae. ’ « ~ [2 ; - ’ 
22 γάρ ἐστιν 0 ϑησαυρὸς υμῶν, ἐχεῖ ἔσται καὶ ἢ καρδία ὑμῶν. Ὃ λύχνος τοῦ σώ- 


“29 
24 


~ ee ~ 
ματός ἐστιν 6 ὀφϑαλμός" ἐὰν οὖν ὁ ὀφθαλμός cov ἁπλοῦς ἢ, ὅλον τὸ σῶμά 
Α A . ὦ ~ 
cov φωτεινὸν ἔσται" ἐὰν δὲ ὁ ὀφϑαλμός σου πονηρὸς ἢ, ὅλον τὸ σῶμά σου σκο- 
~ 4 
zewov ἔσται. εἰ οὖν τὸ φῶς τὸ ἐν σοὶ σκότος ἐστί, τὸ σκότος πόσον ; Οὐδεὶς 
ἍἋ : A 
δύναται δυσὶ κυρίοις δουλεύειν " ἢ γὰρ τὸν ἕνα μισήσει καὶ τὸν ἕτερον ἀγαπήσει" 
ἢ ἑνὸς ἀνθέξεται καὶ τοῦ ἑτέρου καταφρονήσει. οὐ δύνασϑε ϑεῷ δουλεύειν καὶ 
- ~ ~ A ~ ~ ~ Om 
μαμωνῷ. Διὰ τοῦτο λέγω ὑμῖν" μὴ μεριμνᾶτε τῇ ψυχῇ ὑμῶν, τί φάγητε καὶ τί 
ἀρῶ μηδὲ τῷ σώματι ὑμῶν, τί ἐνδύσησϑε. οὐχὶ ἣ ψυχὴ πλεῖόν ἐστι τῆς τροφῆς, 
καὶ τὸ σῶμα τοῦ ἐνδύματος ; ᾿Εμβλέψατε εἰς τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, ὅτι οὐ 
σπείρουσιν οὐδὲ ϑερίζουσιν οὐδὲ συνάγουσιν εἰς ἀποϑήκας" καὶ ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν 
« > ? ’ > , 2 ε - - , > ~ , Αι » e ~ 
ὁ οὐράνιος τρέφει αὐτά. οὐχ ὑμεῖς μᾶλλον διαφέρετε αὐτῶν; Tig δὲ ἐξ ὑμῶν 
~ ’ ~ 2) 4 4 « ’ ¢ ~ ~ “ 4 πα ’; 
μεριμνῶν δύναται προςϑεῖναι ἐπὶ τὴν ἡλικίαν αὑτοῦ πῆχυν ἕνα ; Καὶ περὶ ἐνδύ- 
ματος τί μεριμνᾶτε ; καταμάϑετε τὰ κρίνα τοῦ ἀγροῦ, πῶς αὐξάνει" οὐ κοπιᾷ 
- Ἁ ~ ~ 
οὐδὲ νήϑει" λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐδὲ Σολομὼν ἐν πάσῃ τῇ δόξῃ αὑτοῦ περιεβάλετο 


38 FROM OUR LORDS SECOND PASSOVER [Parr IV. 





MATTH. VI. 

30 ὡς ἕν τούτων. Εἰ δὲ τὸν χόρτον τοῦ ἀγροῦ, σήμερον ὄντα καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβα- 
vov βαλλόμενον, ὁ ϑεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέννυσιν, οὐ πολλῷ μᾶλλον ὑμᾶς, ὀλιγόπιστοι ; 
31 Μὴ οὖν μεριμνήσητε, λέγοντες - τί φάγωμεν ἢ τί πίωμεν ἢ τί περιβαλώμεϑα; 
32 1 πάντα γὰρ ταῦτα τὰ ἔϑνη ἐπιζητεῖ. οἷδε γὰρ ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὁ οὐράνιος, ὅτι 
88. χρήζετε τούτων ἁπάντων. Ζητεῖτε δὲ πρῶτον τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ ϑεοῦ καὶ τὴν 
34 δικαιοσύνην αὐτοῦ" καὶ ταῦτα πάντα προςτεϑήσεται ὑμῖν. ΜῊ οὖν μεριμνή- 
σητὲ εἰς τὴν αὔριον" ἧ γὰρ αὔριον μεριμνήσει τὰ ἑαυτῆς. ἀρκετὸν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἡ 

καχία αὐτῆς. LUKE VI. 
VIL. 1 My κρίνετε, ἵνα μὴ κριϑῆτε. 387 Kat μὴ κρίνετε, καὶ od μὴ κριϑῆτε" 
3 Ἔν ᾧ γὰρ κρίματι κρίνετε, κριϑήσε:. μὴ καταδικάζετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ καταδι- 
ods" καὶ ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε, μετρη- 38 κασϑῆτε. ᾿Απολύετε, 'καὶ ἀπολυϑή- 
ϑήσεται ὑμῖν. . σεσϑε" δίδοτε, καὶ δοϑήσεται ὑμῖν" 
μέτρον καλόν, πεπιεσμένον καὶ σεσα- 
λευμένον καὶ ὑπερεχχυγόμενον δώσουσιν εἰς τὸν κόλπον ὑμῶν. τῷ γὰρ 
39 αὐτῷ μέτρῳ, ᾧ μετρεῖτε, ἀντιμετρηϑήσεται ὑμῖν. Εἶπε δὲ παραβολὴν 
αὐτοῖς " μήτι δύναται τυφλὸς τυφλὸν ὁδηγεῖν ; οὐχὶ ἀμφότεροι εἰς βόϑυνον 
40 πεσοῦνται ; Οὐκ ἔστι μαϑητὴς ὑπὲρ τὸν διδάσκαλον αὑτοῦ" κατηρτισμέ. 
| γος δὲ πᾶς ἔσται ὡς ὁ διδάσκαλος αὖ- 
8 Τί δὲ βλέπεις τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν τῷ 41 τοῦ. Τί δὲ βλέπεις τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν 


3 - -» ~ A Ah > ἂν ἐθὰ τὴ ~ ~ 3 ~ ‘ 
ὀφϑαλμῷ tov ἀδελφοῦ cov, τὴν δὲ ev τῷ ὑφϑαλμῷ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ σου, τὴν 
- -» - A > ~ ‘ Ἁ 3 3 ~ In? > ~ 5 
τῷ σῷ ὀφϑαλμῷ δοχὸν οὐ κατανοεῖς ; δὲ δοκὸν τὴν ev τῷ ἰδίῳ ὀφϑαλμῷ ov 
4 Ἢ πῶς ἐρεῖς τῷ ἀδελφῷ σου" ἄφες, 42 κατανοεῖς ; "H πῶς δύνασαι λέγειν τῷ 
ἐχβάλω τὸ κάρφος ἀπὸ τοῦ ὀφϑαλ- ἀδελφῷ σου" ἀδελφέ, ἄφες, ἐκβάλω 
μοῦ σου" καὶ ἰδού, ἡ δοκὸς ἐν tH τὸ κάρφος τὸ ἐν τῷ ὀφϑαλμῷ σου, αὖ- 
ὅ ὀφϑαλμῷ σου; Ὕποκριτά, ἔκβαλε τὸς τὴν ἐντῷ ὀφϑαλμῷ σου δοκὸν οὐ 
πρῶτον τὴν δοκὸν ἐκ τοῦ ὀφϑαλμοῦ βλέπων ; ὝὙποχριτά, ἔκβαλε πρῶτον 
σου, καὶ τότε διαβλέψεις ἐκβαλεῖντὸ τὴν δοκὸν ἐκ τοῦ ὀφϑαλμοῦ σου, καὶ 
κάρφος ἐκ τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ τοῦ ἀδελ- τότε διαβλέψεις ἐχβαλεῖν τὸ κάρφος 
6 gov cov. Μὴ δῶτε τὸ ἅγιον τοῖς κυ τὸ ἐν τῷ ὀφϑαλμῷ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ cov.— 


’, 4 , ‘\ , c χ,υῶν 

ot, μηδὲ βάλητε τοὺς μαργαρίτας ὑμῶν 
ἔμπροσϑεν τῶν χοίρων" μήποτε καταπατήσωσιν αὐτοὺς ἐν τοῖς 

Α ς -» Α φ δ᾽ c 8, «4 4 , 
ποσὶν αὑτῶν καὶ στραφέντες ῥήξωσιν ὑμᾶς. Αἰτεῖτε, καὶ δοϑήσε- 
ται ὑμῖν. ζητεῖτε, καὶ εὑρήσετε" κρούετε, καὶ ἀνοιγήσεται ὑμῖν. 

- ‘ ¢ > ~ , Δ΄. 4 - δι 64 4 ~ , 

8 Πᾶς γὰρ 6 αἰτῶν λαμβάνει, καὶ ὁ ζητῶν εὑρίσκει, καὶ τῷ κρούοντι 

3 ’ Ἅ , > ε ~ 4 a 4 5. ε 
9 ἀνοιγήσεται. “H τίς ἐστιν ἐξ ὑμῶν ἄνϑρωπος, ὃν ἐὰν αἰτήσῃ ὁ 

~ Ned ‘ 

10 υἱὸς αὐτοῦ ἄρτον, μὴ λίϑον ἐπιδώσει αὐτῷ ; Καὶ ἐὰν ἰχϑὺν αἰτήσῃ, 
_ ΑἹ μὴ ὄφιν ἐπιδώσει αὐτῷ ; Εἰ οὖν ὑμεῖς πονηροὶ ὄντες οἴδατε δόματα 

ἀγαϑὰ διδόναι τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν, πόσῳ μᾶλλον ὃ πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὃ ἐν τοῖς 

οὐρανοῖς δώσει ἀγαϑὰ τοῖς αἰτοῦσιν 

Α ἂ«Ψ ~ 

12 αὐτόν. Ἰ]Πάντα οὖν ὅσα ἂν ϑέλητε, ἵνα 81 Καὶ καϑὼς ϑέλετε ἵνα ποιῶσιν ὑμῖν of 


ἂν εκ « ον “ ‘ ” Ore ΣᾺ sae 

ποιῶσιν ὑμῖν ot ἄνϑρωποι, οὕτω xai Φὄἄνϑρωποι, καὶ ὑμεῖς ποιεῖτε αὐτοῖς 
~ ~ τ 

ὑμεῖς ποιεῖτε αὐτοῖς " οὗτος γάρ ἐστιν  ὁἑμοίως.--- 


os an a  Ν Σ.. 


— >. ae > 


δ 41.] UNTIL THE THIRD. 39 





MATTH, VIL. 
ε , 4 ~ ~ ~ po 
13 ὃ νόμος καὶ οἱ προφῆται. Εἰρέλϑετε διὰ τῆς στενῆς πύλης" ὅτι πλατεῖα 
¢€ , A > ’ ς ξεολ « 3 , 5 \ > , Α ’ 
ἢ πύλη καὶ δὐρύχωρος ἡ ὁδὸς ἡ ἀπάγουσα εἰς τὴν ἀπώλειαν, καὶ πολλοί 
5 , ~ ᾿ 
14 εἰσιν οἱ εἰφερχόμενοι δι’ αὐτῆς. Τί στενὴ ἡ πύλη καὶ τεϑλιμμένη ἡ ὁδὸς 
15 ε 3 , 5 4A , A > ’ Ψ»Ἕ" 3, « ϑ bad > ; ;ὔ 
ἢ ἀπάγουσα εἷς τὴν ζωήν, καὶ ὀλίγοι εἰσὶν εὑρίσκοντες ᾿αὑὐτήν. Προςέχετε 
A ~ ~ ¢ ~ 
δὲ ἀπὸ τῶν ψευδοπροφητῶν, οἵτινες ἔρχονται πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐν ἐνδύμασι 


, a” , > a? σ 

προβάτων, ἔσωϑεν δέ εἰσι λύκοι ἀρ- LUKE VI. 
16 παγες. “And τῶν καρπῶν αὐτῶν ἐπι- 44 Ἕκαστον γὰρ δένδρον ἐκ τοῦ ἰδίου 
᾿ - 
γνώσεσθε αὐτούς. μήτι συλλέγουσιν καρποῦ γινώσκεται" οὗ γὰρ ἐξ ἀκαν- 
> A 3 - ‘ . ee] A ~ , ~ Xo 3 , 
ano ἀκανϑῶν σταφυλὴν ἢ ἅπο τρι- Dov συλλέγουσι σύκα, οὐδὲ ἐκ βάτου 
, ~ ~ ~ 
17 βόλων σῦκα; οὕτω πᾶν δένδρον ἀγα- τρυγῶσι σταφυλήν.--- 
A “ ~ 
Dov καρποὺς καλοὺς ποιεῖ, τὸ δὲ 43 Οὐ γάρ ἐστι δένδρον καλὸν ποιοῦν 
4 
σαπρὸν δένδρον καρποὺς πονηροὺς καρπὸν σαπρόν, οὐδὲ δέγδρον σαπρὸν 
- 3 [4 ὔ > 4 ~ A , 
18 ποιεῖ. Ov δύναται δένδρον ἀγαϑὸν ποιοῦν καρπὸν καλοὸν.--- 

‘ 4 ~ Ii οὐ ~ ¢ 3 ‘ + > ~ 9 ~ 
καρποὺς πονηροὺς ποιεῖν, οὐδὲ δὲν- 45 O ἀγαϑὸς ἄνϑρωπος ἕκ tov ayadov 
δρον σαπρὸν καρποὺς καλοὺς ποιεῖν. ϑησαυροῦ τῆς καρδίας αὑτοῦ προφέ- 

~ , 4 ~ A A Se , ἊΝ A » 
19 Πᾶν δένδρον μὴ ποιοῦν καρπὸν καλὸν ρει τὸ ἀγαϑόν, καὶ ὁ πονηρὸς ἄνϑρω- 
ἐχχκόπτεται καὶ εἰς πῦρ βάλλεται. πος ἐκ τοῦ πονηροῦ ϑησαυροῦ. τῆς 
20 "“Aouye ἀπὸ τῶν καρπῶν αὐτῶν ἐπ- καρδίας αὑτοῦ. προφέρει τὸ πονηρόν" 
21 γνώσεσϑε αὐτούς. Οὐ πᾶς ὃ λέγων ἐκ γὰρ TOU περισσεύματος τῆς καρδίας 
μοι, κύριδ, κύριε, εἰςελεύσεται εἰς τὴν λαλεῖ τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ. 


’ “Ὁ 3 ~ > 3. ἐ ~ 
βασιλείαν τῶν οὐρανῶν" ἀλλ᾽ ὃ ποιῶν 
~ ~ ~ A .« 
22 τὸ ϑέλημα τοῦ πατρός μου τοῦ ἐν οὐρανοῖς. Πολλοὶ ἐροῦσί μοι ἐν 
ὶ «ν᾿ ~ ~ 4 
ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ κύριε, κύριε, OV τῷ σῷ ὀνόματι προεφητεύσαμεν, καὶ᾿ 
~ ~. 4 ~ ~ 
τῷ σῷ ὀνόματι δαιμόνια ἐξεβάλομεν, καὶ τῷ σῷ ὀνόματι δυνάμεις 
A > ’ 4 , € , ? ~ σ 3 , 
23 πολλὰς ἐποιήσαμεν; Καὶ tote omohvyyow avroig> ote οὐδέποτϑ 
ἔγνων ὑμᾶς" ἀποχωρεῖτε at ἐμοῦ ot 
ae i ~. 4 
24 ἐργαζόμενοι τὴν ἀνομίαν. Πᾶς οὖν 46 Ti δέ με καλεῖτε, κύριε, κύριε, καὶ οὐ 
σ΄ “aera \ ; ͵ ~ Δ ΠΝ me + fy 3..." 9 
ὅςτις ἀκούει μου τοὺς λόγους τούτους 47 ποιεῖτε ἃ. λέγω; Πᾶς oO ἐρχόμενος 


A ~ > , e , >  } 3 Α [4 A > ? ~ 2 
καὶ ποιεῖ αὐτούς, ὁμοιώσω αὕὗτον ἄνδρι πρὸς μὲ καὶ ἀκούων. μου τῶν λύγων 
φρονίμῳ, ὅςτις φκοδόμησε τὴν οἰκίαν καὶ ποιῶν αὐτούς, ὑποδείξω ὑμῖν, τίνει" 

- ε ~ 2A Α A ’ » Ὁ ΟΝ σ A. 2 9. ? 
25 αὑτοῦ ἐπὶ τὴν πέτραν. Καὶ κατέβη 48 ἐστιν ὁμοῖος. Ομοιὸς ἔστιν ἀνϑρώπῳ 
ε ’ a 4: 2 ; 4 > ~ 38. « Ν Α 
ἡ βροχή, καὶ ἤλϑον οἱ ποταμοί, καὶ οἰχοδομοῦντι οἰκίαν, ὃς ἔσκαψε καὶ 

" ¢ 4 4 ae 59 F ν ἡ , SAN 

EMVEVOUY OL ἄνεμοι, καὶ προζέπεσον ἐβάϑυνε καὶ ἔϑηκε ϑεμέλιον ἐπι τὴν 
Sen 8. 3 , ‘ > , , \ , ‘ 
τῇ οἰκίῳ ἐκείνῃ" καὶ οὔκ ἔπεσε" TEDE- πέτραν᾽ πλημμύρὰς δὲ γενομένης προς: 

26 hi 4 PRES ? Kui ἔῤῥηξεν ὃ ποταμὸ > FO Pras BER 
36 μελίωτο γὰρ ἐπὶ τὴν πέτραν. Kou ὀῥηξὲν ὃ ποταμὸς τῇ οἰκίᾳ ἐκείνῃ, 

- ’ A » - 

πᾶς ὁ ἀκούων μου τοὺς λόγους τού- καὶ οὐκ ἰσχυσε σαλεῦσαι αὐτήν" τεϑε- 

Α 4 ~ > , > , ,ὔ 4 248 A 4 ¢ 4 

τους, καὶ μὴ ποιῶν αὐτούς, ὁμοιωϑή- 49 μελίωτο γὰρ ἐπὶ τὴν πέτραν. Ὃ δὲ 

~ σ 4 A 
σεται ἀνδρὶ μωρῷ, ogtig @xodouyoe ἀκούσας καὶ μὴ ποιήσας ὅμοιός ἐστιν 
~ A 
27 τὴν οἰχίαν αὑτοῦ ἐπὶ τὴν ἄμμον. Καὶ ἀνθρώπῳ οἰκοδομήσαντι οἰχίαν ἐπὶ 
a: 1 ¢ , “Ὁ ε ι ~ ‘ , 4 > 
ο΄ κατέβη ἢ βροχή, καὶ yADov οἱ ποτα- τὴν γῆν χωρὶς ϑεμελίου, ἢ προςἐῤ- 
A 
μοί, καὶ ἔπνευσαν οἱ ἄνεμοι, καὶ προς- ῥηξεν 6 ποταμός, καὶ εὐθέως ἔπεσε, 
~ 4 ~ ~ 
ἔκοψαν τῇ οἰκίᾳ ἐκείνῃ" καὶ ἔπεσε, καὶ ἐγένετο τὸ ῥῆγμα τῆς οἰκίας 


καὶ ἦν ἡ πτῶσις αὐτῆς μεγάλη. ἐκείνης μέγα. 


hie ἘΣ 


\~ qt - 





40 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [Parr IV. 
MATTH. VII. 
28 Kai ἐγένετο, ὅτε συνετέλεσεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς τοὺς λόγους τούτους, ἐξεπλήσσοντο οἱ 


» Α - ~ ~ g 
29 ὄχλοι ἐπὶ τῇ διδαχῇ αὐτοῦ" ἦν γὰρ διδάσκων αὐτοὺς ὡς ἐξουσίαν ἔχων, καὶ οὐχ 


ὡς οἱ γραμματεῖς. 
Vill. 1 


Καταβάντι δὲ αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄρους ἠκολούϑησαν αὐτῷ ὄχλοι πολλοί. 


§ 42. The healing of the Centurion’s servant.—Capernaum. 


Marra. VIII. 5—13. 
5 Εἰφελϑόντι δὲ αὐτῷ εἰς Καπερ- 
γαοὺμ προςῆλϑεν αὐτῷ ἑκατόνταρχος 
παρακαλῶν αὐτὸν 


Luxe VII. 1—10. 
1 Ἐπεὶ δὲ ἐπλήρωσε πάντα τὰ ῥήματα 
αὑτοῦ εἰς τὰς ἀκοὰς τοῦ λαοῦ, εἰςῆλ- 
2 ev εἰς Καπερναούμ. Ἑ κατοντάρχου 
δέ τινος δοῦλος κακῶς ἔχων ἤμελλε 


~ a ~ ~ ~ 
3 τελευτᾷν, ὃς ἦν αὐτῷ ἔντιμος. “Axovoug δὲ περὶ τοῦ ᾿]ησοῦ 


> , A ie , ω 4 
' ἀπέστειλε πρὸς αὑτὸν πρεσβυτέρους τῶν 


᾿Ιουδαίων ἐρωτῶν 


4 αὐτόν, ὅπως ἐλϑὼν διασώσῃ τὸν δοῦλον αὑτοῦ. Οἱ δὲ παραγε- 


; ‘ 4 > “ , δι 3% , 7, 
vousvot πρὸς tov ᾿]ησοῦν παρεκάλουν αὑτὸν σπουδαίως Aéyor- 


6 ! καὶ λέγων" κύριε, 6 παῖς μου βέβλη- 
Tut ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ παραλυτικός, δεινῶς 
7 βασανιζόμενος. Καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ 6 
> ~ > 4 3 ‘ , > 
“]ησοῦς" ἐγὼ ehdav ϑεραπεύσω av- 
, S23 aps. Pa ἘΠ τὸ , 
8 τὸν. Και ἀποχριϑεις ὃ ἑκατονταρχος 
ἔφη" κύριε, οὐκ εἰμὶ ἱκανός, ἵνα μου 
€ A A ’ > ΜΝ > A , 
ὕπο τὴν στέγην εἰφέλϑῃς " ἀλλὰ μόνον 
> 4 , AS , & ~ . 
eine λόγῳ, και ἰαϑήσεται ὃ παῖς μου. 
9 Καὶ γὰρ ἐγὼ ἄνθρωπός εἶμι ὑπὸ 
ἐξουσίαν, ἔχων ὑπὶ ἐμαυτὸν στρατιώ- 
τας, καὶ λέγω τούτῳ᾽ πορεύϑητι, καὶ 
’ .» ΝΥ \ oo” 
πορεύεται" καὶ ἄλλῳ᾽ ἔρχου, καὶ ἔρ- 
χεται᾿ καὶ τῷ δούλῳ μου" ποίησον 
10 τοῦτο, καὶ ποιεῖ. ᾿“ἰχούσας δὲ ὁ 
~ 4 ~ 
’Inoovs ἐθαύμασε καὶ εἶπε τοῖς 
> ~ > ‘ , c¢ w Xo 
ἀκολουϑοῦσιν" ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐδὲ 
~ τ 
ἐν τῷ ᾿Ισραὴλ τοσαύτην πίστιν εὕρον. 
11 “έγω δὲ ὑμῖν, ὅτι πολλοὶ ἀπὸ ἀνατο- 
λῶν καὶ δυσμῶν ἥξουσι καὶ ἀνακλιϑή- 
Ν' 2 ‘ \ > A ‘ 
σονται μετὰ ABoaau καὶ ᾿Ισαὰκ καὶ 
᾿Ιακὼβ ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τῶν οὐρανῶ 
i, βασιλείᾳ τῶν οὐρανῶν, 
12 ! οἱ δὲ υἱοὶ τῆς βασιλείας ἐκβληϑήσον- 
ται εἰς τὸ σκύτος τὸ ἐξώτερον᾽" ἐκεῖ 
ἔσται ὁ κλαυϑμὸς καὶ ὁ βρυγμὸς τῶν 
13 ὀδόντων. Καὶ εἶπεν ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς τῷ 
ἑκατοντάρχῃ " ὕπαγε, καὶ ὡς ἐπίστευ- 
σας γενηϑήτω σοι. καὶ ἰάϑη ὁ παῖς 
αὑτοῦ ἐν τῇ ὥρᾳ ἐκείνῃ. 


σ a , 5 τ ~ 
τες " ὅτι ἄξιός ἐστιν, ὦ παρέξει τοῦτο" 
5 ἀγαπᾷ γὰρ τὸ ἔϑνος ἡμῶν, καὶ τὴν 
συναγωγὴν αὐτὸς φκοδόμησεν ἡμῖν. 
6 Ὁ δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς ἐπορεύετο σὺν αὐτοῖς. 
» Α > ~ > 4 > ’ 
ἤδη δὲ αὐτοῦ οὐ μακρὰν ἀπέχοντος 
ἀπὸ τῆς οἰκίας, ἔπεμψε πρὸς αὐτὸν 
ὁ ἑχατόνταρχος φίλους λέγων αὐτῷ " 
κύριε, μὴ σχύλλου" οὐ γάρ εἶμι ἱκα- 
ἤ σ « Α Α , > 
ψός, ἵνα ὑπὸ τὴν στέγην pov εἰφέλϑῃς " 
7 διὸ οὐδὲ ἐμαυτὸν ἠξίωσα πρός σε 
~ : 4 
ἐλϑεῖν" ἀλλὰ εἰπὲ λόγῳ, καὶ ἰαϑήσε- 
8 ται ὃ παῖς mov. Καὶ γὰρ ἐγὼ ἄν- 
ϑρωπός εἶμι ὑπὸ ἐξουσίαν τασσόμενος, 
ἔχων tm ἐμαυτὸν στρατιώτας, καὶ 
λέγω τούτῳ πορεύϑητι, καὶ πορεύε- 
ται" καὶ ἄλλῳ " ἔρχου, καὶ ἔρχεται" 
καὶ τῷ δούλῳ μου ποίησον τοῦτο, 
4 ~ > , ‘A ~ « 
9 καὶ ποιεῖ. “Axovoug δὲ ταῦτα ὁ 
3 ~ 5 ’ > , A 
Inoovs ἐθαύμασεν αὑτὸν, καὶ στρα- 
φεὶς τῷ ἀκολουϑοῦντι αὐτῷ ὄχλῳ 
εἶπε" λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐδὲ ἐν τῷ ᾿Ισραὴλ 
τ 
τοσαύτην πίστιν εὕρον. 


10 Καὶ ὑποστρέψαντες οἱ πεμῳϑέντες 
εἰς τὸν οἶκον εὗρον τὸν ἀσϑενοῦντα 
δοῦλον ὑγιαίνοντα. 


ἂς αν... 


i i , . μἑώωω. 


δὲ 42, 43, 44. ] UNTIL THE THIRD. 41 





§ 43, The raising of the Widow’s son.— Nain. 


Luxe VII. 11—17. 
11. Kai ἐγένετο ἐν τῇ ἑξῆς, ἐπορεύετο εἰς πόλιν καλουμένην Nair, καὶ συνεπορεύ- 
12 orto αὐτῷ οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ ἱκανοὶ καὶ ὄχλος πολύς. Ὡς δὲ ἤγγισε τῇ πύλῃ 
τῆς πόλεως, καὶ ἰδού, ἐξεκομίζετο τεϑνηκώς, υἱὸς μονογενὴς τῇ μητρὶ αὑτοῦ, καὶ 
A ’ἢ , +» aa , « A ΄ ‘ > #~ \ So ' ae | ε 
13, αὐτῇ χήρα, καὶ ὄχλος τῆς πόλεως ἱκανὸς [yr] σὺν αὐτῇς Καὶ ἰδὼν αὐτὴν ὁ 
>) ’ 79 > ~ 4" ,~ A ~ A δὸς ἐν 
14 κύριος ἑσπλαγχνισϑὴ ἐπ αὑτῇ καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῇ " μὴ xdais. Καὶ προςελϑὼν ἥψατο 
“ ~ € ‘ , + A ’ Ἁ ’ 2. ὃ 
τῆς σοροῦ" οἱ δὲ βαστάζοντες ἔστησαν. καὶ eine’ νεανίσκε, σοὶ λέγω, ἐγέρϑητι. 
~ we he ? ε A \ ~ Ὁ : (ee ~ ‘ > 
15 Καὶ ἀνεκάϑισεν ὃ νεχρὸς καὶ ἤρξατο λαλεῖν, καὶ ἔδωκεν αὐτὸν τῇ μητρὶ ad- 
16 τοῦ. Ἔλαβε δὲ φόβος ἅπαντας, καὶ ἐδόξαζον τὸν ϑεὸν λέγοντες " ὅτι προφή- 
, δ... ὃ “δα, ς , ¢ ? , ε A ᾿ A ¢ ~ ‘ 
11 της μέγας ἐγήγερται ἕν ἡμῖν, καὶ OTL ἐπεσκέψατο ὃ ϑεὸς τὸν λαὸν αὑτοῦ. Καὶ 
Ian ς τ ne ~ > ? ‘ > ~ ΜῈ , ~ , 
ἐξῆλϑεν ὁ λόγος οὗτος ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ ᾿Ιουδαίᾳ περὶ αὐτοῦ καὶ ἐν πάσῃ τῇ περιχώρῳ. 


§ 44. John the Baptist in prison sends Disciples to Jesus.— Galilee : Capernaum ? 


Matra. XI. 2—19. Luxe VII. 18—35. 
2 .Ὃ δὲ ᾿Ιωάννης, ἀκούσας ἐν τῷ 18 Καὶ ἀπήγγειλαν ᾿Ιωάννῃ οἱ μαϑη- 
δεσμωτηρίῳ τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Χριστοῦ, 19 ταὶ αὐτοῦ περὶ πάντων τούτων. Καὶ 


, Ud ~ ~ « ~ , , ‘ ~ 
πέμψας dvo τῶν μαϑητῶν αὑτοῦ προφκαλεσάμενος δὺο τινὰς τῶν 
! ? wh A ε 3 ὔ ~ ¢ ~ e¢¢ , ” 
3! εἶπεν αὐτῷ" ov εἶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος, μαϑητῶν αὑτοῦ ὃ Ιωαννης ἔπεμιῳε 
ἢ ἕτερον προςδοκῶμεν ; πρὸς τὸν ᾿Τησοῦν λέγων " σὺ εἶ ὁ ἐρχό- 


20 μενος, ἢ ἄλλον προςδοκῶμεν ; Παρα- 
i ld Ss A me c » F > , ε 

γενόμενοι δὲ πρὸς αὑτὸν οἱ ἄνδρες εἶπον" ᾿Ιωᾶννῆς ὃ βαπτι- 

στὴς ἀπέσταλκεν ἡμᾶς πρός σε λέγων" σὺ εἶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος, ἢ 

21 ἄλλον προςδοκῶμεν ; Ἔν αὐτῇ δὲ τῇ ὥρᾳ ἐθεράπευσε πολλοὺς ἀπὸ 
γόσων καὶ μὰστίγων καὶ πνευμάτων πονηρῶν, καὶ τυφλοῖς πολλοῖς 

5 , \ , ee Ne νὰ 
22 ἐχαρίσατο to βλέπειν. Kot ano- 


3 ~ A ~ Ὗ - 
4 Καὶ ἀποκχριϑεὶς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν αὐὖ- κριϑεὶς ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " πο- 
~ , 3 », 3 , > , 3 , « mn” 
τοῖς" mogevdertes ἀπαγγείλατε Io- oevdertes ἀπαγγείλατε ᾿Ιωάννῃ, ἃ é- 

A 4 ν᾿ 
5 dey, ἃ ἀκούετε καὶ βλέπετε" τυ- δετε χαὶ ἠκούσατε" ὅτι τυφλοὶ ἀνα- 
4.9 , A i 4 λέ. λ Α - λ 4 
φλοι ἀναβλέπουσι καὶ yohou περιπα- βλέπουσι, yoko: περιπατοῦσι, λεπροὶ 
~ A ‘ 45. , x 
τοῦσι, λεπροὶ καϑαρίζονται καὶ κωφοὶ καϑαρίζονται, κωφοὶ ἀκούουσι, νεκροὶ 

Ν > \ > : 

ἀκούουσι, νεκροὶ ἐγείρονται καὶ πτω- ἐγείρονται, πτωχοὶ εὐαγγελίζονται" 


6 yor εὐαγγελίζονται Καὶ μακάριός 23 καὶ μακάριός ἐστιν, ὃς ἐὰν μὴ σκαν- 
ἐστιν, ὃς ἐὰν μὴ σκανδαλισϑῇ ἐν ἐμοί. 24 δαλισϑῇ ἐν ἐμοί. ᾿Α“πελϑόντων δὲ 


7 Τούτων δὲ πορευομένων ἤρξατο 6 τῶν ἀγγέλων ᾿Ιωάννου, ἤρξατο. λέγειν 
᾿Ιησοῦς λέγειν τοῖς ὄχλοις περὶ ᾿Ιωάν-. πρὸς τοὺς ὄχλους περὶ ᾿Ιωάνγου" τί 
γου" τί ἐξήλϑετε εἰς τὴν ἔρημον ϑεά- ἐξεληλύϑατε εἰς τὴν ἔρημον ϑεάσα- 
σασϑαι; κάλαμον ὑπὸ ἀνέμου σαλευό- σϑαι ; κάλαμον ὑπὸ ἀνέμου σαλευόμε- 

8 μένον; ᾿Αλλὰ τί ἐξήλϑετε ἰδεῖν; ἄν- 25 νον; “Adda τί -ἐξεληλύϑατε ἰδεῖν ; 
ϑρῶώπον ἐν μαλακοῖς ἱματίοις ἦμφι- ἄνϑρωπον ἐν μαλακοῖς ἱματίοις ἤμφι- 





5. δ. Comp. Is. 35, 5 sq. 
6 


42 FROM OUR LORD’S 


SECOND PASSOVER [Part IV. 





MATTH. ΧΙ. 
ἑσμένον ; ἰδού, οἱ τὰ μαλακὰ pogovr- 
τες ἐν τοῖς οἴκοις τῶν βασιλέων εἰσίν. 
9 ᾿Αλλὰ τί ἐξήλϑετε ἰδεῖν ; προφήτην ; 
val, λέγω ὑμῖν, καὶ περισσότερον προ- 
10 φήτου. Οὗτος γάρ ἐστι, περὶ οὗ 
γέγραπται. ἰδού, ἐγὼ ἀποστέλλω 
‘ 2 
τὸν ἄγγελόν μου πρὸ προςώπου σου, 
ὃς κατασκευάσει τὴν ὁδόν σου ἔμ- 
προσϑέν σου. ᾿Α'μὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐκ 
ἐγήγερται ἐν γεννητοῖς γυναικῶν μεί- 
7 ~ ~  ¢ gt 
Cov ᾿Ιωάννου τοῦ βαπτιστοῦ" ὁ δὲ 
μικρότερος ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τῶν οὐ- 
12 ρανῶν μείζων αὐτοῦ ἐστιν. *Ano δὲ 
τῶν ἡμερῶν ᾿Ιωάννου τοῦ βαπτιστοῦ 
ἕως ἄρτι ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν 
, A δ᾿ £ , > 
βιάζεται, καὶ βιάσται ἁρπάζουσιν av- 
18 τήν. Πάντες γὰρ οἱ προφῆται καὶ ὁ 
ψόμος ἕως ᾿Ιωάννου προεφήτευσαν. 
14 Καὶ εἰ ϑέλετε δέξασϑαι, αὐτός ἐστιν 
18 ᾿Ηλίας ὁ μέλλων ἔρχεσϑαι" “Ὁ ἔχων 
7 > ἤ > ’ ᾿ , 4 Ψ«- 
16 wta ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω. Tin δὲ o- 
μοιώσω τὴν γενεὰν ταύτην ; ὁμοία 
ἐστὶ παιδίοις ἐν ἀγοραῖς καϑημένοις 
καὶ προςφωνοῦσι τοῖς ἑταίροις αὑτῶν 
1 ! 4 λ , “ Dd 4 c w ‘ 
καὶ λέγουσιν" ηὐλήσαμεν ὑμῖν, καὶ 
2. Bia te ag , ¢ »~ ‘ 
οὐκ ὠρχήσασϑε' ἐϑρηνήσαμεν υμῖν, καὶ 
3 
18 οὐκ ἐκόψασϑε. Ἦλϑε γὰρ ᾿Ιωάννης 
μήτε ἐσϑίων μήτε πίνων, καὶ λέγουσι' 
19 δαιμόνιον ἔχει. Ἦλϑεν ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ 
» τ 3 , 4 ’ A 
ἀνθρώπου ἐσϑίων καὶ πίνων, καὶ 
‘ 
λέγουσιν" ἰδού, ἄνϑρωπος φάγος καὶ 
~ ‘ 
οἰνοπότης, τελωνῶν φίλος καὶ ἁμαρ- 
~ a 9 , ς , > ‘ 
τωλῶν. Kot ἐδικαιωϑὴη ἢ σοφία ao 
τῶν τέχνων αὑτῆς. 


εν 


1 


LUKE VII. 

, > , 4 > « hed 3 
eouevoy; ἰδοῦ, οἱ ἕν ἱματισμῷ ἐν: 
δόξῳ καὶ τρυφῇ ὑπάρχοντες ἐν τοῖς 

26 βασιλείοις εἰσίν. ᾿Αλλὰ τί ἐξεληλύ- 
ϑατε ἰδεῖν; προφήτην; vat, λέγω 
ὑμῖν, καὶ περισσότερον προφήτου" 
ει δ Ὁ Me eee ea ? ᾿ 
Οὑτὸς ἐστι, περι οὐ γέγραπται "ὃ ἰδού, 
me ἃ > ‘ * , 4 
ἐγὼ ἀποστέλλω τὸν ἄγγελόν μου πρὸ 
προςώπου σου, ὃς κατασχευάσει τὴν 
28 ὁδόν σου ἔμπροσϑέν σου. ““ἔγω γὰρ 
ὑμῖν, μείζων ἐν γεννητοῖς γυναικῶν 
προφήτης ᾿Ιωάννου τοῦ βαπτιστοῦ 
οὐδείς ἐστιν" ὁ δὲ μικρότερος ἐν τῇ 


27 


~ ~ ~ 3 
βασιλείᾳ tov ϑεοῦ μείζων αὐτοῦ ἐστι. © 


29 (Καὶ πᾶς 6 λαὸς ἀκούσας καὶ οἱ τελῶ- 

vor ἐδικαίωσαν τὸν ϑεὸν βαπτισϑ ἐν- 

80 τες τὸ βάπτισμα ᾿Ιωάνγου" οἱ δὲ 
~ Ἁ 

Φαρισαῖοι καὶ οἱ νομικοὶ τὴν βουλὴν 

~ ~ > , 5 ς , " 

tov ϑεου ἡϑέτησα» εἰς ξαυτοὺς, Uy 


~ $ T a 
31 βαπτισϑέντες ὑπὶ αὐτοῦ.) Τίνι οὖν 


ὁμοιώσω τοὺς ἀνθρώπους τῆς γενεᾶς 

, oe i ee σ ͵ 

32 ταύτης ; καὶ τίνι εἰσὶν ὅμοιοι ; Opotot 

εἶσι παιδίοις τοῖς ἐν ἀγορᾷ καϑημέ- 

‘ : ~ > a ‘ 

ψοις καὶ προφςφωνοῦσιν ἀλλήλοις καὶ 

~ 4 

λέγουσιν" ηὐλήσαμεν ὑμῖν, καὶ οὐκ 

ὠρχήσασϑε" ἐϑρηνήσαμεν ὑμῖν, καὶ 

23 οὐκ ἐχλαύσατε. ᾿Ελήλυϑε γὰρ ᾿Ιωάν- 

ε ‘ , a7 > , 

ys ὁ βαπτιστῆς pyre ἄρτον ἐσϑίων 

μήτε οἶνον πίνων, καὶ λέγετε" δαιμό- 

34 γιον ἔχει. ὈἘλήλυϑεν ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ 

> , > , ‘ , ‘ 

ἀνθρώπου ἐσϑίων καὶ πίνων, καὶ 

‘ 

λέγετε" ἰδού, ἄνϑρωπος φάγος καὶ 

οἰνοπότης, φίλος τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρ- 

~ ‘ 

35 τωλῶν. Καὶ ἐδικαιώϑη ἡ σοφία ano 
τῶν τέκνων αὑτὴς πάντων. 


§ 45, Reflections of Jesus on appealing to his mighty Works.— Capernaum? 


Matra. XI. 20—30, 
20 Τότε ἤρξατο ὀνειδίζειν τὰς πόλεις, ἐν αἷς ἐγένοντο αἱ πλεῖσται δυνάμεις αὐτοῦ, 
21 ὅτι οὐ μετενόησαν" Οὐαί σοι, Χοραζίν, οὐαί σοι, Βηϑσαϊδάν'" ὅτι εἰ ἐν Τύρῳ καὶ 
Σιδῶνι ἐγένοντο αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ γενόμεναι ἐν ὑμῖν, πάλαι ἂν ἐν σάκκῳ καὶ σποδῷ 





5. 10 etc. Mal. 3, 1, 


b 14, Mal. 4, δ. 


ἊΝ 


ἱ 
Ἷ 


SS a Ον 





§§ 45, 46.] UNTIL THE THIRD. 43 


22 
23 


24 


25 


26 
27 


28 
29 


30 





MATTH. XI. 
μετενόησαν. Πλὴν λέγω ὑμῖν: Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται ἐν ἡμέρᾳ 
’ὔ Δ ~ ~ ~ ~ 
κρίσεως, ἢ ὑμῖν. Καὶ ov, Καπερναούμ, ἡ ἕως τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ὑψωϑεῖσα, ἕως 
΄ , σ 9.2 , > 7 ε , ε , 5 
ἄδου καταβιβασϑήσῃ" ὅτι εἰ ἐν Σοδόμοις ἐγένοντο αἱ δυνάμεις αἱ γενόμεναι ev 
δ ΝΣ “᾿ ; - ’» A 4 c »ν 4 ~ ἢ 3 id 
σοί, ἔμειναν ἂν μέχρι τῆς σήμερον. Πλὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ὁτι γῇ «Σοδόμων avexzo- 
τερον ἔσται ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως, ἢ σοί. 
2 » ’ ~ ~ > 4 £ 2 ~ 3 ~~ , , 
Ep ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ ἀποχριϑεὶς ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν" ἐξομολογοῦμαί σοι, πάτερ, 
’ ~ ~ ~ ~ σ ~ ~ 4 ~ 
κύριξ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ τῆς γῆς, ὅτι ἀπέχρυψας ταῦτα ἀπὸ σοφῶν καὶ συνετῶν, 
ἅτ , a. , yi ὁ rey o- 5... ? Ono 
καὶ ἀπεκάλυψας αὑτὰ νηπίοις. Nat, ὃ πατήρ, ott οὕτως ἐγένετο εὐδοκία ἐμ- 
4 , 7, ec 4 ~ ’ Α 3 A 3 
προσϑὲν σου. Πάντα μοι παρεδόϑη ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρὸς μου" καὶ οὔδεις ἐπιγι- 
A 
νώσκει τὸν υἱόν, εἰ μὴ ὁ πατήρ οὐδὲ TOY πατέρα τὶς ἐπιγινώσκει, εἶ μὴ ὃ υἱὸς 
s τ ~ ~ 
καὶ ᾧ ἐὰν βούληται ὁ υἱὸς ἀποκαλύψαι. 4εῦτε πρός μὲ πάντες οἱ κοπιῶντες 
4 - ~ , ~ 
καὶ πεφορτισμένοι" κἀγὼ ἀναπαύσω ὑμᾶς. ‘Agate τὸν ζυγόν pov ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς 
« -φ Ὁ ~ ~ 
καὶ μάϑετε ἀπὶ ἐμοῦ, ὅτι πρᾷός εἶμι καὶ ταπεινὸς τῇ καρδίᾳ " καὶ εὑρήσετε ἀνά- 
~ ~ ~ Ἢ , Α 
παυσιν ταῖς ψυχαῖς ὑμῶν. Ὃ γὰρ ζυγός μου χρηστὸς καὶ τὸ φορτίον pov 
ἐλαφρόν ἐστιν. : 


§ 46. While sitting at meat with a Pharisee, Jesus is anointed by a woman who had 


36 
37 


38 
39 
40 
41 
42 
43 
44 
45 


46 
47 


been a sinner.—Capernaum ? 


Luxe VII. 36—50. 
3 ~ ~ 4 
Ἡρώτα δὲ τις αὐτὸν τῶν Φαρισαίων, wa φάγῃ μετ αὐτοῦ" καὶ εἰρελϑὼν εἰς 
ι 4. ἣν “ ’ 3 , ‘ Δ Sec? 4 «3 ~ , σ J «¢ 
τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ Dagisciov ἀνεκλίϑη. Kou ἰδού, γυνὴ ἐν τῇ πόλει, ἡτις ἣν apmag- 
~ σ ‘ ~ ~ 
τωλός, ἐπιγνοῦσα, ὅτι ἀνάκειται ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ τοῦ Φαρισαίου, κομίσασα ἀλάβα- 
, ‘ a ~ ” 
στρον pvoov'xai στᾶσα παρὰ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ ὀπίσω κλαίουσα, ἤρξατο 
βρέχειν τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ τοῖς δάκρυσι" καὶ ταῖς ϑριξὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς αὑτῆς ἐξέ- 
‘ » A 4 3 ~ .΄» - , > A Ψ ep 
μασσε, καὶ κατεφίλει τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, καὶ Hage τῷ μύρῳ. dor δὲ ὁ Φαρι- 
~ ~ ¥ 
σαῖος ὁ καλέσας αὐτὸν εἶπεν ἐν ἑαυτῷ λέγων" οὗτος εἰ ἦν προφήτης, ἐγίνωσκεν 
ΕΣ a 7 ~ A 
ἄν, τίς καὶ ποταπὴ ἡ γυνή, ἥτις ἅπτεται αὐτοῦ, ὅτι ἁμαρτωλός ἐστι. Καὶ ἀπο- 
ΝΠ νο ~ x " a PE , ” , 39. ὦ ς , 4 
xordeg ὃ Incovs εἶπε πρὸς αὑτὸν" Σίμων, ἔχω cot τι εἰπεῖν. ὃ δὲ φησι" διδά- 
Ὅν. ἢ , ’ bf ~ e : x , 
σκαλε, εἶπε. Avo χρεωφειλέται ἤσαν δανειστῇ τινι ὃ εἷς ὥφειλε δηνάρια 
A ~ ~ 
πενταχόσια, ὁ δὲ ἕτερος πεντήκοντα. Μὴ ἐχόντων δὲ αὐτῶν ἀποδοῦναι, ἀμφο- 
ῥ .,- 3 ’ , be 3 af > f ~ 28 3 , 3 A 
TEGOIG ἐχαρίσατο. τίς OVY αὐτῶν, εἰπέ, πλεῖον αὐτὸν ἀγαπήσει; AnoxgiPec 
< ke , Ὕ ς , 4 ἘῚ νῷ ~ 3 , ¢€ \ Lee 
δὲ ὁ Σίμων εἶπεν" ὑπολαμβάνω, ort ᾧ τὸ πλεῖον ἐχαρίσατο. ὃ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῷ" 
9 ~ » 4 4 4 ἢ " ~ , " , , 
ὀρϑῶς ἔχρινας. Ket στραφεις πρὸς τὴν γυναῖκα τῷ Σίμωνι ἔφη" βλέπεις tav- 
~ ~ 8 σ 
φην τὴν γυναῖκα ; εἰςῆλϑόν σου εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν, ὕδωρ ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας μου οὐκ 
” σ΄ ἢ » , IQ - 4 awe κι ~ ‘ ~ 
ἔδωκας" avty δὲ τοῖς δάκρυσιν ἔβρεξέ mov τοὺς πόδας καὶ ταῖς Forks [τῆς 
~ cw 3 ἡ » , > »# σ ΠΩ͂Σ ὯΝ Ὧν 1 »» 
κεφαλῆς] αὑτῆς ἐξέμαξε. Φίλημά μοι οὐκ ἔδωκας" αὑτὴ δέ, ἀφ᾽ ἧς εἰςῆλϑον, 
> , ~ , - A , 3 , 4 ’ > a+ 
ov διέλιπε καταφιλοῦσα μου τοὺς πόδας. Ελαίῳ τὴν κεφαλήν μου οὐκ ἡλειψας " 
σ΄ " , Sl , ‘ , tz , , aie ae ΝΜ τ 
αὕτη δὲ μύρῳ ἤλειψὲ μου τοὺς πόδας. Ov χάριν, λέγω σοὶ, ἀφέωνται αἱ ἀμαρ- 
, 2.» ὦ « 4 fe. . Raa: , ZT gi 247 oA 257 ? ~ 
τίαι αὐτῆς αἱ πολλαΐ, Ott ἡγάπησε πολυ" ᾧ δὲ ὀλίγον ἀφίεται, ὀλίγον ἀγαπᾷ. 


Ν 


48 49 Εἶπε δὲ αὐτῇ ἀφέωνταί σου αἱ ἁμαρτίαι. Καὶ ἤρξαντο οἱ συνανακείμενοι 
, ne ~ , in τὰ a . € , ae. ΤᾺ A A \ 
50 λέγειν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς " τίς οὑτός ἐστιν, OG καὶ ἁμαρτίας apinow; Εἶπε δὲ πρὸς τὴν 


γυναῖκα ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέ σε πορεύου εἰς εἰρήνην. 


44 


FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER 


[Part IV. 





1 


§ 47. Jesus, with the Twelve, makes a second circuit in Galilee. 


Luxe VIII. 1—3. 


Καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ καϑεξῆς, καὶ αὐτὸς diddeve κατὰ πόλιν καὶ κώμην κηρύσσων 
2 χαὶ εὐαγγελιζόμενος τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ ϑεοῦ, καὶ οἱ δώδεκα σὺν αὐτῷ ! καὶ 
γυναῖκές τινες, αἱ ἦσαν τεϑεραπευμέναι ἀπὸ πνευμάτων πονηρῶν καὶ ἀσϑενειῶν, 
3 Μαρία, 7 καλουμένη Μαγδαληνή, ἀφ᾽ ἧς δαιμόνια ἑπτὰ ἐξεληλύϑει, ' καὶ Ἰωάννα, 
γυνὴ Xovla ἐπιτρόπου Ἡρώδου, καὶ Σουσάννα, καὶ ἕτεραι πολλαί, αἵτινες διη- 
κόγουν αὐτῷ ἀπὸ τῶν ὑπαρχύντων αὐταῖς. 


§ 48. The healing ofa Demoniac. The Scribes and Pharisees blaspheme.— Galilee. 


Marx III. 19—30. 


19 20 --- Καὶ ἔρχονται εἰς οἶκον "' καὶ συνέρχεται πάλιν ὄχλος, ὥςτε μὴ δύνασϑαι αὐτοὺς 
21 μήτε ἄρτον φαγεῖν. Καὶ ἀκούσαντες οἱ nag αὐτοῦ ἐξῆλϑον κρατῆσαι αὐτόν" 


22 


24 


26 


27 


ἔλεγον γάρ" ὅτι ἐξέστη. 


Μᾶαττη. XII. 22—37. 


Luxe XI. 14, 15, 17—23. 


Τότε προςηνέχϑη αὐτῷ δαιμονιζό- 
μενος, τυφλὸς καὶ κωφός, καὶ ἐϑερά- 


"...» σ A 4 A 

πευσὲν αὑτὸν, ὥςτε TOY τυφλὸν καὶ 

τ, 4 ~ ‘ 4 

κωφὸν καὶ λαλεῖν καὶ βλέπειν. Καὶ 
3.» τ U ¢ + \ 

ἐξίσταντο πάντες οἱ OxhoL καὶ ἔλεγον" 


, CAS 3 ε ει 
μήτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ υἱὸς 
Δαυΐδ; 
σαῖοι ἀκούσαντες εἶπον" 

τ 3 3 , 4 
οὗτος οὐκ ἐχβάλλει τὰ 
δαιμόνια, εἰ μὴ ἐν τῷ 
Βεελζεβοὺλ ἄρχοντι τῶν 
δαιμονίων. Εἰδὼς δὲ ὁ 
3 - 4 3 ’ 
]ησοὺς τὰς ἐνθυμήσεις 
αὐτῶν εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " 
πᾶσα βασιλεία μερι- 

~ 7 ¢ ~ 3 
σϑεῖσα καϑ' ἑαυτῆς ἐρη- 
μοῦται, καὶ πᾶσα πόλις 
ἢ οἰκία μερισϑεῖσα καϑ' 
ἑαυτῆς οὐ σταϑήσεται. 
Καὶ εἰ ὁ σατανᾶς τὸν 

- > , Me 
σατανᾶν ἐχβάλλει, ἐφ 
ἑαυτὸν ἐμερίσϑη" πῶς 
οὖν σταϑήσεται ἡ βασι- 
λεία αὐτοῦ ; Καὶ εἰ ἐγὼ 
ἐν Βεελζεβοὺλ ἐκβάλλω 


‘ ‘ c 6. 
τὰ δαιμόνια, οἱ viol 


23 


24 


14 


MARK IIL. 


3 SG ν ’ 
ἅπο ᾿Ἰεροσολύμων κατα- 
βάντες ἔλεγον" ὅτι Βεελ- 
A ” / ΄ 3 
ζεβοὺλ ἔχει, καί" ὅτι ἐν 
τῷ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαιμο- 
viow ἐκβάλλει τὰ δαιμό- 
A , 
via. Καὶ προῤκαλεσά- 
μενος αὐτοὺς ἐν παρα- 
βολαῖς ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς" 
πῶς δύναται σατανᾶς 

~ > U 

σατανᾶν ἐχβάλλειν ; 
Καὶ ἐὰν βασιλεία ἐφ᾽ 
c ‘ ~ > , 
ἑαυτὴν μερισϑῇ, ov dv- 
vata σταϑῆναι ἡ βασι- 
λεία ἐκείνη" καὶ ἐὰν οἷ- 
nia ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτὴν μερισϑῇ, 
οὐ δύναται σταϑῆγαι ἡ 


26 οἰκία ἐκείνη" καὶ εἰ ὁ σα- 


τανᾶς ἀνέστη ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτὸν 
καὶ μεμέρισται, οὐ δύνα- 


Οἱ δὲ Φαρι- 22 Καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς οἱ 15 


χοντι 


4 οὟ 
Καὶ ἣν ἐχβάλλων δαιμόνιον, καὶ 
2, Sin a 4 δι ‘ ~ 
αὑτὸ ἣν κωφὸν" ἐγένετο δὲ τοῦ δαι- 
μονίου ἐξελϑόντος, ἐλάλησεν ὁ κωφός" 


καὶ ἐθαύμασαν οἱ ὄχλοι. 
Τινὲς δὲ ἐξ αὐτῶν εἶ- 
πον" ἐν Βεελζεβοὺλ, ἄρ- 
τῶν δαιμονίων 
ἐχβάλλει τὰ δαιμόνια.--- 
«Αὐτὸς δὲ εἰδὼς αὐτῶν 
τὰ διανοήματα εἶπεν 
αὐτοῖς" πᾶσα βασιλεία 
73 ¢€ 4 ~ 
ἐφ ἑαυτὴν διαμερισῦ εἴ- 
σα ἐρημοῦται, καὶ olxog 
ἐπὶ οἶκον πίπτει. Εἰ δὲ 
καὶ ὁ σατανᾶς ἐφ᾽ ἑαυ- 
4 , ~ 
τὸν διεμερίσϑη, πῶς 
, « ΄ 
σταϑήσεται ἡ βασιλεία 
αὐτοῦ; ὅτι λέγετε, ἐν 
Βεελζεβοὺλ ἐκβάλλειν μὲ 
A , > mt δ᾽ .ἡ 
τὰ δαιμόνια. Εἰ de ἐγὼ 
ἐν Βεελζεβοὺλ ἐκβάλλω 
τὰ δαιμόνια, οἱ υἱοὶ ὑμῶν 
ἐν τίνι ἐκβάλλουσι ; διὰ 
τοῦτο κριταὶ ὑμῶν αὐ- 


———_ 


δὲ 47, 48, 49.] 


UNTIL THE THIRD. 


45 





28 


29 


30 


MATTH. XII. 

ὑμῶν ἐν τίνι ἐκβάλλουσι; 
διὰ τοῦτο αὐτοὶ ὑμῶν 
ἔσονται κριταί. Εἰ δὲ 


MARK III, 


LUKE XI. 


~ 4 
Tot σταϑῆναι, ἀλλὰ τέ- 20 τοὶ ἔσονται. Εἰ δὲ ἐν 


λος ἔχει. 


~ A , A 
ἐν πνεύματι ϑεοῦ ἐγὼ ἐκβάλλω τὰ δαιμόνια, 


ἄρα ἔφϑασεν ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς ἡ 


βασιλεία τοῦ ϑεοῦ. Ἢ 21 Οὐδεὶς δύναται τὰ σκεύη 21 


~ 7 ’ 3 
πῶς δυναταί τις εἰςελ- 
~ A ~ 
ϑεῖν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν τοῦ 
~ -4 A 
ἰσχυροῦ καὶ τὰ σκεύη 
αὐτοῦ διαρπάσαι, ἐὰν μὴ 
~ 4 
πρῶτον δήσῃ τὸν ἰσχυ- 
A 
ρόν, καὶ τότε τὴν οἰκίαν 
Ε] ~ Δ «ε A 
αὑτοῦ διαρπάσει ; O μὴ 
\ ~ ~ 
ὧν Met ἐμοῦ κατ ἐμοῦ 


‘ A 
€0Tt" καὶ ὁ μὴ συνάγων 


31 


92 


33 


34 


35 


36 


38 


39 ἰδεῖν. Ὃ δὲ ἀποχριϑεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " 
γενεὰ πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς σημεῖον 
ἐπιζητεῖ" καὶ σημεῖον οὐ δοϑήσεται 


> > ~ ’ A 
pet ἐμοῦ σκορπίζει. Διὰ 
τοῦτο λέγω ὑμῖν" πᾶσα 
ς ’ ᾿ , 
ἁμαρτία καὶ βλασφημία 
ἀφεϑήσεται τοῖς ἀ»- 

tf [ A ~ , 
Dowmog: ἢ δὲ τοῦ πνεὺ- 
ματος βλασφημία οὐκ 


29 


ἀφεϑήσεται " τοῖς ἀν- 30 


4 oa 
ϑρώποις. Καὶ ὃς ἂν 
yw ~ 
εἰπῃ λόγον κατὰ τοῦ 


τοῦ ἰσχυροῦ, εἰςελϑὼν 
εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν αὐτοῦ, 
διαρπάσαι, ἐὰν μὴ πρῶ- 
τον τὸν ἰσχυρὸν δήσῃ" 
καὶ τότε τὴν οἰχίαν αὐ- 
τοῦ διαρπάσει. 


ὌΝ 


"Anny λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι 
πάντα ἀφεϑήσεται τὰ 
ἁμαρτήματα τοῖς υἱοῖς 
τῶν ἀνϑρώπων, καὶ αἱ 


22 


23 


δακτύλῳ ϑεοῦ ἐχβάλ- 
‘ ’ A 
ho τὰ δαιμόνια, ἄρα 
” Migs ae ¢ w~ € 
δφϑασεν | ep ὑμᾶς ἢ 
βασιλεία τοῦ ϑεοῦ. 
7 ἘΠ᾿ 9 A 
ταν ὃ ἰσχυρὸς καϑοω- 
A 
πλισμένος φυλάσσῃ τὴν 
ἑαυτοῦ αὐλήν, ἐν εἰρήνῃ 
ἐστὶ τὰ ὑπάρχοντα αὐὖ- 
-" δ. | Α Se. 5 f 
τοῦ" éexav δὲ ὁ ἰσχυρό- 
3 ~ > > A 
τερος αὑτοῦ énmehdoy 
ψικήσῃ αὐτόν, τὴν πανο- 
, 5:᾽Ὰ φὦν. -» >> 
πλίαν αὑτοῦ αἴρει, ED ἡ 
3 ’ A A ~ 
EMEMOL EL, καὶ TH OXVAG 
αὐτοῦ διαδίδωσιν. Ὁ μὴ 
ὧν μετ ἐμοῦ κατ ἐμοῦ 
ἐστι, καὶ ὁ μὴ συνάγων 
μετ ἐμοῦ σκορπίζει. 


σ Ἃ . a Ἃ 
βλασφημίαι, ὅσας ἂν βλασφημήσωσιν᾽" ὃς δ᾽ ἂν βλα- 
σφημήσῃ εἰς τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον, οὐκ ἔχει ἄφεσιν εἰς 

A bond > > + , 3 3 , , [2 
τὸν αἰῶνα, ἀλλ ἔνοχός ἐστιν αἰωνίου κρίσεως. Ott 
ἔλεγον" πνεῦμα ἀκάϑαρτον ἔχει. 


δ' αὖ .9 , > ? > ~ a > 58 oA 4 ~ , eo δὰ 
viov ἀνϑρώπου, ἀφεϑήσεται αὑτῷ" ὃς δ᾽ ἀν εἰπῇ κατὰ TOV πνεύματος TOV ἁγίου, 
3 > , ἂν ἂν 4 3 , ~ 3 “ὦ 4 3 ~ , Ἃ , 
οὐκ ἀφεϑήσεται αὑτῷ OVTE ἕν τούτῳ TH αἰῶνι οὔτε ἐν τῷ μέλλοντι. H ποιή- 
A , , A A 4 3 ~ f xv , ‘ , 
cate τὸ δένδρον καλὸν, καὶ τὸν κάρπον αὑτοῦ καλόν" ἢ ποιήσατε τὸ δένδρον 
σαπρόν, καὶ τὸν καρπὸν αὐτοῦ σαπρόν" ἐκ γὰρ τοῦ καρποῦ τὸ δένδρον γινώσκε-. 
? > ~ ~ , > \ ~ 5 Ψ' 3 A 
ται. Τεγνήματα ἐχιδνῶν, πῶς dvvacde ἀγαϑὰ λαλεῖν, πογήροι ὄντες ; ἔκ γὰρ 
τοῦ περισσεύματος τῆς καρδίας τὸ στόμα λαλεῖ. Ὁ ἀγαϑὸς ἄνϑρωπος ἐκ τοῦ 
ἀγαϑοῦ ϑησαυροῦ [τῆς καρδίας] ἐκβάλλει τὰ ἀγαϑά" καὶ ὁ πονηρὸς ἄνϑρωπος 
9 » ~ ~ > , , , & Oxy a 7 ~ c~ 3 
é% τοῦ movnoov ϑησαυροῦ ἐκβάλλει πογηρα. Aeyoo δὲ ὑμῖν, or πᾶν ῥῆμα ἀργόν, 
ὃ ἐὰν λαλήσωσιν οἱ ἄνϑρωποι, ἀποδώσουσι περὶ αὐτοῦ λόγον ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως. 
3 ‘ ~ , , \ 3 ~ , , 
37 “Ex yao τῶν λόγων cov δικαιωϑήσῃ, καὶ ἕκ τῶν λόγων cov καταδικασϑήσῃ. 


49. The Scribes and Pharisees seek a sign. Our Lord’s reflections, — Galilee. 


Luke ΧΙ. 16, 24—36. 


Marra. XII. 38--- 45. 
ries 
γραμματέων καὶ Φαρισαίων λέγοντες " 


Τότε ἀπεχρίϑησάν 


τῶν 16 


διδάσχαλε, ϑέλομεν ἀπὸ σοῦ σημεῖον 


σ Α ~ 
τεροι δὲ πειράζοντες σημεῖον nag 
αὐτοῦ ἐζήτουν ἐξ oveavov.— 


29 Τῶν δὲ ὄχλων ἐπαϑροιζομένων ἦρξατο 
λέγειν " 1 γενεὰ αὕτη πονηρά ἐστι" ση- 
μεῖον ἐπιζητεῖ, καὶ σημεῖον οὗ δοϑήσεται 


FROM OUR LORD’S 


SECOND PASSOVER 


[Part IV. 





42 πλεῖον Iova ὧδε. 


43 Ὅταν δὲ 


44 σιν, καὶ οὖγ εὑρίσκει. 
> 


MATTH. XII. 
> w > 4 \ ~ > ~ ~ 
αὑτῇ, εἰ py τὸ σημεῖον Ιωνὰ tov 


40 προφήτου. “ὥςπερ γὰρ ἦν ᾿Ιωνᾶς ἐν 


τῇ κοιλίᾳ τοῦ κήτους τρεῖς ἡμέρας 
4 ~ 
καὶ τρεῖς νύκτας," οὕτως ἔσται ὁ υἱὸς 
τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ τῆς γῆς 
~ 4 , ‘ ~ ’ 7 
41 τρεῖς ἡμέρας καὶ τρεῖς νύκτας. “Ar- 
ὃδρες Νινευΐται ἀναστήσονται ἐν τῇ 
κρίσει μετὰ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης καὶ 
καταχρινοῦσιν αὐτήν, ὅτι μετενόησαν 
> ‘ ; 3 ~ .b A> 39 , 
εἰς τὸ κήρυγμα Tova? καὶ ἰδοῦ, 
Βασίλισσα νότου 
> Ud ~ ~ 
ἐγερϑήσεται ἐν τῇ κρίσει μετὰ τῆς 
γενεᾶς ταύτης καὶ κατακρινεῖ αὐτήν, 
σ ~ ~ ~ 
ὅτι ἦλϑεν ἐκ τῶν περάτων τῆς γῆς 
ἀκοῦσαι τὴν σοφίαν Σολομῶνος “ καὶ 
ἰδού, πλεῖον Σολομῶνος ὧδε. 


LUKE XI. 
3. ~ > A \ ~ 3 ~ ~ 
αὑτῇ, δἰ μὴ τὸ σημεῖον Love τοῦ 


80 προφήτου: Καϑὼς γὰρ ἐγένετο Ἰωνᾶς 


32 "ἄνδρες 


31 


33 


σημεῖον τοῖς Νινευΐταις," οὕτως ἔσται 
καὶ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τῇ γενεᾷ 
, 

ταύτη.--- 

Νινευΐ ἀναστήσονται ἐν 
τῇ κρίσει μετὰ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης 
καὶ καταχρινοῦσιν αὐτήν, ὅτι με- 
φενόησαν εἰς τὸ κήρυγμα Tova’? χαὶ 
ἰδού, πλεῖον "Jovi ὧδε.---Βασίλισσα 
ψότου ἐγερϑήσεται ἐν τῇ κρίσει μετὰ 
τῶν ἀνδρῶν τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης καὶ 
κατακρινεῖ αὐτούς, ὅτι ἦλϑεν ἐκ τῶν 
περάτων τῆς γῆς ἀκοῦσαι τὴν σοφίαν 
“Σολομῶνος “ καὶ ἰδού, πλεῖον ΖΣολο- 
μῶνος ὧδε.-- Οὐδεὶς δὲ λύχνον ἅψας εἰς 
κρυπτὴν τίϑησιν οὐδὲ ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον, 


“ S$; δι 
ἀλλ ἐπὶ τὴν λυχνίαν, ἵνα οἱ εἰςπορευόμενοι τὸ φέγγος βλέπωσιν. 
34 Ὁ λύχνος τοῦ σώματός ἐστιν ὁ ὀφϑαλμός ὅταν οὖν ὁ ὀφθαλμός 
~ - σ ~ e . 
σου ἁπλοῦς 7, καὶ ὅλον τὸ σῶμά cov φωτεινόν ἐστιν" ἐπὰν δὲ 
x ~ ; = 7 ~ 
35 πονηρὸς ἦ, καὶ τὸ σῶμά Cov σκοτεινόν. Σκόπει οὖν, μὴ τὸ φῶς 
. 3 4 , δὲ 7. 5 κὸν ee τὰν , 
36 τὸ ἕν σοὶ σκύτος ἐστίν. Εἰ οὖν τὸ σῶμα cov “ολοὸν φωτεινὸν, 
Α ᾿ σ σ 
μὴ ἔχον τὶ μέρος σκοτεινόν, ἔσται φωτεινὸν ὅλον, ὡς ὅταν 


ἀκάϑαρτον πνεῦμα 
ἐξέλϑῃ ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, διέρχεται 
2. , , » > , 
δὲ ἀνύδρων τόπων ζητοῦν ἀνάπαυ- 
Τότε λέγει" 
ἐπιστρέψω εἰς τὸν οἶκόν μου, ὅϑεν 
ἐξῆλϑον. Καὶ ἐλϑὸν εὑρίσκει σχολά- 
ζοντα, σεσαρωμένον καὶ κεκοσμημένον. 


4 
το 


45 Τότε πορεύεται καὶ παραλαμβάνει 


μεϑ' ἑαυτοῦ ἑπτὰ ἕτερα πνεύματα 
πονηρύτερα ἑαυτοῦ, καὶ εἰςελϑόντα 
κατοικεῖ ἐκεῖ" καὶ γίνεται τὰ ἔσχατα 
τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκείνου χείρονα τῶν 
πρώτων. οὕτως ἔσται καὶ τῇ γενεᾷ 
ταύτῃ τῇ πονηρᾷ. 


ὁ λύχνος τῇ ἀστραπῇ φωτίζῃ oe— 


24 Ὅταν τὸ ἀκάϑαρτον πνεῦμα ἐξέλϑῃ 


25 


26 


27 


ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, διέρχεται Ov 
ἀνύδρων τόπων ζητοῦν ἀνάπαυσιν, 
καὶ μὴ εὑρίσκον λέγει" ὑποστρέψω εἰς 
τὸν οἶχόν μου, ὅϑεν ἐξῆλϑον. Καὶ 
ἐλϑὸν εὑρίσκει σεσαρωμένον καὶ κε- 
κοσμημένον. Τότε πορεύεται καὶ 
παραλαμβάνει ἑπτὰ ἕτερα πνεύματα 
πονηρότερα ἑαυτοῦ, καὶ εἰςελϑόντα 
κατοικεῖ ἐκεῖ" καὶ γίνεται τὰ ἔσχατα 
τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐχείνου χείρονα τῶν 
πρώτων. 

Ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν τῷ λέγειν αὐτὸν 
ταῦτα, ἐπάρασά τις γυνὴ φωνὴν ἐκ τοῦ 
ὄχλου εἶπεν αὐτῷ " μακαρία ἡ κοιλία 


28 ἡ βαστάσασά σε, καὶ μαστοί, οὃς ἐϑήλασα «Αὐτὸς δὲ εἶπε " μενοῦνγε μακάριοι 


οἱ ἀκούοντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ ϑεοῦ καὶ φυλάσσοντες αὐτόν. 





5. 40 etc. Jon. 2, 1. [1, 17.] 


b 41 etc. Jon. 3, 4. 5. 


© 42 etc. 1K. 10, 1 sq. 


§§ 50, 51.] 


UNTIL THE THIRD. 


AT 





§ 50. The true Disciples of Christ his nearest relatives.—Galilee. ’ | 


Matra. XII. 46—0. 


Ἔτι δὲ αὐτοῦ λαλοῦν- 
- av b] oe 
tog τοῖς oyhowg, Wor, 
« , A @ ‘ 
ἡ μήτηρ καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί 
αὐτοῦ εἱστήκεισαν ἔξω, 
ζητοῦντες αὐτῷ λαλῆ- 
47 σαι. Εἶπε δὲ τις αὐτῷ " 
5 ? ¢ , ‘ 
ἰδοὺ, ἢ μήτηρ σου καὶ 
« 3 ’ a 
οἱ ἀδελφοί σου ἕξω 
ἑστήκασι, ζητοῦντές σοι 
48 λαλῆσαι. 
ee ~ ay 

κριϑεὶς εἶπε τῷ εἰπόντι 
αὐτῷ" τίς ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ 
μου, καὶ τίνες εἰσὶν οἱ 
49 ἀδελφοί mov; Καὶ ἐκ- 
τείνας τὴν χεῖρα αὑτοῦ 
5." 4 A « 
ἐπὶ τοὺς μαϑητὰας av- 
τοῦ εἶπεν" ἰδού, ἡ μή- 
A ae ’ἢ 

THO μου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοί 

σ A ἍἋ ? 

50 μου. Ostig yao ἂν ποιή- 
oy τὸ ϑέλημα τοῦ πα- 
τρός μου τοῦ ἐν οὐρανοῖς, 
> , Ψ \ A 
αὑτὸς μου ἀδελφὸς. καὶ 

3 A 4 , 3 , 
ἀδελφὴ και μήτηρ ἐστιν. 


46 


Ὃ δὲ ἀπο- 33 


Marx III, 31—35. 
381 Ἔρχονται οὖν ἡ μήτηρ 
ΕῚ ~ 4 € I» 4 
αὑτοῦ καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοι 
αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἔξω ἑστῶτες 
ἀπέστειλαν πρὸς αὐτὸν 
ΓΑ] ~ > , \ 
82 φωνγουντὲς αὑτὸν. Και 
3 , oA 4 5 
ἐκάϑητο OYLOS περι αὖ- 
, “ \ ~~ 
tov’ εἶπον δὲ αὑτῷ" 
3 , « ’ 4 
ἰδοὺ, ἡ μήτηρ σου καὶ 
οἱ ἀδελφοί cov ἔξω ζη- 
“a oe 4 ἃ ’ 
τοῦσι σε. Kat amexoi- 
On αὐτοῖς λέγων" τίς 
ἐστιν ἡ μήτηρ. μου ἢ οἱ 
3 , 
ἀδελφοί. μου ; 
34 Καὶ 
περιβλεψάμενος κύκλῳ 
τοὺς περὶ αὐτὸν καϑη- 
4 , a « [4 
μένους λέγει" ἰδὲ, ἢ μῆ- 
A ‘4 >] ’ 
TNO μου καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοι 
a 4 * ? 
35 μου. Ος γὰρ ἂν ποιήσῃ 
τὸ ϑέλημα τοῦ ϑεοῦ, 
Ka > , ‘ 
οὗτος ἀδελφὸς mov καὶ 
> , ow ὔ 
ἀδελφή μου. καὶ μήτηρ 
ἐστί.} 


Luxe VIII. 19—21. 
19 Παρεγένοντο δὲ πρὸς 
αὐτὸν ἡ μήτηρ καὶ οἱ 
> A > ~ ‘ 3 
ἀδελφοι αὑτοῦ; και οὐκ 
ἠδύναντο συντυχεῖν αὖ- 
~ ‘ \ 4 
τῷ διὰ τὸν ὑχλον. 
Καὶ 
> , >. ιἦϑϑ , 
ἀπηγγέλη αὑτῷ, λεγὸν- 
Tov’ ἡ μήτηρ σου καὶ 
ἄν, ’, ¢ 7, 
οἱ ἀδελφοί σου ἑξστηκασιψ 
ἔξω ἰδεῖν σε ϑέλοντες. 
Ὃ δὲ ἀποκριϑεὶς εἶπε 
πρὸς αὐτούς" 


"5 
oO 


21 


μήτηρ μου 
καὶ ἀδελφοί μου οὗτοί 
εἶσιν οἱ τὸν λόγον τοῦ 
ϑεοῦ ἀκούοντες καὶ 
ποιοῦντες αὐτόν. 


§ 51. Αἱ ἃ Pharisee’s table, Jesus denounces woes against the Pharisees and others.— 


37 


Galilee. 
Luxe ΧΙ. 37—54. 


Ἔν δὲ τῷ λαλῆσαι ἠρώτα αὐτὸν Φαρισαῖός τις, ὅπως ἀριστήσῃ mug. αὐτῷ. 


38 εἰρεχλϑὼν δὲ ἀνέπεσεν. ‘O δὲ Φαρισαῖος ἰδὼν ἐθαύμασεν, ὅτι οὐ πρῶτον ἐβα- 
, | we πὸ ie £ Ἁ > ? ~ « ~ 4 ~ 
39 πτίσϑη πρὸ tov ἀρίστου. Εἶπε δὲ ὁ κύριος πρὸς αὐτόν" νῦν ὑμεῖς οἱ Φαρισαῖοι 
\ om κε ? ‘ ~ ’ », A Δ e ~ , 
τὸ ἔξωϑεν τοῦ ποτηρίου καὶ τοῦ πίνακος καϑαρίζετε, τὸ δὲ ἔσωϑεν ὑμῶν γέμει 
ε ~ ‘ , ? > ε , vos Se, ge 
40 ἁρπαγῆς καὶ πονηρίας. “Agoores, οὐχ ὃ ποιήσας τὸ ἔξωϑεν καὶ τὸ ἔσωϑεν 
3 , Ι A ee ee ἢ , > , Ν {Ἂν , , \ τ »» 
41 ἐποίησε ;} πλὴν τὰ ἕνοντα Sore ἐλξημοσυνὴν " καὶ ἰδού, πάντα. καϑαρὰ ὑμῖν 
» - 7 ~ 
42 ἐστιν. °AIR ovat ὑμῖν τοῖς Φαρισαίοις, ὅτι ἀποδεκατοῦτε τὸ ἡδύοσμον καὶ τὸ 
~ A 4 ~ ~~ 
πήγανον καὶ πᾶν λάχανον, καὶ παρέρχεσϑε THY κρίσιν καὶ τὴν ἀγάπην τοῦ ϑεοῦ. 
~ ~ ~ A > 4 ~ ~ 
43 ταῦτα ἔδει ποιῆσαι, κἀκεῖνα μὴ ἀφιέναι. Οὐαὶ ὑμῖν τοῖς Φαρισαίοις, ὅτι ἀγα- 
~ ~ 4 ~ 
πᾶτε τὴν πρωτοκαϑεδρίαν ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς καὶ τοὺς ἀσπασμοὺς ἐν ταῖς ἀγο- 
~ ~ ~ 4 ~ 
44 ραῖς. Οὐαὶ ὑμῖν, γραμματεῖς καὶ Φαρασαῖοι, ὑποκριταί" ὅτι ἐστὲ ὡς τὰ 
~ ~ ve 
μνημεῖα τὰ ἄδηλα, καὶ οἱ ἄνθρωποι οἱ περιπατοῦντες ἐπάνω οὐκ οἴδασιν. 


48 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [Pant IV. 





LUKE XI. 
> 4 ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 
45 ‘Anoxordeis δέ τις τῶν νομικῶν λέγει αὐτῷ " διδάσκαλε, ταῦτα λέγων καὶ ἡμᾶς 
tn? ε ‘4 ey ee a > > 7 Ὁ SE ? 
46 υβρίζεις. “O δὲ εἶπε" καὶ ὑμῖν τοῖς νομικοῖς ovat, ὅτι φορτίζετε τοὺς ἀνθρώπους 
φορτία δυςβάστακτα, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἑνὶ τῶν δακτύλων ὑμῶν οὐ προςψαύετε τοῖς 
~ σ ~ ~ ~ ~ 
47 φορτίοις. Οὐαὶ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οἰκοδομεῖτε τὰ μνημεῖα τῶν προφητῶν, οἱ δὲ πατέρες 
48 ὑμῶν ἀπέκτειναν αὐτούς. “Apu μαρτυρεῖτε καὶ ovvevdoxeite τοῖς ἔργοις τῶν 
πατέρων ὑμῶν, ὅτι αὐτοὶ μὲν ἀπέχτειναν αὐτούς, ὑμεῖς δὲ οἰκοδομεῖτε αὐτῶν τὰ 
49 μγημεῖα. Διὰ τοῦτο καὶ ἡ σοφία τοῦ ϑεοῦ εἶπεν " ἀποστελῶ εἰς αὐτοὺς προ- 
, » es ;ὔ ‘ 3 > ~ > ~ \ > , ! “ > 
50 φήτας καὶ ἀποστόλους, καὶ ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀποχτενοῦσι καὶ ἐχδιώξουσιν, ' ἵνα ἐχζη- 
τηϑῇ τὸ αἷμα πάντων τῶν προφητῶν, τὸ ἐχχυνόμενον ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου, 
- ~ ~ ~ oc ~ σ " 
ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς ταῦτης, ! ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος “ABed ἕως τοῦ αἵματος Ζαχαρίου, τοῦ 
> , ‘ ~ , A ~ » a , , c¢ » > , 
ἀπολομένου μεταξὺ tov ϑυσιαστηρίου καὶ τοῦ οἴκου. vai, λέγω ὑμῖν, ἐκζητηϑή- 
- ~ ~ ~ ~ σ ~ 
52 σεται ἀπὸ τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης. Οὐαὶ ὑμῖν τοῖς νομικοῖς, ὅτι ἤρατε τὴν κλεῖδα 
- , ? Ἁ 3 ιν ‘ ‘ > , > ; ;; 
53 τῆς γνωσεως" αὕὐτοι οὐκ εἰφήλϑετε, καὶ τοὺς εἰφξερχομένους ἐχωλύσατξΕ. “4ἐγον- 
~ ~ ~ 4 ~ 
τος δὲ αὐτοῦ ταῦτα πρὸς αὐτοὺς ἤρξαντο οἱ γραμματεῖς καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι 
54 δεινῶς ἐνέχειν καὶ ἀποστοματίζειν αὐτὸν περὶ πλειόνων, ' ἐνεδρεύοντες αὐτόν, 
~ ~ ~ ~ σ - 
ζητοῦντες ϑηρεῦσαί τι ἐκ τοῦ στόματος αὐτοῦ, ἵνα κατηγορήσωσιν αὐτοῦ. 


— 


5 


§ 52, Jesus discourses to his Disciples and the multitude.— Galilee. 


Luxe XII. 1—59. 


Ἐν οἷς ἐπισυναχϑεισῶν τῶν μυριάδων τοῦ ὄχλου, ὥςτε καταπατεῖν ἀλλήλους, 
ἤρξατο λέγειν πρὸς τοὺς μαϑητὰς αὑτοῦ πρῶτον" προφέχετε ἑαυτοῖς ἀπὸ τῆς 
΄ - , σ > 4 « , 2o\ Ἁ , > , 
ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων, ἥτις ἐστιν ὑπόκρισις. Οὐδὲν δὲ συγκεκαλυμμένον ἐστίν, 
a 9 > , ‘ , Δ 2 , 3 ἀρὰ aed. / > ~ 
ὃ οὐκ ἀποκαλυφϑήσεται, καὶ κρυπτόν, ὃ οὗ γνωσϑήσεται. “Av ὧν ὅσα ἐν τῇ 
σκοτίᾳ εἴπατε, ἐν τῷ φωτὶ ἀκουσϑήσεται" καὶ ὃ πρὸς τὸ οὖς ἐλαλήσατε ἐν τοῖς 
4 χαμείοις, κηρυχϑήσεται ἐπὶ τῶν δωμάτων. Aéyo δὲ ὑμῖν τοῖς φίλοις μου" μὴ 

φοβηϑῆτε ἀπὸ τῶ» ἀποκτεινόντων τὸ σῶμα καὶ μετὰ ταῦτα μὴ ἐχόντων περισσό- 
, ~ c A Cc ; ~ ? A ‘ 4 
5 τερόν τι ποιῆσαι. ᾿Ὑποδείξω de ὑμῖν, τίνα φοβηϑῆτε" φοβήϑητε τὸν μετὰ τὸ 
ἀποχτεῖναι ἐξουσίαν ἔχοντα ἐμβαλεῖν εἰς τὴν γέενναν" ναί, λέγω ὑμῖν, τοῦτον 
, > 4 , ’ ~ > , , λα 5 5 ~ > 
6 φοβήϑητε. Οὐχὶ πέντε στρουϑία πωλεῖται ἀσσαρίων δύο; καὶ ἕν ἐξ αὐτῶν οὐκ 
1 ἔστιν ἐπιλελησμένον ἐνώπιον τοῦ ϑεοῦ" ἀλλὰ καὶ αἱ τρίχες τῆς κεφαλῆς ὑμῶν 
8 πᾶσαι ἠρίϑμηνται. μὴ οὖν φοβεῖσϑε" πολλῶν στρουϑίων διαφέρετε.  Aéyo 
δὲ ὑμῖν πᾶς ὃς ἂν ὁμολογήσῃ ἐν ἐμοὶ ἔμπροσϑεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων, καὶ ὁ υἱὸς 
~ » , ς , > > “ὦ Ψ Led > ~ ~~ ‘ 
9 τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ὁμολογήσει ἐν αὐτῷ ἔμπροσϑεν τῶν ἀγγέλων τοῦ ϑεοῦ" ὁ δὲ 
, , a B, ~ > , 3 4 δι: - 3 
, ἀρνησάμενός με ἐνώπιον τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἀπαρνηϑήσεται ἐνώπιον τῶν ἀγγέλων 
- ~ ‘ ~ a Ds cme , > 4, >! ~ > , > ’ 
10 τοῦ Geov. Καὶ πᾶς og ἐρεῖ λόγον εἰς τὸν υἱὸν tov ἀνϑρώπου, ἀφεϑήσεται 
> “ “ 3 > , @ ~ , ? a On "0 δὲ 
11 αὐτῷ" τῷ δὲ εἰς τὸ ἅγιον πνεῦμα βλασῳμήσαντι οὐκ ἀφεϑήσεται. “Οταν δὲ 
~ ‘ ‘ > ‘ 4 ‘ > , 
προςφέρωσιν ὑμᾶς ἐπὶ τὰς συναγωγὰς καὶ τὰς ἀρχὰς καὶ τὰς ἐξουσίας, μὴ 
- - ” ‘ A σ ~ 
12 μεριμνᾶτε, πῶς ἢ τί ἀπολογήσησϑε ἢ τί εἴπητε" τὸ γὰρ ἅγιον πνεῦμα διδάξει 
ὑμᾶς ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ, ἃ δεῖ εἰπεῖν. 
13 Εἶπε δέ τις αὐτῷ ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου " διδάσκαλε, εἰπὲ τῷ ἀδελφῷ μου μερίσασϑαι 


"»-"» 


ὡ τὸ 





8 51, Gen. 4, 8, 2 Chr, 24, 20 sq. 


: 
ὴ 








ᾧ 52.] . ὈΝΊΠ,. THE THIRD. 49 





LUKE XII. 


14 μετ’ ἐμοῦ τὴν κληρονόμίαν. “Ο δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῷ - ἄνϑρωπε, τίς μὲ κατέστησε 
15 δικαστὴν ἢ μεριστὴν ἐφ᾿ ὑμᾶς ; Εἶπε δὲ πρὸς αὐτούς" ὁρᾶτε καὶ φυλάσσεσϑε 


16 ὁ 


1 
18 


19 
20 
21 
22 


> A ~ o pe PS a 
ano τῆς πλεονεξίας" ὅτι οὐκ ἐν τῷ περισσεύειν τινὶ ἣ ζωὴ αὐτοῦ ἐστιν ἐκ τῶν 
; ~ 
ὑπαρχόντων αὐτοῦ. Εἶπε δὲ παραβολὴν πρὸς αὐτοὺς λέγων" ἀνθρώπου τινὸς 
, > ὔ ~ σ΄ 
πλουσίου εὐφόρησεν ἡ χώρα "! καὶ διελογίζετο ἐν ἑαυτῷ λέγων" τί ποιήσω ; ὅτι 
3 » ~ ~ ὦ 
οὐκ ἔχω ποῦ συνάξω τοὺς καρπούς μου. Καὶ εἶπε᾽ τοῦτο ποιήσω" καϑελῶ μου 
Α 3 ὔ A i > , 4 , > ~ , A , 7 
τὰς ἀποϑῆκας καὶ μείζονας οἰκοδομήσω, καὶ συνάξω ἐχεῖ πάντα τὰ γεγνηματά 
\ 4 ~ ~ ~ 4 
μου καὶ τὰ ἀγαϑά μου,! καὶ ἐρῶ τῇ ψυχῇ μου" ψυχή, ἔχεις πολλὰ ἀγαϑὰ κείμενα 


> γα, ἢ, , ν οὐ ὩΣ 
fg ey πολλά ἀναπαύου, φάγε, πίε, δὐφραίνου. Εἶπε δὲ αὐτῷ ὁ ϑεός ἄφρον, 


ταύτῃ τῇ νυχτὶ τὴν ψυχήν σου ἀπαιτοῦσιν ἀπὸ σοῦ" ἃ δὲ ἡτοίμασας, τίνι ἔσ- 
ται; Οὕτως ὁ ϑησαυρίζων ἑ ἑαυτῷ καὶ μὴ εἰς ϑεὸν πλουτῶν. 
Eine δὲ πρὸς τοὺς μαϑητάς αὑτοῦ" διὰ τοῦτο ὑμῖν λέγω, μὴ μεριμνᾶτε τῇ 


23 ψυχῇ ὑμῶν, τί φάγητε, μηδὲ τῷ σώματι, τί ἐνδύσησϑε. “H ψυχὴ πλεῖόν ἐστι 


24 
25 
26 
27 


28 


41 


~ ~ 4 ~ ~ σ 
τῆς τροφῆς, καὶ τὸ σῶμα τοῦ ἐνδύματος. Κατανοήσατε τοὺς κόρακας, ort οὐ 
ls \ κ᾿ ~ A A 
σπείρουσιν οὐδὲ ϑερίζουσιν, οἷς οὐκ ἔστι ταμεῖον οὐδὲ ἀποϑήκη, καὶ ὁ ϑεὸς 
’ 3 , , ~ c ~ , ~ ~ αν) Δὲ > τ ee 
τρέφει αὑτούς. πόσῳ μᾶλλον ὑμεῖς διαφέρετε τῶν πετεινῶν. Tig δὲ ἐξ ὑμῶν 
~ , ~ 3. ἃ \ ¢ , ¢ “ἊΨ ~ Φ ΕΣ + 
μεριμνῶν: δυναται προςϑεῖναι tat τὴν ἡλικίαν αὑτοῦ πῆχυν eve; Εἰ οὖν οὔτε 
> , ; 7 ~ ~ ~ 
ἐλάχιστον δύνασϑε, τί περὶ τῶν λοιπῶν μεριμνᾶτε; Καταγοήσατε τὰ κρίνα, 
~ ~ ~ A . ; “- 
πῶς αὐξάνει" οὐ κοπιᾷ οὐδὲ νήϑει. λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν, οὐδὲ Σολομὼν ἐν πάσῃ τῇ δόξῃ 
~ a ~ --Ὁ- ‘ 
αὑτοῦ περιεβάλετο ὡς ἕν τούτων. Εἰ δὲ τὸν χόρτον ἐν τῷ ἀγρῷ σήμερον ὄντα 
‘ x 9 λί λλ , ς 9 \ Φ > , ; χλλ 
καὶ αὔριον εἰς κλίβανον βαλλόμενον 0 ϑεὸς οὑὐτως ἀμφιέννυσι, πόσῳ μᾶλλον 
“ « ~ \ ‘ ‘ 
ὑμᾶς, ὀλιγόπιστοι. Καὶ ὑμεῖς μὴ ζητεῖτε, τί φάγητε ἢ τί πίητε, καὶ μὴ μετεωρίζε- 
~ A , .» “2 5 PO Ser Tait Ae ‘ “ 
σϑε. Ταῦτα γὰρ πάντα τὰ ἔϑνη τοῦ κόσμου ἐπιζητεῖ" ὑμῶν δὲ ὃ πατὴρ vide, 
o ’ iv 4 » ‘ , ~ ~ A ~ 7 
ott χρήζετε τούτων. Πλὴν ζητεῖτε τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ ϑεοῦ, καὶ ταῦτα πάντα 
~ ~~. σ 
προςτεϑήσεται ὑμῖν. My φοβοῦ, τὸ μικρὸν ποίμνιον, ὅτι εὐδόκησεν 6 πατὴρ 
φὶ ὦ - Co» \ , } , δ. ἐδ ε »"» 4 , 
ὑμῶν δοῦναι ὑμῖν τὴν βασιλείαν. Πωλήσατε τὰ ὑπάρχοντα ὑμῶν και Sorte 
~ * ; ᾿ : 
ἐλεημοσύνην. ποιήσατε ἑαυτοῖς βαλάντια μὴ παλαιούμενα, ϑησαυρὸν ἀνέκλει- 
3 ~ 2 ~ Ὁ , > > , φὰλ A , ο , 
στον ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς, ὅπου κλέπτης οὐκ ἐγγίζει οὐδὲ σὴς διαφϑείρει. Ὅπου yao 
΄ ~ ~ ~ a ~ 
ἐστιν ὁ ϑησαυρὸς ὑμῶν, ἐκεῖ καὶ ἡ καρδία ὑμῶν ἔσται. Ἔστωσαν ὑμῶν αἱ 
Ἂ Α ~ σ . 
ὀσφύες περιεζωσμέναι καὶ οἱ λύχνοι καιόμενοι" καὶ ὑμεῖς ὅμοιοι ἀνθρώποις 
προςδεχομένοις τὸν κύριον ἑαυτῶν, πότε ἀναλύσει ἐχ τῶν γάμων, ἵνα ἐλϑόντος 
‘4 , > , A » > “- ᾿ « ~ > ~ a 
καὶ χρούσαντος εὐθέως ἀνοίξωσιν αὐτῷ. Maxagior ot δοῦλοι ἐκεῖνοι, ove 
- 4 ras. ) 
ἐλϑὼν ὁ κύριος εὑρήσει γρηγοροῦντας᾽" ἀμὴν. λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι περιζώσεται καὶ 
QA Ν. 3 ~ ? 
ἀνακλινεῖ αὐτοὺς καὶ παρελϑὼν διακονήσει αὐτοῖς. ͵ Και ἕὰν et | ἕν τ δευτε- 
Ce φυλαχῇ καὶ ἐν τῇ τρίτῃ φυλακῇ ἔλϑῃ καὶ εὕρῃ οὕτω, μακάριοί. εἰσιν οἱ δοῦλοι 


ἐχεῖνοι. Τοῦτο δὲ γινώσκετε, ὅτι εἰ ἴδει ὃ οἰκοδεσπότης, ποίᾳ ὥρᾳ 6 χλέπτης 


Υ̓́ Ε , b> A > by hn ~ \ - € ~ a 

ἔρχεται, ἐγρηγόρησεν ἂν καὶ οὐκ «ἂν ἀφῆκε διορυγῆναι τὸν οἶχον αὑτοῦ. Και 

ε an 1 Ὁ , o σ δ' ©& > ~ ε cat ~ 9 , ” 

ὑμεῖς οὖν γίνεσϑε ἕτοιμοι, ott ἢ ὥρᾳ ov δοχεῖτε ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνϑρώπου ἔρχεται." 
τ . ~ ΄ ᾿ “ ‘ A ᾿ i) ᾿ 

Εἶπε δὲ αὐτῷ ὁ Πέτρος" κύριε, πρὸς ἡμᾶς τὴν παραβολὴν ταύτην λέγεις, ἢ καὶ 


‘ , ἡ} ἧς , 35 Ow > ‘ ε A 3 , 4 7 
42 πρὸς πάντας ; Εἶπε δὲ ὁ Ἰ βίος TIS KOK ἔστιν ὁ πιστὸς οἰκοτόμος και peng 


μὸς, ὃν καταστήσει ὁ κύριος ἐπὶ τῆς ϑεραπείας αὑτοῦ, τοῦ διδόναι ἐν καιρῷ τὸ 


43 σιτομέεριον ; Μακάριος ὁ δοῦλος ἐκεῖνος, ὃν ἐλθὼν ὁ κύριος αὐτοῦ εὑρήσει 
44 ποιοῦντα οὕτως." Alndac λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι ἐπὸ πᾶσι τοῖς ὑπάρχουσιν αὑτοῦ κατα- 


7 


50 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [Part l¥ 





LUKE XI. 

, ‘ ~ ~ ~ ~ 

45 στήσει αὐτόν. ᾿Εὰν δὲ εἴπῃ ὁ δοῦλος ἐκεῖνος ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὑτοῦ" χρονίζει ὁ κύριός 
μου ἔρχεσϑαι: καὶ ἄρξηται τύπτειν τοὺς παῖδας καὶ τὰς παιδίσκας, ἐσϑίειν τε καὶ 

σ - τ ~ 
46 πίνειν καὶ μεϑύσκεσθϑαι" ἥξει ὁ κύριος τοῦ δούλου ἐχείνου ἐν ἡμέρᾳ, ἧ οὐ προςδοκᾷ, 
4 σ t ‘ - Ν 
καὶ ἐν ὥρᾳ, ἡ οὐ γινώσκει, καὶ διχοτομήσει αὐτόν, καὶ TO μέρος αὐτοῦ μετὰ τῶν ἀπί- 
~ A ~ ‘ ~ ~ 

47 στων Dyce. “Exsivog δὲ ὁ δοῦλος 6 γνοὺς τὸ ϑέλημα τοῦ κυρίου ἑαυτοῦ, καὶ μὴ 
΄ A ~ 

48 ἑτοιμάσας μηδὲ ποιήσας πρὸς τὸ ϑέλημα αὐτοῦ, δαρήσεται πολλάς" ὁ δὲ μὴ 
γνούς, ποιήσας δὲ ἄξια πληγῶν, δαρήσεται ὀλίγας. παντὶ δὲ ᾧ ἐδόϑη πολύ, 

~ , τ : 
πολὺ ζητηϑήσεται nag αὐτοῦ" καὶ ᾧ παρέϑεντο πολύ, περισσότερον αἰτήσουσιν 
~ - os . ~ 4 7 

49 50. αὐτόν. Πῦρ ἦλϑον βαλεῖν sig τὴν γῆν, καὶ τί ϑέλω, εἰ ἤδη ἀνήφϑη; Βάπτισμα 

ay, ~ 4 4A ~ , τ' - ‘ale - 

51 δὲ ἔχω βαπτισϑῆναι, καὶ πῶς συνέχομαι, ἕως οὗ τελεσϑῇ ; Aoxeize, ὅτι εἰρήνην 

Ἢ , ~ > ~ ~ - Ree λέ c ~ 3 af , » A 

52 παρεγενόμην δοῦναι ἕν τῇ. γῇ ; οὐχί, λέγω ὑμῖν, add ἢ διαμερισμόν. σονται yao 

ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν πέντε ἐν οἴκῳ ἑνὶ διαμεμερισμένοι, τρεῖς ἐπὶ δυσὶ καὶ δύο ἐπὶ τρισί. 
, eee Wea ees 24 yan. oe ‘ ‘ 

53 ὑδαραμ θυ bed πατὴρ <i υἱῷ καὶ νιὸς ἐπὶ πατρὶ, wen 9 ἐπι i μρὲ καὶ Ov- 
γάτηρ ἐπὶ μητρί, πενϑερὰ ἐπὶ τὴν νύμφην αὑτῆς καὶ νύμφη ἐπὶ τὴν πενϑερὰν 
αὑτῆς. 

ven wm” ‘ ~ 
ὅ4 Ἔλεγε δὲ καὶ τοῖς ὄχλοις " ὅταν ἴδητε τὴν νεφέλην ἀνατέλλουσαν ἀπὸ δυσμῶν, 
> , , cA a” ‘ ’ σ .¢ , ’ 

55 εὐθέως λέγετε" ὄμβρος ἔρχεται" χαὶ γίνεται οὕτω. Kat ὅταν νότον πνέοντα, 

- ~ A 

56 λέγετε" ὅτι καύσων ἔσται᾽ καὶ γίνεται. “Troxgitat, τὸ πρόφωπον τῆς γῆς καὶ 

57 τοῦ οὐρανοῦ οἰδατε δοκιμάζειν, τὸν δὲ καιρὸν τοῦτον πῶς οὐ δοχιμάζετε ; Τί δὲ 

58 χαὶ ἀφ ἑαυτῶν οὐ χρίνετε τὸ δίχαιον : 'ῶὸο γὰρ ὑπάγεις μετὰ τοῦ ἀντιδίκου σου 
»»»» 3 - ε ~ 4 > . , > , > > > ~ 7 
ἐπὶ ἄρχοντα, ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ δὸς ἐργὰσίαν ἀπηλλάχϑαι an αὐτοῦ " μἥποτε κατασύρῃ 

᾿ ᾿ - - A 
σε πρὸς τὸν κριτήν, καὶ ὃ χριτής σὲ παραδῷ TH πράκτορι, καὶ ὁ πράκτωρ σε 


59 βάλῃ εἰς φυλακήν. “Τέγω σοι, οὐ μὴ ἐξέλθῃς ἐκεῖϑεν, ἕως οὗ καὶ τὸ ἔσχατον 


λεπτὸν ἀποδῷς. 


63, The slaughter of certain Galileans. Parable of the barren Fig-tree.— Galilee. 


Luxe XIII. 1—9. 

1. Παρῆσων δέ τινὲς ἐν αὐτῷ τῷ καιρῷ ἀπαγγέλλοντες αὐτῷ περὶ τῶν Γαλιλαίων, 
2 ὧν τὸ αἷμα Πιλάτος ἔμιξε μετὰ τῶν ϑυσιῶν αὐτῶν. Καὶ ἀποχριϑ εὶς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς 
εἶπεν αὐτοῖς δοχεῖτε, ὅτι οἱ Γαλιλαῖοι οὗτοι ἁμαρτωλοὶ παρὰ πάντας τοὺς 
3 Γαλιλαίους ἐγένοντο, ὅτι τοιαῦτα πεπόνϑασιν; Οὐχί, λέγω ὑμῖν" GIR ἐὰν μὴ 
4 μετανοῆτε, πάντες ὡςαύτως ἀπολεῖσϑες. Ἢ ἐχεῖνοι οἱ δέκα καὶ ὀκτώ, ἐφ᾿ οὃς 
ἔπεσεν ὁ πύργος ἐν τῷ Σιλωὰμ καὶ ἀπέχτεινεν αὐτούς, δοκεῖτε, ὅ ὅτι οὗτοι- ὀφει- 
λέται ἐγένοντο παρὰ πάντας ἀνϑρώπους τοὺς κατοικοῦντας. ἐν 'Ἱερουσαλήμ ; 
56 Οὐχί, λέγω ὑμῖν" ἀλλ ἐὰν μὴ μετανοῆτε, πάντες ὁμοίως ἀπολεῖσϑε. Ἔλεγε δὲ 
ταύτην τὴν παραβολήν" συχὴν εἶχέ τις ἐν τῷ ἀμπελῶνι αὑτοῦ πεφυτευμένη»" 
7 καὶ ἦλ Oe ern? καρπὸν ἐν αὐτῇ καὶ οὐχ εὗρεν. Εἶπε δὲ πρὸς τὸν ἀμπελ ουργάν" 
ἰδού, τρία ἕτη ἔρχομαι ζητῶν καρπὸν ἐν τῇ συχῇ ταύτῃ καὶ οὐχ εὑρίσκω" ἴχκοψον 
8 αὐτήν" ἵνα τί καὶ τὴν. γῆν heh: {od ; Ὁ δὲ ἀποκριϑεὶς λέγει αὐτῷ" κύριε, ἄφες 
9 αὐτὴν χαὶ τοῦτο τὸ ἔτος, ἕως ὅτου σχάψω περὶ αὐτὴν καὶ βάλω χύπριαν" χἂν 

μὲν ποιήσῃ χαρπόνγ" εἰ δὲ μήγε ᾿ εἰς τὸ μέλλον ἐχκόψεις αὐτήν. 


ΠΝ ἂν i iD ων. ὁ 


§§ 53, 54.] 


‘UNTIL THE THIRD. 


51 





3 


§ 54, Parable of the Sower.—Lake of Galilee: Near Capernaum ? * 


Marra. XIII. 1—23. 
Ἔν δὲ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ ἐξελϑὼν ὁ 1 
Ἰησοῦς ἀπὸ τῆς οἰκίας ἐκάϑητο παρὰ 
2 τὴν ϑάλασσαν᾽ καὶ συνήχϑησαν πρὸς 
αὐτὸν ὄχλοι πολλοί, ὥςτε αὐτὸν εἰς 
τὸ πλοῖον ἐμβάντα καϑῆσϑαι" καὶ 


~ ec wa | ‘ 
πᾶς ὁ oyhog ἐπὶ tor 
» ι ey es X 
αἰγιαλὸν εἰστῆκει. Και 
ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς πολλὰ 
3 - , 
ἐν παραβολαῖς, λέγων" 


., a ἐξ 
εἰ ἰδού, ἐξήλϑεν ὁ σπείρων 


4 


10 





-- ᾽ , ‘ \ > 
tov σπείρειν. Και ἐν 


- a ‘ 
τῷ σπείρειν αὐτὸν ἃ μὲν 


ΝΥ A ‘ e ry \ 

ἔπεσε παρὰ τὴν odor 

Oe ‘ ‘ A 

καὶ ἤλϑεὲ τὰ πετεινὰ καὶ 
κατέφαγεν αὐτά. 

“Adie 

ἊΨ “eo 9 ‘ , 

δὲ émecey ἐπι TH METQOI- 

Ὁ Σ᾿ ot ~ 

δη, ὅπου οὐχ εἶχε γῆν 

- 4 
πολλήν᾽ καὶ εὐθέως ἐξ- 


’ ‘ 4 \ oo» 
, ἀνέτειλε διὰ τὸ μὴ ἔχειν 


ἡλίου δὲ 
ἐχαυμα- 


βάϑος γῆς" 
ἀνατείλαντος 
, ‘ ‘ \ b) 
τισϑη, καὶ διὰ τὸ μὴ 
” «»}ὔ δ ? 

ἔχειν ῥίζαν ἐξηράνϑη. 


"Alia δὲ ἔπεσεν. ἐπὶ τὰς 


> , ἘΠῚ sae 
ἀκάνϑας" καὶ ἀνέβησαν 
« a Ὁ ‘ > os 
αι ἀκαῦϑαι καὶ ἀπεπνι- 
Lav αὐτά. , 
a 4 
‘Alia δὲ 
mt -> Α 4 ~ 4 
ἔπεσεν ἐπι τὴν γῆν τὴν 
, 4s 3g’ 
καλην" καὶ ἐδίδου καρ- 
δ Oh Ὁ r a A 
mov, 0 μὲν sxatorv, oO δὲ 
fe? a δὲ , 
ἔξηχκοντα, ὁ δὲ τρια- 


κοντα. 


‘O ” 3 > , > 
ἔχῶν WTH AXOVELY, α- 


᾿χουέἕτω. 
‘ 
Καὶ προφελϑόντες οἱ 10 


τὴν ϑαλασσαν" 


Marx IV. 1—25. 


Καὶ πάλιν ἤρξατο διδάσκειν παρὰ 


‘ Ud ‘ 
καὶ συγηχϑὴ πρὸς 


Pe, 4 , σ 5... .᾿ > 
αὑτὸν ὀχλος πολὺς, @gté αὑτὸν fie 
βάντα εἰς τὸ πλοῖον καθῆσϑαι ἐν 
τῇ ϑαλάσαῃ " 


4 
καὶ πᾶς ὃ ᾿ ὄχλος 


πρὸς τὴν ϑάλασσαν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἦν. 


2 Καὶ ᾿δίδισνων αὐτοὺς 


ἐν παραβολαῖς πολλά, 
4 ~ - 
καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς ἐν τῇ 
ὃ ὃ Lined ¢€ yo ! > , 
Wayn αὑτοῦ" ! ἀκούετε" 
ἰδού, ἐξήλϑεν ὁ σπείρων 
@ ~ = y ze ἰῷ 
tov σπεῖραι. Kou eyeve- 
~ a 4 
το ἐν τῷ σπείρειν ὃ μὲν 
yw A ‘ « , 
ἔπεσε παρὰ τὴν ὃδὸν, 
a nae \ 4 
καὶ ἤλϑε τὰ πετεινὰ 
“ “" A 
[τοῦ οὐρανοῦ] καὶ xaré- 
"Αλλο δὲ 


ov Ψ κα A ~ 
ἔπεσὲν ἐπι TO πετρῶδες, 


payer αὐτό. 


σ > “ on 

ὁπου οὐκ εἶχε γῆν πολ- 
7 ‘ 

Liv καὶ εὐθέως ἐξανέ- 

4 aA 4 ” 
τειλὲ διὰ τὸ μὴ ἔχειν 
~ 4 

βάϑος γῆς" ἡλίου δὲ 
ἀνατείλαντος ἑκαῦμα- 
᾽ ‘ A A ‘ 

τισϑη, καὶ διὰ τὸ μὴ 
ld 

ἔχειν ῥίζαν ἐξηράνϑη. 

A 

Kai ἀλλο ἔπέσεν εἰς τὰς 
ἀξ [ Wy oe 

ἄκανϑας, καὶ ἀνέβησαν 
c oo” 4 Ul 

αἱ ἄκανϑαι και. συνέ- 

A 

πτιξαν αὐτό, καὶ καρπὸν 
ν“,.κ 4 

Καὶ ἀλλο 


” j 4 ~ 
ἔπεσεν εἰς τὴν γῆν τὴν 


3 ΝΥ 
οὐκ ἔδωχε. 


“καλήν, καὶ ἐδίδου χαρ- 


A > , 4 
πὸν ἀναβαίνοντα καὶ 
7-7 εὐ, “ 
αὐξάνοντα, καὶ ἔφερεν 
a , ἂν ἔς» 
ἕν τριάκοντα καὶ ἕν ἑξή- 
a: ἃ 
κοντὰ καὶ ἕν ἕχατόν. 


Καὶ ἔλεγεν [αὐτοῖς }" 


com” 33 > , 3 
0 ἕχῶν GOTH ἀκοῦξίν, K- 


KOVETO. 
Ὁ A 
Oze δὲ ἐγένετο κατα- 


4 


σι 


πόλιν 


Luxe VIII. 4—18. 

Συνιόντος δὲ ὄχλου 
πολλοῦ καὶ τῶν κατὰ 
ἐπιπορευομένων 

A ἌΡ - A 
πρὸς αὑτόν, εἶπε διὰ 
παραβολῆς ἐξῆλϑεν ὁ 


~ ~~ ‘A 
'σπείρων TOV σπεῖραι τὸν 


- 4 > 
σπόρον αὑτοῦ. καὶ ἐν 
~ 4 a s 
τῷ σπείρειν αὐτὸν ὃ μὲν. 
Υ̓ Ἁ A € , 
ἔπεσε παρὰ τὴν odor, 

4 4 A 
καὶ κατεπατήϑη, καὶ τὰ 
πετεινὰ οὐρανοῦ 

, > , 4 
κατέφαγεν αὐτό. Kat 


o " 3. ‘ 
ETEQOV EMECEV ἕπι τὴν 


του 


’ ᾿ κ 4 2% ‘ 
πέτραν, και pvev ἑςῆ- 


ράνϑη διὰ τὸ μὴ ἔχειν 
ἰκμάδα. 


Καὶ 


~ ~ A 
μέσῳ τῶν ἀκανϑῶν, καὶ 


ὔ ” 3 
ETEQOYV πεσε EV 


~ A 
συμφυεῖσαι αἱ ἄκανθαι 
oe 
ἀπέπνιξαν αὑτό. 

ν᾽ ee 

_ Kat ἕτερον 
ἔπεσεν εἰς τὴν γῆν τὴν 
2 ῃ : A ‘ > , 
ἀγαϑὴν, καὶ We? é7001- 
ἤσε καρπὸν ἑκατοντα- 
πλασίονα. 


Pg ‘ 
Tavita λέγων ἐφώνει" 
c # Ἵ > ΄ 3 
ἃ ἔχων wre ewanes, a 


 KOvETO. 


9 


᾿Επηρώτων δὲ αὐτὸν 


52 


FROM OUR LORD’S 


SECOND PASSOVER 


[Part IV. 





11 


12 


18 


14 


15 


16 


17 


18 


19 


MATTH. XIII. 
‘ ἂν >.” 
μαϑηται εἴπον αὐτῷ" 
Α ~ 
διὰ τί ἐν παραβολαῖς λα- 
λεῖς αὐτοῖς ; Ὃ δὲ ἀπο- 
s > ~ 
χριϑεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " 
ΨΦίι ς »ν , ~ 
ott ὑμῖν δέδοται γνῶναι 
‘ ~ 
τὰ μυστήρια τῆς βασι- 


᾿ λείας τῶν οὐρανῶν, ExEt- 


vow δὲ οὐ δέδοται. Ὅς- 


τις γὰρ ἔχει, δοϑήσεται. 


> ~ A ; 
αὑτῷ, καὶ περισσευϑη- 
σεται" 


MARK IV. 
, 0 tie. 2A 
μόνας, ἠρώτησαν αὐτὸν 
4 ~ 
οἱ περὶ αὐτὸν σὺν τοῖς 
, ‘ 
δώδεκα τὴν παραβολήν. 
‘4 ~ ~ 
Kai ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς" ὑμῖν 
δέδοται γνῶναι τὸ μυ- 
7 σα» Ὁ 
στήριον τῆς βασιλείας 
~ ΠΑΝ 5 , Α 
tov ϑεοῦυ" ἐκείνοις δὲ 
~ Ν » 
τοῖς ἔξω ἐν παραβο- 
λαῖς τὰ πάντα γίνεται" 


σ ‘A > a” αν 3 , 
ostig δὲ οὐχ ἔχει, καὶ 0 ἔχει agdn- 


σεται an αὐτοῦ. Διὰ τοῦτο ἐν παραβο- 


~ ~ ~ σ 
λαῖς αὐτοῖς λαλῶ, oz 
βλέποντες οὐ βλέπουσι 
καὶ ἀκούοντες οὐκ ἀκού- 
οὐὔσιν, συνιοῦσι. 

4 ~ 
Καὶ ἀναπληροῦται av- 

~ « ΨΗΔΕ Ah 
τοῖς ἡ προφητεία Ησαὶ- 

« , .ἃ > ~ 
ov, 7 λέγουσα "5 ἀκοῇ 


οὐδὲ 


“ 
12 ἵνα βλέποντες βλέπωσι 
> 4 .. OM, \ as ? 
καὶ μὴ ἰδωσι, καὶ ἀκου- 


Α 
οντες ἀχούωσι καὶ μὴ 
συνιῶσι "5 μήποτε ἐπι- 


LUKE VIII. 


4 ~ 
οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ dé 


γοντες, τίς εἴη ἡ παρα- 
βολὴ αὕτη" Ὁ δὲ εἶπεν" 
ὑμῖν δέδοται γνῶναι τὰ 
μυστήρια τῆς βασιλείας 
τοῦ ϑεοῦ, τοῖς δὲ λοι- 
ποῖς ἐν παραβολαῖς, 


/ 


ἵνα βλέποντες μὴ βλέ- 


πωσι καὶ ἀκούοντες μὴ 
συνιῶσιν." 


στρέψωσι, καὶ ἀφεϑῇ αὐτοῖς τὰ ἁμαρτήματα. 
0 φευῃ μαάρτημ 


ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε, καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε. 
Ἐπαχύνϑη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶ βαρέως ἤ ηκου- 
σαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὑτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν" μήποτε ἴδωσι τοῖς ὀφϑαλ- 
μοῖς, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσι, καὶ τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσι, καὶ ἐπιστρέψωσι, 


\ εἰς > , 
καὶ LHOWUKL HUTOVS. 


“Ὑμῶν δὲ μακάριοι οἱ ὀφϑαλμοί, ὅτι βλέπουσι, 
μ μάκαρ Guar 


4 ‘ - ξ ~ σ > , > 4 ‘ , c¢ w 7 A 
καὶ τὰ ὦτα ὑμῶν, OTL ἀκούει. “Auny yao λέγω ὑμῖν, ott πολλοι προ- 


φῆται καὶ δίκαιοι ἐπε- 
ϑύμησαν ἰδεῖν ἃ βλέ- 
πετε, καὶ οὐκ εἶδον" καὶ 
ἀκοῦσαι ἃ ἀκούετε, καὶ 
οὐκ ἤκουσαν. Ὑμεῖς οὖν 
ἀκούσατε τὴν παραβο- 
λὴν σπείροντος. 
ΤΠαντός ἀκούοντος τὸν 
λόγον τῆς βασιλείας, καὶ 
μὴ συνιέντος, ἔρχεται ὁ 


τοῦ 


4  ¢ , 4 
πονηρὸς καὶ ἁρπάζει τὸ 


ἐσπαρμένον ἐν τῇ καρ- 
, > ~ wey! BRAS, 
δίᾳ αὐτοῦ" ovtog ἐστιν 
ὁ παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν σπα- 
ρείς. Ὁ δὲ ἐπὶ τὰ πε: 
᾿ , eS 2 
rowdy σπαρείς, οὗτός 


15 ρει. 


16 δίαις αὐτῶν. 


πῶς πάσας τὰς παρα- 


14 βολὰς γνώσεσϑε; Ὁ 


/ ‘ , ’ 
σπείρων TOY λόγον σπεί: 
t 
Οὗτοι δέ εἶσιν οἱ 
‘4 ‘ ¢ , σ 
παρὰ τὴν odor, ὑπου 
‘ 
σπείρεται ὁ λόγος, καὶ 
΄σ > ’ > , 
ὅταν ἀκούσωσιν, εὐϑέως 
~ ‘ 
ἔρχεται ὁ σατανᾶς καὶ 
” ‘ , ‘ ; 
αἴρει τὸν λόγον τὸν &- 
σπαρμένον ἐν ταῖς καρ- 
τ 
Καὶ ov- 
, > c , fa Bee, 
τοί εἶσιν ὁμοίως οἱ ἐπι 
τὰ πετρώδη σπειρόμενοι, 


12 λόγος τοῦ ϑεοῦ. 


13 Καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς" οὐκ οἴδατε τὴν 
παραβολὴν ταύτην ; καὶ 
11 Ἔστι δὲ αὕτῃ ἡ παρα- 


‘. « , > ‘ ε 
Body" ὃ σπόρος ἐστὶν ὁ 
Οἱ δὲ 

‘ ‘ fet 9 4 ε 
παρὰ τὴν δον εἰσιν οἱ 
ἀκούοντες " εἶτα ἔρχεται 
id , q A 
ὁ διάβολος καὶ αἴρει τὸν 
λόγον ἀπὸ τῆς καρδίας 
αὐτῶν, ἵνα μὴ πιστεύ- 
σαντες σωϑῶσιν. 


Οἱ δὲ ἐπὶ τῆς πέτρας, 
οἵ, ὅταν ἀκούσωσι, μετὰ 
χαρᾶς δέχονται τὸν λό- 





,..--.--.- 


5. 14 etc. Is. 6, 9. 10. 





Ee δ Ὁ Σ 


§ 54.) 


UNTIL THE THIRD. 





23 


21 


22 


25 


MATTH. XIII 
3 ς \ , > , 
ἐστι» ὁ τὸν λόγον axov= 


Α 3 ‘ ‘ 
ὧν καὶ εὐϑυς μετὰ χα- 


~ , P > , 
ρᾶς λαμβάνων αὐτὸν" 
τ» » ‘ ce? 3 
οὐκ ἔχει δὲ ῥίζαν ἐν 
ς “ 3 A , 
ἑαυτῷ, ἀλλὰ προρκαι- 
, 3 ‘ 
00g ἐστι" γενομένης δὲ 
‘A ~~ 
θλίψεως ἢ διωγμοῦ διὰ 
‘ ’ > ‘ 
tov λόγον, evdus oxar- 
δαλίζεται. Ὁ δὲ εἰς τὰς 
κὰν τ 
ἀκάνϑὰς σπαρείς, οὗτός 
> Rin ah , > , 
ἔστιν 0 τὸν λογὸν ἀχού- 
Α ~ 
cor, καὶ ἡ μέριμνα τοῦ 
~ 4 
αἰῶνος τούτου καὶ ἡ 
3 ~ 
ἀπάτῃ τοῦ πλούτου 
συμπνίγει τὸν λόγον" 
γίγνεται. 


‘ a 
καὶ ἄκαρπος 


7 


ὑπαὶ 


19 


MARK IV. 
7 ΟΡ > , \ 
οἵ, ὁταν ἀκούσωσι TOY 

, 
λόγον, εὐθέως μετὰ χα- 
ρᾶς λαμβάνουσιν αὐτόν. 
A 
Καὶ οὐκ ἔχουσι ῥίζαν ἐν 
ε we ay, A , + 
ἑαυτοῖς, ἀλλὰ πρόςκαι- 
ροΐ εἰσιν" εἶτα, γενομέ- 
\ ~ 
yng ϑλίψεως ἢ διωγμοῦ 
A 

διὰ τὸν λόγον, εὐθέως 
Α 
σχαγδαλίζονται. Και 

52'S a¢ > A 
ἄλλοι εἶσιν οἱ εἰς τὰς 
ἀκάνϑας σπειρύμενοι" 

τ anes <p 5% , 
OUTOL εἰσιν οἱ TOY hoyor 
‘ 

ἀκούοντες, ' καὶ αἱ pé- 
ρίμναι τοῦ αἰῶνος [τού- 
Α -Ὁ 
τοῦ] καὶ ἡ ἀπάτη τοῦ 
4A 
περὶ 


, 4A 4 
πλούτου xo αἱ 


53 
LUKE VIII. 
A r «»ὔ y 
γον" καὶ οὗτοι ῥίζαν 
a 
οὐκ ἔχουσιν, οἱ πρὸς 


\ A 
καιρὸν πιστεύουσι καὶ 
ἐν καιρῷ πειρασμοῦ ἀφί- 
σταντᾶι. 


4 A 4 Rc 
To δὲ εἰς τὰς ἀκάνϑας 
4 τ | dh ὃν, 3 
πεσόν, OVTOL εἰσιν οἱ ἀ- 

te! A 
κούσαντες, καὶ ὑπὸ με- 
“ast 12 s i 4 
ριμνῶν καὶ πλούτου καὶ 
ἡδονῶν τοῦ βίου πορευ- 
‘ 
ὄμενοι συμπγίγονται καὶ 

uv τελεσφοροῦῖσι. 


τὰ λοιπὰ ἐπιϑυμίαι εἰςπορευόμεναι 
᾿δυμπΡίγουσι τὸν λόγον, καὶ ἄκαρπος 
Ὁ δὲ ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν "δὴν 20 γιρεέάε. Καὶ οὗτοί εἰ- 15 Τὸ δὲ ἐν ai καλῇ ii 


καλὴν σπαρείς, οὗτός 
3 «τὰ \ , > , 
ἐστιν ὁ τὸν λόγον axov- 
‘ , a A 
wv, καὶ συνιῶν" og δὴ 
~ ‘ ~ 
καρποφορεῖ, καὶ ποιεῖ ὃ 
ΟΕ , ε . fee 
μὲν sxatov, ὁ δὲ &S7- 
— ὁ δὲ τριάκοντα. 
MARK IV. 


σιν οἱ ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν τὴν 


A , [4 
καλὴν σπαρέντες, OLTLVES 
4 
ἀκούουσι τὸν λόγον καὶ 
Ν , 4 
παραδέχονται, καὶ χαρ- 
ποφοροῦσιν ἕν τριάκον- 
sa € eee A 
τὰ καὶ ἕν ἑξήκοντα καὶ 
ἕν ἑκατόν. 
16 


οὗτοί εἰσιν, 
καρδίᾳ καλῇ καὶ ἀγαϑῇ 
ἀκούσαντες τὸν λόγον 
καρπο- 


οἵτινες ἐν 


A 
κατέχουσι καὶ 
φοροῦσιν ἕν ὑπομοτῇ. 


LUKE VIII. 


Καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς" μήτι ὁ λύχνος 


Υ 7 ¢ ‘ A ’ mm |) We, 
ἔρχεται, wa ὑπὸ τὸν μόδιον τεϑῇ ἢ 


« , 4 ’ 7 ¢ - ὦ ‘ 
ὑπὸ τὴν κλίνην; οὐχ ἵνα ἐπὶ τὴν 
λυχνίαν . ἐπιτεϑῇ; Οὐ γάρ ἐστί τι 
, a "Δ 3 - 2h 
κρύπτον, O ἐὰν μὴ φανερωϑῇ᾽ οὐδὲ 
 ΨἊ, > , > wre 3 
ἐγένετο ἀπόχρυφον, HLA WH εἰς φα- 
4 " δ ” z 2 , 
νερὸν ἔλϑῃ. Εἰ τις ἔχει ora ἀκούειν, 
A ~ 
ἀκουέτω. Καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς βλέ- 
τ - 
πετε, τί ἀκούετε. ἐν ᾧ μέτρῳ μετρεῖτε, 
» ‘ ’ 
μετρηϑήσεται ὑμῖν, καὶ προρτεϑησες 


ται ὑμῖν τοῖς ἀκούουσιν. Ὃς γὰρ ἂν 


17 


18 


ied 
Οὐδεὶς δὲ λύχνον ἅψας καλύπτει 
δ ς ΝΆ 7 ἣ 1 7 , , 
αὑτὸν σκεύει ἢ ὑποκάτω χλίνης τίϑη- 
> > r let , 3 ’ὔ σ 
σιν, ἀλλ ἐπὶ λυχνίας ἐπιτίϑησιν, wa 
4 _ 
οἱ εἰςπορευόμενοι βλέπωσι τὸ φῶς. 
hy a { 
Οὐ γάρ ἐστι κρυπτόν, ὃ ov φανερὸν 
A a 
γενήσεται, οὐδὲ ἀπόκρυφον, ὃ οὐ γνω- 
4 δ 
σϑήσεται καὶ εἰς φανερὸν ἔλϑῃ. Βλέ- 
Ἂ κι ~ a ‘ 
METE οὖν, πῶς ἀκούετε" OS γὰρ ἂν 
» , > ~ sa x \ oo» 
ἔχῃ, δοϑήσεται αὑτῷ, καὶ OS ἂν μὴ EXN, 
va ~ >» ye , ek heat ya ὦ 
καὶ ὃ δοκεῖ ἔχειν ἀρϑήσεται ἀπ᾿ αὐτοῦ. 


ἔχῃ, δοϑήσεται αὐτῷ καὶ ὃς οὐκ ἔχει, καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρϑήσεται ἀπὶ αὐτοῦ. 


54 


FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [ *art IV. 





24 


25 


26 
27 
28 
29, 


31 


32 


33 - 


35 


> , 4 ‘ , 
ἐφάνη καὶ τὰ ζιζάνια. 


§ 55. Parable of the Tares. Other Parables.—Near Cupernaum ? 
Marra. XII. 24—53, 
“Aldny παραβολὴν παρέϑηκεν αὐτοῖς λέγων" ὡμοιώϑη ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρα- 
γῶν ἀνϑρώπῳ σπείροντι καλὸν σπέρμα ἐν τῷ ἀγρῷ αὑτοῦ. Ἔν δὲ τῷ καϑεύδειν 
τοὺς ἀνθρώπους, ἦλϑεν αὐτοῦ ὁ ἐχϑρὸς καὶ ἔσπειρε ζιζάνια ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ 
σίτου καὶ ἀπῆλϑεν. Ὅτε δὲ ἐβλάστησεν ὁ χόρτος καὶ καρπὸν ἐποίησε, τότε 
Προρελϑόντες δὲ οἱ δοῦλοι τοῦ οἰκοδεσπότου εἶπον 
αὐτῷ" κύριε, οὐχὶ καλὸν σπέρμα ἔσπειρας ἐν τῷ σῷ ἀγρῷ; ; πόϑεν οὖν ἔχει ζιζά- 


ma; ὋὉ δὲ ἔφη αὐτοῖς - ἐχϑρὸς ἄνϑρωπος τοῦτο ἐποίησεν. οἱ δὲ δοῦλοι εἶπον 


αὐτῷ" ϑέλεις οὖν ἀπελϑόντες συλλέξωμεν αὐτά; Ὃ δὲ ἔφη οὔ" μήποτε συλλέ- 
youtes τὰ ζιζάνια ἐχριζώσητε ἅμα αὐτοῖς τον σῖτον. ἄφετε συναυξάνεσϑαι 
ἀμφότερα μέχρι τοῦ ϑερισμοῦ" καὶ ἐν καιρῷ τοῦ ϑερισμοῦ ἐρῶ τοῖς ϑερισταῖς " 
συλλέξατε πρῶτον τὰ ζιζάνια καὶ δήσατε αὐτὰ εἰς δέσμας, πρὸς τὸ κατακαῦσαι 
αὐτά" τὸν δὲ σῖτον συναγάγετε εἰς τὴν ἀποϑήκην μου. 

Marx IV, 26—34. 

Kai ἔλεγεν" οὕτως ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ ϑεοῦ, ὡς ἐὰν ἄνϑρωπος βάλῃ τὸν σπό- 
ον ἐπὶ τῆς vis, ' καὶ καϑεύδῃ καὶ ἐγείρηται νύχτα καὶ ἡμέραν, καὶ ὁ σπόρος 
βλαστάνῃ καὶ μηκύνηται, ὡς οὐχ οἶδεν αὐτός. «Αὐτομάτη γὰρ ἡ γῆ καρποφορεῖ, 
πρῶτον χόρτον, εἶτα στάχυν, εἶτα πλήρη σῖτον ἐν τῷ στάχυϊ. 


ὶ ὁ καρπός, 


Ὅταν δὲ πρρυδᾷ 
ἀποστέλλει τὸν 
δρέπανον, ὅτι παρέστηκεν ὁ ϑερισμός. 

80 Καὶ ἔλεγε" τίει ὁμοιώσωμεν τὴν βα- 


εὐϑέως 
ΜΑΤΤΗ. XIII. 


Ἄλλην παραβολὴν παρέϑηκεν αὐτοῖς 


᾿ 
— “ ΑΝ 
ΡΨ Ν᾽ Αι Ὁ 


λέγων" ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία τῶν 
οὐρανῶν κόχχῳ σινάπεως, ὃν λαβὼν 
a » > ~ > ~ « 
ἀνϑρωπος ἔσπειρεν ἕν τῷ ἀγρῷ αὖυ- 
τοῦ" ὃ μικρότερον μέν ἐστι πάντων 
~ , ΖΞ: σ 4 δ “- 
τῶν σπερμάτων᾽ οτὰαν δὲ αὐξηϑῇ, 
μεῖζον τῶν λαχάνων ἐστί, καὶ γίνεται 
, σ > ~ A ‘ ~ 
δένδρον, were ἐλϑεῖν τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ 
οὐρανοῦ καὶ χκατασχηγοῦν ἐν τοῖς 
κλάδοις αὐτοῦ͵ ἪἽ4λλην παραβολὴν 
ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ 
, ΄« » ~ ΄ a 
βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν ζύμῃ, ἣν λα- 
- . » 4 » > ‘ 
βοῦσα γυνὴ ἐνέχρυψεν εἰς ἀλεύρου 
U , “ t > , “ 
σάτα τρία, ἕως ov ἐζυμώϑη odor. 
Taira πάντα ἐλάλησεν ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς 
> “ - ‘ ‘ 
ἐν παραβολαῖς τοῖς οχλοις, καὶ yogis 
- » > ‘ , ~ σ 
παραβολῆς οὐκ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς ᾿" onwg 
~ \  «¢ ‘ ‘ ~ , 
πληρωϑῇ to ῥηϑὲν διὰ τοῦ προφήτου 
λέγοντος “ἃ ἀνοίξω ἐν παραβολαῖς τὸ 
στόμα μου" ἐρεύξομαι κεχρυμμένα 
ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου. 


ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς" 


, ~ ~ δ Ὦ 
σιλείαν τοῦ ϑεοῦ; ἢ ἐν ποίᾳ παρα- 


31 βολῇ παραβάλωμεν αὐτήν; Ὡς κόχ- 


κον σινάπεως, ὅς, ὅταν σπαρῇ ἐπὶ τῆς 
γῆς, μικρότερος πάντων τῶν σπερμά- 


> ‘ ~ Ps, ~ ~ , @¢ 
32 τῶν ἔστι τῶν ἐπι τῆς γῆς" καὶ οτὰν 


σπαρῇ, ἀναβαίνει καὶ γίνεται πάντων 
τῶν λαχάνων μείζων, καὶ ποιεῖ χκλά- 
δους μεγάλους, ὥςτε δύνασϑαι ὑπὸ 
τὴν σκιὰν αὐτοῦ τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐ- 
ραγοῦ κατασκηνοῦν. 


5 


Καὶ τοιαύταις παραβολαῖς πολλαῖς 
» ἢ > - ‘ ’ κ » ’ 
ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς τὸν λόγον, καϑὼς ἠδύ- 


84 varzo ἀκούειν. Χωρὶς δὲ παραβολῆς 


οὐκ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς " κατ' ἰδίαν δὲ τοῖς 
μαϑηταῖς αὑτοῦ ἐπέλυε πάντα, 





. 2 
* 35. Ps. 78, 2. 











«36 


§§ 55, 56.] UNTIL THE THIRD. . 55 





MATTH. XIII. 

, 4 τ ~ ‘ ~) 
Tote ἀφεὶς τοὺς ὄχλους ἤλϑεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς. καὶ προςῆλϑον 
ae ε a 3 ~ , ΄ Cola ‘ ' ‘ ~ , 

αὐτῷ οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ λέγοντες" φράσον ἡμῖν τὴν παραβολὴν τῶν ζιζανίων 
37 τοῦ ἀγροῦ. “O δὲ ἀποχριϑεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " ὁ σπείρων τὸ καλὸν σπέρμα ἔστιν 
88 6 υἱὸο- » ἀνθρώ ὁ δὲ Oe 4 3 ε , Ἶ » δὲ a\ , Ἔ ? 

φτοῦ ἀνϑρωπον" o δὲ ἀγρὸς ἔστιν ὃ κύσμος τὸ δὲ καλὸν σπέρμα, OVTOL 
29 3 ε εν" ~ , ὡ A Α , , > « εν - ~.,s 4 
89 εἰσιν οἱ viot τῆς βασιλείας" τὰ δὲ ζιζανιά εἶσιν οἱ vior τοῦ πονηροῦ" "ὃ δὲ 
3 , ε τ > Pn » Ἢ « , ¢ ‘ A , gl am, δ 
ἔχϑρος, ὁ σπείρας αὑτά, ἔστιν ὁ διαβολος " ὃ δὲ ϑερισμὸς συντέλεια τοῦ αἰῶνος 
3 4 \ #7 Α 
40 ἐστιν" οἱ δὲ ϑερισταὶ ἄγγελοί εἰσιν. “Ὥσπερ οὖν συλλέγεται τὰ ζιζάνια καὶ πυρὶ 
, 7 ~ ~ ~ ~ 
41 καταχαίδται" οὕτως ἔσται ἐν τῇ συντελείᾳ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου. “AmootEdei 6 
«NX ~ >? , \ ΝΥ lf ς - A, , > ~ , 
υἱὸς tov ἀνθρώπου τοὺς ἀγγέλους αὑτοῦ, καὶ συλλέξουσιν ἐκ τῆς βασιλείας 
42 αὐτοῦ πάντα τὰ σκάνδαλα καὶ τοὺς ποιοῦντας τὴν ἀνομίαν, ' καὶ βαλοῦσιν αὖ- 
A > A , ~ δ νῷ. Ἃ -» « Α ἘΠῚ ‘ ~ > ’ 
τοὺς εἰς τὴν χάμιγον τοῦ πυρὸς" ἐκεῖ ἔσται ὁ κλαυϑμὸς καὶ ὃ βρυγμὸς τῶν ὁδὸν»- 
’ € gf διέ κα , ἀν. cee ἃ... lee , _~ ‘ c ~ 
43 των. Tore οἱ δίκαιοι ἐχλάμψουσιν, ὡς ὁ ἥλιος, ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τοῦ πατρὸς αὑτῶν. 
.«ν - 3 , 2 , , ε , ee ε , ~ > ~ 
44 ὁ ἔχων ὦτα axovew, ἀκουέτω. Πάλιν ὁμοία ἔστιν ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν 
~ ~ ~ a ~ 
ϑησαυρῷ κεχρυμμένῳ ἐν TH ἀγρῷ, ὃν εὑρὼν ἄνθρωπος ἔκρυψε, καὶ ἀπὸ τῆς 
~ ~ A ἐπι Ψ ~ , } ~ 
χαρᾶς αὑτοῦ ὑπάγει καὶ πάντα ὅσα ἔχει πωλεῖ καὶ ἀγοράζει τὸν ἀγρὸν ἐχεῖνον. 
, ς , 3 Α « ?, ~~, > ~ 3 , > , ~ A 
45 [Tah ὁμοία ἔστιν ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν ἀνϑρώπῳ ἐμπόρῳ, ζητοῦντι χαλοὺς 
a . 
46 μαργαρίτας" ὃς εὑρὼν ἕνα πολύτιμον μαργαρίτην, ἀπελϑὼν πέπρακε πάντα ὅσα 
4 {fs / ? , , « ’ > A ς , ~ ᾽ ~ ΄ 
47 εἶχε, χαὶ ἠγόρασεν αὑτὸν. Ilahw ὁμοία ἔστιν ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν σαγήνῃ 
3 ‘ 4 . ὦ [χὰ 
48 βληϑείσῃ εἰς τὴν ϑάλασσαν καὶ ἐχ παντὸς γένους Svvayayovoy* ἥν, ὅτε ἐπλη- 
, 2 ΗΝ > An SA > \ ‘ , , ‘ wis)" 3 
ean, ἀναβιβάσαντες ἐπὶ τὸν αἰγιαλὸν. καὶ καϑίδσαντες συνέλεξαν τὰ καλὰ εἰς 
> -ἅ A ‘ A Pf od » σ ” 3 - "oe ~ 7~ . 
49 ἀγγεῖα, τὰ δὲ σαπρὰ ἔξω ἐβαλον. Ovtmsg ἔσται ἕν τῇ συντελείᾳ τοῦ αἰῶνος 
a a On 4 4 ~ 
ἐξελεύσονται οἱ ἄγγελοι, καὶ ἀφοριοῦσι τοὺς πονηροὺς Ex μέσου τῶν δικαίων, 


Ἢ ΡΞ + ‘ 3 A , ~ fi 9S aaraae ε κι δ Ὁ 
δ0 'χαὶ βαλοῦσιν αὑτοὺς εἰς τὴν κάμινον τοῦ πυρὸς" ἐχεῖ ἔσται ὁ κλαυϑμὸς καὶ ὁ 


βουγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων. 
, 3 a a ? ~ , , 4 ed > atey τς 
51 Ayer αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοὺς "-συνήκατε ταῦτα πάντα ; λέγουσιν αὐτῷ " ναί, κύριε. 
~ ~ ~ 4 
52‘O δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " διὰ τοῦτο πᾶς γραμματεὺς μαϑητευϑεὶς εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν 
- ~ 7 ~ 
τῶν οὐρανῶν ὅμοιός ἐστιν ἀνθρώπῳ οἰκοδεσπότῃ, ὅςτις ἐχβάλλει ἐχ τοῦ Onoar- 
~ - - a , 
“000 αὑτοῦ καινὰ καὶ παλαιά. [ 
σ Pa er Ἢ Ἢ 
5838 Kat ἐγένετο, ὅτε ἐτέλεσεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς τὰς παραβολὰς ταύτας, μετῆρεν ἐχεῖϑεν. 


§ 56. Jesus directs to cross the Lake. Incidents. The Tempest stilled.— Lake of Galilee. 


Marr. VII. 18---27. . Marx IV. 35—41. Luxe VIII. 22-25. 1X. 57-62. 
IS ᾿Ιδὼν δὲ ὁ Ἰησοῦς 35 Καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς ἐν 33 Καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν μιᾷ 
πολλοὺς ὄχλους περὶ ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ὀψίας τῶν ἡμερῶν, καὶ αὐτὸς 
αὑτὸν᾽ “ἐχέλευσεν ἀπ- γενομένης" διέλϑωμεν ἐνέβη εἰς πλοῖον “καὶ οἱ 
ελϑεῖν εἰς τὸ πέραν. εἰς τὸ πέραν. μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ. καὶ 


εἶπε πρὸς αὐτούς" διέλϑωμεν εἰς τὸ 
πέραν τῆς λίμνης "-- 


ΜΑΎΤΗ. VII. | LUKE IX. 
r Ps A 2 , A ~ 
19 Καὶ προςελϑὼν εἷς γραμματεὺς εἶπεν 57 Ἐγένετο δὲ πορευομένων αὐτῶν 
a eo? > , 3 ~ ¢y~ , ᾿ ee. 
αὐτῷ διδάσκαλε, axorovdi6w oot, ἕν τῇ ὁδῷ, εἶπέ τις πρὸς αὐτόν" 


¢ 24 ee, νὴ} pa 3 λ ie σ I Ἄν 
20 ὁπου ἐὰν ἀπέρχῃς Kou λέγει αὐτῷ ἀχκολουϑισῶ σοι, ὁπου ἃν ἀπέρχῃ, 


FROM OUR LORD'S 


SECOND PASSOVER 


[Parr IV. 





21 


‘22 


23 


24 


25 


26 


27 


MATTH. VIII. 


ee 8 ae « > , ‘ 
ὃ Inoovg’ at ἀλώπεκες φωλεοὺς 
” ‘ ‘ ~ ~ 
ἔχουσι καὶ TH πετεινὰ TOV οὐρανοῦ 
, € ‘ «A ~ » , 
zxatacunradec, ὁ δὲ υἱὸς tov avIon- 
3 Ν - A 
που οὐκ ἔχει, ποῦ τὴν κεφαλὴν κλίνῃ. 
σ ‘ ~ ~ ~ 
Erepog δὲ τῶν μαϑητῶν αὐτοῦ e- 
MEY αὐτῷ" κύριε, ἐπίτρεψόν μοι πρῶ- 
" ~ 4 
τον ἀπελϑεῖν καὶ ϑάψαι τὸν πατέρα 


μου. 


? , \ ὁ A A 

ἀκολουϑει μοι, καὶ ἄφες τοὺς γεχροὺς 
Α ~ 

ϑάψαι τοὺς ἑαυτῶν γεχρούς. 


61 λείαν τοῦ ϑεοῦ. 


«ς A ~ ~ 
O δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτῷ" 


58 κύριε. 


LUKE IX. 
Kai εἶπεν αὐτῷ 6 ᾿]ησοῦς. 
< > , ‘ a ‘4 
αἱ ἀλώπεχες φωλεοὺς ἔχουσι καὶ 
- φὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ χατασκη- 

, < A «A ~- 3 , > 
γνώσεις ὃ δὲ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνϑρώπου. οὐχ 

~ A 

59 ἔχει, ποῦ τὴν κεφαλὴν κλίνῃ. Εἶπε δὲ 
A a > , et 4 
πρὸς ἕτερον" axohovde μοι. ὁ δὲ 

e , > , , > , 
εἶπε" κύριε, ἐπίτρεψόν μοι ἀπελϑόντι 
60 πρῶτον ϑάψαι τὸν πατέρα μου. Εἶπε 
δὲ αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς" ἄφες τοὺς νεχ- 

’ , ax. ε ~ , 
ροὺς Pawar τοὺς ἑαντῶν νεκρούς, 
σὺ δὲ ἀπελϑὼν διάγγελλε τὴν βασι- 

A ‘ > ’ ’ 

Εἶπε δὲ καὶ ἕτερος" ἀχολουϑήσω cot, κύριξ᾽ 
~ A > , , > ot ~ > ‘ “ ‘ 
πρῶτον δὲ ἐπίτρεψόν μοι ἀποτάξασϑαι τοῖς εἰς τὸν οἶκόν μου. 


- ‘ A ~ - 

62 Εἶπε δὲ πρὸς αὐτὸν ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς" οὐδεὶς ἐπιβαλὼν τὴν χεῖρα αὑτοῦ 
os τα ΤΣ ‘ , > cee 7 hyp > \ 

ἐπὶ upotoor καὶ βλέπων εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω εὐϑετὸς ἔστιν εἰς τὴ 

᾿ βασιλείαν τοῦ ϑεοῦ. 


MATTH. VIII. 


Καὶ ἐμβάντι αὐτῷ 36 


εἰς τὸ πλοῖον ἠκολούϑη- 

- A 

cay αὐτῷ οἱ μαϑηταὶ 
~ ‘ 

αὐτοῦ. Kai ἰδού, σει- 


σμὸς μέγας ἐγένετο ἐν τῇ 37 


σ ~ 
ϑαλάσσῃ, ὥςτε τὸ πλοῖ- 
, e A 
ον καλύπτεσϑαι υπὸ 
τῶν κυμάτων᾽ αὐτὸς 
yr & 
δὲ ἐκάϑευδε. Kai προς- 
‘ 
ελϑόντες, οἱ μαϑηταὶ 
[αὐτοῦ] ἤγειραν αὐτὸν 
λέγοντες" κύριε, σῶσον 
~ A 
ἡμᾶς, ἀπολλύμεϑα. Καὶ 
λέγει αὐτοῖς" τί δει- 
λοί ἐστε, ὀλιγόπιστοι; 
΄ > ‘ > ’ 
τότε ἐγερϑεις ἐπετιμῆσε 
~ ’ 4 «Ψ 
τοῖς ἀνέμοις καὶ τῇ ϑα- 
λάσσῃ᾽ καὶ ἐγένετο γα- 
λήνη μεγάλη. 


38 


MARK IV. 


Καὶ ἀφέντες τὸν ὄχλον 22 
av- 23 Πλεύντων 


, 
παραλαμβανουσιν 
, € Tt > ~ , 
TOV, WS ἢν ἕν τῷ πλοίῳ" 
A 4 ~ 1 
καὶ ἄλλα δὲ πλοῖα ἦν 
3 » -»"» A , 
met αὑτοῦ. Kae yive- 
ται λαῖλαψ ἀνέμου με- 

, A ‘ , 
γάλη" τὰ δὲ κύματα 
A ~ 
ἐπέβαλλεν εἰς τὸ πλοῖον, 
σ > a | a” , 
wgte αὑτὸ 10n γεμίζε- 
4. μὴ 4 
σϑαι. Καὶ ἣν αὐτὸς ἐπὶ 
~ A 
τῇ πρύμνῃ ἐπὶ TO προς- 
κεφάλαιον καϑεύδων" 
‘ 
καὶ διεγείρουσιν αὐτόν, 
Ἁ , > ~ 
καὶ “λέγουσιν αὐτῷ᾽ δι- 
δάσκαλε, οὐ μέλει σοι, 


σ a 
29 ὅτι ἀπολλύμεϑα; Καὶ 


ΝᾺ , ~ 
διεγερϑεις ἐπετίμησε τῷ 
ἀνέμῳ, εἶπε 

, , 
ϑαλάσσῃ" σιώπα, πε- 


A ~ 
και τῇ 


A 
φίμωσο. καὶ ἐχόπασεν 


ὁ ἄνεμος, καὶ ἐγένετο γαλήνη μεγάλη. 


40 Καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς" 


τί δειλοι ἐστε 


΄σ - » ” ’ ‘ 
41 οὕτω; πῶς οὐκ ἔχετε πίστιν; Kat 


Οἱ δὲ ἄνθρωποι ἐϑαύ- 


μασαν λέγοντες " ποτα- 


ἐφοβήϑησαν φόβον μέ. 
γαν, καὶ ἔλεγον πρὺς ἀλ.- 
λίλους " τίς ὥρα οὗτός 


~ 


LUKE VIII. 
4 ᾽ ΄ 

—xa ἀνήχϑησαν. 
δὲ 
> , 1 ‘ , 

aguarace. καὶ κατέβη 
λαῖλαψ ἀνέμου εἰς τὴν 
λίμνην, καὶ συγεπλη- 
ροῦντο καὶ ἐκινδύνευον. 


αὐτῶν 


Προςελϑέντες δὲ διήγει- 
ραν αὐτὸν λέγοντες" 
ἐπιστάτα, ἐπιστάτα, ἀπ- 
ολλύμεϑα. ὁ δὲ ἐγερ- 
ϑεὶς ἐπετίμησετῷ ἀνέμῳ 
καὶ τῷ κλύίδωνὶ τοῦ Vda- 
τος" καὶ ἐπαύσαντο, καὶ 
ἐγένετο γαλήνη. 


25 Εἶπε δὲ αὐτοῖς " ποῦ ἔσ- 


τιν ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν ; φο- 
βηϑέντες δὲ ἐθ αύμασαν, 
λέγοντες πρὺς ἀλλήλους" 
’ » τ , Ε] ΄σ 
τίς ἄρα οὐτύς ἐστιν, ὅτι 


ΝΣ 


. a, 


* 


ae 


a a re 


—” 





ἐξ 56, 57.] 


UNTIL THE THIRD. 


57 





MATTH VIII. 
, > τ ‘ 
MOG ἔστιν OVTOS, OTL καὶ 
cw S¢ , 
οἱ ἄνεμοι και ἡ ϑάλασσὰ 
ὑπακούουσιν αὐτῷ ; 


MARK IV. 


"νᾶ “ 4 Gs 
δστιν, OTL καὶ ὁ AKVEULOS 


Wot , et , 
καὶ ἡ ϑάλασσα vtaxov- 


᾿ρυσιν αὐτῷ; 


LUKE VIII. 
‘ ~ ? , 9 , 
καὶ τοῖς ἀνέμοις ἐπιτάσ- 
- σ A 
σεικαὶ TH ὕδατι, καὶ 
> ~ 
ὑπακούουσιν αὐτῷ ; 


§ 57. The two Demoniacs of Gadara.—S. E. coast of the Lake of Galilee. 


Matru. VIII. 28—34. IX. 1. 


Kai ἐλϑόντι αὐτῷ 
εἰς τὸ πέραν, εἰς τὴν χώ- 
ραν τῶν ΪΠεργεσηνῶν, 
ὑπήντησαν αὐτῷ δύο 
δαιμονιζόμενοι, ἐκ τῶν 
᾿μνημείων ἐξερχόμενοι, 

‘ , 7 A 
yahetot λίαν, wots py 
> , A μ ~ 
ἰσχύειν τινὰ παρελϑεῖν 
διὰ τῆς ὁδοῦ ἐκείνης. 


“Marx Υ͂. 1—21. 


Kai ἦλθον εἰς τὸ 26 


πέραν τῆς ϑαλάσσης, 


εἰς τὴν χώραν τῶν Γα- 
2 δαρηνῶν. 


‘ 

Καὶ ἐξελ- 
ϑόντι αὐτῷ ἐκ 
’ > , > ᾿ς 
πλοίου εὐϑέως ἀπήντη- 
σεν αὐτῷ ἐκ τῶν μνη- 
4.3 / + > 
μειῶν avOowmog ev 


, > , 1 a 
3 πνεύματι axad aot, ος 


A 
τὴν κατοίχησιν εἶχεν ἐν 


~ [4 4 A « ’ 3 ‘ > , 
τοῖς μνημασι" καὶ οὔτε ἀλύσεσιν οὐδεὶς ἡδύ- 
wy ~ ! A A Bi. ¥% , 

4 varo αὑτὸν δῆσαι," διὰ τὸ αὑτὸν πολλάκις 
Ἁ - 

πέδαις καὶ ἁλύσεσι, δεδέσϑαι καὶ διεσπᾶ- 

Wises > - ‘ id 7, A ‘ , id 
σϑαι vm αὑτοῦ τὰς ἁλύσεις, καὶ tag πέδας συντετρίφϑαι" 


ἂν να ἡ 4} Ἃ ” , 
ὅ καὶ οὐδεὶς αὑτον ἰσχυὲ δαμαάσαι. 


τοῦ 27 


Loxe VIII. 26—40. 
Kai κατέπλευσαν εἰς 
A , ~ 
τὴν χώραν τῶν 1 αδαρη- 
γῶν, ἥτις ἐστὶν ἀντιπί- 
ραν τῆς ΓΓαλιλαίας. 
ἷ - 4 
᾿Εξελϑόντι δὲ αὐτῷ ἐπὶ 
τὴν γῆν ὑπήντησεν αὖ- 
τῷ ἀνήρ τις ἐκ τῆς 
U a , 
πόλεως, ὃς εἶχε δαιμόνια 
~ 4 
ἐκ χρόνων ἱκανῶν, καὶ 
« , > > , 
ἱμάτιον ove evedidvoxeto 
καὶ ἐν οἰχίᾳ οὐκ ἔμενεν, 
> > > ~ , 
ἀλλ ἐν τοῖς μγήμασιν. 


‘ . b 
Καὶ διαπαντός, νυκτὸς 


hel pe os ’ ν 9 ae om - , 
καὶ ἡμέραξ, EY τοῖς μνήμασι καὶ ἕν τοῖς ιόρεσιν ἣν χράζων 


4 ’ « ‘ , 
6 καὶ κατακόπτων savtov λίϑοις. 


29 Καὶ ἰδού, ἔκραξαν λέ- 
~ A 
γοντες" τί ἡμῖν καὶ σοί, 
~ ~ 5 
vis τοῦ ϑεοῦ; ἦἤλϑες 
τ 4 ~ , 
ade πρὸ καιροῦ Pucart- 
σαι ἡμᾶς ; 


ἀπὸ μαχρόϑεν ἔδραμε 


a \ ‘ ~ 
᾿Ιδὼν δὲ tov ᾿]ησοῦν 


A ~ 
καὶ προςεκύνησεν av- 28 ᾿Ιδὼν δὲ τὸν Inoovy καὶ 


7 τῷ, καὶ κράξας φωνῇ 


, 5“ , »» κ Α 
μεγαλῃ εἶπε" τί ἐμοῖ καὶ 
, ? ~ «" - ~ 
oot, Incov, vie tov ϑεοῦ 
~ ¢ , « » 
τοῦ ὑψίστου ; ὁρκίζω σε 
A ’ὔ , , 
tov ϑεὸν, un μὲ βασανί- 


3 , , 
ἀναχράξας προςέπεσεν 
» - A ~ 
αὑτῷ καὶ φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 
5 yo oN ᾿ , > 
sime* τι ἐμοι καὶ ool, Ln- 
~ 4 ~ ~ ~ 
σοῦ, vig tov ϑεοῦ τοῦ 
«ς Pa: x , 
υψίστου ; δέομαι σου, μὴ 


d a wt 4 > soe pe ol 4" ~ 4 , ’ a 
8 oys. Elsye yoo αὐτῷ" ἔξελϑε τὸ πνεῦ- 29 μὲ βασανίσῃς. Παρήγγειλε 
\ > , > ~ > , 4 ~ ~ 
᾿ς μα to axadugtoy ἐκ tov. avdowmov. γαρτῷ πνεύματι τῷ ἀκα- 
ϑάρτῳ ἐξελϑεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ 
ἿΣ Ἄν, , af aa 4 , , δ Δ 
ἣν ἀνϑρωπου" πολλοῖς͵ γὰρ χρόνοις “συνηρπάχει αὐτόν, 
β ‘ ~ 3 
καὶ ἐδεσμεῖτο ἁλύσεσι καὶ πέδαις φυλασσόμενος, 
‘ se? A ‘ > , 2. Ss ~ 
καὶ διαῤῥήσσων ta δεσμὰ ἠλαύνετο ὑπὸ τοῦ 
80 δαίμονος εἰς τὰς ἐρήμους. ᾿Επηρώ- 
’ ‘ 8 «.3 “«Ψ , ’ ᾿ 
'τησὲ δὲ αὑτὸν ὃ ]ησοῦς λέγων" τί σοί 
2 " € pt , ¢ 
ἔστιν ὀνομα; ὁ δὲ εἶπε" λεγεών" ὅτι 
31 δαιμόνια πολλὰ εἰςῆλϑεν εἰς αὐτόν. 
Α , > , σ 4 ’ 
Καὶ παρεχάλει avror, wo μὴ ἐπιταξῇῃ 


3 MARK V. 

9 Καὶ ἐπηρώτα αὐτόν τί cot ὄνομα ; 
λεγεὼν ὄνομά 
Καὶ παρ- 


A , > ~ 
καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ᾽ 

σ 
10 μοι, ott πολλοί ἐσμεν. 
, Ye , σ A > 
exahel αὑτὸν mohha, Wa py av- 


τοὺς ἀποστείλῃ ἔξω τῆς χώρας. αὐτοῖς εἰς τὴν ἄβυσσον ιἀπελϑεῖν. 


8 


58 


FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER 


[Part IV. 








MATTH. VIII. 


MARK V. 


LUKE VIII. 


30 Ἦν δὲ μακρὰν ἀπὶ αὐ- τι Ἦν δὲ ἐχεῖ πρὸς τῷ 32 Ἦν δὲ ἐκεῖ ἀγέλη χοί- 


31 


32 


34 


18 τῶν. Καὶ ἐμβάντος αὐτοῦ εἰς τὸ πλοῖον 
, >’ 4 c , σ 
παρεχάλει αὐτὸν ὃ δαιμονισϑείς, Wwe. 
+ > > ~ 7 oR ν > “« 3 , 
19 ἡ wer avtov. Καὶ οὐκ ayer αὑτὸν, 
> ‘ , ew ν 3 ‘ 
ἀλλὰ λέγει αὐτῷ " ὕπαγε εἰς τὸν οἵ- 
‘ 
κόν σου πρὸς τοὺς σούς, καὶ ἀνάγγει- 


τῶν ἀγέλη χοίρων πολ- 


ὄῤει ἀγέλη χοίρων με-. 


λῶν βοσκομένη. Οἱ δὲ 12 γάλη βοσκομένη. Kut 


δαίμονες παρεκάλουν 

ιν , - Ὁ 
avtov λέγοντες " εἰ ἐχ- 
βάλλεις ἡμᾶς, ἐπίτρεψον 
c¢ > ~ > A 
ἡμῖν ἀπελϑεῖν εἰς τὴν 
3 , an , A 
ἀγέλην τῶν χοίρων, Καὶ 
εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὑπάγετε. 
οἱ δὲ ἐξελϑόντες ἀπῆλ- 
Dov εἰς τὴν ἀγέλην τῶν 

’ δι 5 ΄ “ 
χοίρων. χαὶ ἰδοῦ, ὠρμη- 
σε πᾶσα ἡ ἀγέλη [τῶν 

A ~ 

χοίρων] κατὰ TOV χρημ- 

~ > ‘ , 
you εἰς τὴν ϑαλασσαν, 

δι oy Ἢ > ~ 
καὶ amedavoy ν τοῖς 
σ 
υδασιν. 

‘4 
Oi δὲ βόσκοντες 

ἔφυγον, καὶ ἀπελϑόν- 
τὲς εἰς τὴν πόλιν ἀπ- 


, , A 
ἤγγειλαν. πάντα και 
τὰ τῶν δαιμονιζομέ- 
A 3 , ~ 
γῶν. Καὶ Wov, πᾶσα 
ἡ πόλις ἐξῆλϑεν εἰς 


συνάντησιν τῷ ᾿Ϊησοῦ" 


μένον καϑήμενον 


σμένον 


16 φοβήϑησαν. 


18 


14 


15 


καὶ σωφρονοῦντα, τὸν 
᾿ - 4 
ἐσχηκότα ‘tov λεγεῶνα " καὶ ἐ- 
A 
Καὶ διηγήσαντο 36 σαν. 


, 3.4 
παρεκάλεσαν αὑτὸν 
, Ἑ , 
[martes] οἱ δαίμονες 
λέγοντες" πέμψον ἡμᾶς 
εἰς τοὺς χοίρους, ἵνα εἰς 
αὐτοὺς εἰφέλϑωμεν. Καὶ 
* 9 ’ὔ > ~ > , 
ἐπέτρεψεν αὑτοῖς EVO E- 
~ ‘ 
ὡς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς. και ἐξελ- 
ϑόντα τὰ πνεύματα τὰ 
ἀκάϑαρτα εἰςῆλϑον εἰς 
σ 
τοὺς χοίρους, καὶ ὥρμη- 
σεν ἡ ἀγέλη κατὰ τοῦ 
~ > Ἁ ’ 
κρημνοῦ εἰς τὴν ϑαλασ- 
7 A ε ; 
σαν (ἤσαν δὲ ὡς δις- 
, qi ’ 3 
χίλιοι), καὶ ἐπνίγοντο ἕν 
τῇ ϑαλάσσῃ. Οἱ δὲ βό- 
σχοντὲς αὐτοὺς ἔφυγον 
καὶ ἀπήγγειλαν εἰς τὴν 
πόλιν καὶ εἰς τοὺς ἀ- 


ρῶν ἱκανῶν βοσκομένων 
ἐν τῷ ὄρει" καὶ παρεχά- 
λουν αὐτόν, iva ἐπιτρέ- 
Wy αὐτοῖς εἰς ἐχείνους 
εἰςελϑεῖν. καὶ ἐπέτρεψεν 
αὐτοῖς. 


"Exel Oorta 
δὲ τὰ δαιμόνια ἀπὸ τοῦ 
ἀνϑρώπου εἰςῆλϑον εἰς 
τοὺς χοίρους, καὶ ὥρμη- 


4 ς > , A ~ 
σὲν ἢ ἀγέλῃ κατὰ τοῦ 


34 


κρημνοῦ εἰς τὴν λίμνην 
καὶ ἀπεπνίγη. 


\ [ddvreg 
δὲ οἱ βύσχοντες τὸ γε- 


‘ 
yovog ἔφυγον καὶ ἀπήγ- 


γειλαν εἰς τὴν πόλιν καὶ 


γρούς" καὶ ἐξῆλϑον ἰδεῖν, 86 εἰς τοὺς ἀγρούς. ᾿Εξῆλ- 


τί ἐστι τὸ γεγονός. Καὶ 
ἔρχονται πρὸς τὸν ᾿Ι]η- 
σοῦν, καὶ ϑεωροῦσι τὸν 
δαιμονιζό- 
καὶ ἱματι- 


5 - « 5. 7 “ς ΒΨ 
αὐτοῖς οἱ ἰδόντες, πῶς ἐγένετο 


, 7 ~ 
ἐχάλεσαν, omg μεταβῇ 
ἀπὺ τῶν ὁρίων αὐτῶν. 


- , 4 ~ ὁ 
τῷ δαιμονιζομένῳ, καὶ 37 ὁ 
If 7 ᾿. | 4 ~ , 
ya ἰδόντες αὐτὸν mag- 17 περὶ τῶν χοίρων. 


» A 
Και 
4 t ~ > 
ἤρξαντο παρακαλεῖν av- 

Α 5» » > 8 ~ 
τὸν ἀπελϑεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν 
ὁρίων av- 


Dov δὲ ἰδεῖν τὸ γεγονός, 
4 ν᾿ A A 
xa ἤλθον πρὸς τὸν 

~ t 
᾿Ιησοῦν καὶ εὗρον καϑή- 
μενον τὸν ἄνϑρωπον, 


ap οὗ τὰ δαιμόνια ἐξεληλύϑει, 
ἱματισμένον καὶ σωφρονοῦντα παρὰ 
τοὺς πόδας τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ" καὶ ἐφοβήϑη- 
᾿πήγγειλαν δὲ αὐτοῖς καὶ 


οἱ ἰδόντες, πῶς ἐσώϑη 
δαιμονισϑείς. Καὶ 
ἠρώτησαν αὐτὸν ἅπαν 
τὸ πλῆϑος τῆς περιχώ- 
ρου τῶν Τ᾽ αδαρηγῶν 
ἀπελϑεῖν ἀπὶ αὐτῶν, 


7 , τ , δι 
ott φόβῳ μεγάλῳ συνείχοντο" αὐτὸς 
A ~ 

δὲ ἐμβὰς εἰς τὸ πλοῖον ὑπέστρεψεν. 
38’ Εδέετο, δὲ αὐτοῦ ὁ ἀνὴρ ag οὗ 
ἐξεληλύϑει τὰ δαιμόνια, εἶναι σὺν 

> ~ > Α > ie « > Ψ 
αὐτῷ. ἀπέλυσε δὲ αὐτὸν ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς 





tll at te ee ens ἡ 





eS 


57, 58.] 


UNTIL THE THIRD. 


59 





20 καὶ ἠλέησέ σε. 


1 


10 


11 


12 


13 


MARK V. 


LUKE VIII. 


~ ee ᾿ 
λον αὐτοῖς, ὅσα σοι ὃ κύριος πεποίηκε 39 λέγων" ὑπόστρεφε εἰς τὸν οἶχόν σου 


πάντες ἐθαύμαζον. 
MATTH. IX. 


Καὶ ἐμβὰς εἰς τὸ 21 


πλοῖον διεπέρασε, καὶ 
ἦλϑεν εἰς τὴν ἰδίαν 
πόλιν. 


ὅτι » , tT ‘ \ , 
αὕτον" καὶ ἢν παρὰ τὴν ϑαλασσαν. 


Marru. IX. 10—17. 
Kai ἐγένετο αὐτοῦ 
ἀτακειμένου ἐν τῇ οἷ- 
Α 
κίᾳ, καὶ ἰδού, πολλοὶ 
- \ ¢ A 
τελῶναι καὶ ἁμαρτωλοι 
5 , , 
ἐλϑόντες συνανέχειντο 
~ ~ 4 ~ 
τῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ καὶ τοῖς μα- 
᾿ϑηταῖς αὐτοῦ. 


4 

Και 

ἰδόντες 

εἶπον τοῖς 

3 ~ 4 , A ~ 

αὑτοῦ" διὰ τί μετὰ τῶν 
- N 

τελωνῶν καὶ ἁμαρτω- 


μαϑηταῖς 


οἱ Φαρισαῖοι 


Α - 
Καὶ ἀπῆλϑε καὶ 
” , ᾽ ~ .? 
ἤρξατο κηρύσσειν ἐν τῇ Aexunoder, 
a ~ ~ 
ὅσα ἐποίησεν αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς" καὶ 


᾿]Ιησοῦς. 
MARK V. 


4 ~ σ > , ’ «ε , 
καὶ διηγοῦ, ὅσα ἐποίησέ σοι ὁ ϑεός. 
~ a 
Καὶ ἀπῆλϑε καϑ' ὅλην τὴν πόλιν 
Ψ _-~ 
κηρύσσων, ὅσα ἐποίησεν αὐτῷ ὁ 


LUKE VIII. 


Καὶ διαπεράσαντος 40 "Eyévero’ δὲ ἐν τῷ 


~ 3 ~ " ~ , 
tov ]ησοῦ ev τῷ πλοίῳ 
πάλιν εἰς τὸ πέραν, συν- 
ἤχϑη ὄχλος πολὺς ἐπὶ 


Marx If. 15—22, 


- % ~ 
15 Καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ 


16 


λῶν ἐσϑίει 6 διδάσκα-᾽ 


λος ὑμῶν; 


Ὃ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἀκούσας 
εἶπεν αὐτοῖς. οὐ χρείαν 


ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύοντες 
> ~ > > « ~ 

ἰατροῦ, GAL οἱ κακῶς 
ἔχοντες. Πορευϑέντες 


δὲ μάϑετε, τί ἐστιν" 
ἔλεον ϑέλω καὶ οὐ Ov- 
σίαν οὐ γὰρ ἦλϑον 
καλέσαι δικαίους, ἀλλ 


~ { : pel. > 
κατακεῖσθαι αὑτὸν EY 
~ ~ A 
τῇ οἰκίᾳ αὐτοῦ, καὶ πολ- 
~ s 
λοὶ τελῶναι καὶ ἁμαρ- 
Α - 
τωλοὶ συνανέχειντο τῷ 
3 ~ 4A ~ 
Ἰησοῦ καὶ τοῖς μαϑη- 
~ ~ Tv \ 
ταῖς αὐτοῦ" ἤσαν γὰρ 
4 
πολλοί, καὶ ἠκολούϑη- 
» - 4 « 
σαν αὑτῷ. Kot οἱ γραμ- 
- ‘ ~ 
ματεῖς καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι 
ϑῳ, ἢ ὦ eb | 3 , 
ἰδόντες αὐτὸν ἐσϑίοντα 
, ~ ~ 4 
μετὰ τῶν τελωνῶν καὶ 
ἁμαρτωλῶν ἔλεγον τοῖς 
~ ~ σ 
μαϑηταῖς αὐτοῦ " τί τι 
~ ‘ ~ A 
μετὰ τῶν τελωνῶν καὶ 
« ~ > , A 
ἁμαρτωλῶν ἐσϑίει καὶ 
’ r YM 9 , ε 
πίψει; Kat axovoag o 
3 “ , > δ > 
Inoovg λέγει αὑτοῖς " ov 
χρείαν ἔχουσιν οἱ ἰσχύ- 
5 ~ > > ε 
οντὲς ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ. οἱ 
~ ‘sf 
καχῶς ἔχοντες. οὐκ ἦλ- 


§ 58. Levi’s Feast.— Capernaum. 


ὑποστρέψαι τὸν In- 
- 3 Ὁ 4 i464 
σοῦν, ἀπεδέξατο αὑτὸν 
ev t “A a 
ὁ ὕχλος" ἤσαν γὰρ πα- 
τες προςδοχῶντες αὐτόν. 


Luxe V. 29—39. 


29 Καὶ ἐποίησε δοχὴν 


30 


31 


Sov καλέσαι δικαίους, 32 


ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλοὺς [eis 
μετάνοιαν]. 


c ‘ > , 
ἁμαρτωλοὺς [εἰς μετανοιαν]. 


, a. > as? 

μεγάλην Aevic αὑτῷ ἕν 
~ ~ 4 
τῇ οἰχίᾳ αὑτοῦ" καὶ 
+ μὴ - 
ἣν ὄχλος τελωνῶν πο- 
A \ 4 Ύ 
hug καὶ ἄλλων, οἱ ἦσαν 
μετ αὐτῶν κατακείμε- 
ψοι.. 


4 
Kai ἐγόγγυζον of γραμ- 
~ ~ 4 
ματεῖς αὐτῶν καὶ οἱ 
~ 4 A 
(αρισαῖοι πρὸς τοὺς 
᾿ > ~ , 
μαϑητὰς αὑτοῦ Leyor- 
4 , \ 
τες" διὰ τί μετὰ τελω- 
~ 4 ~ 
YOY καὶ ἁμαρτωλῶν ἐσ- 
? ‘ , 
Olete καὶ MLVETE 5 


ΒΡῈ 
Καὶ ἀπο- 
Α - 
χριϑεὶς ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς, εἶπε 
A > , > , 
πρὸς aurovg: Ov yoe- 
av ἔχουσιν οἱ ὑγιαίνον- 
» - 3 ᾽ « 
τὲς ἰατροῦ, ἀλλ οἱ κα- 
~ my” 3 35 ἢ 
κῶς ἔχοντες " οὐκ ἑλη- 
λυϑα καλέσαι δικαίους, 
3 ᾿ « A ? 
ἀλλὰ ἁμαρτωλοὺς. εἰς 
μετάνοιαν. 





* 13. Hos. 6, 6. Comp. 1 Sam. 15, 22. 


60 





FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [Part IV. ~ 
MARK IL. 
18 Καὶ ἦσαν οἱ μαϑηταὶ ᾿Ιωάννου καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι νηστεύον- 
MATTH. IX. τες. καὶ ἔρχονται καὶ LUKE V. ' 
11 Τότε προςφέρχονται λέγουσιν αὐτῷ διὰ τί οἱ 33 Οἱ δὲ εἶπον πρὸς αὐὖ- 


15 


16 


~ A 
αὐτῷ οἱ μαϑηταὶ Ἴω- 
, , ‘ , 
avvov λέγοντες" διὰ τί 
€ ~ ‘ € ~ 
ἡμεῖς καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι 

, , ε ‘ 
φηστεύομεν πολλά, οἱ δὲ 
μαϑηταί σου οὐ νηστεύ- 

Ἁ > ~ 
ovot; Καὶ εἶπεν αὑτοῖς 
Ὁ 3 ~ 4 , 
ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς" μὴ δυνανται 

‘ - ~ 
οἱ υἱοὶ TOV νυμφῶνος 

- > > σ » 
πενϑεῖν, EQ OCOY μετ 
αὐτῶν ἐστιν ὁ νυμφίος ; 


9 , «- « , 
shevoortat δὲ ἡμέραι, 


σ ᾽ - πὶ 9 > 
ὁταν ἀπαρϑῇ an αὖ- 
τῶν ὁ νυμφίος, καὶ TOTE 
ψηστεύσουσιν. 
ane A 

Οὐδεὶς δὲ ἐπι- 
βάλλει ἐπίβλημα δάκους 
ἀγγάφου ἐπὶ ἱματίῳ πα- 

- » 4 ‘ , 

λαιῷ  αἰρει γὰρ τὸ πλη- 


᾿ ~ A ~ 
ρωμα αὐτοῦ amo τοῦ 


11 


ἱματίου, καὶ χεῖρον σχί- 
one γίνεται. Οὐδὲ βάλ- 
λουσιν οἶνον νέον εἰς 
ἀσκοὺς παλαιούς" εἰ δὲ 
μήγε, ῥήγνυνται οἱ ἀσκοΐ, 
καὶ ὁ οἶνος ἐκχεῖται, καὶ 
οἱ ἀσκοὶ ἀπολοῦνται" 
ἀλλὰ βάλλουσιν οἶνον 
γέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς καινούς, 
καὶ ἀμφύτεροι συντη- 
ροῦνται. 


μαϑηταὶ ᾿Ιωάννου καὶ 
οἱ τῶν (Φαρισαίων νη- 
στεύουσιν, οἱ δὲ σοὶ μα- 
ϑηταὶ οὐ γνηστεύουσι; 
Καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾽]η- 
σοῦς" μὴ δύνανται οἱ 


Υ̓͂ 4 ~ ~ 
υἱοὶ τοῦ νυμφῶνος, ἐν 


20 


2 


as 


22 


τ ~ 
ᾧ ὁ νυμφίος μετ αὐτῶν 
σ 

ἐστι, νηστεύειν ; ὅσον 

, > c ΄Ψ ΝΥ 
χρόνον ped ξαυτῶν ἔ- 
χουσι τὸν «νυμφίον, οὐ 
δύνανται νηστεύειν" ἐ- 
δὲ ἡμέραι, 
σ > ~ > 3 > ~ 
οταν ἁπαρϑῃ an αὐτῶν 

᾿ Α 
ὁ γυμφίος, καὶ τότε νη- 
στεύσουσιν ἐν ἐχείνῃ τῇ 
‘ 

ἡμέρᾳ. Οὐδεὶς ἐπίβλημα 
ῥάκους ἀγνάφου ἐπιῤῥά- 


λεύσονται 


4 ~ ~ 
πτει ἐπὶ ἱματιῷ παλαιῷ" 
J ‘ , ” ‘ , 
εἰ δὲ μή, αἰρει τὸ πλῆή- 
ρωμα αὐτοῦ τὸ καινὸν 
- - Α ~ 
τοῦ παλαιοῦ, καὶ χεῖρον 

᾿ , 4A 
σχίσμα γίνεται. Kou 
οὐδεὶς βάλλει οἶνον νέον 
εἰς ἀσκοὺς παλαιούς" 
b ‘ , «ἢ e 
εἰ δὲ μή, ῥήσσει ὁ οἶνος 
Α 
ὁ νέος τοὺς ἀσκούς, καὶ 
- ‘ 
ὁ οἶνος ἐχχεῖται καὶ οἱ 
> ‘ > ~ ὃ > 
ἀσχοὶ ἀπολοῦνται" a- 
λὰ οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς 
‘ , 
καινοὺς βλητέον. 


34 


τόν: διὰ ti οἱ μαϑη- 
ὌΝ 
ταὶ Ιωάνγνου νηστεύουσι 
4 A 
πυχνὰ καὶ δεήσεις mot- 
οὔνται, ὁμοίως καὶ οἱ 
τῶν Φαρισαίων" οἱ δὲ 
X35 , A ’ 
σοι ἐσϑιουσι καὶ mivov- 
A 
σιν; Ὁ δὲ εἶπε πρὸς 
᾿] ’ A , 
αὐτοὺς" μὴ δύνασϑε 
‘ ~ ~ 
τοὺς υἱοὺς τοῦ νυμφῶ- 
3 τ 
γος, ἐν ᾧ δινυμφίος μετ᾽ 
αὐτῶν ἐστι, ποιῆσαι νη- 


στεύειν ; ᾿Ελεύσονται δὲ 


ἡμέραι, καὶ ὅταν ἀπαρ- 
Oy ax αὐτῶν ὁ νυμ- 
φίος, τότε νηστεύσουσιν 
ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις. 


86 Ἔλεγε δὲ καὶ παραβολὴν 


‘ > , ΄ > 4 
πρὸς αὑτοὺς" Ott οὐδεὶς 
fal c , “~~ 
ἐπίβλημα ἱματίου καινοῦ 
ἐπιβάλλει ἐπὶ ἱμάτιον 
, > oi , ‘ 
παλαιὸν" εἰ δὲ μήγε, καὶ 
τὸ καινὸν σχίζει, καὶ τῷ 
παλαιῷ οὐ συμφωνεῖ 
δ᾽ δὴν ‘ ΠΟ ~ 
ἐπίβλημα τὸ and τοῦ 
καινοῦ. Καὶ οὐδεὶς βαλ- 
λει οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσχοὺς 

, > 4 , 

παλαιοὺς" εἰ δὲ μήγε, 

7 ΄ , A 
ῥήξει ὁ νέος οἶνος τοὺς 
ἀσκούς, καὶ αὐτὸς ἐχχυ- 


- ϑήσεται καὶ οἱ ἀσκοὶ 


38 


ἀπολοῦνται" ἀλλὰ οἶνον 
ψέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς καινοὺς 


39 βλητέον, καὶ ἀμφότεροι συντηροῦνται. Καὶ οὐδεὶς πιὼν παλαιὸν 
, / , , , € ‘ , , > 
εὐθέως ϑέλει νέον" λέγει γάρ᾽ 0 παλαιὸς χρηστοτερὸς ἔστιν. 


§ 59. The raising of Jairus’ daughter. The woman with a bloody flux.—Capernaum. 


18 


Marra. IX. 18—26. 


Ταῦτα αὐτοῦ λαλοῦν- 
~ > , »“ 
τος αὐτοῖς, ἰδού, ἄρχων 


Mark V. 22—43. 


Loxe VIII. 41—56, 


22 Καὶ ἰδού, ἔρχεται 41 Kai ἰδού, ἦλϑεν ἀνήρ, 


εἷς τῶν ἀρχισυναγώγων, 


ΕΞ Ἃἦ a7? ‘ 
@ ovoua ᾿ΪΙάειρος, καὶ 


ἶ 


ee ee 


4 


M 


J 


§ 59.] 


UNTIL THE THIRD. 


61 





19 


20 


21 


22 


MATTH. 
τ 3 A , 
εἰς ἔἐλϑων moogexvret 
᾽ ~ [4 σ « 
αὑτῷ, λέγων" ott ἡ ϑυ- 
γάτηρ μου ἄρτι ἐτελεύ- 
τησεν" ἀλλὰ ἐλϑὼν ἐπί- 
4 ~ » aed 
Deg τὴν χεῖρα cov ἐπ 
> , A , 
αὐτήν, καὶ ζήσεται. 


ΙΧ. 


Καὶ 

~ 
ἐγερϑεὶς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἦκο- 
λούϑησεν αὐτῷ, καὶ οἱ 


μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ. Καὶ 
ἰδού, γυνὴ αἱμοῤῥο- 
οὐὔσα δώδεχα ἔτη, 


23 


24 


25 


26 


MARK V. 
᾿Ἰάειρος" 
Is 1 ὅν, ἃ , ‘ 
ἰδὼν αὑτὸν πίπτει πρὸς 
A , 3 ~ ! A 
τοὺς modac αὑτοῦ, ' καὶ 


»» ; 4 
OVOUATL Xt 


παρεχάλει αὐτὸν πολλά, 
λέγων" ὅτι τὸ ϑυγάτριόν 
μουν ἐσχάτως ἔχει" ἵνα 
ἐλϑὼν ἐπιϑῇς αὐτῇ τὰς 
aan ΄΄ “δ “Ἢ 4 
χεῖρας, omg σωϑῃ" καὶ 
4 ~ 
ζήσεται. Καὶ ἀπῆλϑε 
> > ~ SF S , 
μὲτ αὑτοῦ, καὶ 7x0L00- 
ὑπὸ , 
Get αὐτῷ ὄχλος πολύς, 
3 id 
καὶ συνέϑλιβον αὐτόν. 
A ᾿ be > 
Καὶ γυνή tig οὐσὰ ey 
c? σ ww , 
ὄυσει aimatog ἔτη δω- 
δεχα, ' καὶ πολλὰ πα- 


- - - Α 
ϑοῦσα ὑπὸ πολλῶν ἰατρῶν, καὶ δαπανή- 
4 ~ ‘ ‘ 
σασα τὰ mag αὐτῆς πάντα, καὶ μηδὲν 
~ ~ A ~ 
ὠφεληϑεῖσα, ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον εἰς τὸ χεῖρον 


προφελϑοῦσα ὄπισϑεν, 
σ ~ , 

ἥψατο τοῦ. χρασπέδου 
αὐτοῦ. 


τοῦ ἱματίου 


Ἔλεγε γὰρ ἐν ἑαυτῇ" 


A oe ~ 
ἐὰν μόνον ἅψωμαι TOV 
ἱματίου αὐτοῦ, σωϑήσο- 

ἅν ’ὔ « Ἁ 

μαι.---.Κ αι soo dn ἢ γυνὴ 
~ ΄σ 

ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας ἐχείνης.--- 


27 


28 


29 


ἐλϑοῦσα, ' ἀκούσασα 
περὶ tov ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐλιϑοῦ- 
σα ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ ὄὕπισϑεν, 
ἥψατο τοῦ ἱματίου αὐ- 
Ἔλεγε γάρ" ὅτι 
κἂν τῶν ἱματίων αὐτοῦ 
'ἅψωμαι, 
Καὶ εὐθέως ἐξηράνϑη ἡ 
πηγὴ τοῦ αἵματος αὐτῆς, 
καὶ ἔγνω τῷ σώματι, ὅτι 


τοῦ. 


σωϑήσομαι. 


30 ἴαται ἀπὸ τῆς μάστιγος. Καὶ εὐϑέως ὃ ἸΙησοῦς ἐ ie vs 
ἐν ἑαντῷ τὴν ἐξ αὑτοῦ ῦ δύναμιν ἐξελϑοῦσαν, ἐπιστρα- 45 Καὶ εἶπεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς: τίς ὃ 
ἁψάμενός MOU ; ἀρνουμένων 


31 


32 
33 


22 


φεὶς ἐν τῷ ὄχλῳ ἔλεγε" τίς μου ἥψατο 


~ ε , ane. 7 ae 
τῶν ἱματίων; Καὶ ἔλεγον αὐτῷ οἱ 
Α » - , ‘ + 
μαϑηται αὑτοῦ" βλέπεις τὸν ὑχλον 
συνϑλίβοντά σε, καὶ λέγεις " τίς μου 
- 4 
ἥψατο; Καὶ περιεβλέπετο ἰδεῖν τὴν 
- ’ « ‘ 4 
τοῦτο. ποιήσασαν. Ἢ de.yuvn φοβη- 
- - α 
ϑεῖσα καὶ τρέμουσα, εἰδυῖα ὃ γέγονεν 


> > Shae, oF \ , > ~ 
ἐπὶ αὑτῇ, ἤλϑε καὶ προςέπεσεν αὑτῷ 


MATTH. IX. 


A ὌΝ 4 ἀν ἢ - 
gers καὶ ἰδὼν αὑτὴν εἰ- 
πε ϑάρσει, ϑύγατερ" ἡ 
πίστις σου σέσωκέ σε.--- 


Ὃ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐπιστρα- 34 τὴν ἀλήϑειαν. 


A “- - 
καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ πᾶσαν 
A 
ὋὉ δὲ é- 

> ~ , « 
πὲν αὐτῃ" ϑυγατερ,η πι- 
στις σου σέσωκέ σε" 
> Ἂν ΑΙ» 
aye εἰς εἰρήνην, καὶ ioe 
e 4 ‘ ‘ 
ὑγιὴς ἀπὸ τὴς μάστιγός 


σ 
υπ- 


42 


43 


Tov 


LUKE VIII. 
‘ 4 “ 3 
αὐτὸς ἄρχων τῆς συνα- 
~ ~ 4 
γωγῆς ὑπῆρχε καὶ πε- 
σὼν παρὰ τοὺς πόδας 
τοῦ ᾿]ησοῦ παρεκάλει 
4. ,8 > ~ > 4 
αὗτον eigeddeiv εἰς τὸν 
is € ~ ! id , 
οἶκον αὐτου," οτι ϑυγα- 

“Ψ ~ 
TNO μονογενὴς ἦν αὐτῷ 
« > --« , 4 
ὡς ἐτῶν Swdexa, καὶ 
σ » , > 
αὐτῇ ἀπέϑνησκεν. ἕν 
δὲ τῷ ὑπάγειν αὐτὸν οἱ 
» ‘ 
ὄχλοι συνέπνιγον αὐτόν. 


4 3 

Καὶ γυνὴ οὖσα ἐν ῥύσει 
΄ Φι ςΝ > «Ψ, ’ἢ 
αἵματος ἀπὸ star δω- 

σ ~ 
δεκα, ἥτις ἰατροῖς προς- » 

, σ 
αναλώσασα ὅλον τὸν 
, > ” a ἘΠ 
βίον οὐκ ἰσχυσὲν ὑπ 
οὐδενὸς ϑεραπευϑῆναι, 


! προςελϑοῦσα ὄπισϑεν 
ἥψατο τοῦ χρασπέδου 


ἱματίου αὐτοῦ" 


καὶ παραχρῆμα ἔστη ἡ 
ῥύσις τοῦ αἵματος αὐτῆς. 


% , - ε , ae 3 
δὲ παντῶν εἶπεν ὁ Π]έτρος καὶ οἱ pet 
αὐτοῦ" ἐπιστάτα, οἱ ὄχλοι συνέχουσί 
Ξ Α ν᾽ 4 A , , 

68 καὶ ἀποϑλίβουσι, καὶ λέγεις - τίς 
alle’: , ' Stel 

46 ὁ ἀψαμεον μου; 

πεν" ἡψατὸ μοῦ τις" 

47 δύναμιν ἐξελϑοῦσαν an ἐμοῦ. ᾿]δοῦ- 


‘O δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶ- 
ἐγὼ γὰρ ἔγνων 


σα δὲ ἡ γυνή, ὅτι οὐκ 
ἔλαϑε, τρέμουσα ἦλϑε 
καὶ προςπεσοῦσα αὐτῷ, 
δι᾿ ἣν αἰτίαν ἥψατο αὐ- 
τοῦ, ἀπήγγειλεν αὐτῷ 
τοῦ 
ἰάϑη 


A 
ἐνώπιον παντὸς 


~ 4A 
λαοῦ, καὶ ὡς 


62 





FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [Parr IV. 
MARK V. LUKE VIII. 
35 σου. Ἔτι αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος ἔρχονται 


36 


23 


24 


26 


42 


ἀπὸ τοῦ ἀρχισυναγώγου λέγοντες " 
σ ε , > Υ ᾽ν 
ὅτι ἡ ϑυγάτηρ cov ἀπέϑανε" τί ἔτι 
σκύλλεις τὸν διδάσκαλον; Ὃ δὲ 


> ~ > , > , Α ed 
Ἰησοῦς εὐϑέως axovoag tov λόγον. 


λαλούμενον, Ζέγει τῷ ἀρχισυναγώ- 


48 παραχρῆμα. 


Ὃ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῇ" 
ϑάρσει, ϑύγατερ᾽ ἡ πίστις σου σέ- 


49 σωχέ σε" πορεύου εἰς εἰρήνην. "Ἔτι 


> ~ ~ ΕΣ ’ 4 
αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος ἔρχεταί τις παρὰ 
τοῦ ἀρχισυναγώγου λέγων αὐτῷ" ὅτι 

’ « , 
τέϑνηκεν ἢ Ovyarno 


MATTH. IX. 
‘ ᾿ - 
Καὶ ἐλϑὼν ὁ ᾿Ἰησοῦς 


> 4 ϑ' a ~ y+ 
gig THY οἰχίαν TOV ἂρ- 37 


yortos, 


S 39 1 A 
καὶ ἰδὼν τοὺς 
᾽ A A ‘ a 
αὐλητὰς καὶ τὸν ὄχλον 
ϑορυβούμενον, " λέγει 
αὐτοῖς" ἀναχωρεῖτε" οὐ 
‘ > , Ἁ , 
yao ἀπέϑανε τὸ κορᾶ- 
σιον, ἀλλὰ κχαϑεύδει. 
Α 3 ~ 
καὶ κατεγέλων αὐτοῦ. 
Ὅτε δὲ ἐξεβλήϑη 6 ὅχ- 
hog, εἰςελϑὼν ἐκράτησε 
τῆς χειρὸς αὐτῆς καὶ 
eee | ‘ Uj 
ἡγέρϑὴ τὸ κορᾶσιον. 
Καὶ ἐξῆλϑεν ἡ φήμη 
αὕτη εἰς ὅλην τῆν γῆν 
ἐκείνην. 


γῳ: μὴ φοβοῦ, μόνον 


38 πίστευε.--- Καὶ ἔρχεται 50 


38 


99 


40 


41 


εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ ἀρχι- 
συναγώγου, --- καὶ οὐκ 
ἀφῆκεν οὐδένα αὐτῷ 
συνακολουϑῆσαι, εἰ μὴ 
Πέτρον καὶ ᾿Ιάκωβον 
καὶ ᾿Ιωάννην τὸν ἀδεῖ- 
por Ιακώβου,---καὶ ϑεω- 
ρεῖ ϑόρυβον, κλαίοντας 
καὶ ἀλαλάζοντας πολ- 
λά. Καὶ εἰςελϑὼν λέγει 
αὐτοῖς" τί ϑορυβεῖσϑε 
καὶ κλαίετε ; τὸ παιδίον 
οὐκ ἀπέϑανεν, ἀλλὰ κα- 
ϑεύδει. Καὶ κατεγέλων 
αὐτοῦ. ὁ δὲ ἐχβαλὼν 
ἅπαντας παραλαμβάνει 
τὸν πατέρα τοῦ παιδίου 
καὶ τὴν μητέρα καὶ τοὺς 
μετ αὐτοῦ, καὶ εἶςπο- 
ρεύεται ὅπου ἦν τὸ παι- 
δίον [ἀνακείμενον]. Καὶ 
κρατήσας τῆς χειρὸς τοῦ 


5 


--- 


σι 
[Ὁ] 


5 


Ww 


54 


A ’ A 
σου" μὴ oxvdle τὸν 
διδάσκαλον. ‘O 83’ In- 
σοῦς ἀκούσας ἀπεχρίϑη 
αὐτῷ λέγων" μὴ φοβοῦ" 
μόνον πίστευε, καὶ σω- 
ϑήσεται. ᾿Ελϑὼν δὲ εἰς 
τὴν οἰκίαν οὐκ ἀφῆκεν 
εἰςελϑεῖν οὐδένα, εἰ μὴ 
Πέτρον καὶ ᾿Ιωάννην 

ΝΟ» , A A 
καὶ ]Ιάκωβον καὶ τὸν 
πατέρα τῆς παιδὸς καὶ 
τὴν μητέρα. Ἔχλαιον 
δὲ πάντες καὶ ἐχόπτον- 

oP ε A 
to αὐτήν" ὁ δὲ εἶπε" 

A φ » > , 
μὴ κλαίετε: οὐκ ἀπέ- 
ϑᾶανεν, ἀλλὰ καϑεύδει. 
Καὶ κατεγέλων αὐτοῦ 

tg ἢ σ .3 , 
εἰδότες, ott ἀπέϑανξν. 
«Αὐτὸς δὲ ἐκβαλὼν ἔξω 
πάντας 


καὶ κρατήσας 
τῆς χειρὸς αὐτῆς ἐφώ- 


παιδίου λέγει αὐτῇ" ταλιϑὰ κοῦμι" ὅ 
ἐστι μεϑερμηνευόμενον" τὸ κοράσιον, 
σοὶ λέγω, ἔγειραι. Καὶ εὐθέως ἀνέστη 
τὸ κοράσιον καὶ περιεπάτει" ἦν γὰρ 
ἐτῶν δώδεχα. καὶ ἐξέστησαν ἐκστά- 
oe μεγάλῃ. Καὶ διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς 
πολλά, ἵνα μηδεὶς γνῷ τοῦτο" καὶ 
εἶπε δοϑῆναι αὐτῇ φαγεῖν. 


woe λέγων" ἡ παῖς, ἐ- 


55 γείρου. Καὶ ἐπέστρεψε τὸ πνεῦμα 


αὐτῆς, καὶ ἀνέστη παραχρῆμα. καὶ 


56 διέταξεν αὐτῇ δοϑῆναι φαγεῖν. Καὶ 


ἐξέστησαν οἱ γονεῖς αὐτῆς" ὁ δὲ 
παρήγγειλεν αὐτοῖς μηδενὶ εἰπεῖν τὸ 
γεγονός. 


[ | : 
~~ 


τ 
a 
a 

e 

Ly 

fe 


a 


§§ 59, οὐ, 61.] UNTIL THE THIRD. | 63 





§ 60. Two blind men healed, and a dumb spirit cast out.— Capernaum ? 


om % ~ ~ ~ ~ 4 
2 Kai παράγοντι ἐχεῖϑεν τῷ Inoov ἠκολούϑησαν αὐτῷ δύο τυφλοὶ κράζοντες 
4 ~ ῷ 3 ~ 
28 "καὶ λέγοντες" ἐλέησον ἡμᾶς, vie Δαυΐδ. ᾿Ελϑόντι δὲ εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν προςῆἤλϑον 
αὐτῷ οἱ τυφλοί, καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς * πιστεύετε, ὅτι δύναμαι τοῦτο ποιῆ- 
»λ > ~ ‘ , , 7 ~ > ~ 3.» , ᾿ 
29 σαι; λέγουσιν αὑτῷ" vai, κύρι. Τότε ἥψατο τῶν ὀφϑαλμῶν αὑτῶν λέγων 
‘ ‘ “ ¢ ~ , ,ν | ee. ? ἐν» oh ἂν ἂν. , 
30 κατὰ τὴν πίστιν ὑμῶν γενηϑήτω υμῖν. Και wel Le αὐτῶν οἱ δ δαλμοι, 
A J ~ ~ 
31 καὶ ἐνεβριμήσατο αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς λέγων" ; ὁρᾶτε, μηδεὶς γινωσκέτω. Οἱ 
δὲ ἐξελθόντες διεφήμισαν αὐτὸν ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ YY ἐκείνῃ. : 
32 Αὐτῶν δὲ ἐξερχομένων, ἰδού, προφήνεγκαν αὐτῷ ἄνϑρωπον κωφόν, δαιμονιζό- 
33 μένου. Καὶ ἐχβληϑέντος τοῦ δαιμονίου ἐλάλησεν ὁ κωφός. καὶ ἐθαύμασαν οἱ 
F σ ov ~ ῳ 
84 ὄχλοι, λέγοντες" [ὅτι] οὐδέποτε ἐφάνη οὕτως ἐν τῷ ᾿Ισραήλ. Οἱ δὲ Φαρισαῖοι 
” > ~ Ἃ » ~ ~~ > ta 2 A , 
ἔλεγον". ἕν τῷ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαιμονίων ἔχβαλλει τὰ δαιμόνια. 


§ 61. Jesus again at Nazareth, and again rejected. 


Mark VI. 1—6. 
~ ~ 3 3 \ .. Ὁ A ‘ 
1 Καὶ ἐξῆλϑεν ἐκεῖϑεν καὶ ἤλϑεν εἰς τὴν πατρίδα αὑτοῦ" καὶ ἀκολου- 
- ~ 4 ~ 
Marrn. XIII. 54—53. ϑοῦσιν αὐτῷ οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ" 
é ε ~ ᾿ 4 , , a” 

54 Kat ᾿ἐλϑὼν εἰς τὴν πατρίδα αὑτοῦ 42 Καὶ yerouévov σαββάτου ἤρξατο ἐν 
: ~ ~ ~ ~ 4 4 
| ἐδίδασκεν αὐτοὺς ἐν TH συναγωγῇ τῇ συναγωγῇ διδάσκειν" καὶ πολλοὶ 

» σ ἊΝ 2 ‘ 
ιαὐτῶν, ὥςτε ἐχπλήττεσϑαι αὐτοὺς ἀκούοντες ἐξεπλήσσοντο λέγοντες " 
~ 4 
[καὶ λέγειν: πόϑεν τούτῳ ἡ σοφία πόϑεν τούτῳ ταῦτα; καὶ τίς ἡ σο- 
' ΒΕ: » - 4 
55 αὕτη καὶ ai δυνάμεις ; Οὐχ οὗτός igia ἡ δοϑεῖσα αὐτῷ ; καὶ δυνάμεις 
- Α ~ ~ ~ ~ 
ἐστιν ὁ τοῦ TEXTOVOS υἱός ; οὐχ ἡ τοιαῦται διὰ τῶν χειρῶν αὐτοῦ γί- 
? > ~ , ᾿ 4 4 « > art > « , 
μήτηρ αὐτοῦ λέγεται Μαριαμ; καὶ οὐ = 3 vortat. Οὐχ ovtog ἔστιν ὃ τέχτων, 
~ ‘ ~ oY ‘ A 
ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ ᾿Ιάκωβος καὶ ᾿Ιωσῆς ὁ υἱὸς Μαρίας ; ἀδελφὸς δὲ ᾿Ιακώβου 
Α A ~ 4 A 
56 καὶ Σίμων καὶ ᾿Ιούδας ; xatiaiaded- xa ᾿Ιωσῆ καὶ ᾿Ιούδα καὶ Σίμωνος ; 
~ 4 ~ \ ~ > 4 é A fe of ~ ft 
φαὶ αὐτοῦ οὐχὶ πᾶσαι πρὸς ἡμᾶς εἰσι; καὶ οὐκ εἰσὶν αἱ ἀδελφαὶ αὐτοῦ ὧδε 
? ¥ , ~ , A A ς ~ A > , > 
57 πόϑεν οὖν τούτῳ tavta marta; Kou πρὸς ἡμᾶς ; καὶ ἐσκανδαλίζοντο ἐν 
- e A ~ ~ yxy A - ~ 
ἐσκανδαλίζοντο ἐν αὐτῷ. ὁ δὲ Incovg 4 αὐτῷ. Ἔλεγε δὲ αὐτοῖς 6 ᾿Ιησοῦς" 
$ ~ bd 4 ’ σ A 
εἶπεν αὐτοῖς οὐκ ἔστι προφήτης OTL οὐκ ἔστι προφήτης ἄτιμος, εἰ μὴ 
~ ~ ~ ~ 4 ᾿ ἕῳ 
ἄτιμος, εἰ μὴ ἐν τῇ πατρίδι αὑτοῦ ἐν τῇ πατρίδι αὑτοῦ καὶ ἐν τοῖς συγ- 
ae | ~ +p ¢ . hw A ? , A’ 4S >? ¢ oo» 4 
58 χαὶ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ avtov. Καὶ οὐκ 5 γεγέσι καὶ ἕν τῇ οἰχίᾳᾷ αὑτοῦ. Καὶ 
~ \ \ ~ 
ἐποίησεν ἐκεῖ δυνάμεις πολλὰς διὰ οὐκ ἠδύνατο ἐκεῖ οὐδεμίαν δύναμιν 
\ > , 2 ~ ~ - \ 25 Moe? 
τὴν ἀπιστίαν αὐτῶν. ποιῆσαι, εἰ μὴ ὀλίγοις ἀῤῥώστοις 


Α ~ r \ 
6 ἐπιϑεὶς τὰς χεῖρας ἐθεράπευσε. Kat ἐθαύμαζε διὰ τὴν 
ἀπιστίαν αὐτῶ»ν.-- 


64 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER [Parr IV. 





§ 62. A third circuit in Galilee. The Twelve instructed and sent forth.— Galilee. 


Marra. IX. 35—38, X. 1, 5—42. XI. 1. 
3ὅ Kai περιῆγεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς τὰς πόλεις πάσας καὶ 
τὰς κώμας, διδάσκων ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς αὐτῶν, 
καὶ κηρύσσων τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς βασιλείας, καὶ ϑὲ- 
36 ραπεύων πᾶσαν γόσον xe πᾶσαν μαλακίαν [ἐν τῷ λαῷ [dev δὲ τοὺς ¢ ὄχλους; 
ἐσῆλα) χνίσϑη περὶ αὐτῶν, ὅτι ἦσαν ἐσκυλμένοι καὶ ἐῤῥιμμένοι, ὡςεὶ πρόβατα 
31 μὴ ἔχοντα ποιμένα. Tore λέγει τοῖς td αὑτοῦ" ὁ μὲν ϑερισμὸς πολύς, οἱ 
38 δὲ ἐργάται ὀλίγοι "} δεήϑητε οὖν τοῦ κυρίου τοῦ ϑηρισμοῦ, ὅπως ἐκβάλῃ ἐργάτας 
εἰς τὸν ϑερισμὸν αὑτοῦ. Loxe IX. 1—6. 
X.1 Kai προςφκαλεσάμε- 7 | Svyzaheccuerog δὲ 
γος tous δώδεκα μαϑη- τοὺς δώδεχα [μαϑη- 


Marx VI. 6—13. [ 
ὃ —Kai περιῆγε τὰς κώ- 
pag κύκλῳ διδάσκων. 


MARK VI. 
Καὶ προςχαλεῖται 1 
\ ’ A oe ΤῊΣ 
τοὺς Owdexa, καὶ 70- 





- Ἅ « ~ mM” > 
τὰς αὐτοῦ ἔδωκε; av- 


~ > ’ ? 
τοῖς ἐξουσίαν πνευμά- 


> ‘ > »" 

ξατο αὐτοὺς ἀποστὲλ- 
4 

Lew δύο δύο, καὶ ἐδί- 


~ > 
φὰς αὑτοῦ] ἔδωκεν av- 


~ , Ἀ .°D % 
τοῖς δύναμιν καὶ ἐξου- 


~ 4 MA ‘ 

των ἀκαϑάρτων, ὥςτε Sov αὐτοῖς ἐξουσίαν σίαν ἐπὶ πάντα τὰ 
~ ~ ‘ , 

ἐχβάλλειν αὐτὰ καὶ Oe τῶν πνευμάτων τῶν δαιμόνια καὶ νόσους 

, ~ , > , , vee | > , 

ραπεύειν πᾶσαν νόσον» axadaotwr. 2 ϑεραπεύειν. Και ἀπέ- 


4 ~ 
καὶ πᾶσαν μαλαχκίαν.---- 


5 Τούτους τοὺς δώδεκα ἀπέστειλεν ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς παραγ- 
, > ~ , > ΄ ‘A > ~ 4 > 

γείλας αὐτοῖς, λέγων εἰς ὁδὸν ἐθνῶν μὴ ἀπέλϑητε, 

6 καὶ εἰς πόλιν Σαμαρειτῶν μὴ sisehOnte: πορεύεσϑε 

δὲ μᾶλλον πρὸς τὰ πρόβατα τὰ ἀπολωλότα οἴκου 


7 


9 


10 


11 


12 


> ‘ > 7 > , > / 
13 εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν ἀσπάσασϑε ὐός ἢ 
εἰρήνη ὑμῶν ἐπὶ αὐτήν" 


᾿Ισραήλ. 


ἐλάβετε, δωρεὰν δότε. 
Μὴ κτήσησϑε χρυσὸν 
μηδὲ ἄργυρον μηδὲ χαλ- 
χὺν εἰς τὰς ζώνας ὑμῶν, 
! μὴ πήραν εἰς ὁδὸν μηδὲ 
δύο χιτῶνας μηδὲ ὑποδή- 
δ." 4 
para μηδὲ ῥάβδον' ἄξιος 
γὰρ 0 ἐργάτης τῆς τροφῆς 
αὑτοῦ ἐστιν. Εἰς ἣν δ᾽ 
ἂν πόλιν ἢ κώμην εἰς έλ- 
ϑητε, ἐξετάσατε, τίς ἐν 
αὐτῇ ἄξιός ἐστι" κἀκεῖ 
, a Ἅ 90 , 
μείνατε ἕως ἂν ἐξέλ- 
ϑητε. Εἰςερχόμενοι δὲ 


Πορευόμενοι δὲ κηρύσσετε λέγοντες " 
ε ΄ « > ~ 
8 ἡ βασιλεία τῶν ovparor. 


10 γας. 


στειλὲν «αὐτοὺς κηρύσ- 
σειν τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ 
ϑεοῦ καὶ ἰᾶσϑαι τοὺς 
ἀσϑενοῦντας. 


σ a 
οτι ἤγγικεν 


‘Aotevorrtag ϑεραπεύετε, νεχροὺς 
ἐγείρετε, λεπροὺς καϑαρίζετε, δαιμόνια ἐχβάλλετε: δωρεὰν 


MARK VI. 


8 Καὶ παρήγγειλεν αὐτοῖς, 


ἵνα μηδὲν αἴρωσιν εἰς 
ὁδόν, εἰ μὴ ῥάβδον μό- 
vor" μὴ πήραν, μὴ ἄρ- 
τον, μὴ εἰς τὴν ζώνην 


9 χαλκόν " ! ἀλλ᾿ ὑποδεδε- 


, , ‘ 
μένους σανδάλια" xc 
μὴ ἐνδύσησϑε δύο χιτῶ- 
Καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐ- 

νι σ 34 > 
τοῖς ὅπου ἐὰν εἰφέλ ϑη- 
Ts εἰς οἰκίαν, ἐκεῖ μένετε 
ἕως ἂν ἐξέλϑητε ἐχεῖϑεν. 


- 


3 Καὶ εἶπε πρὸς αὐτούς" 


τὴν 
ὁδόν, μήτε ῥάβδον μήτε 
πήραν μήτε ἄρτον μήτε 
ἀργύριον μήτε ἀνὰ δύο 


Ν 
μηδὲν αἴρετε εἰς 


- χιτῶνας ἔχειν. 


‘ a ν᾿ ᾿ 
4 Καὶ εἰς ἣν ἂν οἰκίαν 


εἰςέλϑητε, ἐχεῖ μένετε 
‘ ~ 
καὶ exeider * ἐξέρχεσϑε. 


Kai ἐὰν μὲν ἦ i οἰκία ἀξία, ἐλϑέτω ἡ 
ἐὰν δὲ μὴ ἢ ἀξία, ἡ εἰρήνη ὑμῶν πρὸς ὑμᾶς; ἐπιστρα- 


§ 62.] 


UNTIL THE THIRD. 


65 





MATTH. X. 
14 φήτω. 
δέξηται ὑμᾶς μηδὲ ἀκού- 
‘ , ς - 3 
On τοὺς λόγους ὑμῶν, ἐξ.- 
ἐρχόμενοι τῆς οἰκίας ἢ 
τῆς πόλεως ἐκείνης ἐχ- 
τινάξατε τὸν κονιορτὸν 


MARK VI. 


Καὶ ὃς ἐὰν μὴ 11 Καὶ ὅσοι ἂν μὴ δέξων- 


ται ὑμᾶς μηδὲ ἀκού- 
σῶσιν ὑμῶν, ἐχπορευό- 
μενοι ἐχεῖϑεν ἐκτιγά- 
Eate τὸν χοῦν τὸν ὑπο- 
κάτω τῶν ποδῶν ὑμῶν 


LUKE ΙΧ. 


5 Καὶ ὅσοι ἂν μὴ δέξωνται 


ὑμᾶς, ἐξερχόμενοι ἀπὸ τῆς 
πόλεως ἐκείνης καὶ τὸν 
κονιορτὸν ἀπὸ τῶν πο- 
δῶν ὑμῶν ἀποτινάξατε 
εἰς μαρτύριον ἐπὶ αὐτούς. 


15 τῶν ποδῶν ὑμῶν. “Anny 
λέγω ὑμῖν, ἀνεκτό- 
ΕΣ ~ 
φέρον ἕσται YN «Σ0- 
δόμων καὶ Γομόῤῥων ἐν 
, bb ~ ~ 

16 ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως, ἢ τῇ πόλει éxeivy. ᾿1δού, ἐγὼ ἀποστέλλω ὑμᾶς ὡς πρόβατα ἐν 
μέσῳ λύκων" γίνεσϑε οὖν φρόνιμοι ὡς οἱ ὄφεις, καὶ ἀκέραιοι ὡς αἱ περιστεραί. 

1 Ti 0 ¢ 8 δὲ 3 ‘ ~ > 9 , 4 ὃ , A ¢ ~ τ > δ 

goceyete δὲ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων παραδώσουσι γὰρ ὑμᾶς εἰς συνέδρια, 
A ~ ~ €x εἰν ~ / ‘ 
18 καὶ ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς αὑτῶν μαστιγώσουσιν ὑμᾶς" ᾿ καὶ ἐπὶ ἡγεμόνας 
Α Α ~ ¥ ~ ~ ~ 
δὲ καὶ βασιλεῖς ἀχϑήσεσϑε ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ, εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς καὶ τοῖς 
19 ἔϑνεσιν. Ὅταν δὲ διδῶσιν ὑμᾶς, μὴ ag ἢ τί λαλήσητε " 
ow. “Ὅταν δὲ παραδιδῶσιν ὑμᾶς, μὴ μεριμνήσητε, πῶς ἢ τί λαλήσητε 
4 A c¢ w > 3 , ~ σ ’ l4 > A ς ~ > c 

20 δοϑήσεται γὰρ ὑμῖν ev ἐχείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ, τί Aadjoete’! οὐ γὰρ ὑμεῖς eoTE οἱ 

21 λαλοῦντες, ἀλλὰ τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν τὸ λαλοῦν ἐν ὑμῖν. Παραδώσει 
δὲ ἀδελφὸς ἀδελφὸν εἰς ϑάνατον, καὶ πατὴρ τέκνον" καὶ ἐπαναστήσονται τέχνα 
ὌΝ ~ ‘ , > , » he , « A ’ A 

22 ἐπὶ γονεῖς, καὶ ϑανατώσουσιν αὐτούς. Kai ἔσεσϑε μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων διὰ 

. ἊΨ 4 era ee | Pee > , τ , σ A , 

23 τὸ ovoua mov’ ὃ δὲ ὑπομείνας εἰς τέλος, ovtog σωϑήσεται. Οταν δὲ διωκῶώσιν 
« ~ > ~ , , , > A aA > ‘ A , c w > \ 
ὑμᾶς Ev τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ, φεύγετε εἰς τὴν ἄλλην. ἀμὴν yao λέγω ὑμῖν, OV μὴ 

24 τελέσητε τὰς πόλεις τοῦ ᾿Ισραήλ, ἕως ἂν ἔλϑῃ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου. Οὐκ ἔστι 

A ς A A ? Io ~ ε A ‘ Ul ¢ ~ > A ~ 
25 μαϑητὴῆς ὑπὲρ tov διδάσκαλον οὐδὲ δοῦλος ὑπὲρ τὸν κύριον αὑτοῦ. “AgxEetor τῷ 
~ 4 , « ¢ , ¢ ~ ~ ¢ ~ « « [4 ς - 
μαϑητῇ, wa γένηται ὡς ὃ διδάσκαλος αὑτοῦ, καὶ ὃ δοῦλος ὡς ὁ κύριος αὑτοῦ. 
5 A > ’ 4, > , , ~ A 3 ᾿ \ 3 ~ 
εἰ τὸν οἰκοδεσπότην Βεελζεβουλ ἐπεκάλεσαν, πόσῳ μᾶλλον τοὺς οἰκιακοὺς αὐτοῦ ; 
~ 4 : a 
26 Μὴ οὖν φοβηϑῆτε αὐτούς. οὐδὲν γάρ ἐστι κεκαλυμμένον, ὃ οὐκ ἀποκαλυφϑήσεται, 
‘ ? a 3 ? a , CG Sor IE ~ , oy > ~ , 
27 καὶ χρυπτὸν, ὁ ov γνωσϑήσεται. O heyo ὑμῖν ey τῇ σκοτίᾳ, εἰπατὲ ἐν τῷ φωτί" 
aa ° A Tv 3 , , 23% ~ , A 4 ~ 3 4 
28 χαὶ ὃ εἰς TO OVE ἀκούετε, κηρύξατε ἐπὶ τῶν δωμάτων. Καὶ uy φοβεῖσϑε ἀπὸ 
- A ~ A ‘ ~ 
τῶν ἀποχτεινόντων τὸ σῶμα, τὴν δὲ ψυχὴν μὴ δυναμένων ἀποκτεῖναι" φοβήϑητε 
Η “ ‘ , 4 4 Α ~ 3 , > ’ >A ge 

29 δὲ μᾶλλον τὸν δυνάμενον καὶ ψυχὴν καὶ σῶμα ἀπολέσαι ev yeevvy. Ovyt δύο 
στρουϑία ἀσσαρίου πωλεῖται; καὶ ἕν ἐξ αὐτῶν οὐ πεσεῖται ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν ἄνευ τοῦ 

~ ~ 4A Ἁ ~ ~ ~ 

30 πατρὸς ὑμῶν" ὑμῶν δὲ καὶ αἱ τρίχες τῆς κεφαλῆς πᾶσαι ἠριϑμημέναι εἰσί. 

~ ~ ξ΄ ia ~ “4 [2 

3132 Μὴ οὖν φοβηϑῆτε" πολλῶν στρουϑίων διαφέρετε ὑμεῖς. Πᾶς οὖν ὧςτις 
ε ; > ue) ὁ ~ > , ¢ , rN > > ~ 
ὁμολογήσει ἐν snot ἔμπροσϑὲν τῶν ἀνϑρώπων, ὁμολογήσω xayo ἐν αὑτῷ 

; ~ ~ ~ A ’ . ᾿ 

38 ἔμπροσϑεν τοῦ πατρός μου τοῦ ἐν οὐρανοῖς" ὅςτις δ᾽ ἂν ἀῤρνήσηταί μὲ ἔμπρο- 
σϑεν τῶν ἀνθρώπων, ἀρνήσομαι αὐτὸν κἀγὼ ἔμπροσϑεν τοῦ πατρός μου τοῦ ἐν 

34 οὐρανοῖς. Μὴ νομίσητε, ὅτι ἦλϑον βαλεῖν εἰρήνην ἐπὶ τὴν» γῆν" οὐκ ἦλϑον βαλεῖν 

<i ~ A 

35 εἰρήνην, ἀλλὰ μάχαιραν. Ἦλϑον γὰρ διχάσαι ἄνϑρωπον χατὰ τοῦ πατρὸς 

- ~ ~ A ~ ~ 
αὑτοῦ, καὶ ϑυγατέρα κατὰ τῆς μητρὸς αὑτῆς, καὶ νύμφην κατὰ τῆς πενϑερᾶς 
εν» ‘ ~ 4 ~ ~ Δ 
36 37 αὑτῆς" καὶ ἐχϑροὶ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου οἱ οἰκιακοὶ αὐτοῦ. " Ο φιλῶν πατέρα ἢ μη- 


εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς. 
[ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται Σοδόμοις 
ἢ Γομόῤῥοις ἐν ἡμέρᾳ κρίσεως, ἢ τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ.} 





8 36. Comp. Mic. 7, 6. 
9 


FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER 


[Part IV. 





13 ταγνοήσωσι" 


MATTH. X. 


, 4. 8 > A > Ν cA * {We ~ «A bi , e 4 > 4% > 
τέρα ὑπὲρ ἐμὲ οὐκ ἔστι μου ἄξιος " καὶ ὁ φιλῶν υἱὸν ἢ ϑυγατέρα ὑπὲρ ἐμὲ οὐκ 


2 > ” + 

29 μου, οὐκ ἔστι μου ἄξιος. 
3 , ‘ \ ς 7 a, > ~ eR 4 5. τ᾿ 

40 ἀπολέσας τὴν ψυχὴν αὑτοῦ ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ εὑρήσει αὑτήν. 
, ‘ ς δ... , ν , A > » , 

41 δέχεται" καὶ ὁ sue δεχόμενος δέχεται τὸν ἀποστείλαντά με. 


μ- a A “» ‘ ~ 
38 ἔστι μου ἄξιος" καὶ ὃς ov λαμβάνει τὸν σταυρὸν αὑτοῦ καὶ ἀκολουϑεῖ ὀπίσω 
« « \ 4 A cw > , x \¢ 
Ο εὑρὼν τὴν ψυχὴν αὑτοῦ ἀπολέσει αὐτήν" καὶ ὁ 


Ὃ δεχόμενος ὑμᾶς ἐμὲ 
‘O δεχόμεμος 


προφήτην εἰς ὄνομα προφήτου μισϑὸν προφήτου λήψεται" καὶ ὁ δεχόμενος 


‘ a ~ 
42 δίκαιον εἰς ὄνομα δικαίου μισϑὸν δικαίου λήψεται. Kai ὃς ἐὰν ποτίσῃ ἕνα τῶν 


μικρῶν τούτων ποτήριον ψυχροῦ μόνον εἰς ὄνομα μαϑητοῦ, ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐ 
μὴ ἀπωλέσῃ τὸν odor αὑτοῦ. 


ΧΙ. 1 Καὶ ἐγένετο ὅτε ἐτέλεσεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς διατάσσων τοῖς δώδεκα μαϑηταῖς αὑτοῦ, 


μετέβη ἐκεῖϑεν τοῦ διδάσκειν καὶ κηρύσσειν ἐν ταῖς πόλεσιν αὐτῶν. 


MARK VI. 


A 
και 


12 Καὶ ἐξελϑόντες ἐκήρυσσον, ἵνα με- 
δαιμόνια πολλὰ 


ἐξέβαλλον" καὶ ἤλειφον ἐλαίῳ πολ- 


Love ἀῤῥώστους καὶ ἐθεράπευον. 


LUKE ΙΧ. 

6 ᾿Εξερχόμενοι δὲ διήρχοντο κατὰ τὰς 
κώμας εὐαγγελιζόμενοι καὶ ϑερα- 
πεύοντες πανταχοῦ. 


§ 63. Herod holds Jesus to be John the Baptist, whom he had just before beheaded.— 


Marra. XIV. 1, 2, 6—12. 


"Ey ἐκείνῳ τῷ καιρῷ 14 


ε 
ἤκουσεν Ἡρώδης to τε- 
‘ > ‘ > 
τράρχης τὴν ἀκοὴν In- 
σοῦ, | καὶ εἶπε τοῖς παι- 
‘ ε “ χει Ἢ 
σὶν αὑτοῦ" οὑτὸς ἔστιν 
, 
᾿Ιωάννης ὁ βαπτιστῆς " 
; ΒΘ, 3 , ᾽ A ~ 
αὑτὸς ἠγέρϑη ἀπὸ τῶν 
~ 4 ~ 
γεχρῶν, καὶ διὰ τοῦτο 
αἱ δυνάμεις ἐνεργοῦσιν 
ἐν aUT@.— 


τῳ 


5 


Galilee? Perea. 


Mark VI. 14—16, 21—29. 


Kai ἤκουσεν 6 βασι- 7 


λεὺς Ἡρώδης (φανερὸν 
γὰρ ἐγένετο τὸ ὄνομα 
bd ~ Vo” σ 
αὑτοῦ) και, ἔλεγεν" OTL 
> , « , > 
Ιωάννης ὁ βαπτίζων ἐκ 
~ > , A ‘ 
ψεχρῶν nyeodn, καὶ διὰ 
τοῦτο ἐνεργοῦσιν αἱ δυ- 
γάμεις ἐν αὐτῷ. “4λλοι 
ἔλεγον" ὅτι Hiiag ἐστίν. 
ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον * ὅτι προ- 
φήτης ἐστὶν ὡς εἷς τῶν 


16 προφητῶν. “Axovous δὲ ὁ Ἡρώδης 
εἶπεν" ὅτι ὃν ἐγὼ ἀπεκεφά- 


t 
λισα ᾿Ιωάννην, οὗτός ἐστιν" 
αὐτὸς ἠγέρϑη ἐκ νεχρῶν.--- 


τοῦ Ἡρώδου ὠρχήσατο 
ἡ ϑυγάτηρ τῆς Ἥρω- 


7 ἤρεσε τῷ Ἡρώδῃ" ὅϑεν 


ped ὅρκου ὡμολόγησεν 


Luxe IX. 7—9. 


Ἤκουσε δὲ Ἡρώδης 


ε ‘ 

ὁ τετράρχης τὰ γινόμενα 
ὑπ αὐτοῦ πάντα, καὶ 
διηπόρει διὰ τὸ λέγε- 


« , σ 
σϑαι ὑπὸ τινῶν, ott 


᾿Ιωάννης ἐγήγερται ἐκ. 


~ Ι « , , 
γεχρῶν, ὑπὸ τινῶν δέ, 
σ 
ὅτι ᾿Ηλίας ἐφάνη, ἄλ- 

, σ΄ , 
λων dé, ot προφήτης 
εἷς τῶν ἀρχαίων ἀνέστη. 

‘ 
Καὶ εἶπεν Ἡρώδης" 
3 , δ. ἢ 9 , 
Ἰωάννην eyo amexepa- 

, » OF τ 
diosa’ τίς δὲ ἐστιν οὗτος, 


4 τ y ~ 
περὶ OV ἐγὼ ἀκούω τοιαῦτα ; 
\ ϑω 3 ~ > , 
καὶ ἐζήτει ἰδεῖν αὐτόν. 


MARK VI. 
6 Tevectov δὲ ἀγομένων 21 Καὶ γενομένης ἡμέρας εὐκαίρου, ore Ἡρώδης τοῖς 
γενεσίοις αὑτοῦ δεῖπνον ἐποίει τοῖς μεγιστᾶσιν αὑτοῦ 
καὶ τοῖς χιλιάρχοις. καὶ τοῖς πρώτοις τῆς Γαλιλαίας, 
διάδος ἐν τῷ μέσῳ, καὶ 22 ! καὶ εἰρελϑούσης τῆς ϑυγατρὸς αὐτῆς τῆς Ἡρωδιάδος 
καὶ ὀρχησαμένης καὶ ἀρεσάσης τῷ ‘Howdy καὶ τοῖς 
συνανακειμένοις, εἶπεν ὁ βασιλεὺς τῷ κορασίῳ" αἵ 


Tlie 


§§ 63, 64.] 


UNTIL THE THIRD. 


67 





MATTH. XIV. 


MARK VI. 


‘ \ #7 
τησόν μὲ ὃ ἐὰν ϑέλῃς, καὶ δώσω σοί. Koi ὦμο- 
’ ~ vA GQ Df > ὔ ’ tw 3 , 
GEV αὐτῇ ὅτι, ὃ ἐάν ME αἰτήσῃς, δώσω σοι ἕως ἡμί- 
σους τῆς βασιλείας pov. Ἢ δὲ ἐξελϑοῦσα εἶπε τῇ 
4 ~ ‘ ‘ 
μητρὶ αὑτῆς" τί αἰτήσομαι; ἡ δὲ εἶπε" THY κεφαλὴν 
᾿Ιωάννου τοῦ βαπτιστοῦ. Καὶ εἰφςελϑοῦσα εὐθέως 
4 ~ 
μετὰ σπουδῆς πρὸς τὸν βασιλέα ἠτήσατο λέγουσα" 
a ~ ~ 
ϑέλω, ἵνα μοι δῷς ἐξαυτῆς ἐπὶ πίνακι τὴν κεφαλὴν 
᾿Ιωάννου τοῦ βαπτιστοῦ. Καὶ περίλυπος γενόμενος 
σ 
ὁ βασιλεὺς διὰ τοὺς ὅρκους καὶ τοὺς συνανακειμέ- 
γους οὐχ ἠϑέλησεν αὐτὴν ἀϑετῆσαι. Καὶ εὐϑέως ἀπο- 
» « A , 3 , 
στείλας ὁ βασιλεὺς σπεκουλάτωρα ἐπέ- 
ταξεν ἐνεχϑῆνται τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ. 
28 Ὁ δὲ 
3 ~ ~ , + 4 
ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ" καὶ ἤνεγκε τὴν xepe- 
~ A 
λὴν αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ πίνακι, καὶ ἔδωκεν αὐ- 
‘ 
~ 4 
τὴν τῷ κορασίῳ, καὶ TO κοράσιον 
” ΤΑ, ~ A Cw, 4 
ἔδωκεν αὐτὴν τῇ μητρὶ αὑτῆς. Καὶ 
3 ’ € A ’ ~ F 
. ἀκούσαντες οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ ἦλϑον 
VF ~ ~ 
καὶ ἦραν TO πτῶμα αὐτοῦ καὶ ἔϑη- 
| 
καν αὐτὸ ἐν μνημείῳ. 


αὐτῇ δοῦναι, ὃ ἐὰν at- 23 
8 τήσηται. Ἢ δὲ προβι- 
~ « A ~ 
βασϑεῖσα ὑπὸ τῆς μη- 24 
zoos αὑτῆς, δός μοι, 
’ τ > 4 , 
φησίν, wds ἐπι πίνακι 
\ δ. Biel te 
τὴν κεραλὴν ]Ιωάννου 
9 τοῦ βαπτιστοῦ. Καὶ 
ἐλυπήϑη βασιλεύς" 26 
διὰ δὲ τοὺς ὅρκους καὶ 
τοὺς συνανακειμένους 
ἐκέλευσε δοϑῆναι. Καὶ 
, > ’ A 3 , 
πέμψας ἀπεχεφάλισε tov ~“Iwcr- 
11 ony, ἐν τῇ φυλακῇ. Kai ἠνέχϑη ἡ 
A > we Be ὦ , A. 26 7 
κεφαλὴ αὐτοῦ ent πίνακι καὶ ἐδόϑὴ 
~ ~ Ss 4 
τῷ κορασίῳ᾽ καὶ ἤνεγκε TH μητρὶ αὖ- 
τῆς. Καὶ προςελϑόντες οἱ μαϑη- 
A ? ~ = A ~ Non 
ται αὑτοῦ ἤραν TO σῶμα καὶ εϑαψαν 
3 , a | , 3 , « 
αὑτὸ" καὶ ἔλθϑοντες ἀπήγγειλαν τῷ 
᾽]ησοῦ. 


25 


27 
10 


> \ > 
ἀπελϑὼν ἀπεκεφάλισεν αὐτὸν 


12 
29 


§ 64. The Twelve return, and Jesus retires with them across the Lake. Five thou- 
sand are fed.—Capernaum. N. E. coast of the Lake of Galilee. 


Marx VI. 30—44. Luxe IX. 10—17. 


80 Kat συνάγονται οἱ ἀπόστολοι πρὸς 1 Kai ὑποστρέψαντες οἱ ἀπόστολοι 
τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν καὶ ἀπήγγειλαν αὐτῷ διηγήσαντο αὐτῷ ὅσα ἐποίησαν.--- 
πάντα, καὶ ὅσα ἐποίησαν καὶ ὅσα 

31 ἐδίδαξαν. Καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς δεῦτε ὑμεῖς αὐτοὶ κατ᾿ ἰδίαν εἰς ἔρημον τόπον 


Ἂ 2 Ud 257 Ἵ \ ἴω , Ν ἡ Ὁ , » « 
καὶ ἀναπαύεσϑε ὀλίγον. ἦσαν γὰρ οἱ ἐρχόμενοι Ἰκαὶ οἱ ὑπάγοντες πολλοί, καὶ 
οὐδὲ φαγεῖν ηὐκαίρουν. 


Matrn. XIV. 13—21. 
13 Καὶ ἀκούσας ὁ 382 Καὶ ἀπῆλϑον εἰς 10 ---Καὶ παραλα- 1 Μετὰ ταῦτα ἀπ- 


᾿Ιησοῦς ἀνεχώρη- 


~ 3 
σεν ἐκχκεῖϑεν ἐν 
’ » ΝΥ 
πλοίῳ εἰς ἔρημον 
, ? Ie 
σόπον χατ ἰδίαν. 


Ων ele ¢ 
HAL AKOVOAVTES OL 


MARK VI. 


ἔρημον τόπον τῷ 
[2 > 3g?’ 
πλοίῳ κατ ἰδίαν. 


33 Καὶ εἶδον αὐτοὺς 


ὑπάγοντας [οἱ ὕχ- 
λοι], καὶ ἐπέγνω- 


LUKE IX. 


\ > ‘ € 
βωὼν αὑτοὺς ὑπε- 
, > Ig? 
χωώρησε κατ ἰδίαν 
εἰς τόπον ἔρημον 
πόλεως καλουμέ- 
γῆς = =Bndouida. 


Joun VI. 1-14. 


ἤλϑεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς 
πέραν τῆς 9ϑα- 
λάσσης τῆς Γαλι- 
λαίας, τῆς Tipe- 


, 
2 ριάδος" καὶ ἦκο- 


ὄχλοι ἠκολούϑη- σαν [αὐτὸν] πολ- 11 Οἱ δὲ ὄχλοι ιγνόν.-. λούϑει αὐτῷ ὅχ- 
> ~ ~ , 4 ~ > 4A > ’ ͵ ἰ σ΄ 
σαν αὐτῷ πεζῇ doi καὶ πεζῇ ἀπὸ τὲς ἠκολούϑησαν Rog πολύς, ὅτι 


> 4 ~ , 
ἀπο τῶν πόλεω»γ. 


πασῶν τῶν πό- 
λεὼν» συνέδραμον 


5 “ἃς Ν ~ 3 4 

ἐκεῖ καὶ προῆλϑον αὑτοὺς 
‘ ~ A > 4 

καὶ συγήλϑον πρὸς αὑτὸν. 


> ~ 
avt@.— 


a ἐσὰςς ~ > , 
3 emi tov aodEerovytor. 


π F 3 ~ ‘ 

ἑώρων [avtov] τὰ 
~ a 

σημεῖα, ἃ ἐποίει 


"Ar- 


ἤλϑε δὲ εἰς τὸ ὄρος 6 Ἰη- 


68 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER 





[Part IV. 
JOHN VI. 7 
4 σοῦς, καὶ ἐκεῖ ἐκάϑητο μετὰ τῶν μαϑητῶν αὑτοῦ. "Hy δὲ ἐγγὺς τὸ πάσχα, ἡ ἑορ- 
MATTH. XIV. MARK VI. LUKE 1X. τὴ τῶν Lovdaior. 
14 Καὶ ἐξελϑὼν ΞΔ Kat ἐξελϑὼν 11 --- Καὶ δεξάμενος δ᾽ Επάρας οὖν ὁ 


=e adios 


[ὁ “Incovg] εἶδε 

᾿ "Φ (ἃς 
πολὺν oyhov* καὶ 
> ; > 3 
ἑσπλαγχνίσϑη ἐπ 

> ~ ‘ > 

αὑτοῖς, καὶ 8ϑε- 
ράπευσε τοὺς ἀῤ- 
ῥώστους αὐτῶν. 


εἶδεν [ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς] 


‘ 
πολὺν ὄχλον, καὶ 


ἐσπλαγχνίσϑη ἐπὶ 
αὐτοῖς, ὅτι ἦσαν 
ὡς πρόβατα μὴ 
ἔχοντα ποιμένα" 
καὶ ἤρξατο διδά- 
σκειν αὐτοὺς πολ- 


αὐτοὺς ἐλάλει αὐ- 
~ A ἂν 
τοῖς περὶ τῆς βα- 
, ~ ~ 
σιλείας τοῦ Deov 
καὶ τοὺς χρείαν 
a” , 
ἔχοντας ϑεραπει- 
ας ἰᾶτο. 


᾿Ιησοῦς τοὺς ὁφ- 
ϑαλμοὺς καὶ ϑε- 
ἀσάμενος, ὅτι πο- 
λὺς ὄχλος ἔρχε- 
ται πρὸς αὐτόν, 


86 λά. Καὶ ἤδη ὥρας 12 Ἢ δὲ 


15 ᾿Οψίας δὲ γενομέ- 


γῆς προςῆλϑον 

» ~ c 4A 
αὑτῷ ob μαϑηται 
αὐτοῦ λέγοντες" 
ἔρημός ἐστιν ὁ τό- 
πος καὶ ἡ ὥρα 
ἤδη παρῆλϑεν" 
ἀπόλυσον τοὺς 
» “ > 
ὄχλους, wa ἀπελ- 
ϑόντες εἰς τὰς 
κώμας ἀγοράσω- 
σιν ἑαυτοῖς βρώ- 
ματα. 


πολλῆς γενομένης 
προςελϑόντες αὖ- 
τῷ οἱ μαϑηταὶ 
αὐτοῦ λέγουσιν" 
ὅτι ἔρημός ἐστιν 
ὁ τόπος καὶ ἤδη 


£6 ὥρα πολλή" ἀπό- 


σ 
λυσον αὐτοῦς, ἵνα 
ἀπελϑόντες εἰς 

A ’ > 

τους κυχλῷ a 
‘ 

γροὺς καὶ κώμας 

ἀγοράσωσιν ἕαυ- 

τοῖς ἄρτους" τί 

γὰρ φάγωσιν οὐκ 


Ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς 31 ἔχουσιν. Ὁ δὲ ἀ- 


εἶπεν αὐτοῖς" οὐ 
χρείαν ἔχουσιν ἀπ- 
ελϑεῖν" δότε av- 
τοῖς ὑμεῖς φαγεῖν. 


170i δὲ λέγουσιν 
αὐτῷ" οὐκ ἔχο- 
μὲν ὧδε εἰ μὴ 
πέντε ἄρτους καὶ 
18 δύο ἰχϑύας. Ὁ δὲ 
εἶπε" φέρετέ μοι 


ποχριϑεὶς εἶπεν 
αὐτοῖς" δότε αὐὖ- 
τοῖς ὑμεῖς φαγεῖν. 
καὶ λέγουσιν αὖ- 
τῷ" ἀπελϑόντες 
ἀγοράσωμεν δη- 
vapior διακοσίων 
ἄρτους, καὶ δῶ- 
μὲν αὐτοῖς φα- 


38 εῖν; Ὁ δὲ λέγει 


πόσους 
a” ” € 
ἄρτους ἔχετε ; ὑπ- 
, ‘ ᾿ 
ἄγετε καὶ ere. 
‘ , , 
καὶ γνόντες λέ- 
‘ 
γουσι" πέντε, καὶ 


αὐτοῖς" 


« A , 
ἡμέρα NOSATO κλί- 
Νὰ 
yew’ προςελϑὸν- 
Ἁ 

τὲς δὲ οἱ δώδεκα 
εἶπον αὐτῷ " ἀπό- 
λυσον τὸν ὄχλον, 
“ ai ’ 

wwe ᾿ἀπελϑόντες 
> A ; ? 
εἰς τὰς κύκλῳ κώ- 

A 
pag καὶ τοὺς ἀ- 
A 
γροὺς καταλύσωσι 
καὶ εὕρωσιν ἐπι- 
, ΄ « 

σιτισμόν, OTL ὧδὲ 
ἐν ἐρήμῳ τόπῳ 
ἐσμέν. 


Εἶπε δὲ πρὸς 
> ’ , > 
αὑτοὺς" δότε av- 
τοῖς ὑμεῖς φαγεῖν. 
€ A > 
οἱ δὲ εἶπον" οὐχ 
εἰσὶν ἡμῖν πλεῖον 
a , + ‘ 
ἢ πέντε ἄρτοι καὶ 
3 , , > , 
ἰχϑύες δύο, εἰ μή- 
τι πορευϑέντες 
ἡμεῖς ἀγοράσω- 
μὲν εἰς πάντα τὸν 
λαὸν τοῦτον βρώ- 

ματα" 


λέγει πρὸς τὸν 
Φίλιππον" πόϑεν 
ἀγοράσομεν ἄρ- 
τους, ἵνα φάγωσιν 


τ ~ 
6 οὗτοι; Τοῦτο de 


ἔλεγε πειράζων 
αὐτόν" αὐτὸς γὰρ 


ἤδει, τί ἔμελλε 


7 ποιεῖν. ‘A nexgi- 


On αὐτῷ Dilun- 
πος" διακοσίωνδη- 
ναρίων ἄρτοι οὐκ 
ἀρκοῦσιν αὐτοῖς, 
iva ἕκαστος αὐ- 
τῶν βραχύ τι λά- 


8 By. “ἐγει αὐτῷ εἷς 


& τῶν μαϑητῶν 
αὐτοῦ, ᾿Ανδρέας 
ὁ ἀδελφὸς Σίμω- 


9 γος Πέτρου" ἔστι 


παιδάριον ἕν ὧδε, 
αν» , ” 

O ἔχει πέντε ἄρ- 
τους κριϑίνους 

A , > , 

καὶ δύο ὀψάρια" 
> ‘ ~ , 
ἀλλὰ ταῦτα τί 
ἐστιν εἰς τοσού- 





bes 


ἘΚΕΨΩΣ 


ΨΩ τ ee! Oe 


ΠΥ Ἄν ee ee ΓΠΠ ἀν 


ον CO 





ae a τος 


πὰ 


ὙΦ ΕΝ 


ες 


ee υΣ 


SS eee ae 


t 
¥ 


§ 641 


UNTIL THE THIRD. ‘ 


69 





19 αὐτοὺς ὧδε. Καὶ 39 δύο ἰχϑύας. Καὶ 14 --ΕΟἶπε δὲ πρὸς 10 ἔδυς; Εἶπε δὲ ὁ 


20 


ΜΑΤΊΗ. XIV. 
κελεύσας τοὺς OY- 
λους ἀνωκλιϑῆνγαι 


᾿ 
ἐπὶ τοὺς χύρτους, 


40 χόρτῳ. 


MARK VI. 


ἐπέταξεν αὐτοῖς ἀ- 
γακλῖναι πάντας, 
συμπόσια συμπό- 
Old, ἐπὶ τῷ χλωρῷ 


4 
Kai ἀνέπεσον πρα- 


" ιν 93 He A 
σιὰν πρᾶσιαι, APH EXUHTOV 


4 ‘ 
καὶ ἀνὰ πεντήκον- 


4 
λαβὼν τοὺς πέντε 41 za. Καὶ λαβὼν 


ἄρτους καὶ τοὺς 
δύο ἰχϑύας ava- 
βλέψας εἷς τὸν 
οὐρανὸν εὐλόγη- 
σε" καὶ κλάσας 
ἔδωκε τοῖς μαϑη- 
ταῖς τοὺς ἄρτους, 
μαϑηταὶ 
τοῖς ὕχλοις. 


οἱ δὲ 


A 
Καὶ ἔφα- 
A 
γον πάντες, καὶ 
ἐχορτάσϑησαν " 


καὶ ἦραν τὸ πε- 
ρισσεῦον τῶν κλα- 
σμάτων, δώδεκα 
κοφίνους πλήρεις. 


‘ , » 

τοὺς πέντε ἄρ- 
A 

τους καὶ τοὺς δύο 
ἰχϑύας, ἀναβλέ- 
ψας εἰς τὸν οὐρα- 

, wea a ‘ 
VOY, EVLOYNOE* καὶ 
κατέχλαδε τοὺς 
at \ 399} 
ἄρτους καὶ ἐδίδου 
τοῖς μαϑηταῖς 
αὑτοῦ, ἵνα παρα- 

~ ~ A 
ϑῶσιν αὐτοῖς" καὶ 
τοὺς δύο ἰχϑύ- 
ας ἐμέρισε πᾶσι. 


42 Καὶ ἔφαγον πάν- 


τες καὶ ἐχορτά- 
σϑησαν" 


43 χαὶ ἦραν κλασμά- 


των δώδεκα κοφί- 
4 
γους πλήρεις, καὶ 
3 A mond > , 
ano τῶν ἰχϑύων. 


41 Οἱ δὲ ἐσϑίοντες 44 Καὶ ἦσαν οἱ φα- 


ἦσαν ἄνδρες ὡςεὶ 


πεντακιοχίλιοι χω- 


- 4 
ρὶς γυναικῶν καὶ 
παιδίων. 


, Ἁ » 
γόντες τοὺς ἀρ- 
τους πεντακιοχί- 
λιοι ἄνδρες. 


15 τα. 


11 


LUKE IX. 


A 4 « 
τοὺς μαϑητὰς αὐ- 
τοῦ" 

> ‘ ? 

τε αὑτοὺς χλισί- 

ας ἀνὰ πεντήκον- 
4 

Καὶ ἐποίη- 

σ Aes Φ 

σαν OVTO χαὶ ἀνέ- 


, 
KAUTAXKALY 


΄ 
κλιναν ἀπωντας. 


16 “αβὼν δὲ τοὺς 


᾿ x 
πέντε ἄρτους καὶ 
‘ , > , 
τοὺς δυο ἰχϑύας, 
ἀναβλέψας εἰς τὸν 
3 ’ > , 
οὐρανὸν evhoyy- 

A 

σεν αὐτούς" καὶ 

, ae 

κατέχλασε καὶ &- 

δίδου τοῖς μαϑη- 

ταῖς παρατιϑέναι 
τῷ ὄχλῳ. 


γον, καὶ ἐχορτά- 
σϑησαν πάντες" 


ΦΟΗΝ VI. 


3 ~ all 
Inoovs* mowjoaute 
4 > , 
τους ἀνϑρώπους 
~ 5 
ἀναπεσεῖν. ἦν δὲ 
‘A > 
yootos πολὺς ἕν 
τῷ τόπῳ-.--- 


11. Ἔλαβεδὲ τοὺς 


A «¢ 3 ~ 
ἄρτους ὁ ἴησοὺς 
καὶ εὐχαριστήσας 
διέδωχε τοῖς pa- 
ϑηταῖς, οἱ δὲ μα- 
ϑηταὶ τοῖς ἀνα- 
κειμένοις " ὁμοίως 
καὶ ἐκ τῶν ὄψα- 
’,, σ a 
ρίων ὁσον ἤϑελον. 


Καὶ ἔφα- 12‘Q¢ δὲ ἐνεπλήσϑη- 


σαν, λέγει τοῖς 
μαϑηταῖς αὑτοῦ" 
συναγάγετε τὰ πε- 


ρισσεύσαντα κλάσματα, 
13 ἵνα μή τι ἀπόληται. Συ»ν- 


καὶ ἤρϑη τὸ πε- 
ριἰσσεῦσαν αὐτοῖς 
κλασμάτων, 
φιγοὶ δώδεχα. 


, 
x0- 


χίλιοι.---- 


᾿ y Α 
ἤγαγον οὖν καὶ 
dg , 
ἐγέμισαν δωδεκὰ 
κοφίνους κλασμά- 
τῶν ἐκ τῶν πέντε 
ἮΝ ~ 
ἄρτων τῶν χρι- 
a 

ϑίνων, ἃ ἐπερίο- 
σξυσϑ τοῖς βεβρω- 


1{Ἦσαν γὰρ weet 10 χόσιν.---᾿ “νέπεσον 
ἄνδρες πενταχις- 


5 ἊΝ A 
οὖν οἱ ἄνδρες τὸν 
3 \ € ‘ 
ἄριϑμον coger πὲν- 


14 τακιροχίλιοι. --- Οἱ 
7. ἍἋ Is ἢ a> , ~ ε 
οὖν ἄνϑρωποι, ἰδόντες ὃ ἐποίησε σημεῖον ὁ 


~ 5) τ ~ 
᾿Ιησοῦς, ἔλεγον" ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ἀληϑῶς 


ὁ προφήτης ὁ ἐρχόμενος εἰς τὸν κόσμον. 


- 26 


70 


FROM OUR LORD'S SECOND PASSOVER 


[Parr IV. 





§ 65, Jesus walks upon the water.—Lake of Galilee. Gennesareth. 


Matra. XIV. 22—36. 
22 Kai εὐθέως ἠνάγκασεν [ὃ ᾿]η- 


σοῦς] τοὺς μαϑητὰς 


- A ~ 
βῆναι εἰς τὸ πλοῖον καὶ προάγειν 


> 8 > ‘ , o 
αὑτὸν εἰς TO πέραν, ἕως 
τ > , ‘ 4 
ov ἀπολύσῃ τοὺς οχ- 

᾿ ‘ 
λους. Καὶ ἀπολύσας 
‘ a+ > ’ > 
τοὺς ὀχλους ἀνέβη εἰς 
Re > 97 
TO 090 κατ ἰδίαν προς- 
εὐξασϑαι. 


ὀψίας 
δὲ γενομένης μόνος 
24 ἦν ἐκεῖ. To δὲ πλοῖ- 


ov ἤδη μέσον τὴς 9α- 
, Sf -; 
λάσσης ἦν, βασανιζόμε- 
γον ὑπὸ τῶν κυμάτων᾽ 
τ ‘ > , Φ 18 
ἣν γὰρ ἐναντίος ὁ ἄνε- 
25 μος. Τετάρτῃ δὲ φυ- 
Lazy τῆς νυκτὸς ἀπῆλϑε 
‘ > ‘ «3 ἂν» 
πρὸς αὕτους [ὃ ᾿]ησοῦς] 
περιπατῶν ἐπὶ τῆς ϑα- 
λάσσης. Καὶ ἰδόντες 
9% < A 5,4 
αὑτὸν οἱ μαϑηται ἐπι 
τὴν ϑάλασσαν περιπα- 
τοῦντα, ἐταράχϑησαν, 
λέγοντες" ὅτι φάντα- 
Gud ἐστι" καὶ ἀπὸ τοῦ 
27 φόβου ἔκραξαν. Εὐϑέως 
δὲ ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς ὁ 
"Insovs λέγων" 9ϑαρ- 
σεῖτε, ἐγώ εἰμι" μὴ φο- 
28 βεῖσϑε. ᾿“ποκριϑεὶς δὲ 
> ~ ΄ , 
αὐτῷ ὁ Πέτρος εἶπε" 
‘ > ‘ , 
κύριε, EL σὺ εἶ, κέλευσόν 
’ > ~ > 8 
μὲ πρὸς ce ἐλϑεῖν em 
29 τὰ ὕδατα. Ὁ δὲ εἶπεν" 
ἐλθέ, καὶ καταβὰς ἀπὸ 
- , ΄ , 
τοῦ πλοίου ὁ Πέτρος me- 


ριεπάτησεν ἐπὶ τὰ ὕδατα, ἐλϑεῖν πρὸς 52 ἐθαύμαζον. 


45 
[αὑτοῦ] ἐμ-΄ 


46 oy τὸν ὄχλον. Καὶ ἀπο- 
ταξάμενος αὐτοῖς ἀπ- 
~ > \ * 
ἤλϑεν εἰς τὸ ὅρος προς- 
, 
εὐξασϑαι. 


Καὶ 
’ , , 7 ‘ 
ὀψίας γενομένης ἦν τὸ 
πλοῖον ἐν μέσῳ τῆς ϑα- 
λάσσης " καὶ αὐτὸς μό- 
> Th ~ ~ 4 
yoo ἐπι τῆς γῆς. Και 
εἶδεν αὐτοὺς βασανιζομέ- 
vous ἐν τῷ ἐλαύνειν" ἦν 
γὰρ ὁ ἄνεμος ἐναντίος 
αὐτοῖς. καὶ περὶ τετάρ- 
την φυλακὴν τῆς νυχτὸς 
ἔρχεται πρὸς αὐτοὺς 
περιπατῶν ἐπὶ τῆς ϑα- 
λάσσης καὶ ἤϑελε παρ- 
ελϑεῖν αὐτούς. Οἱ δὲ 
ἰδόντες αὐτὸν περιπα- 
- ee’ ~ ’ 
τοῦντα ἐπι τῆς ϑαλασ- 
σης ἔδοξαν φάντασμα 
εἶναι, καὶ ἀνέχραξαν. 
Πάντες γὰρ αὐτὸν εἶδον 
‘ 
καὶ ἐταράχϑησαν. καὶ 
εὐθέως ἐλάλησε pst 
» - 4 , , a 
αὐτῶν καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς 
ϑαρσεῖτε, ἐγώ εἶμι" μὴ 
~ 4 
φοβεῖσϑε. Καὶ ἀνέβη 
πρὸς αὐτοὺς εἰς τὸ 
πλοῖον" καὶ ἐκόπασεν 
« #7 ‘ , > 
ὁ ἄνεμος. καὶ λίαν ἐκ 


47 


49 


50 


51 


Marx VI. 45—56. 


‘ > , 3 , ‘ 
Kai εὐϑέως ἡναγκασε τοὺς μα- 
4 « - 3 ~ > 4 ~ 
ϑητὰς αὑτοῦ ἐμβῆναι εἰς τὸ πλοῖον 
A ‘ 
καὶ προάγειν εἰς τὸ πέραν πρὸς 
Βηϑσαϊδάν, 


Φ ἣν, ΝΣ > , 
ἕως αὑτὸς amohv- 
Jonn VI. 15—21. 
> ~ 3 ee 
ἴησους οὐν γνοὺς, ort 
» ” Ἁ 
μέλλουσιν ἔρχεσϑαι και 
ἁρπάζειν 
ποιήσωσιν αὐτὸν βασι- 
Léa, ἀνεχώρησε πάλιν εἰς 
16 τὸ ὄρος αὐτὸς μύνος. ‘Re 
δὲ ὀψία ἐγένετο, κἄτ- 
, « ‘ > 
ἔβησαν οἱ μαϑηται av- 
-, ὃν ‘ ’ 
τοῦ ἐπι τὴν ϑαλασσαν᾽ 
17 καὶ ἐμβώντες εἰς τὸ 
'πλοῖον ἤρχοντο πέραν 
τῆς ϑαλάσσης sig Κα- 
περναούμ. καὶ σκοτία 
» > , A > 
ἤδη ἐγεγόνει, καὶ οὐκ 
ἐληλύϑει πρὸς αὐτοὺς ὃ 
18 ᾽Ιησοῦς,' ἥ τε ϑάλασσα 
ἀνέμου μεγάλου πνέον- 
19 τὸς διηγείρετο. ᾿Εληλα- 
κότες οὖν ὡς σταδίους 
᾿εἰκοσιπέντε ἢ τριάκοντα 
ϑεωροῦσι τὸν ᾿Ϊησοῦν 
περιπατοῦντα ἐπὶ τῆς 
ϑαλάσσης καὶ ἐγγὺς τοῦ 
πλοίου γινόμενον, καὶ 
20 ἐφοβήϑησαν. Ὁ δὲ λέ. 
yet αὐτοῖς " ἐγώ εἶμι, 
21 μὴ φοβεῖσϑε. Ἤϑελον 
Ψ ~ ΒῪ 4 » 4 
οὖν λαβεῖν αὐτὸν εἰς τὸ 
πλοῖον, καὶ εὐθέως τὸ 
~ ed »» - 
πλοῖον ἐγένετο ἐπι τῆς 
~ > ¢ ~ 
γῆς, εἰς ἣν ὑπῆγον. 


15 


ες σ 
autor, wa 


περισσοῦ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς ἐξίσταντο καὶ 


Οὐ γὰρ συνῆκαν ἐπὶ 














CO 





§§ 65, 66.] UNTIL THE THIRD. τὶ 
ΜΑΤΊΗ. XIV. MARK VI. 
4 ~ aw ἃ Ύ ’ ᾿ “« 
80 τὸν Ἰησοῦν. Βλέπων δὲ τὸν τοῖς ἄρτοις" ἦν γὰρ ἡ καρδία αὐτῶν 
ἄνεμον ἰσχυρὸν ἐφοβήϑη" καὶ ἀρ- πεπωρωμένη. 


ξάμενος καταποντίζεσϑαι ἔχραξε 
31 λέγων κύριε, σὥσόνιμε. Εὐϑέως δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐκτείνας τὴν 
χεῖρα ἐπελάβετο αὐτοῦ, καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ ὀλιγόπιστε, εἰς 
32 τί ἐδίστασας ; Καὶ ἐμβάντων αὐτῶν εἰς τὸ πλοῖον ἐκόπασεν 
83 ὁ ἄνεμος. Οἱ δὲ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ ἐλϑόντες προςεκύνησαν 
αὐτῷ λέγοντες" ἀληθῶς ϑεοῦ υἱὸς εἶ. 
34 Καὶ διαπεράσαντες ἦλϑον εἰς τὴν 53 Καὶ διαπεράσαντες ἦλϑον ἐπὶ τὴν 


= ~ κι ow ~ 
35 γῆν Γεννησαρέτ. Καὶ ἐπιγνόντες αὐ- γῆν Γεννησαρέτ᾽ καὶ προςωρμίσϑη- 
‘ « ~ , > ’ ~ ‘ 2% , ? » 3 Ψ 
τὸν οἱ ἄνδρες τοῦ tomov ἕκείγου 54 σαν. Kou ἐξελϑόντων αὐτῶν éx tov 
t 3 ’; 5 σ ‘ , , - 3 ’ 3 , > , 
ἀπέστειλαν sig OAny τὴν περίχωρον πλοίου εὐϑέως ἐπιγνοντὲς αὐτὸν, 
‘ ~ σ 
ἐχείνην, καὶ προςήνεγκαν αὐτῷ πάν- 55' περιδραμόντες ὅλην τὴν περίχωρον 
ew “« 4 ~ ~ 
36 τας τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας" καὶ πᾶρε- ἐκείνην, ἤρξαντο ἐπὶ τοῖς κραββάτοις 
a ~ : 
κάλουν αὐτόν, ἵνα μόνον ἅψωνται τοὺς κακῶς ἔχοντας περιφέρειν, ὅπου 
~ , =. ἢ , 3 - a+ a? > -ΨὉ 5 % ¢ A 
tov χρασπέδου τοῦ ἱματίου αὑτοῦ" 56 ἤχουον, ott ἐκεῖ ἔστι. Καὶ ὁπου ἂν 
a @ σ , 3 ’ 3 , 5)! , Ἃ 
καὶ Ooot YWarto, διεσώϑησαν. εἰςεπορεύετο ig κώμας ἢ πόλεις ἢ 


3 , > ~ 3 - | SD \ 
ἀγρούς, ἐν ταῖς ἀγοραῖς ἐτίϑουν τοὺς 
3 ~ 4 , 3 ? σ vn ~ , ~ ¢€ ’ 
ἀσϑενοῦντας, καὶ παρεκάλουν αὐτόν, ἵνα κὰν τοῦ κρασπέδου τοῦ ἱματίου 
~ & qe i σ - > , Ε 
αὐτοῦ ἁψωνται" καὶ ὅσοι ἂν ἥπτοντο αὐτοῦ, ἐσώζοντο. 


§ 66. Our Lord’s discourse to the multitude in the Synagogue at Capernaum. Many 
disciples turn back. Peter’s profession of faith Capernaum. 


~ » “« σ 
22 Τῇ ἐπαύριον 0 ὄχλος ὁ ἑστηκὼς πέραν τῆς ϑαλάσσης ἰδών, ὅτι πλοιάριον 
+ > κι 3 ~ >) « 6 > ~ > Q >: 4 ’ Ἁ 5 - PT. 5 
ἄλλο οὐκ ἣν ἐχεῖ, εἰ μὴ ὃν ἐκεῖνο, εἰς ὁ ἐνέβησαν οἱ μαϑηται αὐτοῦ, καὶ OTL οὐ 
~ ~ ~ ¢ ~ arc, ~ > \ ? > A , ε 
συνειςῆλϑε τοῖς μαϑηταῖς αὐτοῦ ὁ ᾿]ησοὺς εἰς τὸ πλοιάριον, ἀλλὰ μόνοι οἱ 
~ ~ + δ Ἔ - 
23 μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ ἀπῆλϑον" (ἄλλα δὲ -ηλϑε πλοιάρια ἐκ Τιβεριάδος ἐγγὺς τοῦ 
ἢ a a ~ 7 
24 τόπου, ὅπου ἔφαγον τὸν ἄρτον εὐχαριστήσαντος τοῦ κυρίου") OTE οὖν εἶδεν ὃ 
a [χά > ~ > 4 5 ~ ot « A > ~ 3, ἢ > A > 4 
ὄχλος, ὅτι ᾿Ιησοῦς οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκεῖ οὐδὲ οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ, ἐνέβησαν αὐτοὶ εἰς τὰ 
~ \ ~ \ ~ 
25 πλοῖα καὶ ἦλϑον εἰς Καπερναοὺμ ζητοῦντες tor ᾿]ησοῦν. Kai εὑρόντες αὐτὸν 
~ ~ 7, ba ~ 
26 πέραν τῆς ϑαλάσσης εἶπον αὐτῷ ῥαββί, πότε we γέγονας ; ᾿Α΄πεχρίϑη αὐτοῖς 
» A 4 , e dnl ὦ σ » » 
ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν" ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν" ζητεῖτέ με, οὐχ ὅτι εἴδετε σημεῖα, 
~ + A 3 ~ 
27 GAR ὅτι ἐφάγετε ἐκ τῶν ἄρτων καὶ ἐχορτάσϑητε. ᾿Εργάζεσϑε μὴ τὴν βρῶσιν 
A > ld > \ ‘ «Ὁ ‘ , 3 A 77 a φ er ~ 
τὴν ἀπολλυμένην, ἀλλὰ τὴν βρῶσιν THY μένουσαν εἴς ζωὴν αἰώνιον, ἣν ὃ υἱὸς TOV 
3 , Cus , . ~ ce oS, , αὐτὰ τὰ - δ \ 
28 ἀνϑρώπου υμῖν δώσει" TOVTOY γὰρ ὁ πατὴρ ἐσφράγισεν ὁ ϑεὸς. Εἶπον ovy πρὸς 
~ σ΄ A 4 ~ ~ ~ 
29 αὐτόν" τί ποιῶμεν, ἵνα ἐργαζώμεϑα τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Deov; ‘Anexoidn ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς 
ae ~ A ~ ~ vA 
καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς τοῦτό ἐστι TO ἔργον TOV ϑεοῦ, ἵνα πιστεύσητε εἰς ὃν ἀπέ- 
ay te 5 * Iai. oe ie A ys “ " 4 
30 στειλὲν ἐχεῖνος. Εἶπον οὖν αὐτῷ᾽ ti οὖν ποιεῖς ov σημεῖον, ἵνα ἴδωμεν καὶ 
31 πιστεύσωμέν σοι; τί ἐργάζῃ; Οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν τὸ μάννα ἔφαγον ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, 
82 χαϑώς ἐστι γεγραμμένον ἃ ἄρτον ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς φαγεῖν. Εἶπεν 





8.1, Ps. 78, 24. Comp. Ex. 16, 15. 


72 FROM OUR LORD’S SECOND ‘PASSOVER [Parr IV. 





JOHN VI. 
με ~ all ~ -“ ~ ine 
οὖν αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς" ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐ Μωῦσῆς δέδωκεν ὑμῖν τὸν 
Ἂν ? ~ ~ ~ \ ~ ~ 
ἄρτον ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, ἀλλ᾿ ὁ πατήρ μου δίδωσιν ὑμῖν τὸν ἄρτον ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 
33 τὸν ἀληϑινόν. ὋὉ γὰρ ἄρτος τοῦ ϑεοῦ ἐστὶν ὁ καταβαίνων ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καὶ 
‘ ‘ ~ ’ "4 \ tras J ‘ ’ A Cc w \ 
34 ζωὴν διδοὺς τῷ κόσμῳ. Εἶπον οὖν πρὸς αὐτόν" κύριε, πάντοτε δὸς ἡμῖν τὸν 
» ~ A > ~ ¢ > ἐκ . > , 3 c a o oh he Oe / 
35 ἄρτον τοῦτον. Εἶπε δὲ αὐτοῖς ὃ ᾿]ησοῦς " ἐγώ εἶμι ὁ ἄρτος τῆς ζωῆς ὁ ἐρχό- 
μενος πρός μὲ οὐ μὴ πεινάσῃ, καὶ ὁ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ οὐ μὴ διψήσῃ πώποτε" 
26 37 ai Ϊ RSE σ » eae , / A > , lle a δίδ , ε 
26 37 ἀλλ᾽ εἶπον ὑμῖν, ὅτι καὶ ἑωράκατέ μὲ καὶ οὐ πιστεύετε. Πᾶν, ὃ δίδωσί μοι ὃ 
, ‘ | fot Gs ‘4 \ > , , > A > , on σ 
38 πατῆρ, πρὸς ἐμὲ ἥξει, καὶ τὸν ἐρχόμενον πρός μὲ οὐ μὴ ἐχβάλω ἔξω" τι κατα- 
, > ~ >? ~ 5 σ Led A t ΔΣ ¢ 3 x A , ~ 
βέβηκα ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, οὐχ wa ποιῶ TO ϑέλημα τὸ ἐμὸν, ἀλλὰ τὸ ϑέλημα τοῦ 
39 πέμψαντός με. Τοῦτο δέ ἐστι τὸ ϑέλημα τοῦ πέμψαντός με [πατρός], ἵνα πᾶν 
a , , ‘ > , > > ~ > A > , 9 “A. ~ 3 , « , 
ὁ δέδωκὲ μοι, μὴ ἀπολέσω ἐξ αὐτοῦ, ἀλλὰ ἀναστήσω. αὐτὸ ἐν TH ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ. 
- , > ‘ ~ , ‘4 σ we ~ A «A ‘ 
40 Τοῦτο γάρ ἐστι τὸ ϑέλημα τοῦ πέμψαντός με, ἵνα πᾶς ὁ ϑεωρῶν τὸν υἱὸν καὶ 
πιστεύων εἰς αὐτὸν ἔχῃ ζωὴν αἰώνιον, καὶ ἀναστήσω αὐτὸν ἐγὼ τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ. 
3 , ᾿ co ~ 4 3 ~ σ ς Bees cr ε ‘ 
41 ᾿Ἐγόγγυζον οὖν οἱ ‘Lovdaior περὶ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι εἶπεν " ἐγὼ εἶμι ὁ ἄρτος ὁ καταβὰς 
> ~ 3 “ So» ᾽ ey Σ > 3 ~ ε er. ὁ ; τε - 
42 ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ," καὶ ἔλεγον" οὐχ ovtog ἔστιν Ιησοὺς ὁ υἱὸς ᾿Ιωσήφ, οὐ ἡμεῖς 
~ τ σ - ~ 
οἴδαμεν τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν μητέρα ; πῶς οὖν λέγει οὗτος " ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 
~ A ~ 
43 χαταβέβηκα; “Amexgidn οὖν 6 ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς" μὴ γογγύζετε wer 
~ A 
44 ἀλλήλων. Οὐδεὶς δύναται ἐλϑεῖν πρὸς με, ἐὰν μὴ ὁ πατὴρ ὁ πέμψας μὲ ἑλκύσῃ 
45 αὐτόν, καὶ ἐγὼ ἀναστήσω αὐτὸν ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ. Ἔστι γεγραμμένον ἐν τοῖς 
~ ~ - 
προφήταις “καὶ ἔσονται πάντες διδακτοὶ ϑεοῦ" πᾶς οὖν ὁ ἀκούσας παρὰ 


“πὸ 


~ A ‘ ‘ ” , > 7 \ , cer ως 
46 τοῦ πατρὸς καὶ μαϑῶν ἔρχεται πρὸς μὲ᾿ οὐχ OTL τὸν πατέρα τις EWMQUXED, εἰ 


RS 6 08 \ ~ ~ τ ad 4 , 3 \ eS , Cx c 

47 μὴ 6 ὧν παρὰ TOV ϑεοῦ, οὗτος ἑώρακε TOY πατέρα. “Aury ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ὃ 

4849 πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ ἔχει ζωὴν αἰώνιον. ᾿Εγώ εἶμι ὁ ἄρτος τῆς ζωῆς" Οἱ πατέρες 
c ~ ” Α , > ὅθ. 0 2 A > , eb m- 1g > ec m+ © > 

50 ὑμῶν ἔφαγον τὸ μάννα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ καὶ ἀπέϑανον " οὑὐτός ἐστιν ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ἐκ 
51 τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβαίνων, ἵνα τις ἐξ αὐτοῦ φάγῃ καὶ μὴ ἀποϑάνῃ. ᾿Ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ 

ἄρτος ὁ ζῶν, ὁ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβάς" ἐάν τις φάγῃ ἐκ τούτου τοῦ ἄρτου, 
‘er > ‘ »~ Sa Nae 8 ᾽ν ’ « ; > , a 

᾿ζήσεται εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα. καὶ ὁ ἄρτος δέ, ὃν ἐγὼ δώσω, ἡ σάρξ μου ἐστίν, ἣν 

52 ἐγὼ δώσω ὑπὲρ τῆς τοῦ κόσμου ζωῆς. ᾿Εμάχοντο οὖν πρὸς ἀλλήλους ot ᾽]ου- 

- τ ~ ~ — 

53 δαῖοι λέγοντες" πῶς δύναται οὗτος ἡμῖν δοῦναι τὴν σάρκα φαγεῖν ; Εἶπεν οὖν 

αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς᾽ ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἐὰν μὴ φάγητε τὴν σάρκα τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ 

54 ἀνθρώπου καὶ πίητε αὐτοῦ τὸ αἷμα, οὐκ ἔχετε ζωὴν ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, “O τρώγων μου 

τὴν σάρκα καὶ πίνων μου τὸ αἷμα ἔχει ζωὴν αἰώνιον, καὶ ἐγὼ ἀναστήσω αὐτὸν 

σε ὦν ho are ἢ ε ι , & 3 ~ 9 ~ eae at > 

55 τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ. Ἢ γὰρ σάρξ μου ἀληϑῶς ἔστι βρῶσις, καὶ τὸ aiua μου ἀλη- 
56 ϑῶς ἐστι πόσις. “O τρώγων μου τὴν σάρκα καὶ πίνων μου τὸ αἷμα ἐν ἐμοὶ 

57 μέρει κἀγὼ ἐν αὐτῷ. Καϑὼς ἀπέστειλέ μὲ ὁ ζῶν πατὴρ κἀγὼ ζῶ διὰ τὸν 
58 πατέρα, καὶ ὁ τρώγων me κἀχεῖνος ζήσεται δί ἐμέ. Οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ ἄρτος ὁ ἐκ 
τοῦ οὐρανοῦ καταβάς, οὐ καϑὼς ἔφαγον οἱ πατέρες ὑμῶν τὸ μάννα καὶ ἀπέ- 

59 ϑανον᾽ ὁ τρώγων τοῦτον τὸν ἄρτον ζήσεται εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα. Ταῦτα εἶπεν ἐν 

συναγωγῇ διδάσκων ἐν Καπερναούμ. 
60 Πολλοὶ οὖν ἀκούσαντες ἐκ τῶν μαϑητῶν αὐτοῦ εἶπον" σκληρός ἐ ἐστιν οὗτος ὁ 
61 λόγος" τίς δύναται αὐτοῦ ἀκούειν; Εἰδὼς δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐν ἑαυτῷ, ὅτι γογγύζουσι 





® 45, Is. 54, 13. Comp. Jer. 31, 33 sq. > 49, Comp. Ex. 16, 15. 


‘ier 





4. 
& 
ν᾿ 
4 

Ι 

4 
+ 


A Math preheat AE Nae 9 als Se GATS σε συ Oh 





§ 66.] UNTIL THE THIRD. 73 





JOHN VI. 
62 περὶ τούτου οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὑτοῦ, εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " τοῦτο ὑμᾶς σκανδαλίζει ; |! ἐὰν οὖν 
~ A εν ~ > , 3 , a x ‘ , \ mf 
63 ϑεωρῆτε τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀναβαίνοντα omov ἦν τὸ πρότερον ; To πνεῦμά 
3 A ~ e ‘A > > ~ > , 4 «7 Δ δὶ ~ €¢ w 
ἔστι τὸ ζωοποιοῦν, ἡ σὰρξ οὐκ ὠφελεῖ οὐδέν" τὰ ῥήματα, ἃ ἐγὼ λαλῶ ὑμῖν, 
~ ἡ ἃ 4 eos 3 eae δὲς ὃ. ἃ O)./3 ΄ ΠΙᾺ 
64 πγεῦμά ἐστι καὶ ζωή ἐστιν. “AN εἰσὶν ἐξ ὑμῶν τινες, 01 οὐ πιστεύουσιν. ἤδει 
γὰρ ἐξ ἀρχῆς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, τίνες εἰσὶν οἱ μὴ πιστεύοντες καὶ τίς ἐστιν ὁ παραδώσων 
> ; ἥτις ἢ " ‘ “ a Ἐ w gv 3 Α , > ~ le 
65 αὐτόν. Καὶ theye* διὰ τοῦτο εἰρηκα ὑμῖν, ore οὐδεὶς δύναται ἐλϑεῖν πρός με, 
3. \ 3 , a dey +9 ~ , 3 , : ἥν 50 ~ 
66 ἐὰν un ἡ δεδομένον αὐτῷ ἐκ τοῦ πατρὸς μου. Ex τούτου πολλοι ἀπῆλϑον τῶν 
67 μαϑητῶν αὐτοῦ εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω καὶ οὐκέτι μετ αὐτοῦ περιεπάτουν. Εἶπεν οὖν ὁ 
68 ᾿Ιησοῦς τοῖς δώδεκα" μὴ καὶ ὑμεῖς ϑέλετε ὑπάγειν ; ᾿Α΄πεκρίϑη οὖν αὐτῷ Σίμων 
’ , \ ’ 3 , er ~ We x 4} ‘ 
69 Πέτρος" κύριε, πρὸς τίνα ἀπελευσόμεϑα; ῥήματα ζωῆς αἰωνίου eeu! καὶ 
ἡμεῖς πεπιστεύκαμεν καὶ ἐγνώχαμεν, ὅτι σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστός, ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ϑεοῦ [τοῦ 
70 ζῶντος]. *Amexoidy αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς" οὐκ ἐγὼ ὑμᾶς τοὺς δώδεκα ἐξελεξάμην ; 
71 καὶ ἐξ ὑμῶν εἷς διάβολός ἐστιν. Ἔλεγε δὲ τὸν ᾿Ιούδαν Σίμωνος ᾿Ισκαριώτην" 
Sap wr wy ΜΠ τῳ tN > ὁ τω oye 
οὗτος γὰρ ἤμελλεν αὑτὸν παραδιδόναι εἷς ὧν ἐκ τῶν δώδεκα. 
VII. 1 Ket περιεπάτει 6 ᾿Ιησοῦς μετὰ ταῦτα ἐν τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ" οὐ γὰρ ἤϑελεν ἐν 
τῇ ᾿Ιουδαίᾳ περιπατεῖν, ὅτι ἐζήτουν αὐτὸν οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι ἀποκτεῖναι. 


10 


PART VY. 


- 


FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER UNTIL HIS FINAL DEPARTURE FROM 
GALILEE AT THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES. 


True: Siz months. 


§ 67. Our Lord justifies his Disciples for eating with unwashen hands. Pharisaic 
Traditions.— Capernaum. 


Matru. XV. 1—20. Mark VII. 1—23. 
hen προφέρχονται τῷ “Incov ot 1 ΚΚαὶ συνάγονται πρὸς αὐτὸν οἱ Φα- 
ἀπὸ “Ἱεροσολύμων γραμματεῖς καὶ ρισαῖοι καί τινὲς τῶν γραμματέων, ἐλ- 
Φαρισαῖοι λέγοντες" 2 ϑόντες ἀπὸ “]Ιεροσολύμων. Καὶ ἰδόν- 


τες TWAS τῶν μαϑητῶν αὐτοῦ κοι-. 


- ΘΝ Ff > se > 7 » ε A 
3 vaig χερσί, τοῦτ ἔστιν ἀνίπτοις, ἐσθίοντας ἄρτους" (οἱ γὰρ 
P ~ 4 “ὦ ~ 
Φαρισαῖοι καὶ πάντες οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι, ἐὰν μὴ πυγμῇ γίψωνται 
τὰς χεῖρας, οὐκ ἐσθίουσι, κρατοῦντες τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν 
4 πρεσβυτέρων" καὶ ἀπὸ ἀγορᾶς, ἐὰν μὴ βαπτείσωνται, οὐκ 
> , \ * 3 a ~ 
ἐσθίουσι" καὶ ἄλλα πολλά ἐστιν, ἃ παρέλαβον κρατεῖν, βα- 
5 πτισμοὺς ποτηρίων καὶ ξεστῶν καὶ χαλκίων καὶ κλινῶν *) ἔπειτα 
ἐπερωτῶσιν αὐτὸν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι καὶ 


2 διὰ τί οἱ μαϑηταί σου παραβαίγουσι οἱ γραμματεῖς " διὰ τί οἱ μαϑηταί σου 
τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων ; οὐ οὐ περιπατοῦσι κατὰ τὴν παράδοσιν 
γὰρ νίπτονται τὰς χεῖρας αὑτῶν, ὅταν τῶν πρεσβυτέρων, ἀλλὰ ἀνίπτοις χερ- 

3 ἄρτον ἐσθίωσιν. ‘O δὲ ἀποκριϑεὶς 6 σὶν ἐσϑίουσι τὸν ἄρτον; Ὁ δὲ ἀπο- 

Ἴ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς.--- Ὑποχριταί, καλῶς κριϑεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς" ὅτι καλῶς 
προεφήτευσε περὶ ὑμῶν Ἡσαΐας Δ. προεφήτευσεν Ἡσαΐας περὶ ὑμῶν τῶν 

8 γωνγ"" ἐγγίζει μοι ὁ λαὺς οὗτος tH ὑποκριτῶν, ὡς γέγραπται" " οὗτος ὁ 

_ στόματι αὑτῶν, καὶ τοῖς χείλεσίμε λαὺς τοῖς χεΐλεσί με τιμᾷ, ἡ δὲ καρδία 





8 7 etc. Is, 29, 13, 





§ 67.) 


FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER. 


15 





MATTH. XV. 
τιμᾷ, ἡ δὲ καρδία αὐτῶν πόῤῥω 
9 ἀπέχει ἀπὶ ἐμοῦ. Μάτην δὲ σέβον- 
ταί μὲ διδάσχοντες διδασκαλίας, 
eS Zz 5 , 
ἐντάλματα ἀνϑρώπωνγ.--- 


MARK VII. 
7 αὐτῶν πόῤῥω ἀπέχει ἀπὶ ἐμοῦ. Ma- 
, 
tyv δὲ σέβονταί μὲ διδάσκοντες δι- 
, > , > / 
δασκαλίας, ἐντάλματα avdownwyr. 
8 ‘Aértes γὰρ τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ ϑεοῦ 


᾿ κρατεῖτε τὴν παράδοσιν τῶν ἀνϑρώπων, 
- a 
βαπτισμοὺς ξεστῶν καὶ ποτηρίων, καὶ ἄλλα 


3 --διὰ τί καὶ ὑμεῖς παραβαΐνετε τὴν 
> A ~ ~ A A , 
ἐντολὴν tov ϑεοῦ διὰ τὴν παράδοσιν 

4 ὑμῶν; ὋὉ γὰρ ϑεὸς. ἐνετείλατο λέ- 
γων "ἢ τίμα τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν μη- 
τέρα" καί; ὃ κακολογῶν πατέρα ἢ 

5 μητέρα ϑανάτῳ τελευτάτω. “Ὑμεῖς δὲ 
λέγετε" ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ πατρὶ ἢ τῇ μη- 

, ~ a 94 %e 2 w 19 : » 
τρί᾽ δῶρον, ὃ ἐὰν ἐξ ἐμοῦ ὠφεληϑῇς" 
καὶ οὐ μὴ τιμήσῃ τὸν πατέρα αὑτοῦ 
ἢ τὴν μητέρα αὑτοῦ. 


Α ~ 

6 Kai ἠκυρώσατε τὴν ἐντολὴν τοῦ 
~ ‘ 4 ; c - 

Beov διὰ τὴν παράδοσιν ὑμῶν.--- 


4 

10 Καὶ προςκαλεσάμενος τὸν ὄχλον εἶπεν 
3 ~ > [4 4 , > 4 
11 αὑτοῖς" ἀκούετε καὶ συνίετε. Ov τὸ 
εἰςερχόμενον εἰς τὸ στόμα κοινοῖ τὸν 
+ > A . 3 , > 
᾿ς ἄνϑρωπον, ἀλλὰ τὸ ἐκπορευόμενον ἐκ 
τοῦ στόματος, τοῦτο κοινοῖ τὸν ἄν- 

ϑρωπον. 


παρόμοια τοιαῦτα πολλὰ ποιεῖτε. 
4 ~ ~ ~ 
9 Καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς" καλῶς ἀϑετεῖτε 
Α 5 A ~ ~ “ 4 , 
Thy ἐντολὴν τοῦ ϑεοῦ, wa τὴν παρά- 
10 δοσιν ὑμῶν τηρήσητε. Μωῦσοῆς γὰρ 
εἶπε" ὃ τίμα τὸν πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν 
μητέρα σου" καί; ὁ κακολογῶν πα- 
τέρα ἢ μητέρα ϑανάτῳ τελευτάτω. 
11 Ὑμεῖς δὲ λέγετε" ἐὰν εἴπῃ ἄνϑρωπος 
- - ~ 7 
τῷ πατρὶ ἢ τῇ μητρί" κορβᾶν, (0 
> ~ a ΕΝ 3 > ~ > 
ἐστι δῶρον,) ὃ ἐὰν ἐξ ἐμοῦ ὠφελη- 
“« A 3 , 3 ’ ee 2% 
12 ϑῇς" καὶ οὐκέτι aquete αὑτὸν οὐδὲν 
‘ ~ ~ 4 ~ ~ a 
ποιῆσαι TH πατρὶ αὑτοῦ ἢ τῇ μητρὶ 
13 αὑτοῦ, ' ἀκυροῦντες τὸν λόγον τοῦ 
- - , € ~ τ , 
ϑεοῦ τῇ παραδόσει ὑμῶν, ἢ mapedo- 
κατε" χαὶ παρόμοια τοιαῦτα πολλὰ 
- Α , , 
14 ποιεῖτε. Καὶ προςκαλεσάμενος πᾶν- 
A μὴ Υ 3 ~ > , , 
Ta τὸν ὕχλον ἔλεγεν αὑτοῖς" ἀκούετε 
- , 4 4 ? ;» 3 
15 μου πάντες καὶ συνίετε. Οὐδὲν ἔστιν 
δώ i. 3 , > , 
ἔξωϑεν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου εἰςπορευόμε- 
vov εἰς αὐτόν, ὃ δύναται αὐτὸν κοι- 
roc’ ἀλλὰ τὰ ἐχπορευόμενα an 


3. ambi τὰς Taine ᾿ ~ ᾿ς Se Uw, 
QUTOV, EXEVA EOTL TH XOWVOVYTA TOV ἄνϑρω- 


FT ? 
16 που. Ei tig ἔχει ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτω. 
MATTH. XV. 


‘ ~ ‘ ~ σ ({-»ν ΐ 

12 Tore προζελϑόντες οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ εἶπον αὐτῷ" οἶδας, ὅτι οἱ Φαρισαῖοι 
13 ἀκούσαντες τὸν λόγον ἐσκανδαλίσϑησαν ; ὋὉ δὲ ἀποκχριϑεὶς size’ πᾶσα φυτεΐα, 
α 5 » , « [4 ς 3 , 5 ? wy 3 , ¢ ‘ 

14 ἣν οὐχ ἐφύτευσεν ὁ πατήρ μου ὁ οὐράνιος, ἐκριζωϑήσεται. “Agere αὐτούς " ὁδηγοΐ 


εἶσι τυφλοὶ τυφλῶν" τυφλὸς δὲ τυφλὸν 
2A ¢ ~ > , > rye 
ἐὰν ὁδηγῇ, ἀμφότεροι εἰς βόϑυνον 
16 πεσοῦνται. ᾿“΄ποκριϑεὶς δὲ 6 Πέτρος 
εἶπεν αὐτῷ" φράσον ἡμῖν τὴν παρα- 
16 βολὴν ταύτην. ὋὉ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν" 
> ‘ 4 (etm δ τὰν »» 5 ΕΣ 
17 ἀκμὴν καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀσυνετοί ἔστε; Ov- 
πω νοεῖτε, ὅτι πᾶν τὸ εἰςπορευόμενον 
εἰς τὸ στόμα εἷς τὴν κοιλίαν χωρεῖ 


MARK VII. 
4 Ὁ ~ ~ 
17 Καὶ ore εἰςῆλϑεν εἰς οἶχον ἀπὸ τοῦ 
ἦγ > , > ee, | ε 4 
ὔχλου, ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν οἱ μαϑηταὶ 

~ 4 ~ ~ 
18 αὐτοῦ περὶ τῆς παραβολῆς. Καὶ λέ- 

. ~ σ ~ 
γει αὐτοῖς" οὕτω καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀσύνετοί 

? > ~ Ὁ ~ \ om” 

ἔστε ; οὐ γοεῖτε, OTL πᾶν τὸ ἔξωϑεν 
εἰςπορευόμενον εἰς τὸν ἄνϑρωπον Ov 





5 4 etc. Ex. 20, 12. Comp. Ex. 21, 17. Deut. 5, 16. 


76 


FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER 


[Parr V. 





MATTH. XV. 

18 καὶ εἰς ἀφεδρῶνα ἐκβάλλεται; τὰ δὲ 
ἐχπορευόμενα ἐκ τοῦ στόματος ἐκ τῆς 
καρδίας ἐξέρχεται, κἀκεῖνα κοινοῖ τὸν 

19 ἄνϑρωπον." ᾿Εκ γὰρ τῆς καρδίας ἐξέρ- 
yovrat διαλογισμοὶ πονηροί, φόνοι, 

᾿ μοιχεῖαι, πορνϑδῖαι, κλοπαί, ψευδο- 

20 μαρτυρίαι, βλασφημίαι. Ταῦτά ἐστι 
τὰ κοινοῦντα τὸν ἄνϑρωπον" τὸ δὲ 
ἀνίπτοις χερσὶ φαγεῖν οὐ κοινοῖ τὸν 
ἄνϑρωπον. 


MARK VII. 

, δι 4 ~ σ > 
19 δύναται αὐτὸν χοινῶσαι; ὅτι οὐκ 
εἰςπορεύεται αὐτοῦ εἰς τὴν καρδίαν, 

3 > > ‘ , A > ‘ 
ἀλλ εἰς τὴν κοιλίαν" καὶ εἰς τὸν 
ἀφεδρῶνα ἐκπορεύεται, καϑαρίζον 
20 πάντα τὰ βρώματα. Ἔλεγε δέ" ὅτι 
τὸ ἐκ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκπορευόμενον, 
21 ἐχεῖνο κοινοῖ τὸν ἄνϑρωπον. Ἔσω- 
ΠΥ ee εε' ~ > , 
Dev yao &% τῆς καρδίας τῶν ἀνϑρώ- 
mor οἱ διαλογισμοὶ οἱ κακοὶ ἐχπορεύον- 

22 ται, μοιχεῖαι, πορνεῖαι, φόνοι, ; κλοπαΐί, 
πλεονεξίαι, πονηρίαι, δόλος, ἀσέλγεια, 


23 ὀφθαλμὸς πονηρός, βλασφημία, ὑπερηφανία, ἀφροσύνη. Πάντα 
ταῦτα τὰ πονηρὰ ἔσωϑεν ἐχπορεύεται καὶ κοινοῖ TOY ἄγϑρωπον. 


§ 68. The daughter of a Syrophenician woman is healed.—Region of Tyre and Sidon. 


21 Kai ἐξελϑὼν ἐχεῖϑεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ave- 
, > ‘ , , ‘ ὲ 
χωώρησεν εἰς τὰ μέρη Τύρου καὶ Σὶ- 
22 δῶνος. Καὶ ἰδού, γυνὴ Χαναναία 
> A ~ ¢ , > ’ > ~ 
ἀπὸ τῶν ὁρίων ἐκείνων ἐξελϑοῦσα 
ἐχραύγασεν αὐτῷ λέγουσα" ἐλέησόν 
ει oh ς , 
μὲ, κύριξ, vie Aavid: ἡ ϑυγάτηρ μου 
23 κακῶς δαιμονίζεται. ὋὉ δὲ οὐκ ἀπε- 
κρίϑη αὐτῇ λόγον" καὶ προςελϑόντες 
« A > ~ 3 / | , 
οἱ μαϑηται αὐτοῦ ἠρώτων αὕτον λὲ- 
σ 
γοντες" ἀπόλυσον αὐτήν, ὅτι χράζει 
24 ὄπισϑεν ἡμῶν. ‘O δὲ ἀποκχριϑεὶς εἶἴ- 
πεν" οὐκ ἀπεστάλην εἰ μὴ εἰς τὰ 
πρόβατα τὰ ἀπολωλότα οἴκου *Ic- 
25 ραήλ. Ἢ δὲ ἐλϑοῦσα προςεχύνει 
pare , , , 
αὐτῷ λέγουσα" κύριε, Bonde μοι. 
26 ‘O δὲ ἀποχριϑεὶς εἶπεν" οὐκ ἔστι κα- 
Lov λαβεῖν τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέχνων καὶ 
27 βαλεῖν τοῖς κυναρίοις. “Ἢ δὲ εἶπε" 
yal, κύριε" καὶ γὰρ τὰ κυνάρια ἐσϑίει 
ἀπὸ τῶν ψιχίων τῶν πιπτόντων ἀπὸ 
τῆς τραπέζης τῶν κυρίων αὑτῶν. 
28 Tore ἀποχριϑεὶς ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς εἶπεν αὐὖ- 
τῇ ὦ γύναι, μεγάλη σου ἡ πίστις " 
γενηϑήτω σοι ὡς ϑέλεις. Καὶ ἰάϑη 
~ » A ~ 7 
ἡ θυγάτηρ αὐτῆς ἀπὸ τῆς ὥρας 
ἐχείνης. 


Marx VII. 24—30. 


24 Kai ἐχεῖϑεν ἀναστὰς ἀπῆλϑεν εἰς 
τὰ μεϑόρια Τύρου καὶ Σιδῶνος. καὶ 
εἰςξελϑὼν εἰς οἰκίαν οὐδένα ἤϑελδ 
γνῶναι" καὶ οὐκ ἠδυνήϑη λαϑεῖν. 

25 ᾿Ακούσασα γὰρ γυνὴ περὶ αὐτοῦ, ἧς 
εἶχε τὸ ϑυγάτριον αὐτῆς πνεῦμα ἀκά- 
ϑαρτον, ἐλϑοῦσα προςέπεσε πρὸς τοὺς 

26 πόδας αὐτοῦ. “Hy δὲ ἡ γυνὴ Ἑλληνίς, 
Συροφοινίκισσα τῷ γένει, καὶ ἠρώτα 
αὐτόν, ἵνα τὸ δαιμόνιον ἐχβάλῃ ἐκ 
τῆς ϑυγατρὸς αὑτῆς. 


27 Ὁ δὲ Ἴη- 


σοῦς εἶπεν αὐτῇ" ἄφες πρῶτον χορ- 
~ ‘4 , ᾧ » ‘ , 
τασϑῆναι TH τέχνα" OV γὰρ καλόν 
ἐστι λαβεῖν τὸν ἄρτον τῶν τέκνων καὶ 
28 βαλεῖν τοῖς κυναρίοις. Ἢ δὲ ἀπεχρί- 
On καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ" ναί, κύριε" καὶ 
γὰρ τὰ κυνάρια ὑποκάτω τῆς τραπέ- 
ζης ἐσθίει ἀπὸ τῶν ψιχίων τῶν παι- 
29 δίων. Καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῇ διὰ τοῦτον 
τὸν λόγον ὕπαγε" ἐξελήλυϑε τὸ δαι- 
30 μόνιον ἐκ τῆς ϑυγατρός σου. Καὶ 
ἀπελϑοῦσα εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὑτῆς εὗρε 
τὸ δαιμόνιον ἐξεληλυϑός, καὶ τὴν ϑυ- 
, , δι - ᾽ 
γατέρα βεβλημένην ἐπι τῆς κλίνης" 


aos ὦ πε δια 








δῇ 68, 69. ] UNTIL THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES. T7 





§ 69. A deafand dumb man healed ; also many others. Four thousand are fed.— 
The Decapolis. 


Marx VII. 31—37. VIII. 1—9. 
Καὶ πάλιν ἐξελϑὼν ἐκ τῶν ὁρίων 
~ % 
Τύρον καὶ Σιδῶνος ἦλϑε πρὸς τὴν 
ϑάλασσαν τῆς Γαλιλαίας ἀνὰ μέσον 
32 τῶν ὁρίων Δεκαπόλεως. Καὶ φέρου- 
; σιν αὐτῷ κωφὸν μογιλάλον, καὶ 
~ δι σ 5 - > ~ Ἁ - ‘ > , 
33 παρακαλοῦσιν αὑτὸν, wa ἐπιϑῇ αὐτῷ τὴν χεῖρα. Καὶ ἀπολαβόμενος 
Ἀπ᾿ ὦ > A ~ » 33 See ay” ‘ 4 ¢ ~ > A aS 
αὐτὸν ἀπὸ tov ὄχλου κατ ἰδίαν ἔβαλε τοὺς Saxtvdove αὑτοῦ εἰς τὰ ὦτα 
24 ? ~ 4 , 4 le τ , 3 a. 4 3 λέ > κ 3 
αὐτοῦ, καὶ πτύσας ἡψατο τῆς γλώσσης αὑτοῦ, ἱ καὶ ἀναβλέψας εἰς τὸν οὔ- 
4 > ’ A / > ~ > ᾽ ΄ 5 ’ A > , 
35 puvoy ἐστέναξε καὶ λέγει αὑτῷ ἐφφαϑά, ὁ ἔστι, διανοίχϑητι. Καὶ εὐϑέως 
διηνοίχϑησαν αὐτοῦ αἱ ἀκοαί, καὶ ἐλύϑη ὁ δεσμὸς τῆς γλώσσης αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐλάλει 
> » Α , 2C w Ψ ΓΟ oe σ ον Δ ee 
36 ὀρθῶς. Καὶ διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς, wa μήδενι εἰπῶσιν" ooov δὲ αὑτὸς αὑτοῖς 
» ~ , 4 5 ee owe , 
37 διεστέλλετο, μᾶλλον περισσότερον ἐκήρυσσον. Καὶ ὑπερπερισσῶς ἐξεπλήσσοντο, 
~ 4 ~ x 
λέγοντες " καλῶς πάντα πεποίηκε" καὶ τοὺς κωφοὺς ποιεῖ ἀκούειν καὶ τοὺς 


Marrn. XV. 29—38. 

29 Kai μεταβὰς ἐκεῖϑεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἦλ- 31 

ὃὲ παρὰ τὴν ϑάλασσαν τῆς ΓΓαλι- 

λαίας - καὶ ἀναβὰς sig τὸ ὄρος ἐκά- 
ϑητο ἐκεῖ. 


ἀλάλους λαλεῖν. 
MATTH. Xv. 


30 Καὶ προςῆλϑον αὐτῷ ὄχλοι πολλοὶ ἔχοντες pe® ἑαυτῶν χωλούς, τυφλούς, 
κωφούς, κυλλούς, καὶ ἑτέρους πολλούς, καὶ ἔῤῥιψαν αὐτοὺς παρὰ τοὺς πόδας 
»Ἥ) ~ x 2 , > , 7? ‘ » ᾽ὔ ’ 
31 τοῦ Ἰησοῦ" καὶ ἐθεράπευσεν αὑτοῦς, " ὥςτε τοὺς oxhovg ϑαυμᾶσαι βλέποντας 
κωφοὺς λαλοῦντας, κυλλοὺς ὑγιεῖς, χωλοὺς περιπατοῦντας, καὶ τυφλοὺς βλέπον- 
‘367 sy + 9 , 3 
τας καὶ ἐδόξασαν τὸν ϑεὸν ᾿Ισραήλ. 
MARK VIII. 

> Bly, ww) bie) 2 , ᾿ ” Velie, Ὁ Wer, , 
1 Εν ἐχείγαις ταῖς ἡμέραις, παμπολλου ὄχλου οντος καὶ μὴ ἐχοντῶν τί 
φάγωσι, προςχκαλεσάμεγος [ὁ Ἶ]η- 
σοῦς] τοὺς μαϑητὰς αὑτοῦ λέγει αὖ- 
2 τοῖς " σπλαγχνίζομαι ἐπὶ τὸν ὄχλον, ὅτι 
ἤδη ἡμέραι τρεῖς προςμένουσί ot, 
8 χαὶ οὐκ ἔχουσι τί φάγωσι. Καὶ ἐὰν 
ἀπολύσω αὐτοὺς νήστεις εἰς οἶχον 
ς ~ > ’ 3 ~ t ~ 
αὐτῶν, ἐχλυϑήσονται sy τῇ ὁδῷ" 
τινὲς γὰρ αὐτῶν μακρόϑεν ἥκουσι. 
4 Καὶ ἀπεχρίϑησαν αὐτῷ οἱ μαϑηταὶ 
αὐτοῦ: πόϑεν τούτους δυνήσεταί 


MATTH. XV. 

32 Ὁ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς προςκαλεσάμενος τοὺς 
μαϑητὰς αὑτοῦ eine’ σπλαγχνίζομαι 
ἐπὶ τὸν ὄχλον, ὅτι ἤδη ἡμέραι τρεῖς 
προςμένουσί μοι, καὶ οὐκ ἔχουσι τί 
φάγωσι " καὶ ἀπολῦσαι αὐτοὺς νήστεις 

οὐ ϑέλω, μήποτε ἐκλυϑῶσιν ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ. 

33 Καὶ λέγουσιν αὐτῷ οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐ- 
χοῦ" πόϑεν ἡμῖν ἐν ἐρημίᾳ ἄρτοι 
τοσοῦτοι, ὥςτε χορτάσαι ὄχλον το- 


34 σοῦτον ; Καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς" 
, + " ς +e} A 
πόσους ἄρτους ἔχετε; οἱ δὲ εἶπον 
‘ 

35 ἑπτά, καὶ ὀλίγα ἰχϑύδια. Καὶ ἐκέλευσε 
τοῖς ὄχλοις ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν. 

‘ »» 
36 Καὶ λαβὼν τοὺς ἑπτὰ ἄρτους καὶ τοὺς 
ἰχϑύας εὐχαριστήσας ἔχλασε καὶ 
ἔδωκε τοῖς μαϑηταῖς αὑτοῦ, οἱ δὲ 


τ , »» s 3 49 , 
zig ὧδε χορτάσαι ἄρτων ἐπὶ ἐρημίας ; 

4 3 , 3 ᾽ , a” 
5 Καὶ ἐπηρώτα αὑτοὺς" πόσους ἔχετε 
+ € A ς , ‘ 
6 ἄρτους ; ot δὲ εἶπον" ἑπτά. Kos 
παρήγγειλε τῷ ὄχλῳ ἀναπεσεῖν ἐπὶ 
τῆς yng’ καὶ λαβὼν τοὺς ἑπτὰ ἄρ- 
τους εὐχαριστήσας ἔκλασε καὶ ἐδίδου 
τοῖς μαϑηταῖς αὑτοῦ, ἵνα παραϑῦὥσι" 


78 FROM OUR LORD’S 


THIRD PASSOVER 





MATTH. XV. 

387 μαϑηταὶ τῷ ὄχλῳ. Καὶ ἔφαγον 
πάντες καὶ ἐχορτάσϑησαν᾽ καὶ ἦραν 
τὸ περισσεῦον τῶν κλασμάτων, ἑπτὰ 

38 σπυρίδας πλήρεις. Οἱ δὲ ἐσθίοντες 
ἦσαν τετρακιρχίλιο ἄνδρες χωρὶς 
γυναικῶν καὶ παιδίων. 


MARK VIII. 
7 καὶ παρέϑηκαν τῷ ὄχλῳ. Καὶ εἶχον 
ἰχϑύδια ὀλίγα" καὶ εὐλογήσας εἶπε 
8 παραϑεῖναι xai αὐτά. Ἔφαγον δὲ 
καὶ ἐχορτάσϑησαν᾽ καὶ ἦραν περισ- 
᾿σεύματα κλασμάτων, ἑπτὰ σπυρίδας. 
Θ᾽ "Hoa δὲ οἱ φαγόντες ὡς τετρακις- 
χίλιοι. καὶ ἀπέλυσεν αὐτούς. — 


§ 70. The Pharisees and Sadducees again require a sign. [See § 49.]—Near 
Magdala. 


Marra. XV. 39. XVI. 1—4. 
9. = Kai ἀπολύσας τοὺς ὄχλους ἐνέβη 
3 A ~ 4, 5 3 ἊΝ 
εἰς τὸ πλοῖον καὶ ἤλϑεν εἰς τὰ ὁρια 
Μαγδαλα. 
XVI.1 Καὶ προςελϑόντες οἱ Φαρι- 
~ 4 ~ , 
σαῖοι καὶ «Σαδδουκαῖοι πειράζοντες 
. ἐπηρώτησαν αὐτόν, σημεῖον ἐκ 'τοῦ 
3 οὐρανοῦ ἐπιδεῖξαι αὐτοῖς. ‘O δὲ 
ἀποχριϑεὶς εἶπεν ὀψίας 
γενομένης λέγετε" 


αὐτοῖς" 


Marx VIII. 10—12. 

10 Καὶ εὐθέως ἐμβὰς εἰς τὸ πλοῖον 
μετὰ τῶν μαϑητῶν αὑτοῦ ἦλϑεν εἰς 
τὰ μέρη Δαλμανουϑά. 

1. = Kai ἐξῆλϑον οἱ Φαρισαῖοι καὶ ἤρ- 
Earto συζητεῖν αὐτῷ, ζητοῦντες nag 
αὐτοῦ σημεῖον ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ, 
πειράζοντες αὐτόν. 


εὐδία, πυῤῥάζει γὰρ ὁ οὐρανὸς " 


3 ! ‘ mi , , sc? ‘ , € 
καὶ πρωΐ" σήμερον χειμών, πυῤῥάζει yao. στυγνάζων ὁ 
οὐρανός. ὑποχριταί, τὸ μὲν πρόφωπον τοῦ οὐρανοῦ 


γινώσκετε διακρίνειν, τὰ δὲ σημεῖα 
4 τῶν καιρῶν οὐ δύνασϑε; ΓΓνεὰ 
πονηρὰ καὶ μοιχαλὶς σημεῖον ἐπιζητεῖ" 
καὶ σημεῖον οὐ δοϑήσεται αὐτῇ, εἰ μὴ 
τὸ σημεῖον ᾿Ιωνᾶ τοῦ προφήτου.--- 


12 Καὶ ἀναστενάξας τῷ 
πνεύματι αὑτοῦ λέγει" τί ἡ γενεὰ av- 
τῇ σημεῖον ἐπιζητεῖ; ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, 
εἰ δοϑήσεται τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ σημεῖον. 


§ 71. The Disciples cautioned against the leaven of the Pharisees, ete.—N. E. coast 
of the Lake of Galilee.’ 


Matra. XVI. 4—12. 
4 —Kai καταλιπὼν αὐτοὺς ἀπῆλϑε. 


5 Καὶ ἐλϑόντες οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐ- 
τοῦ εἰς τὸ πέραν ἐπελάϑοντο ἄρ- 
6 τοὺς λαβεῖν. “Ὁ δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς εἶπεν 
αὐτοῖς " ὁρᾶτε καὶ προςφέχετε ἀπὸ 
τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ 
7 Σαδδουκαίων. Οἱ δὲ διελογίζοντο 
ἐν ἑαυτοῖς λέγοντες" ὅτι ἄρτους οὐχ 
8 ἐλάβομεν. Γνοὺς δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν 
[avroig)* τί διαλογίζεσϑε ἐν ἑαυτοῖς, 


Marx VIII, 13—21. 

13 Καὶ ἀφεὶς αὐτοὺς ἐμβὰς πάλιν εἰς 
τὸ πλοῖον ἀπῆλϑεν εἰς τὸ πέραν. 

14 Καὶ ἐπελάϑοντο λαβεῖν ἄρτους, 
καὶ εἰ μὴ ἕνα ἄρτον οὐκ εἶχον ped? 

15 ἑαυτῶν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ. Καὶ διεστέλ- 
Leto αὐτοῖς λέγων" ὁρᾶτε, βλέπετε 
ἀπὸ τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ 

16 τῆς ζύμης “Πρώδου. Καὶ διελογί- 
ζοντο πρὸς ἀλλήλους λέγοντες" ὅ- 

17 τι ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχομεν. Καὶ γνοὺς 
ὁ ᾿]Ιησοῦς λέγει αὐτοῖς" τί διαλο- 


[Part V. 


ma ΘΘΘΘΘΘΒΒΙ55. 


Moto ws s. . 





Ὁ 


δὲ 70,71, 72,73.] UNTIL THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES. 79 





MATTH. XVI. MARK VIII. 


γίζεσϑε, ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ ἔχετε; Οὔ- 
m0 νοεῖτε, οὐδὲ συνίετε ; ἔτι πεπω- 
18 ρωμένην ἔχετε τὴν καρδίαν ὑμῶν ; ᾿Οφϑαλμοὺς ἔχοντες οὐ 
βλέπετε ; καὶ ὦτα ἔχοντες οὐκ ἀκούετε; καὶ οὐ μνημονεύετε ; 

19 Ὅτε τοὺς πέντε ἄρτους ἔκλασα εἰς 
τοις πεντακιςχιλίους,πόσους κοφίνους 
πλήρεις κλασμάτων ἥρατε; λέγουσιν 

20 αὐτῷ δώδεκα. “Ore δὲ τοὺς ἑπτὰ 
εἰς τοὺς τετρακιοχιλίους, πόσων σπυ- 
ρίδων πληρώματα κλασμάτων ἤρατε; 

21 οἱ δὲ εἶπον" ἑπτά. Καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς " 


᾽ , Ψ 
ὀλιγόπιστοι, ὅτι ἄρτους οὐκ ἐλάβετε ; 
x δὲ: τὰ ; 
9 Οὔπω νοεῖτε ; 


οὐδὲ μνημονεύετε τοὺς 

πέντε ἄρτους τῶν πεντακιςχιλίων, καὶ 

10 πόσους κοφίνους ἐλάβετε ; οὐδὲ τοὺς 
ἑπτὰ ἄρτους τῶν τετρακιρχιλίων, 
11 καὶ πόσας σπυρίδας ἐλάβετε; Πῶς 
οὐ νοεῖτε, ὅτι οὐ περὶ ἄρτου εἶπον 
ὑμῖν, προςέχειν ἀπὸ τῆς ζύμης τῶν 
12 Φαρισαίων καὶ Σαδδουκαίων; Τότε 
συνῆκαν, ὅτι οὐκ εἶπε προςέχειν ἀπὸ τῆς ζύμης τοῦ ἄρτου, 
ἀλλ ἀπὸ τῆς διδαχῆς τῶν Φαρισαίων καὶ Σαδδουκαίων. 


πῶς οὐ συνίετξ ; 


§ 72. A blind man healed.—Bethsaida (Julias). 


Marx VIII. 22—26, 
22 Kou ἔρχεται εἰς Βηϑσαϊδάν, καὶ φέρουσιν αὐτῷ τυφλόν, καὶ παρακαλοῦσιν 
23 αὐτόν, ἵνα αὐτοῦ ἅψηται. Καὶ ἐπιλαβόμενος τῆς χειρὸς τοῦ τυφλοῦ ἐξήγαγεν 
~ A ~ ~ 
αὐτὸν ἔξω τῆς nouns’ καὶ πεύσας εἰς τὰ ὄμματα αὐτοῦ, ἐπιϑεὶς τὰς χεῖρας 
24 αὐτῷ, ἐπηρώτα αὐτόν, εἴ τι βλέπει. Καὶ ἀναβλέψας ἔλεγξε᾽ βλέπω τοὺς ἀνϑρώ- 
25 move ὡς δένδρα περιπατοῦντας. Εἶτα πάλιν ἐπέϑηκε τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τοὺς 
3 \ 3 ~ \ 3 ’ ιν 3 , > F,. ? x 
ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐποίησεν αὐτὸν ἀναβλέψαι" καὶ ἀποκατεστάϑη, καὶ 
ἣ 9. ὃν ~ σ A ᾿] , -΄, % > > ~ , 
26 ἐνέβλεψε τηλαυγῶς ἅπαντας. Καὶ ἀπέστειλεν αὐτὸν εἰς οἶκον αὐτοῦ λέγων" 
Ἁ 3 A , "Δ A a 3 ~ ? 
pds εἰς τὴν κῶωμὴν εἰςέλϑῃς, μηδὲ εἴπῃς TIL ἕν τῇ κωμῇ: 


§ 73. Peter and the rest again profess their faith in Christ. [See § 66. |— Region of 
Cesarea Philippi. 





14 


Marra. XVI. 13—20. 


᾿Ἐλϑὼν δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς 27 


3 A , , 
είς τὰ μέρη Καισαρείας 
~ ’ 3 ; 
ζῆς Φιλίππου yowra 

A A ς ~ , 
τοὺς MAONTAS: αὑτοῦ λὲ- 
γῶν" τίνα μὲ λέγουσιν 

δ. δα 4 
οἱ ἄνθρωποι εἶναι, τὸν 
υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου; 
Οἱ δὲ 
εἶπον" οἱ μὲν ᾿Ιωάννην 
A 
τὸν Bantioryy: ἄλλοι 
δέ, ᾿Ηλίαν" ἕτεροι δέ, 


Marx VIII. 27—30. 


Kai ἐξῆλϑεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς 18 


κ « 4 > ~ 3 
καὶ OL μωϑηται αὑτοῦ εἰς 

\ 
τὰς κώμας Καισαρείας 

sag 7 \ 3 ~ 
τῆς Φιλίππου" καὶ ἕν τῇ 
ὁδῷ ἐπηρώτα τοὺς μα- 
ϑητὰς αὑτοῦ, λέγων av- 
τοῖς" τίνα me λέγουσιν οἱ 


28 ἄγϑρωποι εἶναι ; Οἱ δὲ 


> / 3 , 
ἀπεκρίϑησαν" Iouvenv 
A ’ ιν 
τὸν βαπτιστῆν' καὶ ἄλλοι 
Ἠλίαν" ἄλλοι δέ, ἕνα 


Καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ 
εἶναι αὐτὸν προςευχό- 
μένον χαταμύόνας, συν- 
ἤδαν αὐτῷ οἱ μαϑη- 
ταί. καὶ ἐπηρώτησεν 
αὐτοὺς λέγων" τίνα μὲ 
λέγουσιν οἱ ὄχλοι εἶναι; 
Οἱ δὲ ἀποκριϑέντες εἶ- 

> , 4 
πον" ᾿Ιωᾶννην tov βαπ- 
τιστήν᾽ ἄλλοι δέ, Ἠλίαν" 
A Ἔν . , 
ἄλλοι ds, ott προφήτης 


80 


FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER 


[Part V. 


‘ 





MATTH. XVI. 


MARK VIII. 


“Ιερεμίαν ἢ ἕνα τῶν προ- 27a» προφητῶν. Καὶ 


16 φητῶν. Agya αὐτοῖς " 
ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνα μὲ λέγετε 
16 εἶναι ; ᾿“΄ποχριϑεὶς δὲ 
Σίμων Πέτρος sine’ σὺ 
εἶ ὁ Χριστός, ὁ υἱὸς 
τοῦ ϑεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος. 


“. ἊΝ 7 ? ~ 
αὑτὸς λέγει αὐτοῖς" 
ς ~ \ , , 
ὑμεῖς δὲ τα μὲ λέ- 
yete εἶναι; ἀποχριϑεὶς 
δὲ ὁ Πέτρος λέγει αὐ- 
τῷ" σὺ εἶ 6 Χριστός. 


LUKE IX. 


τις τῶν ἀρχαίων ἀνέστη. 


20 Εἶπε δὲ αὐτοῖς " ὑμεῖς 


δὲ τίνα μὲ λέγετε εἶ- 

> ‘ = 
yar; ἀποκχριϑεις δὲ ὃ 
Πέτρος εἶπε" τὸν Χρι- 
στὸν τοῦ ϑεοῦ. 


17 Καὶ ἀποκριϑεὶς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτῷ" μακάριος εἶ, Σίμων 
A > ~ 4 ‘ A a > 3 , ᾿ > > ὁ 
Bag “Love ὅτι σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα οὐκ ἀπεκάλυψέ σοι, add ὃ 
18 πατήρ pov ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς. Κἀγὼ δέ σοι λέγω, 
σ ‘ “- ; ‘ > 4 ? ~ , > , 
ὅτι ov εἶ Πέτρος, καὶ ἐπὶ ταύτῃ τῇ πέτρᾳ οἰκοδομήσω 
μου τὴν ἐκκλησίαν, καὶ πύλαι ἅδου οὐ κατισχύσουσιν 
19 αὐτῆς. Καὶ δώσω oor τὰς κλεῖς τῆς βασιλείας τῶν οὐ- 
ρανῶν" καὶ ὃ ἐὰν δήσῃς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, ἔσται δεδεμένον 
5 ~ > ~ A a 3A , ’, 4 ~ ~ ” 
ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς " καὶ ὃ ἕὰν λύσῃς ἐπι τῆς γῆς, ἔσται de- 


~ > 
λυμένον ἐν τοῖς οὐρα- 


20 voig. Tore διεστείλατο 30 Καὶ ἐπετίμησεν αὐτοῖς, 21 Ὃ δὲ ἐπιτιμήσας αὐτοῖς 


~ ~ ¢e ~ 
τοῖς μαϑηταῖς avtov, 
σ ‘ a” σ΄ 
iva μήδενι εἰπῶώσιν, OTL 
αὐτός ἐστιν ὁ Χριστός. 


σ Α 7 4 
wa μηδενὶ λέγωσι περι 
αὐτοῦ. 


παρήγγειλε μηδενὶ λέγειν 
τοῦτο" 


δ 74, Our Lord foretells his own death and resurrection, and the trials of his followers. 
—Region of Cesarea Philippi. 


Matta. XVI. 21—28. 


21 
᾿Ιησοῦς δεικνύειν τοῖς 
μαϑηταῖς αὑτοῦ, ὅτι 
δεῖ αὐτὸν ἀπελϑεῖν εἰς 
“Ἱεροσόλυμα καὶ πολλὰ 
παϑεῖν ἀπὸ τῶν πρεσ- 
βυτέρων καὶ ἀρχιερέων 
καὶ γραμματέων καὶ ἀπο- 
κτανϑῆναι καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ 


"And τότε ἤρξατο ὁ 31 


Mark VIII. 31—38. 


Καὶ ἤρξατο διδάσκειν 
αὐτούς, ὅτι δεῖ τὸν υἱὸν 
τοῦ ἀνθρώπου πολλὰ 
παϑεῖν καὶ ἀποδοκιμα- 
σϑῆναι ἀπὸ τῶν πρεσ- 
βυτέρων καὶ τῶν ἀρ- 
χιερέων καὶ τῶν γραμ- 
ματέων καὶ ἀποκτανϑῆ- 
VOL καὶ μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέ- 


2 


9 


~ 


Luxe IX. 22—27. 

Εἰπών" ὅτι δεῖ τὸν 
υἱὸν τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 
'πολλὰ παϑεῖν καὶ ἀπο- 
δοκιμασϑῆναι ἀπὸ τῶν 
πρεσβυτέρων καὶ ἀρ- 
χιερέων καὶ γραμματέων 
καὶ ἀποκτανϑῆναι καὶ τῇ 
τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἐγερϑῆναι. 


22 ἡμέρᾳ ἐγερϑῆναι. Καὶ 32 gag ἀναστῆναι" ', καὶ παῤῥησίᾳ τὸν λόγον ἐλά- 
λει. Καὶ προςλαβόμενος αὐτὸν 6 


προςλαβόμενος αὐτὸν 6 


Πέτρος ἤρξατο ἐπιτιμᾶν αὐτῷ λέγων" 
ἵλδώς σοι, κύριε, οὐ μὴ ἔσται σοι 
c ‘ 4 ~ 
O δὲ στραφεὶς eine τῷ 
Πέτρῳ᾽ ὕπαγε ὀπίσω μου, σατανᾶ᾽ 
σχάνδαλόν μου εἶ, ὅτι οὐ φρονεῖς 
τὰ τοῦ ϑεοῦ, ἀλλὰ τὰ τῶν ἀνϑρώ- 84 τῶν ἀνθρώπων. 


23 χοῦτο. 


MOV. 


Πέτρος ἤρξατο 
88 “Ὃ δὲ ἐπιστραφεὶς καὶ ἰδὼν τοὺς 
μαϑητὰς αὑτοῦ ἐπετίμησε τῷ Πέτρῳ 
λέγων" ὕπαγε ὀπίδω μου, σατανᾶ, 
ὅτι οὐ φρονεῖς τὰ τοῦ ϑεοῦ, ἀλλὰ τὰ 


ἐπιτιμᾶν αὐτῷ. 


Καὶ προφκαλεσά- 


μενος τὸν ὄχλον σὺν τοῖς μαθηταῖς av- 





© 





§ 74,75 UNTIL THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES. Sl 
MATTH XVI. MARK VIII. LUKE ΙΧ. 
24 Τότε ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ei- τοῦ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς" ὅςτις 28 Ἔλεγε δὲ πρὸς πάντας" 


25 


26 


27 


me τοῖς μαϑηταῖς αὖ- 
ἣν mn , > , 
τοῦ" εἰ τις Fede ὀπίσω 
ΡΝ inh ἘΡ 
μου  ἐλϑεῖν, ἀἁπαρνη- 
, ε , 4A > 
σασϑω savior, καὶ ἃ- 


, A Α 
᾿ράτω τὸν σταυρὸν αὖ- 


- 4 5 ’ 
του καὶ ἀκολουϑείτο 
a 
μοι. Ὃς γὰρ ἄν ϑέλῃ 
τὴν ψυχὴν᾽ αὑτοῦ σῶ- 
σαι, ἀπολέσει 
α > nv > , ‘ 
os δ ἂν ἀπολέσῃ τὴν 
4 « ~- ὦ 5 
ψυχὴν αὑτοῦ ἕνεκεν ἐ- 
μοῦ, εὑρήσει αὐτήν. 
Τί γὰρ ὠφελεῖται ἄνγ- 
ϑρωπος, ἐὰν τὸν χό- 
σ , ‘ 
μον ohov κερδήσῃ, THY 
δὲ ψυχὴν αὑτοῦ ζημιω- 
θῇ; ἢ τί δώσει ἄνϑρω- 
πος ἀντάλλαγμα τῆς 
ψυχὴς αὑτοῦ; Μέλλει 


>’ ; 
αὑτὴν. 


γὰρ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνϑρώ- 
που ἔρχεσϑαι ἐν τῇ δόξῃ 
τοῦ πατρὸς αὑτοῦ μετὰ 
τῶν ἀγγέλων αὑτοῦ, καὶ 
rote ἀποδώσει ἑχάστῳ 
κατὰ τὴν πρᾶξιν αὐτοῦ. 


35 


36 Ti γὰρ ὠφελήσει ἄν- 25 


᾿αὑτοῦ 


ϑέλει ὀπίσω μου ἐλϑεῖν, 
ἀπαρνησάσϑω ἑαυτόν, 
Α . 
καὶ ἀράτω τὸν σταῦυ- 
\ ~ , 
Qov αὑτοῦ χαὶ ἀκο- 
λουϑείτω μοι. “Og γὰρ 
a 
ἂν ϑέλῃ 
~ > , 
σῶσαι, ἀπολε- 
3 , a > xv 
cee αὑτὴν" o¢ δ᾽ ἂν 
> , A A 
ἀπολέσῃ τὴν ψυχὴν 
~ ~- A 
αὑτοῦ ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ καὶ 
~ > , ι 4 
τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, [οὐ- 
tos] σώσει αὐτήν. 
3A ’ 
ϑρώπον, ἐὰν κερδήσῃ 
4 , σ Α 
τὸν χόσμον ohov καὶ 
- A 4 
ζημιωϑῇ τὴν ψυχὴν 


37 αὑτοῦ ; ἢ τί δώσει ἄν- 


ϑρωπος ἀντάλλαγμα 


τὴν ψυχὴν 24 


εἴ τις ϑέλει ὀπίσω μου 
ἐλϑεῖν, ἀπαρνησάσϑω 
ἑαυτόν, καὶ ἀράτω τὸν 
σταυρὸν αὑτοῦ “ad 
ἡμέραν καὶ ἀκολου- 
ϑείτω μοι. Ὃς γὰρ ἄν 
ϑέλῃ τὴν ψυχὴν αὑτοῦ 
σῶσαι, ἀπολέσει αὐτήν" 


ὃς δ᾽ ἂν ἀπολέσῃ τὴν 


‘ € ~ a 
ψυχὴν αὑτοῦ ἕνεκεν 
~ τ ᾿ 
ἐμοῦ, οὗτος σώσει αὐτήν. 


Τί γὰρ ὠφελεῖται ἄν- 
ϑρώπος κερδήσας τὸν 

, σ Ne \ 4 
κοσμον ὁλον, δαυτὸν δὲ 
ἀπολέσας ἢ ζημιωϑείς ; 


38 τῆς ψυχῆς αὑτοῦ; “Og 26 Ὃς γὰρ ἂν ἐπαισχυνϑῇ 


A xv > - 
γὰρ ἂν ἑπαισχυνϑῇ μὲ 
‘ A 
καὶ τοὺς ἐμοὺς λόγους 
.] ~ ~ , ~ 
ἐν τῇ γενεᾷ ταύτῃ τῇ 
4 ¢ 
μοιχαλίδι καὶ ἁμαρ- 
τωλῷ, καὶ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ 
3 , 5 , 
ἀνϑρώπου ἐπαισχυνϑη- 
[χὰ 
σεται αὐτόν, οτανὶ ἔλ- 


μ8 καὶ τοὺς ἐμοὺς λό- 
γους,τοὐτονδυϊὸς τοῦ ἀν- 
ϑρώπου ἐπαισχυνϑήσε- 
ται, ὅταν ἔλϑῃ ἐν τῇ δόξῃ 
αὑτοῦ καὶ τοῦ πατρὸς 
καὶ τῶν ἁγίων ἀγγέλων. 


On ἐν τῇ δόξῃ τοῦ πατρὸς αὑτοῦ μετὰ τῶν ἀγγέλων τῶν 


[{Χ.1 ἁγίων. 


28 ᾿“μὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, εἰσί 


~ 4 ε , 
σινες τῶν WOE ἑστώτων, 


| οἴτιψες οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται 


: A ». 
ϑανάτου, ἕως ἂν ἰδωσι 
‘ ca) — 2 , 
τὸν (vioy Tov ἀγϑρώπου 
ἐρχόμενον; ἐν τῇ βασι- 


λείᾳ αὑτοῦ. 


Καὶ ἔλεγεν 


αὐτοῖς " ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, 27 Adyoo δὲ ὑμῖν ἀληθῶς, 


σ ¢ ἃ - τ 
OTL εἰσὶ τινὲς τῶν ὧδε 
ἑστηκότων, οἵτινες οὐ μὴ 
γεύσωνται ϑαγάτου, ἕως 
a“ » 4 , 
ἂν ἰδωσι τὴν βασιλείαν 
τοῦ ϑεοῦ ἐληλυϑυῖαν ἐν 
δυγάμει. 


εἰσίτιγες τῶν ὧδε ἑστώ- 
των, οἱ οὐ μὴ γεύσωνται 
ϑανάτου, ἕως ἂν ἰδωσι 
τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ ϑεοῦ. 


§ 75. The Transfiguration. Our Lord’s subsequent discourse with the three Disciples. 


1 


—Region of Cesarea Philippi. 


Marrs. XVII. 1—13. 


Mark ΙΧ. 2—13. 


A 


Luxe IX. 28—36. 


Kai μεϑ' ἡμέρας ἕξ 2 Kai μεϑ' ἡμέρας ἕξ 28 ᾿Ἐγένετο δὲ μετὰ τοὺς 


παραλαμβάνει ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς 


παραλαμβάνει ὁ Ιησοῦς 
11 


. λόγους τούτους, ὡςεὶ 


82 


FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER 


* 


[Parr V. 





MATTH. XVII. 

τὸν Πέτρον καὶ ᾿Ιάκω- 
A > , A 

Bor καὶ ᾿Ιωάνγην τὸν 
3 A > ~ δι. 

ἄδελφον αὑτοῦ, καὶ ἀν- 

> 4 

ἀφέρει αὑτοὺς εἰς OOS 

‘ 

2 ὑψηλὸν κατ᾿ ἰδίαν. Καὶ 

μετεμορφώϑη ἔμπρο- 


MARK IX. 
4 A 
τὸν Πέτρον καὶ τὸν ᾽1ά- 


N93 , ‘ 
κωβον καὶ Loarrnr, καὶ. 


> >. ἢ > ~ > » 
ἀναφέρει αὐτοῦς εἰς ὅ- 
ρος ὑψηλὸν κατ᾽ ἰδίαν 
μόνους" καὶ μετεμορ- 

~ »” r > 
φωϑὴ ἕμπροσϑεν av- 


- 4 ~ ‘4 Α 
oder αὐτῶν, καὶ ἔλαμψε 3 τῶν, ' καὶ τὰ ἱμάτια 


τὸ πρόφωπον αὐτοῦ ὡς 
e σ A A < , 
ὃ ἥλιος, ta δὲ ἱμάτια 
αὐτοῦ ἐγένετο λευκὰ ὡς 
8 τὸ φῶς. Καὶ ἰδού, ag- 
ϑησαν αὐτοῖς Μωῦοῆς 
A 3 , > > ~ 
καὶ Hhiacs, wet αὑτοῦ 
συλλαλοῦντες. 


4 


> ~ 35. 2 , 

αὑτοῦ ἐγένετο στίλβον- 
4 “δ, e , 
τα, λευκὰ λίαν ὡς χιών, 
οἷα γναφεὺς ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 
οὐ δύναται λευκᾶναι. 
Καὶ ὥφϑη αὐτοῖς Ἦ- 
λίας σὺν Μωῦσεῖ: καὶ 
τ - - 
ἤσαν συλλαλοῦντες τῷ 
Ἰησοῦ. 


LUKE Ix. 
€ > , 4 
ἡμέραι ὀκτώ, καὶ παρα- 
λαβὼν Πέτρον καὶ Ἰω- 
7 Noy? 5 7, 
ἄννην καὶ ]άκωβον ave- 

bd δι 

βη εἰς τὸ ὄρος προςεύ- 


29 ξασϑαι. Καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν 


τῷ προςεύχεσϑαι αὐτὸν 
τὸ εἶδος τοῦ προςώπου 
αὐτοῦ ἕτερον, καὶ ὁ ἱμα- 
τισμὸς αὐτοῦ λευχὸς 


30 ἐξαστράπτω»ν». Καὶ ἰδού, 


+ 

ἄνδρες δύο συνελάλουν 
> 7, a tT - 

αὑτῷ, οἵτινες ἦσαν Mav- 


31 σῆς καὶ Ἠλίας, "' οἱ dg- 
᾿ϑέντες ἐν δόξῃ ἔλεγον 


τὴν ἔξοδον αὐτοῦ, ἣν 
ἔμελλε πληροῦν ἐνἹερου- 


ς 32 σαλήμ. ὋὉ δὲ Πέτρος καὶ οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ ἦσαν βεβαρημένοι ὕπνῳ. διαγρη- 
γορήσαντες .08 ἰεῖδον τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ καὶ τοὺς δύο ἄνδρας τοὺς συνε- 


4 ᾿“ποχριϑεὶς δὲ ὁ Πέ. 5 Καὶ ᾿ἀποχριϑεὶς 6 Πέ- 


eg “43. ~ 
τρος εἶπε τῷ Ἰησου" 
κύριε, καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς 
i 
ὧδε εἶναι" εἰ Θέλεις, 
τ ~ 
ποιήσωμεν ὧδε τρεῖς 
, A ‘ 
σχηγάς, σοὶ μίαν καὶ 
° -“— ~ ‘ 
Moaivoy μίαν καὶ μίαν 
ὅ ᾿Ηλίᾳ. Ἔτι αὐτοῦ λα- 
λοῦντος, ἰδού, νεφέλη 
φωτεινὴ ἐπεσκίασεν αὖ- 
, 495 ’ A SS 
τοὺς" καὶ ἰδοὺ, φωνὴ ἐκ 
τῆς νεφέλης λέγουσα "" 
οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ υἱός μου 
¢ > , > τ 59 ἢ 
ὁ ἀγαπητὸς, ἕν @ evdo- 
πησα" αὐτοῦ ἀκούετε. 
6 Καὶ ἀκούσαντες οἱ μα- 
om” δ: ἃ / 
Ontos ἔπεσον ἐπι πρὸς- 
~ ‘ 
wmov αὑτῶν καὶ ἐφοβή- 
, ‘ 
7 ϑησαν σφόδρα. Και 
~ ΄ > ~ 
προφελϑῶν ὁ  Inoovs 


συ» 


᾿[λέγουσα7"" οὗτός ἐστιν. 


σρος λέγει τῷ ᾿Ϊησοῦ" 
ῥαββί, καλόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς 
ὧδε εἶναι" καὶ ποιήσω- 
μὲν σχηγὰς τρεῖς, σοὶ 
μίαν καὶ Μοωῦσεῖ μίαν 
καὶ Ἠλίᾳ μίαν. Οὐ γὰρ 
4 , , x 
ἤδει τί λαλήσῃ" ἤσαν 
‘ ” WO Pe 
γὰρ ἔκφοβοι. Καὶ ἐγέ- 
veto νεφέλη ἐπισκιάζου- 
> ~ ‘ με 
σα αὑτοῖς" καὶ yrds 
φωνὴ ἐκ τῆς νεφέλης 


ς «ὔ ¢ Φ ’ 
ὁ υἱός μου ὃ ἀγαπητός" 
3 “ 3 ’ ‘ 
avtov ἀκούετε. Kou 
ἐξάπινα περιβλεψάμενοι 
οὐκέτι οὐδένα εἶδον, ἀλ- 
λὰ τὸν ᾿]ησοῦν μόνον 
pe? ἑαυτῶν. 


33 στῶτας αὐτῷ. Καὶ ἐγέ- 


5 ~ 
veto & τῷ διαχωρίζε- 
> A >> 3 > ~ 
σϑαι αὑτοὺς ἀπ αὑτοῦ, 
Ξε , 4 \ 
εἶπεν ὁ Πέτρος πρὸς τὸν 
᾿]ησοῦν" ἐπιστάτα, κα- 
F< 142 ~ Ὁ 
λόν ἐστιν ἡμᾶς ὧδε εἶ- 
A 
γαι" καὶ ποιήσωμεν σχη- 
‘ ~ 4 
γὰς τρεῖς, μίαν σοὶ καὶ 
, - ~ A , 
μίαν Movoei, καὶ μίαν 
A A a . 
“Ahig, μὴ εἰδὼς ὃ λέγει. 


84 Ταῦτα δὲ αὐτοῦ λέ- 


γοντος ἐγένετο νεφέλη 
καὶ ἐπεσκίασεν αὐτούς" 
ἐφοβήϑησαν δὲ ἐν τῷ 
> , > ~ > 
ἐκείνους eigehdsiy εἰς 


35 τὴν νεφέλην. Καὶ φω- 


wh ἐγένετο ἐκ τῆς νεφέ- 
Ang λέγουσα" " οὗτός 
ἐστιν ὁ υἱός μου ὁ ἀγα- 
πητός" αὐτοῦ ἀκούετε. 
Καὶ ἐν τῷ γενέσϑαι τὴν 


ἥψατο αὐτῶν καὶ εἶπεν" ἐγέρϑητε 36 φωνὴν εὑρέϑη ὁ ᾿Ἰησοῦς μόνος. Καὶ 


8 καὶ μὴ φοβεῖσϑε. ᾿Επάραντες δὲ 


> ee By: ‘ , ‘ > , 
αὕτοι ἐσίγησαν καὶ ovdert annyyet- 








* 5 οἷο, Comp. 1 Pet. 1, 17. 


§§ 75, 16. 


UNTIL THE FESTIVAL 


83 


OF TABERNACLES, 





MATTH. XVII. 
τοὺς ὀφϑαλμοὺς αὑτῶν οὐδένα éi- 
δον, εἰ μὴ τὸν ᾿]ησοῦν μόνον. 

9 Καὶ καταβαινόντων αὐτῶν ἐκ τοῦ 
» > , > ~ ε > 
Ogove, ἐνετείλατο αὐτοῖς ὁ In- 

- ee, ” A 

cuvg λέγων" μηδενὶ εἰπῆτε τὸ 

Ψ a Ὃν ¢ eA ~ .3 , 

. Ὁραάμα, ἕως οὐ ὁ υἱὸς του ἀνϑρώ- 
~ ~ 4 

10 που ἐκ νεχρῶν ἀναστῇ. Καὶ ἐπηρώ- 

A ~ 

τησαν αὐτὸν οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ λέ- 
͵ x ~ 

γοντες" τί οὖν οἱ γραμματεῖς λέγου- 

σιν, ὅτι ᾿Ηλίαν δεῖ ἐλϑεῖν πρῶτον ; 

~ 4A 

ὋὉ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἀποκριϑεὶς εἶπεν αὐ- 
~ > ’ A ” ΄- Ἁ 

τοῖς " Hhiug μὲν ἔρχεται πρῶτον, καὶ 
> la ’ , bn oa 

12 ἀποκαταστήσει marta’ λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν, 

we 
5 ς 

ὅτι ᾿Ηλίας ἤδη ἦλϑε, καὶ οὐκ ἐπέ- 
3 ἢ ἥν ἢ ὁ as 3 
γνωσαν αὐτὸν, ἀλλ ἐποίησαν. ἕν αὖ- 
» κα ΘΑ o see 6 oa ὰ 
τῷ ὁσὰ ἠϑέλησαν" OVTM καὶ ὁ υἱὸς 
~ > 

13 τοῦ ἀνθρώπου μέλλει πάσχειν ὑπ 
αὐτῶν. Τότε συνῆκαν οἱ μαϑηταί, 
ὅτι περὶ ᾿Ιωάννου τοῦ βαπτιστοῦ 


bo 


1 


εἶπεν αὐτοῖς. 


LUKE Ix. 
5 5 ’ἤ - ¢ , Xo¥ 
hav ἐν ἐχείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις οὐδὲν 
τ 
ὧν ἑωράκασιν. 
MARK IX. 

9 Καταβαινόντων δὲ αὐτῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ 
4 ὃ 1} > Oi σ ὃ ‘ 
ὔρους, διεστείλατο αὐτοῖς, ἵνα μηδενὶ 
ὃ , a is > 4 σ 
ιηγήσωνται ἃ εἶδον, εἰ μὴ ὅταν 
ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐκ νεχρῶν 
3 - ‘ A , > , 

10 ἀναστῇ. Καὶ tov λόγον ἐχράτησαν 

i! ‘ ~ : 
πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς συζητοῦντες, τί ἐστι 

Α 3 Ἀ od 3 - 4 > 
11 τὸ ἐκ, vexowmv ἀναάστηναι. Kat ἕπη- 
A 
ρώτων αὐτὸν λέγοντες" ὅτι λέγουσιν 
~ σ ~ ~ 
οἱ γραμματεῖς, ott ᾿Ηλίαν Set ἐλϑεῖν 
~ 4 ; 
12 πρῶτον; Ὁ δὲ ἀποχριϑεὶς εἶπεν αὐ- 
Ὁ τ ~ 
τοῖς" ᾿ΗΠλίας μὲν ἐλϑὼν πρῶτον ἀπο- 
~ 4 ~ Ὰ, 
καϑιστᾷ πάντα" καὶ πῶς γέγραπται 
pan | ‘ cA CA , . ο ‘ 
ἐπι TOV υἱὸν TOV ἀνϑρωποὺ, We πολλὰ 
A ~ 
13 πάϑῃ καὶ ἐξουδενωϑῇ ; ᾿Αλλὰ λέγω 
- σ ‘ 
ὑμῖν, ὅτι καὶ Ἠλίας ἐλήλυϑε, καὶ éxoi- 
> ~ a 3 , Ἁ 
ησαν αὐτῷ oon ἠϑέλησαν: xados 
γέγραπται ἐπὶ αὐτόν. 


1 





14 


§ 76. The healing of a Demoniac, whom the Disciples could not heal.—Region of 
Cesarea Philippi. 


Matra. XVID. 14—21. Marx IX. 14—29. 

Καὶ ἐλϑόντων αὐτῶν 14 Καὶ ἐλϑὼν πρὸς τοὺς 
μαϑητὰς εἶδεν ὄχλον 
πολὺν περὶ αὐτοὺς καὶ 
15 γραμματεῖς συζητοῦντας αὐτοῖς. Καὶ 

εὐθέως πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος ἰδὼν αὐτὸν ἐξεϑαμ- 
βήϑη, καὶ προςτρέχοντες ἠσπάζοντο av- 
16 τόν. Καὶ ἐπηρώτησε τοὺς γραμματεῖς " τί, 
συζητεῖτε πρὸς αὐτούς ; 
17 Καὶ ἀποκριϑεὶς εἷς ἐκ 38 


Luxe ΙΧ. 37—43. 

37 /’Eyéveto δὲ ἐν τῇ ἑξῆς 
ε , , 3 
ἡμέρᾳ, κατελϑόντων av- 
τῶν ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕρους, 
συνήντησεν αὐτῷ ὄχλος 
πολύς. 


” 
πρὸς τὸν Oxo», 


προςῆλϑεν Καὶ ἰδού, ἀνὴρ 


“ ἡ 
αὐτῷ ἄνϑρωπος, γονυ- 


Wied >, ¥ 1 ‘ , z 
15 πετῶν αὐτὸν ' καὶ λέγων 


ς ᾿" 
κύριε, ἐλέησόν μου τὸν 
υἱόν, ὅτι σεληνιάζεται 
καὶ HAAS πάσχϑι" πολ- 
λάκις γὰρ πίπτει εἰς τὸ 

- ‘ , 3 ‘ 
πῦρ, καὶ πολλάκις εἰς TO 


16 ὕδωρ. Καὶ προφήνεγκα 


τοῦ ὄχλου εἶπε" διδά- 
ε a A <? 
σκαλε, ἤνεγκα TOY υἱὸν 
μου πρὸς σε, ἔχοντα 


18 πνεῦμα ἄλαλον. Καὶ 


4 Ἅ ϑι,, , 
ὁπου ἂν αὑτὸν καταλά- 
» A 
By, ῥδήσσει αὐτόν" καὶ 
> , 4 , ‘ 
ἀφρίζει, καὶ τρίζει τοὺς 
> [4 « ~ 4 
ὀδόντας αὑτοῦ καὶ ξη- 


> A ~ +f > , 
ἄπο TOV ὄχλου ἀνεβόησε 
λέγων" διδάσκαλε, δέο- 
’ Sih > A 
fat σου, ἐπίβλεψον ἐπι 
Lae σ 
τὸν υἱόν μου, ὅτι μονο- 


x , 
39 γεγής ἐστί μοι" καὶ ἰδού, 


~ , > , 
πνεῦμα λαμβάνει αὑτὸν, 
be , ͵ 4 
καὶ ἐξαίφνης κράζει, καὶ 
'σπαράσσει αὐτὸν μετὰ 


84 FROM 


. 





17 


18 Καὶ ἐπετίμησεν αὐτῷ ὃ 


19 


21 


OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER [Part V. 
MATTH. XVII. MARK IX. LUKE IX. 
2 A ~ ~ 4 A > “ Ἁ , > 
αὑτὸν τοῖς μαϑηταῖς ραίΐίνεται. Καὶ εἶπον ἄφρου, καὶ μόγις ἀπο- 


σου, καὶ οὐκ ἠδυνήϑη- 
σαν αὐτὸν ϑεραπεῦσαι. 


᾿᾿Αποχριϑεὶς δὲ ὁ Ἰησοῦς 


“ δι ff 
εἶπεν" ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος 
χαὶ διεστραμμένη, ἕως 
πότε ἔσομαι μεϑ' ὑμῶν; 
΄σ , > « 
ἕως πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑ- 
μῶν; φέρετέ μοι αὐτὸν 
τ 
ade. 


τοῖς μαϑηταῖς cov, ἵνα. 


Λ - > - ὼ 
χωρεῖ ἀπὶ αὐτοῦ συντρῖ- 


: | 
αὐτὸ ἐχβάλωσι, καὶ οὐκ 40 βον αὐτόν. Καὶ ἐδεή- 


19 ἴσχυσαν. ὋὉ δὲ ἀποχρι- 


ϑεὶς αὐτοῖς λέγει" ὦ 
γενεὰ ἄπιστος, ἕως πότε 
πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἔσομαι ; ἕως 
πότε ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν; 
φέρετε αὐτὸν πρός με. 


20 Καὶ ἤνεγκαν αὐτὸν πρὸς 


3 , A iS A > , 
αὑτὸν. καὶ ἰδὼν αὑτὸν, 


εὐθέως τὸ πνεῦμα ἐσπόάραξεν αὐτόν" καὶ 
21 πεσὼν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἐκυλίετο ἀφρίζων. Καὶ 
ἐπηρώτησε τὸν πατέρα αὐτοῦ" πόσος χρό- 
γος ἐστίν, ὡς τοῦτο γέγονεν αὐτῷ; ὁ δὲ 


~ 
eS) 


" 4A , 
εἶπε" παιδιόϑεν"" καὶ πολλάχις αὐτὸν καὶ 


> ~ ” 4 > σ σ > ’ 
εἰς πῦρ ἔβαλε καὶ εἰς ὕδατα, wa ἀπολέσῃ 
αὐτόν ἀλλ᾿ εἴ τι δύνασαι, βοήϑηδον ἡμῖν, σπλαγχνισϑεὶς ἐφ᾽ 
23 ἡμᾶς. Ὃ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτῷ" τό, εἰ δύνασαι πιστεῦσαι" 
; ‘ ~ , A. Din Ψ , ς ᾿ 
24 πάντα δυνατὰ τῷ πιστεύοντι. Και εὐϑέως κράξας ὁ πατὴρ 
~ , A ’ Ν' , , , 
τοῦ παιδίου μετὰ δακρύων ἔλεγε" πιστεύω [κύριε] Bonde 
~ , A ~ 7 , 
25 μου τῇ ἀπιστίᾳ. ᾿Ιδὼν δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, ὅτι ἐπισυντρέχει 


ε 


- - > 2 
᾿Ιησοῦς, καὶ ἐξῆλϑεν ἀπ 
~ 4 
αὐτοῦ τὸ δαιμόνιον, καὶ 
r ~ > A 
ἐθεραπεύϑη ὁ παῖς ἀπὸ 
~ id > , , 
τῆς WOKS EXELPNS. Tote 
moocen Portes οἱ μαϑη- 
A ~ > ~ > 397 
ταὶ τῷ Incov κατ ἰδίαν 
A o ~ > 
εἶπον" διὰ τί ἡμεῖς οὐκ 
ἠδυνήϑημεν ἐχβαλεῖν 
αὐτό; ‘O δὲ ᾿ἸΙησοῦς 
> ~ ‘ ‘ 
εἶπεν αὐτοῖς" διὰ τὴν 


ἀπιστίαν ὑμῶν. ἀμὴν γὰρ λέγω ὑμῖν, 
ἐὰν ἔχητε πίστιν ὡς κόκκον σινάπεως, 
ἐρεῖτε τῷ Oger τούτῳ" μετάβηϑι ἐν- 
τεῦϑεν ἐχεῖ, καὶ μεταβήσεται, καὶ 
οὐδὲν ἀδυνατήσει ὑμῖν. Τοῦτο δὲ τὸ 
γένος οὐκ ἐκπορεύεται, εἰ μὴ ἐν προς- 


~ ‘ / 
εὐχῇ καὶ VUGTELE. 


4 > , 7 
ὄχλος, ἐπετίμησε τῷ 
πνεύματι τῷ ἀκαϑάρ- 
τῷ, λέγων αὐτῷ" τὸ 

~ \ 4 4 
πνεῦμα τὸ ἄλαλον καὶ 
κωφόν, ἐγώ σοι ἐπιτάσ- 
oo’ ἔξελϑε ἐξ αὐτοῦ, 

‘ , > μη! > 
καὶ μηχέτι eigehOys εἰς 


26 αὐτόν. Καὶ κράξαν καὶ 


πολλὰ σπαράξαν αὐτὸν 
Py ~ ‘ 9 we 
ἐξῆλϑε. καὶ ἐγένετο 


ϑὴν τῶν μαϑητῶν σου, 
σ > , > ‘ ‘ 
iva. ἐχβάλωσιν αὐτό, καὶ 


41 οὐκ ἠδυνήϑησαν. "Ano- 


χριϑεὶς δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶ- 
πεν" ὦ γενεὰ ἄπιστος 
καὶ διεστραμμένη, ἕως 
πότε ἔσομαι πρὸς ὑμᾶς 


‘ > c ~ 
καὶ ἀνέξομαι ὑμῶν; 


προςάγαγε ὧδε τὸν υἱόν 
42 σου. Ἔτι δὲ προςερχο- 


, > ~ Hs > 
μένου αὐτοῦ ἔῤῥηξεν av- 
Α 
τὸν τὸ δαιμόνιον καὶ 
συνεσπάραξεν. 


3 4 ~ 
Ἐπιτίμησε δὲ ὁ Ἰησοῦς 
τῷ πνεύματι τῷ ἀκα- 
? 4 

ϑάρτῳ, καὶ ἰάσατο τὸν 
- A. 9 , > 
παῖδα καὶ ἀπέδωκεν αὖ- 
A ~ ~ 
τὸν τῷ πατρὶ αὐτοῦ. 


43 ᾿Εξεπλήσσοντο δὲ πάν»- 


aA ~ , 
τες ἐπὶ τῇ μεγαλειό- 
τητι τοῦ ϑεοῦ.--- 


ὡςεὶ νεκρός, ὥςτε πολλοὺς λεγεῖν, ὅτι ἀπέϑανεν. 
51 Ὁ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς κρατήσας αὐτὸν τῆς 


χειρὸς ἤγειρεν αὐτόν" καὶ ἀνέστη. 
£8 Καὶ εἰφελϑόντα αὐτὸν εἰς οἶχον οἱ 

μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν κατ 

ϑῳ / σ = tm > > ᾿ > 

ἰδίαν" ore ἡμεῖς οὐκ ἡδυνήϑημεν ἐχ- 
29 βαλεῖν αὐτό; Καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " τοῦ- 

4 4 > > ‘ , > 
zo τὸ γένος ἐν οὐδεν! δύναται ἐξελ- 


» Fes wee ~ 4 , 
ϑεῖν, εἰ μὴ Ev προφευχῇ καὶ νηστείᾳ. 





_ §§ 77, 78, '79.] UNTIL THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES. | 85 





§ 77. Jesus again foretells his own Death and Resurrection. [See § γ41-- Galilee. 


Marra. XVII. 22, 23. Mark IX. 30—32. Luxe IX. 43—45. 
25. ᾿Αναστρεφομένων δὲ 30 Kat ἐκεῖϑεν ἐξελϑόν- 43--- Πάντων δὲ. ϑαυμαζόν- 
᾿ αὐτῶν ἐν τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ, τες παρεπορεύοντο διὰ των ἐπὶ πᾶσιν οἷς ἐποίη- 


~ f ~ Α 
τῆς Γαλιλαίας " καὶ οὐκ σεν ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς, εἶπε πρὸς 
+ v4 4A ~ A A e « wes 
ἤϑελεν, wa tig γνῷ. τοὺς μαϑητὰας αὐτοῦ 


; ine ‘ 
; 31 ᾿Εδίδασκε γὰρ τοὺς μα- 44'Géo0e ὑμεῖς εἰς τὰ 
4 τῷ bi ldlty aban Jar ~ ‘ ¢ ~ So» 5 c ~ ‘ , 

4 εἶπεν αὑτοῖς ὁ ]ησοὺς" ϑητὰς αὑτοῦ καὶ ἔλεγεν τὰ ὑμῶν τοὺς λόγους 
es ~ x ne σ΄ ~ A 
μέλλει ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀν- αὐτοῖς " ὅτι ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ τούτους" ὁ γὰρ υἱὸς 
ἡ ϑρώπου παραδίδοοϑαι ἀνϑρώπου παραδίδοται τοῦ ἀνθρώπου μέλλει 
τ εἰς χεῖρας ἀνθρώπων, εἰς χεῖρας ἀνϑρώπων, παραδίδοσϑαι εἰς χεῖ- 
oe ws} ~ > \ > ~ > 3 , ¢ gt 
«23 ᾿χαὶ ἀποχτενοῦσιν av- καὶ amoxtevovow av- 45 eas ἀνϑρώπων. Oi δὲ 
᾿ ἘΣ - 4 ‘ 4 ~ ~ 
ἱ τόν, χαὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέξᾳ τόν" καὶ ἀποχτανϑεὶς ἠγνόουν τὸ ῥῆμα τοῦτο, 
ἄν + , v's. ~ , ἀξ 3 , 4 Pe 5 , 
Ε ἐγερϑήσεται. Καὶ ἐλυ- τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἀναστή. καὶ ἣν παρακεκαλυμμέ- 
οὶ , , Cat Sef 4 κι >» ¢ ᾿ 
: πήϑησαν σφόδρα, 32 σεται. Οἱ δὲ yyvoovy τὸ νὸν ἀπ αὑτῶν, We μὴ 
i ξ Ν ; ~ 4 - δ 
᾿ ῥῆμα, καὶ ἐφοβοῦντο αὐ αἴσϑωνται αὐτό" καὶ 
ὶ τὸν ἐπερωτῆσαι. ἐφοβοῦντο ἐρωτῆσαι αὐ- 


A ~ 
τὸν περὶ TOV ῥήματος τούτου. 


ἢ § 78. The Tribute-money miraculously provided.— Capernaum. 


Matra. XVII. 24—27. Marx IX. 33. 
~ ἡ A 3 » , 
24 Ἐλθόντων δὲ αὐτῶν εἰς Καπερ- 33 Καὶ ἦλθεν εἰς Καπερναούῦμ.--- 
᾿: ᾽ ~ ‘ A , , ; ; 
i γαούμ, προςῆλϑον οἱ ta δίδραχμα 
a ee, ~ ~ A 
λαμβάνοντες. τῷ Πέτρῳ καὶ εἶπον" ὁ διδάσχαλος ὑμῶν ov τελεῖ τὰ δί- 
d , A δ}  ν 9 ~ 5 ‘ 3. , ee « 
᾿ς αφῦ δραχμα; Ayers ναί. καὶ ore εἰφῆλϑεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν, προέφϑασεν αὑτὸν ὁ 
ἱ > Kah, , ’ - ’ ε ~ ~ ~ ἈΠ , ? 
Ἰησοῦς λέγων" τί σοι δοκεῖ, «Σίμων ; οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς ano τίνων λαμβανουσι. 
͵ , ΕῚ « > ‘ ~ e~ € ~ vn ᾽ A ~ > , , ty aie. 
26 τέλη ἢ κῆνσον ; ἀπὸ τῶν υἱῶν αὑτῶν, ἢ ἀπὸ τῶν ἀλλοτρίων; AéyeL αὑτῷ ὁ 
’ > A ~ > , Υ 3 ἂν £99 ρὸν τς a 3 , , 3 ἐ 4«. ἃ 
Πέτρος ἀπὸ τῶν ἀλλοτρίων. ἔφη αὐτῷ ὃ ᾿]Ιησοῦς" aguye ἐλευϑεροὶ εἰσιν οἱ υἱοί. 
A 
27 Ἵνα δὲ μὴ σχανδαλίσωμεν αὐτούς, πορευϑεὶς εἰς τὴν ϑάλασσαν βάλε ἄγκιστρον, 
=> ~ 5 4 ; ~ 
a καὶ τὸν ἀναβάντα πρῶτον ἰχϑὺν ἄρον" καὶ ἀνοίξας τὸ στόμα αὐτοῦ, εὑρήσεις 
Ν Ὶ . “ ae ~ par A ~ 1 
τς στατῆρα᾽ ἐκεῖνον λαβὼν» δὸς αὐτοῖς ἀντὶ ἐμοῦ καὶ σοῦ. 











“ § 79. The Disciples contend who should be the greatest. Jesus exhorts to humility, 
a _ forbearance, and brotherly love-—Capernaum. 


᾿ Marrs. XVIII. 1—35. Marx IX. 33—50. Luxe IX. 46—50. 

4 1. Ἐν ἐχείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ 33 —Kai ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ yero- 46 Εἰςῆλϑε δὲ διαλογι- 
4 προςῆλϑον οἱ μαϑηταὶ μενος ἐπηρώτα αὐτούς. σμὸς ἐν αὐτοῖς, τὸ τίς ἂν. 
τ΄ τῷ Ἰησοῦ λέγοντες" tig τί ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ πρὸς ἑαυ- 47 εἴη μείζων αὐτῶν. ‘O δὲ 
ἵ ἄρα μείζων ἐστὶν ἐν τῇ 84 τοὺς διελογίζεσϑε;. ΟἱἹ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἰδὼν τὸν διαλογι- 
A βασιλείᾳ τῶν οὐρανῶν; δὲ ἐσιώπων" πρὸς ἀλλή. σμὸν τῆς καρδίας αὐτῶν, 





86 FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER | [Parr V. 





MARK IX. | 
35 λους γὰρ διελέχϑησαν ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ, τίς μείζων. Καὶ καϑίσας ἐφώνησε τοὺς 


, A , > ~ ΕΣ ~ ‘ , 
δώδεκα καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς εἴ τις ϑέλει πρῶτος εἶναι, ἔσται πάντων ἔσχατος 





A 
MATTH. XVIII. καὶ πάντων διάχονος. LUKE ΙΧ. ᾿ 
πριν , e A ; * 
2 Kai προφκαλεσάμενος ὁ 36 Καὶ λαβὼν παιδίον ἔ. ἐπιλαβόμενος. 
> ~ , ” Ἢ ἢ 
Ἰησοὺς παιδίον ἔστη. στῆσεν αὐτὸ ἐν μέσῳ ad- παιδίου, ἔστησεν αὐτὸ 
2 -Ae , > ~ ~ ω ‘ ~ ἣ 
σὲν ατο ἕν μέσῳ αὑτὼν τῶν, καὶ ἐναγχαλισάμε- 48 mag ἑαυτῷ ! καὶ εἶπν 
3! \ z. ee ERS ay, > 8 ΒΝ Sg as a ON "- 3 
καὶ εἶπεν" ἀμὴν λέγω νος αὐτὸ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς αὐτοῖς " ὃς ἐὰν δέξηται 
C δὲ 35" A ~ “ 34 a ~ ~ ~ ’ 
ὕμιν, ἐᾶν μὴ στραφῆτε 37 ος ἐὰν ἕν THY τοιού. τοῦτο τὸ παιδίον ἐπὶ τῷ 
4 ἡ , 9: «ε ‘4 , , - ey , > Ἅ , ἣ 
και γένησθε ὡς τὰ πα- τῶν παιδίων δέξηται ὀνόματί μου, ἐμὲ δέχε- 
’ > \ ϑ. ἡ > > A ~ ‘ 
δία, ov μὴ εἰφέλϑητε εἰς ἐπὶ TH ὀνόματί μου, ἐμὲ ται" καὶ ὃς ἐὰν ἐμὲ δέ- 
‘ , ~ > a 
τὴν βασιλείαν τῶν ov- δέχεται" καὶ ὃς ἐὰν ἐὰὲ —-Egran, δέχεται τὸν ἀπο- 
~ σ is ᾿ 
4 ρανῶν. Οὐτις οὖν τας δέξηται, οὐκ ἐμὲ δέχε: στείλαντά με. ὁ γὰρ - 
V4 ade A « 4 ~ ~ 
πεινωσῃ ἕαυτοὸν ὡς TO Tol, ἀλλὰ τὸν ἀποστεί. κρότερος ἐν πᾶσιν ὑμῖν 
, ~ τ 1 t x 
παιδίον τοῦτο, οὗτός 38 λαντά με, “AnengiOy ὑπάρχων, οὗτος ἔσται 


ἐστιν ὃ μείζων ἐν τῇ δὲ αὐτῷ ᾿Ιωῳάννης 2é- 49 μέγας. ᾿Αποκριϑεὶς δὲ 


, ~ > ~ 

βασιλείᾳ τῶν οὐρανῶν. yor: διδάσκαλε, sid0- ὁ ᾿Ιωάννης εἶπεν ἐπι- , 
λα »»" ᾿ ~ ᾿ et ‘ 
5 καὶ og ἐὰν δέξηται πα. μέν twa ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί στάτα, εἴδομέν τινα ἐπὶ ; 
, ~ “a 4 ~ ᾿ - i 
δίον τοιοῦτον ἕν ἐπὶ τῷ σουἐχβάλλονταδαιμόνια, τῷ ὀνόματί cov ἐκβάλ- Ὁ 
e222 , δ Δὰν a > ? ~ t w . , . ἵ 

ὀνόματι μου, με δέχεται. ὃς οὐκ ἀκολουϑεῖ ἡμῖν᾽' λοντα τὰ δαιμόνια, καὶ 


Α 3 > , > , > , σ 0 
καὶ ἐκωλύσαμεν αὑτόν, ἐχωλύσαμεν αὐτόν, OTL 
σ ee ~ ἂν 4 
39 ὁτι οὐκ ἀκολουϑεῖ ἡμῖν. “Ο δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς οὐκ ἀκολουϑεῖ we? ἧ- 
A , ie Ie 4 THES - ~ \ ᾿ 
εἶπε" μὴ κωλύετε αὐτόν. οὐδεὶς γάρ ἐσ- 50 μῶν. Καὶ εἶπε πρὸξὨἩ 
a , , % 4 a Se , 'e! c > ee ‘ “ἢ 
τιν, ὃς ποιήσει δύναμιν ἐπι τῷ ὀνόματί αὐτὸν ὃ Inoovg' μὴ ~ 
-~ a . 
μου καὶ δυνήσεται ταχὺ κακολογῆσαί we κωλύετε" ὃς γὰρ orn 
a ‘ > m” δι. ~ ς A ς ~ ” > « ~ « 4 
40 Ος γὰρ οὐκ ἔστι καϑ' ἡμῶν, ὑπὲρ ἡμῶν ἔστι καϑ' ἡμῶν, ὑπὲρ 
ἱ Α ~ ~ 
41 ἐστιν. Ὃς γὰρ ἂν ποτίσῃ ὑμᾶς ποτήριον ἡμῶν sot. | 
᾿ σ - 
ὕδατος ἐν ὀνόματι ὅτι Χριστοῦ ἐστε, 


ΜΑΤΤΗ. XVIII. ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐ μή ἀπολέσῃ τὸν 
6 Ὃς δ᾽ ἂν σκανδαλίσῃ ἕνα τῶν μι- 42 μισϑὸν αὑτοῦ. Καὶ ὃς ἂν σκαν- 
χρῶν τούτων, τῶν πιστευόντων εἰς δαλίσῃ ἕνα τῶν μικρῶν τῶν πιστευόν- 
ἐμέ, συμφέρει αὐτῷ, ἵνα κρεμασϑῇ των εἰς ἐμέ, καλόν ἐστιν αὐτῷ μᾶλλον, 
μύλος ὀνικὸς εἰς τὸν τράχηλον αὐτοῦ εἰ περίκειται λίϑος μυλικὸς περὶ τὸν ἰ 
καὶ καταποντισϑῇ ἐν τῷ πελάγει tig τράχηλον αὐτοῦ καὶ βέβληται εἰς thy Ὁ 
7 ϑαλάσσης. Οὐαὶ τῷ κόσμῳ ἀπὸ τῶν 43 ϑάλασσαν. Καὶ ἐὰν σκανδαλίζῃ σε 
σκανδάλων" ἀνάγκη γάρ ἐστιν ἐλϑεῖν ἡ χείρ σου, ἀπόκοψον αὐτήν" καλόν 
τὰ σκάνδαλα" πλὴν οὐαὶ τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ σοί ἐστι κυλλὸν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν εἰςελϑεῖν, Ὁ 
ἐχείνῳ, δὲ οὗ τὸ σκάνδαλον ἔρχεται. ἢ τὰς δύο χεῖρας ἔχοντα ἀπελϑεῖν εἰς | 
8 Ei δὲ ἡ χείρ σου ἢ ὁ πούς cov σκαν. τὴν γέενναν, εἰς τὸ πῦρ τὸ ἄσβεστον, 


δαλίζει σε, ἔκκοψον αὐτὰ καὶ βάλε ἀπὸ 44 ' ὅπου ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν οὐ τελευτᾷ καὶ 
- « ~ - A 
σοῦ" καλόν σοί ἐστιν εἰςελϑεῖν εἰς τὴν 45 τὸ πῦρ ov σβέννυται." Καὶ ἐὰν 6 πούς 
, ~ > , > > 
ζωὴν χωλὸν ἢ κυλλόν, ἢ δύο χεῖρας ἢ σου σκανδαλίζῃ σε, ἀπόκοψον αὐτόν 





® 44, Comp. Is, 66, 34, 








aa 


Sail ka σενν. 


ee ae 


Spe oe 








ia aks 


§ 79.] UNTIL THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES. 87 





.  MATTH. XVIIL MARK IX. 

δύο πόδας ἔχοντα βληϑῆναι εἰς τὸ πῦρ καλόν ἐστί σοι εἰςελϑεῖν εἰς τὴν ζωὴν 
A 3.8 , Ἃ A , / Υ͂ 

τὸ αἰώνιον. χωλὸν, ἢ τοὺς δυο πόδας ἔχοντα βλη- 


~ ᾽ A , 5 ‘ A 4 1 σ ma 3 , Ὁ 3 ~ 
46 ϑῆναι εἰς τὴν γέενναν, εἰς τὸ πυρ τὸ ἄσβεστον,' ὁποῦ ὁ σκώληξ αὐτῶν 
>? ~ A A ~ 3 / me SN ¢ > , 
οὐ τελευτᾷ καὶ τὸ πῦρ οὐ σβέννυται. Kat ἐὰν ὃ ὀφϑαλμὸς σου 
Ἐ 47 σκανδαλίζῃ σε, ἔκβαλε αὐτὸν " καλόν 


9 Καὶ εἰ ὁ ὀφϑαλμός σου σκανδαλίζει σοί ἐστι μονόφϑαλμον εἰςφελϑεῖν εἰς 
" ἄρ ν Ὁ" ‘ , $4 τῷ ~ ‘ , ~ ~ oN fo. 
oe, ἔξελε avtov καὶ Pade ἀπὸ σοῦ" tiv βασιλείαν τοῦ ϑεοῦ, ἢ δύο ὀφ- 

, > Δ , > \ ok ” ‘fas > ‘ 
καλὸν Cal ἔστι μονόφϑαλμον εἰς τὴν ϑαλμοὺς ἔχογτα βληϑῆγαι εἰς τὴν ° 
~ Χ . ~ σ 
ζωὴν εἰφελϑεῖν, ἢ δύο ὀφϑαλμοὺς 48 γέενναν τοῦ πυρός," ὕπου ὁ σκώληξ 
ἔχοντα βληϑῆναι εἰς τὴν γέενναν TOV αὐτῶν οὐ τελευτᾷ καὶ τὸ πῦρ οὐ 
πυρός. 49 σβέννυται. Πᾶς γὰρ πυρὶ ἁλισϑήσε- 


~ ‘ ‘ 

50 ται, καὶ πᾶσα ϑυσία ἁλὶ ἁλισϑήσετα. Καλὸν τὸ 
σ os 4 αὶ 4 , 3 , 3, .%a.3 ’ 
ἅλας" ἕὰν δὲ ἀλὰς ἀναλοῦ γένηται, ἐν τίνι αὐτὸ ἀρτύ- 

ὁ τας, ae ἢ οὐ λιν, 5 * > ; ΘΙ ay 
σετε ; EyETE ἕν ἑαυτοῖς Khas, καὶ εἰρηνεύετε ἐν ἀλλήλοις... 
© ΜΑΎΤΗ. XVIII. 
ε ~ \ , 4. 0ὃ ~ ~ e é , \ ¢ w σ ε 
10 Ὃρᾶτε, μὴ καταφρονήσητε ἕγὸς τῶν μιχρῶν τουτῶν" λέγω γὰρ υμῖν, OTL οἱ 
~ ~ A ~ 
ἄγγελοι αὐτῶν ἐν οὐρανοῖς διαπαντὸς βλέπουσι τὸ πρόφωπον τοῦ πατρύς μου 
~ ὼ ἢ » ~ 3 ~ 

11 12 τοῦ ἐν οὐρανοῖς. ἾΠ1λ8ε γὰρ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου σῶσαι τὸ ἀπολωλός. Ti 
εν ~ a4 , , 3 , ς \ ’ A ~ ov > 2 

ὑμῖν δοκεῖ; ἐὰν γένηταί τινι ἀνϑρώπῳ éxatov πρόβατα, καὶ πλανηϑῇ ὃν ἐξ av- 
Ξ See nee \ ae 
τῶν * οὐχὶ ἀφεὶς τὰ ἐννενηκονταεννγέα ἐπὶ TH ὄρη πορευϑεὶς ζητεῖ TO πλανώμε- 
mo DN , ς ~ Ph ον , ¢ w σ ’ ἈΠ 9... ὦ » 

13 vov; Καὶ ἐὰν γένηται εὑρεῖν αὐτό, ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι χαίρει ἐπὶ αὐτῷ μᾶλλον, 

~ ~ A ‘ v4 

14 ἢ ἐπὶ τοῖς ἐννενηκονταενγέα τοῖς μὴ πεπλανημένοις. Οὕτως οὐκ ἔστι ϑέλημα 

- ~ ~ 3 ~ σ ~ ~ a 
ἔμπροσϑεν τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν TOV ἐν οὐρανοῖς, ἵνα ἀπόληται εἷς TAY μικρῶν τού- 
3 ‘ Xe , > A. - 3 ; σ TP. Ey ee. ? 4 

15 των. ᾿Εὰν δὲ ἁμαρτήσῃ εἰς σὲ ὁ ἀδελφὸς σου, vaaye καὶ ἔλεγξον αὐτὸν μεταξὺ 

~ A ᾽ -" ’ τῶι, 2.» 3 , 3 00 ‘ > , * ! 3A ‘ 

16 σοῦ καὶ αὐτοῦ μόνου "ἃ ἐάν cov ἀκούσῃ, ἐχέῤρδησας τὸν ἀδελφόν cov’! ἐὰν δὲ 
ν. } , , Y ~ of a Ἃ , σ 2. % , , see 

μὴ ἀχούσῃ, παράλαβε μετὰ σοῦ ἔτι Eva δύο, WH ἐπὶ στόματος δύο μαρτύρων 
7 ὮΝ ~ oF ~ «“" b "Ro δὲ , Si a bh See ἣν 4 , 2A δὲ 
17 ἢ τριῶν σταϑῇ πᾶν ῥῆμα. ἂν δὲ παρακούσῃ αὐτῶν, εἰπὲ τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ. ἐὰν δὲ 
\ ~ > , , ” σ £9 ot § ΑΝ, € , 3 \ 
18 nai τῆς ἐχχλησίας παρακούυσῃ, ἔστω GOL ὠςπὲρ ὃ ἔϑνικος καὶ ὃ τελώνης. “AunY 
£m 4 , A ~ ~ ld w ~ ~ ᾿ς @ 
λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅσα ἐὰν δήσητε ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, ἔσται δεδεμένα ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ" καὶ ὅσα 
4 ~ ~ , > ~ > ~ « a 
19 ἐὰν λύσητε ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, ἔσται λελυμένα ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ. Πάλιν λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι 
- , bale." ~ ~ A \ τ 
ἐὰν δύο ὑμῶν συμφωνήσωσιν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς περὶ παντὸς πράγματος, οὗ ἐὰν αἷ- 
> ~ A ~ , ~ ~ x 
20 τήσωνται, γενήσεται αὐτοῖς παρὰ τοῦ πατρός μου τοῦ ἐν οὐρανοῖς. Οὗ γάρ 
“« \ > 4 54 ~ ~ 
εἰσι δύο ἢ τρεῖς συνηγμένοι εἰς TO ἐμὸν ὄνομα, ἐκεῖ εἶμι ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν. 


᾿ ie ~ , 
— 2 Τότε προςελϑὼν αὐτῷ ὁ Πέτρος sine xvgue, ποσάκις ἁμαρτήσει εἰς ἐμὲ ὁ 
ay 2 4 & αὐ > ~ ? ¢ , t δι ν ae eg ~ 3 , 
22 ἀδελφός μου καὶ ἀφήσω αὑτῷ ; ἕως entanig; Ayer αὑτῷ ὃ ]Ιησοῦς" ov, λέγω 
" ~ 

23 σοι, ἕως ἑπτάκις, ἀλλ᾿ ἕως ἑβδομηκοντάκις ἑπτά. Διὰ τοῦτο ὡμοιώϑη ἡ βασι- 


a ~ ~ «a a ~ 
λεία τῶν οὐρανῶν ἀνϑρώπῳ βασιλεῖ, ὃς 7A noe συνᾶραι λόγον μετὰ τῶν δού- 


4 ~ \ - ~ Αι 

44 Lov αὑτοῦ. ᾿Αρξαμένου δὲ αὐτοῦ συναίρειν, προφηνέχϑη αὐτῷ εἷς ὀφειλέτης 
se ’ ‘ ~ ~ 

25 μυρίων ταλάντων. My ἔχοντος δὲ αὐτοῦ ἀποδοῦναι, ἐκέλευσεν αὐτὸν ὁ κύριος 


- ~ 4 & ~ > ~ ‘ 4 of 4 σ Α 
αὐτοῦ πραϑῆναι, καὶ τὴν γυναῖκα αὑτοῦ καὶ τὰ τέχνα καὶ πάντα ὅσα εἶχε, καὶ 


a 26 ἀποδοϑῆναι. Πεσὼν οὖν ὁ δοῦλος mgocextve αὐτῷ λέγων" κύριε, μακροϑύ- 











8 15. Comp. Lev. 19, 17. 18. > 16. Deut. 19, 15. 


88 FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER [Parr V. 





‘ 
MATTH. XVIII. 


é 4A 4 - ~ 
27 μῆσον ἐπὶ ἐμοί, καὶ πάντα σο: ἀποδώσω. «ΣΣπλαγχνισϑεὶς δὲ ὁ κύριος τοῦ δούλου 

~ ~ 4 ~ 
28 ἐκείνου ἀπέλυσεν αὐτόν, καὶ τὸ δάνειον ἀφῆκεν αὐτῷ. ᾿Εξελϑὼν δὲ 6 δοῦλος 

~ 4 ~ ~ ἊΝ ~ 
ἐκεῖνος, εὗρεν ἕνα τῶν συνδούλων αὑτοῦ, ὃς ὥφειλεν αὐτῷ ἑκατὸν δηνάρια" καὶ 
, 91.3 ” ἢ 3 , ” > , \ 5 ἑἙξ ’ 
29 χρατῆσας avtov ἔπνιγε λέγων" ἀπόδος μοι εἴ τι ὀφείλεις. Ileswv οὖν 0 ovrdov- 
hog αὐτοῦ [εἰς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ] παρεκάλει αὐτὸν λέγων" μαχροϑύμησον ἐπὶ 
30 ἐμοί, καὶ πάντα ἀποδώσω σοι. Ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἤϑελεν" ἀλλὰ ἀπελϑὼν ἔβαλεν αὐτὸν 
3 ’ a {5 ~ \ 2 , > , ΑΙ , > ~ A 
31 εἰς φυλακὴν, ἕως ov ἀποδῷ τὸ ὀφειλόμενον. ᾿Ιδόντες δὲ οἱ συνδουλοι αὑτοῦ τὰ 
γενόμενα ἐλυπήϑησαν σφόδρα" καὶ ἐλϑόντες διεσάφησαν τῷ κυρίῳ αὑτῶν πάντα 
‘ ’ , ΄ oN et . Σὰ ἀρ δι ~ 
32 τὰ γενόμενα. Tore προςκαλεσάμεγος αὑτὸν δ' κύριος αὑτοῦ λέγει αὑτῷ " δοῦλε 
~ ~ 4 . 
33 πονηρέ, πᾶσαν τὴν ὀφειλὴν ἐκείνην ἀφῆκά σοι, ἐπεὶ παρεκάλεσάς με" οὐκ ἔδει 
4 ‘\ ? ~ ‘ , , « A; Ὁ , > , ΟΝ ‘ ε 
34 καὶ σὲ ἐλεῆσαι τὸν σύνδουλον σου, ὡς καὶ ἐγὼ σὲ yhenou; Kou ὀργισϑεις ὃ 
κύριος αὐτοῦ παρέδωκεν αὐτὸν τοῖς βασανισταῖς, ἕως οὗ ἀποδῷ πᾶν τὸ ὀφειλό- 
35 μενον αὐτῷ. Οὕτω καὶ ὁ πατήρ μου ὁ ἐπουράνιος ποιήσει ὑμῖν, ἐὰν μὴ ἀφῆτε 
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 4 ~ 
ἕκαστος τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὑτοῦ ἀπὸ τῶν καρδιῶν ὑμῶν τὰ παραπτώματα αὐτῶν. 


§ 80. The Seventy instructed and sent ουὔΐ.--- Capernaum. 


Luxe X. 1—16. 
~ j 4 
1 Μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα ἀνέδειξεν ὁ κύριος καὶ ἑτέρους ἑβδομήκοντα, καὶ ἀπέστειλεν 
‘ - ~ τ 
αὐτοὺς ἀνὰ δύο πρὸ προςώπου αὑτοῦ εἰς πᾶσαν πόλιν καὶ τόπον, οὗ ἔμελλεν αὐτὸς 
” wy τὰ \ ? , ¢ ‘ 4 , € ot 3 , 5 
2 ἔρχεσϑαι. Ἔλεγεν οὖν πρὸς αὑτοὺς" ὃ μὲν ϑερισμὸς πολὺς, οἱ δὲ ἐργάται ὀλιγοι" 
~ ~ ~ 7 , 
δεήϑητε οὖν τοῦ κυρίου tov ϑερισμοῦ, ὅπως ἐχβάλῃ ἐργάτας εἰς τὸν ϑερισμὸν 
ΡΣ ε , Tere ee , Citi Ἢ ἄν Ὁ > , , ‘ 

34 αὑτοῦ. ὝὙπαγετε᾽ ἰδού, ἐγώ ἀποστέλλω ὑμᾶς ὡς ἀρνὰᾶς ἕν μέσῳ λύχων. My Ba- 

, , ‘ , eS: , Ε ᾿ , \ \ eat 
στάζετε βαλάντιον, μὴ πήραν, μηδὲ ὑποδηματα" καὶ μηδένα κατὰ τὴν ὁδὸν 

5 , a > a > AR > ¢ δὲ ; ~ , 4 Se ~ ” 
5 ἀσπάσησϑε Εἰς ἣν δ᾽ ἂν οἰκίαν eigeoynods, πρῶτον λέγετε" εἰρήνη τῷ οἴκῳ 
6 τούτῳ. Καὶ ἐὰν ἢ ἐκεῖ υἱὸς εἰρήνης, ἐπαναπαύσεται ἐπὶ αὐτὸν ἡ εἰρήνη ὑμῶν εἰ 

A , a2, £ ~ > , 3 > # \ ~ ιν , 3 , 4 , 
7 δὲ μήγε, ἐφ᾿ ὑμᾶς ἀνακάμψει. Ἔν αὑτῇ δὲ τῇ οἰκίᾳ μένετε ἐσϑίοντες καὶ πίνον- 
ζες τὰ παρ᾿ αὐτῶν" ἄξιος γὰρ ὁ ἐργάτης τοῦ μισϑοῦ αὐτοῦ ἐστι" μὴ μεταβαίνετε 
8 ἐξ οἰχίας εἰς οἰχίαν. Καὶ εἰς ἣν δ᾽ ἂν πόλιν εἰφέρχησϑε καὶ δέχωνται ὑμᾶς, ἐσϑίετε 
9 τὰ παρατιϑέμενα ὑμῖν, ' καὶ ϑεραπεύετε τοὺς ἐν αὐτῇ ἀσϑενεῖς, καὶ λέγετε αὖ- 
oe ἘΝ ee ee νοι , ~ ~ try «a 2a. ew >? ἥν. -ὦ 
10 τοῖς᾽ ἤγγικεν Ep ὑμᾶς ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ ϑεοῦ. Fig ἣν δ᾽ ἂν πόλιν εἰξέρχησϑε καὶ μὴ 
᾿ = ~ ” *. 

11 δέχωνται ὑμᾶς, ἐξελϑόντες εἰς τὰς πλατείας αὐτῆς εἴπατε" καὶ τὸν κονιορτὸν 
τὸν κολληϑέντα ἡμῖν ἐκ τῆς πόλεως ὑμῶν ἀπομασσόμεϑα ὑμῖν" πλὴν τοῦτο 

»Ξ ~ > ‘ ~ σ 
12 γινώσκετε, ὅτι ἤγγικεν [ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς} ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ ϑεοῦ" Aéyo [δὲ] ὑμῖν, ὅτε 


13 Σοδόμοις ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ ἀνεκεότερον ἔσται, ἢ τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ. Οὐαί σοι, 


Χυραζίν" οὐαί σοι, Βηϑσαϊδά" ὅτι εἰ ἐν Τύρῳ καὶ «Σιδῶνι ἐγένοντο αἱ δυνάμεις 

14 αἱ γενόμεναι ἐν ὑμῖν, πάλαι ἂν ἐν σάκκῳ καὶ σποδῷ καϑήμεναι μετενόησαν. Πλὴν 
~ ~ ~ ‘4 

15 Τύρῳ καὶ Σιδῶνι ἀνεκτότερον ἔσται ἐν τῇ κρίσει, ἢ ὑμῖν. Καὶ ov, Καπερναούμ, ἡ 

16 ἕως τοῦ οὐρανοῦ ὑψωϑεῖσα, ἕως Gdov καταβιβασϑήσῃ. Ὃ ἀκούων ὑμῶν ἐμοῦ 

> , er 5 ~ J > 4 3 ~. ε δὲ Pe 00 ~ 10 ~ ‘ > , 

ἀκούει, καὶ ὁ ἀϑετῶν ὑμὰς ene ἀϑετεῖ" ὁ δὲ ἐμὲ ἀϑετῶν ἀϑετεῖ TOY UMOOTEI- 


haved με. 





® 4, Comp. 2 K. 4, 29. 





- «ἃ «ἃ - 


Ee ee ee eee. 


ὶ 








ἘΠ. προς τ΄ 





Ι 


My 
+ 
ῇ 


δῇ 80, 81, 82.] UNTIL THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES. 89 





§ 81. Jesus goes up to the Festival of Tabernacles. His final departure from Galilee. 
Incidents in Samaria. 


Joun VII. 2—10. 
» ἢ Ot. ον 5a Γ΄ 
223 Ἣν δὲ ἐγγὺς ἡ ἑορτὴ τῶν Ιουδαίων, ἡ σκηνοπηγία. Εἶπον οὖν πρὸς αὐτὸν οἱ 
3 ‘ > ~ , > ~ τσ 3 ‘ 37 ’ σ ‘ € 
ἄδελφοι αὐτοῦ μετάβηϑι ἐντεῦϑεν καὶ ὑπαγε sig τὴν ᾿Ιουδαίαν, woe καὶ οἱ μα- 
4 9 ταί 9 ’ A ” ; “ ~ Οὐδ ‘ A > ~ -“ 
ηταί σου ϑεωρήσωσι τὰ ἔργα σου, ἃ ποιεῖς. Οὐδεὶς γὰρ ἐν κρυπτῷ τι ποιεῖ 
‘ ~ 4 > ~ ~ ~ 
καὶ ζητεῖ αὐτὸς ἐν παῤῥησίᾳ εἶναι. εἰ ταῦτα ποιεῖς, φανέρωσον σεαυτὸν τῷ 
, th | 4 ~ τ ἢ ~ 
56 κόσμῳ. Οὐδὲ γὰρ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτοῦ ἐπίστευον εἰς αὐτόν. Aéyer οὖν αὐτοῖς ὃ 
3 ~ A 
Inoovs* ὁ καιρὸς ὁ ἐμὸς οὔπω πάρεστιν, ὁ δὲ καιρὸς ὁ ὑμέτερος πάντοτέ ἐστιν 
σ αὐ “ ᾿ ~ δ as, 
7 ἕτοιμος. Ov δύναται ὁ κόσμος μισεῖν ὑμᾶς, ἐμὲ δὲ μισεῖ, ὅτι ἐγὼ μαρτυρῶ περὶ 
> ~ σ \ »# ~~ ~ ‘ 
8 αὐτοῦ, ὁτι τὰ ἔργα αὐτοῦ πονηρά ἐστιν. “Ὑμεῖς ἀνάβητε εἰς τὴν ἑορτὴν ταύτην᾽ 
GRR + σ 
ἐγὼ οὕπω ἀναβαίνω εἰς τὴν ἑορτὴν ταύτην, ὅτι ὁ καιρὸς ὁ ἐμὸς οὔπω πεπλήρω- 
~ αὦ ~ 4A 
910 ται. Ταῦτα δὲ εἰπὼν αὐτοῖς ἔμεινεν ἐν τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ. Ὡς δὲ ἀνέβησαν οἱ ἀδελ- 
φοὶ αὐτοῦ, τότε καὶ αὐτὸς ἀνέβη εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν, οὐ φανερῶς, ἀλλ᾿ ὡς ἐν κρυπτῷ. 
Luxe IX. 51—56. 
? , 49 ~ 3 ’ >» ©, S45 
Ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν τῷ συμπληροῦσϑαι τὰς ἡμέρας τῆς ἀναλήψεως αὐτοῦ, καὶ αὐτὸς 
ἢ 4 , ela) aes ~ , φρχὴ t 4. ἀπ 
52 τὸ πρόφωπον αὑτοῦ ἐστήριξε τοῦ πορεύεσϑαι εἰς ᾿ερουσαλήμ. Koi ἀπέστειλεν 
~ 4 ~ 
ἀγγέλους πρὸ προςώπου αὑτοῦ" καὶ πορευϑέντες εἰςῆλϑον εἰς κώμην ΖΣαμαρει- 
on o € ᾿ ae ee ‘ 3 Inf δ . \ , > ~ 
53 τῶν, ὥςτε ἑτοιμάσαι αὐτῷ. Καὶ οὐκ ἐδέξαντο αὐτόν, ὅτι τὸ πρόφωπον αὐτοῦ 
. 4 ~ 
54 ἦν πορευόμενον εἰς Ἱερουσαλήμ. ᾿Ιδόντες δὲ οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ ᾿Ιάκωβος καὶ 
» ~ ~ \ ~ ~ ‘ 
᾿Ιωάννης εἶπον" κύριε, ϑέλεις εἴπωμεν πῦρ καταβῆναι ἀπὸ TOV οὐρανοῦ nat 
5 - ? , « 2 , > ’ A am , > ~ ‘ 
55 ἀναλῶσαι αὑτοὺς, ὡς καὶ Hhiag ἐποίησε; «Στραφεῖίς δὲ ἐπετίμησεν αὑτοῖς xo 
- 2 mn σ , , > ς ~ ¢€ A «" ~ > , > 
56 εἶπεν" οὐκ οἰδατε, οἵου mrevuatos ἐστε ὑμεῖς ; ‘O γὰρ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου οὐκ 
~ 4 
ἦλϑε ψυχὰς ἀνθρώπων ἀπολέσαι, ἀλλὰ σῶσαι. Καὶ ἐπορεύϑησαν εἰς ἑτέραν 
κώμην. 


51 


§ 82. Ten Lepers cleansed.— Samaria. 


Luxe XVII. 11—19. 
11. Kat ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ πορεύεσϑαι αὐτὸν εἰς 'ἹΙερουσαλήμ, καὶ αὐτὸς διήρχετο διὰ 
) , ‘ ,ὔ Tri. 3 , 2 ~ + , ϑ,ν τι δ 
12 μέσου Σαμαρείας καὶ Γαλιλαίας. Καὶ εἰςερχομένου αὑτοῦ εἰς τινὰ κώμην ἀπήν- 
3 - , \ + Δ 7 3e ‘ > A F A 
13 τησαν αὐτῷ δέκα Aemoot ἄνδρες, οἱ ἔστησαν ποῤῥωϑεν" καὶ αὐτοί ἤραν φωγὴν 
, 3 βὰν, , » 7 Send \ og 5 y > ~ , 
14 λέγοντες" ᾿Ιησοῦ ἐπιστάτα, ἐλέησον ἡμᾶς. Kou ἰδὼν εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " πορευϑέντες 
ἐπιδείξατε ἑαυτοὺς τοῖς ἱερεῦσι. καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ ὑπάγειν αὐτούς, ἐκαϑαρίσϑη- 
15 σαν. Εἷς δὲ ἐξ αὐτῶν ἰδών, ὅτι ἰάϑη, ὑπέστρεψε μετὰ φωνῆς μεγάλης δοξάζων 
16 τὸν ϑεόν" καὶ ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ πρόφωπον παρὰ τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ εὐχαριστῶν αὐτῷ. 
11 χαὶ αὐτὸς ἦν Σαμαρείτης. ᾿Αποχριϑεὶς δὲ ὁ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν" οὐχὶ οἱ δέκα ἐκαϑα- 
? ι a he Ee ~ ? ἂν ἃ ¢ ᾽ ~ , a 
18 ϑιαθησαν: οἱ δὲ evven ga Οὐχ εὑρέϑησαν ὑποστρέψαντες δοῦναι δόξαν τῷ 
19 ϑεῷ, εἰ μὴ ὁ ἀλλαυρολέϊο οὗτος ; Καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ" ἀναστὰς πορεύου " ἡ πίστις 
σου σέσωχέ σε. 


12 


PART VI. 


= 


THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES, AND THE SUBSEQUENT TRANSACTIONS 
UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY SIX DAYS 
BEFORE THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 


Time: Six months less one week. 


§ 83. Jesus at the Festival of Tabernacles. ' His public teaching.—Jerusalem. 
Joun VII. 11—53. VIII. 1. 


11, CPE ode Tevdein: ἐζήτουν αὐτὸν ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ καὶ ἔλεγον" mov ἐστιν ἐχεῖνος 
12 Καὶ γογγυσμὸς πολὺς περὶ αὐτοῦ ἦν ἐν τοῖς ὄχλοις. οἱ μὲν ἔλεγον" ὅτι ἀγαϑός 
13 ἐστιν. ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον" οὔ" ἀλλὰ πλανᾷ τὸν ὄχλον. Οὐδεὶς μέντοι παῤῥησίᾳ 
14 ἐλάλει περὶ αὐτοῦ διὰ τὸν φόβον τῶν Ιουδαίων. Ἤδη δὲ τῆς ἑορτῆς μεσούσης 
16 ἀνέβη ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν καὶ ἐδίδασκε. Καὶ ἐθαύμαζον οἱ ᾿]Ιουδαῖοι λέγον- 
16 τες" πῶς οὗτος γράμματα οἷδε μὴ μεμαϑηκχώς ; "AnexoiOn οὖν αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾽]η- 
17 σοῦς καὶ εἶπεν" ἡ ἐμὴ διδαχὴ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμή, ἀλλὰ τοῦ πέμψαντός με"! ἐάν τις 

ϑέλῃ τὸ ϑέλημα αὐτοῦ ποιεῖν, γνώσεται περὶ τῆς διδαχῆς, πότερον ἐκ τοῦ ϑεοῦ 
18 ἐστιν, ἢ ἐγὼ am ἐμαυτοῦ λαλῶ. ‘O ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ λαλῶν τὴν δόξαν τὴν ἰδίαν ζητεῖ, 

ὁ δὲ ζητῶν τὴν δύξαν τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτόν, οὗτος ἀληϑής ἐστι, καὶ ἀδικία ἐν 
19 αὐτῷ οὐκ ἔστιν. Οὐ Μωῦσῆς δέδωκεν ὑμῖν τὸν γόμον; καὶ οὐδεὶς ἐξ ὑμῶν 
20 ποιεῖ τὸν νόμον. τί μὲ ζητεῖτε ἀποχτεῖναι ; “AmexpiOn ὃ ὕχλος καὶ εἶπε" δαιμό- 
21 mov ἔχεις " τίς σε ζητεῖ ἀποκτεῖναι; ᾿Α΄πεχρίϑη ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " ἕν 
22 ἔργον ἐποίησα, καὶ πάντες ϑαυμάζετε! διὰ τοῦτο. Μωῦσῆς δέδωκεν ὑμῖν τὴν 

περιτομήν, (οὐχ ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ Μωῦσέως ἐστιν, ἀλλ ἐκ τῶν πατέρων,) καὶ ἐν 
23 σαββάτῳ περιτέμνετε ἄνϑρωπον." Εἰ περιτομὴν λαμβάνει ἄνϑρωπος ἐν σαββά- 

τῷ, ἵνα μὴ λυϑῇ ὁ νόμος Μοωῦσέως, ἐμοὶ χολᾶτε, ὅτι ὅλον ἄνϑρωπον ὑγιῆ ἐποίησα 
2425 ἐν σαββάτῳ ; Μὴ κρίνετε κατ ὄψιν, ἀλλὰ τὴν δικαίαν κρίσιν κρίνατε. Ἔλεγον 

οὖν τινες ἐκ τῶν “]εροσολυμιτῶν" οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν, ὃν ζητοῦσιν ἀποκτεῖναι ; 





® 22. Lev. 12, 8, 





§ 83.] THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES. 91 


ij 


JOHN VII. 





‘ 5 ~ A ~ . ~ 
26 ' καὶ ide, παῤῥησίᾳ λαλεῖ, καὶ οὐδὲν αὐτῷ λέγουσι " μήποτε ἀληϑῶς ἔγνωσαν οἱ 
¥ Ty ~ € ~ 
27 ἄρχοντες, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν [ἀληθῶς] ὁ Χριστός; ! ἀλλὰ τοῦτον οἴδαμεν πόϑεν 
28 ἐστίν" ὁ δὲ Χριστὸς ὅταν ἔρχηται, οὐδεὶς γινώσκει πόϑεν ἐστίν. Ἔχραξεν οὖν 
3 ~ ¢ ~ 7 . es ~ ‘ , 3 3°-% an 4 a , x. Ὁ 
ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ OiWaoxav ὁ ]ησοῦς καὶ λέγων" noms οἰδατε, καὶ οἰδατὲ πόϑεν εἰμί" 
Sh? δὲ (5 ~ 5 So ἡ > > 4 3 ‘ « , a « ~ > 
καὶ ἀπ ἐμαυτοῦ οὔκ. ἐληλυϑα, αλλ ἔστιν ἀληϑινὸς ὃ πέμψας με, ὃν ὑμεῖς οὐκ 
29 80 οἶδατε. Ἐγὼ οἶδα αὐτόν, ὅτι mag αὐτοῦ εἰμι, κἀκεῖνός με ἀπέστειλεν. ᾿Ἐζή- 
+ > 4 , ‘ Ig \ a) ip > 9 = eae 4 ~ og» + 
τουν οὖν αὑτὸν πιάσαι, καὶ οὔδεις ἐπέβαλεν Em αὐτὸν τὴν χεῖρα, OTL οὕπω 
31 ἐληλύϑει ἡ ὧρα αὐτοῦ. Πολλοὶ δὲ ἐκ τοῦ ὄχλου ἐπίστευσαν εἰς αὐτὸν καὶ ἔλε- 
σ ς , σ wt ? , ~ , “ὩΣ t ru 
at ‘ott ὃ Χριστὸς, ὁταν ἔλϑῃ, μήτι πλείονα σημεῖα τούτων πράσει ὧν οὗτος 
32 ἐποίησεν; ᾿Ἤκουσαν οἱ Φαρισαῖοι tov ὄχλου yoy γύζοντος περὶ αὐτοῦ ταῦτα, 
3 
καὶ ἀπέστειλαν οἱ τ αριῥαῖοὶ καὶ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς, ὑπηρέτας, (vO πιάσωσιν αὐτόν. 
33 Εἶπεν οὖν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς " ἔτι μικρὸν χρόνον μεϑ' ὑμῶν εἶμι, καὶ ὑπάγω πρὸς τὸν 
eT ~ 
34 πέμψαντά με. Ζητήσετέ με, καὶ οὐχ εὑρήσετε" καὶ ὅπου εἰμὶ ἐγώ, ὑμεῖς οὐ δύ- 
Ὦ Sag Gs JUOTR “e 
35 γασϑε ἐλϑεῖν. Εἶπον οὖν οἱ Iovdaior πρὸς ἑαυτούς" ποῦ οὗτος μέλλει πορεύε- 
σ ¢€ ~ > εἴ 2 ἀν, ‘ > ‘ ‘ ~ ¢ , ,» ‘ 
σϑαι, OTL ἡμεῖς οὐχ εὑρήσομεν αὑτὸν ; μὴ εἰς τὴν διασπορὰν τῶν ᾿Ελλήνων μέλλει 
σ τ a 
36 πορεύεσϑαι καὶ διδάσκειν τοὺς Ελληνας ; Tig ἐστιν οὗτος ὁ λόγος, ov sine: 
, , 4 9 BOA "δ S8SUi9) λει, > g? 3 ψ, 
ζητήσετέ με, καὶ οὐχ εὑρήσετε, καὶ ὁποῦ εἶμι ἐγώ, ὑμεῖς οὐ δύνασϑε ἐλϑεῖν ; 
381 Ἐν δὲ τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ τῇ μεγάλῃ τῆς ἑορτῆς εἱστήκει ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ ἔκραξε λέ- 
38 yor" ἐάν τις διψᾷ, ἐρχέσϑω πρός μὲ καὶ πινέτω. ᾿Ο πιστεύων εἰς ἐμέ, καϑὼς 
~ ~ 7 ~ ~ 
39 εἶπεν ἡ γραφή, ποταμοὶ ἐκ τῆς κοιλίας αὐτοῦ ῥεύσουσιν ὕδατος ζῶντος. Τοῦτο 
~ τ 
δὲ εἶπε περὶ τοῦ πνεύματος, ov ἔμελλον λαμβάνειν οἱ πιστεύοντες εἰς αὐτόν" 
- σ ~ ~ 
40 οὔπω γὰρ ἦν πνεῦμα ἅγιον, ὅτι ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς οοὐδέπω ἐδοξάσϑη. Πολλοὶ οὖν ἐκ τοῦ 
᾿ Ἔ.Ὁ 3 - 
41 ὄχλου ἀκούσαντες τὸν λόγον ἔλεγον" ovtog ἔστιν ἀληϑῶς ὁ προφήτης. "Ἄλλοι 
ἔλεγον" οὗτός ἐστιν ὃ Χριστός. ἄλλοι δὲ ἔλεγον" μὴ γὰρ éx τῆς I ἁλιλαίας ὃ ὃ 
42 Χριστὸς ἔρχεται ; Οὐχὶ ἡ 7 γραφὴ εἶπεν, ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ σπέρματος Aavid καὶ ἀπὸ 
43 Βηϑλεὲμ τῆς κώμης, ὃ ὅπου ἦν Δαυΐδ, ὃ Χριστὸς ἔρχεται;" Σχίσμα οὖν ἐν τῷ 
4 x. oe 5 > ~ , - ee” > > > A 
44 ὄχλῳ ἐγένετο δί αὐτόν. Τινὲς δὲ ἤϑελον ἐξ αὑτῶν πιάσαι iia ἀλλ οὐδεὶς 
45 ἐπέβαλεν ἐπὶ αὐτὸν τὰς KEigas. 7H Gov οὖν ot ὑπηρέται πρὸς τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ 
46 Φαρισαίους" καὶ εἶπον αὐτοῖς ἐκεῖνοι" διὰ τί οὐκ ἠγάγετε αὐτόν ; ᾿ΑΙπεκρίϑησαν 
¥. 
οἱ ὑπηρέται" οὐδέποτε οὕτως ἐλάλησεν ἄνθρωπος, ὡς οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρωπος. 
» - 4 ~ 
4748 "AnexpiOnoar οὖν αὐτοῖς οἱ Φαρισαῖοι" μὴ καὶ ὑμεῖς πεπλάνησϑε; Μή τις ἐκ 
~ 9 ΄ ἃ > κὸν δα ov Φ , >A? 6 dby2 τ 
49 τῶν ἀρχόντων ἐπίστευσεν εἰς αὐτὸν ἢ ἐκ τῶν Φαρισαίων ; ὁ ὄχλος οὔτοβ, 
50 ὁ μὴ γινώσκων τὸν νόμον, ἐπικατάρατοί εἰσι. Asyes Nixodquog πρὸς αὐτούς, ὁ 
51 ἐλϑὼν ψυχτὸς πρὸς αὐτόν, εἷς ὧν ἐξ αὐτῶν" μὴ ὁ γ»όμος ἡμῶν κρίνει τὸν ἄν- 
52 ϑρῶώπον, ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ παρ αὐτοῦ πρότερον καὶ γνῷ, τί ποιεῖ; ᾿Απεχρίϑησαν 
᾿ς ἂν > ~ ‘ ) σὺ dx ane Ladiloluc eb: δα ΜΕΝ \%y ὦ , 
καὶ εἶπον αὐτῷ " μὴ καὶ σὺ ἐκ τῆς Γαλιλαίας εἶ; ἐρεύνησον καὶ ἰδὲ, ὅτι προφή- 
ang ἐχ τῆς Γαλιλαίας οὐκ ἐγήγερται. 
53. VIII.1 Καὶ ἐπορεύϑη ἕκαστος εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὑτοῦ ": ᾿Ιησοῦς δὲ ἐφομεύθη εἰς 


τὸ ὅρος τῶν ἐλαιῶν. 





@ 38. Is. 55. 1. 68, 11. Comp. Is. 44, 3. Zech. 13, 1. 14, 8. 
> 42.-Comp. Ps. 89, 4. 132, 11. Mic. 5, 1 [2]. 


92 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES [Parr VI. 





§ 84. The Woman taken in Adultery.—Jerusalem. - 


2 4 , , > A € ld 4 ~ a 
2 “Ορϑρου δὲ πάλιν παρεγένετο εἰς τὸ ἱερόν, καὶ πᾶς ὁ Lads ἤρχετο πρὸς αὐὖ- 
eR A ? 3q/ > LA + \ « ~ A « ~ 
3 tov" χαὶ καϑισὰς ἐδίδασκεν αὐτούς. “Ayovot δὲ οἱ γραμματεῖς καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι 
‘ > Ἁ ~ > 
πρὸς αὕτον γυναῖκα ἕν μοιχείᾳ κατειλημμένην, καὶ στήσαντες αὐτὴν ἐν μέσῳ 
4 ᾿ λέγουσιν αὐτῷ" διδάσκαλε, αὕτη ἡ γυνὴ κατειλήφϑη ἐπὶ αὐτοφώρῳ μοιχευομένη. 
> A ~ 7 -“— ~ ~ 5 ~ 
5 Ey δὲ τῷ νόμῳ Μωῦσῆς ἡμῖν ἐνετείλατο τὰς τοιαύτας λιϑοβυλεῖσϑαι "" ov οὖν 
, , ~ \ » “Ἢ ~ 
6 zi λέγεις ; Τοῦτο δὲ ἔλεγον πειράζοντες αὐτόν, iva ἔχωσι κατηγορεῖν αὐτοῦ. ὁ 
ἈΦ ~ , , ~ Ἢ ~ 
7 δὲ Ijoovg xatm κύψας, τῷ δακτύλῳ ἔγραφεν εἰς τὴν γῆν. Ὡς δὲ ἐπέμενον 
> ~ > ΄ ~ ~ 
ἐρωτῶντες αὐτόν, ἀνακύψας εἶπε πρὸς αὐτούς" ὁ ἀναμάρτητος ὑμῶν πρῶτος 
8 9 τὸν λίϑον ἐπὶ αὐτῇ βαλέτω. Καὶ πάλιν κάτω κύψας ἔγραφεν εἰς τὴν γῆν. Οἱ 
\ 3 [4 ἃ τὸ Α ~ : τ > , 3 7 ad > r > 
δὲ ἀκούσαντες καὶ ὑπὸ τῆς δυνειδήσεως ἐλεγχόμενοι ἐξήρχοντο εἷς xad’ εἷς, ἀρ- 
ξάμενοι ἀπὸ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων ἕως τῶν ἐσχάτων καὶ κατελείφϑη μόνος ὁ ᾽]η- 
~ = re A 5 , « ~ > , A ae ~ 4 , , 
10 σοὺς καὶ ἡ γυνὴ ἕν μέσῳ ἑστῶσα. “Avaxvwag δὲ ὁ Inoovs καὶ μηδένα ϑεασά- 
ἕγος πλὴν τῆς γυναικὸς εἶπεν αὐτῇ " ἡ γυνή, ποῦ εἰσιν ἐχεῖνοι οἱ κατήγοροί σου ; 
“ ῆ γυνὴ) [700 ; 
ε A ~ ~ . 
11 οὐδείς σὲ κατέχρινεν ; Ἢ δὲ εἶπεν" οὐδείς, κύριε. εἶπε δὲ αὐτῇ ὃ ᾿]ησοῦς οὐδὲ 
ἐγώ GE καταχρίνω. πορεύου καὶ μηκέτι ἁμάρτανε. 


§ 85. Further public teaching of our Lord. He reproveés the unbelieving Jews, and 
escapes from their hands.—Jerusalem. 


Joun VIII. 12—59. 

12 Πάλιν οὖν ὁ ᾿Ἰησοῦς αὐτοῖς ἐλάλησε λέγων" ἐγώ εἰμι τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμον" ὁ 
> ~ 3 Ἃ > ‘A , > ~ , > > ‘ ~ ~ ~ 
ἀκολουϑῶν ἐμοὶ οὐ μὴ περιπατήσει ἐν τῇ σχοτίᾳ, GAL ἕξει τὸ φῶς τῆς ζωῆς. 

13 Εἶπον οὖν αὐτῷ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι" σὺ περὶ σεαυτοῦ μαρτυρεῖς " ἡ μαρτυρία Cov οὐκ 

~ ~ av - * 

14 ἔστιν ἀληϑής. “Anexoidy ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " κἂν ἐγὼ μαρτυρῶ περὶ 
5» ~ > , > ε , 7 , - 4 ~ ¢ , Ὁ 
ἐμαυτοῦ, ἀληϑής ἐστιν ἡ μαρτυρία μου, ὁτι οἶδα πόϑεν ἦλϑον καὶ ποῦ ὑπάγω 
e ~ A > ἮΝ , » ‘ ~ ε , « ~ A A ᾽ 

15 ὑμεῖς δὲ οὐκ οἰδατε, ποϑὲεν ἔρχομαι, καὶ ποῦ ὑπάγω. “Ὑμεῖς κατὰ τὴν σάρκα 

6 , 3 ‘ > , NOE: K \ 98 , δὲ > , « , £ Ὁ. A ah on 

16 χρίνετε, ἐγὼ οὐ κρίνω οὐδένα. αἱ ἐὰν χρίνω δὲ ἐγώ, ἡ κρίσις ἡ ἐμὴ ἀληϑής 
> σ , > 9? > 2').2:>, 3 A #2 , Ud Κ ι » ~ , 

17 ἐστιν, OTL μόνος οὐχ εἰμί, ἀλλ ἐγὼ καὶ ὃ πέμψας μὲ πατήρ. Καὶ & τῷ νόμῳ 

‘ τ, , 4 b @ ἤ > , φ , > , > 
δὲ τῷ ὑμετέρῳ γέγραπται" ot δύο ἀνθρώπων ἡ μαρτυρία ἀληϑὴς ἐστιν. 
18 Ἐγώ εἶμι ὁ μαρτυρῶν περὶ ἐμαυτοῦ, καὶ μαρτυρεῖ περὶ ἐμοῦ ὁ πέμψας μὲ πατήρ. 
Dive ~ ~ mn 

19 Ἔλεγον οὖν αὐτῷ nov ἔστιν ὁ πατήρ σου ; ἀπεχρίϑη ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς " οὔτε ἐμὲ oidate 
» ‘ , δι. 2+ 1.58 4 A , 4 a ~ ‘ 

20 οὔτε τὸν πατέρα pov’ εἰ ἐμὲ ἤδειτε, καὶ τὸν πατέρα pov ἤδειτε ἄν. Ταῦτα τὰ 

~ ~ ~ ~ ‘ 

ῥήματα ἐλάλησεν [ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς] ἐν τῷ γαζοφυλακίῳ διδάσκων ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ" καὶ 
> ‘ 2. "αὶ ee | σ » 3 , «Ὁ ? ~ 
οὐδεὶς ἐπίασεν αὑτὸν, Ort οὕπω ἐληλύϑει ἡ WEA αὑτοῦ. 

3 , 3 wo 2 Ads ~ 2 A Tee , ‘ , , \ > ~ 

21 Εἶπεν οὖν πάλιν αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς" ἐγὼ ὑπάγω, καὶ ζητήσετέ με, καὶ ἐν τῇ 

- ~ ~ > , > ~ 
ἁμαρτίᾳ ὑμῶν ἀποϑανεῖσϑε" ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπάγω ὑμεῖς ov δύνασϑε ἐλϑεῖν. 
- ~ σ / ᾽ σ > A , 
22 Ἔλεγον οὖν οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι" μήτι ἀποκτενεῖ ἑαυτόν, ὅτι λέγει" ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπάγω, 
- - e ~ > vd , > a Pee 
23 ὑμεῖς ov δύνασϑε ἐλϑεῖν; Kai εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " ὑμεῖς ἐκ τῶν κάτω ἐστέ, ἐγὼ ἐκ 
~ ~ ‘ He) > ~ 
τῶν ἄνω εἰμί" ὑμεῖς ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου τούτου ἐστέ, ἐγὼ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ TOV κόσμου 





46, Lev. 20, 10, Comp. Deut. 22, 31. b 18. Deut. 17, 6. Comp. Deut. 19, 15. 











i a ae lia ka 





δ ΣΦ 











§§ 84, 85. UNTIL OUR LORD'S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. 93 





24 
25 


26 
ΟἿ 
28 


29 


JOHN VIII. 
, Ἧ ~ σ - pe ~ 4 i 
τούτου. Εἶπον οὖν ὑμῖν, ὅτι ἀποϑανεῖσϑε ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν" ἐὰν γὰρ 
\ , a a! 6 Per ~ > ων ee , CW «ὦ 4 7. 
μὴ πιστεύσητε, Ort ἐγὼ εἰμι, ἀποϑανεῖσϑε ἐν ταῖς ἁμαρτίαις ὑμῶν. ἔλεγον οὖν 
? id A , 4A 5 ~ cs ~ 4 > A σ A > nee. 
αὐτῷ" ov τίς εἶ; καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς" τὴν ἀρχὴν ὃ, τι καὶ λαλῶ ὑμῖν. 

Aa ow ᾿ ~ ab ‘ , , 
Tlolia ἔχω περὶ ὑμῶν λαλεῖν καὶ χρίνειν" ἀλλ᾿ ὁ πέμψας pe ἀληϑής ἐστι, κἀγώ, 
Ἃ» ~ σ ‘ 
ἃ ἤκουσα. παρ᾽ αὐτοῦ, ταῦτα λέγω εἰς τὸν κόσμον. Οὐκ ἔγνωσαν, ὅτι τὸν 
πατέρα αὐτοῖς ἔλεγεν. Εἶπεν οὖν ἀὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦρ᾽ ὅταν ὑψώσητε τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ 
ἀνθρώπου, τότε γνώσεσϑε, ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι καὶ ἀπὶ ἐμαυτοῦ ποιῶ ude, ἀλλὰ 
καϑὼς ἐδίδαξέ μὲ ὁ πατήρ μου, ταῦτα λαλῶ, ! καὶ 6 πέμψας με pet ἐμοῦ ἐστιν" 

> > ~ , σ ᾿ - ~ 
οὐκ ἀγῆκέ ME μόνον ὁ πατήρ, OTL ἐγὼ τὰ ἀρεστὰ αὐτῷ ποιῶ πάντοτε. 


~ ~ ~ Mf 
8081 Ταῦτα αὐτοῦ λαλοῦντος, πολλοὶ ἐπίστευσαν εἰς αὐτόν. Ἔλεγεν οὖν 6 ’ In- 


32 
33 
34 


ΡΝ \ \ , 5 EN da , aN ¢€ ~ , > δὲ , 
σοὺς πρὸς τοὺς πεπισεευχότας αὑτῷ ]ουδαίους " ἐὰν ὑμεῖς μείνητε ἐν τῷ λόγῳ 
~ > » ? ~ - 4 ; ‘ 
τῷ ἐμῷ, αληϑῶς μαϑηταί μου ἐστέ, ' καὶ γνώσεσϑε τὴν ἀλήϑειαν, καὶ ἡ ἀλή- 
> , ¢ ~ ~ 4 A 
Dem ἐλευϑερώσει ὑμᾶς. “Anexgidyoar αὐτῷ" σπέρμα ᾿Α΄βραάμ ἐσμεν καὶ οὐδενὶ 
, , ~ A 4 
δεδουλεύχαμὲν πώποτε" πῶς σὺ λέγεις - Ott ἐλεύϑεροι γενήσεσϑε; “Anexgidy 
> ~ ee! ~ A τ A C ἂν σ ~ ~ ‘ ~ 
αὐτοῖς ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς " ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι πᾶς ὁ ποιῶν τὴν ἁμαρτίαν δοῦλός 
> ~ e , «ς A ~ > , > “« > 2? > 4 9 «ὦ «ς cA 
ἐστι τῆς ἁμαρτίας. O δὲ δοῦλος ov μένει Ev τῇ οἰκίᾳ εἰς TOY αἰῶνα" ὃ υἱὸς 
, > \ 27~ Jyh 4 eee cA οὐ Ἂν» 3. , μή 3 , Υ 
μένει εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα. Eayv οὐν ὁ υἱὸς ὑμᾶς ἐλευϑερώσῃ, ὄντως ἐλευϑεροι ἐσεσϑε. 
O78 a , 7A , > , ἡχλὰ ζ i) ἃ > ~ σ΄ ε Loy erus τᾷ 
Oa, ott σπέρμα ABouau ἔστε" ἀλλὰ ζητεῖτέ μὲ ἀποχτεῖναι, ort ὃ λόγος ὁ ἐμὸς 
~ 3 ~ a ~ ~ A ~ 1 δ 
οὐ χωρεῖ ἕν ὑμῖν. ᾿Εγὼ ὃ ἑώρακα παρὰ τῷ πατρί μου λαλῶ: καὶ ὑμεῖς οὖν ὃ 
A ~ ‘ ~ ~ ‘ 5 ‘ed 
ἑωράκατε παρὰ τῷ πατρὶ ὑμῶν ποιεῖτε. "AnExoiOnoay καὶ εἶχον αὐτῷ" ὁ 
A Cusp Of. .3 / 3 , > ~~ €¢ 9 ~ > , ~ 3 ‘ “ 
πατὴρ ἡμῶν ᾿Α΄'βραὰμ ἐστι. λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἰ τέκνα tov ᾿Αβραὰμ ἥτε, 
\ oF ~> his wets Ν 7" \ An? > ὧν EY . 
τὰ ἔργα τοῦ ABowapu ἐποιεῖτε ἄν. Nov δὲ ζητεῖτέ we ἀποκτεῖναι, ἄνϑρωπον, 
“Δι' A > ’ € ~ , a 7 ‘ ~ ~ ~ 3 A > 
og τὴν ἀλήϑειαν ὑμῖν λελάληκα, ἣν ἤκουσα παρὰ τοῦ ϑεοῦ" τοῦτο APoaup οὐκ 
- - ~ % ~ g ~ ~ 3 
ἐποίησεν. Ὑμεῖς ποιεῖτε τὰ ἔργα τοῦ πατρὸς ὑμῶν. εἶπον οὖν αὐτῷ ἡμεῖς ἐκ 
\ 7 ἊΝ ε 
πορνείας οὐ γεγεννήμεϑα" ἕνα πατέρα ἔχομεν, τὸν ϑεόν. Εἶπεν οὖν αὐτοῖς o 
> ~ a4 A \ € ~ ἢ 3 -" Ἃ 3 ’ 9 ὧὺ 4 5 ~ “ 93... 
Ἰησοῦς" εἰ ὁ ϑεὺς πατὴρ ὑμῶν ἣν, ἠγαπᾶτε ἂν ἐμέ" ἐγὼ γὰρ ἐκ τοῦ ϑεοῦ ἐξῆλ-ἅ 
\@ Io \ + Ὁ 2 ~ 5 ἢ > > 3 ~ 7 > , A 
Dov καὶ ἡχῶ" οὐδὲ yao ἀπ ἐμαυτοῦ ἐλήλυϑα, add ἐκεῖνός μὲ améoteihe. Ae 
δι % \ \ be > 4 σ 3 , 3 , \ , A 
τί τὴν λαλιὰν τὴν ἐμὴν οὐ γινώσκετε; ὁτι ov δύυνάσϑε ἀκούειν τὸν oyor τὸν 
3 ‘ € ~ 3 “« A ~ . / 3 κ A A > , Ἱ ~ A 
euov.. Ὑμεῖς ἐκ tov πατρὸς tov διαβόλου ἐστε καὶ τὰς ἐπιϑυμίας τοῦ πατρὸς 
δ δν δ ΣΎ, ΤῸ aed «E6908 ἦν BE WORE HF Bod “δ 
ὑμῶν ϑέλετε ποιεῖν. ἐκεῖνος ἀνϑρωποχτόνος ἣν an ἀρχῆς καὶ ἐν τῇ ἀληϑείᾳ οὐχ 
[ἢ “ ? ” 25 ἢ > ie ee | Oe 4 ~ \ ~ 3 ~ IQ? ~ 
ἕστηκεν, OTL οὐκ ἔστιν ἀλήϑεια ἕν αὐτῷ. OTAY λαλῇ τὸ ψεῦδος, ἐκ τῶν ἰδίων λαλεῖ, 
σ , 9: ἘΝ ΑΚ ¢ \ > ~ 3 \ \ δ A 25 7 t 3 
οτι ψεύστης ἔστι χαὶ ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ. Eyo δὲ ὁτι τὴν ἀληϑειαν λέγω, ov πι- 
, ? i, Ie "ἡ 3) ἢ «Ὁ. τὸ , > gl m7 ALG" A 
oreveté μοι. Τὶς ἐξ ὑμῶν ἐλέγχει μὲ περὶ ἁμαρτίας ; εἰ δὲ ἀλήϑειαν λέγω, διὰ 
ee ~ ? , , «ς Ἃ 3 “ - \ οἷν ~ ~ 9 , ‘ 
Ti ὑμεῖς ov πιστεύετέ μοι; O ὧν ἐκ tov ϑεοῦ τὰ ῥήματα tov ϑεοῦ ἀκούει" διὰ 
μι ¢ ~ ? > , σ 3 - ~ 2 3 , 3 , 3 Θ᾿ 
τοῦτο ὑμεῖς οὐκ ἀκούετε, OTL EX τοῦ ϑεοῦ οὐκ ἐστέ. ᾿α“΄πεχρίϑησαν οὖν οἱ Tov- 
~ ~ ~ ~ σ΄ ἣ \ 4 
δαῖοι καὶ εἶπον αὐτῷ - οὐ καλῶς λέγομεν ἡμεῖς, ὅτι Σαμαρείτης εἶ σὺ καὶ δαιμό- 


” > , > ~ 9s 4 , > ” 3 A ~ κ , 
riov ἔχεις ; “Arexoidy Inoovs: ἐγὼ δαιμόνιον οὐκ ἔχω, ἀλλὰ τιμῷ τὸν πατέρα 


a ¢ ~ > , 4 > 8, A > ~ A le ΕΣ « » 
μου, καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀτιμάζετὲ με. Eyo δὲ ov ζητῶ τὴν δόξαν μου" ἔστιν ὁ ζητῶν 
κ , > ‘ > A , Φίω 4.2 ‘ , Ὃν. 4..ἃ ᾿ , 
καὶ χρίνων. “‘Auny ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἐών τις τὸν λόγον τὸν ἐμὸν τηρήσῃ, ϑάνατον 
> ‘ , > A Fi ee Ef > ~ €. 2 ~ ~ > , 
ov μὴ ϑεωρήσῃ εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα. Εἶπον οὖν αὐτῷ ot ᾿Ιουδαῖοι" νῦν ἐγνώκαμεν, 
σ , mw > ‘ 3 , 4 c ~ 
ὅτι δαιμόνιον ἔχεις. “ABoanau ἀπέϑανε καὶ οἱ προφῆται, καὶ ov λέγεις" ἐάν 
A 
τις τὸν λόγον mov τηρήσῃ, οὐ μὴ γεύσηται ϑανάτου eis τὸν αἰῶνα" μὴ σὺ 
- ‘ ~ σ 
μείζων εἶ τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν ᾿Αβραάμ, ὅςτις ἀπέϑανε; καὶ οἱ προφῆται 


94 


FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES | [Parr VI. 





54 


JOHN VIII. 
ye , ~ ~ 
ameDavov τίνα σεαυτὸν ποιεῖς ; ᾿Α πεχρίϑη Ἰησοῦς» ἐὰν ἐγὼ δοξάζω 


wa ; ε ’ , φ 
ἐμαυτὸν, ἡ δόξα μου οὐδέν ἐστιν" ἔστιν ὁ πατήρ μου ὁ δοξάζων pe, ὃν ὑμεῖς 


55 


56 
57 
58 
59 


, σ ‘ ~ ‘ 
λέγετε, Ott ϑεὸς ὑμῶν ἐστι, ' καὶ οὐκ ἐγνώκατε αὐτόν" ἐγὼ δὲ οἶδα αὐτόν" καὶ 
>A 7 7 > 7 Les g ” 4 ¢ ὅν , 294? > Ue 
ἐᾶν εἰπῶ, OFC οὐκ οἶδα αὑτὸν, ἔσομαι ὅμοιορ, ὑμῶν, ψεύστης" ahh οἶδα αὐτὸν 
καὶ τὸν λόγον αὐτοῦ τηρῶ. ᾿Αβραὰμ ὁ 0 πατὴρ, ὑμῶν» ἠγαλλιάσατο, ἷ tae ἴδῃ τὴν 
ἡμέραν εὴν ἐμήν" καὶ εἶδε καὶ ἐχάρη. Εἶπον οὖν οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι πρὸς αὐτόν" πεν- 
τήκοντα ἔτη οὔπω ἔχεις, καὶ ᾿Αβραὰμ ἑώρακας ; Εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς " ἀμὴν 
3 A ’ c¢ ~ 4 . 
ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, πρὶν ᾿Αβραὰμ γενέσϑαι ἐγώ εἶμι. Ἥραν οὖν λίϑους, ἵνα βάλω- 
σιν ἐπ᾿ αὐτόν" ᾿Ιησοῦς δὲ ἐχρύβη καὶ ἐξῆλϑεν ἐκ τοῦ ἱεροῦ διελϑὼν διὰ μέσου 


᾿αὐτῶν, καὶ παρῆγεν οὕτως. 


§ 86. A Lawyer instructed. Love to our neighbour defined. Parable of the good 


25 
26 
27 


28 
29 
30 


31 
32 
33 
34 


35 


36 
37 


38 
39 


Samaritan.— Near Jerusalem. 


: Luke X. 25—37. 
ΣΥΝ ’ : 
Kai ἰδού, νομικός τις ἀνέστη ἐχπειράζων αὐτὸν καὶ λέγων" διδάσκαλε, τί ποι- 
ld ‘ . - 
ἥσας ζωὴν αἰώνιον κληρονομήσω ; Ὁ δὲ εἶπε πρὸς αὐτόν" ἐν τῷ νόμῳ τί γέγρα- 
πται; πῶς ἀναγινώσκεις ; Ὃ δὲ ἀποχριϑ εὶς εἶπεν "" ἀγαπήσεις κύριον τὸν ϑεόν 
σ - - ~ 
σου ἐξ ὅλης τῆς καρδίας cov καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ψυχῆς cov καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος 
We. σ - , ‘ A , « , 4 
σου καὶ ἐξ ὕλης τῆς διανοίας cov, καὶ τὸν πλησίον cov ὡς σεαυτόν. Εἶπε δὲ 
αὐτῷ ὀρϑῶς ἀπεχρίϑης " τοῦτο ποίει, καὶ ζήσῃ. ὋὉ δὲ ϑέλων δικαιοῦν ἑαυτὸν 
‘ ‘ > ~ 4 ’ 9 , , «ε A EL ~ 
εἶπε πρὸς tov Inoovy’ καὶ τίς ἐστί μου πλησίον ; ὙὝπολαβων δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν" 
a , , > x € ‘ > « , 4 ~ , 
ἄνϑρωπός τις κατέβαινεν ἀπὸ “]ερουσαλὴμ εἰς “Tepiyo, καὶ λῃσταῖς περιέπεσεν" 
a Δὲ 3 , » Faber} A A 3 , 3 ~ > ’ ¢ ~ 
οἵ καὶ ἐχδύσαντες αὐτὸν καὶ πληγὰς ἐπιϑέντες ἀπῆλϑον, ἀφέντες ἡμιϑανῆ τυγ- 
, \ , ae , , > ~ er > \ og 8 
χάνοντα. Κατὰ συγκυρίαν δὲ ἱερεύς tig κατέβαινεν ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ ἐχείνῃ, καὶ ἰδῶν 
» > ~ « , 4 ‘ oh , 4 4 / 
avtov ἀντιπαρῆλϑεν. Ὁμοίως δὲ καὶ Aevizys, γενόμενος κατὰ τὸν τύπον, 
- 5 be I ‘ 
ἐλϑὼν καὶ ἰδὼν ἀντιπαρῆλϑε. «Σαμαρείτης δέ τις ὁδεύων ἦλϑε κατ αὐτόν, καὶ 
ἰδὼν αὐτὸν ἐσπλαγχνίσϑη. Καὶ προςελϑὼν κατέδησε τὰ τραύματα αὐτοῦ, 
5» , ww ‘ 3 , 4 » em ΄΄ δὲ A om ~ a” as 
ἐπιχέων ἔλαιον καὶ οἶνον" ἐπιβιβάσας δὲ αὐτὸν ἔπι τὸ ἰδιον κτῆνος ἤγαγεν αὑτὸν 
τ ~ 4 A 4 > ¢ > A 
εἰς πανδοχεῖον καὶ ἐπεμελήϑη αὐτοῦ. Καὶ ἐπὶ τὴν αὔριον ἐξελϑών, ἐκβαλὼν 
’ 4 ” “ - ‘ > we > , > ~ , @¢ “. 
δύο δηνάρια ἔδωκε τῷ πανδοχεῖ καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ " ἐπιμελήϑητι αὑτοῦ, καὶ ὃ,τι ἂν 
~ 7 ied 
προςδαπανήσῃς, ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ ἐπανέρχεσϑαί με ἀποδώσω σοι. Tis οὖν τούτων τῶν 
~ ~ ~ A , ‘ A 
τριῶν δοκεῖ σοι πλησίον γεγονέναι τοῦ ἐμπεσόντος εἰς τοὺς λῃστάς ; Ο δὲ εἶπεν 
ra ~ 7 ~ ἐν ΤᾺΝ , ‘ , 
ὁ ποιήσας τὸ ἔλεος pet αὐτοῦ. εἶπεν οὖν αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς πορεύου καὶ ov,. 
ποίει ὁμοίως. 


§ 87. Jesus in the house of Martha and Mary.—Bethany. 


Luxe X. 38—42. 
᾿Ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν τῷ πορεύεσϑαι αὐτούς, καὶ αὐτὸς εἰςῆλϑεν εἰς κώμην τινά" 
γυνὴ δέ τις ὀνόματι Magda ὑπεδέξατο αὐτὸν εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὑτῆς. Καὶ τῇδε 
ἦν ἀδελφὴ καλουμένη Μαρία, ἣ καὶ παρακαϑίσασα παρὰ τοὺς πόδας τοῦ ᾿]ησοῦ 





ν 27, Deut. 6, 5. Lev. 19, 18, Comp. Lev. 18, 5. 


wd 


δὲ 86, 87, 88, 89.] UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. ἢ 95 





LUKE xX. 
a” A ~ 7 ~ 
40 yxove τὸν λόγον αὐτὸῦ. Ἡ δὲ Μάρϑα περιεσπᾶτο περὶ πολλὴν διακονίαν " ἐπι- 
- a Ἵ , 
στᾶσα δὲ εἶπε" κύριε, οὐ μέλει σοι, ὅτι ἡ ἀδελφή μου μόνην μὲ κατέλιπε διακο- 
41 γεῖν ; εἰπὲ οὖν αὐτῇ, ἵνα μοι συναντιλάβηται. ᾿“΄ποχριϑεὶς δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῇ ὁ 
> ~ ' ~ 
42 ᾿]ησοῦς - Μάρϑα, Μάρϑα, μεριμνᾷς καὶ τυρβάζῃ περὶ πολλά"! ἑνὸς δέ ἐστι χρεία. 
, A ‘ 2 Ἁ a ’ 3 » 7 x ἫΝ > , 26 23 2. 1. 
Magia δὲ τὴν ἀγαϑὴν μερίδα ἐξελέξατο, ἥτις οὐκ ἀφαιρεϑήσεται ἀπὶ αὐτῆς. 


§ 88. The Disciples again taught how to pray.— Near Jerusalem. 


Luxe XI. 1—13. 

εν ἐν > ~ 2. 3 ’, A , « 3 , a , 

1 Καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ εἶναι αὐτὸν ἐν tome τινὶ προςευχόμενον, ὡς ἐπαύσατο, εἶπέ 
τις τῶν μαϑητῶν αὐτοῦ πρὸς αὐτόν" κύριε, δίδαξον ἡμᾶς προρεύχεσϑαι, καϑὼς 

2 nal Ἰωάννης ἐδίδαξε τοὺς μαϑητὰς αὑτοῦ. Εἶπε δὲ αὐτοῖς " ὅταν προρεύχησϑε, 
Ε. λέγετε" πάτερ ἡμῶν ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς, ἁγιασϑήτω τὸ ὄνομά σου" oh ay 7 
ΝΠ 3 βασιλεία σου" γενηθήτω: τὸ θέλημά σου ὡς ἐν οὐρανῷ καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς" ' σὸν 
᾿ς 4 ἄρτον ἡμῶν τὸν ἐπιούσιον δίδου ἡμῖν τὸ καϑ' ἡμέραν" καὶ ἄφες ἡμῖν τὰς ἁμαρ- 

~ A 4 ‘ ~ ‘ ~ 
τίας ἡμῶν, καὶ γὰρ αὐτοὶ ἀφίεμεν παντὶ ὀφείλοντι ἡμῖν " καὶ μὴ εἰςενέγχῃς ἡμᾶς 
5 εἰς πειρασμόν ἀλλὰ ῥῦσαι ἡμᾶς ἀπὸ τοῦ πονηροῦ. Καὶ εἶπε πρὸς αὐτούς" τίς 
- \ \ 7 ~ 
ἐξ ὑμῶν ἕξει φίλον, καὶ πορεύσεται πρὸς αὐτὸν μεσονυχτίου καὶ εἰπῃ αὐτῷ" φίλε, 
6 χρῆσόν μοι τρεῖς ἄρτους, ' ἐπειδὴ φίλος μου παρεγένδτο ἐξ ὁδοῦ πρός μὲ καὶ οὐκ 
~ ~ ‘ a” ‘ 
7 ἔχω ὃ παραϑήσω αὐτῷ" " κἀκεῖνος ἔσωϑεν ἀποχριϑεὶς εἴπῃ" μῆ mot κόπους 
‘ ‘ ~ 
πάρεχε᾽ ἤδη ἡ ϑύρα κέχλεισται, καὶ τὰ παιδία μου MET ἐμοῦ εἰς τὴν κοίτην εἰσίν" 
> , > A ~ ’» , c w 5» A > , > ~ > A 
8 ov δύναμαι ἀναστὰς δοῦναί σοι. «ἐγὼ υμῖν, εἰ καὶ ov δώσει αὑτῷ ἀναστὰς 





διὰ τὸ εἶναι αὐτοῦ φίλον, διά γε τὴν ἀναίδειαν αὐτοῦ ἐγερϑεὶς δώσει αὐτῷ ὅσων 

, 40 ψὸ hy , 4 aw A U4 Feta ~ Ve Ree 

9 χρήζει. Kayo ὑμῖν λέγω" αἰτεῖτε, καὶ δοϑήσεται ὑμῖν" ζητεῖτε καὶ εὑρήσετε 

, 4 9 , δ΄ “» ~ iY ¢ 5, ~ ; , ‘ ie ~ ¢ 2 

Ὁ xeovere, καὶ ἀνοιγήσεται ὑμῖν. Πᾶς γὰρ ὁ αἰτῶν λαμβάνει, καὶ ὃ ζητῶν εὑρί- 

1h σχει, καὶ τῷ κρούοντι ἀνοιγήσεται. Τίνα δὲ ἐξ ὑμῶν τὸν πονέρα αἰτήσϑι ὁ 

υἱὸς ἄρτον, μὴ λίϑον ἐπιδώσει αὐτῷ ; ἢ καὶ ἰχϑύν, μὴ ἀντὶ χϑύοξ ὄφιν ἐπιδώσει 

ἢ 1218 αὐτῶ; ἢ καὶ ἐὰν κἰτήσῃ Wor, μὴ ἐπιδώσει αὐτῷ δνθρμείον; Εἰ οὖν ὑμεῖς πὸ- 

, γηροὶ ὑπάρχοντες οἴδατε δόματα. ἀγαϑὰ διδόναι τοῖς τέκνοις ὑμῶν, πόσῳ μᾶλλον 
ὁ πατὴρ ὁ ἐξ οὐρανοῦ δώσει πνεῦμα ἅγιον τοῖς αἰτοῦσιν αὐτόν. 


§ 89. The Seventy return.— Jerusalem ? 


Luxe X. 17—24. 

ΟΠ Ὑπέστρεψαν δὲ of ἑβδομήκοντα μετὰ χαρᾶς λέγοντες " κύριε, καὶ τὰ δαιμόνια 
18 ὑποτάσσεται ἡμῖν ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου. Εἶπε δὲ αὐτοῖς" ἐθεώρουν τὸν σατανᾶν 
19 ὡς ἀστραπὴν ἐκ τοῦ οϑρανοῦ". 'πεσόντα. ᾿1δού, ὅϑωβε ὑμῖν τὴν ἐξουσίαν τοῦ 
- πατεῖν ἐπάνω ὄφεων ‘yak σκορπίων, καὶ ἐπὶ πᾶσαν τὴν» δύναμιν τοῦ ἐχϑροῦ" 
20 καὶ οὐδὲν ὑ ὑμᾶς οὐ μὴ ἀδικήσει. Πλὴν ἐν τούτῳ μὴ χαίρδτε, ὅτι τὰ πνεύματα 
; ὑμῖν ὑποτάσσεται" χαίρετε δὲ [μᾶλλον], ὅτι τὰ ὀνόματα ὑμῶν ἐγράφη ἐν τοῖς 
21 οὐρανοῖς. Ἔν αὐτῇ τῇ ὥρᾳ ἠγαλλιάσατο τῷ πνεύματι ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς “καὶ εἶπεν" 
ἐξυμολογοῦμαν σοι, πάτερ, κύριε TOV οὐρανοῦ καὶ τῆς γῆς, ὅτι ἀπέμρυψας Ὁ ταῦτα 
ἀπὸ σοφῶν καὶ συνετῶν καὶ ἀπεκάλυψας "αὐτὰ" νηπίοις. ναί, ὁ πατήρ, ὅτι ov- 





- 


96 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES. [Parr VI. 





LUKE X. 
>, 7 > ἢ: ἀν ’ - τ 4 4 ‘ 4 ‘ 
22 τῶς ἐγένετο εὐδοκία ἔμπροσϑέν cov. Καὶ στραφεὶς πρὸς τοὺς μαϑητὰς εἶπε" 
πάντα μοι παρεδόϑη ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρός μου" καὶ οὐδεὶς γινώσκει, τίς ἐστιν O υἱός, 
ne < ee ὦ « , ae” wae Cc? . er ὁπ τὶ , g 2908 
εἰ μὴ ὁ πατήρ, καὶ τίς ἐστιν ὃ πατήρ, & μὴ ὃ υἱὸς, καὶ @ ἕὰν βούληται ὁ υἱὸς 
3 , A 4 A \ A > 34 , τς 
23 ἀποχαλύψαι. Καὶ στραφεὶς πρὸς τοὺς μαϑητὰς κατ᾽ ἰδίαν εἶπε" μακάριοι οἱ 
« ~ 7 ~ 
24 ὀφϑαλμοὶ oi βλέποντες, ἃ βλέπετε. “έγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, ὅτι πολλοὶ προφῆται καὶ 
Pe , 2. ν aie ae 5: 4 > 5 a2 ~ a > , 
βασιλεῖς ἠϑέλησαν ἰδεῖν, ἃ ὑμεῖς βλέπετε, καὶ οὐκ εἶδον, καὶ ἀκοῦσαι, ἃ ἀκούετε, 
καὶ οὐκ ἤκουσαν. 


§ 90. A man born blind is healed on the Sabbath. Our Lord’s subsequent dis- 
courses.—Jerusalem. 


Joun IX, 1—41. X.1—21. 
1 2 K A ; ὃ rh) » ὃ de 3 ~ K 5 ld 5 | ε 
αἱ παράγων εἶδεν ἄνϑρωπον τυφλὸν ἐκ γενετῆς. αἱ ἠρώτησαν αὐτὸν οἱ 
ιμαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ λέγοντες" ῥαββί, τίς ἥμαρτεν; οὗτος ἢ οἱ γονεῖς αὐτοῦ, ἵνα 
‘ ~ > , 3 .- a+ τ σ + c ~ > 
τυφλὸς γεννηθῇ; “AnexelOn ᾿]ησοῦς" οὔτε οὗτος ἥμαρτεν οὔτε οἱ γονεῖς αὖ- 
τοῦ, ἀλλ᾿ iva φανερωϑῇ τὰ ἔργα τοῦ ϑεοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ. ᾿Ἐμὲ δεῖ ἐργάζεσϑαι τὰ 
ἔργα τοῦ πέμψαντός με, ἕως ἡμέρα ἐστίν" ἔρχεται νύξ, ὅτε οὐδεὶς δύναται ἐργά- 
5 6 ζεσϑαι. “Orav ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ ὦ, φῶς εἰμι τοῦ κόσμου. Ταῦτα εἰπὼν ἔπτυσε 
χαμαί, καὶ ἐποίησε πηλὸν ἐκ τοῦ πτύσματος, καὶ ἐπέχρισε τὸν πηλὸν ἐπὶ τοὺς 
7 ὀφϑαλμοὺς τοῦ τυφλοῦ, ! καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ " ὕπαγε, νίψαι. εἰς τὴν κολυμβήϑραν 
τοῦ Σιλωάμ (ὃ ἑρμηνεύεται ἀπεσταλμένος). ἀπῆλϑεν οὖν καὶ ἐνίψατο, καὶ TAGE 
8 βλέπων. Oi οὖν γείτονες καὶ οἱ ϑεωροῦντες αὐτὸν τὸ πρότερον, ὅτι προφαίτης 
ἦν, ἔλεγον " οὐχ οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ καϑήμενος καὶ προςφαιτῶν ; "Αλλοι ἔλεγον" ὅτι 
f= 4 > a , 7 “ > oo > > ~ ” r. σ > , > 
οὑτός ἐστιν. ἄλλοι δὲ" OTL ὁμοῖος αὐτῷ ἔστιν. ἐχεῖνος ἔλεγεν" OTL ἐγὼ εἰμι. 
10 11 Ἔλεγον οὖν αὐτῷ " πῶς ἀνεῳῴχϑησάν cov οἱ ὀρϑαλμοί; ᾿Α΄ πεχρίϑη ἐκεῖνος καὶ 
~ Α 
εἶπεν᾽ ἄνθρωπος λεγόμενος ᾿Ιησοῦς πηλὸν énoinos καὶ ἐπέχρισέ μον τοὺς ὁφ- 
σ A ~ 4 
ϑαλμούς, καὶ εἶπέ por ὕπαγε εἰς τὴν κολυμβήϑραν τοῦ Σιλωὰμ καὶ νίψαι: 
3 ~~ “- ~ 
12 ἀπελϑὼν δὲ καὶ νιψάμενος ἀνέβλεψα. Εἶπον οὖν «αὐτῷ " ποῦ ἐστιν ἐχεῖνος ; 
λέγει" οὐκ οἶδα. 
KJ 
1314 "ἄγουσιν αὐτὸν πρὸς τοὺς Φαρισαίους, τόν more τυφλόν. “Hy δὲ σάββατον, 
σ 4 ἔφ, , εν “ eee EP ἌΡΑΣ ΝΣ Ἃ» , 
15 ὅτε τὸν πηλὺν ἐποίησεν ὁ Incovg καὶ ἄνέφξεν αὐτοῦ τοὺς ὀῳϑαλμοὺς. Παλιν 
“ 3 , 35." ‘ c ~ ~ > , c δὲ i > ew A 
οὖν ἠρώτων αὐτὸν καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι, πῶς ἀνέβλεψεν. ὁ δὲ εἶπεν avtoig* πηλὸν 
] : Ἵ 
16 ἐπέϑηχέ μου ἐπὶ τοὺς ὀφϑαλμούς, καὶ ἐγιψάμην, καὶ βλέπω. Ἔλεγον οὖν ἐκ 
‘ ~ τ - ~ σ 
τῶν Φαρισαίων τινές" οὗτος ὁ ἄνϑρωπος οὐκ ἔστι παρὰ τοῦ ϑεοῦ, ὅτι τὸ σάβ- 
βατον οὐ τηρεῖ. ἄλλοι ἔλεγον" πῶς δύναται ἄνϑρωπος ἁμαρτωλὸς τοιαῦτα 
17 σημεῖα ποιεῖν ; χαὶ σχίσμα ἦν ἐν αὐτοῖς. ““ἔγουσι τῷ τυφλῷ πάλιν" σὺ τί 
λέγεις περὶ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι ἤνοιξέ σου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς ; ὁ δὲ εἶπεν" ὅτι προφήτης 
18 ἐστίν. Οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν οὖν οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι περὶ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι τυφλὸς ἦν καὶ ἀνέβλε- 
A 
19 yer, ἕως ὕτου ἐφώνησαν τοὺς γονεῖς αὐτοῦ τοῦ ἀναβλέψαντος. Καὶ ἠρώτησαν 
αὐτοὺς λέγοντες" οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ υἱὸς ὑμῶν, ὃν ὑμεῖς λέγετε ὅ ὅτι τυφλὸς ἐγεννήϑη; 
20 πῶς οὖν ἄρτι βλέπει ; ᾿Α΄πεκρίϑησαν αὐτοῖς οἱ γονεῖς αὐτοῦ καὶ εἶπον" οἴδαμεν, 


me ὦ 


© 


21 ὅτι τοὗῦτός ἐστιν ὁ υἱὸς ἡμῶν καὶ ὅτι τυφλὸς ἐγεννήθη" πῶς δὲ νῦν βλέπει, οὐκ 
οἴδαμεν, ἢ τίς ἤνοιξεν αὐτοῦ τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς, ἡμεῖς οὐκ οἴδαμεν" αὐτὸς ἡλικίαν. 





“ 
id 
ἢ 
4 


ΞΘ... τσ σον τα ϑα, οΝ 





ieee σι σῶυσυας,... 











0 ΟΣ ἘῸΝ ee Ὁ 


ὔῶν ih ae 








§ 00. UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. 97 





JOHN ΙΧ. 

22 ἔχει, αὐτὸν ἐρωτήσατε, αὐτὸς περὶ αὑτοῦ λαλήσει. Ταῦτα εἶπον οἱ γονεῖς αὐ- 
“τοῦ, ὅτι ἐφοβοῦντο τοῦς ᾿Ιουδαίους. ἤδη γὰρ συνετέϑειντο οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι, ἵνα ἐάν 
τις αὐτὸν ὁμολογήσῃ Χριστόν, ἀποσυνάγωγος γένηται. Διὰ τοῦτο οἱ γονεῖς 

24 αὐτοῦ εἶπον" ὅτι ἡλικίαν ἔχει, αὐτὸν ἐρωτήσατε. ᾿Εφώνησαν οὖν ἐκ δευτέρου 

τὸν ἄνϑρωπον, ὃς ἦν τυφλός, καὶ εἶπον αὐτῷ" δὸς δόξαν τῷ ϑεῷ ἡμεῖς οἴ- 

26 Samer, ὅτι ὁ ἄνϑρωπος οὗτος ἀμαρίφλόξ ἐστιν. “AneugiOn οὖν éxsivog καὶ 

eimev* εἶ ἁμαρτωλός inet οὐχ ὀἶΐδα ἕν οἶδα, ὅτι τυφλὸς ὧν ἄρτι βλέπω. 

2627 Εἶπον δὲ αὐτῷ πάλιν" τί ἐποίησέ σοι; πῶς ἤνοιξέσου τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς ; “Ane- 

κρίϑη αὐτοῖς" εἶπον ὑμῖν ἤδη, καὶ οὐκ ἠκούσατε" τί πάλιν ϑέλετε ἀκούξιν ; μὴ 

28 καὶ ὑμεῖς ϑέλετε αὐτοῦ μαϑηταὶ γενέσϑαι; Ἐλοιδόρησαν αὐτὸν καὶ εἶπον" 
29 σὺ εἶ μαϑητὴς ἐκείνου" ἡμεῖς δὲ τοῦ Μωῦσέως ἐσμὲν μαϑηταί" " ἡμεῖς οἴδαμεν, 
80 ὅτι Μωῦσῇ λελάληκεν ὁ ϑεός᾽ τοῦτον δὲ οὐκ oidauer πόϑεν ἐστίν. “Ἵπεχρίϑη 

ὁ ἄνθρωπος καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " ἐν γὰρ τούτῳ ϑαυμαστόν ἐστιν, ὅτι ὑμεῖς οὐκ οἴδατε 

31 πόϑεν ἐστί, καὶ ἀνέῳξέ μοὺ τοὺς ὀφθαλμούς. Οἴδαμεν δὲ, ὅτι ἁμαρτωλῶν 6 ϑεὸς 

οὐκ ἀκούει," GAN ἐάν τις ϑεοσεβὴς ἢ ἢ καὶ τὸ ϑέλημα αὐτοῦ ποιῇ, τούτου ἀκούει. 

8233 “Ex tov αἰῶνος οὐκ ἠκούσϑη, ὅτι ἤνοιξέτις ὀφϑαλμοὺς τυφλοῦ ὙΉΝΉΕΝΟν: Εἰ 
34 μὴ ἦν οὗτος παρὰ ϑεοῦ, οὐὰ ἠδύνατο ποιεῖν οὐδέν. ᾿Ἵπεκρίϑησαν : καὶ εἶπον αὐτῷ " 

ἐν ἁμαρτίαις σὺ ἐγεννήϑης ὅλος, καὶ σὺ διδάσκεις ἡμᾶς ; καὶ ἐξέβαλον αὐτὸν ἔξω. 

35 Ἤκουσεν ὁ Ἰησοῦς, ὅτι ἐξέβαλον αὐτὸν ἔξω, καὶ εὑρὼν αὐτὸν εἶπεν αὐτῷ" 
86 σὺ πιστεύεις εἰς τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ϑεοῦ ; ᾿Απεκρίϑη ἐ ἐχεῖνος καὶ εἶπε" τίς ἐστι, κύριε, 
37 ἵνα πιστεύσω εἰς αὐτόν ; Εἶπε δὲ αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς" καὶ ἑώρακας αὐτόν, καὶ ὁ 
38 λαλῶν μετὰ σοῦ éxsivog ἐστιν. Ὃ δὲ ἔφη" πιστεύω, κύριε, καὶ προςζεκύνησεν 
39 αὐτῷ. Καὶ εἶπεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς " εἰς κρίμα ἐγὼ sig τὸν κόσμον τοῦτον ἦλϑον, ἵνα 
40 οἱ μὴ βλέποντες βλέπωσι καὶ οἱ βλέποντες τυφλοὶ γένωνται. Καὶ ἤκουσαν ἐκ 

τῶν Φαρισαίων ταῦτα οἱ ὄντες μετ᾽ αὐτοῦ, καὶ εἶπον αὐτῷ" μὴ καὶ ἡμεῖς τυ- 

41 φλοί ἐσμεν ; Εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦξ᾽ el τυφλοὶ ἦτε, οὐκ ἂν εἴχετε meron ids voy 

δὲ λέγετε " ὅτι βλέπομεν - ἡ οὖν ἁμαρτία, ὑμῶν μένει. 

Χιι ᾿Αμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ὃ μὴ εἰφερχόμενος διὰ τῆς ϑύρας εἰς τὴν αὐλὴν τῶν 
2 προβάτων, ἀλλὰ ἀναβαίνων ἀλλαχόϑεν, ἐκεῖνος κλέπτης ἐστὶ καὶ λῃστής "! 6 δὲ 
3 εἰφερχόμενος διὰ τῆς ϑύρας ποιμήν ἐστι τῶν προβάτω»: Τούτῳ ὁ ϑυρωρὸς 

ἀνοίγει, καὶ τὰ πρόβατα τῆς pers αὐτοῦ ἀλούει, καὶ τὰ tLe πρόβατα καλεῖ 

4 κατ᾽ ὄνομα καὶ ἐξάγει. αὐτά. Καὶ ὅταν τὰ ἴδια πρόβατα ἐχβάλῃ, ἔμπροσϑεν 

αὐτῶν πορεύεται, καὶ τὰ πρόβατα αὐτῷ ἀκολουϑεῖ, ὅτι οἴδασι τὴν φωνὴ» 

5 αὐτοῦ. ᾿“λλοτρίῳ δὲ οὐ μὴ ἀκολουϑήσωσιν, ἀλλὰ φεύξονται ἀπ᾽ αὐτοῦ, ὅτι οὐκ 
θ οἴδασι τῶν ἀλλοτρίων τὴν φωνή». Ταύτην» τὴν παροιμίαν εἶπεν αὐτοῖς 6 Ἴη- 
7 cove’ ἐχεῖνοι δὲ οὐχ ἔγνωσαν, τίνα ἦν, ἃ ἐλάλει αὐτοῖς. Εἶπεν οὖν πάλιν αὐ- 

τοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς" τ» ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι ἐγώ εἶμι ἡ ϑύρα τῶν προβάτων. 

8 Πάντες, ὅσοι πρὸ ἐμοῦ ἤλϑον, κλέπται εἰσὶ καὶ λῃσταί" add οὐκ ἥκουσαν αὐτῶν 
9 τὰ πρόβατα. ᾿Εγώ εἰμι ἡ ϑύρα- δὲ ἐμοῦ ἐάν τις εἰφέλϑῃ, σωϑήσεται, καὶ 


ἵ ς ’ € , > Ν 5 \@7 
10 εἰρελεύσεται καὶ ἐξελεύσεται, καὶ νομὴν εὑρήσει. O χλέπτης οὐκ ἔρχεται, εἰ μὴ ἵνα 


3 Υ ‘ \ f > 
11 χλέψῃ καὶ ϑύσῃ καὶ ἀπολέσῃ" ἐγὼ 7.007, ἵνα ζωὴν ἔχωσι καὶ περισσὸν ἔχωσιν. Ἐγώ 





' 


ἃ 31. Comp. Prov. 28, 9. 
13 


x 


98 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES [Parr VI. 





JOHN X. 
εἶμι ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός. ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλὸς τὴν ψυχὴν αὑτοῦ τίϑησιν ὑπὲρ τῶν προβά- 
12 των" ὁ μισϑωτὸς δὲ καὶ οὐκ ὧν ποιμήν, οὗ οὐκ εἰσὶ τὰ πρόβατα ἴδια, ϑεωρεῖ 
τὸν λύκον ἐρχόμενον, καὶ ἀφίησι τὰ πρόβατα καὶ φεύγει" καὶ ὁ λύκος ἁρπάζει 
18 αὐτὰ καὶ σκορπίζει τὰ πρύβατα. Ὃ δὲ μισϑωτὸς φεύγει, ὅτι μισϑωτός ἐστι 
14 χαὶ οὐ μέλει αὐτῷ περὶ τῶν προβάτων. Hires εἶμι ὁ ποιμὴν ὁ καλός, καὶ γνώ- 
15 oxo τὰ ἐμὰ καὶ γινώσκομαι ὑπὸ τῶν ἐμῶν,! καϑὼς γινώσκει μὲ ὁ πατὴρ κἀγὼ 
16 γινώσχω τὸν πατέρα, καὶ τὴν ψυχήν μου τίϑημι ὑπὲρ τῶν προβάτων. Καὶ 
ἄλλα πρόβατα ἔχω, ἃ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τῆς αὐλῆς ταύτης - κἀκεῖνά με δεῖ ἀγαγεῖν, 
17 χαὶ τῆς φωνῆς μου ἀκούσουσι, καὶ γενήσεται μία ποίμνη, εἷς ποιμήν. Διὰ τοῦτο. 
18 ὁ πατήρ με ἀγαπᾷ, ὅτι ἐγὼ τίϑημι τὴν ψυχήν μου, ἵνα πάλιν λάβω αὐτήν». Οὐδεὶς 
αἴρει αὐτὴν ἀπὶ ἐμοῦ, ἀλλ᾽ ἐγὼ τίϑημι αὐτὴν ἀπ᾽ ἐμαυτοῦ" ἐξουσίαν ἔχω ϑεῖναι 
αὐτήν, καὶ ἐξουσίαν ἔχω πάλιν λαβεῖν αὐτήν. ταύτην τὴν ἐντολὴν ἔλαβον παρὰ 
τοῦ πατρός μου. ς 
1. Σχίσμα οὖν πάλιν ἐγένετο ἐν τοῖς ᾿Ιουδαίοις διὰ τοὺς λόγους τούτους. 
20 Ἔλεγον δὲ πολλοὶ ἐξ αὐτῶν᾽ δαιμόνιον ἔχει καὶ μαίνεται" τί αὐτοῦ ἀκούετε ; 
21 "Ἄλλοι ἔλεγον" ταῦτα τὰ ῥήματα οὐκ ἔστι δαιμονιζομένου " μὴ δαιμόνιον δύναται 
τυφλῶν ὀφθαλμοὺς ἀνοίγειν; 


§ 91. Jesus in Jerusalem at the Festival of Dedication. He retires beyond Jordan.— 
Jerusalem. Bethany beyond Jordan. 


Joun X. 22—42. 
22 28 “Eyéveto δὲ τὰ ἐγκαίνια ἐν τοῖς “Ιεροσολύμοις, καὶ χειμὼν ἦν, ' καὶ περιεπάτει 
24 6 , Ἰησοῦς ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ ἐν εἴ στοᾷ “Σολομῶνος. ᾿Εκύχλωσαν οὖν αὐτὸν οἱ ᾽Ἶου- 
δαῖοι καὶ ἔλεγον αὐτῷ ἕως πότε τὴν ψυχὴν ἡμῶν αἴρεις ; εἰ σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστός, 
25 εἰπὲ ἡμῖν παῤῥησίᾳ. ᾿Α΄Ἰπεκρίϑη αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς εἶπον ὑμῖν, καὶ οὐ πιστεύετε. 
τὰ ἔργα, ἃ ἐγὼ ποιῶ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ πατρός μου, ταῦτα μαρτυρεῖ περὶ ἐμοῦ. 
26 ‘ALL ὑμεῖς οὐ πιστεύετε" οὐ γάρ ἐστε ἐκ τῶν προβάτων τῶν ἐμῶν, καϑὼς εἶπον 
27 ὑμῖν. Τὰ πρόβατα τὰ ἐμὰ τῆς φωνῆς μου ἀκούει, κἀγὼ γιφώσκω αὐτά, καὶ 
28 ἀκολουϑοῦσί μοι, ' κἀγὼ ζωὴν αἰώνιον δίδωμι αὐτοῖς " καὶ οὐ μὴ ἀπόλωνται εἰς 
29 τὸν αἰῶνα, καὶ οὐχ ἁρπάσει τις αὐτὰ ἐκ τῆς χειρός mov. Ὁ πατήρ μου, ὃς 
δέδωκέ μοι, μείζων πάντων ἐστί, καὶ οὐδεὶς δύναται ἁρπάζειν ἐκ τῆς χειρὸς τοῦ 
3031 πατρός μου. Ἐγὼ καὶ ὁ πατὴρ ἕν ἐσμεν. ᾿Εβάστασαν οὖν πάλιν λίϑους οἱ 
32 ᾿Ιουδαῖοι, ἵνα λιϑάσωσιν αὐτόν. ~Anexeidn αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς " πολλὰ καλὰ ἔργα 
38 ἔδειξα ὑμῖν ἐκ τοῦ πατρός μου" διὰ ποῖον αὐτῶν ἔργον λιϑάζετέ με; “Anexoi- 
Dyour αὐτῷ οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι λέγοντες" περὶ καλοῦ ἔργου οὐ λιϑάζομέν σε, ἀλλὰ 
84 περὶ βλασφημίας, καὶ ὅτι σὺ ἄνϑρωπος ὧν ποιεῖς σεαυτὸν ϑεόν. “AmexQidy 


αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς" οὐκ ἔστὶ γεγραμμένον ἐν τῷ νόμῳ ὑμῶν"" ἐγὼ εἶπα, ϑεοί 


35 ἐστε; Εἰ ἐκείνους εἶπε ϑεούς, πρὸς οὺς ὁ λόγος τοῦ ϑεοῦ ἐγένετο, καὶ οὐ δύναται 

36 λυϑῆναι ἡ γραφή" ὃν ὁ 'πατὴρ ἡγίασε καὶ ἀπέστειλεν εἰς τὸν κόσμον, ὑμεῖς 
, ” wo | «A ~ κὰν» aa % ~ ’ Σ 

31 λέγετε" ὅτι βλασφημεῖς, ὅτι εἶπον" υἱὸς τοῦ ϑεοῦ εἶμι; Εἰ ov ποιῶ τὰ ἔργα τοῦ 





® 84, Ps. 82, 6. Comp. Ex. 22, 7 sq. 


S——————— a  St— 


§§ 91, 92.] UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. 99 





1 


, JOHN X. 
38 πατρύς μου, μὴ πιστεύετέ μοι. Εἰ δὲ ποιῶ, κἂν ἐμοὶ μὴ πιστεύητε, τοῖς ἔργοις 
miorebaure, ἵνα γνῶτε καὶ πιστεύσητε, ὅτι ἐν ἐμοὶ ὁ πατήρ, κἀγὼ ἐν αὐτῷ. 
29 ᾿Εζήτουν οὖν πάλιν αὐτὸν πιάσαι" καὶ ἐξῆγϑεν ἐ ἐχ τῆς χειρὸς αὐτῶν." 
40 Καὶ ἀπῆλϑε πάλιν πέραν τοῦ ᾿Ιορδάνου εἰς τὸν τόπον, ὅπου ἦν ᾿Ιωάννης τὸ 
41 πρῶτον βαπτίζων, καὶ ἔμεινεν ἐκεῖ, Καὶ πολλοὶ ἦλϑον πρὸς αὐτὸν καὶ ἔλεγον" 
ὅτι ᾿Ιωάννης μὲν σημεῖον ἐποίησεν οὐδέν, πάντα δέ, ὅσα εἶπεν ᾿Ιωάννης περὶ 
42 τούτου, ἀληϑῆ ἦν. Καὶ ἐπίστευσαν πολλοὶ ἐκεῖ εἰς αὐτόν. 


§ 99. The raising of Lazarus.— Bethany. 


Joun XI. 1—46. 
1. Ἦν δέ τις ἀσϑενῶν, “ἄζαρος ἀπὸ Βηϑανίας, ἐκ τῆς κώμης Μαρίας καὶ 
2 Μάρϑας τῆς ἀδελφῆς αὐτῆς. Ἦν δὲ Μαρία ἡ ἀλείψασα τὸν κύριον μύρῳ καὶ 
ἐκμάξασα τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ ταῖς ϑριξὶν αὑτῆς, ἧς ὁ ἀδελφὸς “άζαρος ἠσϑένει. 
3 ᾿Α΄πέστειλαν οὖν αἱ ἀδελφαὶ πρὸς αὐτὸν λέγουσαι" κύριε, ἴδε, ὃν φιλεῖς, ἀσϑενεῖ. 
4*Axovoug δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν" αὕτη ἡ ἀσϑένεια οὐκ ἔστι πρὸς ϑάνατον, ἀλλ 
ὅ ὑπὲρ τῆς ἰδύξης τοῦ ϑεοῦ, ἵνα δοξασϑῇ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ϑεοῦ δι᾽ αὐτῆς.. ᾿Ἤγάπα δὲ 
6 ὁ ‘Tysovg τὴν Μάρϑαν καὶ τὴν ἀδελφὴν. εὐτῆς καὶ τὸν “Ἵάζαρον. Ὡς οὖν 
7 ἤκουσεν, ὅτι ἀσϑενεῖ, τότε μὲν ἔμεινεν ἐν ᾧ ἦν τόπῳ δύο ἡμέρας. Ἔπειτα μετὰ 
.8 τοῦτο λέγει τοῖς μαϑηταῖς" ἄγωμεν εἰς τὴν ᾿Ιουδαίαν πάλιν. “4έγουσιν αὐτῷ 
οἱ μαϑηταί" ῥαββί, νῦν ἐζήτουν σε λιϑάσαι οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι, καὶ πάλιν ὑπάγεις ἐκεῖ; 
9 ᾿4πεκρίϑη ᾿ησοῦς οὐχὶ δώδεκά εἰσιν ὧραι τῆς ἡμέρας ; ἐάν τις περιπατῇ ἐν 
10 τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, οὐ προρκόπτει, ὅτι τὸ φῶς τοῦ κόσμου τούτου βλέπει" ! ἐὰν δέ τις περι- 
1 πατῇ ἐν τῇ νυκτί; προρκόπεει, ὅτι τὸ φῶς οὐκ ἔστιν ἐν αὐτῷ. Ταῦτα εἶπε, καὶ 
μετὰ τοῦτο λέγει αὐτοῖς " Adlagos ὃ ὁ φίλος ἡ ἡμῶν κεχούμοιξας᾽ ἀλλὰ πορεύομαι, 
12 ἵνα ἐξυπνίσω αὐτόν. Εἶπον οὖν οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ" κύριε, εἰ κεκοίμηται, σωϑῇῆ- 
13 σεται. Εἰρήκει δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς περὶ τοῦ ϑανάτου αὐτοῦ ἐχεῖνοι δὲ ἔδοξαν, ὅτι 
14 περὶ τῆς κοιμήσεως τοῦ ὕπνου λέγει. Τότε οὖν εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς παῤῥη- 
16. σίᾳ: “άζαρος ἀπέϑανε, ' καὶ χαίρω du’ ὑμᾶς, ἵνα πιστεύσητε, ὅτι οὐκ ἤμην 
16 ἐκεῖ" ἀλλ᾿ ἄγωμεν πρὸς αὐτόν. Εἶπεν οὖν Θωμᾶς, 6 λεγόμενος Δίδυμος, τοῖς 
συμμαϑηταῖς" ἄγωνεν καὶ ἡμεῖς, ἵνα ἀποϑάνωμεν μετ αὐτοῦ. 
17 EXO ay οὖν ὁ Ἰησοῦς εὗρεν αὐτὸν τέσσαρας ἡμέρας ἤδη ἔχοντα ἐν τῷ μνημείῳ. 
18 19 Ἦν δὲ ἡ Βηϑανία ἐγγὺς τῶν “]εροσολύμων ὡς ἀπὸ σταδίων δεκαπέντε" " καὶ 
πολλοὶ ἐκ τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων ἐληλύϑεισαν πρὸς τὰς περὶ Πάρϑαν καὶ Μαρίαν, ἵνα 
20 παραμυϑήσωνται αὐτὰς περὶ τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτῶν. Ἢ οὖν Magda ὡς ἤκουσεν, 
21 ὅτι Ἰησοῦς ἔρχεται, ὑπήντησεν αὐτῷ" Μαρία. δὲ ἐν τῷ οἴκῳ ἐκαϑέζετο. Εἶπεν 
οὖν ἡ Μάρϑα πρὸς τὸν Ἰησοῦ»: κύριε, εἰ ἧς ὧδε, ὁ ὁ ἀδελφός μου οὐκ ἂν ἐτεϑνήκει᾽ 
22 23 ἀλλὰ καὶ νῦν οἶδα, ὅτι, ὅσα ἂν αἰτήσῃ τὸν ϑεόν, δώσει σοι ὃ ϑεός. Aeyer 
24 αὐτῇ ὁ "Ἰησοῦς" ἀναστήσεται ὁ ἀδελφός σου. Aye αὐτῷ Μάρϑα: οἶδα, ὅτι 
25 ἀναστήσεται ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ. Εἶπεν αὐτῇ ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς " ἐγώ 
26 εἰμι ἡ ἀνάστασις καὶ ἣ Con’ ὁ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμέ, κἀν ἀποϑάνῃ, ζήσεται, ' καὶ 
πᾶς ὁ ζῶν καὶ πιστεύων εἰς ἐμὲ οὐ μὴ ἀποϑάνῃ εἷς τὸν αἰῶνα. πιστεύεις τοῦτο ; 
at “έγει αὐτῷ" vei, κύριε". ἐγὼ πεπίστευκα, ὅτι σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστός, ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ϑεοῦ, 


| 


100 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES [Parr VI. 





JOHN XI. 
ε r ~ ~ ἣν» 

28 ὁ εἰς τὸν κόσμον ἐρχόμενος. Καὶ ταῦτα εἰποῦσα ἀπῆλϑε καὶ ἐφώνησε Μαρίαν 
‘ c ~ , ~ y ~ 

29 τὴ» ἀδελφὴν αὑτῆς λάϑρα εἰποῦσα" ὁ διδάσκαλος πάρεστι καὶ φωνεῖ σε. ᾿Εχείνη 

£0 ὡς ἤκουσεν, ἐγείρεται ταχὺ καὶ ἔρχεται πρὸς αὐτόν. Οὔπω δὲ ἐληλύϑει ὁ ᾽]η- 

41 σοῦς εἶ. 4 , ‘ 12? y Se ~ , 4 Sd Dt ἃ Mea ϑα Οἱ οὖν 

ς εἰς τὴν κώμην" ἀλλ᾿ ἦν ἐν τῷ τόπῳ, ὅπου ὑπήντησεν αὐτῷ ἡ Magda. 
3 x πε es > Ν 4 
Ἰουδαῖοι οἱ ὄντες ust’ αὐτῆς ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ καὶ παραμυϑούμενοι αὐτήν, ἰδόντες τὴν 
Μαρίαν, ὅτι ταχέως ἀνέστη καὶ ἐξῆλϑεν, ἠκολούϑησαν αὐτῇ λέγοντες " ὅτι ὑπάγει 
32 εἰς τὸ μνημεῖον, ἵνα κλαύσῃ ἐκεῖ. Ἢ οὖν Μαρία ὡς ἦλϑεν ὅπου ἦν ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς, 
~ ~- ~ τ 
ἰδοῦσα αὐτὸν ἔπεσεν εἰς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ λέγουσα αὐτῷ- κύριε, εἰ ἧς ὧδε, 
3 Ἂ ee Ἁἁ ᾿ oe , 3 “- μ᾿ ε τ' , , ‘ ‘ 

33 οὐκ ἂν ἀπέϑανέ μου ὁ ἀδελφός. ᾿Ιησοῦς ovr ὡς εἶδεν αὐτὴν κλαίουσαν καὶ τοὺς 

συγελϑόντας αὐτῇ ᾿Ιουδαίους κλαίοντας, ἐνεβριμήσατο τῷ πνεύματι καὶ ἐτάρα- 

4 « A ! A A ~ 4 > , , > Mw , Ν Α 

31 Eey ἑαυτὸν ! καὶ size’ ποῦ τεϑείκατε αὐτόν; λέγουσιν αὐτῷ" κύριε, ἔρχου καὶ 

35 36 ide. Εδάκρυσεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς. Ἔλεγον οὖν οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι" ἴδε, πῶς ἐφίλει ἀὐτόν. 

" ~ > 4 ΄ ᾿ - 

37 Τινὲς δὲ ἐξ αὐτῶν εἶπον" οὐκ ἠδύνατο οὗτος ὁ ἀνοίξας τοὺς ὀφϑαλμοὺς τοῦ 
~ ~ t , ~ , , 

38 τυφλοῦ ποιῆσαι, ἵνα καὶ οὗτος μὴ ἀποϑάνῃ; ᾿]ησοῦς οὖν πάλιν ἐμβριμώμενος 
3 ¢€ ~ #7 > \ ~ 7 \ ’ ‘ / | Ὧν a? “« 
ἐν ἑαυτῷ ἔρχεται εἰς τὸ μνημεῖον. ἦν δὲ σπήλαιον, καὶ λέϑος ἐπέκειτο ἐπὶ αὐτῷ. 

39 “έγει ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς᾽ ἄρατε τὸν λίϑον. λέγει αὐτῷ ἡ ἀδελφὴ τοῦ τεϑνηκότος Μάρ- 

, 4 ” ~ | as , »“ £9 ~- > WB. 

40 Da κύριξ, ἤδη ὄζει" τεταρταῖος yao ἐστι. Aéyer αὐτῇ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς " οὐκ εἶπόν cot, 

41 ὅτι, ἐὰν πιστεύσῃς, ὄψει τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ϑεοῦ; Ἦραν οὖν τὸν λίϑον [οὗ ἣν ὁ 

ἢ ΩΝ. Ὁ ς gi? Φ τὸ ‘ > wee: ‘A , 
τεϑνηκὼς κείμενος} ὁ δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς ἦρε τοὺς opPakuovs ἄνω καὶ εἶπε". πάτερ, 
> ~ σ a εν Κ 3 \ \ 7 σ , , > , ὦ A 
42 εὐχαριστῶ σοι, ὅτι ἤκουσάς pov. ᾿Εγὼ δὲ ydew, ὁτι παντοτὲ μου ἀκούεις" ἀλλὰ 
P ~ σ 
διὰ τὸν ὄχλον τὸν περιεστῶτα εἶπον, ἵνα πιστεύσωσιν, ὅτι σύ μὲ ἀπέστειλας. 
43 44 Καὶ ταῦτα εἰπὼν φωνῇ μεγάλῃ ἐκραύγασε" Adlage, δεῦρο ἔξω. Καὶ ἐξῆλ- 
’ , A ~ ' 
ϑὲν ὃ τεϑνηκώς, δεδεμένος τοὺς πύδας καὶ τὰς χεῖρας κϑιρέαιρ, καὶ ἡ “ὄψις 
αὐτοῦ σουδαρίῳ unareered Aéye αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς " λύσατε αὐτὸν καὶ ἄφετε 
eo 
“Πολλοὶ οὖν ἐκ τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων οἱ ἐλϑόντες πρὸς τὴν Μαρίαν καὶ ϑεασάμενοι, 
48 ἃ ἐποίησεν [ὁ ᾿]Ιησοῦς], ἐπίστευσαν εἰς αὐτόν. Τινὲς δὲ ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀπῆλϑον πρὸς 
~ a ~ 
τοὺς Φαρισαίους καὶ εἶπον αὐτοῖς, ἃ ἐποίησεν ὁ ᾿]Ιησοῦς. 


§ 93. The counsel of Caiaphas against Jesus. He retires from Jerusalem.—Jerusalem. 


Ephrain. 


Jonn XI. 47—54. . 
AT Σινήγαγον οὖν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι συνέδριον, καὶ ἔλεγον" τί ποιοῦ- 
48 μὲν; ὅτι οὗτος ὁ ἄνθρωπος πολλὰ σημεῖα ποιεῖ, ᾿Εὰν ἀφῶμεν. αὐτὸν οὕτω, 
πάντες πιστεύσουσιν εἰς αὐτόν" καὶ ἐλεύσονται οἱ Ῥωμαῖοι καὶ ἀροῦσιν ἡμῶν καὶ 
49 τὸν τόπον καὶ τὸ ἔϑνος. Εἷς δέ τις ἐξ αὐτῶν, Καϊάφας, ἀρχιερεὺς ὧν τοῦ ἐγιαυ- 
50 τοῦ ἐκείνου, εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " ὑμεῖς οὔκ οἴδατε οὐδέν, ! οὐδὲ διαλογίξεσϑε, ὅ ὅτι συμ- 
φέρει ἡμῖν, ἵνα εἷς ἄνθρωπος ἀπόϑανῇ ὑπὲρ τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ μὴ ὅλον τὸ ἔϑνος 
51 ἀπόληται. Τοῦτο δὲ ἀφ ἑαυτοῦ οὐκ εἶπεν, ἀλλὰ ἀρχιερεὺς ὧν τοῦ ἐνιαυτοῦ 
ἐκείνου προεφήτευσεν, ὅτι ἔμελλεν ὁ ᾿Ἰησοὺς ἀποϑνήσκειν ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἔϑνους " 
58 ' χαὶ οὐχ ὑπὲρ τοῦ ἔϑνους μόνον, ἀλλ ἵνα καὶ τὰ τέχνα τοῦ ϑεοῦ τὰ διδσκορπι- 
51 σμένα συγαγάγῃ ‘sig ἕν. "Ant ἐκείνης οὖν τῆς ἡμέρας συνεβουλεύσαντο, ἵνα ἀπο- 
χτείνωσιν αὐτόν. 


Se μι 


δὲ 93, 94,95.] UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. 101 





JOHN XI. 

54 Ἰησοῦς οὖν οὐκέτι παῤῥησίᾳ περιδπάτει ἐν τοῖς ᾿Ιουδαίοις, ἀλλὰ ἀπῆλϑεν 
ἱ ἐχεῖϑεν εἰς τὴν χώραν ἐγγὺς τῆς ἐρήμου, εἰς ᾿Εφραῖμ Agente πόλιν" χἀκεῖ 
διέτριβε μετὰ τῶν μαϑητῶν αὑτοῦ. 


§ 94. Jesus beyond Jordan is followed by multitudes. The healing of the infirm 
Woman on the Sabbath.— V@lley of Jordan. Perea. 


Marra. XIX, 1, 2. . Marx Χ. 1. 


σ ~ 
1 Kat ἐγένετο, ὅτε ἐτέλεσεν ὁ - 1 Κακεῖϑεν ἀναστὰς ἔρχεται εἷς τὰ 
a, Ἢ ~ σ - ~ 
σοῦς τοὺς λόγους τούτους, μετῆρεν ὅρια τῆς ᾿]Ιουδαίας διὰ τοῦ πέραν 
Se ~ , ie > ‘ ~ 2 , A ; , 
ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας, καὶ ηλϑὲν εἰς τὰ τοῦ Ιορδάνου" καὶ συμπορεύονται 
a <a ~ > , , ~? , , a λ A e OW , ε 5» 
2 ὅρια τῆς ᾿Ι]ουδαίας, πέραν τοῦ Ιορδα- πάλιν ὄχλοι πρὸς αὑτὸν, καί, ὡς εἰῶ 
γου. Καὶ ἠκολούϑησαν αὐτῷ ὄχλοι ϑἔει, πάλιν ἐδίδασκεν αὐτούς. 


πολλοί, καὶ ἐϑεράπευσεν αὐτοὺς ἐκεῖ. 
| Luge XIII. 10--91. | 
1011 "Hy δὲ διδάσκων ἐν μιᾷ τῶν συναγωγῶν ἐν τοῖς σάββασι. Καὶ ἰδού, γυνὴ 
_ ἦν πνεῦμα ἔχουσα ἀσϑενείας ἔτη δέχα καὶ ὀκτώ" καὶ ἦν συγκύπτουσα καὶ μὴ 
12 δυναμένη ἀνακύψαι εἰς τὸ παντελές. ᾿Ιδὼν δὲ αὐτὴν 6’ Ἰησοῦς προςεφώνησε καὶ 
13 εἶπεν αὐτῇ γύναι, ἀπολέλυσαι τῆς ἀσϑενείας cov. Καὶ ἐπέϑηκεν αὐτῇ τὰς 
14 χεῖρας, χαὶ παραχρῆμα ἀνωρϑώϑη, καὶ ἐδόξαζε τὸν ϑεόν. ᾿Αποκριϑεὶς δὲ ὃ 
ἀρχισυνάγωγος, ann, ὅτι τῷ, σαββάτῳ ἐθεράπευσεν ὁ ‘Inoovs, ἔλεγε τῷ 
ὄχλῳ᾽ ἕξ ἡ ἡμέραι εἰσίν, ἐν αἷς δεῖ ἐργάζεσϑαι" ἐν ταύταις οὖν ἐρχόμενοι Ore 
15 πεύεσϑε, xi μὴ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ σαββάτου. “AnexelOyn οὖν αὐτῷ ὁ κύριος καὶ 
εἶπεν" ὑποκριτά, ἕκαστος ὑμῶν τῷ σαββάτῳ οὐ λύει τὸν βοῦν αὑτοῦ ἢ τὸν ὄνον 
16 ἀπὸ τῆς φάτνης καὶ ἀπαγαγὼν ποτίζει; Ταύτην δὲ ϑυγατέρα “Aboud οὖσαν, 
ἣν ἔδησεν ὁ σατανᾶς, ἰδού, δέκα καὶ ὀκτὼ ἔτη, οὐκ ἔδει λυϑῆναι ἀπὸ τοῦ δε- 
1 σμοῦ τούτου τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ σαββάτου ; Καὶ ταῦτα λέγοντος αὐτοῦ κατῃσχύνοντο 
πάντες οἱ ἀνειχείμενοι αὐτῷ, καὶ πᾶς ὁ ὄχλος ἔχαιρεν ἐπὶ πᾶσι τοῖς ἐνδόξοις 
τοῖς γινομένοις ὑπὶ αὐτοῦ. 
18 Ἔλεγε δέ" τίνι ὁμοία ἐστὶν ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ ϑεοῦ ; καὶ τίνι ὁμοιώσω αὐτήν; 
19 Ὁμοία ἐστὶ κόχκῳ σινάπεως, ὃν λαβὼν ἄνϑρωπος ἔβαλεν εἰς κῆπον ἑαυτοῦ " καὶ 
ηὔξησε καὶ ἐγένετο εἰς δένδρον μέγα, καὶ τὰ πετεινὰ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ κατεσκήνωσεν 
90 ἐν τοῖς κλάδοις αὐτοῦ. Καὶ πάλιν εἶπε" τίνι ὁμοιώσω τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ ϑεοῦ; ; 
21 Ὁμοία ἐστὶ ζύμῃ, ἣν λαβοῦσα γυνὴ ΕΝ εἰς ἀλεύρου σάτα τρία, ἕως οὗ 
ἐζυμώϑη ὅλον. 


δ 95. Our Lord goes teaching and journeying towards Jerusalem. He is warned 
against Herod.—Perea. 


Luxe XIII. 22—35. 


2 Καὶ πο ῥοέλομ κατὰ πόλεις καὶ κώμας διδάσκων χαὶ πορείαν ποιούμενος 
23 εἰς “Ἱερουσαλήμ. Εἶπε δέ τις αὐτῷ κύριξ, εἰ ὀλίγοι οἱ σωζόμενοι ; ὁ δὲ εἶπε 
94 πρὸς αὐτούς" ' ἀγωνίζεσϑε εἰρελϑεῖν διὰ τῆς στενῆς αύλῃρ᾽ ὅτι πολλοί, λέγω 
25 ὑμῖν, ζητήσουσιν εἰςελϑεῖν καὶ οὐκ ἰσχύσουσιν. “Ag οὗ ἂν ἐγερϑῇ ὁ οἰχοδεσπό- 





102 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES [Parr VI. 





LUKE XI. 
τῆς καὶ ἀποκχλείσῃ τὴν ϑύραν, καὶ ἄρξησϑε ἔξω ἑστάναι καὶ κρούειν τὴν ϑύραν 
λέγοννερ" κύριε, κύριε, ἄνοιξον ἡμῖν" καὶ ἀποχριϑεὶς ἐρεῖ ὑμῖν" οὐχ οἶδα ὑμᾶς, 
26 πόϑεν ἐστέ. Τότε ἄρξεσϑε λέγειν" ἐφάγομεν ἐνώπιόν σου καὶ ἐπίομεν, καὶ ἐν ταῖς 
27 πλατειαις ἡμῶν ἐδίδαξας. Καὶ ἐρεῖ" λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐκ οἶδα ὑ ὑμᾶς, πόϑεν ἐστέ" 
28 ἀπόστητε ἀπ᾿ ἐμοῦ πάντες οἱ ἐργάται τῆς ἀδικίας. Εχεῖ ἔσται ὃ κλαυϑμὸς καὶ ὁ 
βρυγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων, ὅταν ὄψησϑε "Α΄ βραὰμ καὶ ᾿Ισαὰκ καὶ ᾿Ιακὼβ καὶ πάντας 
29 τοὺς προφήτας ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τοῦ ϑεοῦ, ὑμᾶς δὲ ἐκβαλλομένους ἔξω. Καὶ ἥξουσιν 
ἀπὸ ἀνατολῶν καὶ δυσμῶν, καὶ ἀπὸ βοῤῥᾶ καὶ γότου, καὶ ἀνακλιϑήσονται ἐν τῇ 
30 βασι tov ϑεοῦ. Kai ἰδού, εἰσὶν ἔσχατοι, 0 οἱ ἔσονται πρῶτοι, καί εἰσι πρῶ- 
τοι, οἱ ἔσονται ἔσχατοι. 
381. Ἔν αὐτῇ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ προςῆλϑόν τινὲς Φαριδαῖοι λέγοντες αὐτῷ" ἔξελϑε καὶ 
32 πορεύου ἐντεῦϑεν, ὅτι ᾿ηρώδης ϑέλει σε ἀποχτεῖναι. Καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " πορευ- 
ϑέντες εἴπατε τῇ ἀλώπεκι ταύτῃ" ἰδού, ἐκβάλλω δαιμόνια καὶ ἰάσεις ἐπιτελῶ 
33 σήμερον καὶ αὔριον, καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ τελειοῦμαι. Πλὴν δεῖ με σήμερον καὶ αὔριον 
καὶ τῇ ἐχομένῃ πορεύεσϑαι, ὅτι οὐκ ἐνδέχεται προφήτην ἀπολέσϑαι ἔξω “Ιερου- 
34 σαλήμ. “Ἱερουσαλήμ, “Ἱερουσαλήμ, ἧ ἀποχτείνουσα τοὺς προφήξας καὶ λεθόβο.- 
λοῦσα τοὺς ἀπεσταλμένους πρὸς αὐτήν, ποσάκις ἠϑέλησα ἐπισυνάξαι τὰ τέχνα 
σου, ὃν τρίπον ὄρνις τὴν ἑαυτῆς νοσσιὰν ὑπὸ τὰς πτέρυγας ; καὶ οὐκ ἠϑελήσατε. 
836 ᾿Ιδού, ἀφίεται ὑμῖν ὁ οἶκος ὑμῶν ἔρημος." λέγω δὲ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐ μή μὲ ἴδητε, 
ἕως ἂν ἥξῃ ὅτε εἴπητε" εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου. 


§ 96. Our Lord dines with a chief Pharisee on the Sabbath. Incidents.—Perea. 


΄ 


᾿ Luxe XIV. 1-24. 
1 Kai ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ ἐλϑεῖν αὐτὸν εἰς οἶκόν τινος τῶν ἀρχόντων τῶν Φαρισαίων 
, ~ A Δ 159. 1. « , 2+? "9 ¢ Hs 
2 σαββάτῳ φαγεῖν ἄρτον, καὶ avTOL Your παρατηρούμενοι αὑτὸν. Kau ἰδού, ἂν: 
8 ϑρωπός τις ἦν ὑδρωπικὸς ἔμπροσϑεν αὐτοῦ. Καὶ ἀποκριϑεὶς ὁ Lyoovs εἶπε 
4 ‘ ‘ ‘ , , 3 - , ἐν 
πρὺς τοὺς νομικοὺς καὶ Φαρισαίους λέγων" εἰ ἔξεστι τῷ σαββάτῳ ϑεραπεύειν ; 
45 Οἱ δὲ ἡσύχασαν καὶ ἐπιλαβόμενος ἰάσατο αὐτὸν καὶ ἀπέλυσε. Καὶ ἀποκχριϑεὶς 
πρὸς αὐτοὺς εἶπε" τίνος ὑμῶν ὄνος ἢ βοῦς εἰς φρέαρ ἐμπεσεῖται, καὶ οὐκ εὐθέως 
> , >. 4 5 “« ἐςε , ~ , A > ” > ~ 

6 ἀνασπάσει αὐτὸν ἕν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ σαββάτου; Kai οὐκ ἰσχυσὰν ἀνταποχριϑῆναι 
>_~ ‘ ‘aw ” ‘ ‘ \ , , > * ~ 
7 αὐτῷ. πρὸς ταῦτα. “Eheye δὲ πρὸς τοὺς κεχλημένους παραβολὴν, ἐπέχων πῶφ 
8 τὰς πρωτοκλισίας ἐξελέγοντο, λέγων πρὸς αὐτούς" ὅταν κληϑῇς ὑπό τινος εἰς 
γάμους, μὴ κατακλιϑῆς εἰς τὴν πρωτοκλισίαν," μήποτε ἐντιμότερός δου ἦ κεκλημέ- 
9 γος in αὐτοῦ,' καὶ ἐλϑὼν ὁ σὲ καὶ αὐτὸν καλέσας ἐρεῖ σοι" δὸς τούτῳ τόπον" 

σ - 
10 καὶ τότε ἄρξῃ pet αἰσχύνης τὸν ἔσχατον τόπον κατέχειν. “ALK ὅταν κληϑῆς, 

» 
πορευϑεὶς ἀνάπεσαι εἰς τὸν ἔσχατον τόπον, ἵνα ὅταν ἔλϑῃ ὁ κεκληκώς σε, εἴπῃ 
ot’ φίλε, προφρανάβηϑι ἀνώτερον " τότε ἔσται σοι δόξα ἐνώπιον τῶν συνανακει- 

- - A . ~ ΕἾ 
11 μένων σοι. Ὅτι πᾶς ὁ ὑψῶν ἑαυτὸν ταπεινωϑήσεται, καὶ ὁ ταπεινῶν ἑαυτὸν 

7 ~ » ἢ x“ ~ 

12 ὑψωϑήσεται. Ἔλεγε δὲ καὶ τῷ κεκληκότι αὐτόν" ὅταν ποιῇς ἄριστον ἢ δεῖπνον, 
‘ ~ , ‘ 
μὴ φώνει τοὺς φίλους σου μηδὲ τοὺς ἀδελφούς σου μηδὲ τοὺς συγγενεῖς σου μηδὲ 





4. 35, Comp. Ps. 69, 26 [25]. Jer. 12, 7. 22, 5. > 8. Comp, Prov. 25, 6. 





δ 96, 97.] ‘UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. 103 





LUKE XIv. 
, , , Δ ΟΣ , > , © 28 , 3 , 
γείτονας πλουσίους, μήποτε καὶ KUTOL Of ἀντικαλέσωσι, καὶ γένηταί σοι ἀνταπό- 
18 δομα. "AIX ὅταν ποιῇς δοχήν, κάλει πτωχούς, ἀναπήρους, χωλούς, τυφλούς, 
4 ~ 
14 'xat μαχάριος ἔσῃ, ὅτι οὐκ ἔχουσιν ἀνταποδοῦναί cor’ ἀνταποδοϑήσεται γάρ σοι 
5 ~ ~ 
ἐν τῇ ἀναστάσει τῶν δικαίων. 
18 ᾿“κούσας δέ τις τῶ y ὕτα εἶ DTG * 4 ὃς φά 
κοῦσας δὲ τις τῶν συναγακειμένων ταῦτα εἶπεν αὐτῷ " μακάριος, OS φαγε- 
: " > ~ , ~ ~ ε . 5 Α. eres Ry 3 , 
16 σαν ἄρτον ev τῇ βασιλείᾳ tov ϑεοῦ. “O δὲ εἶπεν αὑτῷ " ἀνϑρωπός τις ἐποίησε 
. ~ , 4. 3.1.2 , pe ἐν \ ~ co~ ~ of ~ 
17 δεῖπνον μέγα καὶ ἐχάλεσε πολλούς. Kai ἀπέστειλε tov δοῦλον αὑτοῦ τῇ ὥρᾳ τοῦ 
oy, , CO rae , ” σ + Ψ es es Ὦ , 4 
_ 18 δείπνου εἰπεῖν τοῖς κεκλημένοις " ἔραν Of, ott ἡδὴ ἑτοιμὰ tort marta. Kou 
ἤρξαντο ἃ ἀπὸ μιᾶς emigre toad κι πάντες. ὁ woetes εἶπεν αὐτῷ" ἀγρὸν ἡγόρασα 
19 χαὶ ἔχω ἀνάγκην ἐξελϑεῖν. καὶ ἰδεῖν αὐτόν" he sunbed os, ἔχε μὲ παρῃτημένον. Καὶ 
ἕτερος εἶπε" ζεύγη βοῶν ἠγόρασα πέντε καὶ πορεύομαι δοκιμάσαι αὐτά " ἐρωτῶ 
~ : A ~ 
20 σε, ἔχε μὲ παρῃτημένον. Καὶ ἕτερος. εἶπε" γυναῖκα ἔγημα καὶ διὰ τοῦτο οὐ 
, 5 - A , ΄ ~ > ~ > , ~ , ra 
21 δύναμαι ἐλϑεῖν. Καὶ παραγενόμενος ὁ δοῦλος ἐχεῖνος ἀπήγγειλε τῷ κυρίῳ av- 
των ὙΠ. δὲ ’ 5 Ye ἃ ὃ , ~ , ἜΦΥ, , 
τοῦ ταῦτα. ToTE ὀργισϑεὶῖς ὁ οἰκοδεσπότης εἶπε TH δούλῳ αὑτοῦ" ἔξελϑε ταχέως 
ἣ ue ~ on 4 A . 
εἰς τὰς πλατείας καὶ ῥύμας τῆς πόλεως, καὶ τοὺς πτωχοὺς καὶ ἀναπήρους καὶ 
4 ‘ 4 > 7 τ ‘ %, ε ~ ᾿ « 
22 χωλοὺς καὶ τυφλοὺς. sigayays wds. Καὶ εἶπεν ὃ δοῦλος κύριξ, γέγονεν ὡς 
A ~ 
23 ἐπέταξας, καὶ ἔτι τόπος ἐστί. Καὶ εἶπεν ὁ κύριος πρὸς τὸν δοῦλον ἔξελϑε εἰς 
A ε ‘ ‘ “ pe. ἃ ; > ~ oO te cae ts Wg 
τὰς OOOUS καὶ φραγμοὺς, καὶ ἀνάγκασον εἰςελϑεῖν, ἵνα γεμισϑῇ ὃ οἶχός μου. 
, ~ σ A ~ ὧν ~ ~ 
24 Ayo γὰρ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐδεὶς τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐκείνων THY κεκλημένων γεύσεταί μου τοῦ 
δείπνου. 








7) 


AIS Ap Ee i Se Me 


ΠΩ 


᾿ 
ie 


§ 97. What is required of true Disciples.— Perea. 


Luxe XIV. 25—35. . 
eS ee ‘ ~ ‘ δ : 
25 26 Συνεπορεύοντο δὲ αὐτῷ ὄχλοι πολλοί. καὶ στραφεὶς εἶπε πρὸς αὐτούς") εἴ τις 
~ ~ A ad 
ἔρχεται πρός μὲ καὶ οὐ μισεῖ τὸν πατέρα ἑαυτοῦ καὶ τὴν μητέρα καὶ τὴν γυναῖκα 
c= 48 , A ‘ > ἢ ἀν καὶ > ’ ” ‘ ql ε > ) 
καὶ τὰ τέχνα καὶ τοὺς ἀδελφὸυς καὶ τὰς ἀδελφὰς, ἔτι δὲ καὶ τὴν ἑαυτοῦ ψυχῆν, 
> 7 , \ κι δ Ve 9-3 , A 4 ε ae 4 
27 οὐ δύναταί μου μαϑητὴς εἶναι. Καὶ ὁςτις οὐ βαστάζει τὸν σταυρὺν αὑτοῦ καὶ 
3 7 ~ 
28 ἔρχεται ὀπίσω μου, ov δύναταί μου εἶναι μαϑητής. Τίς γὰρ ἐξ ὑμῶν, ϑέλων 
~ > ee, - f A 
“πύργον οἰκοδομῆσαι, οὐχὶ πρῶτον καϑίσας ψηφίζει τὴν δαπάνην, εἰ ἔχει τὰ πρὸς. 
> , T , 9 ? 3 - 9 λ Α ἈΝΕ , 5 ’ 
29 ἀπαρτισμὸν ; Iva μὴ ποτὲ ϑέντος αὑτοῦ ϑεμέλιον καὶ μὴ ἰσχύοντος ἐκτελέσαι, 
͵ « ~ + Σ 3 , ae a, λέ ot τ c +7 
30 martes οἱ ϑεώρουντες ἀρξῶωγται ἐμπαίζειν αὐτῷ éyorteg” OTL οὗτος ὁ ἄνϑρω- 
Γ 5 - εἰ 5 a” > , xv , , ? 
31 πο; ἤρξατο oixodomaby καὶ οὐκ ἰσχυσὲν éxteleoat. FT τίς βασιλεύς, πορευόμενος. 
~ ¢ , ~ > , > A , ~ ὔ > 
αὐ μα: ἑτέρῳ βασιλεῖ εἰς πόλεμον, ovyt "αϑιδὰς πρῶτον βου λέθαεαι, et δυνα- 
τός ἔστιν ἐν δέχα χιλιάσιν ἀπῳρεῆδαι τῷ μετὰ εἴκοσι χιλιάδων é ἐρχομένῳ ἐπ αὐὖ- 
32 σόν; Εἰ δὲ μήγε, ἔτι αὐτοῦ πόῤῥω ὄντος, πρεσβείαν ἀποστείλας ἐ ἐρώκῷ τὰ “πρὸς 
38 εἰρήνην. Οὕτως οὖν πᾶς ἐξ ὑμῶν, ὃς οὐκ ἀποτάσσξται πᾶσι ὁ οἷν ἑαυτοῦ ὑπάρ- 
34 χουσιν, οὐ δύναταί μου εἶναι μαϑητής. Καλὸν τὸ ἅλας ἐὰν δὲ τὸ ἅλας μω- 
ἐν ἣν x > ~~. »* 3 
35 ρανϑῇ, ἐν τίνι ἀρτυϑήσεται ; Οὔτε εἰς γῆν οὔτε εἰς κοπρίαν εὔϑετόν ἔστιν" ἔξω 
μὴ 
βάλλουσιν αὐτό. Ὃ ἔχων ὦτα ἀκούειν, ἀκουέτωι 


-ἢ 





104 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES [Parr VI. 





§ 98. Parable of be Lost Sheep, ete. Parable of the Prodigal Son.—Perea. 


Taree XV. .1—32.~ 


Ἦσαν δὲ ἐγγίξοντες αὐτῷ πάντες; οἱ τελῶναι καὶ οἱ ἁμαρτωλοὶ ἀκούειν αὐτοῦ. 
2 Καὶ διεγόγγυζον οἱ Paquadion καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς λέγοντες" ὅτι οὗτος ἁμαρτω- 
3 λοὺς προςδέχεται καὶ συνεσϑίει αὐτοῖς. Εἶπε δὲ πρὸς αὐτοὺς τὴν παραβολὴν 

, , , ΕΣ ~ 
4 ταὐυτὴν λέγων" τίς ἄνϑρωπος ἐξ ὑμῶν ἔχων ἑχατὸν πρόβατα καὶ ἀπολέσας ἕν 
9 > ~ > ~ 
ἐξ αὐτῶν ov καταλείπει τὰ evvernnovraervec ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ καὶ πορεύεται ἐπὶ TO 
2 , a 7 ὃ - 
5 ἀπολωλὸς, ἕως εὕρῃ αὐτό ; Καὶ εὑρὼν ἐπιτίϑησιν ἐπὶ τοὺς ὥμους ἑαυτοῦ χαίρων, 
Ν 3 A > ‘ “« 3 ~ 
6' καὶ ἐλϑὼν sig τὸν οἶκον συγκαλεῖ τοὺς φίλους καὶ τοὺς γείτονας λέγων αὐτοῖς" 
, , 7 τ \ ᾿ ἌΡ, σ΄ 
7 συγχαρητὲ μοι, ὁτι εὗρον τὸ πρόβατόν μου τὸ ἀπολωλός. Aéyo ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὕτω 
\ » 5 ~ ~ ~ ~ 
χαρὰ ἔσται EY TH οὐρανῷ ἐπὶ ἑνὶ ἁμαρτωλῷ μετανοοῦντι, ἢ ἐπὶ ἐννενηκοντα- 
, a . . 
8 evven δικαίοις, οἵτινες ov χρείαν ἔχουσι μετανοίας. Ἢ τίς γυνὴ δραχμὰς ἔχουσα 
, 24 : ~ 
δέκα, ἐὰν ἀπολέτῃ δραχμὴν μίαν, οὐχὶ ἅπτει λύχνον καὶ σαροῖ τὴν οἰκίαν καὶ 
~ > ~ a 7 σ 4 c ~ ᾿ 5" A 4 A , 
9 ζητεῖ ἐπιμελῶς, ἕως ὅτου εὕρῃ; Καὶ εὑροῦσα συγκαλεῖται τὰς φίλας καὶ τὰς γεί- 
: , , , 7 τ A , a“ > , σ ? 
10 rovac λέγουσα " συγχάρητέ μοι, ort evoor τὴν δραχμήν, ἣν ἀπώλεσα. Ovto, λέγω 
~ A ~ ~ ~ ~ ~ 
ὑμῖν, χαρὰ γίνεται ἐνώπιον τῶν ἀγγέλων τοῦ ϑεοῦ ἐπὶ ἑνὶ ἁμαρτωλῷ μετανοοῦντι. 
a+ ~ ~ 

1112 Εἶπε δέ: ἄνθρωπός τις εἶχε δύο υἱούς. Kai εἶπεν ὁ νεώτερος αὐτῶν τῷ πατρί" 

᾽ Nes 1 ἠδ , ' , ~ 2 7 ‘ 3... Ded 5 ae , 
πάτερ, δὸς μοι to ἐπιβάλλον μέρος τῆς οὐσίας. καὶ διεῖλεν αὑτοῖς τὸν βίον. 
‘A , > A «ς , 4 σ ε , «A > , > 
13 Καὶ pet ov πολλὰς ἡμέρας συναγαγὼν umavta ὁ νεώτερος υἱὸς ἀπεδήμησεν εἰς 


] 


, ᾿ , 4.9 ~ , A ιν ¢ ~ ~ > ond , 
14 χώραν μαχρᾶν, καὶ exsi διεσκόρπισε THY οὐσίαν αὑτοῦ ζῶν ἀσώτῶς. Ζαπανή- 


σαντος δὲ αὐτοῦ πάντα ἐγένετο λιμὸς ἰσχυρὸς κατὰ τὴν χώραν ἐκείνην, καὶ 
16 αὐτὸς ἤρξατο ὑστερεῖσϑαι. Καὶ πορευϑεὶς ἐκολλήϑη ἑνὶ τῶν πολιτῶν τῆς χώρας 
16 ἐχείνης" καὶ ἔπεμψεν αὐτὸν εἰς τοὺς ἀγροὺς αὑτοῦ βόσκειν χοίρους. Καὶ ἐπε- 
ϑύμει γεμίσαι THY. κοιλίαν αὑτοῦ ἀπὸ τῶν κερατίων, ὧν ἤσϑιον οἱ χοῖροι, καὶ 
17 οὐδεὶς ἐδίδου αὐτῷ. Εἰς ἑαυτὸν δὲ ἐλϑὼν εἶπε: πόσοι μίσϑιοι τοῦ πατρὸς μου 
18 περισσεύουσιν ἄρτων, ἐγὼ δὲ λιμῷ ἀπόλλυμαι: οὐ Αναστὰς πορεύσομαι πρὸς τὸν 
πατέρα μου καὶ ἐρῶ αὐτῷ" πάτερ, ἥμαρτον εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ ἐνώπιόν σου" 
19 ! οὐκέτι εἰμὶ ἄξιος κληϑῆναι υἱός. σου" ποίησόν μὲ ὡς ἕνα τῶν μισϑίων σου. 
. 30 Καὶ ἀναστὰς ἦλϑε πρὸς τὸν πατέρα ἑαυτοῦ. ἔτι δὲ αὐτοῦ μαχρὰν ἀπέχοντος, 
εἶδεν αὐτὸν ὁ πατὴρ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐσπλαγχνίσθη καὶ δραμὼν ἐπέπεσεν ἐπὶ τὸν 
21 τράχηλον αὐτοῦ καὶ κατεφίλησεν αὐτόν. Εἶπε δὲ αὐτῷ ὁ υἱός" wiiteg, ἥμαρτον 
22 εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ ἐνώπιόν σου καὶ οὐκέτι εἰμὶ ἄξιος Ἀδηϑῆναι υἱός σου. Εἶπε 
δὲ ὁ πατὴρ πρὸς τοὺς δούλους αὑτοῦ" ἐξενέγκατε τὴν στολὴν τὴν πρώτην καὶ 
ἐνδύσατε αὐτόν, καὶ δότε δακτύλιον. εἰς τὴν χεῖρα αὐτοῦ καὶ ὑποδήματα εἰς τοὺς 
23 πόδας, ' καὶ ἐνέγκαντες τὸν μόσχον τὸν σιτευτὸν ϑύσατε, καὶ φαγόντες εὐφραν- 
24 Piper’ ὅτι οὗτος ὁ υἱός μου νεχρὸς ἣν καὶ ἀνέζησε, καὶ ἀπολωλὼς ἦν καὶ 
25 εὑρέϑη. καὶ ἤρξαντο εὐφραίνεσϑαι. “Hy δὲ ὁ υἱὸς αὐτοῦ ὁ πρεσβύτερος ἐν ἀγρῷ" 
26 καὶ ὡς ἐρχόμενος ἤγγισε τῇ οἰκίᾳ, ἤκουσε δυμφωνίας καὶ χορῶν. Καὶ προφκαλε- 
27 σάμενος ἕνα τῶν παίδων ἐπυνϑιάνετο, τί εἴη ταῦτα. Ὁ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῷ" ὅτι ὁ 
ἀδελφός σου ἥκει, καὶ ἔϑυσεν ὁ πατήρ σου τὸν μόσχον τὸν σιτευτόν, ὅτι ὑγιαί- 
28 γοντα αὐτὸν ἀπέλαβεν: ᾿Ωργίσϑη δὲ καὶ οὐκ ἤϑελεν sige Oeiv. ὁ οὖν πατὴρ αὖ- 
29 τοῦ ἐξελϑὼν παρεκάλει αὐτόν. Ὃ δὲ ἀποκχριϑεὶς εἶπε τῷ πατρί" ἰδού, τοσαῦτα 


! 





4 


ee a ee μνΝ 


a ee 


δὲ 98, 99, 1007] UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. : 105 





LUKE XY: 
Υ̓͂ . ~ 4 
ἔτη δουλεύω σοι καὶ οὐδέποτε ἐντολήν cov παρῆλϑον, καὶ ἐμοὶ οὐδέποτε ἔδωκας 


‘ 7 a ~ : ~ τ 
30 ἐριφον, ἵνα μετὰ τῶν φίλων μου εὐφρανϑῶ" ὅτε δὲ ὁ υἱός σου οὗτος, ὃ κατα- 


φαγών σου τὸν βίον μετὰ πορνῶν, ἦλϑεν, ἔϑυσας αὐτῷ τὸν μόσχον τὸν σιτευτόν. 
31 Ὁ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῷ" τέχνον, σὺ πάντοτε pet ἐμοῦ εἶ, καὶ πάντα τὰ ἐμὰ σά ἐστιν᾿ 
32! εὐφρανϑῆναι δὲ καὶ χαρῆναι ἔδει, ὅτι ὁ ἀδελφός σου οὗτος νεκρὸς ἦν καὶ ἀνέ- 
ζησε, καὶ ἀπολωλὼς ἦν καὶ εὑρέϑη. 


§ 99. Parable of the Unjust Steward.—Perea. 
Luxe XVI. 1—13. ; 


7 
᾿ 4 4 e ~ ν 2 « 
1. Ἔλεγ8 δὲ καὶ πρὸς τοὺς ᾽᾿μαϑητὰς αὑτοῦ" ἄνϑρωπός τις ἦν πλούσιος, ὃς εἶχεν 
> , 4 τ ; ~ : ~ 
οἰκονόμον, καὶ οὗτος διεβλήϑη αὐτῷ ὡς διασκορπίζων τὰ ὑπάρχοντα αὐτοῦ. 
‘ , ~ ~ ~ 
2 Καὶ φωνήσας αὐτὸν εἶπεν αὐτῷ τί τοῦτο ἀκούω περὶ σοῦ ; ἀπόδος τὸν λύγον 
“ 3 ; ὦ ~ 
3 τῆς οἰκονομίας σου" ov γὰρ δυνήσῃ ἔτι οἰκονομεῖν. Εἶπε δὲ ἐν ἑαυτῷ ὁ oixove- 
4 Cc a os ~ 
μος τί ποιήσω, OTL ὃ κύριός μου ἀφαιρεῖται τὴν οἰκονομίαν am ἐμοῦ ; σκάπτειν 
, 7 ~ a ~ ~ 
4 ovy ἰσχύω, ἐπαιτεῖν αἰσχύνομαι. Ἔγνων τί ποιήσω, ἵνα ὅταν μετασταϑῶ τῆς 
> , ,» , 3 4 » ε ~ ‘ , Ὁ 
5 οἰκονομίας, δέξωνταί μὲ εἰς τοὺς οἴκους αὑτῶν. Καὶ προςζκαλεσάμενος ἕνα 
iif ~ = ~ ~ ~ » ~ 
ἕκαστον τῶν χρεωφειλετῶν TOV κυρίου ἑαυτοῦ ἔλεγε TH πρώτῳ πόσον ὀφείλεις 
> =f 4 A ~ 
6 τῷ κυρίῳ μου; ὋὉ δὲ εἶπεν" ἑκατὸν βάτους ἐλαίου. καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ δέξαι cov 
Α Ud 4 , ’ ἤ , wy ς £ A ‘ 
7 τὸ γράμμα καὶ καϑίσας ταχέως γράψον πεντήκοντα. Ἔπειτα ἑτέρῳ εἶπε" σὺ δὲ 
4 ~ 
πόσον ὀφείλεις ; ὁ δὲ εἶπεν" ἑκατὸν κόρους σίτου. καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ " δέξαι σου τὸ 
, 4 , 3 , \ 9 , ς [4 A 5 ’ - > 
8 γράμμα καὶ γράψον ὀγδοήκοντα. Καὶ ἐπήνεσεν ὁ κύριος τὸν οἰκονόμον τῆς ἀδι- 
σ σ΄ ‘ ~ ~ 4 
κίας, OTL φρονίμως ἐποίησεν" ὅτι οἱ υἱοὶ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου φρονιμώτεροι ὑπὲρ 
9 τοὺς υἱοὺς τοῦ φωτὸς εἰς τὴν γενεὰν τὴν ἑαυτῶν εἰσι. Κἀγὼ ὑμῖν λέγω ποι- 
τῷ : » σ 
ἥσατε ἑαυτηῖς φίλους ἐκ του μαμωνᾷ τῆς ἀδικίας, ἵνα, ὅταν ἐκλίπητε, δέξωνται 
ες» > A 5 , , « ea Ge  ; \ 3 ~ pies 
10 ὑμᾶς εἰς τὰς αἰωνίους σκηνάς. O πιστὸς ἕν ἐλαχίστῳ καὶ ἕν πολλῷ πιστὸς ἐστι, 
a See 35° ’ + V' 3S a Nae , 3 > g > ΕΣ , 
11 καὶ ὃ ἐν ἐλαχίστῳ ἄδικος καὶ ἕν πολλῷ ἀδικὸς ἐστιν. Εἰ οὖν ἐν τῷ ἀδίκῳ wapo- 
~ ei sai ΤΥ ae \ δ P $ , τ σιν ~ 2 , 
12 γᾷ πιστοι οὐκ ἐγένεσϑε, τὸ ἀληϑινὸν tig ὑμῖν πιστεύσει; Kou εἰ ev τῷ ἀλλοτρίῳ 
Ἃ 3 ΙΕ S$ *e , , c¢ w / > A > δ ’ 4 
13 πιστοί οὐκ ἐγένεσϑε, τὸ ὑμέτερον τίς ὑμῖν δώσει; Ovdeig οἰκέτης δυναται δυσι 
, , eS , τ , gal ΟΝ > , ok ie t 
κυρίοις δουλεύειν - ἢ γὰρ τὸν ἕνα μισήσει καὶ τὸν ἕτερον ἀγαπήσει, ἢ ἑνὸς ἀνϑέ- 
~, ! ~ A ~ 
Lerat καὶ τοῦ ἑτέρου καταφρονήσει. ov δύνασϑε ϑεῷ δουλεύειν καὶ μαμωνᾷ. 


§ 100. The Pharisees reproved. Parable of the Rich Man and Lazarus.—Perea. 


᾿ bs Luxe XVI. 14—31. : 
14 Ἤχουον δὲ ταῦτα πάντα καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι, φιλάργυροι ὑπάρχοντες, καὶ ἐξεμυ- 
; he A > > ~ ¢ ~ 3 ε - ε \ bee 
15 χτήριζον αὐτόν. Καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς" ὑμεῖς ἐστε οἱ δικαιοῦντες ἑαυτοὺς ἐνώπιον 
~ ? , « A A 4 ‘ , ε ~ 7 , Ce ᾿ 7 
τῶν ἀνθρώπων, 6 δὲ ϑεὸς γινώσκει τὰς καρδίας ὑμῶν" ὅτι τὸ ἐν ἀνθρώποις 


16 ὑψηλὸν βδέλυγμα ἐνώπιον τοῦ ϑεοῦ. ὋὉ νόμος καὶ οἱ προφῆται ἕως Ἰωάννου" 


f ~ ~ 4 ~ 
17 ἀπὸ τότε ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ ϑεοῦ εὐαγγελίζεται, καὶ πᾶς εἰς αὐτὴν βιάζεται. Εὐκο- 
Α ~ ~ ‘\ ~ 
πώτερον δέ ἐστι τὸν οὐρανὸν καὶ τὴν γῆν παρελϑεῖν, ἢ τοῦ νόμου μίαν κεραίαν 


Wy ~ ~ ae ὔ \ ~ ς ~ 4 ~ δ΄ ἢ U4 Ν ~ 
18 πεσεῖν. Tug ὃ ἀπολύων τὴν γυναῖκα αὑτοῦ καὶ γαμῶν ἑτέραν μοιχεύει, καὶ πᾶς 

: ~ x 
19 ὁ ἀπολελυμένην ἀπὸ ἀνδρὸς γαμῶν μοιχεύει. ᾿άνϑρωπος dé τις ἦν πλούσιος, καὶ 


14 


106 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES [Part VI. 





LUKE XVI. , 
> ~ 
20 ἐγεδιδύσκετο πορφύραν καὶ βύσσον εὐφραινόμενος “a0 ἡμέραν λαμπρῶς. Πτω- 
χὸς δέ τις ἦν ὀνόματι ““άζαρος, ὃ os ἐβέλβητο πρὸς τὸν πυλῶνα αὐτοῦ ἡλκωμένος 
21 1 χαὶ ἐπιϑυμῶν χορτασθῆναι ἀπὸ τῶν ψιχίων τῶν πιπτόντων ἀπὸ τῆς τραπέζης. 
22 τοῦ πλουσίου" ἀλλὰ καὶ οἱ κύνες ἐρχόμενοι ἀπέλειχον τὰ ἕλκη αὐτοῦ. Ἐγένετο 
δὲ ἀποθανεῖν τὸν πτωχὸν καὶ ἀπενεχϑῆναι αὐτὸν ὑπὸ τῶν ἀγγέλων εἰς τὸν κόλ- 
23 πον ABoadu. ἀπέϑανε δὲ καὶ 6 πλούσιος, καὶ ἐτάφη. Καὶ ἐν τῷ ἅδῃ ἐπάρας 
κ 3 4 ς ~ ῦν α 4 > , ze \ > 4 εν." , 
τοὺς ὀφθάλμους αὑτοῦ, this. "08 ἕν βασάνοις, ὁρᾷ τὸν ᾿“΄Ϊβραὰμ ἀπὸ μαχρύϑεν 
24 καὶ “ἀζαρον ἐν τοῖς κόλποις αὐτοῦ. Καὶ αὐτὸς φωνήσας εἶπε" πάτερ “Ἵβραάμ, 
ἐλέησόν μὲ καὶ πέμψον “Ἵάζαρον, ἵνα βάψῃ τὸ ἄκρον τοῦ δακτύλου αὑτοῦ ὕδατος 
25 καὶ καταψύξῃ τὴν γλῶσσάν μου, ὅτι ὀδυνῶμαι ἐν τῇ φλογὶ ταύτῃ. Εἶπε δὲ 
3 [4 ’ , σ 3 ,» \ A > ἤ 3 ~ ~ 4 
‘Aout τέκνον, μνήσϑητι, ott ἀπέλαβες ov τὰ ἀγαϑά cov ἐν τῇ ζωῇ cov, καὶ 
26 “άζαρος ὁμοίως τὰ κακά" νῦν δὲ ὅδε παρακαλεῖται, ov δὲ ὀδυνᾶσαι. Καὶ ἐπὶ 
πᾶσι τούτοις μεταξὺ ἡμῶν καὶ ὑμῶν χάσμα μέγα ἐστήρικται, ὅπως οἱ ϑέλοντες 
~ ” ers c »~ ‘ , A © > wo A Φ ~ ~ 
διαβῆναι ἔνϑεν πρὸς ὑμᾶς μὴ δύνωνται, μηδὲ οἱ ἐκεῖϑεν πρὸς ἡμᾶς διαπερῶσιν. 
, > oe 2% , σ , > 4 > \ ~ , 
27 Εἶπε δέ" ἐρωτῶ οὖν σε, πάτερ, ἵνα πέμψῃς αὐτὸν εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ πατρός μου" 
! ow A ? > ’ cs σ 7 > ~ σ A A > ‘ μή 
28 ! ἔχω γὰρ πέντε ἀδελφοὺς " ome διαμαρτύρηται αὑτοῖς, wa μὴ καὶ αὗτοι ἐλϑωσιν 
> \ , ~ ~ , , 2 «9 , ” “.. | 4 
29 εἰς τὸν τόπον τοῦτον τῆς βασάνου. Aéyer αὐτῷ “ABoacu: ἔχουσι Μωῦσέα καὶ 
30 τοὺς προφήτας" ἀκουσάτωσαν αὐτῶν. Ὃ δὲ εἶπεν" οὐχί, πάτερ ᾿Αβραάμ, ἀλλ 
31 ἐάν τις ἀπὸ γεχρῶν πορευϑῇ πρὸς αὐτούς, μετανοήσουσιν. Eline δὲ αὐτῷ᾽ εἰ 
Μωΐῦσέως καὶ τῶν προφητῶν οὐκ ἀκούουσιν, ιοὐδὲ ἐάν τις; ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῇ, 
πεισϑήσονται. 


δ 101. Jesus inculcates forbearance, faith, humility —Perea. 


Luxe XVII. 1—10. 
: Εἶπε δὲ πρὸς τοὺς μαϑητάς᾽ ἀνένδεκτόν ἐστι τοῦ μὴ ἐλϑεῖν τὰ σκάνδαλα" 
2 οὐαὶ δέ, δι᾿ οὗ ἔρχεται. Avoitehet αὐτῷ, εἰ μύλος ὃ ὀνικὸς περίκειται περὶ τὸν 
τράχηλον αὐτοῦ καὶ ᾿ἔῤῥιπται εἰς τὴν ϑαλασσαν, ἢ ἵνα σκανδαλίσῃ ἕνα τῶν 
3 μικρῶν τούτων. Προρέχετε ἑαυτοῖς. ἐὰν δὲ ἁμάρτῃ εἰς σὲ 6 ἀδελφός σου, 
4 ἐπιτίμησον αὐτῷ, καὶ ἐὰν μετανοήσῃ, ἄφες αὐτῷ. Καὶ ἐὰν ἑπτάκις τῆς ἡμέρας 
ἁμάρτῃ εἰς σὲ καὶ ἑπτάκις τῆς ἡμέρας ἐπιστρέψῃ πρός σὲ λέγων " μετανοῶ" ἀφή- 
δ 6 σεις αὐτῷ Καὶ εἶπον οἱ ἀπόστολοι τῷ κυρίῳ" πρόςϑες ἡμῖν πίστιν. Εἶπε 
δὲ ὁ κύριος" εἰ εἴχετε πίστιν ὡς κόκκον σινάπεως, ἐλέγετε ἂν τῇ συκαμίνῳ 
1 ταύτῃ" ἐκριζώϑητι καὶ φυτεύϑητι ἐν τῇ ϑαλάσσῃ, καὶ ὑπήκουσεν ἂν ὑμῖν. Tig 
δὲ ἐξ ὑμῶν δοῦλον ἔχων ἀροτριῶντα ἢ ποιμαίνοντα, ὃς εἰφελϑόντι ἐκ τοῦ ἀγροῦ 
5 ἐρεῖ" ᾿εὐϑέως παρελϑὼν ἀνάπεσαι ; " ἀλλ᾽ οὐχὶ ἐρεῖ αὐτῷ" ἑτοίμασον, τί δει- 
πνήσω, καὶ περιζωσάμενος ἰδιακόνει ἊΝ ἕως φάγω. καὶ πίω, καὶ μεξὰ ταῦτα 
9 φάγεσαι καὶ πίεσαι σύ; Μὴ χάριν ἔχει τῷ δούλῳ ἐκείνῳ, ὅτι ἐποίησε τὰ δια- 
10 ταχϑέντα; οὐ δοκῶ. Οὕτω καὶ ὑμεῖς, ὅταν ποιήσητε πάντα τὰ διαταχϑέντα 
ὑμῖν, λέγετε" ὅτι δοῦλοι ἀχρεῖοί ἐσμεν" ὅτι, ὃ ὠφείλομεν ποιῆσαι, πεποιήκαμεν. 





® 4. Comp. Lev. 19, 17. 18, 


a 


= 


ee oe ἄσσον 


er ΟΝ ΣΟ ας ΔΑ ΣΡ ΡΨ ἈΠΎΡΙ 


ΓΟ ee ere ee ΨΥ 


δὲ 101, 102, 103.] UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. 107 





§ 102. Christ’s coming will be sudden.—Perea. 


Luxe XVII. 20—37. 

3 A i: ~ " - ~ 

20 Ἐπερωτηϑεὶς δὲ ὑπὸ τῶν «Φαρισαίων, πότε ἔρχεται ἣ βασιλεία τοῦ ϑεοῦ, 
ἀπεχρίϑη αὐτοῖς καὶ εἶπεν" οὐκ ἔρχεται i, βασιλεία τοῦ ϑεοῦ μετὰ παρατηρή- 

21 GEOG, οὐδὲ ἐροῦσιν" ἰδού, ὧδε, ib ἰδού, ἐχεῖ" ἰδοὺ γάρ, ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ ϑεου 
22 ἐντὸς ὑμῶν ἐστιν. Εἶπε δὲ πρὸς τοὺς μαϑητάς᾽ ἐλεύσονται ἡμέραι, ὅτε 
ἐπιϑυμήσετε μίαν τῶν ἡμερῶν τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἰδεῖν, καὶ οὐκ ὄψεσϑε. 

Α ~ ~ τ 4 Ἂ e ~ . σ 
2324 Καὶ ἐροῦσιν ὑμῖν “ ἰδού, ὧδε, 7, ἰδού, ἐκεῖ ", μὴ ἀπέλϑητε, μηδὲ διώξητε. “Ὥςπερ 
‘ ‘ ᾿ ~ ῥ 

γὰρ ἡ ἀστραπὴ ἡ ἀστράπτουσα ἐκ τῆς Um οὐρανὸν εἰς τὴν UN οὐρανὸν λάμπει, 

25 οὗ Υ̓ 5 oe ae Ὺ ~ >» , 3 Ὁ ee ~ δὲ δεῖ 
25 οὕτως ἔσται [καὶ] ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ αὑτοῦ. Πρῶτον δὲ δεῖ 
26 αὐτὸν πολλὰ παϑεῖν καὶ ἀποδοκιμασϑῆναι ἀπὸ τὴς γενεᾶς ταύτης. Καὶ καϑὼς 

- ~ 7 “ ~ ~ ~ 
ἐγένετο ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις Νῶε, οὕτως ἔσται καὶ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀν- 
᾿ τ « ~ ~ 
27 ϑρώπου. Ἤσϑιον, ἔπινον, ἐγάμουν, ἐξεγαμίζοντο, ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας εἰςῆλϑε Νῶε εἰς 
28 A , LES « ἘΣ bee , ° a « , A 
τὴν κιβωτὸν, καὶ ἤλϑεν ὁ κατακλυσμὸς καὶ ἀπώλεσεν ἁἀπαντας." ᾿Ομοίως καὶ 
£21 2 > ἂν δὲ tae ΤΣ ἢ » ὡς ἃ > 2 > “4 
ὡς ἐγένετο ἕν ταῖς ἡμέραις Awt’ ἤσϑιον, ἔπινον, ἡγόραζον, ἐπώλουν, ἐφύτευον, 


839 φκοδόμουν" 7 δὲ ἡμέρᾳ ἐξῆλϑε Adt ἀπὸ Σοδόμων, ἔβρεξε πῦρ καὶ ϑεῖον an 


80 οὐρανοῦ καὶ ἀπώλεσεν ἅπαντας "" κατὰ ταὐτὰ ἔσται 7 ἡμέρᾳ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀν- 
31 ϑρώπου ἀποκαλύπτεται. Ἔν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ὃς ἔσται ἐπὶ τοῦ δώματος καὶ τὰ 
σκεύη αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ, μὴ καταβάτω ἄραι αὐτά" καὶ ὁ ἐν τῷ ἀγρῷ ὁμοίως μὴ 
32 33 ἐπιστρεψάτω εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω.᾽ Mmpovevere τῆς γυναικὸς Aare “Og ἐὰν 
ζητήσῃ τὴν ψυχὴν αὑτοῦ σῶσαι, ἀπολέσει αὐτήν" καὶ ὃς ἐὰν ἀπολέσῃ αὐτήν, 
34 ζω γονήσει αὐτήν. Aéyoo opie’ ταύτῃ τῇ νυχτὶ ἔσονται δύο ἐπὶ κλίνης μιᾶς " 
35. εἷς παραληφϑήσεται, καὶ ὁ ἕτερος ἀφεϑήσεται. Avo ἔσονται ἀλήϑουσαι ἐπὶ τὸ 
36 αὐτό" ἡ na παραληφϑήσεται, καὶ ἧ ἑτέρα ἀφεϑήσεται. [Avo ἔσονται ἐν τῷ 
37 ἀγρῷ" εἷς παραληφϑήσεται, καὶ ὁ ἕτερος ἀφεϑήσεται.] Καὶ ἀποκχριϑέντες 
᾿λέγουσιν αὐτῷ" ποῦ, κύριε; ὃ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς" ὅπου τὸ σῶμα, ἐχεῖ συνα- 
χϑήσονται οἱ ἀετοί. 


§ 103. Parables: The Importunate Widow. The Pharisee and Publican.—Perea. 
Luxe XVIII. 1—14. 
1 Ἔλεγε δὲ καὶ παραβολὴν αὐτοῖς πρὸς to δεῖν πάντοτε προςεύχεσϑαι καὶ μὴ 
5 ~ 4 , . , ΄ ot , 4 Ἢ Ἢ , ἐν 
2 ἐχκακεῖν," λέγων κριτῆς τις ἣν ἔν τινι πόλει τὸν ϑεὸν μὴ φοβούμενος καὶ ἄ»- 
‘ ΤῊ αὶ ὦ ’ , 5. Σ 3 ~ ᾽ ΤΠ ιν χ 
3 ϑρῶπον μὴ ἐντρεπόμενος. Χήρα δὲ ἣν ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ, καὶ ἤρχετο πρὸς 
> as | ’ " ° ’ , > 4 « 5 , Ἢ Pt z ti as 
4 αὐτὸν λέγουσα exdinnoov μὲ ἀπὸ tov ἀντιδίκον pov. Καὶ οὐκ ἠἡϑέλησεν ἐπὶ 
Δ) ~ ) χε ak 
χρόνον. μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα εἶπεν ἐν ἑαυτῷ " εἰ καὶ τὸν ϑεὸν οὐ φοβοῦμαι καὶ av- 
5 ϑρώπον οὖχ ἐντρέπομαι, ' διά ye τὸ παρέχειν μοι κόπον τὴν χήραν ταύτην éx- 
, cabs δὶ ¢ \ > , 3 > . P e443 ; 
6 δικήσω αὑτήν, wa μὴ εἰς τέλος ἐρχομένη ὑπωπιάζῃ με. Εἶπε δὲ ὁ κύριος" 
- Α 4 αὶ f° ‘ 
1 dxotoere, τί ὁ κριτὴς tis ἀδικίαρ λέγει. Ὁ δὲ ϑεὺς οὐ μὴ ποιήσει τὴν ἐκδίκησιν 
+ ‘ νῷ ~ = ‘ A ¢ a 
τῶν ἐχλεκτῶν αὑτοῦ, THY βοώντων πρὸς αὐτὸν ἡμέρας καὶ νυκτός, καὶ μακρο- 
- ἂν 63 σ ᾿ Ἢ 
8 ϑυμῶν ἐπὶ αὐτοῖς ; “έγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι ποιήσει τὴν ἐκδίκησιν αὐτῶν ἐν τάχει. πλὴν 
~ Ἢ Ἂ ὧν : 
ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐλϑὼν ἄρα εὑρήσει τὴν πίστιν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ; 





8 27. Gen.7, 4. 7. > 29. Gen. 19, 15 sq. ὁ 32. Gen. 19, 26. 


108 


FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES 


[Parr VI. 





LUKE XVIII. 
9 Εἶπε δὲ καὶ πρί ς τινας τοὺς πεποιϑότας ἐφ᾽ ἑαυτοῖς, ὅτι εἰσὶ δίκαιοι, καὶ 


11 εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν προρεύξασϑαι" 


. 10 ἐξουϑενοῦντας τοὺς λοιποὺς τὴν παραβολὴν catia’ ἄνϑρωποι δύο ἀνέβησαν 
6 εἷς Φαρισαῖος καὶ ὃ ἕτερος τελώνης. 


‘O Pa- 


θισαῖος σταϑεὶς πρὸς ἑαυτὸν ταῦτα προρηύχετο᾽ o ϑεός, εὐχαριστῶ σοι, ὅτι 
οὐκ εἰμὲ ὥςπερ οἱ λοιποὶ τῶν ἀνϑρώπων, ἅρπαγες, ἄδικοι, μοιχοί, ἣ καὶ ὡς 
12 οὗτος ὁ τελώνης. Νηστεύω. δὶς τοῦ σαββάτου, ἀποδεκατῶ πάντα ὅσα »εῶμαι, 
13 Καὶ 6 τελ ὥνης μακροϑὲν ἑστὼς οὐκ ἤϑελεν οὐδὲ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς. εἰς τὸν 
οὐρανὸν ἐπᾶραι, ἀλλ᾿ ἔτυπτεν εἰς τὺ, σεῖθος, αὑτοῦ λέγων" ὃ ϑεός, ἱλάσϑητί 
14 μοι σῷ ἁμαρτωλῷ. Ayo i Dye, κατέβη οὗτος δεδικαιωμένος εἰς τὸν οἶκον αὗ- 
τοῦ mag ἐκεῖνον" ὅτι πᾶς ὁ ὑψῶν ἑαυτὸν ταπεινωϑήσεται, ὁ δὲ ταπεινῶν ἕαυ- 


τὸν ὑψωϑήσεται. 


§ 104. Precepts respecting Divorce,— Perea. 


Marra. XIX. 3—12. 
4 “ ~ ~ 
3 Καὶ προςῆλϑον αὐτῷ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι 
πειράζοντες αὐτὸν καὶ λέγοντες αὐτῷ" 
> w+ > a > ~ 3 
εἰ ἔξεστιν ἀνθρώπῳ ἀπολῦσαι τὴν 
γυναῖκα αὑτοῦ κατὰ πᾶσαν αἰτίαν ; 


εἶπον" Movons 


4 Ὁ δὲ ἀποχριϑεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς" οὐκ 
ἀνέγνωτε, ὅτι. ὁ ποιήσας an ἀρχῆς ἄρ- 
ὅ σεν καὶ ϑῆλυ é ἐποίησεν αὐτούς ; " Καὶ 
εἶπεν" ἕνεκεν τούτου καταλείψει ἄν- 
ϑρωπος τὸν πατέρα καὶ τὴν μητέρα καὶ 
προςκολληϑήσεται τῇ γυναικὶ αὑτοῦ" 
καὶ ἔσονται οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν. 
6 ἽΩςτε οὐκέτι εἰσὶ δύο, ἀλλὰ σὰρξ μία. 
ὃ οὖν ὁ ϑεὺς συνέζευξεν, ἄν ϑρωπος μὴ 
7 χωριζέτω. «“ἔγουσιν αὐτῷ" τί οὖν 
Μωῦσῆς ἐνετείλατο δοῦναι βιβλίον 
ἀποστασίου, καὶ ἀπολῦσαι αὐτήν ;° 
8 “έγει αὐτοῖς" ὅτι Μωΐῦσῆς πρὸς τὴν 
σκληροκαρδίαν ὑμῶν ἐπέτρεψεν v- 
μῖν. ἀπολῦσαι τὰς γυναῖκας ὑμῶν" 
9 am ἀρχῆς δὲ οὐ γέγονεν οὕτω. Aéyo 
δὲ ὑμῖν, ὅτι ὃς ἂν ἀπολύσῃ τὴν υναῖχα 
αὑτοῦ, μὴ ἐπὶ πορνείᾳ, καὶ γαμήσῃ 


ἄλλην, μοιχᾶται" καὶ ὁ ἀπολελυμένην. 
Atyovow αὐτῷ οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ" εἰ οὕτως ἐσεὶν ἡ αἰτία 


10 γαμήσας μοιχᾶται, 


Mark X. 2—12. 

2 Kei προςελϑόντες Φαρισαῖοι ἐπη- 
ρώτησαν αὐτόν, εἰ ἔξεστιν ἀνδρὶ γυ- 
ναῖκα ἀπολῦσαι, πειράζοντες αὐτόν. 

8 Ὃ δὲ ἀποχριϑεὶς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " τί 

4 ὑμῖν ἐνετείλατο Μωὺῦσῆς; Οἱ δὲ 


ἐπέτρεψε βιβλίον ἀποστασίου γράψαι, καὶ 


5 ἀπολῦσαι. Καὶ ἀποχριϑεὶς ὁ Ἶη- 
σοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς "᾿πρὸς τὴν σκλῆρο- 
καρδίαν ὑμῶν ἔγραψεν ὑμῖν τὴν ἐν- 

6 τολὴν ταύτην. ἀπὸ δὲ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως 
ἄρσεν καὶ ϑῆλυ ἐποίησεν αὐτοὺς ὁ 

7 ϑεός." ὍἝνεχεν τούτου καταλείψει 

᾿ ἄγϑρωπος τὸν πατέρα αὑτοῦ καὶ τὴν 
μητέρα, καὶ προφκολληϑήσεται πρὸς 
8 τὴν γυναῖκα αὑτοῦ" καὶ ἔσονται οἱ 
δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν." ὥςτε οὐκέτι εἰσὶ 
9 δύο, ἀλλὰ μία σάρξ. Ὃ οὖν ὁ ϑεὸς 
συνέζευξεν, ἄνϑρωπος μὴ χωριζέτω. 

10 Καὶ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ πάλιν οἱ μαϑηταὶ 
αὐτοῦ περὶ τοῦ αὐτοῦ ἐπηρώτησαν 

11 αὐτόν. Καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς" ὃς ἐὰν 
ἀπολύσῃ τὴν γυναῖκα αὑτοῦ καὶ γαμή- 

12 on ἄλλην, μοιχᾶται ἐπὶ αὐτήν" Καὶ 
ἐὰν γυνὴ ἀπολύσῃ τὸν ἄνδρα αὑτῆς 
καὶ γαμηϑῇ ἄλλῳ, μοιχᾶται. 





* 4 etc. Gen. 1, 27. 


> 5 etc. Gen. 2, 24, 


© 7 and 4, Deut, 24, 1. 


γ Ὁ» 


ee. ee a 
᾿ς 


Gas 





Pe Re ee Se 





Seen eS = 


Sk ον τε νος a 


ΠΟΥ od 


ler 


ey eee 


Se BF 





11 τοῦ ἀνθρώπου μετὰ τῆς γυναικός, οὐ συμφέρϑι γαμῆσαι. 


MATTH. XIX, 





Ὁ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς: 
12 οὐ πάντες χριφοῦδι τὸν λόγον τοῦζον, ἀλλ οἷς δέδοταί. Εἰσὶ γὰρ εὐνοῦχοι, οἵτινες 
ἐκ κοιλίας “μητρὸς ἐγεννήθησαν οὕτω καί εἶσιν εὐνοῦχοι, οἵτινες εὐνουχίσϑησαν 
ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων" καὶ. εἰσιν εὐνοῦχοι, οἵτινες εὐνούχισαν ἑαυτοὺς διὰ τὴν 

, βασιλείαν τῶν οὐρανῶν. ὁ δυνάμενος χωρεῖν χωρείτω. 


§ 105. Jesus receives and blesses little Children — Perea. 


. Marra. XIX. 13—15. 
1. Τότε προοηνέχϑη αὖ- 
τῷ παιδία, ἵνα τὰς χεῖ- 
eas ἐπιϑῇ αὐτοῖς καὶ 
προρεύξηται. οἱ δὲ μα- 
ϑηταὶ ἐπετίμησαν αὐ- 
14 τοῖς. ‘O δὲ ᾿ἸΙησοῦς 
ἄφετε τὰ παι- 
δία, καὶ μὴ κωλύετε αὐὖ- 
τὰ ἐλϑεῖν πρός mE’ τῶν 
γὰρ τοιούτων ἐστὶν ἧ 
βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν. 
15 Καὶ ἐπιϑεὶς αὐτοῖς τὰς 
χεῖρας ἐπορεύϑη ἐκεῖ- 
on, 


εἶπεν" 


καλισάμενος αὐτά, τιϑεὶς τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ αὐτά, ηὐλόγει αὐτά. 


1. Kat προςέφερον αὐὖ- 
~ ? o σ 
τῷ παιδία, We ἅψηται 
3 heed ς A Ἁ 
αὑτῶν" οἱ δὲ apes hte 
ἐπετίμων τοῖς moosge- 
14 δόναν; ᾿Ιδὼν δὲ ὁ In- 
σοῦς ἠγανάκτησε καὶ εἶ. 
ἵπὲν αὐτοῖς ἄφετε τὰ 
παιδία ἔρχεσϑαι πρός 
με, καὶ μὴ κωλύετε αὐ- 
τά" τῶν γὰρ τοιούτων 
> 4 « , ~ 
ἐστιν ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ 
16 ϑεοῦ. “Aunr λέγω ὑμῖν, 
a 35 ‘ Se 4 
og eav μὴ δέξηται τὴν 
βασιλείαν τοῦ ϑεοῦ ὡς 
παιδίον, οὐ μὴ εἰρέλϑῃ 


16 εἰς αὐδήν: Καὶ ἕναγ- 


Luxe XVIII’ 15—17. 
Προςέφερον δὲ αὖ- 
Be ων , φ 
τῷ καὶ τὰ βρέφη, wa 
αὐτῶν ἅπτηται" ἰδόν-. 
Ἁ ε A > 
weg δὲ οἱ μαϑηται ἐπ- 
16 ετίμησαν αὐτοῖς. Ὃ δὲ 
᾿Ιησοῦς προςκαλεσάμε- 
ψος αὐτὰ εἶπεν" ἄφετε τὰ 
’ wy , 
παιδία ἔρχεσϑαι πρὸς 
με, καὶ μὴ κωλύετε αὐτά" 
‘TOV γὰρ τοιούτων ἐστὶν 
ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ. 


15 


17 *Auyy λέγω ὑμῖν, ὃς ἐὰν 
μὴ δέξηται τὴν βασιλεί- 
αν του ϑεοῦ ὡς παιδίον, 
οὐ μὴ sige OT εἰς αὐτήν. 


§ 106. The rich Young Man. Parable of the Labourers in the Vineyard.—Perea. 


Marru. XIX. 16—30. 
XX. 1—16. 

Καὶ ἰδού, εἷς προςελ- 
ϑὼν εἶπεν αὐτῷ - διδά- 
οσκαλε ἀγαϑέ, τί ἀγα- 
᾿ ϑὸν ποιήσω, ἵνα ἔχω ζω- 
17 ἣν αἰώνιον ; Ὁ δὲ εἶπεν 
αὐτῷ" τί με λέγεις ἀγα- 
ϑόν ; οὐδεὶς ἀγαϑός, 
εἰ μὴ εἷς ὁ ϑεός. εἰ δὲ 
ϑέλεις εἰςελϑεῖν εἰς τὴν 
ζωήν, τήρησον τὰς ἐν- 
18 τολάς. Aéye αὐτῷ: 


10 


Marx X. 17—31. 


17 Kai ἐχπορευομένου 
αὐτοῦ εἰς ὁδόν, προς- 
δραμὼν εἷς καὶ γονυπε- 
τήσας αὐτὸν ἐπηρώτα 

> rs , 3 
αὑτὸν" διδάσκαλε ἀγα- 
, ’ ; [ὦ 4 
ϑέ, τί ποιήσω, wa ζωὴν 
αἰώνιον χληρονομήσω ; 

18 Ὁ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν av- 
τῷ" τί μὲ λέγεις ἀγα- 
Gov; οὐδεὶς ἀγαϑός, 

19 εἰ μὴ εἷς 6 ϑεός. Τὰς 


Luxe XVIII. 18—30. 


18 Καὶ ἐπηρώτησέ tic 
αὐτὸν ἄρχων λέγων᾽ 
διδάσχαλε ἀγαϑέ, τί 
ποιήσας ζωὴν αἰώνιον 

19 κληρονομήσω ; Εἶπε δὲ 
“αὐτῷ ὁ Ἰησοῦς τί ps 
λέγεις ἀγαϑόν 3. οὐδεὶς 
ἀγαϑός, εἰ μὴ εἷς ὃ 
ϑεύς. 


20 Τὰς ἐντολὰς οἷ- 


110 





19 


21 


pata πολλά. 


FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES [Parr VI. 
MATTH. XIX. MARK X. LUKE XVIII. 
. 
ποίας ; 6 δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς ei- ἐντολὰς οἶδας" μὴ δας" μὴ μοιχεύσῃς᾽ μὴ 


‘3 ea a > , 
δ᾽ TO Ov Movéevosic’ 


> Ud > , 
οὐ μοιχεύσεις" ov xhe-- 


weg ov. ψευδομαρτυ- 
ρήσεις" ' τίμα τὸν πα- 
τέρα καὶ τὴν μητέρα. 
καί: ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλη- 
σίον cov ὡς σεαυτόν. 
Atya ᾿αὐτῷ ὁ νεανί- 
σκος" πάντα ταῦτα ἐφυ- 


"λαξάμην ἐκ νεότητός 


μου" τί ἔτι ὑστερῶ ; 


Ἔφη αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿ἸΙησοῦς" 


εἰ ϑέλεις τέλειος εἶναι, 
ὕπαγε, πώλησόν σου τὰ 
ὑπάρχοντα καὶ δὸς πτω- 
χοῖς, καὶ ἕξεις ϑησαυρὸν 
ἐν οὐρανῷ" καὶ δεῦρο, 
ἀκολούϑει μοι. "Axov- 
σας δὲ ὁ νεανίσκος τὸν 
λόγον ἀπῆλϑε λυπού- 
μένος" ἦν γὰρ ἔχων κτή- 
Ὁ δὲ 
᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπε τοῖς μαϑη- 
ταῖς αὑτοῦ " ἀμὴν λέγω 
ὑμῖν, ὅτι δυρκόλως πλού- 
σιος εἰςελεύσεται εἰς τὴν 
βασιλείαν τῶν οὐρανῶν. 


20 τέρα. 


,ὑστερεῖ" 


23 mara πολλά. 


μοιχεύσῃης" μὴ φονεύ- 


ons’ μὴ κλέψῃς" μὴ 
ψεὐδομαρευρήσῃο᾽ «μὴ. 


ἀποστερήσῃς " τίμα τὸν 
πατέρα σου καὶ τὴν μη- 
ὋὉ δὲ ἀποκριϑεὶς 
εἶπεν αὐτῷ διδάσκαλε, 
ταῦτα πάντα ἐφυλαξά- 
μὴν ἐκ νεύτητός μοῦ. 


21 Ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς ἐμβλέψας 


αὐτῷ ἠγάπησεν αὐτὸν 
A ~ 
καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ" ἕν σοι 
σ 4 ” 
ὕπαγε, ὅσα ἔ- 
;» ‘ ‘ 
χεις πώλησον καὶ δὸς 
τοῖς πτωχοῖς" καὶ ἕξεις 
\ 5 > a 
Dyoaveoy ἕν οὐρανῷ 
καὶ δεῦρο, ἀκολούϑει 
μοι, ἄρας τὸν σταυρόν. 


22 Ὃ δὲ στυγνάσας ἐπὶ τῷ 


λόγῳ ἀπῆλϑε λυπούμε- 
γος" ἦν γὰρ ἔχων κτή- 
Καὶ πε. 
ριβλεψάμενος ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς 
λέγει τοῖς μαϑηταῖς αὗ- 
τοῦ" πῶς δυορκόλως οἱ 
τὰ χρήματα ἔχοντες εἰς 
τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ ϑεοῦ 


24 εἰςελεύσονται. Οἱ δὲ 


φονεύσῃς " μὴ κλέψῃς" 
μὴ ψευδομαρτυρήσῃς᾽ 
τίμα τὸν πατέρα σου 
καὶ τὴν μητέρα σου. 


Ὁ δὲ εἶπε" 

- ΄ iz > € , 
ταῦτα πάντα epviasa- 
μὴν ἐκ νεότητός μου. 


22. ᾿Αἰκούσας δὲ ταῦτα ὁ 


᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτῷ" ἔτι 
ἕν σοι λείπει" πάντα,ὕὅσα 
” , " A , 
ἔχεις, πώλησον, καὶ διά- 
δος πτωχοῖς, καὶ ἕξεις 
ϑησαυρὸν ἐν οὐρανῷ" καὶ 
δεῦρο, ἀκολούϑει μοι. 


23 Ὃ δὲ ἀκούσας ταῦτα 


περίλυπος ἐγένετο" ἦν 
γὰρ πλούσιος σφόδρα. 


24 ᾿Ιδὼν δὲ αὐτὸν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς 


περίλυπον γενόμενον εἶ- 
ms* πῶς δυορκόλως οἱ 
τὰ χρήματα ἔχοντες 
εἰςελεύσονται εἰς τὴν 
βασιλείαν τοῦ ϑεοῦ. 


μαϑηταὶ ἐθαμβοῦντο ἐπὶ τοῖς λόγοις αὐτοῦ. ὁ δὲ Τησοὺς 


πάλιν ἀποκριϑεὶς λέγει αὐτοῖς" 


Πάλιν δὲ λέγω ὑμῖν, 
εὐχοπώτερόν ἐστι, κά- 
μηλον διὰ τρυπήματος 
ῥαφίδος διελϑεῖν, ἢ 
πλούσιον εἰς τὴν βασι- 
λείαν tov ϑεοῦ εἰςελ- 
θεῖν. ᾿Αἰκούσαντες δὲ 
οἱ μαϑηταὶ ἐξεπλήσ- 
σοντο σφόδρα, λέγοντες " 


25 ϑεοῦ εἰςελϑεῖν. 


26 θεῖν. 


, ~ , , 
τέκνα, πῶς δυςκολὸν 


ἐστι, τοὺς πεποιϑότας ἐπὶ τοῖς χρήμασιν 


εἰς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ 
Evxo- 
πώτερόν ἐστι, κάμηλον 
διὰ τῆς τρυμαλιᾶς τῆς 
ῥαφίδος διελϑεῖν, ἢ 
πλούσιον εἰς τὴν βασι- 
λείαν τοῦ ϑεοῦ εἰςελ- 
Οἱ δὲ περισσῶς 


25 Εὐχοπώτερον γάρ ἐστι, 


κάμηλον διὰ τρυμαλιᾶς 
ῥαφίδος εἰςελϑεῖν, ἢ 
πλούσιον εἰς τὴν βασι- 
λείαν τοῦ ϑεοῦ εἰςελ- 


26 ϑεῖν. Εἶπον δὲ οἱ ἀκού- 


σαντες" καὶ τίς δύνα- 


ἐξεπλήσσοντο, λέγοντες 27 cat σωϑῆναι; Ὁ δὲ εἶ- 





8. 18 etc, Ex. 20, 12 sq. Lev. 19, 18, 





ead 











§ 106. ] 


UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL 


“AT BETHANY. 


111 





26 


27 


28 


MATTH XIX. 


τίς ἄρα δύναται σωϑῆ- 
Ἐμβλέψας δὲ 6 27 δύναται σωϑῆναι; Ἔμ- 


γαι; 


᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " 


‘ > , ~ 
παρὰ ἀνϑρώποις τοῦτο 
3 7 , 3 
advvatoy ἔστι" 

~ , 
δὲ dem πάντα δυνατά. 


Τότε ἀποκριϑεὶς 


παρὰ 


MAREK X. 
A ¢€ , A ? 
πρὸς EKVTOVS* καὶ τις 


βλέψας δὲ αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿1η- 
σοῦς. λέγει" παρὰ ἀ»ν- 


LUKE XVIII. 


ἱ \ > , 4 
me" τὰ ἀδυνατὰ παρὰ 


> / 4,3 
ἀνϑρώποις δυνατὰ ἔστι 
παρὰ τῷ ϑεῷ.. 


ϑρώποις ἀδύνατον, ἀλλ οὐ παρὰ τῷ 
ϑεῷ" πάντα γὰρ δυνατά ἐστι παρὰ 


τῷ ϑεῷ. 


Ἤρξατο ὁ Πέτρος 28 


Εἶπε δὲ ὁ Πέτρος" 


ὁ 28 
5 ? ¢ ~ > , 

i λέγειν αὐτῷ ἰδού, ἡμεῖς ἰδού, ἡμεῖς ἀφήκαμεν 
πάντα καὶ ἠκολουϑή- 


29 σαμέν σοι. Ὁ δὲ εἶπεν 


ΤΙέτρος εἶπεν αὐτῷ᾽ 
δού, ἡμεῖς ἀφήκαμεν 
πάντα, καὶ ἠκολουϑή-, 29 ἠκολουϑήσαμέν σοι. A- 


3 A 
ἀφήκαμεν πάντα καὶ 


σαμέν σοι" τί ἄρα ἔσται 
ἡμῖν; Ὃ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶ- 


> ~ > A , 
_mey αὐτοῖς ἀμὴν λέγω 


29 


90 


¢ w 4 ~ 

ὑμῖν, ὅτι ὑμεῖς οἱ ἀκο- 
4 , > £ ~ 

λουϑησαντὲς μοι ἕν τῇ 

παλιγγενεσίᾳ, ὅταν κα- 

ϑίσῃ ὁ υἱὸς tov ἀνϑρώ- 


ποχριϑεὶς δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς 
“ 22 8 , r SO 
εἶπεν" ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, 
9 a - 
οὐδείς ἐστιν, ὃς ἀφῆκεν 
950) Δ ἃ ὁ re ae 
οἰκίαν ἡ ἀδελφοὺς ἡ a- 
b) ΐ \ ‘ 
δελφὰς ἢ πατέρα ἢ μητέ- 
\ ~ \ on 
ρα ἢ γυναῖχα ἢ τέκνα ἢ 
ἀγροὺς ἕνεκεν ἐμοῦ καὶ 


που ἐπὶ ϑρόνου δόξης 30 τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, | ἐὰν μὴ 


- ψ 
αὑτοῦ, καϑίσεσϑε καὶ 


ὑμεῖς ἐπὶ δώδεκα ϑρό- 


’, \ , 
vous, xoivortss τὰς do- 


λάβῃ ἑκατονταπλασίονα 
γῦν ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τούτῳ 

>? Διο ον ἂν. #58 
οἰκίας καὶ ἀδελφοὺς καὶ 


3 “»ς 5 A , Cae 
αὑτοῖς " ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, 
[2 > , > a > ~ 
OT ιοὑδείς ἐστιν, OF ἀφῆ- 

Ἃ » 
nev οἰκίαν ἢ γονεῖς ἢ 
> \ xn es ΟΝ 
ἀδελφοὺς ἢ γυναῖχα ἢ 
τέχνα ἕνεκεν τῆς βασι- 


80 λείας τοῦ ϑεοῦ, ! ὃς ov 


μὴ ἀπολάβῃ πολλαπλα- 
σίονα ἐν τῷ καιρῷ τού- 
τῳ καὶ ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τῷ 
ἐρχομένῳ ζωὴν αἰώνιον. 


Sexa φυλὰς τοῦ Ισραήλ. ἀδελφὰς καὶ μητέρας καὶ τέκνα καὶ ἀγροὺς 

Καὶ πᾶς ὅςτις ἀφῆκεν μετὰ διωγμῶν, καὶ ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τῷ ἐρχομένῳ 
οἰκίας ἢ ἀδελφοὺς ἢ 31 ζωὴν αἰώνιον. Πολλοὶ δὲ ἔσονται πρῶτοι 
ἀδελφὰς ἢ πατέρα ἢ ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι. 

μητέρα ἢ γυϑάθαι ἢ τέκ-. Ris λΥϑ ; 

να ἢ ἀγροὺς ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀνόματός μου, οὐκωφωρρανλ λον λήψεται καὶ ζωὴν αἰώ- 


ψιον χληρονομήσει. Πολλοὶ δὲ ἔσονται πρῶτοι ἔσχατοι, καὶ ἔσχατοι πρῶτοι. 


XX.1 ‘Opoiu γάρ ἐστιν ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν ἀνθρώπῳ οἰκοδεσπότῃ, ὅςτις 
5.» σ ἃ, ’ 3 7 > A > ~ ε ~ 
2 ἐξῆλϑεν apa mowl μισϑώσασϑαι ἐργάτας εἰς τὸν ἀμπελῶνα αὑτοῦ. Lvuqo- 


a ὧν Ὁ ὦ9 


7 “έγουσιν αὐτῷ " 


10 
11 


, A A ~ > ~ 3 , A ¢ [ὦ 5 ’ὔ 3 ‘ 3 A 
γήσας δὲ μετὰ τῶν ἐργατῶν ἐκ δηναρίου τὴν ἡμέραν, ἀπέστειλεν αὐτοὺς εἰς τὸν 
3 ~ ε ~ a Se \ A ᾽ m4 “ 4 ¢€ ~ > ~ 
ἀμπελῶνα αὑτοῦ. Καὶ ἐξελϑὼν περὶ τρίτην ὥραν εἶδεν ἄλλους ἑστῶτας ἐν τῇ 

~ ‘ 4 ~ ~ 
ἀγορᾷ ἀργούς"! κἀκείνοις εἶπεν" ὑπάγετε καὶ ὑμεῖς εἰς TOY ἀμπελῶνα, καὶ ὃ ἐὰν 
Ε i wi iy P , 
7] δίκαιον, δώσῳ ὑμῖν. οἱ δὲ ἀπῆλϑον. Πάλιν ἐξελϑῶν περὶ ἕκτην καὶ ἐννάτην 
WA : ¥% va 
ὥραν ἐποίησεν ὡςαύτως. Περὶ δὲ τὴν ἑνδεκάτην ὥραν ἐξελϑὼν εὗρεν ἄλλους 
τω δὸ ν € v4 ᾽ὔ 
ἑστῶτας [ἀργοὺς] καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς " τί ὧδε ἑστήκατε ὁλὴν τὴν ἡμέραν ἀργοί; 
σ΄ ~ 3 ~ ~ 
ὅτι οὐδεὶς ἡμᾶς ἐμισϑώσατο. λέγει αὐτοῖς " ὑπάγετε καὶ ὑμεῖς 
~ a “5 A 
εἰς τὴν ἀμπελῶνα, καὶ ὃ ἐὰν ἢ δίκαιον, λήψεσϑε. ᾿Οψίας δὲ γενομένης λέγει 6 
~ ~ ~ ε ~ 5 4 , 
κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος TH ἐπιτρόπῳ αὑτοῦ" κάλεσον τοὺς ἐργάτας, καὶ ἀπόδος 
3 - A , 3 4 3 Ἁ ~ 3 , a? 4 Y , 4 23 , 
αὐτοῖς τὸν μισϑόν, ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τῶν ἐσχάτων ἕως τῶν πρώτων. Καὶ ἐλϑόν- 
ς ΡΥ er ΝΟΥ " 2 ἡ , ΥΩ 7 y ἧς ~ 
τες οἱ περὶ THY ἑνδεκάτην ὥραν ἔλαβον ἀνὰ δηνάριον. Ελϑοντες δὲ οἱ πρῶτοι 
7 J 4 an * 
ἐνόμισαν, OTL πλείονα λήψονται" καὶ ἔλαβον καὶ αὐτοὶ ἀνὰ δηνάριον. AuBortEs 


112 FROM THE+FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES [Parr VI. 





MATTH. XX, | : 
12 δὲ ἐγόγγυζον Hoag dt τοῦ οἰκοδεσπότου "λέγοντερ᾽ ὅτι οὗτοι οἱ ἔσχατοι μίαν cgay 

ἐποίησαν, καὶ ἴσους ἡμῖν αὐτοὺς ἐποίησας, τοῖς βαστάσασι τὸ βάρος τῆς ἡμέρας 

ees 7 ¢ 4 > ‘ εν a ~ esas eee, ~ 

13 καὶ τὸν καύσωνα. ὋὉ δὲ ἀποχριϑεις εἶπεν ἑνὶ αὐτῶν ἑταῖρε, οὐκ ἀδικῶ σε" 
14 οὐχὶ δηναρίου συνεφώνησάςζ μοι; “Agor τὸ σὸν καὶ ὕπαγε: ϑέλω δὲ τούτῳ τῷ 
15 ἐσχάεῳ δοῦναι ὡς καὶ σοί. Ἢ οὐκ ἔξεσεί μοι ποιῆσαι ὃ ϑέλω ἐν τοῖς ἐμοῖο; 37 
16 ὁ ὀφϑαλμός cov πονηρός ἐστιν, ὅτι ἐγὼ ἀγαϑός εἶμι; Οὕτως ἔσονται οἱ ἔσχατοι 


- 4 < , Ν λλ, 4 v > λ , ὃλί δὲ > λ , 
πρῶτοι, καὶ οἱ πρώτοι ἔσχατοι. πολλοὶ γἄρ εἰσι κλητοί, ὀλίγοι δὲ ἐκλεκτοί. 


107. Jesus a third time foretells his Death and Resurrection. [See §§ 74, '77.]—Perea. 


Marva. Xx, 17—19. : - Marx X..32—34. {0 κῈ XVI. 31—34. 
11 Kai ἀναβαίνων ὁ 32 Ἦσαν δὲ ἐν τῇ ὁδῷ 31 Παραλαβὼν δὲ τοὺς δώ- 
᾿Ιησοῦς εἰς “Ἰεροσόλυμα ἀναβαίνοντες εἰς ‘Iepo- δεκχα εἶπε πρὸς αὐτούς" 


,“ ‘ , , ΑΨ 
παρέλαβε ἱτοὺς δώδεκὰ σόλυμα, καὶ ἣν προάγων 
. ‘ > #287 3 ss ὧν ς 3 ~ δι “ἢ ~ 4 9 
padytas καὶ ἰδίαν &y avrovg ὃ Inoovg, καὶ ἐϑαμβοῦντο καὶ axo- | 
το ὧν pak ~ ‘ ~ ‘ yA , 
τῇ ὁδῷ καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς λουϑοῦντες ἐφοβοῦντο. καὶ πὰραλαβων. πάλιν 
σοὺς δώδεκα ἤρξατο αὐτοῖς λέγειν τὰ μέλ- 
λοντα αὑτῷ. σεββῳίνειν" Bae 
18 ἰδού, ἀναβαίνομεν εἰς 33 ὅτι ἰδοὺ ἀναβαίνομεν εἰς ἰδού, BREW AC εἰς 
7 , Ave -ἐἰ ε , aa τ ε , 4 
Τεροσόλυμα, καὶ ὃ υἱὸς ]Ιεροσόλυμα, καὶ ὃ υἱὸς ]εροσόλυμα, καὶ τελε- 


~ “ / > 
φτοῦ ἀνθρώπου mapado- τοῦ ἀνθρώπου πᾶρα- σϑήσεται πάντα τὰ γε- 
ϑήσεται τοῖς ἀρχιερεσι δοϑήσεται τοῖς ἀρχιερεύ. γραμμένα διὰ τῶν προ- 


καὶ γραμματεῦσι: καὶ σικαὶ τοῖς γραμματεῦσι φητῶν τῷ υἱῷ τοῦ ἀν-. 


καταχρινοῦσιν αὐτὸῤξ καὶ κατακρινοῦσιν αὖ- 32 ϑρώπου. Παραδοϑή- 


19 ϑαγάτῳ, ! καὶ παραδώ- τὸν ϑανάτῳ, καὶ παρα- σεται γὰρ τοῖς ἔϑνεσι, 
σουσιν αὐτὸν τοῖς ἔϑνες δώσουσιν αὐτὸν ᾿ τοῖξ καὶ ἐμπαιχϑήσεται καὶ 
ow εἷς τὸ ἐμπαῖξαι καὶ 84 ἔϑνεσι, ' καὶ ἐμπαίξου.- ὑβρισϑήσεται καὶ ἐμ- 
μαστιγῶσαι καὶ σταυρῶς σιν αὐτῷ, καὶ μαστιγώ- 38 πτυσϑήσεται, ! καὶ μα- 
σαι; καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ σουσιν αὐτόν, καὶ ἐμ- στιγώσαντες ἀποκτενοῦ- 
, ἀναστήσεται. ᾿πτύσουσιν αὐτῷ, καὶ σιν αὐτόν" καὶ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 


ἀποκτενοῦσιν αὐτόν" καὶ τῇ τῇ τρίτῃ ἀναστήσεται. 
, « , > , ‘ ? 4 Is , 
τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἀναστήσεται. 8384 Καὶ αὐτοὶ οὐδὲν τούτων 
~ > ~ 
| συνῆκαν, καὶ ἦν τὸ ῥῆμα 
τοῦτο κεχρυμμένον ἀπὶ αὐτῶν, καὶ οὐκ ἐγίνωσκον τὰ λεγόμενα. 


§ 108. James and John prefer their ambitious request.—Perea. 


Matrn. XX. 20—28. Marx X. 35—45. : 
20 Τότε προρῆλϑεν αὐτῷ ἡ μήτηρ 35 Καὶ προςπορεύονται αὐτῷ “Ids 
τῶν υἱῶν Ζεβεδαίου “μετὰ τῶν vi- κῶβος καὶ ᾿Ιωάννης, οἱ υἱοὶ Ζεβεδαίου, 
tiv αὑτῆς, προοκυνοῦσα καὶ αἰτοῦσά λέγοντες" διδάσκαλε, ϑέλομεν, ἵνα ὃ 


21 τι παῤ αὐτοῦ. ‘O δὲ εἶπεν [αὐτῇ 36 ἐὰν αἰτήσωμεν, ποιήσῃς ἡμῖν. “O δὲ 
τί Θέλεις ; λέγει αὐτῷ" εἰπέ, Da εἶπεν αὐτοῖς" τί ϑέλετε ποιῆσαί μὲ 





ee τ ΨΥ Ὁ 


ahi 


ee 


> λυ 


i 
‘ 
ΐ 
gd 
ᾧ 
ἱ 

f 





§§ 107, 108, 109.] UNTIL OUR LORD’s 


ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. 113 





MATTH. XX. 
, t ea ce τ 
καϑισώσιν οὗτοι οἱ δύο υἱοί μου, εἰς 
3 “ 4 2 ie 3 2 , 
ἐκ δεξιῶν cov καὶ εἷς ἐξ εὐωνυμῶν 
~ 4 
22 cov ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ cov. ᾿Α΄ποκριϑεὶς 
~ 1 , 
δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν" οὐκ οἰδατε, τί αἷ- 
~ , ~ A , 
τεῖσϑε. δυνασϑὲ πιεῖν τὸ ποτήριον, 
nm. ὁ A i , Ἃ A , 
ὁ ἐγὼ μέλλω πίνειν ; ἢ τὸ βαπτισμα, 
ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτισϑῆναι ; λέ- 
23 youow αὐτῷ" δυνάμεϑα. Καὶ λέγει 
αὐτοῖς ᾿ τὸ μὲν ποτήριόν μου πίεσϑε 
A A , <9 4‘ »» 
καὶ τὸ βάπτισμα, o ἐγώ βαπετίζομαι, 
βαπτισϑήσεσϑε' τὸ δὲ καϑίσαι ἐκ 
Ἀ ~ A 
Sekiov μου καὶ ἐξ εὐωνύμων μου οὐκ 
wn” 2 τ ~ > ΡῚ sad ς ’ὔ 
ἔστιν ἐμὸν δοῦναι, HAA οἷς ἡτοίμασται 
ς. tee , ». ἃ 5 yf 
24 ὑπὸ tov πατρὸς μου. Και axovoar- 
χες οἱ δέκα ἠγανάκτησαν περὶ τῶν 
25 δύο ἀδελφῶν. ‘O δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς προςκα- 
7 “ 
λεσάμενος αὐτοὺς εἶπεν" οἶδατε, ὅτι 
οἱ ἄρχοντες τῶν ἐθνῶν κατακυριεύ- 
ουσιν αὐτῶν, καὶ οἱ μεγάλοι κατϑ- 
~ v4 
26 ξουσιάζουσιν αὐτῶν. Οὐχ οὕτως 
~ a 
ἔσται ἐν ὑμῖν" ἀλλ ὃς ἐὰν ϑέλῃ ἐν 
ιὑμῖν μέγας γενέσϑαι, ἔστω ὑμῶν διά- 
aa 3A » 3 4 ἂν 
27 novog* καὶ ὃς ἐὰν ϑέλῃ ἐν ὑμῖν εἶναι 
- ¢ ~ ~ [2 
28 πρῶτος, ἔστω ὑμῶν δοῦλος" ὥςπερ 
ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου οὖκ ἦλϑε 
διακονηϑῆναι, ἀλλὰ διακονῆσαι καὶ 
δοῦναι τὴν ψυχὴν αὑτοῦ λύτρον ἀντὶ 
'πολλῶν. 


MARK Χ. 
ς»ν» € ‘ > μα \ c¢ w 
37 ὑμῖν; Οἱ δὲ εἶπον αὑτῷ" δὸς ἡμῖν, 
σ ΚΘ - 4) 8 2 3 Ud 
ἵνα εἷς ἐκ δεξιῶν σου καὶ εἷς ἐξ εὐωνύ- 
μῶν σου καϑίσωμεν ἐν τῇ δόξῃ σου. 
A ~ ~ 
38 Ὁ δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς" οὐκ οἵ- 
δατε, τί αἰτεῖσϑε. δύνασϑε πιεῖν τὸ 
, a δι. ’ A 4 , 
ποτήριον, O ἐγώ πίνω, καὶ τὸ βάπτι- 
ΝΜ’ Ἃ - 
σμα, ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, βαπτισϑῆναι ; 
A ~ 
39 Οἱ δὲ εἶπον αὐτῷ" δυνάμεϑα. ὁ δὲ 
"Inoovs εἶπεν αὐτοῖς" τὸ μὲν ποτή- 
a S59 , , A 4 
ριον, Oo sym πίφω, πίεσϑε, καὶ TO 
, G. 2.8 th 
βάπτισμα, ὃ ἐγὼ βαπτίζομαι, Ba- 
40 πτισϑήσεσϑε' τὸ δὲ καϑίσαι ἐκ δε- 
~ 4 ᾿ 
ξιῶν μου καὶ ἐξ εὐωνύμων οὐκ ἔστιν 
as ~ 2a a2 τ ε , 
éuov δοῦναι, ἀλλ οἷς ἡτοίμασται. 
A 
41 Καὶ ἀκούσαντες oi δέκα ἤρξαντο aya- 
~ 4. Bry , \ 3 , 
ψακτεῖν περὶ ]Ιακώβου καὶ Lwarvor. 
Α ~ 
42 Ὁ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς προςκαλεσάμενος αὐτοὺς 
’ > ~ mn σ € ~ 
λέγει αὑτοῖς" owWare, ort οἱ δοκοῦντες 
ἄρχειν τῶν ἐθνῶν κατακυριεύουσιν αὐὖ- 
~ A ~ 
τῶν, καὶ οἱ μεγάλοι αὐτῶν κατεξουσιά- 
~ [τὰ ᾿ 
48 ζουσιν αὐτῶν. Οὐχ οὕτω δὲ ἔσται ἐν 
~ a 
ὑμῖν" ἀλλ᾽ ὃς ἐὰν ϑέλῃ ενέσϑαι μέγας 
3 δι. ww» a « ~ , να 
44 ἐν ὑμῖν, ἔσται ὑμῶν διάκογος ᾿ καὶ ος 
\ BS , ~ yy 
ἂν ϑέλῃ ὑμῶν γενέσϑαι πρῶτος, ἔσται 
, ~ A ‘ ς «" ~ 
45 πάντων δοῦλος" καὶ yao ὃ υἱὸς τοῦ 
¢ ~ 
ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἦλϑε διακονηϑῆναι, 
3 A ~ A ~ A 4 
ἀλλὰ διακονῆσαι καὶ δοῦναι τὴν ψυχήν 
~ 4 ~ 
αὑτοῦ λύτρον ἀντὶ πολλῶν. 


§ 109. The healing of two blind men near Jericho. 


Matra. XX. 29—34. 


29 
> ~ > A ς , 
αὐτῶν ano 11εριχώ, 
ἠκολούϑησεν αὐτῷ oy- 
30 λος πολύς. Καὶ ἰδού, 
δύο τυφλοὶ καϑήμενοι 

Π 3 «ε /, 3 ; 

παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν, ἀκοῦ- 
σαντὲς ὅτι Inoovs πα- 


ράγει, 


4 ~ 
Xt τῶν 


ἔχραξαν λέγον- 


Mark X. 46—82. 


Καὶ ἐκπορευομένων 46 Καὶ ἔρχονται εἷς ‘Ie- 
ριχώ καὶ ἐκπορευομέ- 

- A 
vov αὐτοῦ ano “]εριχῶ 


~ , + « ~ ¢ 

τοῦ καὶ OYAOV ἱκανοῦ, O 
υἱὸς Τιμαίου, Βαρτί- 

« ’ 3 ’ 

μαιος ὃ τυφλὸς, ἐκαϑη- 
το παρὰ τὴν ὁδὸν προς- 
47 αιτῶν. Καὶ ἀκούσας, 
ὅτι ᾿Ιησοῦς ὁ Ναζω- 
ραῖός ἐστιν, ἤρξατο κρά- 


Luke XVIII. 35-43, XIX, 1. 
35 Ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν τῷ 
ἐγγίζειν αὐτὸν εἰς ‘Te- 
ριχώ, τυφλός τις ἐκά- 
Onto παρὰ τὴν ὁδὺν 
86 προφςαιτῶν. ᾿Αἰκούσας 
δὲ ὄχλον διαπορευομέ- 
vou ἐπυνθάνετο, τί εἴη 
87 τοῦτο. ᾿“4πήγγειλαν δὲ 
αὐτῷ, ὅτι ᾿]ησοῦς ὁ 
Ναζωραῖος παρέρχεται. 
38 Καὶ ἐβόησε λέγων" ᾽]η- 


μαϑητῶν αὐ- 


15 


114 


FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES 


[Part VI. 





31 


32 


34 ὀφϑαλμοί. 


2 


MATTH. XX. 
3a ἢ « - ’ 
τὲς" ἔλέησον ἡμᾶς, κυ- 
. Ἁ 
ριξε, υἱὸς Δαυΐδ. Ὃ δὲ 
a > , > 
oyhog ἐπετίμησεν av- 
τοῖς, ἵνα σιωπήσωσιν. 
οἱ δὲ μεῖζον ἔχραζον λέ- 
γοντες᾽ ἐλέησον ἡμᾶς, 
2 A 
κύριε, υἱὸς Δαυΐδ. Kai 

A e 2 ~ > , 
στὰς 0 Ιησοὺς ἐφωνγη- 
σεν αὐτούς, 


MARK Χ. 
‘ / 4 «\ 
Cew καὶ λέγειν" ὃ υἱὸς 


Δαυΐδ, ᾿Ιησοῦ, ἐλέησόν. 
48 με. Καὶ ἐπετίμων αὐτῷ 


πολλοί, ἵνα σιωπήσῃ" ὁ 
Ἁ - - 

δὲ πολλῷ μᾶλλον éxoa- 

ξεν" υἱὲ Aavid, ἐλέησόν 


49 με. Καὶ στὰς ὁ ᾿]η- 


σοῦς, εἶπεν αὐτὸν φω- 
γηϑῆναι. καὶ φωνοῦσι 
\ , ? 

tov tudor, λέγοντες 


T 
LUKE XVIII. 


~ 4 
σοῦ, vie Δαυΐδ, ἐλέησόν 


39 με. Καὶ οἱ προάγοντες 


~ σ 
ἐπετίμων αὐτῷ, ἵνα 
, ». A 
σιωπήσῃ «avtog δὲ 


πολλῷ μᾶλλον ἔχραζεν" 
vie Δαυΐδ, ἐλέησόν με. 


40 Σταϑεὶς δὲ ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς 


> +s a- & > ~ 
ἐχέλευσεν αὑτὸν ἀχϑῆ- 
vol πρὸς αὑτόν" 


~ “- ‘4 
50 αὐτῷ ϑάρσει, ἔγειραι" φωνεῖ σε. ‘O δὲ 
ἀποβαλὼν τὸ ἱμάτιον αὑτοῦ ἀναστὰς 


ἦλϑε πρὺς τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν. 


καὶ εἶπε" 51 Καὶ ἀποκριϑεὶς λέγει 


τί ϑέλετε ποιήσω ὑμῖν; 


38 “έγουσιν αὐτῷ" κύριε, 


σ > ~ « bed c 
wa avoydoacw ἡμῶν ot 
Σ πλαγχρι- 


αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς᾽ τί ϑέ- 
λεις ποιήσω σοι; ὁ δὲ 
τυφλὸς εἶπεν αὐτῷ" 
ῥαββουνί, ἵνα ἀναβλέψω. 


σϑεὶς δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἥψατο ὅ2 Ὁ δὲ ᾿Τησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτῷ" 


~ > ~ > ~ 
τῶν ὀφϑαλμῶν αὐτῶν" 
καὶ εὐθέως ἀνέβλεψαν 

ἰὸν «2? ζ΄, ‘ 
αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφϑαλμοί" καὶ 
> , > ~ 
ἠκολούϑησαν αὑτῷ. 


σ 
ὑπαγε, ἡ πίστις σου σέ- 
, ‘ \ γα 7 
σωχὲ σε καὶ εὐϑέως 
ἀνέβλεψε, καὶ ἠκολούϑει 
~ > ~ > i. 6 ~ 
τῷ Inoov ev τῇ ὁδῷ. 


42 βλέψω. 


43 Καὶ 


ἐγγίσαντος 
A ~ 
δὲ αὐτοῦ ἐπηρώτησεν 


41 αὐτόν ' λέγων" τί σοι 


ϑέλεις ποιήσω; 6 δὲ 
εἶπε" κύριε, ἵνα ἀνα- 
Καὶ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς 
εἶπεν αὐτῷ" ἀνάβλεψον" 
ἡ πίστις σου σέσωκέ σε. 
παραχρῆμα ἀν- 
έβληψε, καὶ ἠκολούϑει 
αὐτῷ δοξάζων τὸν θεόν" 


Α - ~ ~ 
καὶ πᾶς ὁ λαος ἰδὼν ἔδωκεν αἶνον τῷ ϑεῷ" 


XIX. 1 


Kai εἰςελϑὼν διήρχετο τὴν Ἱεριχώ. 


§ 110. The visit to Zaccheus. Parable of the ten Minae.—Jericho. 


Luxe XIX. 2—28. 


Καὶ ἰδού, ἀνὴρ ὀνόματι καλούμενος Ζακχαῖος" καὶ αὐτὸς ἦν ἀρχιτελώνης, 
3 χαὶ οὗτος ἦν πλούσιος. Καὶ ἐζήτει ἰδεῖν τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν, τίς ἐστι, καὶ οὐκ ἠδύνατο 
4 ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕχλου, ὅτι τῇ ἡλικίᾳ μικρὸς ἦν. Καὶ προδραμὼν ἔμπροσϑεν ἀνέβη 
5 ἐπὶ συκομορέαν, ἵνα ἴδῃ αὐτόν, ὅτι ἐκείνης ἤμελλε διέρχεσϑαι. Καὶ ὡς ἦλϑεν 
"ἢ A , > , <> ~ 9: ἃ 4 A -, ~ 
ἐπὶ tov τόπον, ἀναβλέψας ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶδεν αὐτὸν καὶ εἶπε πρὸς αὐτόν" Ζακχαῖε, 
6 σπεύσας κατάβηϑι" σήμερον γὰρ ἐν τῷ οἴχῳ σου δεῖ μὲ μεῖναι. Καὶ σπεύσας 
1 χατέβη καὶ ὑπεδέξατο αὐτὸν χαίρων. Καὶ ἰδόντες ἅπαντες διεγόγγυζον λέγον- 
8 τες᾽ ὅτι παρὰ ἁμαρτωλῷ ἀνδρὶ εἰφῆλϑε καταλῦσαι. Σταϑεὶς δὲ Ζακχαῖος εἶπε 
moog τὸν κύριον" ἰδού, τὰ ἡμίση τῶν ὑπαρχόντων μου, κύριε, δίδωμι τοῖς πτω- 
9 χοῖς" καὶ εἴ τινός τι ἐσυκοφάντησα, ἀποδίδωμι τετραπλοῦν. Εἶπε δὲ πρὸς 
αὐτὸν ἑ ᾿Ιησοῦς " ὅτι σήμερον σωτηρία τῷ οἴκῳ τούτῳ ἐγένετο, καϑότι καὶ αὐτὸς 
Prt > , > Ύ ‘ c es “Ὁ. 3 , ~ ‘ ~ ‘ 
10 υἱὸς "ABoadm ἐστιν" ἤλϑε γὰρ ὃ υἱὸς tov ἀνϑρώπου ζητῆσαι καὶ σῶσαι τὸ 


ἀπολωλός. 


—— 











§§ 110, 111.] UNTIL OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY. 115 





LUKE XIX. : 
> ~ ~ 4 
11. ᾿Αἰκουόντων δὲ αὐτῶν ταῦτα προςϑεὶς εἶπε παραβολὴν διὰ τὸ ἐγγὺς αὐτὸν 
εἶναι ‘Te λὴμ καὶ δοκεῖν αὐτούς, ὅ i λλει ἡ λεία τοῦ ϑεοῦ 
ρουσαλὴμ καὶ δοκεῖν αὑτούς, ort παραχρῆμα μέλλει ἡ βασιλεία v 
a5 3 
12 ἀναφαίνεσϑαι. Εἶπεν οὖν" ἄνϑρωπός τις εὐγενὴς ἐπορεύϑη εἰς χώραν μαχρᾶν, 
- ~ 4 ~ 
13 λαβεῖν ἑαυτῷ βασιλείαν καὶ ὑποστρέψαι. Καλέσας δὲ δέκα δούλους ἑαυτοῦ 
~ ~ A ¢ 0 
ἔδωκεν αὐτοῖς δέκα μνᾶς καὶ εἶπε πρὸς αὐτούς" πραγματεύσασϑε ἕως ἔρχομαι. 
€ A ~ > ~ Je Ρ > ’ Α 3 ’ , > ’ ? ~~ 
14 Οἱ δὲ πολῖται αὑτοῦ ἐμίσουν avtor, καὶ ἀπέστειλαν πρεσβειὰν ὀπίσω avToU 
16 λέγοντες " οὐ ϑέλομεν τοῦτον βασιλεῦσαι ἐφ᾿ ἡμᾶς. Καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ ἐπανελϑεῖν 
ἢ Ud Ἁ , A is ~ ¢ ~ ‘ , , 
αὐτὸν λαβόντα τὴν βασιλείαν, καὶ εἶπε φωνηϑῆναι αὑτῷ τοὺς δούλους τουτους, 
16 Ἢ ἐδ F A ? , y Ὁ ~ , , ὃ 3 ξ , II. , , δὲ 4 
οἷς ἔδωκε τὸ ἀργύριον, ἵνα γνῷ, τίς τί διεπραγματεύσατο. Tlageyeveto δὲ ὁ 
~ , ¢ ~ ~ Ἵ ~ 
17 πρῶτος λέγων" κύριε, 7 μνᾶ cov προςειργάσατο δέκα μνᾶς. Kai εἶπεν αὐτῷ - 
b > 4 ~ σ 39 3 , A Θιν ov ϑω ? a” > , } 
ev, ἀγαϑὲ δοῦλε, ore ἐν ἐλαχίστῳ πιστὸς eyevov, ισϑι ἐξουσίαν ἔχων ἐπάνω δέκα 
, 4 “ἢ ε , , 2 , ε - > ͵ , »ὦ 
18 πόλεων. Καὶ ηλϑὲν ὃ δεύτερος λέγων" κυρίε, ἡ μνᾶ σου ἑποίησξ πὲντε μᾶς. 
‘ κ a 
19 20 Εἶπε δὲ καὶ tovt@’ καὶ ov γίνου ἐπάνω πέντε πόλεων. Καὶ ἕτερος ἦλϑε 
" , δὰ 2. ~ ay es: 2 , > , 2 is 
21 λέγων" κύριε, ἰδού, ἡ μνᾶ σου, ἢν εἶχον ἀποχειμένην ἐν σουδαρίῳ. Εφοβούμην 
, σ 4 > ΄ ς Ὲ a” a > Ν A , a > 
yao σε, OTL ἀνϑρῶπος αὐστηρὸς εἶ" αἴρεις, ὁ οὐκ ἔϑηκας, καὶ ϑερίζεις, ὃ οὐκ 
” t 4 > ~ > ~ , , ~ ‘ ~ at σ 
22 ἔσπειρας. Aéyer δὲ αὑτῷ " ἐκ τοῦ στόματὸς Gov κρινῶ σε; πονήρε SovdE WEG, ὁτι 
ΝᾺ a4 >) ld 5 » α > ” 4A , a 2 ” 
ἐγὼ ἀνϑρωπος αὐστηρὸς εἰμι, αἰρῶν, O OVX ἔϑηκα, καὶ ϑερίζων, ὃ οὐκ ἔσπειρα ; 
> A ‘ 4 ᾿ A 
23 Καὶ διὰ τί οὐκ ἔδωκας τὸ ἀργύριόν μου ἐπὶ τὴν τράπεζαν, καὶ ἐγὼ ἐλϑὼν σὺν 
‘ ~ ~ + ~ A ~ 
24 τόκῳ ἂν ἔπραξα αὐτό ; Καὶ τοῖς παρεστῶσιν εἶπεν" ἄρατε an αὐτοῦ τὴν μνᾶν 
“« ~ 4 ~ , - 
25 χαὶ δότε τῷ τὰς δέκα μνᾶς ἔχοντι. Καὶ εἶπον αὐτῷ κύριε, ἔχει δέκα μνᾶς. 
’ A cc w σ A ~ , ea | ‘ ~ 4 λα 
26 “έγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, ὅτι παντὶ τῷ ἔχοντι δοϑήσεται, ἀπὸ δὲ τοῦ μὴ ἔχοντος καὶ ὁ 
~ \ » 3 A A ’ 
27 ἔχει ἀρϑήσεται an αὐτοῦ. Πλὴν τοὺς ἐχϑρούς μου ἐκείνους, τοὺς uy ϑελήσαν- 
~ τ ‘ 
τάς με βασιλεῦσαι ἐπὶ αὐτούς, ἀγάγετε ὧδε καὶ κατασφάξατε ἔμπροσϑέν μου. 
A μ᾿ A “- 3 ’ μὲ 3 , 5 « 4 - 
285 Kat εἰπὼν ταῦτα ἐπορεύετο ἔμπροσϑεν, ἀναβαίνων εἰς ]εροσολυμα. 


§ 111. Jesus arrives at Bethany six days before the Passover.—Bethany. 


Joun XI. 55—57. XII. 1, 9—11. 
~ A 4 
55 Ἦν δὲ ἐγγὺς τὸ πάσχα τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων, καὶ ἀνέβησαν πολλοὶ εἰς [Ιεροσόλυμα 
~ ~ , 7 ¢ ’ 3 ws Kf 4 ~ 
56 ἐκ τῆς χώρας πρὸ τοῦ πάσχα, ἵνα ἁγνίσωσιν ἑαυτούς. ᾿Εζήτουν οὖν τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν, 
. oo» "hog, ὔ > ~ ¢ a , 5 ὔ ἣν ὧν tas ° > \o” > 
καὶ ἔλεγον wet ἀλλήλων ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ ἑστηκότες " τί δοκεῖ ὑμῖν, OTL OV μὴ EADY εἰς 
A ¢ , , \ % Φ ~ 4 € ~ > , {2 »» 
57 τὴν ἑορτήν; 4εδώκεισαν δὲ καὶ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι ἐντολήν, ἵνα, ἐάν 
- ~ 3 σ ’; > , 
τις γνῷ ποῦ ἔστι, μηνύσῃ, OMS πιάσωσιν aUTOY. 

~ ε ~ Ἂν , 3 > , a τ 
XIL 1 ὋὉ οὖν ᾿Ιησοῦς πρὸ ἕξ ἡμερῶν τοῦ πάσχα yer εἰς Βηϑανίαν, ὁπου ἣν 
“a ~ 4 3 a+ ‘ ~ 
9 “άζαρος ὁ τεϑνηκώς, ὃν ἤγειρεν ἐκ vEexQav.——Eyva οὖν ὄχλος πολὺς ἐκ τῶν 
~ ¥: ‘ A a Pi «4 A \ 
Ἰουδαίων, ὅτι ἐχεῖ ἐστι, καὶ ἦλϑον ov διὰ τὸν ᾿]ησοῦν μόνον, ἀλλ᾿ ἵνα καὶ τὸν 
~ ᾿ A 3 - “ ‘ 
10 “άζαρον ἴδωσιν, ὃν ἤγειρεν ἐκ νεκρῶν. ᾿Εβουλεύσαντο δὲ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς, wa καὶ 
4 , ’ , 1 σ \ ANS > ἢ ες - - > , 4 
11 τὸν “άζαρον ἀποχτείνωσιν, ' ore πολλοι δὶ αὑτὸν ὑπῆγον τῶν ]Πουδαίων καὶ 


3 ’ 5 A > ~ 
ἐπίστευον εἰς τὸν ]ησουν. 


OUR LORD’S PUBLIC ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM, AND THE SUBSEQUENT 


PART VII. 


—- 


TRANSACTIONS BEFORE THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 


True: Five days. 


ὁ 112. Our Lord’s public Entry into Jerusalem.— Bethany, Jerusalem. 


First Day of the Week. | 
Joun XII. 12—19. 


12 T: ἐπαύριον ὄχλος πολύς, ὁ ἐλϑὼν εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν, ἀκούσαντες ὅτι ἔρχεται ὁ 


᾿]ησοῦς εἰς “Ιεροσόλυμα,--- 


Marra. X XI. 1—11. 14—17. Marx XI. 1—11. Luxe XIX. 29—44, 


1 Kat ὅτε ἤγγισαν εἰς 1 


“Ἱεροσόλυμα καὶ ἦλϑον 
εἰς Βηϑφαγὴ πρὸς τὸ 
ὄρος τῶν ἐλαιῶν, τότε ὁ 
᾿Ιησοῦς ἀπέστειλε δύο 

2 μαϑητὰς! λέγων αὐτοῖς" 
πορεύϑητε εἰς τὴν κώμην 
τὴν ἀπέναντι ὑμῶν, καὶ 
εὐθέως εὑρήσετε ὄνον 
δεδεμένην, καὶ πῶλον 
pet αὐτῆς" λύσαντες 
ἀγάγετέ μοι. 


3 Καὶ ἐάν τις 
ὑμῖν εἴπῃ τι, ἐρεῖτε" ὅτι 
ὁ κύριος αὐτῶν χρείαν 
ἔχει: εὐθέως δὲ ἀπο- 
6 στελλεῖ αὐτούς. --- Πο- 


Καὶ ὅτε ἐγγίζουσιν 29 


εἰς “Ἱερουσαλήμ, εἰς 
Βηϑφαγὴ καὶ Βηϑα- 
γίαν, πρὸς τὸ ὄρος τῶν 
ἐλαιῶν, ἀποστέλλει δύο 


τῶν μαϑητῶν αὑτοῦ 


A , > ~ ς , 
2' χαὶϊ λέγει αὑτοῖς " ὑπα- 


γετδ εἰς τὴν κώμην τὴν 
κατέναντι ὑμῶν" καὶ 
εὐθέως εἰςπορευόμενοι 
εἰς αὐτὴν εὑρήσετε πῶ- 
« 

λον δεδεμένον, ἐφ ὃν 
5» ‘ , , , 
ovdeig ανϑρώπων κεκά- 
Dine’ λύσαντες αὐτὸν 


3 ἀγάγετε. Καὶ ἐάν τις 


ὑμῖν εἴπῃ" τί ποιεῖτε 
~ σ 

τοῦτο; εἴπατε" ὅτι 6 

κύριος αὐτοῦ χρείαν ἔ- 


Καὶ ἐγένετο ὡς ἤγ- 
γισεν εἰς Βηϑφαγὴ καὶ 
Βηϑανίαν, πρὸς τὸ ὄρος 
τὸ καλούμενον ἐλαιῶν, 
ἀπέστειλε δύο τῶν μα- 


30 ϑητῶν αὑτοῦ ! εἰπών" 


ὑπάγετε εἰς τὴν κατέ- 
γαντι χώμην, ἐν ἡ εἰς- 
πορευόμενοι εὑρήσετε 
πῶλον δεδεμένον, ἐφ᾽ 
« > ‘ , > 

ov οὐδεὶς πώποτε ἀν- 
ϑρώπων ἐκάϑισε" λύ- 
σαντες αὐτὸν ἀγαγετε. 


31 Καὶ ἐών εις ὑμᾶς ἐρω- 


τῷ" διὰ ci λύετε; ov- 
Tog ἐρεῖτε αὐτῷ" ὅτι 
e , ~ 

ὁ κύριος αὐτοῦ χρείαν 


χει" καὶ εὐθέως αὐτὸν 32 ἔχει. ᾿Απελϑόντες δὲ 





| 
: 
ἢ 
ἢ 
" 
Ἷ 
Ἷ 
ἰ 
7 
q 


ee SS ων κι 





§ 112. 


OUR LORD’S PUBLIC ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM. 


117 





MATTH XXI. 


MARK XI. 


ρευϑέντες δὲ οἱ μαϑη- 4 ἀποστέλλει ὧδε. ᾿41πῆλ- 


ταὶ καὶ ποιήσαντες κα- 
ϑὼς προςέταξεν αὐτοῖς 
δ ~ 

o Inoove, 


Dov δὲ καὶ εὗρον πῶλον 
δεδεμένον πρὸς τὴν ϑύ- 
ραν ἔξω ἐπὶ τοῦ ἀμφό- 
δου, καὶ λύουσιν αὐτόν. 


5 Καί τινες τῶν ἐκεῖ ἑστηκότων ἔλεγον av- 

6 τοῖς τί ποιεῖτε λύοντες τὸν πῶλον; Οἱ 
4 ~ A 

δὲ εἶπον αὐτοῖς καϑὼς ἐνετείλατο ὁ In- 


Ι + Q 
ἤγαγον τὴν 
a+ 4 4 ~ 
ῦνον καὶ τὸν πῶλον, 
A > , > , 
χαὶ - ἐπέϑηχαν ἐπάνω 
αὐτῶν τὰ ἱμάτια αὖ- 
> , 
ἐπεχαϑισεν 


~ 4 
TOV’ μαι 


~ A ~ 
σοῦς" καὶ ἀφῆκεν αὖ- 


7 τούς. Καὶ ἤγαγον τὸν 


~ A ‘ 3 - 

πῶλον πρὸς τὸν ]ησοῦν 

‘ 5 , > ~ A 

καὶ ἐπέβαλον αὐτῷ τὰ 

~ ‘ 5 

ἱμάτια αὑτῶν, καὶ ἐκά- 
ΕΣ ΕΣ ue ER 
ϑισὲν ἐπ αὑτῷ. 


35 τυῦ χρείαν ἔχει. 


LUKE XIX. 
ε > , t 
οἱ ἀπεσταλμένοι εὕρον 
χαϑὼς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς. 


33 Avortwy δὲ αὐτῶν τὸν 


πῶλον εἶπον οἱ κύριοι 
αὐτοῦ πρὸς αὐτούς" τί 


34 λύετε τὸν πῶλον; Οἱ 


δὲ εἶπον" ὁ κύριος αὖ- 
Καὶ 
4 3. Ἁ x 

ἤγαγον αὐτὸν πρὸς τὸν 

~- Ν 

᾿Ιησοῦν, καὶ ἐπιῤῥίψαν- 
τὲς ἑαυτῶν τὰ ἱμάτια 
meh | \ ~ > ’ 
ἐπὶ τὸν πῶλον ἐπεβί- 


> , > ~ 
ETMAVO AVUTWOV.— 


MATTH. XXI. 

~ 7? oC ~ 

Τοῦτο δὲ ὅλον γέγονεν, ἵνα πληρωϑῇ 
, ε \ A ~ ? , 

τὸ ῥηϑὲν διὰ tov προφήτου Aéyor- 

~ A 

τος " " εἴπατε τῇ ϑυγατρὶ Σιών" ἰδού, 

᾿ δ 

ὁ βασιλεύς σου ἔρχεταί σοι, πραῦς 
>, tae Θ A Ee ‘ ~ 

καὶ ἐπιβεβηκὼς ἐπὶ Ovoy καὶ πῶλον, 


ει « , 
υἱὸν vmolvyiov.— 
~ 4 
Ὁ δὲ πλεῖστος ὕχ- 
Log ἔστρωσαν ἑαυ- 
τῶν τὰ ἱμάτια ἐν 
~ ~ ld A 
τῇ ὁδῷ ἄλλοι δὲ 
” , 
éxontoy κλάδους 
> A ~ , 
azo τῶν δένδρων 
4 
καὶ ἐστρώννυον ἐν 
~ ~ ν.» 
τῇ ὁδῷ. Οἱ δὲ ὁχ- 
λοι οἱ προάγοντες 
A ε > 
καὶ οἱ ἀκολου- 
ϑοῦντες ἔχραζον 
λέγοντες. ὡσαν- 
γὰ τῷ υἱῷ Δαυΐδ' 
> , oe 
δὑὐλογημένος ὁ ἕρ- 
χόμενος ἐν ὀνόματι 
κυρίου: ὡσαννὰ 
3 ~ « , 
ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις. 


MARK ΧΙ. 


\ > ~ 
Bacay tov Inoovr. 
JOHN XII. 


14 Εὑρὼν δὲ 6 ᾿Ιησοῦς ὀνάριον ἐχάϑι- 


ais 9 > ’ 3 , 
σὲν ἐπ aVTO, καϑὼῶς ἔστι γεγραμμέ- 


15 γον" δ) μὴ φοβοῦ, ϑύγατερ Σιών" ἰδού, 


ὁ βασιλεύς σου ἔρχεται καϑήμενος 


> ~ ay 
ἐπι πῶλον OVOV.— 


LUKE XIX. 


8 Πολλοὶ δὲ τὰ ἱμά- 36 Πορευομένου δὲ 


9 


TLL αὑτῶν ἔστρω- 
5 \ « , 

σαν εἰς τὴν ὁδὸν" 

a A 

ἄλλοι δὲ στοιβά- 


~ , 
αὐτοῦ ὑπεστρὼν- 
A 
ψυον τὰ ἱμάτια αὗ- 


JOHN XII. 


τῶν & τῇ ὁδῷ" 181 ἔλαβον τὰ Baia 


Sag ἔχοπτον ἐκ 37 Ἐγγίζοντος δὲ αὐ- 


τῶν δένδρων καὶ 
, 4 
ἐστρώννυον εἰς THY 
Ἁ 
ὁδόν. Καὶ οἵ προ- 
A 
ἄγοντες καὶ οἱ ἀκο- 
λουϑοῦντες ἔχρα- 
Cov λέγοντες " w- 
, > , 
σαννά, εὑλογημέ- 


»"»}» \ ~ 
τοῦ ἤδη πρὸς τῇ 
Ul “Φ. ἂῇ 
καταβάσει τοῦ O- 
ρους τῶν ἐλαιῶν 


~ A 
τῶν φοινίκων καὶ 
ΙΒ 
ἐξῆήλϑον εἰς ὑπάν- 
τησιν αὐτῷ, 


aw σ A ~ ~ 

ἤρξαντο anay τὸ πλῆϑος TOY μα- 
ϑητῶν χαίροντες αἰνεῖν τὸν ϑεὸν 
φωνῇ μεγάλῃ περὶ πασῶν ὧν 


εἶδον δυνάμεων, 


γος ὁ ἐρχόμενος 38 λέγοντες" εὖλο- 


, 
ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου" 


10 εὐλογημένη ἡ ἐρχο- 


μένη βασιλεία [ἐν 
ὀνόματι κυρίου] 
τοῦ πατρὸς ἡμῶν 


Δαυΐδ" ὡσαννὰ ἐν τοῖς ὑψίστοις. 


γημένος ὁ ἐρχόμε- 

\ 3 
vos βασιλεὺς ἐν 
ὀνόματι κυρίου" 
εἰρήνη ἐν οὐρανῷ 
καὶ δόξα ἐν ὑψί. 
στοις. 


A 


καὶ 

᾿ e , 
ἔχραζον" wourve, 

>  s e 5 
εὐλογημένος ὃ ἐρ- 

, 
χόμενος ἐν Ov0- 
ματι κυρίου, 6 βα- 
σιλεὺς tov Ἰσρα- 
ήλ."--- 





8 5 etc. Zech. 9, 9. 


b 13. Comp. Ps. 118, 26. 


118 FROM OUR LORD’S PUBLIC ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM [Parr VII. 





JOHN XII. 
~ ‘ ~ ~ 
16 Ταῦτα δὲ οὐκ ἔγνωσαν οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ τὸ πρῶτον, ἀλλ᾿ ὅτε ἐδοξάσϑη 6” In- 
- σ - - ~ ~ 
σοῦς, τότε ἐμνήσϑησαν, OTL ταῦτα ἦν ἐπὶ αὐτῷ γεγραμμένα καὶ ταῦτα ἐποίησαν 
11 ϑ' “ἂν > , - δ' ὧδ δ ΕῚ 3 ~ Ὁ ν ἃ “ > , > 
αὑτῷ. ᾿Εμαρτύρει οὖν ὃ oxhog ὃ ὧν met αὐτοῦ, ὅτι τὸν Aalapor ἐφώνησεν ἐκ 
18 τοῦ μνημείου καὶ ἤγειρεν αὐτὸν ἐκ νεχρῶν. Διὰ τοῦτο καὶ ὑπήντησεν αὐτῷ ὁ 
» σ - ~ 7 ~ 
19 ὄχλος, ὅτι ἤκουσαν τοῦτο αὐτὸν πεποιηκέναι τὸ σημεῖον. Oi οὖν Φαρισαῖοι 
\ « δος ~ 7 ae) ~ 2g? μι « , OS 
εἶπον πρὸς ἑαυτούς" ϑεωρεῖτε, OTL οὐκ ὠφελεῖτε οὐδέν ἰδὲ, ὁ κύσμος ὀπίσω 
αὐτοῦ ἀπῆλϑεν. 
| LUKE XIX. 
389 Καί τινες τῶν Φαρισαίων ἀπὸ τοῦ ὄχλου εἶπον πρὸς αὐτόν᾽ διδάσκαλε, ἐπιτίμη- 
~ ~ A ὦ 4 > ~ , c ~ σ ᾽ν" τ 
40 cov τοῖς μαϑηταῖς σου. Kou ἀποχριϑεις εἶπεν αὐτοῖς" λέγω υμῖν, OT, ἐὰν OV- 
41 τοι σιωπήσωσιν, οἱ λίϑοι κεκράξονται. Καὶ ὡς ἤγγισεν, ἰδὼν τὴν πόλιν ἔχλαυσεν 
ey > ~ 7 ~ ? A A 
42 ἐπὶ αὐτῇ, ' λέγων " ὅτι εἰ ἔγνως καὶ ov, καίγε ἐν TH ἡμέρᾳ σου ταύτῃ, τὰ πρὸς 


43 εἰρήνην σου" νῦν δὲ ἐχρύβη ἀπὸ ὀφϑαλμῶν σου. Ὅτι ἥξουσιν ἡμέραι ἐπὶ σέ, 


Δ ~ «2 , , , ‘ , , μι , 
καὶ περιβαλοῦσιν οἱ ἐχϑροί σου χάρακά σοι καὶ περικυκλώσουσί σε καὶ συνέξουσί 
- ‘ 
44 oe πάντοϑεν, ! καὶ ἐδαφιοῦσί σε καὶ τὰ τέχνα σου ἐν σοί, καὶ οὐκ ἀφήσουσιν ἐν 
‘ , δι᾿ , > δὴν > ” τὸ \ ~ > ~ 
σοὶ λίϑον ἐπὶ λίϑῳ, ἀνϑ' ὧν οὐκ ἔγνως TOY καιρὸν τῆς ἐπισκοπῆς σου. 


MATTH. ΧΧΙ. MARK XI. 
10. Kei εἰρελϑόντος αὐτοῦ εἰς ‘Je- 11 Καὶ εἰςῆλϑεν εἰς Ιεροσόλυμα ὁ *In- 
, > ’ ~ ε , , ~ A > oe , 4 , 
ροσόλυμα ἐσείσϑη πᾶσα ἢ πόλις λέ- σοῦς καὶ εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν" καὶ περιβλεψαά- 

11 γουσα᾽ τίς ἐστιν οὗτος ; Οἱ δὲ by- μένος πάντα,--- 


. τ ~ 
λοι ἔλεγον" οὗτός ἐστιν ᾿]ησοῦς ὁ 
~ 4 ~ ~ 
14 προφήτης, 6 ἀπὸ Ναζαρὲτ τῆς Γαλιλαίας.--- Καὶ προςῆλϑον αὐτῷ τυφλοὶ καὶ 
‘ > ως « ΄« ‘ > , > , > , ‘ 5 a ~ 4 c 
15 χωλοὶ ἕν τῷ ἱερῷ, καὶ ἐθεράπευσεν αὑτοὺς. ᾿Ιδόντες δὲ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ 
~ a ~ ~ ~ 
γραμματεῖς τὰ ϑαυμάσια, ἃ ἐποίησε, καὶ τοὺς παῖδας κράζοντας ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ καὶ 
, Peat ‘ ~ ε- A wh > ak 1 4 7 ἃ. ὦ ον " 
16 λέγοντας" ὡσαννὰ τῷ υἱῷ Δαυΐδ, ἠγανάκτησαν ' καὶ εἶπον αὐτῷ" ἀκούεις τί 
t , ε δ 2 ~ , 3 ἂν τς ἕω 3 , > , a σ > 
οὗτοι λέγουσιν ; ὃ δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς λέγει αὐτοῖς " vai’ οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε," ort & 
στόματος νηπίων καὶ ϑηλαζόντων κατηρτίσω αἶνον ; 


17 Kat καταλιπὼν αὐτοὺς ἐξῆλϑεν MARK ΧΙ. 
ἔξω τῆς πόλεως εἰς Βηϑανίαν, καὶ 11 --ὀψίας ἤδη οὔσης τῆς ὥρας, ἐξῆλ- 
ηὐλίσϑη ἐκεῖ. ϑὲεν εἰς Βηϑανίαν μετὰ τῶν δώδεχα. 


§ 113, The barren Fig-tree. The cleansing of the Temple.—Betharty, Jerusalem. 
Second Day of the Week. 
Matru. Χ ΧΙ. 12, 13. 18, 19. Mark XI. 12—19. 
18 Προΐας δὲ ἐπανάγων εἰς τὴν mo- 12 Καὶ τῇ ἐπαύριον ἐξελϑόντων αὐ- 
19 dw ἐπείνασε. Καὶ ἰδὼν συκῆν μίαν 13 τῶν ἀπὸ Βηϑανίας ἐπείνασε. Καὶ 


ἐπὶ τῆς ὁδοῦ ἦλϑεν ἐπὶ αὐτήν, καὶ ἰδὼν συκῆν μακρόϑεν, ἔχουσαν φύλλα, 

οὐδὲν εὗρεν ἐν αὐτῇ, εἰ μὴ φύλλα ud- ἤἦλϑεν, εἰ ἄρα εὑρήσει τι ἐν αὐτῇ" καὶ 

γον. καὶ λέγει αὐτῇ " μηκέτι ἐκ covnag- ἐλϑὼν ἐπὶ αὐτὴν οὐδὲν εὗρεν εἰ μὴ 

πὺς γένηται εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα " καὶ ἐξ: φύλλα" οὐ γὰρ ἦν καιρὸς σύκων. 
, ~ t ~ 4 > A ς» “- 

ράνϑη παραχρῆμα ἢ συκῆ.--- 14 Καὶ ἀποχριϑεὶς [ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς εἶπεν 





5 16. Ps. 8, 3. 


———————————e ἀκουν 


C— EEE  ΒΟΝΟΝ 





δῇ 113, 114.] UNTIL THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 119 





MARK XI. 
δον αν 3 ~ 3 5.» Α \ , i~ € 
αὑτῇ" μηκέτι ἐκ σοῦ εἰς TOY αἰῶνα μηδεὶς καρπὸν φάγοι. καὶ ἤκουον οἱ 
: 4 ~ 
μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ. 


MATTH. ΧΧΙ. 15 Καὶ ἔρχονται εἰς Luxe XIX. 45—48. 

12 Kai εἰςῆλϑεν 6 ’In- Ιεροσόλυμα. καὶ εἰςελ- 45 Καὶ εἰςελϑὼν εἰς τὸ 
σοῦς εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν τοῦ ϑὼν [6 ᾿]ησοῦς] εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν ἤρξατο ἐχβάλλειν 
ϑεοῦ, καὶ ἐξέβαλε πάν- ἱερὸν ἤρξατο ἐχβάλλειν τοὺς πωλοῦντας ἐν αὐ- 
τας τοὺς πωλοῦντας καὶ τοὺς πωλοῦντας xual τῷ καὶ ἀγοράζοντας, 
ἀγοράζοντας ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, ἀγοράζοντας ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, 
καὶ τὰς τραπέζας τῶν καὶ τὰς τραπέζας τῶν κολλυβιστῶν 
κολλυβιστῶν κατέστρε. καὶ τὰς καϑέδρας τῶν πωλούν- 


we, καὶ τὰς καϑέδρας τῶν τὰς περιστερὰς κατέστρεψε" 
τῶν πωλούντων τὰς πε- 16 ' καὶ οὐκ ἤφιεν, ἵνα τις διενέγκῃ 
ριστερᾶς, σχεῦος διὰ τοῦ ἱεροῦ. 

13 ! καὶ λέγει 11 Καὶ ἐδίδασκε λέγων αὐ- 46 1 λέγων αὐτοῖς " γέγρα- 
αὐτοῖς" γέγραπται" ὁ τοῖς" οὐ γέγραπται" ὅτι πται" * ὁ οἶχός μου οἵ- 
οἶκός μου οἶχος προφευ- ὃ οἶχός μου οἶκος προς- κος προςευχῆς ἐστιν, ὑ- 
χῆς κληϑήσεται, ὑμεῖς δδ ευχῆς κληϑήσεται πᾶσι μεῖς δὲ αὐτὸν ἐποιήσατε 
αὐτὸν ἐποιήσατε σπή- τοῖς ἔϑνεσιν ; ὑμεῖς δὲ 47 σπήλαιον λῃστῶν. Καὶ 
λαιον λῃστῶν. ἐποιήσατε αὐτὸν σπ. ἦν διδάσκων τὸ καϑ' 

18 λαιον λῃστῶν. Καὶ ἡμέραν ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ᾽ οἱ 
ἤκουσαν οἱ γραμματεῖς καὶ οἱ ἀρχιδ- δὲ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ γραμ- 
ρεῖς, καὶ ἐζήτουν πῶς αὐτὸν ἀπολέσου- ματεῖς ἐζήτουν αὐτὸν ἀπολέσαι, καὶ 
σιν" ἐφοβοῦντο γὰρ αὐτόν, ὅτι πᾶς 48 οἱ πρῶτοι τοῦ λαοῦ. Καὶ οὐχ εὕρισκον 
ὁ ὄχλος ἐξεπλήσσετο ἐπὶ τῇ διδα τὸ τί ποιήσωσιν" 6 λαὸς γὰρ ἅπας 

19 αὐτοῦ. Καὶ ὅτε ὀψὲ ἐγένετο, ἐξεπο- ἐξεκρέματο αὐτοῦ ἀκούων. 
ρεύετο ἔξω τῆς πόλεως. 

Luxe ΧΧΙ. 37, 38. 

8 Ἦν δὲ τὰς ἡμέρας ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ διδάσκων, τὰς δὲ νύκτας ἐξερχόμενος ηὐλίζετο 

38 εἰς τὸ ὄρος τὸ καλούμενον ἐλαιῶν. Καὶ πᾶς ὁ λαὸς ὥρϑριζε πρὸς αὐτὸν ἐν τῷ 
ἱερῷ ἀκούειν αὐτοῦ. 

§ 114. The barren Fig-tree withers away.—Between Bethany and Jerusalem. 
Third Day of the Week. 
Marr. X XI. 20—22. Marx XI. 20—26. 


20 Καὶ πρωΐ παραπορευόμενοι εἶδον 

20 Kai ἰδόντες οἱ μαϑηταὶ ἐθαύμασαν 21 τὴν συχῆν ἐξηραμμένην ἐκ ῥιζῶν. Καὶ 
λέγοντες ; πῶς παραχρῆμα ἐξηράνϑη ἀναμνησϑεὶς ὃ Πέτρος λέγει αὐτῷ" 
ε ~ > ‘ Vv 2:3 ~ ς , yw ς - a , 

21 ἡ συκῆ; ᾿“'ποχριϑεὶς δὲ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς si- ῥαββί, ἰδὲ, ἡ συκῆ; ἣν κατηράσω, 
πὲν αὐτοῖς" ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἐὰν ἔχητε 22 ἐξήρανται. Καὶ ἀποκριϑεὶς ὁ ᾿Τησοῦς 
πίστιν καὶ μὴ διακριϑῆτε, οὐ μόνον τὸ 23 λέγει αὐτοῖς " ἔχετε πίστιν ϑεοῦ. "Auyy 
τῆς συκῆς ποιήσετε, ἀλλὰ κἂν τῷ ὄρει γὰρ λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι ὃς ἂν εἴπῃ τῷ ὄρει 





8. 13 etc. Is, 56, 7. Comp. Jer. 7, 11. 


120 


FROM OUR LORD'S PUBLIC ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM [Parr VII. 





MATTH. XXI. 


τούτῳ εἴπητε" ἄρϑητι καὶ βλήϑητι 

22 εἰς τὴν ϑάλασσαν, γενήσεται. 

πάντα ὅσα ἂν αἰτήσητε ἐν τῇ προς- 
- ’ Ul 

ευχῇ πιστεύοντες, λήψεσϑε. 


Καὶ 


MARK ΧΙ. 

, » A 
τούτῳ ἄρϑητι καὶ βλήϑητι εἰς τὴν 
, ᾿ A A ~ > ~ 
ϑαλασσαν, καὶ μὴ διακριϑῇ ἐν τῇ 
, ¢ ἂν 3 A , σ a 
καρδίᾳ αὑτοῦ, ἀλλὰ πιστεύσῃ, ὅτι ἃ 


λέγει γίνεται, ἔσται αὐτῷ ὃ ἐὰν εἴπῃ. 
24 Διὰ τοῦτο λέγω ὑμῖν, πάντα ὅσα ἂν 
ἊΨ" ; 3 ~ , σ ’ , oe» 4, tau ~~ ὃ ΑΝ 
25 προςευχύμενοι αἰτεῖσϑε, miorevete, ott λαμβάνετε" καὶ ἔσται ὑμῖν. Καὶ ὅταν 
» A ~ 
στήκητε MOOSELYOMEVOL, ἀφίετε, εἴ τι ἔχετε κατά τινος" ἵνα καὶ ὁ πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὁ 
~ ~ ~ ~ ~ A ~ 
26 ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς ἀφῇ ὑμῖν τὰ παραπτώματα ὑμῶν. Εἰ δὲ ὑμεῖς οὐκ ἀφίετε, οὐ- 
me ~ ~ A ~ 
δὲ 0 πατὴρ ὑμῶν ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς ἀφήσει τὰ παραπτώματα ὑμῶν. 


§ 115. Christ’s authority questioned. Parable of the Two Sons.—Jerusalem. 


Matru. X XI, 23—32, 


283 Kai ἐλϑόντι αὐτῷ εἰς 
τὸ ἱερὸν προςῆλϑον αὖ- 
τῷ διδάσκοντι οἱ ἀρχιε- 
ρεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι 
τοῦ λαοῦ λέγοντες" 
ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα 
ποιεῖς ; καὶ τίς σοι ἔδω- 

4 > , [4 
HE τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην ; 
24 ᾿Αποκριϑεὶς δὲ ὁ “In- 
σοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " ἐρω- 
ἱσήσω ὑμᾶς κἀγὼ λόγον 
ἕνα, ὃν ἐὰν εἰπητέ μοι, 
κἀγὼ ὑμῖν ἐρῶ, ἐν ποίᾳ 
ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιῶ. 
2 Τὸ βάπτισμα ᾿Ιωάννου 

, ri 3 3 ~ 
πόϑεν qv; ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, 
ἢ ἐξ ἀνθρώπων; οἱ 
δὲ διελογίζοντο παρ 
ἑαυτοῖς λέγοντες" ἐὰν 
Γεἴπωμεν" ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, 
> ~ Ἶ ‘ FERN > 
ἐρεῖ ἡμῖν" διὰ τί οὐν οὐκ 
26 ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ ; ᾿Εὰν 
δὲ εἴπωμεν" ἐξ ἀνθρώ- 
mov, φοβούμεϑα τὸν 
a 4 ‘ ἔ 
Oyhov’ πάντες γάρ ἔ- 
χουσι tov ᾿Ιωάννην ὡς 


Third Day of the Week. 
Marx XI. 27—33. 


Kai ἔρχονται πάλιν 
8 ; ‘ > 
δίς Ιεροσόλυμα. καὶ ἕν 
τῷ ἱερῷ περιπατοῦντος 
αὐτοῦ ἔρχονται πρὸς 
αὐτὸν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ 

~ 4 

οἱ γραμματεῖς καὶ οἱ 


28 πρεσβύτεροι, | καὶ λέ- 


γουσιν αὐτῷ" ἐν ποίᾳ 
ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς ; 
καὶ τίς σοι τὴν ἐξουσίαν 
ταύτην ἔδωκεν, ἵνα ταῦ- 


29 τὰ ποιῇς ; Ὁ δὲ Ἰησοῦς 


3 Ἁ > 
ἀποκριϑεὶς εἶπεν αὐ- 
τοῖς" ἐπερωτήσω ὑμᾶς 
3, Ἂἃ σ , 4 
κἀγώ ἕνα λόγον" καὶ 
3 , 4 > =~ 
ἀποκρίϑητέ μοι, καὶ ἐρῶ 
ὑμῖν, ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ 


80 ταῦτα ποιῶ. To βά- 


ΕἸ 3 > 
πτισμα ᾿Ιωάννου ἐξ ov- 
Nae a. 2 3 , 
ρανοῦ ἣν, ἢ ἐξ ἀνϑρώ- 
mov; ἀποκχρίϑητέξ μοι. 


31 Καὶ ἐλογίζοντο πρὸς 


c 4 β 354 
ἑαυτοὺς λέγοντες " ἐὰν 
εἴπωμεν" ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, 
> ~ 4 | esis > > 
ἐρεῖ" διὰ τί οὐν οὐκ ἐπι- 


32 στεύσατε αὐτῷ; ᾿Αλλ 


4 ” > > , 
ἐὰν εἴπωμεν" ἐξ ἀνϑρώ- 
nov’ ἐφοβοῦντο τὸν 
λαόν" ἅπαντες γὰρ εἴ- 


Luxe XX. 1--8, 

Καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν μιᾷ 
τῶν ἡμερῶν ἐκείνων, 
διδάσκοντος αὐτοῦ τὸν 
λαὸν ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ καὶ ed- 
αγγελιζομένου, ἐπέστη- 
σαν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ 
γραμματεῖς σὺν τοῖς 


2 πρεσβυτέροις, ' καὶ εἶ- 


\ > 4 , 
πον πρὸς αὑτὸν λέγον- 
‘ ~ 
τες εἰπὲ ἡμῖν, ἐν ποίᾳ 

> ~ ~ 

ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιεῖς ; 
vx ’ 3 « , 

ἢ tig ἔστιν ὁ δούς σοι 
‘ 

τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην; 


3 ᾿Αποχριϑεὶς δὲ εἶπε πρὸς 


> ~ 
αὐτούς - ἐρωτήσω ὑμᾶς 

3 Ley , 4 a” 
κάγω ἕνα λόγον, καὶ εἴ- 


4 πατέ μοι. Τὸ βάπτισμα 


᾿Ιωάννου ἐξ οὐρανοῦ ἦν, 


5 ἢ ἐξ ἀνϑρώπων ; Οἱ δὲ 


συνελογίσαντο πρὸς ἑαυ- 
τοὺς λέγοντες OT ἐὰν 
” ~ 
εἴπωμεν" ἐξ οὐρανοῦ, 
> ~ \ se > > 
ἐρεῖ" διὰ τί οὖν οὐκ ἐπι- 


6 στεύσατε αὐτῷ ; ᾽Εὰν δὲ 


εἴπωμεν" ἐξ ἀνθρώπων, 
πᾶς ιὸ λαὺς καταλιϑά. 
σει ἡμᾶς" πεπεισμένος 
γάρ ἐστιν Ἰωάννην προ- 


7 φήτην εἶναι. Καὶ ἀπε- 





ΠΥ 


δξ 115, 116.] 


UNTIL THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 


121 





MATTH. ΧΧΙ. 

27 προφήτην. Καὶ ἀπο- 
κριϑέντες τῷ Inoov si- 
πον" οὐκ οἴδαμεν. ἔφη 

3 - A Ste ot 
αὑτοῖς καὶ αὑτὸς" οὐδὲ 
δ , Low > , 
ἐγώ λέγω ὑμῖν, ἕν ποίᾳ 

28 ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιῶ. Τί 
δὲ ὑμῖν δοκεῖ; ἄνϑρω- 
πος εἶχε τέκνα δύο" καὶ 


MARK XI. 
ae) , σ x 
yor τὸν ᾿Ι͂ωᾶν»ὴν, ott ov- 
μη r 
33 τως προφήτης ἦν. Καὶ 
ἀποχριϑέντες λέγουσι τῷ 
3 μὰ > ol ‘ 
Inoov' οὐκ oWaper. καὶ 
¢ 3 ~ > A 
ὁ ‘Inoovg ἀποχριϑεις 
λέγει αὐτοῖς " οὐδὲ ἐγὼ 


LUKE Xx. 
, Ἁ 59 ἡ , 
κρίϑησαν μὴ εἰδέναι ποὸ- 
‘ ~ 
8 Ger. Kai ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς 
> ~ ων. I) % 
εἶπεν avtoig* οὐδὲ ἐγὼ 
, c w > , 3 

λέγω ὑμῖν, ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξου- 

σίᾳ ταῦτα ποιῶ. 


λέγω ὑμῖν, ἐν ποίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ ταῦτα ποιῶ. 


A ~ , Ἴ " ’ σ ; > , > ~ 5 ~ - 

προςελϑὼν TH πρώτῳ εἶπε τέχνον, ὑπαγ8 σήμερον, ἐργάζου ἐν TH ἀμπελῶνί μου. 
29 80 Ὁ δὲ ἀποκριϑεὶς εἶπεν" οὐ ϑέλω" ὕστερον δὲ μεταμεληϑεὶς ἀπῆλϑε. Καὶ 
Lod ~ , « , ¢ a  ᾿ ‘ 5 , , 4 
προφελϑῶν τῷ δευτέρῳ εἶπεν ὡςαύτως. ὁ δὲ ἀποχριϑεὶς εἶπεν" ἐγώ, κύριε" καὶ 
31 οὐκ ἀπῆλϑε. Τίς ἐκ τῶν δύο ἐποίησε τὸ ϑέλημα τοῦ πατρός ; Aéyovow αὐτῷ" 
ὁ πρῶτος. λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς " ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι οἱ τελῶναι καὶ αἱ πόρναι 
32 προάγουσιν ὑμᾶς εἷς τὴν βασιλείαν τοῦ ϑεοῦ. Ἦλϑε γὰρ πρὸς ὑμᾶς ᾿Ιωάννης 
ἐν ὁδῷ δικαιοσύνης, καὶ οὐκ ἐπιστεύσατε αὐτῷ οἱ δὲ τελῶναι καὶ αἱ πόρναι ἐπί- 

~ - A ~ ~ ~ 

στευσαν αὐτῷ ὑμεῖς δὲ ἰδόντες οὐ μετεμελήϑητε ὕστερον, TOV πιστεῦσαι αὐτῷ. 


\ § 116. Parable of the wicked Husbandmen.—Jerusalem. 


Matru. X XI. 33—46. 
38 Alyy παραβολὴν ἀ- 
novoute. ἄνϑρωπος ἦν 
οἰκοδεσπότης, ὅςτις ἐ:- 
φύτευσεν ἀμπελῶνα, καὶ 
φραγμὸν αὐτῷ περιέϑη- 
v ~ 
κε, καὶ ὥρυξεν ἐν αὐτῷ 
ληνόν, καὶ φκοδόμησε 

΄ 4 4 ’ 3 
πύργον καὶ ἐξέδοτο αὐ- 
τὸν γεωργοῖς, καὶ ἀπε- 
84 δήμησεν. Ὅτε δὲ ἤγγι- 
σὲν ὁ καιρὸς τῶν καρ- 
πῶν, ἀπέστειλε τοὺς 

, ε ~ | ‘ 
δούλους αὐτοῦ πρὸς τοὺς 
γεωργούς, λαβεῖν τοὺς 
35 καρποὺς αὐτοῦ" καὶ 
λαβόντες οἱ γεωργοὶ 

‘ , 3 eo a 
τοὺς δουλους αὑτοῦ, ov 
Swe ἂν Α a ey 
μὲν ἔδειραν, ov δὲ ἀπέ- 
κτειναν, ὃν δὲ ἐλιϑοβό- 
36 λῆσαν. Πάλιν ἀπέστει- 
λὲν ἄλλους δούλους, 
πλείονας τῶν πρώτων᾽ 


/ 


Third Day of the Week. 
Mark XII. 1—12. 
1 Ket ἤρξατο αὐτοῖς ἐν 
ns δα ἃ. ὦ 
παραβολαῖς λέγειν" ἀμ- 
πελῶνα ἐφύτευσεν ἄν- 
ϑρωπος, καὶ περιέϑηκε 
φραγμόν, καὶ ὥρυξεν 
«ς 7 4 > , 
ὑπολήνιον, καὶ ᾧχοδο- 
pnoe πύργον" καὶ ἐξέ- 
ϑ΄ Ἀ, ~ 
δοτο αὑτὸν γεωργοῖς, 
2 καὶ ἀπεδήμησε" Καὶ 
ἀπέστειλε πρὸς τοὺς 
γεωργοὺς τῷ καιρῷ δοῦ- 
λον, ἵνα παρὰ τῶν γεωρ- 
~ , > A ~ 
γῶν λάβῃ ἀπὸ tov καρ- 
8 ποῦ τοῦ ἀμπελῶνος. Οἱ 
δὲ λαβόντες αὐτὸν ἔδει- 
ραν καὶ ἀπέστξιλαν xe 
4 γόνυ. Καὶ πάλιν ἀπέ: 
‘ > \ a 
στειλὲ πρὸς αὕτους ad- 
λον δοῦλον" κἀκεῖνον 


ἃ λιϑοβολήσαντες ἐκεφα- 


λαίωσαν καὶ ἀπέστειλαν 
5 ἠτιμωμένον. Kail rad] 
16 


Luxe XX. 9—19. 

9 Ἤρξατο δὲ πρὸς τὸν 
λαὸν λέγειν τὴν παρα- 
βολὴν ταύτην" ἄνϑρω- 
πος ἐφύτευσεν ἀμπελῶ- 
γα, καὶ ἐξέδοτο αὐτὸν 
γεωργοῖς, καὶ ἀπεδήμησξ 
χρόνους ἱκανούς. 


10 Καὶ 
> ἂν 63 , \ 
ἐν καιρῷ ἀπέστειλε πρὸς 

4 ~ 
τοὺς γεωργοὺς δοῦλον, 
σ ~ ~ ~ 
ἵνα ἀπὸ TOV καρποῦ τοῦ 
ἀμπελῶνος δῶσιν αὐτῷ" 

.» ε ᾿Ὶ Si ς , 
οἱ δὲ yewoyor 'δείραντες 

353.ϑΑᾳ ἈΑ > ᾽ὔ 
αὑτὸν ἐξαπέστειλαν κε- 

Alvdr, Καὶ προςφέϑετο 
πέμψαι ἕτερον Sovdor. 
« A > ~ 4 

οἱ δὲ κἀκεῖνον δείραντες 
καὶ ἀτιμάσαντες ἐξαπέ- 
, ‘ 
12 στειλὰν xevov. Καὶ 
, , ’, 
προφέϑετο πέμψαι τρί- 

A 4 ~ 
τον" ot δὲ καὶ τοῦτον 


122 


FROM OUR LORD’S PUBLIC ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM [Pant VII. 





37 


38 


39 


40 


41 


MATTH. XXI. 


4 ~ 
καὶ ἐποίησαν αὐτοῖς ὡς- 


αὕτως. ; 


MARK XII. 
ἄλλον ἀπέστειλε" κἀκεῖ- 
voy 


Ἁ 
ἀπέχτειναν, καὶ 


πολλοὺς ἄλλους, τοὺς μὲν δέροντες, 


Ὕστερον δὲ ἀπέστει- 
Le πρὸς αὐτοὺς τὸν υἱὸν 
~ , 
αὑτοῦ λέγων" ἐντραπή- 
σονται τὸν υἱόν μου. Οἱ 
δὲ γεωργοὶ ἰδόντες τὸν 
«A 9 ς - 
υἱὸν εἶπον ἐν ἑαυτοῖς " 
ξ Ψ > ε , 
οὑτὸς ἔστιν ὃ κχληρονο- 
μος" δεῦτε, ἀποκχτείνω- 
A "4 
μὲν αὐτόν, καὶ KATH 
σχωμεν τὴν κληρονομίαν 
αὐτοῦ. ‘Kei λαβόντες 
αὐτὸν ἐξέβαλον ἔξω τοῦ 
- ‘ , 
ἀμπελῶνος καὶ ἀπέ- 
σ ν᾿ mw 
κτειναν. Otay ovv ἐλ- 
Oy ὃ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπε- 
λῶνος, τί ποιήσει τοῖς 
~ , 
γεωργοῖς ἐχείνοις ; Ae- 
~ A 
γουσιν αὐτῷ" κακοὺς 
~ t , 
κακῶς ἀπολέσει αὐτούς, 
καὶ τὸν ἀμπελῶνα ἐχ- 
δώσεται ἄλλοις γεωρ- 
~ ; 
yois, οἵτινες ἀποδώσου- 
~ A ‘ 
σιν αὐτῷ τοὺς καρποὺς 
ἐν τοῖς καιροῖς αὐτῶν. 


42 Aéye αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς" 


44 


45 


> , RE > 
οὐδέποτε ἀνέγνωτε ὃν 
ταῖς γραφαῖς "5 itor 
« 3 , ¢ 2» 
ov ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἱ- 
~ τ 
κοδομοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγε- 


θ 


.2 


10 να ἄλλοις. 


A A > , 

τοὺς δὲ ἀποκτείνοντες. 
4 yf Φ «" Υ̓͂ 
Ex οὖν eva υἱὸν ἔχων 
ἀγαπητὸν αὑτοῦ ἀπέ:- 

A Bsr A 

στειλὲ καὶ αὑτὸν πρὸς 
αὐτοὺς ἔσχατον, λέγων" 
σ 

ὅτι ἐντραπήσονται τὸν 

cr ? ~ 4 
υἱὸν μου. κεῖνοι δὲ 

A 
οἱ γεωργοὶ εἶπον πρὸς 
σ τ 

ἑαυτούς" ὅτι οὗτός ἐσ- 
tw 6 κληρονόμος δεῦ- 
τε, ἀποκτείνωμεν αὐτόν, 

4 ~ 
καὶ ἡμῶν ἔσται ἡ κληρο- 
vouia. Καὶ λαβόντες 
αὐτὸν ἀπέκτειναν καὶ 
ἐξέβαλον ἔξω τοῦ ἀμ- 
πελῶνος. Τί οὖν ποιή- 
σει ὃ κύριος τοῦ ἀμπε- 
λῶνος ; ἐλεύσεται καὶ 
ἀπολέσει τοὺς γεωργούς, 

4 , A 3 ~ 
καὶ Swoe τὸν ἀμπελῶ- 
Οὐδὲ τὴν 
γραφὴν ταύτην ἀνέγνω- 

a 

τε" ὃ λίϑον ov amedoxi- 
μασαν οἱ οἰκοδομοῦντες, 
Ἐ > ; 3 
οὗτος eyerndy εἰς κε- 


11 φαλὴν γωνίας" παρὰ 


κυρίου ἐγένετο ᾿ αὕτη, 

‘ Ν 4 
καὶ ἔστι Davpuoty 
ἐν ὀφϑαλμοῖς ἡμῶν; 


“- 


13 


LUKE Xx. ~ 
τραυματίσαντες ἐξέβα- 
λον. 


Eine δὲ 6 

; ~ > ~ 
κύριος τοῦ ἀμπελῶ- 
γος τί ποιήσω; πέμ- 
wo τὸν υἱόν μου τὸν 
ἀγαπητόν" ἴσως τοῦτον 
ἰδόντες ἐντραπήσονται. 


14 Ιδόντες δὲ αὐτὸν οἱ 


γεωργοὶ διελογίζοντο 
πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς λέγοντες " 
, Te θα, ε , 
οὑτὸς ἔστιν ὁ κληρονὸ- 
μος" δεῦτε, ἀποκτείνω- 
μὲν αὐτόν, ἵνα ἡμῶν 
γένηται ἡ κληρονομία. 


15 Καὶ ἐκβαλόντες αὐτὸν 


Ν “- 19 - > 

ἔξω tov ἀμπελῶνος an- 
ἔχτειναν. τί οὖν ποιή- 
σει αὐτοῖς ὁ κύριος τοῦ 


10 ἀμπελῶνος ; ᾿Ελεύσεται 


καὶ ἀπολέσει τοὺς γεωρ- 
γοὺς 'τούτους, καὶ δώ- 
σει τὸν ἀμπελῶνα ἄλ- 
λοις. ἀκούσαντες δὲ εἶ- 


17 πον" μὴ γένοιτο. “O88 


ἐμβλέψας αὐτοῖς εἶπε" 
τί οὖν ἐστι τὸ γεγραμ- 
μένον τοῦτο" " λίϑον ὃν 
> ’ c > 

ἀπεδοκίμασαν οἱ οἰκοδο- 

~ τ 

μοῦντες, οὗτος ἐγενήϑη 
εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας ; 


γήϑη εἰς κεφαλὴν γωνίας" παρὰ κυρίου ἐγένετο αὕτη, καὶ 


ἔστι ϑαυμαστὴ ἐν ὀφϑαλμοῖς ἡμῶν; 


Διὰ τοῦτο λέγω ὑμῖν, 


ὅτι ἀρϑήσεται ἀφ ὑμῶν ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ ϑεοῦ καὶ δοϑήσεται 
ἔϑνει ποιοῦντι τοὺς καρποὺς αὐτῆς. ι 


Καὶ ὁ πεσὼν ἐπὶ τὸν λίϑον τοῦτον 

συνϑλασϑήσεται" ἐφ᾽ ὃν δ᾽ ἂν πέσῃ, 

; ‘Gale 4 2 κ) ε 

λικμήσει αὑτὸν." Kat ἀκούσαντες οἱ 

ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ Φαρισαῖοι τὰς παρα- 
~ σ 

βολὰς αὐτοῦ ἔγνωσαν, ὅτι περὶ αὖ- 


LUKE XX. 


18 Πᾶς ὁ πεσὼν ἐπὶ ἐκεῖνον τὸν λί- 
Dov συνϑλασϑήσεται" é ὃν δ᾽ ἂν 
19 πέσῃ, λικμήσει αὐτόν." Καὶ ἐζήτη- 
σαν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς 
ἐπιβαλεῖν ἐπὶ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας ἐν 





* 42 etc. Ps, 118, 22. 


> 44 etc, Comp. Is. 8, 14 sq. Zech. 12, 3, Dan. 2, 34sq. 448q, 





δῇ 116, 117, 118.] UNTIL THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 123 





MATTH. XXI. MARK ΧΙ]. 


46 τῶν λέγει. Καὶ ζητοῦν- 12 Καὶ ἐζήτουν αὐτὸν κρα- 


LUKE XxX. 
> ~ ~ 9 δ Ψ 
αὑτῇ τῇ ὠὡρᾳ, καὶ ἐφο- 


Teg αὐτὸν 
> , A + 
ἐφοβηϑησαν τοὺς oyx- 
λους, ἐπειδὴ ὡς προφή- 
τὴν αὐτὸν εἶχον. 


κρατῆσαι 


~ % 4 ’ 
τῆσαι, καὶ ἐφοβήϑησαν 
τὸν ὄχλον" ἔγνωσαν γάρ, 
ὅτι πρὸς αὐτοὺς τὴν 
\ % 3 
παραβολὴν εἶπε. καὶ ἀ- 


βήϑησαν τὸν λαόν" ἔ- 
γγῶσαν γάρ, ὅτι πρὸς 
3 A A A 
αὑτοὺς τὴν παραβολὴν 

ταύτην εἶπε. 


φέντες αὐτὸν ἀπῆλϑον. 


§ 117. Parable of the Marriage of the King’s Son.—Jerusalem. 
Third Day of the Week. 
Marrs. XXII. 1—14. ἢ 
4 4 ~ Ἶ ~ ~ 
12 Καὶ ἀποχριϑεὶς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς πάλιν εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ἐν παραβολαῖς λέγων" ὡμοιώ- 
ε , ~ > ~ > , a Oe ΓΟ , ~ tw 
On ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν ἀνϑρώπῳ βασιλεῖ, ogtig ἐποίησε γάμους τῷ υἱῷ 
«ε ~ εὐ, , A ? «ς fF ’ 4 , > \ 
3 avtov. Kot ἀπέστειλε τοὺς δουλους αὑτοῦ, καλέσαι τοὺς κεκλημέγους εἰς τοὺς 
4 γάμους" καὶ οὐκ ἤϑελον ἐλϑεῖν. Πάλιν ἀπέστειλεν ἄλλους δούλους λέγων᾽ 
εἴπατε τοῖς κεκλημένοις " ἰδού, τὸ ἄριστόν μου ἡτοίμασα" οἱ ταῦροί μου καὶ τὰ 
4 , - ‘ , Ψ ~ > ‘ , « ἘΝ ’ 
5 σιτιστὰ τεϑυμένα, καὶ πάντα ἕτοιμα δεῦτε εἰς τοὺς γάμους. Οἱ δὲ ἀμελήσαν- 
> ~ «ε 4 > A » 3 , ε 4 D A 5 ’ « ~ ¢€ x 
6 τὲς ἀπῆλϑον, ὁ μὲν εἴς τὸν Woy ἀγρὸν, ὁ δὲ εἰς τὴν ἐμπορίαν αὑτοῦ. Oi δὲ 
Α ἷς A , > ~ @ \ 93> , 3 , 8 
7 λοιποὶ κρατήσαντες τοὺς δούλους αὐτοῦ υβρισὰν καὶ ἀπέχτειναν. “Axovoug δὲ 
ὁ βασιλεὺς ὠργίσϑη" καὶ πέμψας τὰ στρατεύματα αὑτοῦ ἀπώλεσε τοὺς φονεῖς 
Sp 475 '¢ , ΓΝ ἀῶ ἈΝ. τ , , ~ t | Selah Sek Kaa | 
8 ἐκείνους, καὶ τὴν πόλιν αὐτῶν ἐνέπρησε. Tore heyer τοῖς δούλοις αὑτοῦ" ὃ μὲν 
ς , o “πα € gi , 3 ¥ 4 , “ὌΠ | ‘ 
9 γάμος ἕτοιμος ἔστιν, οἱ δὲ κεκλημένοι οὐκ ἤσαν ἄξιοι. Πορεύεσϑε οὖν ἐπὶ τὰς 
’ - ς - A @&@ x σ ’ » A , WSs ὐξ 
10 διεξόδους τῶν ὁδῶν, καὶ ὁσους ἂν evonte, xadecaute εἰς τοὺς γάμους. Καὶ ἐξελ- 
~ ~ τ ἡ 
ϑόντες οἱ δοῦλοι ἐχεῖνοι εἰς τὰς ὁδοὺς συνήγαγον πάντας ὅσους εὗρον, πονηρούς 
ἮΝ 
11 τὸ καὶ ἀγαϑούς" καὶ ἐπλήσϑη ὁ γάμος ἀνακειμένων. Εἰςελϑὼν δὲ ὁ βασιλεὺς 
ϑεάσασϑαι τοὺς ἀνακειμένους εἶδεν ἐκεῖ ἄνϑρωπον οὐκ ἐνδεδυμένον ἔνδυμα 
, 4 , | ae ε ~ ~ 7 ~ τ ἘΣ ” 7 ε 
12 γάμου. Kou λέγει αὐτῷ" δταῖρε, πῶς εἰςῆλϑες ὧδὲ μὴ ἔχων ἔνδυμα γάμου; ὁ 
13 δὲ ἐφιμώϑη. Τότε εἶπεν ὁ βασιλεὺς τοῖς διακόνοις " δήσαντες αὐτοῦ πόδας καὶ 
ΕΞ A > A Ὁ, , > A 7 ~ ὦ la > ~ ς 
χεῖρας ἄρατε αὑτὸν καὶ ἐχβάλετξε εἰς τὸ σκότος τὸ ἐξώτερον" ἐκεῖ ἔσται O κλαυ- 
14 ϑμὸς καὶ ὁ βρυγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων. Πολλοὶ γάρ εἰσι κλητοί, ὀλίγοι δὲ ἐκλεχτοί, 


118. Insidious question of the Pharisees: Tribute to Cesar.—Jerusalem. 
Third Day of the Week. 
Matra. XXII. 15—22. Luxe XX. 20—26. 
15 Tore πορευϑέντες οἱ Dugicaiorcuu-, 20 Καὶ παρατηρήσαντες ἀπέστειλαν 
,βούλιον ἔλαβον, ὅπως Mark ΧΙ]. 13—17. 


> ’ ε , 
ἐγκαϑέτους ὑποχριγομέ- 

‘ 
αὐτὸν παγιδεύσωσιν ἐν 1. Καὶ 


ψους ἑαυτοὺς δικαίους 
σ Φ > , 
εἶναι, wa ἐπιλαβωνταῖι 
αὐτοῦ λόγου, εἰς τὸ 
παραδοῦναι αὐτὸν ty 
~ Ὁ ~ ~ 
ἀρχῇ καὶ τῇ ἐξουσίᾳ τοῦ 
. ἐλθόντες λέγουσιν αὖ- 21 ἡγεμόνος. Καὶ ἐπηρώ- 
- , nn > A , 
τῷ SWaoxads, οἰδαμεὲν, τῆσαν αὑτὸν λέγοντες " 


ἀποστέλλουσι 


16 λόγῳ: Καὶ ἀποστέλ. πρὸς αὐτόν τινας τῶν 
λουσιν αὐτῷ τοὺς μα- 


" ~ 4 ~ 
ϑητὰς αὑτῶν μετὰ τῶν 


Φαρισαίων καὶ τῶν 
‘Howdiarar, ἵνα αὐτὸν 
Ἡρωδιανῶν λέγοντες " 14 ἀγρεύσωσι λόγῳ. Οἱ δὲ 
διδάσκαλε, οἴδαμεν, 
ὅτι ἀληϑὴς εἶ καὶ τὴν 


124 


FROM OUR LORD’S PUBLIC ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM [Parr VII. 





MATTH. XXII. 
ὁδὸν τοῦ ϑεοῦ ἐν ἀλη- 
A 
ϑείᾳ διδάσκεις, καὶ ov 
πος τὰς , 
μέλει σοι περὶ οὐδενός " 
3 ‘ , > 4 
ov yao βλέπεις εἰς πρὸς- 
3 , | 
wzov ἀ»ϑρώπων. Εἰπὲ 
΄ c¢ ww ’ A ~ 
ovy ἡμῖν, τί σοι δοκεῖ; 


MARK XII. 
ὅτι ἀληϑὴς εἶ, καὶ od 


μέλει σοι περὶ οὐδενός " 


ov yao βλέπεις εἰς πρός- 
ὠποὸν ἀνϑρώπων, ἀλλ 
+ > ’ A € gi 

ἐπ ἀληϑείας τὴν odor 
τοῦ ϑεοῦ διδάσκεις. 


LUKE XX. | 
διδάσκαλε, οἴδαμεν, ὅτι. 
ὀρϑῶς λέγεις καὶ διδά- 
axes καὶ οὐ λαμβάνεις 
πρόςφωπον, ἀλλ ἐπὶ ἀλη- 
ϑείας τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ 


22 ϑεοῦ διδάσχεις. Ἔξεστιν 


- ee 


” ~ ~ c¢ w ? , ~ 
ἔξεστι δοῦναι κῆνσον ἡμῖν Καίσαρι φόρον δοῦ- 
\ ‘ ~ Ἃ ΚΑ ~ ba 
18 Καίσαρι, ἢ οὔ; Γνοὺς δὲ δοῦναι, ἢ ov; δῶμεν, ἢ 23 ναι, ἢ ov; Κατανοήσας 
<> o =e , \ g~ ‘ L ων 1 oe Δὲ ἃ , 
ὁ Ἰησοῦς τὴν πονηρίαν 15 μὴ δῶμεν; O82 εἶδως δὲ αὐτῶντην πανουργίαν 
αὐτῶνεἶπε' τίμεπειράζε. αὐτῶν τὴν ὑπόκρισιν εἶπε πρὸς αὐτούς τί μὲ 
19 τε, ὑποχριταί; ἐπιδεῖΐξα- εἶπεν αὐτοῖς τί μὲ πει- 34 πειράζετε ; δείξατέ μοι 
τέ μοι τὸ νόμισμα τοῦ ράζετε; φέρετέ μοι δη- 
7 ε ‘ , , ὦ Υ ε Ἁ ld A > Ψ 
κήγσου. οἱ δὲ προςήνεγ- 16 vaguor, ἵνα ido. Οἱ δὲ κχόνα καὶ ἐπιγραφήν; 
"5. κα , 4 » νὴ ᾽ , δ᾽: ων, ὦ 
20 χαν αὐτῷ δηνάριον. Καὶ ἤνεγκαν. καὶ λέγει αὖ ἀποχριϑέντες δὲ εἶπον" 
[ > ~ , [4 > - 4, ξ΄ ρῶς, σ , τ ‘ 
λέγει αὑτοῖς " τίνος ἢ εἰ- τοῖς " τίνος ἡ εἰκὼν av- 25 Καίσαρος. ὋὉ δὲ εἶπεν 
σ 
ROVAVTY καὶ ἡ ἐπιγραφήξ τη καὶ ἡ ἐπιγραφή ; οἱ 
Atyovow αὐτῷ " Καίσα-. δὲ εἶπον αὐτῷ" Καίσα- 
, > ~ 
ρος. τότε λέγει αὐτοῖς " 17 ρος. 
ΡΨ Ύ A , 
ἀπόδοτε οὖν τὰ Kaiou- 
, A ‘ ~ 
ρος Καίσαρι, και τὰ του 
22 ϑεοῦ τῷ ϑεῷ. Καὶ ἀ- 
κούσαντες ἐθαύμασαν, 
καὶ ἀφέντες αὐτὸν ἀπ- 
ἤλϑον. 


ἔξεστι χῆνσον Καίσαρι 


δηνάριον" τίνος ἔχει εἰ- 


lor) 


> ~ > , ’ 
αὑτοῖς" ἀπόδοτε τοίγυν 
τὰ Καίσαρος Καίσαρι, 
4 ‘ ~ ~ ~ ~ 
καιτὰ TOV ϑεοῦ τῷ Beg). . 
~ ~ 4 ” 
ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς" 26 Καὶ ovx ἴσχυσαν ἐπιλα- 
> ld x ? 
ἀπόδοτε ta Kaiougosg 
4 ~ 
Καίσαρι, καὶ τὰ τοῦ 


2 


— 


Καὶ ἀποχριϑεὶς 


βέσϑαι αὐτοῦ ῥήματος 
ἐναντίον τοῦ λαοῦ, καὶ 
ϑεοῦ τῷ ϑεῷ. καὶ ἐς ϑαυμάσαντες ἐπὶ τῇ 
ἀποκρίσει αὐτοῦ ἐσί. 
γήσαν. 


ϑαύμασαν ἐπὶ αὐτῷ. 


§ 119. Insidious question of the Sadducees: The Resurrection.—Jerusalem. 
Third Day of the Week. 

Marx XII. 18—27. 

Καὶ ἔρχονται Σαδ- 27 


Marra. XXII. 23—33. 
23 Ἔν ἐχείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 18 


Luxe XX. 27—40. 
Προφελϑόντες δέ τι- 


προςῆλϑον αὐτῷ «Σαὃ- 
δουκαῖοι, οἱ λέγοντες μὴ 
εἶναι ἀνάστασιν, καὶ 
24 ἐπηρώτησαν αὐτὸν ' λέ- 
γοντες * διδάσκαλε, Mov- 
σῆς εἶπεν" " ἐάν τις ἀ- 
ἵἱποϑάνῃ μὴ ἔχων τέχνα, 
ἐπιγαμβρεύσει ὁ ἀδελφὸς 
αὐτοῦ τὴν γυναῖκα αὖ- 
τοῦ, καὶ ἀναστήσει σπερ- 
μα τῷ τἀδελφῷ αὑτοῦ. 


δουχαῖοι πρὸς αὐτόν, οἵ- 
τινες λέγουσιν ἀνάστασιν 
μὴ εἶναι" καὶ ἐπηρώτη- 
σαν αὐτὸν λέγοντες " 
'διδάσκαλε, Μωῦσῆς ἔ- 
γραψεν ἡμῖν, ὅτι ἐάν 
τινος ἀδελφὸς ἀποϑάνῃ 
καὶ καταλίπῃ γυναῖκα 
καὶ τέκνα μὴ ἀφῇ, ἵνα 
λάβῃ ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ 
τὴν γιναῖκα αὐτοῦ καὶ 
ἐξαναστήσῃ σπέρμα τῷ 


veg τῶν Σαδδουκαίων, 
tn , > , 

οἱ ἀντιλέγοντες ἀνάστα- 
σιν μὴ εἶναι, ἐπηρώτη- 


28 σὰν αὐτὸν | λέγοντες" 


διδάσκαλε, Μωῦσῆς ἔ- 
ον © bce 
youwer ἡμῖν, " ἐάν τινος 

3 ‘ > , Ν 
ἀδελφὸς anodary ἔχων 
γυναῖκα, καὶ οὗτος ἄτεκ- 
> , σ , 
vog ἀποϑάνῃ, wa λάβῃ 
ε > ‘ > ~ ‘ 
ὁ ἀδελφὸς αὐτοῦ τὴν 
γυναῖκα καὶ ἐξαναστήσῃ 
’ ~ +» ~ ε 
σπέρμα τῷ ἀδελφῷ av- 





® 24 etc. Deut. 25, 5. 








§§ 


119.] 


UNTIL THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 


125 





25 


2 


oO 


27 


28 


29 


30 


31 


33 


MATTH. XXII. 
μ 2 ~ 
Hou» δὲ παρ᾿ ἡμῖν én- 
Δ᾽ ν᾿ ld 4 ἐ μα 
τὰ ἀδελφοί" καὶ ὃ πρῶ- 
Tos γαμήσας ἐτελεύτησε᾽ 
‘ 5) 
καὶ μὴ ἔχων σπέρμα 
ἀφῆκε τὴν γυναῖκα αὖ- 
τοῦ τῷ ἀδελφῷ αὑτοῦ. 
ε , ὮΣΕ 7 
Opoiws καὶ ὃ δεύτερος 
4 ~ 
καὶ ὃ τρίτος, ἕως τῶν 


σ A , 
ἑπτά. “Ὕστερον δὲ πάν- 


> 7 A € ? 
τῶν UMEP AVE καὶ ἢ γυνή. 


νην ὦ Ύ ᾽ , 
Ey ty ow ἀναστάσει 
τίνος τῶν ἑπτὰ ἔσται 
A 
γυγή ; πάντες γὰρ ἔσχον 
A Ν 
αὐτήν. ᾿“΄ποχριϑεῖς δὲ 
g <o ἘΦ as ὦ > ~ ἃ 
ὁ ᾿Ιησοὺς εἶπεν αὑτοῖς 
- A , 
πλανᾶσϑε, μὴ εἰδότες 
‘ A b) 
τὰς γραφὰς μηδὲ τὴν 
δύναμιν τοῦ ϑεοῦ. Ἔν 
~ » 
γὰρ τῇ ἀναστάσει οὔτε 
-“ + 
γαμοῦσιν οὔτε ἐχγαμί- 


3 > € a 
Covtat, ἀλλ ὡς ἃἀγγε- 
λοι τοῦ ϑεοῦ ἐν οὐρα- 
ψῷ εἶσι. 


Ἁ 4 ~ 
Περι δὲ τῆς 
ἀναστάσεως τῶν νεχρῶν 
4 Sahl: ἘΜῚΝ 4 
οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε τὸ ῥηϑὲν 
~ = «Ὁ , 
ὑμῖν ὑπὸ tov ϑεοῦ λέγον- 
τος" ὃ 
halt Sk: ε 4 
ἐγὼ eit ὁ ϑεὸς 
A 
᾿Αβραὰμ καὶ 6 ϑεὸς Ἶσα- 
4 3 ΄ 
ax καὶ ὁ ϑεὸς Ιακωβ; 
A A 
οὐκ ἔστιν ὃ ϑεὸς ϑεὸς 
- ’ 
ψεχρῶν, ἀλλὰ ζώντων. 
x 
Καὶ ἀκούσαντες οἱ ὄχλοι 


. A ~ 
ἐξεπλήσσοντο ἐπὶ τῇ δι- 


δαχῇ αὐτοῦ. 


21 ἀφῆκε, σπέρμα. 


24 γυναῖκα. 


26 ρανοῖς. 


MARK XII. | 


ἀδελφοὶ jouw’ καὶ ὃ 
πρῶτος ἔλαβε γυναῖκα, 
καὶ ἀποϑνήσχων οὐκ 
Καὶ ὁ 
δεύτερος ἔλαβεν αὐτὴν 
καὶ ἀπέϑανε, καὶ οὐδὲ 
αὐτὸς ἀφῆκε σπέρμα" 
καὶ ὃ τρίτος ὡςαύτως. 


Α 
22 Καὶ ἔλαβον αὐτὴν οἱ ἐπ- 


7 4 ~ 
τά, καὶ οὐκ ἀφῆκαν 
, 
σπέρμα. ἐσχάτη πάντων 
5 , A ς , 
[ἀπέϑανε καὶ ἢ Yury. 


ς “Ψ Ke 
23 Ἔν τῇ οὖν ἀναστάσει, 


“4 - 

ὁταν ἀναστῶσι, τίνος 

αὐτῶν ἔσται γυνή ; οἱ 

‘yao ἑπτὰ ἔσχον αὐτὴν 
A > 

Kot ἀποχρι- 
4 ~ 

ϑεὶς ὃ Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν ad- 

τοῖς " οὐ διὰ τοῦτο πλα- 

- ‘ 5. ἢ Ἁ 

ψᾶσϑε, μὴ εἰδότες τὰς 

? A ‘ , 
yougas, μηδὲ τὴν δὺυ- 


~ ~ σ 
25 γαμιν τοῦ ϑεοῦυ ; Ὅταν 


γὰρ ἐκ νεχρῶν ἀναστῶ- 
+ ~ at 
σιν, οὔτε γαμοῦσιν οὔτε 


80 ϑανεν ἄτεκνος. 


91 


92 


33 


γαμίσκονται, add εἰσὶν 36 


« » > ~ > 
ὡς ἄγγελοι ἐν τοῖς οὐ- 
A we 
Περὶ δὲ τῶν 
~ 7 
ψεχρῶν, OTL ἐγείρονται, 
> > ? > ~ , 
οὐκ ἀνέγνωτε ἕν τῇ βίβλῳ 
“. ’ 5. Α « , 
Movoews, ἔπι tov βα- 
TOV, ὡς εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὃ 
A 
ϑεὸς λέγων "ὃ ἐγὼ 6 ϑεὸς 
4 A ‘ 
᾿Αβραὰμ καὶ ὃ ϑεὸς 
᾿Ισαὰκ καὶ ὁ ϑεὸς *Ta- 


27 χὠβ; Οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ ϑεὸς 
ἀλλὰ [ede] 38 


ψεχρῶν, 
ἃ , « ~ y ) 4 
ζώντων. ὑμεῖς οὖν πολὺ 
πλανᾶσϑε. 


37 


39 


LUKE XxX. 


20 ἀδελφῷ αὑτοῦ. Ἑπτὰ 29 τοῦ. Ἑπτὰ οὖν ἀδελφοὶ 


Ύ A ~ 
ἤσαν" καὶ ὃ πρῶτος 
λαβὼν γυναῖκα ἀπέ- 
4 
Και 
Α 
ἔλαβεν ὁ δεύτερος τὴν 
- Α τ 3 ’ 
γυναῖκα, καὶ οὗτος ἀπέ- 
ἃ % 
Davey ἄτεκνος. Καὶ 
ε ον ow 3 , 
ὃ τρίτος ἔλαβεν αὑτὴν" 
« 7 A 4 Τὰ! 
ὠραύτως δὲ καὶ οἱ 8π- 
τά" οὗ κατέλιπον τέχνα 
σσ 
γστε- 
A 7 3 ’ 
ρον δὲ πάντων ἀπέϑανε 
¥ Ne , > ~ "ὁ 
καὶ ἡ γυνή. Ἔν τῇ ovr 
ἀναστάσει τίνος αὑτῶν 
γίνεται γυνή ; οἱ γὰρ ἐπ- 


4 3 , 
χαὶ amedavor. 


A ~ 
'ξὰ ἔσχον αὐτὴν γυναῖκα. 


‘ A 
Καὶ ἀποκχριϑεῖς εἶπεν 


> ~ « 3 ~ ε 
αὑτοῖς ὁ Lnoovg: οἱ 


υἱοὶ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου 
γαμοῦσι καὶ ἐκγαμίσκον- 
ται,! οἱ δὲ καταξιωϑ ἐν- 
τὲς τοῦ αἰῶνος ἐχείγου 
τυχεῖν καὶ τῆς ἀναστά- 
σεως τῆς ἐκ νεκρῶν οὔτε 
γαμοῦσιν οὔτε ἐχγαμί: 
σκονται" οὔτε γὰρ ἀπο- 
ϑανεῖν ἔτι δύνανται" 
ἰσάγγελοι γάρ εἰσι καὶ 
υἱοί εἰσι τοῦ ϑεοῦ τῆς 
ἀναστάσεως υἱοὶ ὄντες. 


Ὅτι δὲ ἐγείρονται οἱ 


’ A ow 93 
ψεχροί, καὶ Μωνσῆς é- 
, δ ἘΠ δὰ , a 
μήνυσεν ἐπὶ τῆς βάτου, 
ὡς λέγει κύριον τὸν 
ϑεὸν ᾿“βραὰμ καὶ τὸν 
ϑεὸν ᾿Ισαὰκ καὶ τὸν 
‘ 
ϑεὸν ᾿Ιακώβ. Osog δὲ 
> Ν - 3 A 
οὐκ ἔστι νεχρῶν, ἀλλα 
A 
ζώντων᾽ πάντες γὰρ 
αὐτῷ ζῶσιν. “Anoxet- 


ϑέντες δέ τινες τῶν γραμματέων εἶπον διδάσκαλξ, 


~ ~ ‘ > , 
40 καλῶς εἶπας. Οὐκέτι δὲ ἐτόλμων ἐπερωτᾶν αὐτὸν οὐδὲν" 





a 81 οἷο. Ex. 3,6. 


126 FROM OUR LORD’S PUBLIC ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM [Parr VII. 





§ 120. A Lawyer questions Jesus. The two great Commandments.—Jerusalem. 


Third Day of the Week. 
Matra. XXII. 34—40. Marx XII. 28—34. 
84 Οἱ δὲ Φαρισαῖοι ἀκούσαντες, ὅτι 28 Καὶ προςελϑὼν εἷς τῶν γραμμα- 
ἐφίμωσε τοὺς Σαδδουκαίους, συνή- τέων, ἀκούσας αὐτῶν συζητούντων, 
92% gh εν ty \ > , ‘ a eee ~ Ὁ ΤΑΣ & , 
35 χϑησαν ἐπιτὸ αὑτὸ. Καὶ ἐπηρώτησεν εἰδὼς ott καλὼς αὑτοῖς ἀπεκχρίϑη, 
εἷς ἐξ αὐτῶν νομικὸς πειράζων αὐτὸν ἐπηρώτησεν αὐτόν" ποία ἐστὶ πρώτη 
36 καὶ λέγων" διδάσκαλε, ποία ἐντολὴ 29 πάντων ἐντολή; ‘O δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἀπε- 
, > ~ , ε Ν ἊΨ - ’ > ~ σ , , > 
37 μεγάλη ev τῷ νόμῳ; O δὲ Inoovs κρίϑη αὑτῷ" OTL πρῶτη πάντων ἕγ- 
εἶπεν αὐτῷ "" ἀγαπήσεις κύριον toy τολή"" ἄκουε ᾿Ισραήλ, κύριος 6 ϑεὸς 
ϑεόν cov ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ καρδίᾳ σου καὶ ἐν 30 ἡμῶν κύριος εἷς ἐστι" καὶ ἀγαπήσεις 
σ - - δ 9 σ ~ , ‘ , 7 ~ 
ody τῇ ψυχῇ σου καὶ ἐν Ody τῇ δια- κύριον τὸν ϑεόν σου ἐξ ὁλῆς τῆς καρ- 
; σ 3 4 , ‘ , 4A 2% σ - ~ 
38 γοίᾳ cov. Avry ἐστὶ πρώτη καὶ με- δίας σου καὶ ἐξ ὁλης τῆς ψυχῆς σου 
’ > , , εὖ». ’ > εὖ σ ~ , 2 
39 yahn ἐντολή. Asvtégn δὲ ὁμοία av- καὶ ἐξ ὅλης τῆς διανοίας σου καὶ ἐξ 
τῇ Ὁ ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς ὅλης τῆς ἰσχύος σου. αὕτη πρώτη ἐν- 
40 σεαυτόν. Ἔν ταύταις ταῖς δυσὶν ἐν- 31 τολή. Καὶ δευτέρα ὁμοία αὕτη" 
τολαῖς ὅλος ὃ νόμος καὶ οἱ προφῆται ἀγαπήσεις τὸν πλησίον σου ὡς σεαυ- 
κρέμανται. τόν. μείζων τούτων ἄλλη ἐντολὴ οὐκ 


32 ἔστι. Καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὁ γραμματεύς " 
~ A 
καλῶς, διδάσκαλε᾽ ἐπὶ ἀληϑείας εἶπας, ὅτι εἷς ἐστι καὶ οὐκ ἔστιν ἄλλος πλὴν 
> ~ 4 ‘ > “ 3 A > σ ~ ’; ν΄. σ ~ , a 
33 αὐτοῦ" καὶ τὸ ἀγαπᾶν αὐτὸν ἐξ ολης τῆς καρδίας καὶ ἐξ ὁλῆς τῆς συνέσεως καὶ 
> Cn. " ~ ~ Δ 9. & ~ 5 , A Ans ~ A , ε ε , 
ἐξ ὁλης τῆς ψυχῆς και ἐξ ὁλης τῆς ἰσχύος, καὶ TO ἀγαπᾶν τὸν πλησίον ὡς ἑαυτόν, 
»-Ὁ-5-ἢ > , ~ ε , A hed \ e939 “« ϑῳι. 1 » 
34 πλεῖον ἔστι πάντων τῶν ὁλοκαυτωμάτων καὶ ϑυσιῶν. Kato ]ησοῦς ἰδὼν av- 
- ~ 4 A ~ ~ 
τόν, ὅτι νουνεχῶς ἀπεχρίϑη, εἶπεν αὐτῷ" οὐ μακρὰν εἶ ἀπὸ τῆς βασιλείας τοῦ 
- 4 > 4 a Be 71S > ~ 
Beov. Kou ovdeig οὐκξτι ἐτόλμα αὑτὸν ἐπερωτῆσαι. 


§ 121. How is Christ the Son of David ?—Jerusalem. 
Third Day of the Week, 
Marra. XXII, 41—46. Marx XII. 35—37. Luxe XX. 41—44. 
41 «Συνηγμένων δὲ τῶν 
Φαρισαίων ἐπηρώτησεν 35 Καὶ ἀποχριϑεὶξ 6 41 Εἶπε δὲ πρὸς αὐτούς " 
42 αὐτοὺς 6 ᾽]ησοῦς ' λές ᾿ἸἸησοῦς ἔλεγε, διδάσκων πῶς λέγουσι τὸν Χρι- 


you" τί ὑμῖν δοκεῖ περὶ ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ" πῶς λέγου.- στὸν υἱὸν Aavid εἶναι ; 
τοῦ Χριστοῦ; τίνος υἱς σιν οἱ γραμματεῖς, ὅτι ὁ 42 Καὶ αὐτὸς Aavid λέγει 
ἐστι; λέγουσιν αὐτῷ Χριστὸς υἱός ἐστι 4αυ- ἐν βίβλῳ ψαλμῶν "" εἴ- 


43 τοῦ Δαυΐδ. “έγει αὐ- 3618; Αὐτὸς γὰρ Δαυϊδ πεν 6 κύριος τῷ κυρίῳ᾽ 


τοῖς πῶς οὖν Aavidév εἶπεν ἐν τῷ amrevuatt μου" κάϑου ἐκ δεξιῶν 

, , δ᾽ ἢ ww συν oe Ἶ ε , 12 sy ~ ‘ 
πνεύματι κύριον αὐτὸν τῷ ἁγίῳ" εἶπεν ὁ κύ- 43 μου, ! ἕως ἂν ϑῶ τοὺς 
44 καλεῖ; λέγων"" " εἶπεν ριος τῷ κυρίῳ μου" κά. ἐχϑρούς σου ὑποπόδιον 
ὁ κύριος τῷ κυρίῳ μου" Bou ἐκ δεξιῶν μου, ἕως 44 τῶν ποδῶν σου. Aavid 





® 37 etc. Deut. 6, 4. 5. > 39 etc. Lev. 19, 18, © 44 etc. Ps, 110, 1. 





q 
| 





§§ 120, 121, 122.] UNTIL THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 127 


..........’.. 


MATTH. XXII. MARK XII. LUKE XxX. 





, 3 ~ 5)! ~ 4 3 ; = , 2. ἃ ~ 
κάϑου ἐκ δεξιῶν μουν, ἂν Boa τοὺς ἐχϑροὺξς οὖν κύριον autor καλεῖ" 
\ ~ ~ 4 ~ A ~ 
ἕως ἂν ϑῶ τοὺς ἐχϑρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποι καὶ πῶς υἱὸς αὐτοῦ 
ς , ~ ~ Ἵ 2 
σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν πο- 37 δῶν cov. «Αὐτὸς οὖν ἐστιν; 
- Ὁ Δ. A 
45 δῶν σου. Εἰ οὖν Δαυὶδ Aavid λέγει αὐτὸν κύ- 
RE ἐνΑΚῚ , ~ , gt , «A be τα A 
καλεῖ αὐτὸν xVOLOY, MHS ρίον" καὶ πόϑεν υἱὸς αὑτοῦ ἐστι ; Kou 
‘ ~ ~ 
46 υἱὸς αὐτοῦ ἐστι; Καὶ ὁ πολὺς ὄχλος ἤκουεν αὐτοῦ ἡδέως. 
A ~ 
οὐδεὶς ἐδύνατο αὐτῷ 
3 “« 3 ἄν , ae 
ἀποκχριϑῆναι λόγον, οὐδὲ ἑτολμησὲ τις an 
> , ~ ~ A 
ἐχείνης τῆς ἡμέρας ἐπερωτῆσαι αὐτὸν οὐκέτι. 


§ 122. Warnings against the evil example of the Scribes and Pharisees.—Jerusalem. 
Third Day of the Week. 
Marx XII. 38, 39. ὶ ᾿ Luxe XX. 46, 46. 


388 Καὶ ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς ἐν τῇ διδαχῇ 45 ᾿Αἰκούοντος δὲ παντὸς τοῦ λαοῦ 
αὑτοῦ" βλέπετε ἀπὸ τῶν γραμμα- 46 εἶπε τοῖς μαϑηταῖς αὑτοῦ " προςέχετξ 


τέων, τῶν ϑελόντων ἐν ὁτολαῖς περι- ἀπὸ τῶν γραμματέων, τῶν ϑελόντων 
πατεῖν καὶ ἀσπασμοὺς ἐν ταῖς ἀγο- περιπατεῖν ἐν στολαῖς καὶ φιλούντων 
39 pais! καὶ πρωτοκαϑεδρίας ἐν ταῖς ἀσπασμοὺς ἐν ταῖς ἀγοραῖς καὶ πρω- 
συναγωγαῖς καὶ πρωτοκλισίας ἐν τος τοκαϑεδρίας ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς καὶ 
δείπνοις. 'πρωτοκλισίας ἐν τοῖς δείπνοις. 
Marra. ΧΧΠΙ. 1—12. ’ 


12 Tote ὁ Inoove ἐλάλησε τοῖς ὄχλοις καὶ τοῖς μαϑηταῖς αὑτοῦ ' λέγων" ἐπὶ τῆς 
3 Μωῦσέως καϑέδρας ἐκάϑισαν οἱ γραμματεῖς καὶ oi Φαρισαῖοι. Πάντα οὖν ὅσα 
ἂν εἴπωσιν ὑμῖν τηρεῖν, τηρεῖτε καὶ ποιεῖτε" κατὰ δὲ τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν μὴ ποιεῖτε" 
4 λέγουσι γὰρ καὶ οὐ ποιοῦσι. 4)εσμεύουσι γὰρ φορτία βαρέα καὶ δυςβάστακτα, 
ο΄ χαὶ ἐπιτιϑέασιν ἐπὶ τοὺς ὥμους τῶν ἀνθρώπων" τῷ δὲ δακτύλῳ αὑτῶν οὐ ϑέ- 
5 λουσι κινῆσαι αὐτά. Πάντα δὲ τὰ ἔργα αὑτῶν ποιοῦσι πρὸς τὸ ϑεαϑῆναι τοῖς 
ἀνϑρώποις. πλατύνουσι δὲ τὰ φυλακτήρια αὑτῶν καὶ μεγαλύνουσι τὰ χράσπεδα 
6 τῶν ἱματίων αὑτῶν φιλοῦσί τὸ τὴν πρωτοκλισίαν ἐν τοῖς δείπνοις καὶ τὰς πρω- 
7 τοκαϑεδρίας ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς " καὶ τοὺς ἀσπασμοὺς ἐν ταῖς ἀγοραῖς καὶ κα- 
8 λεῖσϑαι ὑπὸ τῶν ἀνθρώπων ῥαββί, ῥαββί. Ὑμεῖς δὲ μὴ κληϑῆτε ῥαββί". εἷς γάρ 
9 ἐστιν ὑμῶν 6 καϑηγητὴς [6 Χριστός]" πάντες δὲ ὑμεῖς ἀδελφοί ἐστε. Καὶ 
πατέρα μὴ καλέσητε ὑμῶν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς εἷς γάρ ἐστιν ὃ πατὴρ ὑμῶν, ὁ ἐν τοῖς 
10 οὐρανοῖς. Μηδὲ κληϑῆτε καϑηγηταί" εἷς yao ὑμῶν ἐστιν 6 καϑηγητής, ὁ Χρι- 
1112 στός. Ὁ δὲ μείζων ὑμῶν ἔσται ὑμῶν διάκονος. Ὅςτις δὲ ὑψώσει ἑαυτόν, 
ταπεινωϑήσεται᾽" καὶ ὅςτις ταπεινώσει ἑαυτόν, ὑψωϑήσεται. 


128 FROM OUR LORD’S PUBLIC ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM [Parr VII. 


——— 





§ 123. Woes against the Scribes and Pharisees. Lamentation over Jerusalem.— 
Jerusalem. 


Third Day of the Week. 
Marra. XXIII. 13—39. Marx XII. 40. Luxe XX. 47. 
14 Οὐαὶ δὲ ὑμῖν, γραμμα- “ 
τεῖς καὶ Φαρισαῖοι, ὑπο- 40 Οἱ κατεσϑίοντες τὰς oi- 47 Οἱ κατεσϑίουσι τὰς οἷ- 
χριταί, ὅτι κατεσϑίετε κίας τῶν χηρῶν καὶ κίας τῶν χηρῶν καὶ προ- 
τὰς οἰκίας τῶν χηρῶν, προφάσει μαχρὰ προς- aoe μακρὰ προςεύ- 
καὶ προφάσει μαχρὰ εὐχόμενοι" οὗτοι λήψον- χονται" οὗτοι λήψονται 
προςευχόμενοι" διὰ τοῦ. ταῖ περισσότερον κρίμα. περισσότερον κρίμα. 
to λήψεσϑε περισσύτε- 
13 ρον χρίμα. Οὐαὶ ὑμῖν, γραμματεῖς καὶ Φαρισαῖοι, ὑποκριταί, ὅτι κλείετε τὴν βασι- 
λείαν τῶν οὐρανῶν ἔμπροσϑεν τῶν ἀνϑρώπων᾽ ὑμεῖς γὰρ οὐκ εἰφέρχεσϑε, οὐδὲ 
15 τοὺς εἰφερχομένους ἀφίετε εἰςελϑεῖν. Οὐαὶ ὑμῖν, γραμματεῖς καὶ Φαρισαῖοι, 
ὑποκριταί, ὅτι περιάγετε τὴν ϑάλασσαν καὶ τὴν ξηράν, ποιῆσαι ἕνα προςήλυτον" 
16 καὶ ὅταν γένηται, ποιεῖτε, αὐτὸν υἱὸν γεέννης διπλότερον ὑμῶν. Οὐαὶ ὑμῖν, ὁδη- 
yor τυφλοί, οἱ λέγοντες " ὃς ἂν ὀμόσῃ ἐν τῷ ναῷ, οὐδέν ἐστιν" ὃς δ᾽ ἂν ὀμόσῃ ἐν 
11 τῷ χρυσῷ τοῦ ναοῦ, ὀφείλει. Μωροὶ καὶ τυφλοί" τίς γὰρ μείζων ἐστίν, 6 χρυ- 
18 σός, ἢ ὁ ναὺς ὁ ἁγιάζων τὸν χρυσόν; Καί" ὃς ἐὰν ὀμόσῃ ἐν τῷ ϑυσιαστηρίῳ, 
19 οὐδέν ἐστιν" ὃς δ᾽ ἂν ὀμόσῃ ἐν τῷ δώρῳ τῷ ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ, ὀφείλει. Mogoi καὶ 
20 τυφλοί: τί γὰρ μεῖζον, τὸ δῶρον, ἢ τὸ ϑυσιαστήριον τὸ ἁγιάζον τὸ δῶρον; Ὁ 
οὖν ὁμόσὰς ἐν τῷ ϑυσιαστηρίῳ ὀμνύει ἐν αὐτῷ καὶ ἐν πᾶσι τοῖς ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ" 
21 22! χαὶ ὁ ὀμόσας ἐν τῷ ναῷ ὀμνύει ἐν αὐτῷ καὶ ἐν τῷ κατοικοῦντι αὐτόν" καὶ ὁ 
ὀμόσας ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ ὀμνύει ἐν τῷ ϑρόνῳ τοῦ ϑεοῦ καὶ ἐν τῷ καϑημένῳ ἐπάνω 
23 αὐτοῦ. Οὐαὶ ὑμῖν, γραμματεῖς καὶ Φαρισαῖοι, ὑποχριταί, ὅτι ἀποδεκατοῦτε τὸ 
ἡδύοσμον καὶ τὸ ἄνηϑον καὶ τὸ κύμινον, καὶ ἀφήκατε τὰ βαρύτερα τοῦ νόμου, 
τὴν κρίσιν. καὶ τὸν ἔλεον καὶ τὴν πίστιν. ταῦτα ἔδει ποιῆσαι, κἀκεῖνα μὴ ἀφιέναι. 
24 Ὃδηγοὶ τυφλοί, οἱ διυλίζοντες τὸν κώνωπα, τὴν δὲ κάμηλον καταπίνοντες. 
25 Οὐαὶ ὑμῖν, γραμματεῖς καὶ Φαρισαῖοι, ὑποκριταί, ὅτι καϑαρίζετε τὸ ἔξωϑεν τοῦ 
ποτηρίου καὶ τῆς παροψίδος, ἔσωϑεν δὲ γέμουσιν ἐξ ἁρπαγῆς καὶ ἀκρασίας. 
26 Φαρισαῖξ τυφλέ, καϑάρισον πρῶτον τὸ ἐγτὸς τοῦ ποτηρίου καὶ τῆς παροψίδος͵ 
27 ἵγα γένηται καὶ τὸ ἐχτὸς αὐτῶν χαϑαρόν. Οὐαὶ ὑμῖν, γραμματεῖς καὶ Φαρι- 
σαῖοι, ὑποκριταί, ὅτι παρομοιάζετε τάφοις κεκονιαμένοις, οἵτινες ἔξωϑεν μὲν 
φαίνονται ὡραῖοι, ἔσωϑεν δὲ γέμουσιν ὀστέων νεχρῶν καὶ πάσης ἀκαϑαρσίας. 
28 Οὕτω καὶ ὑμεῖς ἔξωϑεν μὲν φαίνεσϑε τοῖς ἀνθρώποις δίκαιοι, ἔσωϑεν δὲ μεστοί 
29 ἐστε ὑποχρίσεως καὶ ἀνομίας. Οὐαὶ ὑμῖν, γραμματεῖς καὶ Φαρισαῖοι, ὑποκριταί, 
ὅτι οἰκοδομεῖτε τοὺς τάφους τῶν προφητῶν καὶ κοσμεῖτδ τὰ μνημεῖα τῶν δικαίων, 
30 ! καὶ λέγετε" εἰ ἤμεϑα ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν, οὐκ ἂν ἤμεϑα κοι- 
31 νωνοὶ αὐτῶν ἐν τῷ αἵματι τῶν προφητῶν. Ὥςτε μαρτυρεῖτε ἑαυτοῖς, ὅτι υἱοί 
32 ἐστε τῶν φονευσάντων τοὺς προφήτας. Καὶ ὑμεῖς πληρώσατε τὸ μέτρον τῶν 
33 πατέρων ὑμῶν. “Opec, γεννήματα ἐχιδνῶν, πῶς φύγητε ἀπὸ τῆς κρίσεως τῆς 
34 γεέννης ; Διὰ τοῦτο, ἰδού, ἐγὼ ἀποστέλλω πρὸς ὑμᾶς προφήτας καὶ σοφοὺς καὶ 
γραμματεῖς" καὶ ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀποκτενεῖτε καὶ σταυρώσετε, καὶ ἐξ αὐτῶν μαστιγώ- 





a 
Ν A 


UNTIL THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 


§§ 123, 124, 125.] 


129 





MATTH. XXIII. 


35 oete ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς ὑμῶν καὶ διώξετε ἀπὸ πόλεως εἰς πόλιν" 


ὅπως ἔλϑῃ 


3...» ee Wee. ~ - , > we ee) ~ en, ~ x ~ 
ἐφ ὑμᾶς πᾶν αἷμα δίκαιον, ἐχχυγόμενον ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος “ABEr τοῦ 
δικαίου ἕως τοῦ αἵματος Ζαχαρίου υἱοῦ Βαραχίου, ὃν ἐφονεύσατε μεταξὺ τοῦ 
36 γαοῦ καὶ τοῦ ϑυσιαστηρίου" ὙΞ me λέγω ὑμῖν, ἥξει ταῦτα πάντα ἐπὶ τὴν γενεὰν 


ταύτην. 
2 


37 “Περουσαλήμ, Ἱερουσαλήμ, is ἀποχτείνουσα τοὺς τρ νὰ καὶ πϑοράψυδε 


τοὺς ἀπεαναλμέῤούᾷῷ πρὸς αὐτήν, ποσάκις ἠϑέλησα ἐπιϑδυναγαγδῖα τὰ τέχνα σου, 
ὃν τρόπον ἐπισυνάγει ὄρνις τὰ τοσσία save ὑπὸ τὰς πτέρυγαρ; καὶ οὐκ Ὧϑε- 


38 39 δήσανε; 


‘Woes, ἀφίεται ὑμῖν ὃ οἶκος ὑ et ἔρημος. b Atyon γὰρ ὑμῖν" οὐ μή μὲ 


ἴδητε ἀπάρτι, ἕως ἂν εἴπητε" εὐλογημένος ὁ ἐρχόμενος ὁ ἐν ὀνόματι κυρίου." 


§ 124. The Widow’s mite.—Jerusalem. 


x Third Day of the Week. 


Marx XII. 41—44, | 


41 Kai καϑίσας ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς κατέναντι 
τοῦ γαζοφυλακίου ἐθεώρει, πῶς ὁ 
ὕχλος βάλλει χαλκὸν εἰς τὸ γαζοφυ- 
λάκιον. καὶ πολλοὶ πλούσιοι ἔβαλλον 

42 πολλά. Καὶ ἐλϑοῦσα μία χήρα πτω- 
χὴ ἔβαλε λεπτὰ δύο, ὅ ἐστι κοδράντης. 

43 Καὶ προςκαλεσάμενος τοὺς μαϑητὰς 
αὑτοῦ λέγει αὐτοῖς“ ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, 
ὅτι ἡ χήρα αὕτη | πτωχὴ πλεῖον πάν- 
των βέβληκε τῶν βαλόντων εἰς τὸ 

44 γαζοφυλάκιον. Πάντες γὰρ ἐκ τοῦ 
περισσεύούτος αὐτοῖς ἔβαλον" αὕτη 


Luxe XXI. 1—4, 
1 ᾿Αναβλέψας δὲ εἶδε τοὺς βάλλοντας 
τὰ δῶρα αὑτῶν εἰς τὸ γαζοφυλάκιον 
2 πλουσίους. Εἶδε δὲ καὶ τίνα χήραν 
\ , τ Neves ὦ ὅν , 
πενιχρὰν βαλλουσὰν ἐχεῖ Ovo dente, 
3 1 χαὶ εἶπεν". ἀληϑῶς λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι ἡ 
χήρα ἡ πτωχὴ αὕτη πλεῖον πάντων 
4 ἔβαλεν. “Ζπαντες γὰρ οὗτοι ἐκ τοῦ 
περισσεύοντος αὑτοῖς ἔβαλον εἰς τὰ 
» ~ ~ σ ie <~ ¢€ 
δώρα tov Beov, αὐτὴ δὲ é&x tov votE- 
, ε΄ τὰν . ar , a 
ρήματος αὑτῆς. anavta τὸν βίον, ov 
ψ' ol 
εἶχεν, ἔβαλε. 


~ ~ σ΄ tA 4 ~ 
δὲ ἐκ τῆς ὑστερήσεως αὑτῆς πάντα ὅσα εἶχεν ἔβαλεν, ὅλον τὸν βίον αὑτῆς. 








§ 125. Certain Greeks desire to see Jesus.—Jerusalem. 
Third Day of the Week. : 


Joun XII. 20—36. 


20 ‘Hoo δέ τινες Ἕλληνες ἐκ τῶν ἀναβαινόντων, ἵνα προρχυνήσωσιν ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ. 
21 Οὗτοι οὖν προρῆλϑον Φιλίππῳ, τῷ ἀπὸ Βηϑσαϊδὰ τῆς Γαλιλαίας, καὶ ἠρώτων 
22 αὐτὸν λέγοντες" κύριε, ϑέλομεν τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν ἰδεῖν." Ἔρχεται Φίλιππος καὶ λέγει 
23 τῷ ᾿ΑἸνδρέᾳ" καὶ πᾶλιν ᾿Ανδρέας καὶ Φίλιππος λέγουσι τῷ Ἰῃσοῦ. Ὁ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς 

ἀπεκρίνατο αὐτοῖς λέγων ἐλήλυϑεν ἡ ὥρα, wa δοξασϑῇ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου. 
24 ᾿ΑΔμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἐὰν μὴ ὁ κόκκος τοῦ σίτου πεσὼν. εἰς τὴν γῆν ἀποϑάνῃ, 
25 αὐτὸς μόνος μένει" ἐὰν δὲ ἀποϑάνῃ, πολὺν καρπὸν φέρει. Ὁ φιλῶν τὴν ψυχὴν 

αὑτοῦ ἀπολέσει αὐτήν, καὶ ὁ μισῶν τὴν ψυχὴν αὑτοῦ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ τούτῳ εἰς 





α 36. Gen. 4, 8. 2Chr. 34, 320-85, > 38. Comp. Ps. 69, 26. Jer. 12, 7. 22, δ. 
© 39. Comp. Ps. 118, 26. 


17 


130 FROM OUR LORD’S PUBLIC ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM [Parr VII. 





JOHN XI. 
A ~ 4A 
26 ζωὴν. αἰώνιον φυλάξει αὐτήν. ᾿Εὰν ἐμοὶ διακονῇ τις, ἐμοὶ ἀκολουϑείτω, καὶ 
σ ni c a ᾿ 
ὅπου εἰμὶ ἐγώ, ἐκεῖ καὶ ὁ διάκονος ὁ ἐμὸς ἔσται" καὶ ἐών τις ἐμοὶ διακονῇ, τιμή- 
27 oe αὐτὸν ὁ πατήρ. Νῦν ἡ 4 * καὶ Ti εἴπω; πάτερ, σῶσό 
0. Νῦν ἡ ψυχῆ μου τετάραχται" καὶ ti εἴπω ; πάτερ, σῶσόν 
> ~ σ / 2 ‘ A ~ Ύ > ‘ σ , ’ 
28 μὲ ἐκ τῆς ὥρας ταύτης ; ἀλλὰ διὰ τοῦτο ἤλϑον εἰς τὴν ὥραν ταύτην. Ilarep, 
τ os ~ ~ 
δόξασόν cov τὸ ὄνομα. ἦλϑεν οὖν φωνὴ ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ" καὶ ἐδόξασα καὶ πάλιν 
29 δοξάσω. Ὁ οὖν ὄχλος ὁ ἑστὼς καὶ ἀκούσας ἔλεγε βροντὴν γεγονέναι: ἄλλοι 
30 ἔλεγον: ἄγγελος αὐτῷ λελάληκεν. “Amsxpidn ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν" οὐ δι᾿ ἐμὲ 
σ ε ἃ. iF dan X 2 ¢ κα ~ s 6 τὰ ~ £7 , ~~ 
31 αὑτὴ ἡ φωνῇ γέγονεν, ἀλλὰ δι ὑμᾶς. Νῦν κρίσις ἐστι τοῦ κόσμου τούτου" νῦν 
εν» ~ , , > , ow ? A »»" ς ~ 3 ~ ~ 
32 0 ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου ἐκβληϑήσεται ἔξω" κἀγὼ ἐὰν ὑψωϑῶ ἐκ τῆς γῆς, 
, « , x 3 ~ νιν Ἥὰ , , " 
33 πάντας ἑλκύσω πρὸς ἐμαυτὸν. Τοῦτο δὲ ἔλεγε σημαίνων, ποίῳ ϑαγάώτῳ ἤμελλεν 
> , > / > ε«ς:ε»ὟἫἮἢ ε- ~ > ’ 3 ~ , σ « 
34 ἀποϑνήσκειν. “Anexoidy αὑτῷ ὃ ὑχλος᾽ ἡμεῖς ἠκούσαμεν ἐκ τοῦ νόμου, ὅτι ὃ 
A ’ 3 ‘ 5“ 8 ‘ ~ \ 4-7 σ ~ ¢ ~ A «A ~ 
Χριστὸς μένει εἰς tov αἰῶνα "ἢ καὶ πῶς ov λέγεις, ort δεῖ ὑψωϑῆναι τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ 
> , ae τ ς «" ~ 3 , 7 > -- ᾿)Ὃ4 - 
35 ἀνϑρώπου ; τίς ἔστιν οὗτος ὁ υἱὸς του ἀνϑρωώπου ; Εἶπεν ovy αὑτοῖς ὁ Inoovg: 
ἔτι μικρὸν χρόνον τὸ φῶς μεϑ' ὑμῶν ἐστι. περιπατεῖτε, ἕως τὸ φῶς ἔχετε, ἵνα μὴ 
σχοτία ὑμᾶς καταλάβῃ" καὶ ὁ περιπατῶν ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ οὐκ οἶδε, που ὑπάγει. 
15 Α ~ ᾿ , 5 A ~ ~ id «.«» A , ~ 3 , 
36 '"Ews τὸ φῶς ἔχετε, πιστεύετε εἰς TO φῶς, Wa vio’ φωτὸς γένησϑε. Ταῦτα ἐλά- 
9 ~ ΜΡ 3 A > , 2 2 > ~ 
λησεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, καὶ ἀπελϑῶν ἐχρυβὴ an αὑτῶν. 


§126. Reflections upon the unbelief of the Jews.—Jerusalem. 
"Third Day of the Week. 


Joun XIL 37—50. ϊ 


81] Τοσαῦτα δὲ αὐτοῦ σημεῖα πεποιηκότος ἔμπροσϑεν αὐτῶν, οὐκ ἐπίστευον εἰς 
~ ~ a ? 

38 αὐτόν, ' ἵνα ὁ λόγος Ἡσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου πληρωϑῇ, ov sine’ χύριε, τίς ἐπί. 

39 στευσε τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν ; καὶ ὃ βραχίων κυρίου τίνι ἀπεχαλύφϑη ; Διὰ τοῦτο οὐκ 

40 ἠδύναντο πιστεύειν, ὅτι πάλιν εἶπεν Ἡσαΐας" " τετύφλωκεν αὐτῶν τοὺς ὀφϑαλ- 

~ oc ἃ a ~ ~ 
μοὺς καὶ πεπώρωκεν αὐτῶν τὴν καρδίαν, Wa μὴ ἴδωσι τοῖς ὀφϑαλμοῖς yo 
~ ~ A ᾿ ~ ᾿ 

41 ψοήσωσι τῇ καρδίᾳ καὶ ἐπιστραφῶσι καὶ ἰάσωμαι αὐτούς. Ταῦτα εἶπεν Ἡσαΐας, 
΄ Π ,ὔ > ~ \ #4 7 4 ᾽ “ἃ σ , Vs ~ 

42 ὅτε εἶδε τὴν δόξαν αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἐλάλησε περι αὐτοῦ. Ὅμως μέντοι καὶ ἐκ τῶν 
4 ᾿ κυ > 7 > yp 3 ‘ ‘ ‘ ᾿ > ε , 
ἀρχόντων πολλοὶ ἐπίστευσαν εἰς αὐτόν, ἀλλὰ διὰ τοὺς Dagisaiovs οὐχ ὡμολό- 

‘ ~ 
43 your, ἵνα μὴ ἀποσυνάγωγοι γένωνται" ἠγάπησαν γὰρ τὴν δόξαν τῶν ἀνϑρώπων 
~ ~ ‘ ~ ‘ . 

44 μᾶλλον, ἤπερ τὴν δόξαν τοῦ ϑεοῦ. ᾿Ιησοῦς δὲ ἔκραξε καὶ εἶπεν ὃ πιστεύων sig 
> 4 ᾿ , > > , γ᾽ > , ‘ ; ’ Ξ 4 ~ > 8 @ 

45 ἐμὲ ov πιστεύει εἰς ἐμέ, GAL εἰς τὸν πέμψαντά pe’ καὶ ὁ ϑεωρῶν ἐμὲ ϑεωρεῖ 

48 τὸν πέμψαντά με. ᾿Εγὼ φῶς εἰς τὸν κόσμον ἐλήλυϑα, ἵνα πᾶς 6 πιστεύων sic 

at ἐμὲ ἐν τῇ σκοτίᾳ μὴ μείνῃ. Καὶ ἐάν τίς μου. ἀκούσῃ τῶν ῥημάτων καὶ μὴ πι- 
στεύσῃ, ἐγὼ οὐ κρίνω αὐτόν" οὐ γὰρ ἦλϑον, ἵνα κρίνω τὸν κόσμον, GAR ἵνα σώσω 

- ‘ 

48 τὸν κόσμον. Ὁ ἀϑετῶν ἐμὲ καὶ μὴ λαμβάνων τὰ ῥήματά pov ἔχει τὸν κρίνοντα 

49 αὐτόν᾽ ὁ λόγος, ὃν ἐλάλησα, ἐκεῖνος κρινεῖ αὐτὸν ἐν τῇ ἐσχάτῃ ἡμέρᾳ" " ὅτι ἐγὼ 
ἐξ ἐμαυτοῦ οὐκ ἐλάλησα, ἀλλ᾿ 6 πέμψας μὲ πατὴρ αὐτός μοι ἐντολὴν ἔδωκε, τί 

50 εἴπω καὶ τί λαλήσω. Καὶ oldu, ὅτι ἡ ἐντολὴ αὐτοῦ ζωὴ αἰώνιός ἐστιν. ἃ οὖν 

΄σ ~ 

χαλῶ ἐγώ, καϑὼς εἴρηκέ μοι ὁ πατήρ, οὕτω λαλῶ. 


.------ 





® 34, Comp. 3 Sam. 7, 13. Ps. 89, 30. 37. 110, 4. 
b 38. Is. 53, 1. © 40. Is, 6, 10. 4 41, Is. 6, 1 πᾳ. 





en te pi i ee 


a ey 


—_— +. ἐἱ 


ὦ νοι \ 


a κνι,,.-,.. ta αὐ. tee, 


δὲ 126, 127.] 


UNTIL THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 131 





§ 127. Jesus, on taking leave of the Temple, foretells its destruction and the 
persecution of his Disciples.—Jerusalem. Mount of Olives. 


1. Kai ἐξελϑὼν ὁ ᾿]η- 
σοῦς ἐπορεύετο ἀπὸ τοῦ 
ἔν « ~ / 4 ~ 

ἱεροῦ, καὶ προφῆλϑον 
"οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ ἐπι- 

δεῖξαι αὐτῷ τὰς oixodo- 
f ~ ~ 4 

᾿ 2 μὰς τοῦ ἱεροῦ. ὋὉ δὲ 
3 ΟΝ" νυν ae 
“Inoovg εἶπεν αὑτοῖς 

᾿ 5 Φ , ~ 
ov βλέπετε πάντα ταῦ- 
τα; ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐ 

~ τ 
μὴ ἀφεϑῇ ade λίϑος 
Α a > 

ἐπὶ λίϑον, ὃς Ov κα- 
Λ 4 , 
3 ταλυϑήσεται. Καϑημέ.- 
, ~ A ~ 
vou δὲ αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τοῦ 
ὄρους τῶν ἐλαιῶν, προς- 


—— ἌΝ 2...... 


ἜΦΘΗ ΤΡ ΌΡ ΡΥ 


ἤλϑον αὐτῷ οἱ μα- 
4 Ontar κατ ἰδίαν λέ- 
γοντες " 


εἰπὲ ἡμῖν, πότε 
ταῦτα ἔσται; καὶ τί τὸ 
σημεῖον τῆς σῆς παρου- 
σίας καὶ τῆς συντελείας 
Καὶ ἀπο- 


nes 


τοῦ αἰῶνος; 
κριϑεὶς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν 
αὐτοῖς βλέπετξ, μή τὶς 
ὑμᾶς πλανήσῃ. Πολλοὶ 
yao ἐλεύσονται ἐπὶ τῷ 
ὀνόματί: μου λέγοντες" 
ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ Χριστός" καὶ 
πολλοὺς πλανήσουσι. 
6 Μελλήσετε δὲ ἀκούειν 

πολέμους καὶ ἀκοὰς πο- 

λέμων᾽ ὁρᾶτε, μὴ 9ρο- 

εἶσϑε᾽ δεῖ γὰρ πάντα 

γενέσϑαι, ἀλλ᾿ οὔπω ἐστὶ 
7 τὶ τέλος. ᾿Εγερϑήσεται 
γὰρ ἔϑνος ἐπὶ ἔϑνος καὶ 
βασιλεία ἐπὶ βασιλείαν" 
καὶ ἔσονται λιμοὶ καὶ 





σι 





Third Day of the Week. 


Marx XIII. 1—13. 
1 Καὶ ἐκπορευομένου 
αὐτοῦ ἐκ τοῦ ἱεροῦ, λέγξι 
αὐτῷ εἷς τῶν μαϑητῶν 
͵ ~ a 
αὐτοῦ" διδάσκαλε, de, 
ey ‘ 
motamot λίϑοι και πο- 
- 4 
ταπαὶ οἰκοδομὰί. Καὶ 


i) 


6’ Inoovs ἀποχριϑεὶς εἶ-᾿ 


ev αὐτῷ " βλέπεις ταῦ: 
τας τὰς μεγάλας οἰκοδο- 
pas ; οὐ μὴ ἀφεθῇ λίϑος 
ἐπὶ λίϑῳ, ὃς οὐ μὴ κα- 
ταλυϑῇ Καὶ καϑημέ- 


w 


Luxe X XI. 5—19. 


5 Καί τινων λεγόντων 
περὶ tov. ἱεροῦ, ὅτι λί- 
ϑοις καλοῖς χαὶ ἀναϑή- 
μασι κεκόσμηται, εἶπε." 


- α ~ > 
6 tavta, ἃ ϑεωρεῖτξε, &- 


> 

λεύσονται ἡμέραι, ἐν 
κῃ > > , 

αἷς οὐκ ἀφεϑῆσεται 

4 a 

λίϑος ἐπὶ ᾿λίϑῳ, ὃς 


οὐ καταλυϑήσεται: 


Spee Nae” .. 
vov αὐτου gig TO OOS 


τῶν ἐλαιῶν κατέναντι 
᾽ ~ ~ , > 
TOV ἱεροῦ, ἐπηρώτων αὐ- 
‘ > X97 , 
tov καὶ ἰδίαν Πέτρος 
4 > 7, ΔΑ») , 
καὶ Ἰακωβὸς καὶ ]ωαν- 
ΔΝ 99 , δ 8 
yng καὶ Avdoguc* εἰπὲ 
ἡμῖν, MOTE ταῦτα ἔσται; 


ΓΝ 


A ‘ abit > Ψ 
καὶ TL TO σημεῖον, OTAY 


μέλλῃ πάντα ταῦτα ovr- 


or 


τελεῖσϑαι; ὋὉ δὲ ᾿]η- 
σοῦς ἀποχριϑεὶς αὐτοῖς 
ἤρξατο λέγειν + βλέπετε 
μή τις ὑμᾶς πλανήσῃ. 
Πολλοὶ γὰρ ἐλεύσονται 
> A ~~ 2 , 7 , 
ἔπι τῷ OVOUAT μου λὲε- 
iva 
yorteg* OTL ἐγώ εἰμι" 
a 4 Ley 
καὶ πολλοὺς πλανήσου- 


a 


σ Ἁ ἱ 
7 σιν. Ὅταν δὲ ἀκούσητε 


’ ALLY A 
πολέμους καὶ ἀκοὰς πὸ- 
λέμων, μὴ ϑροεῖσϑε᾽ δεῖ 
γὰρ γὲνέσϑαι, ἀλλ οὔπω 
τὸ τέλος. ᾿Εγερϑήσεται 

4 δ 38 y 
yao ξϑνος ἐπι edvog 
καὶ βασιλεία ἐπὶ βα- 
καὶ ἔσονται 

3 δ 
σεισμοὶ χατὰ τόπους, 


ΟΌ 


σιλείαν" 


1 


7 ᾿ἘἘπηρώτησαν δὲ αὐ- 
φὸν λέγοντες" διδάσκαλε, 
πότε οὖν ταῦτα ἔσται ; 
, ‘ 

καὶ τί TO σημεῖον, ὅταν 
μέλλῃ ταῦτα γίνεσϑαι; 
Ὃ δὲ εἶπε" βλέπεξε, μὴ 
πλανηϑῆτε. πολλοὶ γὰρ 
ἐλεύσονται. ἐπὶ τῷ dv0- 
pati μου, λέγοντες " ὅτι 
ἐγώ εἶμι καὶ δ΄ καιρὸς 
ἤγγικδ" μὴ οὖν πορευϑῆ- 
9 τὲ ὀπίσω αὐτῶν" Ὅταν 
. δὲ ἀκούσητε πολέμους 
καὶ ἀκαταστασίας, μὴ 

πτοηϑῆτε᾽ δεῖ γὰρ ταῦ- 

τα γενέσϑαι πρῶτον, 

ἀλλ οὐκ εὐθέως τὸ 
0 τέλος. Τότε, ἔλεγεν ad- 
τοῖς, ἐγερϑήσεται ἔϑνος 
ἐπὶ ἔϑνος καὶ βασιλεία 
ἐπὶ βασιλείαν" Σεισμοί 
TE μεγάλοι κατὰ τόπους 


οο 


oom 


— 


132 FROM OUR LORD’S PUBLIC ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM [Parr VIL. 





MATTH. XXIV. MARK XIII. LUKE ΧΧΙ. 
‘ ‘ A S #7 
λοιμοὶ καὶ σεισμοὶ κατὰ καὶ ἔσονται λιμοὴὺ καὶ καὶ λιμοὶ καὶ λοιμοὶ 
A ~ 
8 τόπους. Πάντα δὲ ταῦ- 9 ταραχαί. ᾿Αρχαὶ wdi- ἔσονται" φόβητρά τε 


τὰ ἀρχὴ ὠδίνων. ψων ταῦτα.-- , καὶ σημεῖα. an οὖρα- 
MARK XIII. 12 vov μεγάλα ἔσται.. Πρὸ 

9 --βλέπετε δὲ ὑμεῖς ἑαυτούς" παραδώς δὲ τούτων πάντων ἐπιβαλοῦσιν ἐφ᾽ 
σουσι γὰρ ὑμᾶς εἰς συνέδρια, καὶ ες ὑμᾶς τὰς χεῖρας αὑτῶν καὶ διώ- 
συναγωγὰς δαρήσεσϑε, καὶ ἐπὶ ἡγεμό-. ἔξουσι, παραδιδόντες εἰς συναγωγὰς 
vow καὶ βασιλέων σταθϑήσεσϑε ἕνεχεν καὶ φυλακὰς ἀγομένους ἐπὶ βασιλεῖς 

11 ἐμοῦ, εἰς μαρτύριον αὐτοῖς.--“ Oran δὲ καὶ ἡγεμόνας, ἕνεκεν τοῦ ὀνόματός μου. 


ἄγωσιν ὑμᾶς παραδιδόντες, μὴ προ- 138 ᾿ΑΙποβήσεται δὲ ὑμῖν εἰς μαρτύριον. 
μεριμνᾶτε, τί λαλήσητε, μηδὲ μελετᾶτε᾽ 14 Θέσϑε οὖν εἰς τὰς καρδίας ὑ- 
GAR ὃ ἐὰν δοϑῇ ὑμῖν ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ, μῶν μὴ προμελετᾶν ἀπολογηθϑῆναι" 
τοῦτο λαλεῖτε᾽ οὐ γάρ ἐστε ὑμεῖς οἱ 15 ἐγὼ γὰρ δώσω ὑμῖν στόμα καὶ 


λαλοῦντες, ἀλλὰ τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ ἅγιον. σοφίαν, ἧ οὐ δυνήσονται ἀντειπεῖν 
οὐδὲ ἀντιστῆναι πάντες 

MATTH. XXIV. _ MARK XIII οἱ ἀντιχείμενοι ὑμῖν. 

9 Tore παραδώσουσιν ὑ ὑ- 12 Παραδώσει δὲ ἀδελφὸς 16 Παραδοϑήσεσϑε δὲ χαὶ 
μᾶς εἰς ϑλῖψιν, καὶ ἀπο- ἀδελφὸν εἰς ϑάνατον, καὶ ὑπὸ γονέων καὶ ἀ- 
κτενοῦσιν ὑμᾶς᾽ χαὶ πατὴρ τέκνον" καὶ ἐπα. δελῳφῶν καὶ συγγενῶν 


," ’ J A ~ Φ “ , 93 Ἁ ¢ A , , 
ἔσεσϑε μισούμενοι ὑπὺ ναστήσονται τέχνα ἐπὶ καὶ φίλων, καὶ ϑανατώ-- 
πάντων τῶν ἐϑνῶν διὰ γονεῖς, καὶ ϑανατώσου- 17 σουσιν ἐξ ὑμῶν. Καὶ 
10 τὸ ὄνομάμου. Καὶ τό- 13 σιν αὐτούς. Καὶ ἔσεσϑε ἔσεσϑε μισούμενοι ὕπο 
τε σκανδαλισϑήσονται μισούμενοι ὑπὸ πάντων πάντων διὰ τὸ ὄνομά 
πολλοί: καὶ ἀλλήλους διὰ τὸ ὄτομά pov'— μου, 
παραδώσουσι, καὶ μισή- 
11 σουσιν ἀλλήλους. Καὶ πολλοὶ ψευδοπροφῆται ἐγερθήσονται καὶ πλα- 
12 γήσουσι πολλούς. Καὶ διὰ τὸ πληϑυνϑῆναι τὴν ἀνομίαν ψυγήσεται 
ἡ ἀγάπη τῶν πολλῶν. 
13 Ὁ δὲ ὑπομείνας εἰς τέ- 13 --- δὲ ὑπομείνας εἰς τέ- 18} χαὶ ϑρὶξ ἐκ τῆς κεφα- 
τ ’ t ΄ Aad ὧ > ἂν, ἢ ὧν 
Log, οὗτος σωϑήσεται. δος, οὗτος σωϑήσεται.-- λῆς ὑμῶν οὐ μὴ ἀπόλη- 
14 Καὶ κηρυχϑήσεται τοῦ- 10 Καὶ εἰς ἱπάντα τὰ ἔϑνη 19 ται ἐν τῇ ὑπομονῇ 
το τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς δεῖ πρῶτον κηρυχϑῆναι ὑμῶν κχτήσασϑε τὰς 
βασιλείας ἐν ὅλῃ τῇ οἷς. τὸ εὐαγγέλιον.--- “ψυχὰς ὑμῶν. 
κουμέγῃ εἰς μαρτύριον 
Y αν ἰν - ” ‘ , ¢ ‘ , 
πᾶσι toig ἔϑνεσι" καὶ τότε nga τὸ τέλος. 


§ 128. phe signs of Christ’s coming to destroy "ων and put an end to the 
Jewish State and Dispensation.—Mount of Olives. 


Third Day of the Week. 
Marra: XXIV, 15—42. Marx ΧΠῚ. 14—37. Luxe XXI. 20—36. 


15 Ὅταν οὖν ἴδητε τὸ 14 Ὅταν δὲ ἴδητε τὸ βδέ. 20 Ὅταν δὲ ἴδητε κυχλου- 
βδέλυγμα τῆς ἐρημώ.- λυγμα τῆς ἐρημώσεως, μένην ὑπὸ στρατοπέδων 





PS 


ea a 


A ? 
(24 μὴ πιστευσῆητξ. 
, ; ‘ ὦν Ὁ ἢ 4 
ψευδόχριστοι και ψευδοπροφῆται, καὶ 
~ A 
δώσουσι σημεῖα μεγάλα καὶ τέρατα, 
ὥςτε πλανῆσαι, εἰ δυνατόν, καὶ τοὺς 


ξ 1981] 


UNTIL THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 


133 





MATTH. XXIV. 
A 
ῥηθὲν διὰ 
‘ ~ 

Ζ)ανιὴλ τοῦ προφήτου," 
ς A 3 , Lae 4 ε 
ἑστῶς ἕν τόπῳ ἁγίῳ, (ὃ 
ἀναγινώσκων νοείτω,) 
! , e 5 ~ 2; , 
tote οἱ ἐν τῇ []ουδαίᾳ 


σεως, τὸ 


16 

oe ee Ge ee 

φευγέτωσαν ἐπὶ τὰ 007 

e 23> A ~ ’ A 

17 0 ἐπι tov δώματος μὴ 
΄ 

καταβαινέτω ἄραι τὰ 

ἐχ τῆς οἰκίας αὑτοῦ" 

ι 


gh Se te +> ~ δ... 
18 χαὶ 0 ἕν τῷ ἀγθῷ μὴ ἐπι- 
, Si? Ἵ 
στρεψάτω ὀπίσω ἄραι 
Sy δ , ε ~ > 4 
19 τὰ ἱμάτια αὑτοῦ. Ova 


A ~ 
08 ταῖς ἐν γαστρὶ ἐχού- 


16 


σαις καὶ ταῖς ϑηλαζού-. 


σαις ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέ- 
20 ραις. Προςεύχεσϑε δέ,ϊνα 
μὴ γένηται ἡ φυγὴ ὑμῶν 
χειμῶνος, μηδὲ ἐν σαββά- 
21 τῳ. Ἔσται γὰρ τότε ϑ1ῖ- 
ψις μεγάλη, οἵα οὐ γέγο- 
γεν ἀπ ἀρχῆς κόσμου ἕως 
τοῦ νῦν, οὐδ᾽ οὐ μὴ γένη- 
ται. Καὶ εἰ μὴ ἐκολοβώ- 


19 


MARK XIII. 

4 ‘ Vz 4 
[zo ῥηϑὲν ὑπὸ Δανιὴλ 
~ , 4 
τοῦ προφήτου,] * ἑστὼς 
σ 3 ~ ¢ 93 , 
oov ov δεῖ, (ὁ ἀναγινώ- 
σχὼν γοξίτω,) τότε οἱ ἐν 

«3 , , : 
τῇ Lovdain φευγέτωσαν 
3 “ + 4 4 
εἰς τὰ ὁρη" Ὃ δὲ ἐπὶ 
~ A 
tov δώματος μὴ κατα- 
, 
Baro. εἷς τὴν οἰκίαν, 
A "ἢ 
μηδὲ εἰφελϑέτω coal τι 
3 ἊΝ > ~ 
& τῆς οἰκίας αὑτοῦ" 
Α € > A 2 ‘ xv 
καὶ ὁ εἰς TOY ἀγρὸν ὧν 
A 3 A 
μὴ ἐπιστρεψάτω εἰς τὰ 
΄᾽ 
ὀπίσω ἄραι τὸ ἱμάτιον 
ε ~ 3. Ἃ ‘ ~ 3 
αὑτοῦ. Ove δὲ ταῖς ἐν 
3 
ἐχούσαις 
ταῖς ϑηλαζούσαις ἐν 


γαστρὶ 


3 - 
ἐκείναις ταῖς ἡμέραις. 
, σ 
Προφεύχεσϑε δέ, ἵνα μὴ 
γένηται ἡ φυγὴ ὑμῶν 
χειμῶνος. Ἔσονται γὰρ 
ce ’ > ~ ~ 
αἰήμέραι ἐκεῖναι ϑλῖψις, 
. 7 
οἵα οὐ γέγονε τοιαύτη 
3.1 3 > ~ τ 
ἀπ ἀρχῆς κτίσεως, ἧς 
μὲ « , A - ~ 
ἔχτισὲν 0 ϑεὸς, EG TOU 
~ A 
VOY, καὶ οὐ μὴ γένηται. 


ϑησαν αἱ ἡμέραι ἐκεῖ- 20 Καὶ εἰ μὴ κύριος ἐκολόβω- 


> pe ’ ~ 
VEL, οὐκ ἂν ἐσώϑη πᾶσα 


4 Ψ 
σάρξ' διὰ δὲ τοὺς ἐκλεχτοὺς κολοβωϑή- 
σονται αἱ ἡμέραι ἐχεῖναι. Τότε ἐάν τις 


23 


~ ” ts " N + 
ὑμῖν εἴπῃ" ἰδού, ὧδε ὃ Χριστὸς ἢ ὧδε" 


25 ἐχλεχτούς. 


᾿Εγερϑήσονται γὰρ 


‘ 
και 


ἐρήμωσις αὐτῆς. 


LUKE XXI. 

4 [ὦ ’ , 

τῇ» ᾿]ερουσαλὴῆμ, τοτὲ 
~ σ : 
γνῶτε, ὅτι ἤγγικεν ἡ 
Τότε 
4 Φ ~ > , , 
οἱ ev τῇ ]ουδαίᾳ φευγε- 
‘ 
ζῶσαν εἰς τὰ ὕρη᾽ καὶ 
οἱ ἐνμέσῳ αὐτῆς ἐχχωρεί.- 
A ~ 
τωσαν᾽ καὶ οἱ ἐν ταῖς 
, ᾿ > Le 
χώραις pn εἰςερχέσϑω- 
9 29 ¢ ε 
σαν εἰς αὑτὴν. Oz ἡ- 
, > ’ τ , 
μέραι ἐκδικήσεως αὐται 
εἰσι,τοῦ πλησϑῆναι πάν- 
τὰ τὰ γεγραμμένα, Ov- 
3 \ ~ ᾽ . “9 
αἱ δὲ ταῖς ἕν γᾶστρι é- 
, FA, ~ 

χούσαις καὶ ταῖς ϑηλα- 
ζούσαις ἐν ἐχείγαις ταῖς 
e ’ - “ A > 
ἡμέραις" ἔσται γὰρ ἅ- 
‘ 9% ~ ~ 
VERY μεγάλη ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 
καὶ ὀργὴ τῷ λαῷ τούτῳ. 


34 Καὶ πεσοῦνται στόματι 


A 
μαχαίρας καὶ αἰχμα- 
λωτισϑήσονται εἰς πάν- 
τα τὰ ἔϑνη᾽ καὶ Tepov- 
σαλὴμ ἔσται πατουμέ- 

« νΝε 9 ~ Ν» 
vy ὑπὸ ἐϑγνῶν, ἄχρι πλη- 
~ 4 > ~ 
ρωϑῶσι καιροί εϑνῶν. 


‘ ε ? > ΩΝ > , ~ 
σὲ τὰς ἡμέρας, οὐκ ἂν soWTH πᾶσα 


clip x 
στο, ἢ" 


. ὶ α 
σάρξ' ἀλλὰ διὰ τοὺς ἐχλεκτούς, ove ἐξε- 
21 λέξατο,ἐκολόβωσε τὰς ἡμέρας. Καὶ τό- 
>? € ὦ fy ἡ 3 Se ε 
τὲ ἕαν τις ὑμῖν εἰπῃ᾽ ἰδοὺ, ὧδὲ ὃ Χρι- 


τῷ 7 ~, \ , 
ἰδου, ἐκεῖ" μὴ πιστεύετε. 


22 ᾿Εγχερϑήσονται γὰρ ψευδόχριστοι καὶ 
ψευδοπροφῆται, καὶ δώσουσι σημεῖα 
καὶ τέρατα πρὸς τὸ ἀποπλανᾶν, εἰ 

᾿Ιδού, προείρηκα ὑμῖν. 23 δυνατόν, καὶ τοὺς ἐκλεχτούς. “Ὑμεῖς δὲ 

26 ᾽Εὰν οὖν εἴπωσιν ὑμῖν" ἰδού, ἐν τῇ 


βλέπετε" ἰδού, προείρηκα ὑμῖν πάντα. 
ἐρήμῳ ἐστί" μὴ ἐξέλϑητε" ἰδού, ἐν ἄγον 


~ , 5 ‘ , "Q A « 3 ΕΙΣ ὁ ἃ 3 
27 τοῖς ταμείοις" μὴ πιστεύσητε. “Romeo γὰρ ἡ ἀστραπὴ ἐξέρχεται ἀπὸ ἀνα- 
~ ~ σ ~ - 
τολῶν καὶ φαίνεται ἕως δυσμῶν, οὕτως ἔσται χαὶ ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ 


~ > , gy ‘ 5.4 rf A ~ > , a> , 
28 τοῦ avdowmov. Onov yao tary to πτῶμα, ἐχεῖ συγαχϑήσονται οἱ ἀξτοί. 





8 15 etc. Deut. 9, 27. 


134 


FROM OUR LORD’S PUBLIC ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM [Parr VII. 





MATTH. ‘XXIV. 


29 Εὐθέως δὲ μετὰ τὴν 


ϑλῖψιν τῶν ἡμερῶν ἐ:- 
κείγων ὁ ἥλιος σχοτι- 
σϑήσεται, καὶ ἡ σελήνη 
οὐ δώσει τὸ φέγγος αὗ- 
τῆς, κὰὶ οἱ ἀστέρες πε- 
σοῦνται ἀπὸ τοῦ οὐρα- 
νοῦ, καὶ αἱ δυνάμεις τῶν 
οὐρανῶν σαλευϑήσον»- 


30 ται. Καὶ τότε φανή- 


91 


σεται τὸ σημεῖον τοῦ 
υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐν 
καὶ τότε κόψονται πᾶσαι 
αἱ φυλαὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ 
ὄψονται τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ 
ἀνθρώπου ἐρχόμενον 
ἐπὶ τῶν νεφελῶν τοῦ 
οὐρανοῦ μετὰ δυνάμεως 
καὶ δόξης πολλῆς. Καὶ 
ἀποστελεῖ τοὺς ἀγγέλους 


αὑτοῦ μετὰ σάλπιγγος 


φωνῆς μεγάλης" καὶ 
Ψ , ‘ 3 
ἐπισυγάξουσι τοὺς ἐκλε- 
χτοὺς αὐτοῦ ἐκ τῶν τεσ- 
, > , . MES a+ 
σάρων ἀνέμων an ἄ- 


~ y 
ρῶν οὐρανῶν ἕως a-> 


κρὼν αὐτῶν. “And δὲ 
τῆς συκῆς μάϑετε τὴν 
, a x 
παραβολὴν" τὰν ἤδη 
ὁ κλάδος αὐτῆς γένηται 
΄ A 4 4 , 
ἁπαλὸς καὶ τὰ φύλλα 
ἐχφύῃ, γινώσκετε, ὅτι 
ys ‘ , oe. 
eyyug τὸ ϑέρος. Ovtw 
‘ c ~ g ” 
καὶ ὑμεῖς, ὁτὰν ἰδητε 
πάντα ταῦτα,γινώσκετε, 
σ > , > > 4 , 
ὅτι ἐγγὺς ἔστιν ἐπι ϑυ- 
> ‘ , c¢  »ν 
ραις. Auny λέγω ὑμῖν, 
οὐ μὴ παρέλϑῃ ἡ γενεὰ 


σ “ “Ἁ , 
“uty,  ἑῶξ ὧν πῶντο 


25 ταῦτα γένηται. Ὁ οὐ- 


ρανὺς καὶ ἡ γῆ παρελεύ- 





5. 29 etc. Comp. Is. 13, 9. 10. Joel 3, 


26 


28 puvov. 


31 γένηται. 


MARK XIII. 


24°ALX ἐν ἐκείναις ταῖς 


« ’ ‘ A ~ 
ἡμέραις, μετὰ τὴν OLi- 

ὃ τὰ νὼ ε΄ ᾿ 
ψιν ἐχείφην, ὁ ἥλιος σχο- 
τισϑήσεται, καὶ ἡ σελήνη 
οὐ δώσει τὸ φέγγος αὗ- 


25 τῆς, ! καὶ οἱ ἀστέρες τοῦ 


οὐρανοῦ ἔσονται ἐχπί- 
πτοντες, καὶ αἱ δυνάμεις 
αἱ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς σα- 
λευϑήσονται. ὃ 


τῷ οὐρανῷ. 


: Καὶ τότε 
a 4 cy ἂν 
ὄψονται τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ 
> ’ > , > 
ἀνϑρώπου ἐρχόμενον ἕν 
νεφέλαις μετὰ δυνάμεως 


27 πολλῆς καὶ δόξης, " καὶ 


~ A 
τότε ἀποστελεῖ τοὺς 
~ A 
ἀγγέλους αὑτοῦ, καὶ 
> , 4 > 
ἐπισυνάξει τοὺς ἔκλε- 
κτοὺς αὑτοῦ ἐκ τῶν τεσ- 
> 7, > 3 a 
σάρων ἀνέμων am k- 
~ Ν 3 
χρου γῆς ἕως ἄκρου οὐ- 
A ~ 
"And δὲ τῆς 
~ \ 
συκῆς waders τὴν πα- 
, 7 > ~ 
eaPohyy: ὅταν αὑτῆς 


᾿ ἤδη ὃ κλάδος ἁπαλὸς 


A 
γένηται καὶ ἐχφύῃ τὰ 
σ 
φύλλα, γινώσκετε, ὅτι 
3 ‘ \ , > ’ 
ἐγγὺς τὸ ϑέρος ἐστίν. 


29 Οὕτω καὶ ὑμεῖς, ὅταν 


ταῦτα ἴδητε γινόμενα, 
σ 
γινώσκετε, ὅτι ἐγγύς ἐσ- 


30 τιν ἐπὶ ϑύραις. “Apiy 


λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐ μὴ 
παρέλϑῃ ἡ γενεὰ αὕτη, 
μέχρις οὗ πάντα ταῦτα 
“Ὃ οὐρανὸς 
καὶ ἡ γῆ παρελεύσονται, 
οἱ δὲ λόγοι μου οὐ μὴ 


33 σαι. 


LUKE ΧΧΙ. 


25 Καὶ ἔσται σημεῖα ἐν ἧ- 


Lig καὶ σελήνῃ καὶ ἄ- 
στροῖς, καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς 
4 > ~ > > 
ovvoyy edvav ἕν ἅπο- 
oie, ἠχούσης ϑαλάσσης 


26 χαὶ σάλου, ! ἀποψυχόν- 


τῶν ἀνϑρώπων ἀπὸ φό- 
βου καὶ προςφδοκίας τῶν 
ἐπερχομένων τῇ οἰκου- 
μένῃ" αἱ γὰρ δυνάμεις 
τῶν οὐρανῶν σαλευϑή- 
σονται | ’ 


Kai τότε 
a ‘ εν ~ 
ὄψονται τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ 
> % > , 9 
ἀγνϑρώπου ἐρχόμενον ἕν 
νεφέλῃ μετὰ δυνάμεως 


28 καὶ δόξης πολλῆς. “Ag- 


χομένων δὲ τούτων γί- 


4 
οἰ ψεσϑαι ἀνακύψατε καὶ 


> Ud \ , A 
ἑπάρατε᾽ τὰς κεφαλᾶς 
c ~ ’ > 4 
ὑμῶν, διότι ἐγγίζει 
ἡ ἀπολύτρωσις ὑμῶν. 


29 Καὶ εἶπε παραβολὴν 


αὐτοῖς" Were τὴν συκῆν 
A ἢ A 7 
καὶ mavta τὰ δένδρα" 


80 ὅταν" προβάλωσιν ἤδη, 


βλέποντες ἀφ ἑαυτῶν 
γινώσκετε, ὅτι ἤδη ἐγγὺς 


31 τὸ θέρος ἐστίν. Οὕτω 


A [2 ~ σ > δ 
καὶ υμεῖς, ὁτῶὰν ἴδητε 
ταῦτα γινόμενα, γινώ- 
σχετὲ, ὅτι ἐγγύς ἐστιν 


ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ ϑεοῖ. 


32° Auiy λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐ 


μὴ παρέλϑῃ ἡ γενεὰ αἵ- 
τη, ἕως ἂν πάντα γένη- 
ὋὉ οὐρανὸς καὶ 
ἡ γῆ παρελεύσονται, οἱ 





15. ete. 





‘ 






7 de 


Δ᾽ κ᾽ “Οὐυσοοὐδιῦν 


a ee ee ee ee) τ 





EE — νὰν" 


a Ta ΨΡΝΝ 


ἘΦ ΣΝ 


“—_ ew, 


i al id a ta 


ES a τ ee a 














PRS ee eee ee ee oe Εν ὙΥσννο,, 


δὲ 128, 129.] . .  .. UNTIL THE, FUURTH PASSOVER. 135 





MATTH. XXIV. MARK XIII. LUKE XXI. 
φονται, οἱ δὲ λόγοι μου 82 παρέλϑωσι. Περὶ δὲ τῆς δὲ λόγοι pov, οὐ μὴ 
36 οὐ μὴ παρέλϑωσι. Πρρὶ ἡμέρας ἐκείνης ἢ τῆς ὦς παρέλϑωσι. 
δὲ τῆς ἡμέρας ἐχείνης ρας οὐδεὶς οἶδεν, οὐδὲ οἱ 
A ~ 7 > A a "Ὅς 3 - ϑῳλ ¢ cr > A « , 
καὶ τῆς ὥρας οὐδεὶς οἷ ἄγγελοι οἱ ἐν οὐρανῷ, οὐδὲ ὁ Vids, εἰ μὴ ὁ πατήρ. 
δεν, οὐδὲ οἱ ἄγγελοι τῶν 
3 - > A ςε ’ , 
37 WAI? él μὴ ὃ πλεῖ μου μόνος.. ὍὭςπερ δὲ αἱ ἡμέραι τοῦ ies οὕτως 
88 ἔσται καὶ ἡ παρουσία τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνϑρώπου. Ὥςπερ γὰρ ἦσαν ἐν ταῖς 
ἡμέραις ταῖς πρὸ τοῦ κατακλυσμοῦ τρώγοντες καὶ πίνοντες, γαμοῦντες καὶ 
> » at τ: Ὁ τ 3. 'ν 1 es > 4 t al ‘ > o 
39 ἐχγαμίζοντες, ἄχρι ἧς ἡμέρας εἰςῆλϑε Noe εἰς τὴν κιβωτόν," " καὶ οὐκ ἔγνωσαν, 
ἕως ἦλϑεν ὁ καταχλυσμὸς καὶ ἦρεν ἅπαντας" οὕτως ἔσται καὶ ἧ παρουσία 
, wr) ea ~ 9 , , ‘a? ” 3 ~ ΠΤ τῶ ὁ ἐϑ 
40 τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀνϑρώπου. Tore δυο ἔσονται & τῷ ἀγρῷ" ὁ εἷς παραλαμ-. 
, bt ale ΝΣ ΝΕ , 25 7 3 “ δι." , , 
41 βάνεται, καὶ ὃ εἷς ἀφίεται. Avo ἀλήϑουσαι ἐν τῷ μύλωνι" μία παραλαμβάνε- 
ται, καὶ μία ἀφίεται. 


MARK XIII. , LUKE XXI. 
33. Βλέπετε, ἀγρυπνεῖτε καὶ προςεύ- 34 Προςἔχετε δὲ ἑαυτοῖς, μήποτε βαρη- 
yecde* οὐκ οἰδατε γὰρ πότε ὁ και- ϑῶσιν ὑμῶν αἱ καρδίαι ἐν χραιπάλῃ 
24 ρός ἐστιν. Ὡς ἄνθρωπος ἀπόδη- καὶ μέϑῃ καὶ μερίμναις βιωτικαῖς, 
μος ἀφεὶς τὴν οἰκίαν αὑτοῦ, καὶ καὶ αἰφνίδιος ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς ἐπιστῇ ἡ ἡμέ- 
δοὺς τοῖς δούλοις αὑτοῦ τὴν ἐξου- 88 oa ἐχείνη. ‘Re παγὶς γὰρ ἐπελεύσεται 
σίαν. καὶ ἑχάστῳ τὸ ἔργον αὖ- . ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς καϑημένους ἐπὶ 
τοῦ, καὶ τῷ ϑυρωρῷ ἐνετείλατο, πρόφωπον πάσης τῆς 
MATTH. XXIV. 35 ἵνα γρηγορῇ. [Γρηγο- 36 γῆς. ᾿Αγρυπνεῖτε οὖν 
42 Fonyogeize οὖν, ὅτι οὐκ ρεῖτε οὖν" οὐκ οἴδατε ἐν παντὶ καιρῷ δεόμε- 
οἴδατε, ποίᾳ ὥρᾳ ὁ κύ-. γὰρ πότε ὃ κύριος TIS νοι, ἵνα καταξιωϑῆτε 
ριος ὑμῶν ἔρχεται. οἰκίας ἔρχεται, Owe ἢ ἐκχφυγεῖν ταῦτα πάντα 
μεσονυκτίου ἢ. ἀλεχτο- τὰ μέλλοντα γίνεσθαι 


, 0 A Ἦν EE ὦ σ \ ~ " 
36 ροφῶνγίας ἢ πρῶΐϊν" μῆ ἐλϑῶὼν ἐξαίφνης ευρῇῃ χαὶ σταϑῆναι ἔἕμπρο- 
37 ὑμᾶς καϑεύδοντας. “A δὲ ὑμῖν λέγω, πᾶσι σϑεν τοῦ υἱοῦ τοῦ ἀν- 
λέγω" yonyoosize. ϑρώπου. 


§ 129. Transition to Christ’s final coming at the Day of Judgment. Exhortation to 
watchfulness. Parables: The Ten Virgins; The Five Talents—Mount of Olives. 


Third Day of the Week. 


Martu. XXIV. 43—51. XXV. 1—30. 

43 Exeivo δὲ γινώσκετξ, ὅτι, εἰ ἔδει ὁ οἰκοδεσπότης, ποίᾳ φυλακῇ ὁ κλέπτης ἔρχε- 
44 ται, ἐγρηγόρησεν ἄν, καὶ οὐκ ἂν εἴασε διορυγῆναι τὴν οἰκίαν αὑτοῦ. Διὰ τοῦτο 

καὶ ὑμεῖς, γίνεσϑε ἕτοιμοι" ὅτι ἧ agg ov δοκεῖτε ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνϑρώπου ἐ ἔρχεται. 
45 Τίς ἄρα ἐστὶν 6 πιστὸς δοῦλος καὶ φρόνιμος, ὃν κατέστησεν ὁ κύριος αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ 
46 τῆς ϑεραπείας αὑτοῦ, τοῦ διδόναι αὐτοῖς τὴν τροφὴν ἐν καιρῷ 3 > Μακάριος ὁ 
AT δοῦλος ὁ sxsi#0G, ὃν ἐλϑὼν ὁ κύριος αὐτοῦ εὑρήσει ποιοῦντα οὕτως. “Anny λέγω 
48 ὑμῖν, ὅτι ἐπὶ πᾶσι τοῖς ὑπάρχουσιν αὑτοῦ καταστήσει αὐτόν. “Eur δὲ εἴπῃ 6 





8. 38. Gen. 7, 4 κα. 


136 FROM OUR LORD’S PUBLIC ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM [Parr VII. 


MATTH. XXIV. 
~ ~ ; ~ Ἴ ~ ~ 4 
49 χαχὸς δοῦλος ἐκεῖνος ἐν τῇ καρδίᾳ αὑτοῦ" χρονίζει 6 κύριός μου ἐλϑεῖν" | καὶ 
"» , \ , eye mee , 4 a:°4 “4 ~ ͵ Ἶ 
ἄρξηται τύπτειν τοὺς συνδούλους αὑτοῦ, ἐσϑίῃ δὲ καὶ πίνῃ μετὰ τῶν μεϑυόντων 
! ὅε ε , ~ , σὰ ϑα οὐ ξ > ~ S > σ΄ Ξ,» 
ὅ0 ' ηξει ὃ μϑρίορ τοῦ δούλου ἐκείνου ὃν ἡμέρᾳ, ἢ οὐ προῤδοχᾷ, καὶ ἕν 00% ὃ ον 
51 γινώσκει, ! καὶ διχοτομήσει αὐτόν, καὶ τὸ μέρος αὐτοῦ μετὰ τῶν ὑποχριεῶν ϑή- 
σει" ἐκεῖ ἔσται ὃ κλαυϑμὸς καὶ ὁ βουγμὸς τῶν ὀδόντων. 
XXV. 1 Τότε ὁμοιωϑήσεται ἡ βασιλεία τῶν οὐρανῶν δέκα παρϑένοις, αἵτινες λα- 
~ \ , ς ~~ Jew > >» + ~ , , a \ 7 
2 βοῦσαι τὰς λαμπάδας αὑτῶν ἐξῆλϑον εἰς ἀπάντησιν τοῦ νυμφίους Πέντε δὲ ἦσαν 
2% > οὐ , ᾿ ‘ , , ot ‘ ~ Ἁ Ul 
3 ἐξ αὐτῶν φρόνιμοι, καὶ πέντε pope. Aitwes μωραὶ λαβοῦσαι τὰς λαμπάδας 
ε ~ > μὲ > ¢€ “« "' « A , ” μὲ > ~ > , 
4 αὑτῶν οὐχ ἔλαβον μεϑ' ἑαυτῶν ἔλαιον" αἱ δὲ φρόνιμοι ἔλαβον ἔλαιον ἐν τοῖς ἀγγεί- 
5 og αὑτῶν μετὰ τῶν λαμπάδων αὑτῶν. Χρονίζοντος δὲ τοῦ νυμφίου ἐνύσταξαν 
~ ‘ > , , ‘ ‘ , > ¢ 74 , 

6 πᾶσαι καὶ ἐκάϑευδον. Μέσης δὲ νυχτὸς χραυγὴ γέγονεν" ἰδού, ὁ νυμφίος ἔρχε- 
oF > > , > ~” , 3. Ψ ~ € , > ~ 
7 ται, ἐξέρχεσϑε εἰς ἀπάντησιν αὐτοῦ. Tore ἡγέρϑησαν πᾶσαι αἱ παρϑένοι ἐκεῖναι 
8 
9 





Le Qe A , ς- # ς ‘ ‘ ~ , -΄ , 
καὶ ἐκόσμησαν τὰς λαμπάδας αὑτῶν. Ai δὲ μωραὶ ταῖς φρονίμοις εἶπον" δότε 
ςς »ν > ~ > ’ ς - ΄ « ’ . ~ , > , ‘ 
ἡμῖν ἐκ TOV ἐλαίου ὑμῶν, ott αἱ λαμπάδες ἡμῶν σβέννυνται. “Anexpidyoar δὲ 
αἱ φρόνιμοι λέγουσαι" μήποτε οὐκ ἀρκέσῃ ἡμῖν καὶ ὑμῖν. πορεύεσϑε μᾶλλον 

10 πρὸς τοὺς πωλοῦντας καὶ ἀγοράσατε ἑαυταῖς. ᾿“΄περχομένων δὲ αὐτῶν ἀγορά- 

σαι, ἦλϑεν 6 νυμφίος" καὶ αἱ ἕτοιμοι εἰφῆλϑον μετ αὐτοῦ εἰς τοὺς γάμους, καὶ 

11 ἐχλείσϑη ἡ ϑύρα. Ὕστερον δὲ ἔρχονται καὶ αἱ λοιπαὶ παρϑένοι λέγουσαι" 

“43 κύριε, κύριε, ἄνοιξον ἡμῖν. ὋὉ δὲ ἀποκριϑεὶς εἶπεν" ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐκ οἶδα 

13 ὑμᾶς. Γρηγορεῖτε οὖν, ὅτι οὐκ οἴδατε τὴν ἡμέραν οὐδὲ τὴν ὥραν [ἐν ἡ ὁ υἱὸς 
τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἔρχεται]. 

14 Ὥςπερ γὰρ ἄνϑρωπος πόνον ἐκάλεσε τοὺς ἰδίους δούλους καὶ παρέδωκεν 

> ne ae , ς ~ {oy AS ime , , T gi , Tate 
15 αὐτοῖς τὰ ὑπάρχοντα αὑτοῦ" καὶ ᾧ μὲν ἔδωκε πὲντε τάλαντα, ᾧ δὲ δύο, ᾧ δὲ ἕν" 
16 ἑχάστῳ κατὰ τὴν ἰδίαν δύναμιν" καὶ ἀπεδήμησεν εὐθέως. ΤΙορευϑεὶς δὲ ὃ τὰ 
᾿ , ‘ ieee > > a ἃ δι ὦ a r ’ 

πέντε τάλαντα λαβὼν εἰργάσατο ἕν αὑτοῖς καὶ ἐποίησεν ἄλλα πέντε τάλαντα. 

17 18 Ὡραύτως καὶ ὁ τὰ δύο ἐχέρδησε καὶ αὐτὸς ἄλλα δύο. ὋὉ δὲ τὸ ἕν λαβὼν ἀπελϑὼν 

19 ὥρυξεν ἐν τῇ γῇ καὶ ἀπέχρυψε τὸ ἀργύριον τοῦ κυρίου αὑτοῦ. Μετὰ δὲ χρόνον πο- 

20 Liv ἔρχεται ὁ κύριος τῶν δούλων ἐκείνων καὶ συναίρει μετ αὐτῶν λόγον. Καὶ προς- 

Α ε A ; A , a+ gat es vi , , 

ελϑὼν ὁ τὰ πέντε τάλαντα λαβὼν πρρρηρέγρν ἄλλα πέντε τάλαντα δέγῶν * κύρις͵ 

πέντε τάλαντά μοι παρέδωκας" ἰδε, ἄλλα πέντε τάλαντα ἐκέρδησα ἐπὶ αὐτοῖς. Ἔφη 

αὐτῷ ὁ κύριος αὐτοῦ" εὖ, δοῦλε ἀγαϑὲ καὶ πιστέ" ἐπὶ ὀλίγα ἧς πιστός, ἐπὶ πολ- 

22 λῶν σεκαταστήσω᾽ εἴςελϑε εἰς τὴν χαρὰν τοῦ κυρίου σου. Προςελϑὼν δὲ καὶ 6 

τὰ δύο τάλαντα λαβὼν εἶπε" κύριε, δύο τάλαντά μοι παρέδωκας" ἴδε, ἄλλα δύο 

, > , a 3 - 4 δὶ ὧν Ὁ , > ~ a ~ > \ ‘ 

23 τάλαντα ἐχδέρησα ἐπ αὑτοῖς. Εφη αὐτῷ ὃ κύριος αὑτοῦ" ev, δοῦλε ἀγαϑὲ καὶ 

πιστέ" ἐπὶ ὀλίγα ἧς πιστός, ἐπὶ πολλῶν σε καταστήσω εἴςελϑε εἰς τὴν χαρὰν 

24 τοῦ κυρίου σου. ΤΠροςελϑὼν δὲ καὶ ὁ τὸ ἕν τάλαντον εἰληφὼς εἶπε" κύριε, ἔγνων 

Ψ ‘ ” σ“ > ” ‘ ’ “ > 

σε, ὅτι σκληρὸς εἶ ἄνϑρωπος, ϑερίζων ὅπου οὐκ ἔσπειρας, καὶ συνάγων ὅϑεν οὐ 
25 διεσκόρπισας "" καὶ φοβηϑεὶς ἀπελϑὼν ἔκρυψα τὸ τάλαντόν σου ἐν τῇ γῇ" ἴδε, 
26 ἔχεις τὺ σόν. Anougideis δὲ ὁ κύριος αὐτοῦ εἶπεν αὐτῷ" moves 'δοῦλε καὶ 
ὀκνηρέ, ides, ὅτι ϑερίζω ὅ ὅπου οὐκ ἔσπειρα, καὶ συνάγω ὅϑεν οὐ διεσκόρπισα ; ; 
o7 Ἔδει οὖν σὲ βαλεῖν τὸ ἀργύριόν μου τοῖς τραπεζίταις " καὶ ἐλϑὼν ἐγὼ ἐχομισά- 
28 μὴν ἂν τὸ ἐμὸν σὺν τόκῳ. "Agate οὖν ἀπὶ αὐτοῦ τὸ τάλαντον καὶ δότε τῷ 
~ ‘ 
29 ἔχοντι τὰ δέκα τάλαντα. Τῷ γὰρ ἔχοντι παντὶ δοϑήσεται, καὶ περισσευϑήσεται" 


ee 


2 


_ 





| 


a ee Ti ὦ “, 





Δ, 
: 

4 
af 
ἣ 
; 
ἢ 
¢- 
3 
; 

fe 
; 

“ 

» 
5 
kK 
Ὶ 
' 


σα νυν ΨΚ a τ π ΡΟ 





i 


=, 


ee Ne Pan pe a ee ee 


δῇ 129, 130, 131.] UNTIL THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 137 


: 





ΜΑΤΤΗ, ΧΧΥ. 

80 ἀπὸ δὲ τοῦ μὴ ἔχοντος καὶ ὃ ἔχει ἀρϑήσεται ἀπὶ αὐτοῦ. Καὶ τὸν ἀχρεῖον δοῦ- 

λον ἐχβάλετε εἰς τὸ σκότος τὸ ἐξώτερον" ἐχεῖ ἔσται ὁ κλαυϑμὸς καὶ ὃ βρυγμὸς 
τῶν ὀδόντων. 


§ 130. Skienes of the Judgment Day. — Mount of My ge 


Third Day of the Week. 


Marru. XXV. 31—46. 


31 Ὅταν δὲ ἔλϑῃ ὁ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἐν τῇ δόξῃ αὑτοῦ καὶ πάντες οἱ [ἅγιοι] 


32 ἄγγελοι μετ αὐτοῦ, τότε καϑίσει ἐπὶ ϑρόνου δόξης αὑτοῦ, ' καὶ συγαχϑήσεται 
ἔμπροσϑεν αὐτοῦ πάντα τὰ ἔϑνη" καὶ ἀφοριεῖ αὐτοὺς am ἀλλήλων, ὥςπερ ὁ 
A > A \ \ ~ * 
33 ποιμὴν ἀφορίζει τὰ πρόβατα ἀπὸ τῶν ἐρίφων, ' καὶ στήσεϊ τὰ μὲν πρύβατα ἐχ 
- ¢ τ 4 gt i ' ~ ἂν τς 
84 δεξιῶν αὑτοῦ, τὰ δὲ ἐρίφια ἐξ εὐωνύμων. Τότε ἐρεῖ ὁ βασιλεὺς τοῖς ἐκ δεξιῶν αὗ- 
tov’ δεῦτε, οἱ εὐλογημένοι τοῦ πατρός μου, κληρογομήσατϑ τὴν ἡτοιμασμένην ὑμῖν 
35 βικσιλείαγά ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου. Ἐπείνασα γάρ, καὶ ἐδώκατέ Hes φαγεῖν" ἐδίψησα, 
36 καὶ ἐποτίσατέ ἜΝ ξέγος ἤμην, καὶ συνηγάγετέ je τῶι γυμνός, καὶ περιεβάλετέ μὲ᾿ 
37 ἠσϑένησα, καὶ ἐπεσκχέψασϑέ we’ ἐν φυλακῇ ἤμην, καὶ ἤλθετε πρός με. Τότε 
~ Hy ~ 
ἀποχριϑήσονται αὐτῷ οἱ δίκαιοι λέγοντες " κύριε, πότϑ σε εἴδομεν πεινῶντα, καὶ 
i ~ 
38 ἐθρέψαμεν ; ἢ διψῶντα, καὶ ἐποτίσαμεν ; '\ πότε δέ σε εἴδομεν ξένον, καὶ συνη- 
7 xv , 4 , 1 , , » > > ἢ 2 ~ 
39 yayousy ; ἢ γυμνὸν, καὶ περιεβαλομεν ; ' πότε δέ σε εἴδομεν ἀσϑενῆ ἢ ἕν φυλακῇ, 
\ 7 ΄ ΝΒ A ε A 5 ~ 3 a > \ 3, c¢ w 
40 χαὶ ἤλϑομεν πρὸς σε; Kou ἀποκριϑεὶς ὃ βασιλεὺς ἐρεῖ avtoig* auny λέγω ὑμῖν, 
A ~ ~ ~ A 
ἐφ᾽ ὅσον ἐποιήσατε ἑνὶ τούτων τῶν ἀδελφῶν μου τῶν ἐλαχίστων, ἐμοὶ ἐποιήσατε. 
U > ~ ‘ ~ 25 > , ᾿ ’ αν ee: ~ « , > 4 ~ 
41 Tore eget καὶ τοῖς ξξ εὐωνύμων πορεύεσϑε am ἐμοῦ οἱ κατηραμένοι εἰς TO πῦρ 
τ Ψ δ A € , ~ ? A ~ 3 , > - > , 
42 τὸ αἰώνιον, TO ἡτοιμασμένον τῷ διαβόλῳ καὶ τοῖς ἀγγέλοις αὑτοῦ. Ensivaca 
Υ͂ A > 3 7 , ~ ,. 29/7 A > 3 , / ‘di 1 , a 
43 γάρ, καὶ οὐκ ἐδώκατέ μοι φαγεῖν" ἐδίψησα, καὶ οὐκ Exotiouté με" | ξένος ἤμην, 
καὶ Ov συνηγάγετέ με᾽ γυμνός, καὶ οὐ περιεβάλετέ us’ ἀσϑενὴς καὶ ἐν φυλακῇ, 
A > > , , , > ’ 4 > 4 , é ? 
44 χαὶ οὐκ ἑπεσχεψασϑὲ me. Tore ἀποχριϑήσονται καὶ αὑτοῖ λέγοντες κύριξ, 
, ᾿" ~ Ἃ ~ Nee Ἃ \ ἋΣ» ~ N92 ~ τ 
πότε σὲ εἰδομὲν πεινῶντα ἢ διψῶντα ἢ ξένον ἢ γυμνὸν ἢ ἀσϑενῆ ἢ ὃν φυλακῇ, καὶ 
> , , , 3 , > ~ / ᾧ 3 A , c »ν > 
45 ov διήκονήσαμέν σοι; Tore ἀποχριϑήσεται αὐτοῖς λέγων" ἅμην λέγω ὑμῖν, ep 
~ , A ‘ : 
46 ὅσον οὐκ ἐποιήσατε Evi τούτων τῶν ἐλαχίστων, οὐδὲ ἐμοὶ ἐποιήσατε: Καὶ ane- 
τ > , ἢ C gi οὔ > \ 27 
λεύσονται ovtot εἰς κόλασιν αἰώνιον, οἱ δὲ δίκαιοι εἰς ζωὴν αἰώνιον. 


§ 131. The Rulers conspire. The supper at Bethany. Treachery of Judas.—Jerusa- 
lem. Bethany. 


Fourth Day of the Week. 


Marra, XXVL 1—16. Marx XIV. 1—11. Luxe XXII. 1—6. 


1. Kat ἐγένετο, ὅτε ἐτές 1 "Hy δὲ τὸ πάσχα καὶ 1 "“Hyyile δὲ ἡ ἑορτὴ 
λεσεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς πάντας τὰ ἄζυμα μετὰ δύο ἧ- τῶν ἀζύμων, ἡ λεγομένη 
τοὺς λύγους τούτους, μεέρας.---ὶ = 


εἶπε τοῖς μαϑηταῖς αὗ- 
2 τοῦ" ! οἶἰδατε, ὅτι μετὰ δύο ἡμέρας τὸ πάσχα γίγνεται" καὶ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 
παραδίδοται εἰς τὸ σταυρωϑῆναι. 


18 





138 FROM OUR LORD’S PUBLIC ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM [Pant VII. 
MATTH. XXVI. MARK XIV. LUKE XXII. 
3 Tore συνήχϑησαν οἱ 1 -- Καὶ ἐζήτουν οἱ 2 Καὶ ἐζήτουν οἱ ἀρχιε- 


4 


5 


6 


τ 


8 


9 


10 


11 


12 Βαλοῦσα γὰρ αὕτη τὸ 


ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ γραμμα- 
τεῖς, πῶς αὐτὸν ἐν δόλῳ 
κρατήσαντες ἀποκτεί- 
2 γωσιν. Ἔλεγον δέ" μὴ ἐν 
τῇ ἑορτῇ, μήποτε ϑύό- 
ρυβοςἔσται τοῦ λαοῦ. 


ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ γραμ- 
ματεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτε- 
got τοῦ λαοῦ εἰς τὴν 
αὐλὴν τοῦ ἀρχιερέως, 
τοῦ λεγομένου Καϊάφα" 
καὶ συνεβουλεύσαντο, 
ἵνα tov ᾿Ϊ]ησοῦν δόλῳ 
, a. 2 , » , ‘ 
κρατήσωσι καὶ ἀποχτείγωσιν. Ἔλεγον δὲ" μὴ 
ἐν τῇ ἑορτῇ, ἵνα μὴ ϑόρυ- 
Bog γένηται ἐν τῷ λαῷ. 3 
Τοῦ δὲ ᾿]ησοῦ γενο- 
, > , > 
μένου ἕν Βηϑανίᾳ, ἐν 
εν , ~ 
οἰκίᾳ «Σίμωνος τοῦ λε- 
moov,' προςῆλϑεν αὐτῷ 
γυνὴ ἀλάβαστρον μύρου 
ἔχουσα βαρυτίμου καὶ 
κατέχεεν ἐπὶ τὴν κεφα- 
λὴν αὐτοῦ ἀνακειμέγου. 


Καὶ ὄντος αὐτοῦ ἐν 
Βηϑανίᾳ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ 
Σίμωνος τοῦ λεπροῦ, 
καταχειμένου αὐτοῦ ἢἦλ- 
Ge γυνὴ ἔχουσα ᾿ἀλάβα- 
στρον μύρου, νάρδου πι- 
στικῆς πολυτελοῦς" καὶ 
συντρίψασα τὸ ἀλάβα- 
στρον κατέχεεν αὐτοῦ 
κατὰ τῆς κεφαλῆς. 


~ A ~ 
ρεῖς καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς 
τὸ πῶς ἀνέλωσιν αὐτόν᾽ 


3 ~ ‘ A , 
ἐφοβοῦντο γὰρ τὸν λαόν. 


Joun ΧΙ]. 2--8, 

2 ᾿Ἐποίησαν οὖν αὐτῷ 
δεῖπνον ἐχεῖ, καὶ ἡ Μάρ- 
Da διηκόνει, ὁ δὲ Adla- 
ρος εἷς ἦν τῶν ἀνακειμέ- 

8 γῶν σὺν αὐτῷ: Ἡ οὖν 
Μαρία λαβοῦσα λίτραν 
μύρου νάρδου πιστικῆς 
πολυτίμου ἤλειψε τοὺς 
πόδας tov ᾿Ϊησοῦ, καὶ 
ἐξέμαξε ταῖς ϑριξὶν αὗ- 
τῆς τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ, 


4 ἡ δὲ οἰκία ἐπληρώϑη ἐκ τῆς ὀσμῆς τοῦ μύρου. Aéye οὖν εἷς ἐκ τῶν 


᾿Ιδόντες δὲ οἱ μαϑηταὶ 4 Ἦσαν δὲ τινες ἀγανα- 


αὐτοῦ ἠγανάκτησαν λέ. κτοῦντες πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς 
youtes* εἰς τί ἡ ἀπώλεια καὶ λέγοντες" εἰς τί ἡ 

σ 3 ΄ Α ~ > , σ - , 
αὑτη ; ἤδυνατο γὰρ τοῦ. ἀπωλεια avty tou μύρου 
το [τὸ μύρον] πραϑῆναι 5 γένονεν ; ἠδύνατο γὰρ 
πολλοῦ καὶ δοθῆναι τοῦτο τὸ μύρον πραϑῆ- 
πτωχοῖς. vol ἐπάνω τριακοσίων 
δηναρίων καὶ δοϑῆναι 
τοῖς πτωχοῖς. καὶ ἐνε- 
Γνοὺς 886 6 βριμῶντο airy. Ὁ δὲ 

> ~ > ~ , > ~ Ω »ν 
Ἰησοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " τί Ἰησοῦς ᾿ εἶπεν. ἄφετε 
κόπους παρέχετε τῇ yu- αὐτήν" τί αὐτῇ κόπους 
ψαικί; ἔργον γὰρ καλὸν παρέχετε ; καλὸν ἔργον 
εἰργάσατο εἰς ἐμέ. Πάν- 7 εἰργάσατο ἐν ἐμοί. ΠΙάν- 
wore γὰρ τοὺς πετωχοὺξᾷ τοτὲ γὰρ τοὺς πτωχοὺς 
ἔχετε pe? ἑαυτῶν" ἐμὲ ἔχετε pa? ἑαυτῶν, καί, 
δὲ οὐ πάντοτε ἔχετε.’ ὅταν ϑέλητε, δύνασϑε 
αὐτοὺς εὖ ποιῆσαι" ἐμὲ 

, - ‘ ~ ‘ > ld ” a 

μύρον τοῦτο ἐπὶ tov 8 δὲ ov πάντοτε ἔχετε. O 
σώματός μου, πρὸς τὸ ἔσχεν αὕτη, ἐποίησε" 


μαϑητῶν αὐτοῦ, Ἰούδας 
“Σίμωνος ᾿Ισκαριώτης, ὁ 
μέλλων αὐτὸν παῤα- 
5 διδόναι" διὰ τίτοῦτο τὸ 
μύρον οὐκ ἐπράϑη τρια- 


κοσίων δηναρίων καὶ 


6 ἐδόϑη πτωχοῖς ; Εἶπε δὲ 
τοῦτο, οὐχ ὅτι περὶ τῶν 
πτωχῶν ἔμελεν αὐτῷ, 
GAR ὅτι κλέπτης ἦν καὶ 
τὸ γλωσσόκομον εἶχε καὶ 
τὰ βαλλόμενα ἐβάστα- 

7 ζεν. Εἶπεν οὖν 6 Ἶη- 
σοῦς" ἄφες αὐτήν" εἰς 
τὴν ἡμέραν τοῦ ἐνταφι- 
ασμοῦ μου τετήρηκεν 

8 αὐτό' τοὺς πτωχοὺς γὰρ 
πάντοτε ἔχετε us? ἑαυ- 
τῶν, ἐμὲ δὲ οὐ πάντοτε 
ἔχετε. 


ee υὰθνς 


— ye 











if 


§§ 


131, 132.] 


UNTIL THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 


139 





14 


15 


16 


17 


18 


15 yo ; Kai 


MATTH. ΧΧΥ͂Ι. 
13 ἐνταφιάσαι μὲ ἐποίησεν. “Air λέγω 


MARK XIV. 


προέλαβε μυρίσαι μου τὸ σῶμα εἷς τὸν 


ὑμῖν, ὅπου ἐὰν κηρυχϑῇ τὸ εὐαγγέλιον ὁ ἐνταφιασμόν. “Api λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅπου 


τοῦτο ἐν ὅλῳ τῷ κόσμῳ, λαληϑήσεται 


ϑ. “ἢ > ? o 
καὶ ὃ ἐποίησεν aven, 
εἰς μνημόσυνον αὐτῆς. 


Τότε πορευϑεὶς εἷς τῶν 
δώδεκα, 6 λεγόμενος 
᾿Ιούδας ᾿Ισκαριώτης, 


πρὸς τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς | εἶ- 
πε᾿ τί ϑέλετέ μοι δοῦ- 
ναι, κἀγὼ ὑμῖν παρα- 
δώσω αὐτό ; οἱ δὲ ἔ- 
στῆσαν αὐτῷ τριάκοντα 
3 , %. (3A , 
ἀργύρια. Kat ano tore 
ϑῳ ἢ > ; σ > 
ἐζήτει εὐκαιρίαν, ἵνα αὖ- 
4 ~ 
tov παραδῷ. 


ἂν χηρυχϑῇ τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τοῦτο εἰς 


΄ A , aa ὔ σ 
ὅλον τὸν κόσμον, κιχὶ ὃ ἐποίησεν αὑτὴ 


λαληϑήσεται εἰς μγημό- 
10 συνον αὐτῆς. Καὶ 6’Lov- 
δας ὁ ᾿Ισκαριώτης, εἷς 


τῶν δώδεκα, ἀπῆλϑε 


πρὸς τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς, ἵνα 

~ > Ἁ > ~ € 

11 παραδῷ αὑτὸν αὑτοῖς. Οἱ 
\ 

δὲ ἀκούσαντες ἐχάρησαν, 


‘ > , > ~ 
καὶ ἐπηγγείλαντο αὑτῷ 


3 , μον ‘ 
ἄργυριον δοῦναι" καὶ 


Ste ἢ ~ > , 
ἐζήτει, πῶς εὐκαίρως 
4 ~ 
αὐτὸν παραδῷ. 


LUKE XXII. 


3 Εἰςῆλϑε δὲ σατανᾶς εἰς 


᾿]ούδαν τὸν ἐπικαλούμε- 
γον ᾿Ισκαριώτην, ὄντα ἐκ 
τοῦ ἀριϑμοῦ τῶν δώδε- 


4 χα. Καὶ ἀπελϑὼν συνε- 


λάλησε τοῖς ἀρχιερεῦσι 
καὶ τοῖς στρατηγοῖς τὸ 
πῶς αὐτὸν παραδῷ av- 


5 τοῖς. Καὶ ἐχάρησαν καὶ 


6 


, | Ae ἀφ 3 
συνέϑεντο αὐτῷ ἀργυ- 


Καὶ ἐξω- 


ριον δοῦναι. 


᾿ S95 , 3 , ~ ~ > ~ 4 a 
pohoynos καὶ ἐζήτει εὐκαιρίαν τοῦ παραδοῦναι αὐτὸν αὐτοῖς ἄτερ ὑχλου. 


§ 132. Preparation for the Passover.— Bethany. Jerusalem. 


Matra. XXVI. 17—19. 
Τῇ δὲ πρώτῃ τῶν 
ἀζύμων προςῆλϑον οἱ 
μαϑηταὶ τῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ λέ- 
γοντὲς αὐτῷ" 
᾿ ποῦ 
ϑέλεις ἑτοιμάσωμέν σοι 
φαγεῖν τὸ πάσχα; 


Ὅ 
δὲ εἶπεν" ὑπάγετε εἰς 
τὴν πόλιν πρὸς τὸν δεῖνα 
καὶ εἴπατε αὐτῷ O δι- 
δάσκαλος λέγει" ὁ και- 
ρός μου ἐγγύς ἐστι" πρός 
σε ποιῶ τὸ πάσχα μετὰ 
τῶν μαϑητῶν μου. 


Fifth Day of the Week. 


Mark XIV. 12—16. 

K 4 ~ , ε , 
αἱ τῇ πρώτῃ ἡμέρᾳ 

~ , σ΄ ‘ , 
τῶν ἀζύμων, OTE TO πάσ- 
Υ͂ , > ~ 
χα ἔϑυον, λέγουσιν αὑτῷ 
ςὶ 4 ~ ~ 
οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ" ποῦ 
ϑέλεις ἀπελϑόντες ἕτοι- 
σ Α 
μάσωμεν, ἵνα φάγῃς τὸ 


13 πάσχα; Καὶ ἀποστελ- 


λει δύο τῶν μαϑητῶν 
~ A ~ 
αὑτοῦ καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς " 
[4 , 3 A , 
umayete εἰς τῇν πόλιν, 
καὶ ἀπαντήσει ὑμῖν ἄν- 
, σ 
ϑρωπος κεράμιον υδα- 
᾽ 3 
τος βασταζων" ἀκολου- 


~ 7 
14 youre αὐτῷ, ' και ὁπου 


” ~ 

ἐὰν eigéh On, εἴπατε TH 
2 , σ ¢ 

οἰκοδεσπότῃ, Ott O δι- 

δάσκαλος λέγει" ποῦ 


3 ᾿ , σ \ , 
éotl TO κατάλυμα, o7m0v TO παᾶ- 


‘ ~ ~ 
σχα μετὰ τῶν μαϑητῶν μου φά- 
; > .Ὁ ¢ ~ Led 
αὐτὸς ὑμῖν δείξει ἀνά- 


7 


8 σϑαι τὸ πάσχα. 


9 


Luxe XXII. 7—13. 
Ἦλϑε δὲ ἡ ἡμέρα τῶν 
, t 
ἀζύμων, ἐν ἢ ἔδει ϑύε- 
Καὶ 
ἀπέστειλε Πέτρον καὶ 
3 Ud > , 
Ιωαννην εἰπῶν." mo- 
ρευϑέντες ἑτοιμάσατε 
ἡμῖν τὸ πάσχα, ἵνα φά- 
« ‘ > 
yousv’ Οἱ δὲ εἶπον av- 
~ ~ Ul « , 
t@* mov ϑέλεις ἑτοιμα- 


10 cooper ; “O δὲ εἶπεν αὐ- 


τοῖς ἰδού, εἰςξελϑόντων 
ὑμῶν εἰς τὴν πόλιν, συν- 
αντήσει ὑμῖν ἄνϑρω- 
πος κεράμιον ὕδατος 
βαστάζων: ἀκολουϑή- 
Cute αὐτῷ εἰς τὴν οἱ- 
κίαν, οὗ εἰςπορεύεται. 


11 Καὶ ἐρεῖτε τῷ οἰχοδε- 

, ~ : PR , ς , 

σπότῃ τῆς οἰκίας " λέγει Goro διδά- 
~ σ 

σχαλος᾽ ποῦ ἐστι τὸ κατάλυμα, ὅπου 


- 


= 





140 7 PREPARATION FOR THE FOURTH PASSOVER. [Parr VII. 
r = 
. MARK XIV. LUKE ΧΧΙΙ. 
γαιον μέγα ἐστρωμένον, ἕτοιμον" ἐ:- τὸ πάσχα μετὰ τῶν μαϑητῶν μου 
10 κεῖ ἑτοιμάσατε ἡμῖν. Καὶ ἐξῆλθον 12 φάγω; Κἀκεῖνος ὑμῖν δείξει ἀνάγαι- 
οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἦλϑον εἰς op μέγα ἐστρωμένον", 
MATTH. XXVI._ τὴν πόλιν, καὶ εὗρον 13 ἐχεῖ ἑτοιμάσατε. “Aned- 
19 Καὶ ἐποίησαν οἱ μα΄ καϑὼς εἶπεν adtoig'  ϑόντες δὲ εὗρον καϑὼς 
ϑηταὶ ὡς συνέταξεν ad- καὶ ἡτοίμασαν τὸ πά- εἴρηκεν αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἧ- 
τοῖς ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς, καὶ ἧς σχα.. τοίμασαν τὰ ᾿ πάσχα. 


εἰτοίμασαν τὸ πάσχα. 











ξ. 
' 
δ 
δ 
‘4 
‘ 
; 





| ESE {18} -- 
Kn 1 PN 


PART.V iG, 


THE FOURTH PASSOVER ; OUR LORD’S PASSION; AND THE ACCOMPANYING 
EVENTS UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 


Time: Two days. 


§ 133. The Passover Meal. Contention among the T welve.—Jerusalem. 


Evening introducing the Sixth Day of the Week. 


Matra. XX VI. 20. Marx XIV. 17. Luxe XXII. 14-18. 24-30. 
4 νι ’ ~ - NS , , κι Ἀν » fd oR ¢ 9 
20 Ovias δὲ γενομένης 17 Καὶ ὀψίας γενομένης 14 Καιοτε ἐγένετο ἡ woe, 
ἀνέκειτο μετὰ τῶν δώς ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν δώ- ἀνέπεσε καὶ οἱ δώδεκα 
δεκα. ' δεκα. ἀπόστολοι σὺν αὐτῷ. 


A 
15 Καὶ εἶπε πρὸς αὐτούς" 
. ὦ TaN ? ~ ‘ ? ~ 3. Ὁ ἃ \ ~ ~ bad 
16 ἐπιϑυμίᾳ ἐπεϑύμησα τοῦτο τὸ πάσχα φαγεῖν μεϑ' ὑμῶν πρὸ τοῦ μὲ παϑεῖν"" λὲ- 
A tw σ 3 , 5 Α [4 3 > ~ @ 4 λ On > ~ 1 , 
yo γὰρ ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐκέτι οὐ μὴ φάγω ἐξ αὐτοῦ, ἕως ὁτου πληρωϑῇ ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ 
- ~ ~ 4A 
17 τοῦ Geov. Καὶ. δεξάμενος ποτήριον εὐχαριστήσας εἶπε" λάβετε τοῦτο καὶ δια- 
“Ὁ Ἁ ~ a A ~ ~ 
18 μερίσατε ἑαυτοῖς " λέγω γὰρ ὑμῖν, OTL OV μὴ πίω ἀπὸ τοῦ γεννήματος τῆς ἀμπέ- 
Lov, ἕως ὅτου ἡ βασιλεία τοῦ ϑεοῦ ἔλϑῃ.--- 
> , A > a , 5 3 ~ A ’ 3 - ~ ¥ ’, 
24 Ἐγένετο δὲ καὶ φιλονεικία ἐν αὐτοῖς, τὸ τίς αὐτῶν δοκεῖ εἶναι μείζων. 
id 4 2 κὰν « » ~ > ως , 3 - A GF * 2 , 
25 ὋὉ δὲ εἶπεν αὑτοῖς" οἱ βασιλεῖς τῶν ἐϑνῶν κυριδύουσιν αὑτῶν, καὶ οἱ ἐξουσιά- 
) 3 - > ? Se «ς - A > 7 > | ee > Cc ~ 
26 Cortes αὐτῶν εὐεργέται καλοῦνται. “Ὑμεῖς δὲ οὐχ ovtme’ ἀλλ ὁ μείζων ἐν ὑμῖν 
ie, χν Ἐ , δὼ τὰ τὸ 7, ε ε “ , \ Se. ς 
27 γενέσϑω ὡς ὁ νεώτερος, καὶ ὃ ἡγούμενος ὡς ὁ διακονῶν. Tis γὰρ μείζων ; ὃ 
i = ς ᾿ ~ 
ἀνακείμενος, ἢ ὃ διακονῶν ; οὐχὶ ὁ ἀνακείμενος ; ἐγὼ δὲ εἰμι ἐν μέσῳ ὑμῶν ὡς 
28 ὁ διακονῶν. Ὑμεῖς δέ ἐστε οἱ διαμεμενηκότες μετ᾽ ἐμοῦ ἐν τοῖς πειρασμοῖς μου" 
, ~ 
2930 ' κἀγὼ διατίϑεμαι ὑμῖν, καϑὼς διέϑετό μοι ὁ πατήρ μου βασιλείαν, ' iva ἐσθίητε 
A , > ie ~ 3 ~ , ‘ , 2: Ὲ , 
καὶ πίνητε ἐπι τῆς τραπέζης μου ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ μου καὶ καϑίσησϑε ἐπὶ Poovey 
A ~ 
κρίνοντες τὰς δώδεκα φυλὰς tov ᾿Ισραήλ. 


142 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS [Parr VIII. 





§ 134. Jesus washes the feet of his Disciples —Jerusalem. 


Evening introducing the Sixth Day of the Week. 


Jonn XIII. 1—20, 
4 4 ~ ε ~ ~ ᾽ 4 ~ ~ 
1 Προ δὲ τῆς ἑορτῆς τοῦ πάσχα εἰδὼς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, ὅτι ἐλήλυϑεν αὑτοῦ ἡ ὥρα, ἵνα 
- 3 - , , a 
μεταβῇ ἐκ TOV κόσμου τούτου πρὸς τὸν πατέρα, ἀγαπήσας τοὺς ἰδίους τοὺς ἐν 
ἣν , > , ee ~ 
2 τῳ xooum εἰς τέλος ἠγάπησεν αὐτούς. Καὶ δείπνου γενομένου, tov διαβόλου 
+ , > A . = 3 
ἤδη βεβληκότος εἰς τὴν καρδίαν ᾿Ιούδα Σίμωνος Ἰσκαριώτου, ἵνα αὐτὸν παραδῷ, 
ϑῳ 8 ε» ~ σ - fe ν. 
3! εἰδὼς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, ὅτι πάντα δέδωκεν αὐτῷ ὁ πατὴρ εἰς τὰς χεῖρας καὶ ὅτι ἀπὸ 
- 3~ > ‘4 4 * 
4 ϑεοῦ ἐξῆλϑε καὶ πρὸς τὸν ϑεὸν ὑπάγει, ' ἐγείρεται ἐκ τοῦ δείπνου καὶ τίϑησι 
Ὧν , A 4 ~ 
5 τὰ ἱμάτια, καὶ λαβὼν λέντιον διέζωσεν ἑαυτόν" εἶτα βάλλει ὕδωρ εἰς τὸν νιπτῆρα, 
\ 7 , A ~ 7 ~ t 
καὶ ἤρξατο νίπτειν τοὺς πόδας τῶν μαϑητῶν καὶ ἐχμάσσειν τῷ λεντίῳ, ᾧ ἦν 
, 4 ψ' ~ ἵν 
6 διεζωσμένος. Ἔρχεται οὖν πρὸς Σίμωνι Πέτρον" καὶ λέγει αὐτῷ ἐκεῖνος " κύριε, 
, ~ ἡ ~ ~ 
7 ov pov νίπτεις τοὺς πόδας ; ᾿Α΄πεκρίϑη ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ ὃ ἐγὼ ποιῶ, σὺ 
8 οὐχ vidac » , δὲ 4 ~ Aé: > > Πέ ἊΝ > 4 , = GE 
¢ ἄρτι, γνώσῃ δὲ μετὰ ταῦτα. Ady αὐτῷ Πέτρος" ov μὴ νίψῃς τοὺς 
πόδας μου εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα. ἀπεκρίϑη αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς " ἐὰν μὴ νίψω σε, οὐκ ἔχεις 
, » 3 ~ ᾿ » ~ , , , A ‘ , , 
9 μέρος met Ἐμοῦ. Asyer αὐτῷ Σίμων Πέτρος" κύριε, μή τοὺς πόδας μου μόνον, 
? A 4 ‘ ~ A A Ud , > ~ = ~ € , 
10 ἀλλὰ καὶ tag χεῖρας καὶ τὴν κεφαλήν. Aéye αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς" ὃ λελουμένος 
> , Ν Ἃ 4 , , > >» 4 σ hy . ~ 
οὐ χρείαν ἔχει ἢ τοὺς πόδας νίψασϑαι, add ἔστι καϑαρὸς ὅλος" καὶ ὑμεῖς κα- 
11 ϑαροί ἐστε, GAR οὐχὶ πάντες. "Hider γὰρ τὸν παραδιδόντα αὐτόν" διὰ τοῦτο 
> Δ , » 5 σ Μ᾿ ᾿ ‘ , δ», 
12 εἶπεν" οὐχὶ πάντες καϑαροί ἐστε. “Ὅτε οὖν ἔνιψε τοὺς πόδας αὐτῶν καὶ ἔλαβε 
τὰ ἱμάτια αὑτοῦ, ἀναπεσὼν πάλιν εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " γινώσκετε, τί πεποίηκα ὑμῖν ; 
« ~ ~ ἢ « , + re , A 4 , » PR” , 
13 Ὑμεῖς φωνεῖτε we’ ὁ διδάσκαλος καὶ ὃ κύριος, καὶ καλῶς λέγετε" εἰμι γάρ. 
14 Εἰ οὖν ἐγὼ ἔνιψα ὑμῶν τοὺς πόδας, ὁ κύριος καὶ ὁ διδάσκαλος, καὶ ὑμεῖς ὀφείλετε 
15 ἀλλήλων νίπτειν τοὺς πόδας. “ὑπόδειγμα γὰρ ἔδωκα ὑμῖν, ἵνα, καϑὼς ἐγὼ 
= ise , οἰ τὰ we ~ > ‘ > ¥ , Sa > » ~ 
16 ἐποίησα ὑμῖν, καὶ ὑμεῖς ποιῆτε. “Anny ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, οὐκ ἔστι δοῦλος μείζων 
17 τοῦ κυρίου αὑτοῦ, οὐδὲ ἀπόστολος μείζων τοῦ πέμψαντος αὐτόν. Εἰ ταῦτα 
» , ,» 7 24 ~ ποῖ, > 4 , ¢ # , «8 
18 οἴδατε, μακάριοί ἐστε, ἐὰν ποιῆτε αὐτά. Ov περὶ πάντων ὑμῶν λέγω" ἐγὼ οἶδα 
~ e ’ - Α » 
οὃς ἐξελεξάμην" ἀλλ ἵνα ἡ γραφὴ πληρωϑῇ " ὁ τρώγων μετ ἐμοῦ τὸν ἄρτον 
ψ, - ~ A ~ σ 
19 ἐπῆρεν ἐπὶ ἐμὲ τὴν πτέρναν αὑτοῦ. ᾿Α΄πάρτι λέγω ὑμῖν πρὸ τοῦ γενέσϑαι, ἵνα, 
σ " , σ δ᾽ "“ ‘ a ἢ λέ ΒΕ RE " λ , 
20 ὅταν γένηται, πιστεύσητε, ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι. “Anny ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν" ὁ λαμβάνων, 
ἐάν τινα πέμψω, ἐμὲ λαμβάνει, ὁ δὲ ἐμὲ λαμβάνων λαμβάνει τὸν πέμψαντά με. 





πε νυν να 


ee 





§ 135. Jesus points out the Traitor. Judas withdraws.—Jerusalem. 
Evening introducing the Sixth Day of the Week, 
Marra. XX VI. 21—25. Marx XIV. 18—21. Luxe XXI1I.21—23. Jonn XIII. 21—35. 


21 Kai ἐσϑιόντων 18 Kai ἀνακειμένων 21 Ταῦτα εἰπὼν ὁ 
αὐτῶν εἶπεν" ἀ- αὐτῶν καὶ ἐσϑιόν- Ἰησοῦς ἐταράχϑη 
μὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτε τῶν εἶπεν ὁ ᾽]η- τῷ πνεύματι καὶ 
εἷς ἐξ ὑμῶν παρα- σοῦς" ἀμὴν λέγω 31 Πλὴν ἰδού, ἡ χεὶρ ἐμαρτύρησε καὶ 
δώσει με. ὑμῖν, ὅτι εἷς ἐξ τοῦ παραδιδόν- εἶπεν" ἀμὴν ἀμὴν 








® 18, Ps, 41, 10. 





3 





δὲ 134, 135.] UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 143 
MATTH. XXVI. MARK XIV. LUKE XXII. JOHN XII. 

ὑμῶν παραδώσει tog μὲ met ἐμοῦ ἐ- λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι εἷς 

᾿ μὲ, ὁ ἐσθίων με πὶ τῆςτραπέζης.-- ἐξ ὑμῶν παρα- 

22 Καὶ λυ- 1ιϑἐμοῦ. Οἱ δὲ ἤρ- 238 Καὶ αὐτοὶ ἤρ- 323 δώσει με. Ἔβλε- 

πούμενοι σφύδρα ἕαντο λυπεῖσϑαι ἕαντο συζητεῖν mov οὖν εἰς ἀλλή- 


23 


25 


28 
29 


ἤρξαντο λέγειν ad- καὶ λέγειν αὐτῷ πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς τὸ λους οἱ μαϑηταί, 

~ @ 5 τ > φ' Ἂ ’ , » a > > > , ‘ 
τῷ ἕχαστος ad- εἷς xa? εἷς" μήτι τίς ἄρα εἴη ἐξ αὖ- ἀπορούμενοι. περὶ 
Tov’ μήτι ἐγώ ἐγώ; καὶ ἄλλος᾽ τῶν ὁ τοῦτο μέλ- 28 τίνος λέγει. Ἦν 


> , , > ’ , ert. , ᾿  φ: 
εἶμι, κύριδ ; μήτι ἐγώ; λων πράσσειν.--- δὲ ἀνακείμενος εἷς 
ἐκ τῶν μωαϑητῶν 
~ ~ ~ ~ a ~ 
24 αὐτοῦ ἐν τῷ κόλπῳ τοῦ ᾿]ησοῦ, ὃν ἠγάπα 6 ᾿Ιησοῦς. Neva 
᾿- & z 
οὖν τούτῳ Σίμων Πέτρος πυϑέσϑαι, τίς ἂν εἴη, περὶ ov 
A ~ 4 ~ ~ ~ 
25 λέγει. ᾿Επιπεσὼν δὲ ἐκεῖνος ἐπὶ τὸ στῆϑος τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ λέγει 
MATTH. XXVI. MARK XIV, αὐτῷ᾽ κύριε, τίς ἐστιν ; 
A ~ 
Ὁ δὲ ἀποχριϑεὶς εἶπεν" 20 Ὁ δὲ. ἀποκριϑεὶς εἶπεν 26 4΄ποχρίνεται 6 ᾿Τησοῦς" 
ὁ ἐμβάψας per ἐμοῦ ἐν αὐτοῖς" εἷς ἐκ τῶν δώ- 
τῷ τρυβλίῳ τὴν χεῖρα, δεκα, ὁ ἐμβαπτόμενος 
©. ἃ / , ε S23) ww Ὁ A , 
οὗτός μὲ παραδώσει. O μετ ἐμοῦ εἰς τὸ τριβλίον. 
Α eA ~ > , « 4 «A ~ > , 
μὲν υἱὸς tov ἀνθρώπου 21 O μὲν υἱὸς tov ἀνϑρώ- 
ὑπάγει, καϑὼς γέγρα- mov ὑπάγει, καϑὼς γέ- 


ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν, ᾧ ἐγὼ βά- 
ψας τὸ ψωμίον, ἐπιδώ- 
σω.--- 
LUKE XXII. 
22 Kai 6 μὲν υἱὸς τοῦ ἀν- 


Α ~ 28 > ~ 
πται περὶ αὐτοῦ" οὐαὶ αὐτοῦ" 
> A A ~ > ld 
ova, δὲ τῷ ἀνϑρώπῳ 
δὲ ἢ 3: Sve tes ~ 
exetv@, Ob οὐ ὃ υἱὸς TOV 
ἀνθρώπου παραδίδοται" 

A ed > τ΄ν 2 3 
καλὸν ἥν αὑτῷ, εἰ οὐκ 


Α ~ > , 3 , 
de τῷ avPowng ἐκείνῳ, 
: ~ 
δι᾿ οὗ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀ»- 
ϑρώπου παραδίδοται" 

\ MI ϑεν τ ὧν 3 > 
καλὸν HY αὑτῷ, εἰ οὐκ 


γραπται περὶ 


, 
ϑρώπου πορεύεται κατὰ 
A t 
τὸ ὡρισμένον" πλὴν οὐ- 
On ~ > , 3 ’ 
αἱ τῷ ἀνϑρώπῳ ἐκείνῳ, 
τ 
δι᾿ οὐ παραδίδοται.--- 


ἐγεννήϑη 6 ἄνθρωπος ἐγεννήϑη ὁ ἄνϑρωπος ἐκεῖνος. 
ἐχεῖνος. ᾿“΄ποκριϑεὶς δὲ 26 —xai ἐμβάψας 
ἸΙούδας, ὃ παραδιδοὺς αὐτόν, εἶπε" τὸ ψωμίον δίδωσιν ᾿Ιούδᾳ Σίμωνος 
, 3 5 « ’ , > ~ > / 4 ‘ ν ἃ ’ 
μήτι ἐγὼ εἰμι, ῥαββί ; λὲγει αὑτῷ" 27 ἸΙσκαριώτῃ. Καὶ μετὰ to ψωμίον, 
σὺ εἶπας. 


JOHN XIIl. 


Li > ~ > > ~ « ~ 
Tote εἰςῆλϑεν εἰς ἐκεῖνον ὃ σατανᾶς. 
, + J ~ “- a ~ 
λέγει ovy αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς" ὃ ποιεῖς, 

’ , ~ Α 2 ‘ ow ~ 3 , A | a 2 δ ἘΞ a 
ποίησον τάχιον. Τοῦτο δὲ οὐδεὶς ἔγνω τῶν ἀνακειμένων, πρὸς τί εἶπεν αὐτῷ. 

4 A Io ἡ 3 A A , 22 , σ , > ~ ¢3 
Τινὲς γὰρ ἐδόκουν, ἐπεὶ τὸ γλωσσόκομον εἶχεν ὁ ᾿Ιούδας, ὅτι λέγει αὐτῷ ὃ Ἴη- 

~ t / I ~ ~ σ Α Lend 
σοῦς" ἀγόρασον, ὧν χρείαν ἔχομεν εἰς THY ἑορτήν, ἢ τοῖς πτωχοῖς ἵνα εὶ δῷ. 


30 31 “αβὼν οὖν τὸ ψωμίον ἐκεῖνος εὐθέως ἐξῆλϑεν. ἦν δὲ νύξ, Ὅτε οὖν ἐξῆλϑε, 


32 
33 


34 
35 


λέγει 6 ᾿Ιησοῦς" νῦν ἐδοξάσϑη ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, καὶ ὁ Geog ἐδοξάσϑη ἐν 
- - Α ~ 
αὐτῷ. Εἰ ὁ ϑεὸς ἐδοξάσϑη ἐν αὐτῷ, καὶ ὁ ϑεὸς δυξάσει αὐτὸν ἐν ἑαυτῷ, καὶ 
» 3 , > , , ww A 3 9 ~ > , ’ Α 
εὐθὺς δοξάσει αὐτόν. Texvia, ἔτι μικρὸν wed ὑμῶν εἶμι" ζητήσετέ με, καὶ κα- 
‘ oF , ΦΨ 4 ἐ “7 4. ἀρ ἃ, > , 3 ~ a 
ϑὼς εἶπον τοῖς Ιουδαίοις" ort, omov vaaya ἐγώ, ὑμεῖς οὐ Ovvacds ἐλϑεῖν, καὶ 
- A ~ σ -“᾿ 
ὑμῖν λέγω ἄρτι. ᾿Εντολὴν καινὴν δίδωμι ὑμῖν, ἵνα ἀγαπᾶτε ἀλλήλους, καϑὼς 
- A ~ ~ 
ἠγάπησα ὑμᾶς, ἵνα καὶ ὑμεῖς ἀγαπᾶτε ἀλλήλους. “Ex τούτῳ γνώσονται πάντες, 
΄ 94% » 3 A ie 4 a 159 , 
ὅτι ἐμοῖ μαϑηταῖ ἐστε, ἐὰν ἀγάπην ἔχητε ev ἀλλήλοις. 


144 


THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS 


[Parr VIII. 





§ 136. Jesus foretells the fall of Peter, and the dispersion of the Twelve.—Jerusalem. 


Evening introducing the Sixth Day of the Week. 
Joun XIII. 36—38. 
388 Agvet αὐτῷ Σίμων Πέτρος" κύριε, ποῦ ὑπάγεις ; ἀπεκρίϑη αὐτῷ ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς 
σ΄ « , > , , ~ ? ~ 7 Wd ἃ ; 
oop il diddy Svracat μοι νῦν ἀκολουθῆσαι, ὕστερον δὲ wap sift > 9 μοι. 
37 Aéyer αὐτῷ Πέτρος" κύριε, διὰ τί οὐ δύναμαί σοι ne ct oa ἄρτι; τὴν ψυχήν 


μου ὑπὲρ σοῦ ϑήσω. 
Matra. XXVI. 31—35. 

31 Tore λέγει αὐτοῖς 6 ᾿]ησοῦς" πάντες 
4 ~ va , > > ‘ > 
ὑμεῖς σχανδαλισϑήσεσϑε ἕν ἔμοι ev 
τῇ νυλτὶ ταύτῃ. γέγραπται γάρ" 
πατάξω τὸν ποιμένα, καὶ διασκχορ- 
πισϑήσεται τὰ πρόβατα τῆς ποίμνης. 

32 Μετὰ δὲ τὸ ἐγερϑῆναί μὲ προάξω 

33 ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν. ᾿Ζ΄ποκχρι- 
ϑεὶς δὲ 6 Πέτρος εἶπεν αὐτῷ" εἰ πάν- 

, > , > ‘ 
τες σκατδαλισϑήσυνται ἕν σοὶ, eyo 
οὐδέποτε σκανδαλισϑήσομαι. 


Mark XIV. 27—31. 
27 Καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς 6 ᾿Ιησοῦς ὅτι πάν- 
τὲς σκανδαλισϑήσεσϑε ἐν ἐμοὶ ἐν τῇ 


‘ 
ψυχτὶ ταύτῃ" 


σ , “ἃ 
ὁτι γέγραπται ὃ πα- 


τάξω τὸν ποιμένα, καὶ διασχορπι- 
28 σϑήσεται τὰ πρόβατα. ᾿Αλλὰ μετὰ 
τὸ ἐγερϑῆναί μὲ προάξω ὑμᾶς εἰς 


29 τὴν Γαλιλαίαν. 


Ὃ δὲ Πέτρος ἔφη 


αὐτῷ" καὶ εἰ πάντες σκανδαλισϑή- 
3 > > 3 , 
σονται, ἀλλ οὐκ ἐγὼ. 


Luke XXII. 31---38. 


31 Εἶπε δὲ 6 κύριος " 
32 σιγιάσαι ὡς τὸν σῖτον" 
33 σου" 


MATTH ΧΧΥ͂Ι. MARK XIV. 


καὶ σύ ποτε ἐπιστρέψας στήριξον τοὺς ἀδελ φούς σου. 
χύριε, μετὰ σοῦ ἕτοιμός εἶμι καὶ εἰς φυλακὴν καὶ εἰς Bova 
τον πορεύεσϑαι. 


’; , 3 , € ~ > , i ~ ~ 
Σίμων, Σίμων, ἰδού, ὁ σατανᾶς ἐξῃτήσατο ὑμᾶς τοῦ 
᾽ A a Φ 7, ‘ ~ σ Ἁ > , « ’; 
ἐγώ δὲ ἐδεήϑην περι σοῦ; wa μὴ ξχλείπῃ ἡ πίστις 


Ὁ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτῷ 


JOHN XIII. | 


34 Ἔφη αὐτῷ ὁ ᾽1η- 30 Kat λέγει αὐτῷ ὁ 34°O δὲ εἶπε' λέγω 88᾽ 4πεχρίϑη αὐτῷ 


᾿Ιησοῦς" ἀμὴν λέ- 
yO σοι, ὅτι σὺ σή- 
μέρον ἐν τῇ νυχτὶ 
, 4s a 4 
ταύτῃ πριν ἢ δὶς 
ἀλέκτορα . φωνῆ- 
σαι τρὶς ἀπαρνή- 


cove’ ἀμὴν λέγω 
σοι, ὅτι ἐν ταύτῃ 
τῇ νυχτὶ πρὶν ἀ- 
λέκτορα φωνῆσαι 
τρὶς ἀπαρνήσῃ με. 
35 “έγει αὐτῷ ὁ Πέ- 
τρος᾽ κἂν δέῃ μὲ 31 σῃ me. 
σὺν σοὶ ἀποϑα- 
γεῖν, οὐ μή σε ἀπ- 
ἀρνήσομαι. ὁμοί- 
ὡς καὶ πάντες οἱ μαϑηταὶ εἶπον. 


cot, Πέτρε, ov μὴ 
φωνήσει σήμερον 
ἀλέκτωρ, πρὶν ἢ 
τρὶς ἀπαρνήσῃ μὴ 
εἰδέναι pe. 


Ὃ δὲ ἐκ περισσοῦ ἔλεγε" 
μᾶλλον ἐάν με δέῃ συναποϑα- 
γεῖν σοι, οὐ μή αε ἀπαρνήσομαι. ὡφαύτως δὲ καὶ πάντες ἔλεγον. 


LUKE XXII. 

Ἢ Ἴ ~ σ > , « ~ » ᾽ ‘ , ν᾽ ¢ ld 

35 Καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " ore ἀπέστειλα ὑμᾶς ἄτερ βαλαντίου καὶ πήρας και ὑποδημά- 
, ΄ , « ‘ yy Ἔ > ἤ ΕἸ, 7 > Pe ‘ πὶ 
36 τῶν, μή τινος ὑστξρήσατε ; ; οἱ δὲ εἶπον οὐδενός. πὲν οὐν αὑτοῖς " ἀλλὰ γῦν 
6 ἔχων βαλάντιον ἀράτω, ὁμοίως καὶ πήραν" καὶ ὁ μὴ ἔχων πωλησάτω τὸ ἱμάτιον 


31 αὑτοῦ καὶ ἀγορασάτω μάχαιραν. 


ὃ ᾿]ησοῦς" τὴν 
ψυχήν σου ὑπὲρ 
ἐμοῦ ϑήσεις ; ἀ- 
μὴν ἀμὴν λέγω σοι, 
οὐ μὴ ἀλέκτωρ 
φωνήσει, ἕως οὗ 
ἀπαρνήσῃ μὲ τρίς. 


Atyo γὰρ ὑμῖν, ὅτι ἔτι τοῦτο τὸ γεγραμμένον 





5. 31 etc. Zech. 13, 7. 








ΝΜ ΥΥΡΥΨΊΥΥ ee Ρυ 


«ἃ. “..Ἀ 


ss 





ΡΝ ee ee a, awn eee re ΠΠΠΠΠ 


i a OO ΡΣ 


aa 


oe ee 


pee. a τα 





sii a ES a 


' 


δῇ 136, 137, 138.] UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 


145 





LUKE XXII 
δεῖ τελεσϑῆναι ἐν ἐμοί, τό" καὶ μετὰ ἀνόμων ἐλογίσϑη᾽ καὶ γὰρ τὰ περὶ ἐμοῦ 
i] μοί, TO" ἃ καὶ μετὰ ἀνόμων ἐλογίσϑη καὶ γὰρ τὰ περὶ ἐμοῦ 
᾿ \ τ : a 
38 τέλος ἔχει. Οἱ δὲ εἶπον" κύριε, ἰδού, μάχαιραι ὧδε δύο. 6 δὲ εἶπεν adzoig’ 
ἱκανόν ἐστι. 


ᾧ 137. The Lord’s Supper.—Jerusalem. 
Evening introducing the Sixth Day of the Week. 
Marx XIV. 22-25. Luxe XXII. 19-20. 
22 


Matrua. XX VI.26-29. 
26 


1 Cor. XI. 23-25. 
19 Καὶ λαβὼν ἄρ- 23 --Ἔλαβεν ἄρτον, 
tov εὐχαριστήσας 24 'καὶ εὐχαριστήσας 


4 
Καὶ ἐσϑιόντων 
αὐτῶν λαβὼν ὁ 


Α 
᾿Ἐσϑιόντων δὲ 
αὐτῶν λαβὼν ὁ 


Dee es: 


27 


2 ~ th. ἂν 
Inoovs τὸν ἄρτον 

‘ > , Υ͂ 
καὶ εὐλογήσας ἕ- 
κλασε καὶ ἐδίδου 
- -" ‘ 
τοῖς μαϑηταῖς και 
εἶπε᾽ λάβετε, φά- 


γετδ᾽ τοῦτό ἐστι. 


τὸ σῶμά μου. 


5 ~ + . > 
Inoovs ἄρτον ev- 
λογήσας 

Nor > ~ 
καὶ ἔδωκεν αὑτοῖς 
καὶ eine’ λάβε- 
ze [φάγετε ]" τοῦ- 
τό ἐστι τὸ σῶμά 


ἔχλασε 


pov. 


Καὶ λαβὼν τὸ 233 Kai λαβὼν τὸ 


ποτήριον καὶ εὖ- 
χαριστήσας ἔδω- 
κεν αὐτοῖς λέγων" 


;᾽ 3 3 ~ 
mists & avtov 


ποτήριον εὐχα- 
ριστήσας ἔδωκεν 
αὐτοῖς, καὶ ἔπιον 
ἐξ αὐτοῦ πάντες. 


~ A ~ 
28 πάντες" τοῦτο γάρ 24 Καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " 


ἔκλασε καὶ ἔδωκεν 
αὐτοῖς λέγων" τοῦ- 
τό ἐστι τὸ σῶμά 
μου τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν 
διδόμενον" τοῦτο 
ποιεῖτε εἰς τὴν ἐ- 
“μὴν ἀνάμνησιν. 


la 
ποτήριον μετὰ TO 
δειπνῆσαι λέγων" 
τοῦτο τὸ ποτήριον 
e \ , 
ἢ καινὴ διαϑηκῆ 
~ ὃ 
ἐν τῷ αἵματί μου, 


ἔκλασε καὶ εἶπε" 
[λάβετε, φάγετε" 


~ ’ 5 Α τ 
τουτό μου ἔστι TO 


Ἂν ve \ ς ~ 
»σωμα τουπερυμῶν 


κλώμενον᾽ τοῦτο 

ποιεῖτε εἰς τὴν ἐ- 
ἅ δ. ἂν 

μὴν ἀνάμνησιν. 


20 Ὡραύτως καὶ τὸ 25 “Ωραύτως καὶ τὺ. 


ποτήριον μετὰ TO: 
δειπνῆσαι λέγων “ 
τοῦτο τὸ ποτήριον 
ἡ καινὴ διαϑήκη 
ἐστὶν ἐν τῷ ἐμῷ. 


5 4 c< 7 ~ an A τ A c Ἁ [2 ~ o - 4 
ἐστι τὸ αἷμά μον, τοῦτό ἐστι τὸ ai- τὸ ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν αἵματι τοῦτο 
~ ~ AN ~ 5 / ~ . 
τὸ τῆς καινῆς δια- μά μου, τὸ τῆς ἐκχυγόμενον. ποιεῖτε, ὁσάκις ἂν 
᾿ ~ ἃ δ, ’ 
ϑήκης, τὸ περὶ καινῆς διαϑηκῆς, πίνητε, εἰς τὴν ἐ- 

~ ‘ at > a 
πολλῶν éxyvvous- τὸ περὶ πολλῶν ἐχχυνόμενον. μὴν ἀνάμνησιψ. 


5 a ~? A , Cag | les > Ν 
vov εἰς ἄφεσιν 25’ Auyy λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι οὐκέτι οὐ μὴ 
πίω ἐκ τοῦ γεννήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου, ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας: 


29 ἁμαρτιῶν. ““ἔγω 


1 


δι τὰν σ 5 A 

δὲ ὑμῖν, ott ov uy 
3 

πίω ἀπάρτι ἐκ 


5 ’ σ ἈΠ 1 4 ’ A 5 ~ , ~ ~ 
ἐχείνης, ὁταν αὑτὸ TiVO καινὸν ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τοῦ ϑεοῦ. 


τούτου τοῦ γεννήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου, ἕως τῆς ἡμέρας ἐκείνης, 
ὅταν αὐτὺ πίνω WEF ὑμῶν καινὸν ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ τοῦ πατρός μου. ' 


ὃ 138, Jesus comforts his Disciples. The Holy Spirit promised.—Jerusalem. 


Evening introducing the Sixth Day of the Week. 
Joun XIV. 1—31. 

δ , el vamane , , Ὁ , απ ene ee 
My ταρασσέσϑω ὑμῶν ἡ καρδία" πιστεύξτδ8 sis τὸν θέον, καὶ εἰς ἐμὲ πιστεύετε. 
2 Ἔν τῇ οἰκίᾳ τοῦ } αἱ πολλαί εἰσιν" εἰ δὲ μή, εἶπον ἂν ὑμῖ 

ν τῇ οἰκίᾳ τοῦ πατρός μου μοναὶ πολλαί εἰσιν" εἰ δὲ μή, εἶπον ἂν ὑμῖν. πορεύ- 
- aN ~ A ~ 
3 ovat ἑτοιμάσαι τόπον ὑμῖν. Καὶ ἐὰν πορευϑῶ καὶ ἑτοιμάσω ὑμῖν τόπον, πάλιν 
Ἁ ~ ‘ 3 ’ σ 7 4 μὰ 
ἔρχομαι καὶ παραλήψομαι ὑμᾶς πρὸς ἐμαυτόν, ἵνα, ὁπου εἰμὶ ἐγώ, καὶ ὑμεῖς ἦτε. 





“SHR bak one a = 


a 37. Is. 53, 12. 


19 


146 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS [Part VIII. 





4 
6 


7 
8 
9 


10 


31 


JOHN XIV. 

. \o¢ Νι 4 A ~ ~ , 
5 Καὶ ὅπου ἐγὼ ὑπάγω οἴδατε, καὶ τὴν ὁδὸν οἴδατε. Aéyer αὐτῷ Θωμᾶς" κύριε, 
3 » - Α - ᾿ ~ 
οὐχ οἰδαμὲν ποῦ ὑπάγεις, καὶ πῶς δυνάμεθα τὴν ὁδὸν εἰδέναι; Aéys αὐτῷ ὁ 

> ees Beth Kee € «ἀξ Ὁ ΑΨ Sve r. be A 7 δ, ΑΝ 

]ησοῦς " eyo εἶμι ἡ ὅδος καὶ ἡ ἀλήϑεια καὶ ἡ ζωή" οὐδεὶς ἔρχεται πρὸς τὸν πα- 
τέρα, εἰ μὴ δὲ ἐμοῦ. Εἰ ἐγνώκειτέ Με, καὶ τὸν πατέρα μου ἐγνώκχειτε ἄν" καὶ 
ἀπάρτι γισώσκϑεε αὐτὸν καὶ ἑωράκατε αὐτόν. Atya αὐτῷ Φίλιππος" κύριε, 
δεῖξον ἡμῖν τὸν πατέρα, καὶ ἀρκεῖ ἡμῖν. Aéyer αὐτῷ ὁ Ἰησοῦς" τοσοῦτον χρύ- 

ΜΒ = ot ~ A > ” , 

vor ue ὑμῶν εἶμι, καὶ οὐκ ἔγνωχάς με, Φίλιππε; ὁ ἑωρακὼς ἐμὲ ἑώρακε τὸν 
πατέρα, καὶ πὼς σὺ λέγεις - δεῖξον 7 δεῖν τὸν πατέρα ; ; Οὐ πιστεύεις, ὅτι ἐγὼ ἐν 


᾿ τῷ πατρὶ καὶ ὁ πατὴρ ἐν ἐμοί, ἐστι; τὰ ῥήματα, ἃ ἐγὼ λαλῶ ὑμῖν, ἀπὶ ἐμαυτοῦ 


οὐ λαλῶ᾽ 6 δὲ πατήρ, ὃ ἐν ἐμοὶ μένων, αὐτὸς ποιεῖ τὰ ἔργα. Πιστεύετέ μοι, 
rt Ses Ὁ ~ ‘ » ee A a γι > gi , A 7 + Ms | U , 
OTL yO EY τῷ MATOL καὶ ὁ πατὴρ ἕν ἐμοί" εἰ δὲ μή, διὰ TH ἔργα αὑτὰ πιστεύετὲ 
i) > ‘ 7” , ες» es , > "ἊΝ ΜΘ ἃ δον ἢ ~ >  ~ 
μοι. Auny ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ὁ πιστεύων εἰς ἕμδ τὰ ἔργα, ἃ ἐγὼ ποιῶ, κακεῖνος 
i “ 
ποιήσει, καὶ μείζονα τούτων ποιήσει, ὅτι ἐγὼ πρὸς τὸν πατέρα μου πορεύομαι. 
rN oe x >? > ~ > 2 , ~ , ? ath, ee. ‘ 
Καὶ 0;tt ἂν αἰτήσητε ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου, τοῦτο ποιήσω, ἵνα dokacdy ὁ πατὴρ 
15 ἐν τῷ υἱῷ. Edy τι αἰτήσητε ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου, ἐγὼ ποιήσω. ᾿Εὰν ἀγαπᾶτέμε, 
A > A A | Fare. , \ > τι.» ’ ‘ 7, \ 7 , 
τὰς ἐντολὰς τὰς ἐμὰς τηρήσατε. Kai ἔγω ἐρωτήσω τὸν πατέρα, και ἄλλον παρά- 
, c »~ σ , aes > ‘ 39 “ὦ Ἁ ~~ ~ > , 
χλητον δώσει ὑμῖν, ἵνα μένῃ μεϑ' ὑμῶν εἰς τὸν αἰῶνα " TO πνευμα τῆς ἀληϑείας, 
aco? > οὐ iia > ΤῸΝ Ses , γον. ae οἷ 
ὃ ὁ κόσμος ov δύναται λαβεῖν, ort οὐ ϑεωρεῖ avto οὐδὲ γινώσχει αὑτὸ" ὑμεῖς δὲ 
γινώσκετε αὐτό, ὅτι παρ᾽ ὑμῖν μένει καὶ ἐν ὑμῖν ἔσται. Οὐκ ἀφήσω ὑμᾶς ὀρφα- 
~ ng ‘ ~ ~ 
vovs* ἔρχομαι πρὸς ὑμᾶς. Ἔτι μικρόν, καὶ ὁ κόσμος μὲ οὐκέτι ϑεωρεῖ, ὑμεῖς δὲ 
Σ᾽ o ae, ~ we 2 w , ᾽ 7 Fe ~ ec νῷ ’ ¢ ow 
ϑεωρεῖτέ με, ὅτι ἐγὼ ζῶ καὶ ὑμεῖς ζήσεσϑε. Εν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ yroossde ὑμεῖς, 
ὅτι ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ πατρί μου καὶ ὑμεῖς ἐν ἐμοὶ κἀγὼ ἐν ὑμῖν. “O ἔχων τὰς ἐντολάς 
μου καὶ τηρῶν αὐτάς, ἐκεῖνός ἐστιν O ἀγαπῶν μὲ - ὁ δὲ ἀγαπῶν με ἀγαπηϑήσεται 
ὑπὸ τοῦ πατρός oe, καὶ ἐγὼ ἀγαπήσω αὐτὸν καὶ ἐμφανίσω αὐτῷ ἐμαυτόν. Aéyer 
αὑτῷ Ἰούδας, οὐχ ὁ Ἰσκαριώτης" κύριε, τί γέγονεν, ὅτι ἡμῖν μέλλεις ἐμφανίζειν 
σεαυτὸν καὶ οὐχὶ τῷ κόσμῳ ; “Anexoidn ᾿Ιησοῦς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ " ἐάν τις ἀγαπᾷ 
- Α 
με, TOY λόγον μου τηρήσει, καὶ ὁ πατήρ μου ἀγαπήσει αὐτόν, καὶ πρὸς αὐτὸν 
- A 
ἐλευσόμεϑα καὶ μονὴν παρ αὐτῷ ποιήσομεν. ‘O μὴ ἀγαπῶν μὲ τοὺς λόγους 
μου οὐ τηρεῖ" καὶ ὁ λόγος, ὃν ἀκούετε, οὐκ ἔστιν ἐμός, ἀλλὰ τοῦ πέμψαντός μὲ 
96 πατρός. Ταῦτα λελάληκα ὑ ὕμιν παῤ ὑμῖν μένων 16 δὲ παράκλητος, τὸ πνεῦμα 
τὸ ἅγιον, ὃ ὁ πέμψει ὁ πατὴρ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου, ἐκεῖνος ὑμᾶς διδάξει πάντα καὶ 
ὑπομνήσει ὑμᾶς πάντα, ἃ εἶπον ὑμῖν. Εἰρήνην ἀφίημι ὑμῖν, εἰρήνην τὴν ἐμὴν 
δίδωμι ὑμῖν" ov καϑὼς ὁ κόσμος δίδωσιν, ἐγὼ δίδωμι © ὑμῖν: μὴ ταρασσέσθω 
ὑμῶν ἡ καρδία. μηδὲ δειλιάτω. Ἤκούσατε, 0 ότι ἐγὼ εἶπον ὑμῖν" ὑπάγω καὶ ἔρ- 
χομαι πρὸς ὑμᾶς. εἶ ἠγαπᾶτέ Me, ἐχάρητε ἄν, ὅτι πορεύομαι πρὸς τὸν πατέρα᾽ 
ὅτιὁ πατήρ μου μείζων μου ἐστί, Καὶ νῦν εἴρηκα ὑμῖν πρὶν γενέσϑαι, i "νᾶ, ὅταν 
γένηται, πιστεύσητε. Οὐκέτι πολλὰ λαλήσω μεϑ' ὑμῶν" ἔρχεται γὰρ ὁ τοῦ x0- 
σμου ἄρχων, καὶ ἐν ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἔχει οὐδέν - GAR ἵνα γνῷ ὁ κόσμος, ὅτι ἀγαπῶ τὸν 
πατέρα, καὶ καϑὼς ἐνετείλατό μοι ὁ πατήρ, οὕτω ποιῶ" ἐγείρεσϑε, ἄγωμεν 


ἐἐντεῦϑεν. 





4 
. 
: 


= 


reg Ύ Σ 


ἂν 


ον ἐν Δ ἀν ας 


PO ge Pee OTP ee 


δῇ 138, 139.] UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 147 





§ 139. Christ the true Vine. His Disciples hated by the World.—Jerusalem. 
Evening introducing the Sixth Day of the Week. 
Joun XV. 1—27. 
12 Ἐγώ εἰμι ἡ ἄμπελος ἡ ἀληϑινή, καὶ 6 πατήρ μου ὃ γεωργός ἐστι. Πᾶν κλῆ- 
μα ἐν ἐμοὶ μὴ φέρον καρπόν, αἴρει αὐτό, καὶ πᾶν τὸ καρπὸν φέρον, καϑαίρει 
> | ne Δ 4 , at ¢€ ~ | ot a ‘ ‘ , .-“ 
3 avzo, we πλείονα καρπὸν φέρῃ. Ἤδη ὑμεῖς καϑαροί ἐστε διὰ τὸν λόγον, ὃν 
4 λελάληκα ὑμῖν. Μείνατε ἐν ἐμοί, κἀγὼ ἐν ὑμῖν. χκαϑὼς τὸ χλῆμα οὐ δύναται 
καρπὸν φέρειν ἀφ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ, ἐὰν μὴ μείνῃ ἐν τῇ ἀμπέλῳ, οὕτως οὐδὲ ὑμεῖς, ἐὰν μὴ 


> 3 A , 3 , >, δ δ᾽ « ~ ‘ , « , > > A-, 23 Α 
5 ev euot μείνητε. Eyo εἰμι ἡ ἄμπελος, ὑμεῖς τὰ κλήματα. ὃ μένον ἕν ἐμοὶ χάγω 


> eed τ \ | PR ὦ ‘ > ~ > , ~ o/ 
ἐν αὐτῷ, οὗτος φέρει καρπὸν πολύν᾽ ὅτι χωρὶς ἐμοῦ οὐ δύνασϑε ποιεῖν οὐδέν. 
/ ~ 
6 ᾽Εὰν μή τις μείνῃ ἐν ἐμοί, ἐβλήϑη ἔξω, ὡς τὸ κλῆμα, καὶ ἐξηράνϑη, καὶ συνάγου- 
7 σιν αὐτὰ καὶ εἰς πῦρ βάλλουσι, καὶ καίεται. ᾿Εὰν μείνητε ἐν ἐμοὶ καὶ τὰ ῥήματά 
8 μου ἐν ὑμῖν μείνῃ, ὃ ἐὰν ϑέλητε -αἰτήσεσϑε, καὶ γενήσεται ὑμῖν. Ἐν τούτῳ ἐδο- 
‘ s 
ξάσϑη ὃ πατήρ mov, ἵνα καρπὸν πολὺν φέρητε, καὶ γενήσεσϑε ἐμοὶ μαϑηταί. 
9 Καϑὼς ἠγάπησέ με ὁ πατὴρ κἀγὼ ἠγάπησα ὑμᾶς, μείνατε ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ τῇ ἐμῇ. 
ἰγάπησέ μ ὴ jou ὑμᾶς, 
’ ~ ~ ‘ A > \ 4 > 
10 ᾿Εὰν τὰς ἐντολάς μου τηρήσητε, μενεῖτε ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ pov, καϑὼς ἐγὼ τὰς ἐν- 
11 τολὰς τοῦ πατρός μου τετήρηκα καὶ μένω αὐτοῦ ἐν τῇ ἀγάπῃ. Ταῦτα λελάληκα 
c¢ ~ σ ς YS SS Bx? c¢ w ’ a S +¢ ~ ~ 7 3 Α ς 53 ‘ 
12 ὑμῖν, ἵσα ἡ χαρὰ ἡ ἐμὴ, ἐν ὑμῖν μείνῃ καὶ ἡ χαρὰ ὑμῶν πληρωϑῇ. Aven ἐστὶν ἡ ἐντολὴ 
13 i ey, ta ἀγαπᾶτε ἀλλήλους, καϑὼς ἢ ἠγάπησα ὑμᾶς. Μείζονα ταύτης ἀγάπην οὐδεὶς 
14 ἔχει, ἵνα τις τὴν» ψυχὴν αὑτοῦ di» ὑπὲρ τῶν φίλων αὑτοῦ. “Ὑμεῖς φίλοι μου ἐστέ, ἐὰν 
15. ROWE, ὅσα ἐγὼ ἐντέλλομαι ὑ ὑμῖν, Οὐκέτι ὑμᾶς λέγω δούλους, ὅ ὅτι ὁ δρῦλος οὐκ 
οἶδε, τί ποιεῖ αὐτοῦ ὁ κύριος" ὑμᾶς δὲ εἴρηκα φίλους, ὅτι πάντα, ἃ ἤκουσα 
16 παρὰ τοῦ πατρός Hee, ἐγνώρισα ὑμῖν. Οὐχ ὑμεῖς pes ἐξελέξασϑε, ἀλλ ἐγὼ 
ἐξελεξάμην ἱ ὑμᾶς, καὶ ἔϑηκα ὑμᾶς, ἵνα ὑμεῖς ὑπάγητε καὶ καρπὸν φέρητϑ καὶ ὁ 
καρπὸς ὑμῶν μένῃ, ἵνα ὅ,τι ἂν αἰτήσητε τὸν πατέρα ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου, δῷ 
17 18 ὑμῖν. Ταῦτα ἐντέλλομαι ὑμῖν, ἵνα ἀγαπᾶτε ἀλλήλους. Εἰ ὁ κόσμος ὑμᾶς 
= , σ aes ~ cw , > ~ , J ς Υ͂ 
19 μισεῖ, γινώσκετε, ὅτε ἐμὲ πρῶτον ὑμῶν μεμίσηκεν. Εἰ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου ἦτε, ὁ κό- 
es 7 A ~ ? ? > πο ἃ 3 
σμος ἂν τὸ ἴδιον ἐφίλει" ὅτι δὲ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου οὐκ ἐστέ, ἀλλ ἐγὼ ἐξελεξάμην 
20 ὑμᾶς ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου, διὰ τοῦτο μισεῖ ὑμᾶς ὁ κόσμος. Μενημονεύετε τοῦ λόγου, 
c a | Negi > x ~ , ~ , G ~ φιν ΝΟΥ 
οὗ ἐγὼ εἶπον ὑμῖν" οὐκ ἔστι δοῦλος μείζων τοῦ κυρίου αὑτοῦ. εἰ ἐμὲ ἐδίωξαν, 
~ \ 
καὶ ὑμᾶς διώξουσιν" εἰ τὸν λόγον μου ἐτήρησαν, καὶ τὸν ὑμέτερον τηρήσουσιν. 
4 ἢ ~ , Re δὺς \ 16 7 , ¢ > Ne ι 
21 ᾿Αλλὰ ταῦτα παντὰ ποιήσουσιν ὑμῖν διὰ τὸ ὁνομῶ μου, OTL οὐχ οἰδὰσι τὸν 
, , > <b aR: - \ σὰ 2 > ~ ς , TT 5 < ~ ‘ 
22 πέμψαντά με. Et μὴ ἤλθϑον καὶ ἐλάλησα αὑτοῖς, ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἶχον " νῦν δὲ 
Α ~ ~ | ~ 4 
23 πρόφασιν οὐκ ἔχουσι περὶ τῆς ἁμαρτίας αὑτῶν. ὋὉ ἐμὲ μισῶν καὶ τὸν πατέρα 
ων ae ἢ ~ a 4 ΕΣ . 4 
24 μου μισεῖ. Εἰ τὰ ἔργα μὴ ἐποίησα ἐν αὐτοῖς, ἃ οὐδεὶς ἄλλος πεποίηκεν, ἁμαρ- 
~ A A | A 
τίαν οὐκ εἶχον" νῦν δὲ καὶ ἑωράκασι καὶ μεμισήκασι καὶ ἐμὲ καὶ TOY πατέρα μου. 
? γ0Ὁ oA aes [Ὰ ‘ t o §. oe Re SES ad Bia: ΄ , 
25 ᾿Αλλ ἵνα πληρωϑῇ ὁ λόγος ὁ γεγραμμένος ἕν τῷ νόμῳ αὑτῶν" ὃ ὁτι ἐμίσησάν μὲ 
a ~ , ~ 
26 δωρεάν. Ὅταν δὲ dy ὁ παράκλητος, ὃν ἐγὼ πέμψω ὑμῖν παρὰ τοῦ πατρός, τὸ 
- - Ἁ - sty 
πτεῦμα τῆς ἀληϑείας, ὃ παρὰ TOV πατρὸς ἐχκπορεύξται, ἐκεῖνος μαρτυρήσει περὶ 
- ~~ A ~ σ ~ ~ 
27 ἐμοῦ᾽ καὶ ὑμεῖς δὲ μαρτυρεῖτε, ὃτι dm ἀρχῆς pst ἐμοῦ ἐστε. 








5. 25. Ps, 69, 5. 


148 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS [Parr VIII. 





§ 140. Persecution foretold. Further promise of the Holy Spirit. Prayer in the name 
of Christ.—Jerusalem. 


Evening introducing the Sixth Day of the Week. 


Joun XVI. 1—33. 


12 Ταῦτα λελάληκα ὑμῖν, ἵνα μὴ σκανδαλισϑῆτε. ᾿Α΄ποσυναγώγους ποιήσουσιν 
ὑμᾶς ἀλλ᾿ ἔρχεται ὥρα, ἵνα πᾶς ὁ ἀποκτείνας ὑμᾶς δόξῃ λατρείαν προςφέρειν 

- ~ A ~ . ‘ \ 
347m ϑεῷ. Kai ταῦτα ποιήσουσιν, ὅτι οὐκ ἔγνωσαν τὸν πατέρα οὐδὲ ἐμέ. “Alda 
ταῦτα λελάληκα ὑμῖν, ἵνα, ὅταν ἔλϑῃ ἡ ὥρα, μνημονεύητε αὐτῶν, ὅτι ἐγὼ εἶπον 

5 ὑμῖν. ταῦτα δὲ ὑμῖν ἐξ ἀρχῆς οὐκ εἶπον, ὅτι pe® ὑμῶν ἤμην. Νῦν δὲ ὑπάγω 
6 πρὸς τὸν πέμψαντά με, καὶ οὐδεὶς ἐξ ὑμῶν ἐρωτᾷ we’ ποῦ ὑπάγεις ; " ἀλλ᾿ ὅτι 
7 ταῦτα λελάληκα ὑμῖν, ἡ λύπη πεπλήρωκεν ὑμῶν τὴν καρδίαν. ~AI® ἐγὼ τὴν 
ἀλήθεια λέ ΓΕ φῆναι , Oe Smale Ye 9 24 \ ye. ε 
ἤϑειαν λέγω ὑμῖν" συμφέρει ὑμῖν, ἵνα ἐγὼ ἀπέλϑω. sav γὰρ μὴ ἀπέλϑω, ὁ 
παράκλητος οὐκ ἐλεύσεται πρὸς ὑμᾶς " ἐὰν δὲ πορευϑῶ, πέμψω αὐτὸν πρὸς ὑμᾶς. 
8 Καὶ ἐλϑὼν ἐκεῖνος ἐλέγξει τὸν κόσμον περὶ ἁμαρτίας καὶ περὶ δικαιοσύνης καὶ 

7 ἐκ ΘΕ Chee Q 7 
A ye A ¢ ’ , 7 > , > > , ‘ ? 
910 πέρι κρίσεως. Περι ἁμαρτίας μὲν, ὁτι OV πιστεύουσιν εἰς ἐμέ" περι δικαιοσὺ- 
11 wg δέ, ὅτι πρὸς τὸν πατέρα μου ὑπάγω καὶ οὐκέτι ϑεωρεῖτέ με᾽ περὶ δὲ κρίσεως, 
΄ Εν ΑΝ ᾿ - , 7, , » A ” ’ ς »ν > > > 
12 ὁτι ὃ ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου κέἔχριται. “τι πολλὰ ἔχω λέγειν ὑμῖν, ἀλλ οὐ 
13 δύνασϑε βαστάζειν ἄρτι" ὅταν δὲ ἔλϑῃ ἐκεῖνος, τὸ πνεῦμα τῆς ἀληϑείας, δὁδη- 
’ c ~ > ~ A > , ΡῚ Ἁ ’ φΦὶ ν if ~ > 3. ¢ a 
γήσει ὑμᾶς εἰς πᾶσαν τὴν ἀλήϑειαν. οὐ yao λαλήσει ap ἑαυτοῦ, ἀλλ ὅσα ἂν 
14 ἀκούσῃ, λαλήσει, καὶ τὰ ἐρχόμενα ἀναγγελεῖ ὑμῖν. "Exsivog ἐμὲ δοξάσει, ὅτι ἐκ 
15 τοῦ ἐν λήψεται καὶ ἀναγγελεῖ ὑμῖν. Πάντα; ὅσα ἔχει ὃ πατήρ, ἐμά ἐστι" διὰ 
16 τοῦτο εἶπον, ὅτι ἐκ τοῦ ἐμοῦ λαμβάνει καὶ ἀγαγγελεῖ ὑμῖν. ᾿Μαοιρόν, καὶ οὐ 
ϑεωρεῖτε τῇ καὶ πάλιν μικδόν, καὶ ὄψεσϑέ με, ὅτι ὑπάγω πρὸς τὸν πωτέρα. 
17 Εἶπον οὖν ἐκ τῶν μαϑητῶν αὐτοῦ πρὸς. ἀλλήλους" τί ἐστι τοῦτο, ὃ λέγει 
ἡμῖν" μικρόν, καὶ οὐ ϑεωρεῖτέ με" καὶ πάλιν μικρόν, καὶ ὄψεσϑέ με΄ καί: 
σ δι, .Ἃ € , \ \ , a Kins “+e δ υς ἢ Δ , 
18 ὅτι ἐγὼ ὑπάγω πρὸς τὸν πατέρα; “Eleyov οὖν" τοῦτο ti ἐστιν, ὃ λέγει, 
19 τὸ μιχρόν ; οὐκ οἴδαμεν, τί λαλεῖ. Ἔγνω οὖν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, ὅτι ἤϑελον αὐτὸν 
ἐρωτᾷν, καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς" περὶ τούτου ζητεῖτε pet ἀλλήλων, ὅτι εἶπον " μικρόν, 
4 ve ἈΞ ΜΕ" : . , ΄ ἊΨ, , >4 ‘ > A , ς ὦ 
£0 καὶ οὐ ϑεωρεῖτέ me’ καὶ πάλιν μικρόν, καὶ οψεσϑὲ us; “μην ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, 
“ , ‘ J ¢ ~ ς δὲ U , «> ~ δὲ λ , 
ὅτι χλαύσετε καὶ ϑρηνήσετε ὑμεῖς, ὁ δὲ κῦσμος χαρήσεται" ὑμεῖς υπηϑή- 
¢ ~ , σ 

21 σεσϑε, GAR ἡ λύπη ὑμῶν εἰς χαρὰν γενήσεται. “H γυνὴ ὅταν τίκτῃ, λύπην 
ἔχει, ὅτι ἦλθεν ἡ ὥρα αὐτῇρ" ὅταν δὲ γεννήσῃ τὸ παιδίον; οὐκέτι μνημονεύει τῆς 
22 ϑλίψεως διὰ τὴν χαράν, ὅτι ἐγεννήθη ἄνθρωπος εἰς τὸν κόσμον. Καὶ ὑμεῖς οὖν 
λύπην μὲν͵ γῦν ἔχετε" πάλιν δὲ ὄψομαι ὑμᾶς, καὶ χαρήσοται ὑμῶν ἥ καρδία, καὶ 
23 τὴν χαρὰν ὑμῶν» οὐδεὶς αἴρει ἀφ᾽ ὑμῶν. Καὶ ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐμὲ οὐχ ἐρωτή- 
cere οὐδέν. ἀμὴν ἀμὴν λέγω ὑ με ει, ὅσα ἂν αἰτήσητϑ τὸν πατέρα ἐνῚ “τῷ ὀνό- 
24 ματί μου, δώσει ὗ wan Ἕως. ἄρτι dbx ἠτήσατε οὐδὲν ἐν ἐφ ὀνόματί μου" αἰτεῖτε, 
25 nal λήψεσϑε, ἵνα ἧ χαρὰ ὑμῶν i πεπληρωμένῃ. Ταῦτα ἐν παροιμίας λελάληκα 
ὑμῖν" [ain] é ἐόψεται ὥρα, ὅτε οὐκέτι ἐν παροιμίαις λαλήσω ὑμῖν, ἀλλὰ παῤῥησίᾳ 
26 περὶ τοῦ πατρὸς ἀναγγελῶ ὃ ὑμῖν: Ἐν ἐκείνῃ φῇ ἡμέρᾳ ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί “μοῦ αἰτή- 
21 σεσϑε, καὶ οὐ λέγω ὑμῖν, ὅτι ἐγὼ ἐρωτήσω τὸν πατέρα περὶ ὑμῶν" αὐτὸς γὰρ 6 
πατὴρ φιλεῖ ὑμᾶς, ὅτι ὑμεῖς ἐμὲ πεφιλήκατε καὶ πεπιστεύκατε, ὅτι ἐγὼ παρὰ τοῦ 








- —ree o 


ee el 


eee ae 


— , - 


ΠΡΎΜΝΗΝ 
NS i) in le 


" 
᾿ 
Py 


et ital ἴων ee 


r 


7 


a ee eee 


=a 


ao 


ΦΆΘ ΝΜ eee es ee ee 


Ὁ στο Oe ee ee ee ae 


eos te 





§§ 


140, 141.] UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 149 





28 
29 
30 


»"- 


ont aH 


14 


15 
16 
17 
18 
19 
20 


eee ees τα 





JOHN ἅν: “See 

ϑεοῦ ἐξῆλ ϑον. Ἔξῆλθον παρὰ, τοῦ πατρὸς καὶ ἐλήλυϑα εἰς τὸν κόσμο»" πάλιν 
ἀφίημι τὸν κόσμον καὶ πορεύομαι πρὸς τὸν πατέρα.. Atyovow αὐτῷ οἱ μαϑη- 
ταὶ αὐτοῦ" tds, νῦν παῤῥησίᾳ λαλεῖς καὶ παροιμίαν οὐδεμίαν λέγεις. Νῦν οἵ- 
δαμεν, ὅτι οἶδας πάντα καὶ οὐ χρείαν ἔχεις, ἵνα τίς σε ἐρωτᾷ ἐν τούτῳ πιστεύ- 
ousr, ὅτι ἀπὸ ϑεοῦ ἐξῆλϑες. "Anexgidn αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς" ἄρτι πιστεύετε" 
' ἰδού, ἔρχεται ὥρα καὶ νῦν ἐλήλυϑεν, ἵνα σκορπισϑῆτε ἕκαστος εἰς τὰ ἴδια καὶ 
ἐμὲ μόνον ἀφῆτε᾽ καὶ οὐκ εἰμὶ μόνος, ὅτι ὁ πατὴρ pet ἐμοῦ ἐστι. Ταῦτα λελά- 
ληκα ὑμῖν, ἵνα ἐν ἐμοὶ εἰρήνην ἔχητε. ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ ϑλῖψιν ἕξετε" ἀλλὰ ϑαρ- 
σεῖτε, ἐγὼ νενίκηκα τὸν κόσμον. 


§ 141. Christ’s last prayer with his Disciples.—Jerusalem. 
Evening introducing the Sixth Day of the Week. 


| Joun XVII. 1—26. 
4 ~ - ~ ζ ~ . ~ A 
Ταῦτα ἐλάλησεν 6 ᾿Ιησοῦς, καὶ ἐπῆρε τοὺς ὀφϑαλμους αὑτοῦ εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν 
ae,” , 3ὴ ει. ὦ ΞὩ ον \ cr -Φὦ © hee εἴν» 
καὶ ete’ πάτερ, ἐλήλυϑεν ἡ ὥρα" δόξασόν cov τὸν υἱὸν, Wa καὶ ὁ υἱὸς σου 
JI ~ ͵ σ - a 
δοξάσῃ σε"! καϑὼς ἔδωκας αὐτῷ ἐξουσίαν πάσης σαρκός, ἵνα πᾶν, ὃ δέδωκας 
3 ~ , > ~ ‘A > rg σ \ 3 ε >? ΟΝ , , 
αὐτῷ, δώσῃ αὐτοῖς ζωὴν αἰώνιον. Avrn δὲ ἐστιν ἡ αἰώνιος ζωή, wa γινωσκωσί 
δε τὸ ~ 
σε τὸν μόνον ἀληϑινὸν ϑεὸν καὶ ὃν ἀπέστειλας ᾿Ιησοῦν Χριστόν. ᾿Εγώ σε ἐδό- 
> \_~ ~ \ » > , a , , σ , 1 4 ἣν a ἃ 
Saou ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς" τὸ ἔργον ἐτελείωσα, ὃ δέδωκάς μοι ἵνα ποιήσω "! καὶ νῦν δόξα- 
~ ~ = A ~ 
σόν με σύ, πάτερ, παρὰ σεαυτῷ τῇ δόξῃ, ἡ εἶχον πρὸ τοῦ TOY κόσμον εἶναι παρὰ 
~ a ~ . 
of ᾿Εφανέρωσά σου τὸ ὄνομα τοῖς ἀνθρώποις, οὺς δέδωκάς μοι ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου. 
. 5 Ya  ὐνγἷΝἕαΑ ‘ , ᾷ A , ’ ~ 
σοὶ ἦσαν, καὶ ἐμοι αὐτοὺς δέδωκας, καὶ τὸν λόγον cov τετηρήκασι. Nov ἔγνωκαν, 
σ΄ , σ , ᾽ὔ \ πρὶν 8, σ TaN a , , 
ὅτι πάντα, ooa δέδωκάς μοι, παρὰ σοῦ ἐστιν" OTL τὰ ῥήματα, α δέδωκας μοι, 
pt 4A 4 A x ~ σ « ~ ~ 
δέδωκα αὐτοῖς, καὶ αὐτοὶ ἔλαβον καὶ ἔγνωσαν ἀληϑῶς, ott παρὰ cov ἐξῆλϑον, 
σ ~ ~ ~ 
καὶ ἐπίστευσαν, ὅτι σύ μὲ ἀπέστειλας. ᾿Εγὼ περὶ αὐτῶν ἐρωτῶ" οὐ περὶ τοῦ 
᾿ > ΚΗ. \ eis , , σ fs κᾺὉ ‘ ς 98 , , 
κόσμου ἐρωτῶ, ἀλλὰ περὶ ὧν δέδωκας μοι, OTL σοί εἰσι" καὶ TH ἐμὰ πάντα σᾶ 
> 4 4 ΝΑ Ὅθεν. 4 , ke Be | ra 4 ga ν 5AM S ~ , 
ἐστι καὶ τὰ σὰ ἐμά, καὶ δεδόξασμαι ἐν αὑτοῖς. Καὶ οὐκέτι εἰμι ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ, 
; ~ ᾿ σ 
καὶ οὗτοι ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ εἰσί, καὶ ἐγὼ πρός σε ἔρχομαι. πάτερ KYLE, τήρησον αὖ- 
Α ΕἸ - > , , τ ’ , σ a & a Ἁ « ~ a » 
τοὺς ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου, ᾧ δεδωκὰς μοι, wa wow ἕν καϑὼς ἡμεῖς. Οτε ἤμην 
~ a ~ “Ὁ α 
μετ αὐτῶν ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ, ἐγὼ ἐτήρουν αὐτοὺς ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί σου" ove δέδωκάς 
l Sirol \ > ‘ 3 Ὅν ὦν 5» , > XL; ¢ «" ~ > , σ 
μοι ἐφύλαξα, καὶ οὐδεις ἐξ αὐτῶν ἀπώλετο, εἰ μὴ ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀπωλείας, Wey 
“ ἴ ~ A , wv A ~ ~ ~ a 
γραφὴ βληρ θη" vuv δὲ πρὸς O& ἔρχομαι, καὶ ταῦτα λαλῶ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ, ἵνα 
ἔχωσι τὴν χαρὰν τὴν ἐμὴν πεπληρωμένην ἑ ἐν αὑτοῖς. Ἐγὼ δέδωκα αὐτοῖς τὸν 
λόγον σου" καὶ ὁ κόσμος ἐμίσησεν. αὐτούς, ὅτι οὐκ εἰσὶν ἐκ χοῦ κόσμου, καϑὼς 
ἐγὼ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου. Οὐκ ἐρωτῷ, ἵνα ἄρῃς αὐτοὺς ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου, ἀλλ 
ἵνα τηρήσῃς | αὐτοὺς ἐκ τοῦ πογήρον.. Ἔκ τοῦ κόσμου οὐκ εἰσί, καϑὼς ἐγὼ ἐκ 
τοῦ κόσμου οὐκ εἰμί. “Ayiacory αὐτοὺς ἐν τῇ ἀληϑείᾳ σου" ὁ λόγος ὁ σὸς ἀλή- 
yD , A > A 2 , > A , 3 A 3 ;; 3 A 5 
ϑειά ἐστι. Kadwo gue ἀπέστειλας εἰς τὸν κόσμον, κἀγὼ ἀπέστειλα αὐτοὺς εἰς 
4 ’ RO ah te ke See , 3 és it A ᾽ » + ¢ , 
τὸν κόσμον. Καὶ ὑπὲρ αὐτῶν eyo ἁγιάζω ἑμαυτόν, Wa καὶ αὐτοὶ ὦσιν ἡγιασμέ- 
5, ἢ , > ‘ , 43 ~ 7 2444 ‘ ΑἸ ὦ , 
vou ἕν ἀληϑείᾳ. Ov περὶ τούτων δὲ ξρωτῶ μόνον, ἀλλὰ καὶ περι τῶν MLOTEVOD- 





8 12. Comp. Ps. 41, 10 [9]. 109, 8, 17. 


150 


THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS [Parr VIII. 





. 


JOHN XVII. 
‘ ~ wa κι . 
21 τῶν διὰ τοῦ λόγου αὐτῶν εἰς ἐμὲ, ! ἵνα πάντες ἕν ὦσι, καϑὼς σύ, πάτερ, ἐν ἐμοὶ 
> \ ἢ σ΄ 4 ay ὦ x 
κἀγὼ ἐν σοί, ἵνα καὶ αὐτοὶ ἐν ἡμῖν ἕν ὦσιν, ἵνα ὃ κόσμος πιστεύσῃ, ὅτι σύ με 
> 2 = ΩΣ κ \ a ~ τ 
22 ἀπέστειλας. Καὶ ἐγὼ τὴν δόξαν, ἣν δέδωκάς μοι, δέδωκα αὐτοῖς, ἵνα ὦσιν ἕν, 
23 \ ς e. WF 9° 2. JA 49 > ~ a Ate. SD γσ i Meee , 3 
καϑὼς ἡμεῖς ἕν ἐσμεν, ' ἐγὼ ἐν αὐτοῖς καὶ σὺ ἐν ἐμοί, ἵνα ὦσι τετελειωμένοι εἰς 
Ὁ κισ 4 « 7 σ , 2 δὲ \ 3 , > , A 
ἕν, καὶ ἵνα γινώσκῃ ὃ κόσμος, ὅτι OV μὲ ἀπέστειλας καὶ ἠγάπησας αὐτούς, καϑὼς 
> ies We τ, , a Π , , ‘¢ σ Ὁ |e , > τῷ Έ 
24 ἐμὲ ἠγάπησας. Πάτερ, ove δέδωκάς μοι, ϑέλω, ἵνα ὅπου εἰμὶ ἐγώ, κἀκεῖνοι wor 
ϑ' ὦ ~ ὦ ~ ‘ , ‘ νι Ὁ a ” , 4 ee , 
μετ ἐμοῦ, wa ϑεωρῶσι τὴν δόξαν τὴν ἐμήν, ἣν ἔδωκάς μοι, ὅτι ἠγάπησάς μὲ 
25 πρὸ χαταβολῆς κόσμου. Tare δίκαιε, καὶ ὁ. κόσμος σὲ οὐκ ἔγνω" ἐγὼ δέ σε 
‘ 4 7 ~ 
26 ἔγνων, καὶ οὗτοι ἔγνωσαν, ὅτι σύ Us ἀπέστειλας " καὶ ἐγνώρισα αὐτοῖς τὸ ὄνομά 
᾿ 4 a a ~ ~ 
σοὺ καὶ γνωρίσω, ἵνα ἡ ἀγάπη, ἣν ἠγάπησάς με, ἐν αὐτοῖς ἢ κἀγὼ ἐν αὐτοῖς. 


142, The agony in Gethsemane.— Mount of Olives. 


Evening introducing the Sixth Day of the Week. 


Marra. XXVI. 30, Marx XIV. 26, 
36—46. 32—42., 

380 Καὶ ὑμνήσαντες 26 Καὶ ὑμνήσαντες 39 
ἐξῆλϑον εἰς τὸ O- ἐξῆλϑον εἰς τὸ ὅ- 
ρος τῶν ἐλαιῶν.--- ρος τῶν ἑλαιῶν.--- 

..36 Τότε ἔρχεται μετ 32 Καὶ ἔρχονται εἰς 


Luxe XXII. 39-46. 
Καὶ ἐξελϑὼν 1 
ἐπορεύϑη κατὰ τὸ 
ἔϑος εἰς τὸ ὅρος 
τῶν ἐλαιῶν" ἦκο- 


Ταῦτα εἰπὼν ὁ 
> ~ 
Inoovs 
σὺν τοῖς μαϑη- 
ταῖς αὑτοῦ πέραν 





abide 


prov ὃ Ἰ ὠρίον, οὗ τὸ ὄνος. λούϑησαν δὲ αὐ τοῦ χειμάῤῥ ῦ 

αὐτῶ ὃ. In- χωρίον, οὐ τὸ ovo- χειμαῤῥου τοῦ 

~ > , : ἄν - My < a , σ - 

σοῦς εἰς χωρίν pa Τἐϑσημανῆ" τῷ καὶ οἱ μαϑὴ- Κεδρῶν, ὁπου ἣν 
‘ \~ 7, ~ a 

λεγόμενον Γεϑση- 40 ταὶ αὐτοῦ. Γενό- κῆπος, εἰς ὃν εἷς- 


μανῆ, καὶ λέγει 
τοῖς μαϑηταῖς" 
καϑίσατε αὐτοῦ, 
ἕως οὗ ἀπελϑὼν 


, προςεύξωμαι ἐκεῖ. 


4 , ~ 
καὶ λέγει τοῖς μα- 
αὑτοῦ" 
τ 
ads, 
a , 
ἕως προςεύξωμαι. 


ϑηταῖς 
’ 
καϑίσατε 


S 32:3 ~ 
μένος δὲ ἐπι τοῦ 
τόπου εἶπεν αὐ- 
τοῖς᾿ προςεύχε- 


ἤλϑεν αὐτὸς καὶ 
ε 4 Ν - 
οἰμαϑηται αὕτου. 


σϑε μὴ εἰςελϑεῖν εἰς πειρασμόν. 


MARK XIV. 


37 Kai παραλαβὼν τὸν Πέτρον καὶ τοὺς 
δύο υἱοὺς Ζεβεδαίου ἤρξατο λυπεῖσϑαι 
38 καὶ ἀδημονεῖν. Τότε λέγει αὐτοῖς " πε- 
οἰλυπός ἐστιν ἡ ψυχή μου ἕως ϑανά- 


33 Καὶ παραλαμβάνει τὸν Πέτρον καὶ 
᾿Ιάκωβον καὶ ᾿Ιωάννην wed ἑαυτοῦ" 
καὶ ἤρξατο ἐχϑαμβεῖσϑαι καὶ ἀδη- 

34 μονεῖν. Καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς " περίλυπός 

, Tt ‘ > € ’ id , ‘ , 
του" μείνατε ὧδὲ καὶ ἔστιν ἡ ψυχὴ μου ἕως ϑαναάτου᾽ μείνα- 
- ~ τ - ᾿ 
γρηγορεῖτε pet ἐμοῦ. τε ὧδε καὶ γρηγορεῖτε. LUKE ΧχΙ. ἢ 
- ᾿ ‘ 
39 Καὶ προελϑὼν μικρὸν 35 Kal προελϑὼν μικρὸν 41 Καὶ αὐτὸς ἀπεσπάσϑη 
~ ~ Ἁ »»γ > ~ « ‘4 
ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ πρόξωπον ai- ἔπεσεν ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς καὶ ἀπὶ αὐτῶν wget λίϑου 
~ 3 , ‘ ‘ ‘ , 
τοῦ «προφευχόμενος καὶ προφηύχετο, ἵνα, εἰ Sv- Body, καὶ Deis τὰ γόνα- 
, 
λέγων "᾿ νατόν ἐστι, παρέλϑῃ ἀπὶ 42 τὰ προςζηύχετο ' λέγων᾽ 
36 αὐτοῦ ἡ ὥρα. Καὶ ἔλε- 
> ~ ε Ul 
γεν" ἀββᾶ, ὁ πατὴρ, 
πάντα δυνατά σοι" παρ- 
ἕνεγκε τὸ ποτήριον ἀπὶ 


πάτερ, εἰ βούλει παρε- 
ψεγκεῖν τὸ ποτήριον τοῦ- 
τὸ ἀπ᾿ ἐμοῦ" πλὴν μ᾽ 


, > 
πάτερ μου, εἰ Sv- 
νατόν ἐστι, παρελϑέτω 
ἀπὶ ἐμοῦ τὸ ποτήριον 





re 


ee gt ee 
- 


pe eS ae ee Le 


a σι φος 
a 


§¢ 142, 143.] UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 151 





MATTH. XXVI._ MARK XIV. LUKE XXII. 


τοῦτο᾽ πλὴν οὐχ ὡς ἐμοῦ τοῦτο" 


ἐγὼ ϑέλω, ἀλλ ὡς ov. ἐγὼ ϑέλω, 
- 3 , Oi, Mod αὶ 
44 pavov ἑνισχυῶν avtor. 
προφηύχετο. ἐγένετο δὲ ὁ 


ἀλλ οὐ τί τὸ ϑέλημά μου, ἀλλὰ τὸ 
ἀλλὰ τί σύ. 13 σὸν γενέσϑω. ‘Agr δὲ 

ο΄ αὐτῷ ἄγγελος. ἀπ᾿ οὐ- 
Καὶ γενόμενος ἐν ἀγωνίᾳ ἐκεενέστερον 
ἱδρὼς αὐτοῦ ὡςεὶ ϑρόμβοι αἵματος κατα- 
βαίνοντες ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν. 


: r 3 y 4 ~ 
40 Καὶ ἔρχεται ~ πρὸς 37 Καὶ ἔρχεται καὶ εὑρί- 45 Καὶ ἀναστὰς ἀπὸ τῆς 


ε > , ~ 3: ‘ \ 
τοὺς μαϑητὰς καὶ εὑ- ᾿σχει αὐτοὺς καϑεύδον. προςευχῆς, ELOWY πρὸς 
~ A e ~ 
ρίσκει αὐτοὺς uadevdor- τας, καὶ λέγειτῷ Πέτρῳ: τοὺς μαϑητὰς [αὑτοῦ], 
ι , ~ , , ὔ : > τ 3 A ε ΄ 
~ rag, καὶ λέγει τῷ Πέξ Σίμων, καϑεύδεις ; οὐκ ευρὲν αὐτοὺς κχοιμῶωμέ- 
σ΄ 4 ~ , 
TOM" οὕτως οὐκ ἰσχύς ἴσχυσας μίαν ὥραν γρης vovg ἀπὸ τῆς λύπης" 


σατε μίαν ὥραν γρηγορῆ- 38 γορῆσαι; 


Ι 4 5 > a , 
καὶ ELMEV αὐυτοις TL 


a 


Γρηγορεῖτε 4 


41 oat pet guov;-Ienyo- καὶ προςφεύχεσϑε, iva uy καϑεύδετε; ἀναστάντες 


~ ‘ , 59. δὴν 
ρεῖτε καὶ προῤευχεσϑε, εἰςελϑητε 
j ν ΄ 4 
ἵνα μὴ εἰρέλϑητε εἰς σμόν᾽ τὸ 
πειρασμόν᾽ τὸ μὲν πνεῦ- πρόϑυμον, 
2 4A \ ’ 
μὰ πρόϑυμον, ἡ δὲ σὰρξ 39 ἀσϑενής. 
42 ἀσϑενής. Πάλιν ἐκ δευ- 
zégov ἀπελϑὼν προφηύξατο λέγων" 
πάτερ μου, εἰ οὐ δύναται τοῦτο τὸ 
, ~ pape > ~ 5.4 A 
ποτήριον παρελϑεῖν Am ἕμου, ἕαν μὴ 
3... ἃ ’ ’ A » ’ 
αὐτὸ πίω, γενηϑήτω τὸ ϑέλημα σου. 
43 Καὶ ἐλϑὼν τεὑρίσκει αὐτοὺς πάλιν 


εἰς πειρα-Ἦ προφεύχεσϑε, ἵνα μὴ 
μὲν πνεῦμα εἰςέλϑητε εἰς πειρα- 
ἡ δὲ σὰρξ σμόν. ᾿ 
Καὶ πάν. 

ἀπελϑὼν προφηύξατο τὸν αὐτὸν λό- 


τ 
40 γον εἰπών. Καὶ ὑποστρέψας εὗρεν 


3 \ , , τ᾿ 3 ‘ 
αὑτοὺς πάλιν καϑεύδοντας " your γὰρ 

£2 4 ᾽ ~ , 4 
οἱ ὑφϑαλμοι αὑτῶν βεβαρημένοι, και 
οὐκ ἤδεισαν, τί αὐτῷ ἀποκριϑῶσι. 


καϑεύδοντας" ἦσαν γὰρ αὐτῶν οἱ ὀφϑαλμοὶ βεβαρημέ- 
44 γοι. Καὶ ἀφεὶς αὐτοὺς ἀπελϑὼν πάλιν προςηύξατο 


5 , A tae , 5 , 
é% τρίτου τὸν αὑτὸν hoyor εἰπὼν. 
45. Τότε. ἔρχεται πρὸς τοὺς μαϑητὰς 
€ ~ A , > -“ ’ A 
αὑτοῦ καὶ λέγει αὑτοῖς xadevders TO 
lj 
λοιπὸν καὶ ἀναπαύεσϑε ; ἰδού, ἤγγικεν 
ς 2 A « a ~ > , 
ἡ ὥρα, καὶ ὃ viog Tov ἀνϑρωῶπου 
παραδίδοται: εἰς χεῖρας ἁμαρτωλῶν. 
46. Ἐγείρεσϑε, ἄγωμεν" ἰδού, ἤγγικεν ὁ 
παραδιδούς Με: 


41 Καὶ ἔρχεται τὸ τρίτον καὶ λέγει αὐὖ- 
~ , A A \ ~3 , 
toig’ καϑεύδετε τὸ λοιπὸν καὶ ἄνα- 
παύεσϑε; ἀπέχει" ἦλϑεν ἡ ὥρα" 
Cy ae , ΑἹ ὅδ ~ 9 , 
ἰδοῦ, παραδίδοται ὃ υἱὸς tov ἀνϑρώ- 
mov εἰς τὰς χεῖρας τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν. 
42 Ἐχγείρεσϑε, ἄγωμεν" ἰδού, ὁ ste 
δούς μὲ ἤγγικε... eye i 


ὃ 143. Jesus betrayed, and made prisoner.—Mount of Olives. 


Evening introducing the Sixth Day of the Week. 


Joun XVIII. 2—12. 


2 "Hider δὲ καὶ ᾿Ιούδας, ὁ παραδιδοὺς αὐτόν, τὸν τόπον, ὅτι πολλάκις συνήχϑη ὁ 


3 ~ 5 ~ κ - ~ ¢ ~ € 
3 ᾿]ησοῦς ἕκεῖ μετὰ τῶν μαϑητῶν αὐτου. 


Fg + r ~ 
O οὖν ᾿Ιούδας λαβὼν τὴν σπεῖραν καὶ 


-" 7 4 § « ~ 
ἐκ τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ Φαρισαίων ὑπηρέτας ἔρχεται ἐκεῖ μετὰ φανῶν καὶ λαμπά- 


4 Ψ 
Sav καὶ ὁπλῶν. 


152 


THE FOURTH PASSOVER: AND THE EVENTS [Parr VIL 





' Marra. ΧΧΥ͂Ι. 47—58. Luxe XXII. 47—53. 
47 Kai ἔτι αὐτοῦ λα- 48 
 λοῦντος, ἰδού, ᾿Ιούδας, 
εἷς τῶν δώδεκα, ἦλϑε, 
καὶ μεῖ. αὐτοῦ ὄχλος 
πολὺς μετὰ μαχαιρῶν 
καὶ ξύλων ἀπὸ τῶν ἀρ- 
χιερέων καὶ πρεσβυτέ- 

ρῶν τοῦ λαοῦ. ' 


Mark XIV. 43—82. 
Kai svdéog, ἔτι αὐ- 47 
τοῦ λαλοῦντος, παραγί-. 
3 , τ x ~ 
veto Ιουδας, εἷς ὧν τῶν 
δώδεκα, καὶ μετ αὐτοῦ 
» ‘ 4 
Οχλος πολὺς μετὰ μᾶ- 
χαιρῶν καὶ ξύλων παρὰ 
τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν γραμ- 
ματέων καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων. 


τος, ἰδοὺ ὄχλος, καὶ ὁ 
λεγόμενος ᾿Ιούδας, εἷς 
τῶν δώδεκα, προήρχετο 
αὐτούς --- 


JOHN ΧΥΠΙ. 
5 ~ ¥ 3o δ , A > , Pe) > , > A > ~ ’ 
4 ᾿]ησοῦς οὖν, εἰδὼς πάντα τὰ ἐρχόμενα ἐπὶ αὐτόν, ἐξελϑὼν εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " τίψα 
ὅ ζητεῖτε; ‘Anexgidyoar αὐτῷ " ᾿]Ιησοῦν τὸν ΝΝαζωραῖον. λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς - 
ee ee ε ὔ A τ , "ἃ + ‘ a. > > ~ c 3 
6 ἐγώ εἰμι. εἱστήκει. δὲ καὶ Ἰούδας, ὁ παραδιδοὺς αὐτόν, μετ αὐτῶν. Ὡς οὖν 
~ σ ~ 
7 εἶπεν αὐτοῖς. ott ἐγώ elms’ ἀπῆλϑον εἰς τὰ ὀπίσω καὶ ἔπεσον χαμαί. Πάλιν 
- ‘4 Ἵ 5» , , ~ ς A οὐ » \ xz 
οὖν αὐτοὺς ἐπηρώτησε᾽ τίνα ζητεῖτε ; οἱ δὲ εἶπον" ’Inoovr τὸν Natweaior. 
> ? | ok ἃ i ς» μ4 a ἈΚ > 9 Ἶ > 7 te ~ Ud , 
8 *Anexgidy ὃ Incovs* εἶπον ὑμῖν, ὁτι ἐγώ εἰμι" εἰ οὖν ἐμὲ ζητεῖτε, ἄφετε τού- 
ε , Ρ tp λ - « ’ α Ἢ σ α , , > 
9 τους ὑπάγειν. (Ira πληρωϑῇ ὃ λόγος, ov einer ὅτι ovg δέδωκάς μοι, οὐκ 
ἀπώλεσα ἐξ αὐτῶν οὐδένα.) 
MATTH. XXVI. 
48 Ὁ δὲ παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν ἔδωκεν av- 
1 ~ α΄ y ‘ 
τοῖς σημεῖον λέγων" ὃν ἂν φιλήσω, 
49 αὐτός ἐστι᾽ κρατήσατε αὐτόν. Καὶ 
εὐθέως προςελ- MARK XIV. 
Gov τῷ ᾿[ησοῦ 45 Kai ιἐλϑὼν ev- 
~ 4 4 δὰ ~ 
εἶπε" χαῖρε ,)αββί ϑέως προφελϑὼν 41--- καὶ ἤγγισε τῷ! 
‘ » 3 ἂν , rae. + , > ~ ~ 
καὶ κατεφίλησεν αὑτῷ λέγει" ῥαββί, “Inoov φιλῆσαι 
50 αὐτόν. Ὁ δὲ᾽]η- ῥαββί: καὶ κατ- 48 αὐτόν. ‘O δὲ ᾽Ιη- 
σοῦς εἶπεν αὐτῷ δφίλησεν 


MARK XIV. 
44 Δεδώκει δὲ ὁ παραδιδοὺς αὐτὸν 
σύσσημον αὐτοῖς λέγων" ὃν ἂν φιλήσω, 
᾿ αὐτός ἐστι χρατήσατε αὐτὸν καὶ 
ἀπαγάγετε ἀσφαλῶς. ; 
LUKE XXII 


JOHN XVIII. 


αὐτόν. σοῦς εἶπεν αὐτῷ" 12°H οὖν σπεῖρα 


ς ~ 4“. δ 8 Ud 
ἑταῖρε, é 0 πά- 
ρει; τότε προςελ- 


ϑόντες ἐπέβαλον 40 Οἱ δὲ ἐπέβαλον 


τὰς χεῖρας ἐπὶ τὸν 
3 ~ < > , 
Incovy καὶ &xoa- 


51 τῆσαν αὐτόν. Καὶ 


ἰδού, εἷς τῶν μετὰ 


Ὅς en) 

ἐπὶ αὐτὸν 
χεῖρας αὑτῶν καὶ 
ἐκράτησαν αὐτόν. 


τὰς 49 δίδως ; 


᾿Ιούδα, φιλήματι. 


τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀν- 
ϑρώπου παρα- 
᾿Ιδόντες 
δὲ οἱ περὶ αὐτὸν 


καὶ ὃ χιλίαρχος 
καὶ οἱ ὑπηρέται 
τῶν Ιουδαίων 
συνέλαβον τὸν ᾽]η- 


σοῦν καὶ ἔδησαν. 


τὸ ἐσόμενον εἶπον 10 αὐτὸν. — Σίμων 


> ιν ¢ > 
αὑτῷ κύριε, δἰ 


οὖν Πέτρος ἔχων 


"Inoov ἐκτείνας 47 Εἷς δέτις τῶνπα- πατάξομεν ἐν μα΄ μάχαιραν εἵλκυσεν 
τὴν χεῖρα ἀπέ. ρεστηκότων σπα- δὅ0 χαίρᾳ ; Καὶ ἐπά- αὐτὴν καὶ ἔπαισε 
onuce τὴν μά- σάμενος τὴν μά. ταῖΐξεν εἷς τις ἐξ τὸν τοῦ ἀρχιερέως 


χαιραν αὑτοῦ, καὶ 
πατάξας τὸν δοῦ- 


χάιραν ἔπαισε τὸν 
δοῦλον τοῦ ἀρχιε- 


αὐτῶν τὸν δοῦλον 
τοῦ ἀρχιερέως καὶ 


δοῦλον καὶ ἀπέ- 
κοψεν αὐτοῦ τὸ ὠ- 


λον τοῦ ἀρχιερέως ρέως καὶ ἀφεῖλεν ἀφεῖλεν αὐτοῦ τὸ τίον τὸ δεξιόν. ἣν 
> > ~ ‘ > ~ 4 δ ΣῈ τ ‘ , \ ws ~ , 
ἀφεῖλεν αὐτοῦ τὸ αὐτοῦ τὸ ὠτίον. οὖς τὸ δεξιόν. δὲ ὄνομα τῷ Sov- 
52 ὠτίον. Tore λέ- λῳ Μάλχος. El- 


yer αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿ἴη- 


_ δΙ᾽ΑΙποχριϑεὶς δὲ ὃ 11 πὲν οὖν ὁ Ἰησοῦς 


Ἔτι δὲ αὐτοῦ λαλοῦν- ὁ 


. 





δὲ 143, 144.] 


UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 


1538 





MATTH. XXVI. 
σοῦς " ἀπόστρεψόν σου THY μάχαιραν 
εἰς τὸν τόπον αὑτῆς πάντες γὰρ οἱ 
λαβόντες μάχαιραν ἐν μαχαίρᾳ ἀπο- 
53 λοῦνται. ὃ Ἢ δοκεῖς, ὅτι οὐ δύναμαι 
ἄρτι παρακαλέσαι τὸν πατέρα μου, 
καὶ παραστήσει μοι πλείους ἢ δώδεκα 
54 λεγεῶνας ἀγγέλων ; Πῶς οὖν πληρωϑῶσιν αἱ γρα- 


MARK XIV. 


LUKE XXII. 
᾿Ιησοῦς εἶπεν ἐᾶ- 
τε ἕως τούτου" 
καὶ ἁψάμενος τοῦ 
ὠτίου αὐτοῦ ἰά- 
σατο αὐτόν. 


JOHN XVIII. 
τῷ Πέτρῳ" βάλε 
τὴν μάχαιραν εἰς 
ἢ , a 
τὴν ϑήκην" τὸ πο- 

a , , 
τήριον, o δεδωκχὲ 
μοι ὃ πατήρ,οὐ μὴ 
πίω αὐτό; 

LUKE ΧΧΙΙ. 


σ WA ~ 
pat, ὅτι οὕτω δεῖ γενέ- 


55 σϑαι; Ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ 48 Καὶ ἀποχριϑεὶς ὁ ᾽Ιη- 


56 


Ψ « > ~ ~ “- > ~ 4 
εἶπεν 6 ᾿]ησοῦς τοῖς σοῦς εἶπεν αὐτοῖς" ὡς 
ὄχλοις" ὡς ἐπὶ λῃστὴν ἐπὶ λῃστὴν ἐξήλϑετε 
ἐξήλϑετε μετὰ μαχαι-- μετὰ μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύ- 


συλλα- 
βεῖν me’ καϑ' ἡμέραν 
πρὸς ὑμᾶς ἐκαϑεζόμην 
διδάσκων ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, 


ρῶν καὶ ξύλων 


A 
'χαὶ οὐκ ἐχρατήσατέ με. 


~ A ¢ 
Τοῦτο δὲ ὅλον γέγονεν, 


49 λων συλλαβεῖν με΄ καϑ' 


δον ἀν a \ cui 
TEQEH NUP OOS ὑμὰς 
8... - « “« , 

ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ διδάσκων, 
καὶ οὐκ ἐκρατήσατέ UE 


GAR ἵνα πληρωϑῶσιν αἱ 


σ ~ 
ἵνα πληρωϑῶσιν ai you- Καὶ ἀφέντες 
φαὶ τῶν προφητῶν. τότε 
Α 7, 3 
Os Ἰαϑηται πᾶντες a- 51 


φέντες αὐτὸν ἔφυγον. 


ὅ0 γραφαί. 
αὐτὸν πάντες ἔφυγον. 
Καὶ εἷς τις νεανίσκος 


52 Εἶπε δὲ ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς πρὸς 


53 


τοὺς παραγενομένους 
~ 4 
ἐπὶ αὐτὸν ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ 
στρατηγοὺς τοῦ ἱεροῦ 
καὶ πρεσβυτέρους " ὡς 
ἐπὶ λῃστὴν ἐξεληλύϑατε 
‘ ~ A 
μετὰ μαχαιρῶν καὶ ξύ- 
Lov: καϑ' ἡμέραν ὄντος 
μου wed ὑμῶν ἐν τῷ 
« - »» 9 ’ὔ "ἢ 
ἱερῷ οὐκ ἐξετείνατε τὰς 
- δι oe , > > 4 
χεῖρας ἐπ ἐμὲ. ἀλλ av- 
~ 7 4A 
τη ὑμῶν ἐστιν ἡ ὥρα καὶ 
ἡ ἐξουσία τοῦ σχότους. 


2 ~ ‘ 
ἠκολούϑει αὐτῷ περιβεβλημένος σινδόνα ἐπὶ 


te ‘ ~ ae | ε , ς \ 
52 γυμνοῦ " καὶ κρατοῦσιν αὑτὸν οἱ νεαγνίσχοι. O δὲ 


A ‘ , XA 8B > 3 > ~ 
καταλιπὼν THY σινδόνα γυμνὸς ἔφυγεν ἀπ᾿ αὐτῶν. 


§ 144, Jesus before Caiaphas. Peter thrice denies him.—Jerusalem. 


Night introducing the Sixth Day of the Week. 


4 


Matra. XXVI.57, Marx XIV. 58, 54, 7 Oo x xy 54---69, JOHN XVII 13—18, 


58, 69—75. 66—72. 


57 


20—27, 


Οἱ δὲ κρατήσαν- 63 Καὶ ἀπήγαγον 54 Συλλαβόντες δὲ 1' Kai ἀπήγαγον 


58 


τες τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν 
ἀπήγαγον πρὸς 
Καϊάφαν τὸν ἀρ- 
χιερέα. ὅπου οἱ 
γραμματεῖς καὶ οἱ 
πρεσβύτεροι 'συν»- 
ἤχϑησαν. 


τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν πρὸς 
τὸν ἀρχιερέα " καὶ 
συνέρχονται αὐτῷ 
πάντες οἱ ἀρχιε- 
ρεῖς καὶ οἱ πρε- 


, > ‘ t 
σβύυτεροι xo οἱ 


γραμματεῖς. 


Ὃ δὲ 54 Καὶ ὁ Πέτρος ἀπὸ 
Πέτρος ἠκολούϑει μακρόϑεν ἠκολού- δ4 --:Ο δὲ Πέτρος ἧ- = Ber δὲ τῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ 


2 2% A ‘ 
αὐτὸν ἤγαγον καὶ 
εἰςήγαγον αὐτὸν 
εἰς τὸν οἶκον τοῦ 


αὐτὸν πρὸς "4:᾽- 
γὰν πρῶτον" ἦν 

4 ~ 
γὰρ πενϑερὸς τοῦ 


ἀρχιερέως.--- 


14 αυτοῦ ἐχείγου. 


Καϊάφα, ὃς ἦν 
ε΄ ἀρχιερεὺς τοῦ ἐνι- 
Ἕ ‘ - 

Hy δὲ Καϊάφας 


ὁ συμβουλεύσας τοῖς ᾿Ιουδαίοις, 
a 
ὁτι συμφέρει ἕνα ἄνϑρωπον ἀπο- 


λέσϑαι ὑπὲρ τοῦ 
156 λαοῦ. ᾿Ηκολού- 





8. 52. Comp. Gen. 9, 6. 


20 


154 


THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS 


[Parr VIII. 





70 


71 


72 ραίου. 


MATTH XXVI. 

αὐτῷ ἀπὸ μακρό- 
Bev ἕως τῆς αὖ- 
λῆς τοῦ ἀρχιερέως, 


MARK XIV. 

ϑησεν αὐτῷ ἕως 
» 2 Ἁ > 
ἔσω εἰς τὴν αὖ- 
λὴν τοῦ ἀρχιερέως" 


LUKE XXII. 
κολούϑει μακχρό- 
dev. 


JOHN XVIII. 

Σίμων Πέτρος 
λς » 

καὶ ὃ ἄλλος μα- 


ηϑτής. ὃ δὲ μα- 


ϑητὴς ἐκεῖνος ἦν 


γνωστὸς τῷ ἀρχιερεῖ καὶ συνειςῆλϑε τῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ εἰς τὴν αὐλὴν τοῦ 
10: ἀρχιερέως. Ὃ δὲ Πέτρος εἱστήκει πρὸς τῇ ϑύρᾳ ἔξω. ἐξῆλϑεν οὖν 
6 μαϑητὴς ὁ ἄλλος, ὃς ἦν γνωστὸς τῷ ἀρχιερεῖ, καὶ εἶπε τῇ ϑυρωρῷ, 


καὶ siceh Pov! ἔσω 
ἐχάϑητο μετὰ τῶν 
ὑπηρετῶν -ἰδεῖν τὸ 
τέλος.--- 


καὶ ἦν συγκαϑή- 
μένος μετὰ τῶν ὑ- 
πηρετῶν καὶ ϑερ- 
μαινόμενος πρὸς 
τὸ φῶς.--- 


LUKE XXII. 


ἐν μέσῳ τῆς av- 
λῆς καὶ συγκαϑι- 
σάντων αὐτῶν ἐ- 
κάϑητο ὃ Πέτρος 
ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν. 


ὋὉ δὲ Πέτρος 66 Καὶ ὄντος τοῦ Πέτρου ἐν τῇ αὖ- 


ἔξω ἐκάϑητο ἐν τῇ 
αὐλῇ. καὶ προς- 
ἤλϑεν αὐτῷ μία 
’ , 
maidioxn λεγου- 
‘ 1s 
σα" καὶ ov yoda 
μετὰ ᾿Ϊησοῦ τοῦ 
"Γαλιλαίου. ‘O δὲ 
ἠρνήσατο ἔμπρο- 
σϑεν πάντων λέ- 
> - ’ 
“γῶν οὔκ οἰδὰ τὶ 
, 
ιλέγεις. 
᾿Εξελϑόντα 
δὲ ΙἸαὐτὸν εἰς τὸν 
πυλῶνα εἶδεν αὖ- 
τὸν ἄλλη, καὶ λέ- 
~ ~ 4 
γει τοῖς ἐκεῖ" [καὶ 
τ st ‘ 
οὗτος Ὧν μετὰ 
᾿Ιησοῦ τοῦ Ναζω- 
Καὶ πά- 
λιν ἠρνήσατο we? 
ὅρχου" ὅτι οὐκ 
οἶδα τὸν ἄνϑρω- 


73 mov. Μετὰ μικρὸν 


δὲ προςελϑόντες 
οἱ Γἑστῶτες εἶπον 
τῷ Πέτρῳ ἀλη- 
Dag καὶ σὺ ἐξ αὐ- 


λῇ κάτω ἔρχεται 
δισκῶν τοῦ ἀρχιε- 


67 ρέως, ! καὶ ἰδοῦσα 


τὸν Πέτρον ϑερ- 
ἐμ- 
αὐτῷ 


μαινόμενον, 
βλέψασα 

λέγει" καὶ σὺ με- 
τὰ τοῦ Ναζαρη- 
vov Ιησοῦ ἦσϑα. 


68. Ὁ δὲ ἠρνήσατο 


λέγων" οὐκ οἶδα 
γφλ of 

οὐδὲ | ἐπίσταμαι, 

τί σὺ λέγεις. Καὶ 

ἐξῆλϑεν ἔξω εἰς 

τὸ προαύλιον, καὶ 

ἀλέκτωρ ἐφώνησε. 


69 Καὶ ἡ παιδίσκῃ 


5 ~ , 
ἰδοῦσα αὑτὸν πᾶ- 
λιν ἤρξατο λέγειν 
τοῖς παρεστηκό- 

σ t > 
σιν" ὅτι οὗτος ἐξ 


0 αὐτῶν ἐστιν. ‘059 Καὶ 


δὲ πάλιν ἠρνεῖτο. 
Καὶ μετὰ μικρὸν 
πάλιν οἱ ‘mage 
στῶτες ἔλεγον τῷ 


Πέτρῳ: ἀληϑὼς 


58 


μία τῶν παι- 


50᾽Ιδοῦσα δὲ αὐτὸν 


παιδίσκη τις καϑ- 
ἥμενον πρὸς τὸ 
φῶς καὶ ἀτενίσα- 
σὰ αὐτῷ εἶπε" 
καὶ οὗτος σὺν αὐὖ- 


δ᾽ τῷ ἦν. Ὁ δὲ ἦρ- 


, ΟΝ , 
ψήσατο αὑτὸν Aé 
yoov' γύναι, οὐκ 
οἶδα αὐτόν. 

Καὶ 

A A id 

peta βραχὺ ἕτε- 

29 \ 

ρος ἰδὼν αὑτὸν 

a 4 4 > 

ἔφη" καὶ ov ἐξ 
αὐτῶν εἴ. 


ὁ δὲ 
Πέτρος εἶπεν" ἄν- 
ϑρωπε, οὐκ εἰμί. 
διαστάσης 
ὡςεὶ ὥρας μιᾶς 
ἄλλος τις διισχυ- 
oilero λέγων" ἐπὶ 
ἀληϑείας καὶ οὗ- 
τὸς per αὐτοῦ 


25, 


A 2. 2 ‘ 
καὶ signyaye τὸν 


δδ᾽ “΄!ψάντων δὲ πῦρ 18 Πέτρον. --- Εἱστή- 


κεισαν δὲ οἱ δοῦ- 
λοι καὶ οἱ ὑπηρέ- 
ται ἀνϑρακιὰν πε- 
ποιηκότες, ὅτι Wr- 
5 Δ. 

χος ἢν, καὶ εϑερ- 

, - A 
μαΐνοντο" ἢν δὲ 
μετ’ αὐτῶν δὲ Πέ- 
τρος ἑστὼς τκαὶ 
ϑερμαινόμενος.--- 


17 “έγει οὖν ἡ τπαι- 


δίσκη ἡ ϑυρωρὸς 
τῷ Πέτρῳ: μὴ 
A Δ.» ~ 
καὶ σὺ ἐκ THY μα- 
ϑητῶν εἶ τοῦ ἀν- 
ϑρώπου τούτου; 
λέγει ἐκεῖνος " οὐκ 
εἰμί.-- 


Ἦν δὲ "Σί. 

, Ξε A 
μων Πέτρος sortase 
καὶ ϑερμαινόμε- 
γος. εἶπον οὖν 
αὐτῷ: μὴ καὶ σὺ 
ἐχ τῶν μαϑητῶν 
> ~ > , 
αὐτοῦ εἶ; ἠρνή- 
σατο ἐκεῖνος καὶ 
εἶπεν" οὐχ εἰμί. 


26 Atye εἷς ἐκ τῶν 


δούλων τοῦ ἀρχιε- 

ρέως, συγγενὴς ὧν 

οὗ ἀπέκοψε Πέ. 

τρος τὸ ὠτίον" 
3 > 7? 

οὐκ ἐγώ σε εἶδον 


νυ 


ΠΡ 








4 
i 
. 
τ 
᾿ 
i 





δὲ 144, 145.] 


UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 


155 





MATTH. XXVI. 
~ A A ς 
τῶν εἶ" καὶ γὰρ ἡ 
λαλιά σου δῆλόν 
Ἴάσε ποιεῖ. Τότε 

- » A > 
ἐματίζειν καὶ ὑμ- 
? σ 3 be 
φύειν" OTL οὐκ οἷ- 

»ὕ 

δὰ τὸν ἄνϑρωπον. 


~ a 
καὶ εὐθέως ahéx- T2covt0r, ὃν λέγετε. 


75 roo ἐφώνησε. Καὶ 
ἐμνήσϑη ὁ Πέτρος τοῦ 
ῥήματος τοῦ ᾿ΪΙησοῦ εἰ- 
ρηχότος αὐτῷ ὅτι πρὶν 
ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι τρὶς 
ἀπαρνήσῃ με. καὶ ἐξελ- 
ϑὼν ἔξω ἔκλαυσε πι- 
κρῶς. 


MARK XIV. 
~ A 
ἐξ αὐτῶν εἶ" καὶ 


καὶ 4 λαλιά σου 
ἤρξατο καταϑε- 71 ὁμοιάζει. 
ἤρξατο ἀναϑεμα- 


‘O δὲ 


4 
ἄνϑρωπε, 


» \ ἃ , 
τίζειν καὶ ὀμνύειν" 
a > 5 4 ” 
ὅτι οὐκ οἶδα τὸν ἄνθρωπον 


Καὶ ἐκ 
δευτέρον ἀλέκτωρ ἐφώ- 
γησε. καὶ ἀνεμνήσϑη ὃ 
, XA. se@ee a 
Πέτρος τὸ ῥῆμα, ὃ εἶπεν 
5 ~ 3 “« 4 Ἢ A 
αὑτῷ ὁ ]ησοὺς" ott πρὶν 
ἀλέκτορα φωνῆσαι δὶς 
ἀπαρνήσῃ μὲ τρίς. καὶ 
Cc A 
ἐπιβαλὼν ἔκλαιε. 


LUKE XXII. 

ἦν" καὶ γὰρ Γαλι- 
γὰρ Γαλιλαῖος εἶ, 60 λαῖός ἐστιν. Εἶ- 27 αὐτοῦ ; 
me δὲ ὁ Πέτρος" 


οἶδα ὃ λέγεις.--- 


JOHN XVIII. 
ἐν τῷ κήπῳ μετ 
Πάλιν 
“ > Ud 
οὖν ἠρνήσατο o 
4 
Πέτρος" καὶ e0- 
ϑέως ἀλέχτωρ ἑ- 


> 
ουκ 


φώνησεν. 
LUKE ΧΧΙΙ. 


00 —xai παραχρῆμα, ἔτι 


- > ~ 3 ᾽ὔ 
λαλοῦντος αὑτου,ἑἐφωνη- 


61 σὲν ἀλέκτωρ. Καὶ στρα- 


‘ 
φεὶς ὁ κύριος ἐνέβλεψε 
“pt ,- My.€ , 
τῷ Πέτρῳ, καὶ ὑπεμνη- 
σϑη 6 Πέτρος τοῦ λόγου 
τοῦ κυρίου, ὡς εἶπεν αὐ- 
~ σ ‘ 
τῷ" ὅτι πρὶν ἀλέκτορα 
φωνῆσαι ἀπαρνήσῃ μὲ 


62 τρίς. Καὶ ἐξελϑὼν ἔξω [ὁ Πέτρος] ἔκλαυσε πικρῶς 


§ 145. Jesus before Caiaphas and the Sanhedrim. He declares himself to be the 
Christ ; is condemned and mocked.—Jerusalem. 


Morning of the Sixth Day of the Week. 


Joun XVIII. 19—24. 
€ F > ‘ 3 , δυ 9 ~ .” ~ ~ > ~ A 5 - κὰν 
19 ἋὋὉ οὖν ἀρχιερεὺς ἠρώτησε τὸν ᾿Ϊησοῦν περὶ τῶν μαϑητῶν αὐτοῦ καὶ περὶ τῆς 
20 διδαχῆς αὐτοῦ. “Anexgidy αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς - ἐγὼ παῤῥησίᾳ ἐλάλησα τῷ κύσμῳ. 
ἐγὼ πάντοτε ἐδίδαξα ἐν συναγωγῇ καὶ ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, ὅπου πάντες οἱ ᾿]ουδαῖοι 
21 συνέρχονται, καὶ ἐν κρυπτῷ ἐλάλησα οὐδέν " ' τί we ἐπερωτᾷς ; ἐπερώτησον τοὺς 
3 , - 9. 3 > ~ 54 ι ἢ ” a 9s Oo al ~ A > 
22 ἀκηκοότας, τί ἐλάλησα αὑτοῖς" We, ovtoe οἰδασιν, ἃ εἶπον eyo. Ταῦτα δὲ av- 
τοῦ εἰπόντος εἷς τῶν ὑπηρετῶν παρεστηκὼς ἔδωκε ῥάπισμα τῷ ᾿]ησοῦ εἰπών. 
σ 3 ,ὔ on ἢ - 3 , 2 α΄ .ς 3 ~ > ~ » 7 
23 οὕτως ἀποχρίνῃ τῷ ἀρχιερεῖ; -Amexpidy αὐτῷ ὁ Inoovg: εἰ κακῶς ἐλάλησα, 
͵ 4 ~ ~ > gt ~ , 2 , “J > A 
24 μαρτύρησον περὶ τοῦ κακοῦ, εἰ δὲ καλῶς, τί μὲ δέρεις ; “Anéotether οὖν αὐτὸν 
cx , ι one ‘ > ’ 
ὁ Avvag δεδεμένον πρὸς Καϊάφαν τὸν ἀρχιερέα. 
Luxe XXII. 63—71. 
Ά, [2 3: “F « Ἂ , \ , ~ ~ > Γ᾿ γ 
66 Kai ὡς ἐγένετο ἡμέρα, συνήχϑη τὸ πρεσβυτέριον τοῦ λαοῦ, ἀρχιερεῖς τὸ καὶ 
~ \ ~ 
γραμματεῖς, καὶ ἀνήγαγον αὐτὸν εἰς TO συνέδριον ἑαυτῶν" 
Marr. X XVI. 59—68. Marx XIV. 55—65. 
‘7, 4 , ΠΣ we , 
59 Οἱ δὲ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι 55 Οἱ δὲ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ ὅλον τὸ συνέ- 
σ ~ ~ 
καὶ τὸ συνέδριον ὅλον ἐζήτουν wevdo- δριον ἐζήτουν κατὰ τοῦ ᾿]ησοῦ μαρ- 
τυρίαν εἰς τὸ ϑανατῶσαι αὐτόν, καὶ 
> a 
56 οὐχ εὕρισκον. Πολλοὶ γὰρ éwevdo- 
μαρτύρουν κατ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἴσαι αἱ 


μαρτυρίαν κατὰ τοῦ ᾿Ιησοῦ, ὅπως 
60 αὐτὸν ϑανατώσωσι" καὶ οὐχ εὗρον. 
καὶ πολλῶν ψευδομαρτύρων προςεῖ- 
ϑόντων οὐχ εὗρον. ὕστερον δὲ προς- 
61 ελϑόντες δύο ψευδομάρτυρες ' εἶπον" 


’ 3 zi , 3 
57 μαρτυρίαι οὐκ your. Καὶ τινὲς ἀνα- 
’ , 
στάντες ἐψευδομαρτύρουν κατ᾽ «av- 


156 


THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS 


[Parr VIIL. 





62 


63 


65 


66 


67 


68 


MATTH. XXVI. 
τ # U ~ ‘ 
οὗτος ἔφη" δύναμαι καταλῦσαι τὸν 
4 ~ ~ A ~ ~ 
ψαὸν τοῦ ϑεοῦ καὶ διὰ τριῶν ἡμερῶν 


> ~ > , 
οἰκοδομῆσαι αὑτὸν. 


ἜΝ, ἃ > ‘A 
Kai ἀναστὰς 
<r A > Δ > A > ;ι 
ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς εἶπεν αὐτῷ οὐδὲν ἀποχρί: 


τ 
γῇ ; τί οὗτοί σου κατα- 
~ 4 
μαρτυροῦσιν; Ὁ δὲ ’In- 
σοῦς ἐσιώπα. καὶ ἀπο- 
s c > ‘ 
χριϑεὶς ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς εἶ- 
πὲν αὐτῷ" ἐξορκίζω σε 
κατὰ τοῦ ϑεοῦ τοῦ Car- 
σ ~ ” 
τος, ἵνα ἡμῖν εἴπῃς, εἰ 
‘ « , « «" 
σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστός, ὁ υἱὸς 
τοῦ ϑεοῦ. Aéyer αὐτῷ 
ὁ “Inoovs- σὺ εἶπας. 
Ἁ , . Sar > , ᾿ 
πλὴν λέγω ὑμῖν, ἀπαρτι 
» A «" - 
ὄψεσϑε τὸν υἱὸν» TOV 
, 
ἀνθρώπου καϑήμενον 
3 - ~ , 
ἐκ δεξιῶν τῆς δυνάμεως 
‘ ~ 
καὶ ἐρχόμενον ἐπὶ τῶν 
~ ~ > ~ 
ψεφελῶν TOV οὐρανοῦ. 
, 
Tore ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς διέῤ- 
ῥηξε τὰ ἱμάτια αὑτοῦ 
[4 
λέγων" ὅτι ἐβλασφήμη- 
ce’ τί ἔτι χρείαν. ἔχομεν 
ma ~ 3 
μαρτύρων; ἰδὲ, νῦν ἤ- 
3 
χκούσατε τὴν βλασφη- 
μίαν αὐτοῦ. " τί ὑμῖν δο- 
’ὔ; 
κεῖ; οἱ δὲ ἀποχριϑέντες 
cd , 
εἶπον" ἔνοχος ϑανάτου 
ἐστί. Τότε ἐνέπτυσαν 
» ~ 
εἰς τὸ πρύφωπον αὑτοῦ 
ld 
καὶ ἐχολάφισαν αὐτόν᾽ 
of δὲ ἐῤῥάπισαν ' λέγον- 
, ¢ ἑ 
reg’ προφήτευσον ἡμῖν, 
, , > « ’ 
Χριστέ, τίς ἐστιν ὁ παὶί- 
σας σε; 


\ \ 
τον γον 


MARK XIV. 


58 τοῦ λέγοντες" ὅτι ἡμεῖς ἠκούσαμεν 
αὐτοῦ λέγοντος" ὅτι ἐγὼ καταλύσω 


τοῦτον τὸν χειροποίητον, 


‘ ‘ ~ ¢€ ~ 4 > 
καὶ διὰ τριῶν ἡμερῶν ἄλλον ἀχειρο- 
59 ποίητον οἰκοδομήσω. Καὶ οὐδὲ ov- 


- » Ύ « , δος ὧν ‘ 
60 τως ton ἣν ἡ μαρτυριὰ αὑτῶν. Και 
ἀναστὰς ὁ ἀρχιερεὺς εἰς μέσον ἐπηρώ- 


‘ > “ , ὦ > > ’ 
tyoe tov ᾿Ϊησοῦν λέγων" οὐκ ἀποχρίνῃ 
ΕΣ , τ ’ “ ¢ a 2 
61 οὐδέν ; τί οὑτοί σου καταμαρτυροῦσιν ; O δὲ ἐσι- 


ὦπα καὶ οὐδὲν ἀπεκρί- 
γατο πάλιν ὃ ἀρχιε- 
ρεὺς ἐπηρώτα αὐτὸν καὶ 
λέγει αὐτῷ" 


σὺ εἶ ὁ Χρι- 
, ς «" - > 
στός, ὃ υἱὸς TOV εὑλογη- 
~ 4 ~ 
62 tov; Ὁ δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς εἶ- 
mev* ἐγώ εἶμι" καὶ ὅ- 
ψεσϑε τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ ἀν- 
ϑρώπου ἐκ δεξιῶν κα- 
ϑήμενον τῆς δυνάμεως 
καὶ ἐρχόμενον μετὰ τῶν 
γεφελῶν τοῦ οὐρανοῦ. 
63 Ὁ δὲ ἀρχιερεὺς διαῤῥή- 
Eug τοὺς χιτῶνας αὑτοῦ 
λέγει" τί ἔτι χρείαν ἔχο- 
θά μὲν μαρτύρων; ἠκού- 
care τῆς βλασφημίας" 
τί ὑμῖν φαίνεται; οἱ δὲ 
πάντες κατέχριγαν αὐὖ- 
A ow Ud 
τὸν εἶναι ἔνοχον ϑανά- 
του. 
‘ 

65 Kai ἤρξαντό 
~ A 
TIVES ἐμπτύειν αὐτῷ καὶ 
περικαλύπτειν τὸ πρός- 
ὠπον αὐτοῦ καὶ κολα- 

, ee ‘ , 
φίζειν αὑτὸν καὶ λέγειν 
αὐτῷ" προφήτευσον. 
καὶ οἱ ὑπηρέται ῥαπί- 

> .α Ν 

σμασιν αὐτὸν ἔβαλλον. 


LUKE XXII. 
67' λέγοντες" εἰ ov εἶ ὁ 
, ‘ ~ 
Χριστός, εἰπὲ ἡμῖν. εἶπε 
Α ~ ~ 
δὲ αὐτοῖς" ἐὰν ὑμῖν εἴ- 
> 
πῶ, OV μὴ πιστεύσητε" 
5" A 4 
68 ἐὰν δὲ καὶ ἐρωτήσω, οὐ 
> 2» “-. Ἂ» 
μῆ ἀποχριϑητὲ μοι ἢ ἄ- 
69 πολύσητε. “Ano τοῦ νῦν 
a” « «" ~ 3 , 
ἕσταιο VLOG TOV ἀνϑρω- 
, 3 ~ 
που καϑήμενος ἐκ δεξιῶν 
τῆς δυνάμεως τοῦ ϑεοῦ. 
70 Εἶπον δὲ πάντὲς" σὺ 
.: ε cA ~ ~ 
οὖν εἶ ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ ϑεοῦ; 
ς A A > ‘ »” 
ὃ δὲ πρὸς αὐτοὺς ἔφη᾽ 
¢€ ~ , σ > 
ὑμεῖς λέγετε, ote ἐγώ 
Tl εἰμι. Οἱ δὲ εἶπον" τί 
ἔτι χρείαν ἔχομεν μαρ- 
‘ 
τυρίας ; αὐτοὶ γὰρ ἠκού- 
σαμὲν ἀπὸ τοῦ στόμα- 
τος αὐτοῦ.--- 
3 
63 Kai οἱ ἄνδρες οἱ συν- 
, ~ 
ἕχοντες τὸν ᾿Ϊησοῦν 
Βι » ~ ; 
ἐνέπαιζον αὐτῷ δέρον- 
‘ 
64 τες, ! καὶ περικαλύψαν- 
τὲς αὐτὸν ἔτυπτον αὐ- 
~ A 
τοῦ τὸ πρόφωπον καὶ 
» 
ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν λέγον- 
τερ" προφήτευσον, τίς 
» ε , ἂν 
65 ἔστιν 0 maicag σε; Καὶ 


ἵτερα πολλὰ βλασφημοῦντες ἔλεγον εἰς αὐτόν. 


ew ye 


eae a 


re Sere eS SF - 


Ti inked es a 


aa ee πὰρ a = oe 


me ES ee 


ἐξ 145, 146] 


UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 


157 





Marrs. X XVII. 1, 


δ 146. The Sanhedrim lead Jesus away to Pilate-—Jerusalem. 


. Sixth Day of the Week. 


Mark XV. 1—5. 


Luxe XXIII.1—5. Jonun XVIII. 28—38. 


ΡΥ σῷ 0. 


“3 2 So 


2 zor. 


a ee ee ee 


2, 11—14. 


1 Πραΐας δὲ ye- 


vowerns συμβού- 
λιον ἔλαβον πάν- 
τὲς οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς 
καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτε- 
~ ~ A 
ροιτοῦ λαοῦ κατὰ 
a> ~ oa 
tov Iyoov, were 
ϑανατῶσαι αὐὖ- 
4 
Kai δήσαν- 
τες αὐτὸν ἀπήγα- 
4 
γον καὶ παρέδω- 
ny, | 
χαν αὕτον IIov- 


τίῳ Πιλάτῳ τῷ 
ἡγεμόνι.--- 


A 
Καὶ εὐϑέως ἐπὶ 1 


τὸ πρωΐ συμβού- 
λιον ποιήσαντες οἱ 
ἀρχιερεῖς μετὰ τῶν 
πρεσβυτέρων καὶ 
γραμματέων, καὶ 


Καὶ 
ἅπαν τὸ πλῆϑος 
αὐτῶν ἤγαγον αὐ- 
τὸν ἐπὶ τὸν Πιλά- 
τον. 


ἀναστὰν 28 


ν 

"Ayovow οὖν» 
3 ~ > 4 
tov Inoovy amo 
~ . 3 
τοῦ Καϊάφα εἰς 
τὸ πραιτώριον" 
. A 

ἦν δὲ πρωΐα. καὶ 


αὐτοὶ οὐκ εἰςῆλϑον εἰς τὸ 


σ 
πραιτώριον, ἵνα μὴ μιαν- 
- A 
Daw, ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα φάγωσι τὸ 


[χὰ A ’ 
Odov τὸ συνέδριον, 
δήσαντες tov’ Iy- 


~ “ 3 
σοῦν ἀπήνεγκαν 29 πάσχα. ᾿Ἐξῆλϑεν οὖν ὁ 

‘ yee , ᾿ > τῷ iY 
καὶ παρέδωκαν Πιλᾶτος πρὸς αὑτοὺς και 

- , “ , , ’ 
τῷ Πιλάτῳ. εἶπε᾽ τίνα κατηγορίαν φέ- 


‘ ρετε κατὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου 
᾿Απεκρίϑησαν καὶ εἶπον αὐτῷ εἰ μὴ 
ἦν οὗτος κακοποιός, οὐκ ἂν σοι παρεδώκαμεν 
Εἶπεν οὖν αὐτοῖς ὁ Πιλάτος " λάβετε 


80 τούτου; 


31 αὐτόν. 


δ λα ς » ‘ ~ Ἢ + EE 
αὐτὸν ὑμεῖς καὶ κατὰ τὸν νόμον ὑμῶν χρίνατε αὐτόν. εἶπον OLY αὑτῷ 


82 οἱ 
11 Ὁ δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς 
ἔστη ἔμπροσϑεν 


» ’ A 
τοῦ HYEMOVOS * καὶ 
ἐπηρώτησεν αὐὖ- 

A « « A , 
τὸν ὃ ἤγεμων λέ- 

\ 5 ¢ 
γων" ov eo βα- 
Ἁ “« 3 
σιλευς τῶν lov- 

δαίων ;-- 


᾿Ιουδαῖοι" 


2 Ἤρξαντο δὲ κατηγορεῖν αὐ- 


A 
2 Καὶ ἐπηρώτησεν 


~ ~ σ ¢€ , 
ἡμῖν οὐκ ἔξεστιν ἀποχτεῖναι οὐδένα. (Iva ὃ dhoyos 
3 ~ ~ a 
Inoov πληρωϑῇῃ, ov 

, , , 
εἶπε σημαίνων, ποίῳ ϑανα- 

“«Ψ Pes ~ σ΄ oA > , 
τοῦ λέγοντες τοῦτον evgo- τῷ ἤμελλεν ἀποϑνῆσκειν.) 

᾿ - 4 \ 
μὲν διαστρέφοντα τὸ ἔϑνος 33 Εἰςῆλϑεν οὖν εἰς τὸ πραι- 


LUKE XXIII. του 


A ΄ 
nat κωλύοντα Καίσαρι τώριον πάλιν ὃ Πιλάτος 
, , , \ 3 ’ A 3 , 
φόρους διδόναι, λέγοντα καὶ ἐφώνησε tov Lnoovr 
ε ᾿ ᾿ , ‘ *6 ΠΈΡΙ 
savtov ΟΧριστὸον βασιλέα καὶ εἶπεν αὑτῷ 
4 
MARK XV. 3 εἶναι. Ὃ δὲ Πι- ov εἶ 6 βασιλεὺς 


λάτος ἐπηρώτησεν τῶν ᾿Ι[Ιουδαίων; 
ov 834᾽ 4 πεκχρίϑη αὐτῷ 
εἶ ὁ βασιλεὺς τῶν ὁ ᾿]Ιησοῦς" ἀφ 
᾿Ιουδαίων ;-- ἑαυτοῦ σὺ τοῦτο 

λέγεις, ἢ ἄλλοι σοι 
35 εἶπον περὶ ἐμοῦ; ᾿ΑΙπεκρίϑη ὁ Πιλάτος" μήτι ἐγὼ 


αὐτὸν ὁ Πιλάώτος: αὐτὸν λέγων" 
A 
σὺ εἶ ὁ βασιλεὺς 


τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων ;— 


"Tovdaibe εἰμι; τὸ ἔϑνος TO σὸν καὶ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς παρέδωκαν σὲ ἐμοί" τί ἐποί- 


36 yous; ᾿“πεχρίϑη ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς" ἡ βασιλεία ἡ ἐμὴ οὐκ ἔστιν ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου τού- 


»Ψ ~ , ἣ ti id £ ¢ 3 , « « , xn ε 5 A 
TOV. εἰ ἐκ TOV κόσμου τούτου HY ἡ βασιλεία ἡ ἐμή, οἱ ὑπηρέται ὧν OL ἕμοι 
> » σ \ ~ ~ > ’ ~ A ε , € + ee 3 
ἠγωνίζοντο, ἵνα μὴ παραδοϑῶ τοῖς ᾿]Ιουδαίοις" νῦν δὲ ἡ βασιλεία ἡ ἐμὴ οὐκ 


37 ἔστιν ἐντεῦϑεν. 


Ἅ ~ ~ 4 
Εἶπεν οὖν αὐτῷ ὁ Iddrog: οὐκοῦν βασιλεὺς εἶ ov; 


158 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS [Parr VIII. 





MATTH. XXVII. > ~MARK Xv, LUKE XXIII. JOHN XVIII. 
3 - 
11 --ὁ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἔ- 2—6 δὲ ἀποκχρι- 3--ὁ δὲ ἀποκρι- ἀπεχρίϑη ὁ ᾽]η- 
> ~ A , A νων Α 2 ὦ» Ν - A 7 
gy αὐτῷ" ov he- ϑεὶς εἶπεν αὐτῷ: ϑεὶς αὐτῷ ἔφη: σοῦς" ov λέγεις, 
φ ‘ , ‘ , σ ᾿ 3 
γεις. σὺ λέγεις. σὺ λέγεις. ott βασιλεὺς εἶμι 
ἐγώ. ἐγὼ εἰς τοῦ- 
δ ΣΝ ~ 5 ἢ > A , σ a ~ 
TO γεγέννημαι καὶ εἰς τοῦτο ἑλήλυϑα εἰς TOY κόσμον, ἵνα μαρτυρήσω τῇ 
> , ~ ‘+. 3 ~ 5 lad > , ~ ~ , > ~ 
38 ἀληϑείᾳ. πᾶς ὁ ὧν ἐκ τῆς ἀληϑέίας ἀκούει μου τῆς φωνῆς. «ἔγει αὐτῷ 
¢ , - 3 > , 4 ~ > ‘ , 39.ω- 4 ‘ 

0 Πιλᾶτος" τί ἐστιν ἀλήϑεια ; καὶ τοῦτο εἰπὼν πάλιν ἐξῆλϑε πρὸς τοὺς 

3 , ‘ , > ~ 8... δὰ 3 , OY er > > ~ 

Ἰουδαίους καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς" ἐγὼ οὐδεμίαν αἰτίαν εὑρίσκω ἐν αὐτῷ. 

MATTH. XXVII. MARK XV. 

12 Καὶ ἐν τῷ κατηγορεῖσϑαι αὐτὸν iad 3 Kat κατηγόρουν αὐτοῦ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς 
“« 3 , ‘ ~ , [4 € ‘ , , > 7, 
τῶν ἀρχιερέων καὶ τῶν πρεσβυτέρων 4 πολλά. O δὲ Πιλᾶτος πάλιν ἐπηρώ- 


13 οὐδὲν ἀπεχρίνατο. Τότε λέγει αὐτῷ τησεν αὐτὸν λέγων" οὐκ ἀποκρίνῃ 
ὁ Πιλάτος- οὐκ ἀκούεις, πόσα σου οὐδέν ; ἴδε, πόσα σου καταμαρτυροῦ- 
14 χαταμαρτυροῦσι; Καὶ οὐκ anexgidy ὅ σιν. Ὁ δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς οὐκέτι οὐδὲν ἀπε- 
αὐτῷ πρὸς οὐδὲ ἕν ῥῆμα, ὥςτε ϑαυ- χρίϑη, ὥςτε ϑαυμάζειν τὸν Πιλάτον. 


, ‘ « ’ ’ 
μάζειν τὸν ἡγεμόνα λίαν. 

: LUKE XXIII. 
4 Ὁ δὲ Πιλάτος εἶπε πρὸς τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ τοὺς ὄχλους" οὐδὲν εὑρίσχω αἴτιον 
3 ~ » , , ε 41 3._¥ , σ > 4. A \ ’ 
5 ἐν τῷ ἀνϑρώπῳ τούτῳ. Οἱ δὲ ἐπίσχυον λέγοντες" ott avaceiei τὸν λαὸν διδά- 

7 ¢ ΑΜ) , > , > © ~ , o 4 
σκῶν καϑ' ὕλης τῆς ᾿Ιουδαίας, ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ τῆς Γαλιλαίας ἕως ὠδε. 


§ 147. Jesus before Herod.—Jerusalem. 
Sixth Day of the Week. 


Luxe XXIII. 6—12. 
6 Πιλάτος δὲ ἀκούσας Γαλιλαίαν ἐπηρώτησεν, εἰ 6 ἄνϑρωπος ΓΓαλιλαῖός ἐστι" 
Α 3 [ σ 3 “ > / ¢ , > , > 7 >, A A e , 
7 καὶ ἐπιγνούς, ὅτι ἐκ τῆς ἐξουσίας Hewdov ἐστίν, ἀνέπεμψεν αὑτὸν πρὸς ‘Hoo- 
~ ‘ 
8 δην, ὄντα καὶ αὐτὸν ἐν “Ιεροσολύμοις ἐν ταύταις ταῖς ἡμέραις. “Ὁ δὲ Ἡρώδης 
ἰδὼν τὸν ᾿]ησοῦν ἐχάρη λίαν" ἦν γὰρ ϑέλων ἐξ ἱκανοῦ ἰδεῖν αὐτὸν διὰ τὸ ἀκούειν 
4 4 > ~ , 7 Ul »" 3 ~ ee YT 3 - 3 ΄ ‘ 
9 πολλὰ περὶ αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἠλπιζέ τι σημεῖον ἰδεῖν va αὑτοῦ γινόμενον. ᾿Επηρῶτα de 
Βι ΣΝ 4 , 4 ~ h®! ‘ ot > / > ~ « , A c 
10 αὐτὸν ev λόγοις ἱκανοῖς, αὐτὸς δὲ οὐδὲν ἀπεχρίνατο αὑτῷ. Εἰστήκεισαν δὲ οἱ 
~ ~ ~ 3 
11 ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ γραμματεῖς εὐτόνως κατηγοροῦντες αὐτοῦ. ᾿Εξουϑενήσας δὲ 
~ μιγί \ 
αὐτὸν ὁ Ἡρώδης σὺν τοῖς στρατεύμασιν αὑτοῦ καὶ ἐμπαίξας, περιβαλὼν αὐτὸν 
~ ? ~ A σ 
12 ἐσθῆτα λαμπράν, ἀνέπεμψεν αὐτὸν τῷ Πιλάτῳ. ᾿Εγένοντο δὲ φίλοι 0,te Πιλά- 
~ ~ , .- ~ \ ϑι....Δ 
τος καὶ ὁ Ἡρώδης ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ pet ἀλλήλων" προὐπῆρχον γὰρ ἐν ἔχϑρᾳ 
ὄντες πρὸς ἑαυτούς. 


‘  § 148, Pilate seeks to release Jesus. ©The Jews demand Barabbas.—Jerusalem. 
Sixth Day of the Week. 


Luxe XXIII. 13—25. 
13 Πιλάτος δὲ συγκαλεσάμενος τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ τοὺς ἄρχοντας καὶ τὸν λαὸν 
14! εἶπε πρὸς αὐτούς" προφηνέγκατέ μοι τὸν ἄνϑρωπον τοῦτον ὡς ἀποστρέφοντα 





δὲ 147, 148.] UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 159 





LUKE XXIII. 
\ , Lae, δ, Ἀπ ς ώὼ > , 2% ζ 3 CM , 
τὸν λαὸν, καὶ ἰδοὺ, ἐγώ ἐνώπιον ὑμῶν ἀναχρίνας οὐδὲν ELVOY ἐν TH ἀνϑρώπῳ 
, a t ~ > 2 ~ 3 3 2eic , D aff ‘ 

15 σούτῳ αἰτίον, ὧν κατηγορεῖτε κατ αὐτοῦ} add οὐδὲ Howdys* avenenpa γὰρ 
ὑμᾶς πρὸς αὐτόν, καὶ ἰδού, οὐδὲν ἄξιον ϑανάτου ἐστὶ πεπραγμένον αὐτῷ. 
1 : 16 Παιδεύσας οὖν 
Marr. ΧΧΥΠΙ.15--26. Marx XV.6—15. αὐτὸν ἀπολύσω. Joun XVIII. 39, 40. 
; y 
᾿ς τἸδζκατὰ δὲ ἑορτὴν 6 Κατὰ δὲ. ἑορτὴν 17 Avayuny δὲ εἶχεν 39 Ἔστι δὲ συνήϑεια 





> ὃ « [ A > } ? ~ > , > ~ ¢ w “ ς»"ν 

εἰώϑει ὃ ἡγεμὼν ἀπέλυεν αὑτοῖς ἀπολύειν αὐτοῖς ὑμῖν, ἵνα ἕνα ὑμῖν 
] 3 , “ “ ¢ , σ΄ a το κ 2 , ᾽ ~ 
ἀπολύειν ἕνα τῷ ἕνα δέσμιον, ov- κατὰ ἑορτὴν ἕνα. ἀπολύσω ἐν TH 
Ε 4 , a ; > ~ 3 , τ 

ὄχλῳ δέσμιον, ον 7 πὲρ ἥτουντο. Hy πάσχα "-- 

‘ \¢ ’ ~ 

16 ἤϑελον. Εἶχον δὲ δὲ ὃ λεγόμενος Βαραββᾶς μετὰ 
= φότε δέσμιον ἐπί- τῶν συστασιαστῶν δεδεμένος, οἵτινες 
‘ ΕἸ “ = 
j σημον, λεγόμενον Βαραβ- ἐν τῇ στάσει φόνον πεποιήκεισαν. 


- “ ‘ 4 
17 βᾶν. Συνηγμένων οὖν αὐ 8 Kat ἀναβοήσας ὁ ὄχλος ἤρξατο 
- 3 ~ ¢ , > ~ A ἣν. ‘% > ’ 3 ~ 
τῶν εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὁ Πιλά. αἰτεῖσϑαι, καϑὼς ἀεὶ ἐποίει αὐτοῖς. 


— a, 


zoo: τίνα ϑέλετε ἀπολύ- 9 ‘O δὲ Πιλάτος ἀπεχρίϑη JOHN XVIII. 

~ ~ \ ~ ’ δὰ 
oo ὑμῖν; Βαραββᾶν; ἢ αὐτοῖς λέγων" ϑέλδτε 89 --βούλεσϑε οὖν ὑμῖν 
> ~ A , 3 , δ. w A 3 A ’ 
]Ιησοῦν, τὸν λεγόμενον ἀπολύσω ὑμῖν τὸν βα- ἀπολύσω τὸν βασιλέα 


σ΄ “ ~ 
18 Χριστόν; Ἤιδειγάρ, ὅτι σιλέα τῶν Ἰουδαίων; τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων ; 
: διὰ φϑόνον παρέδωκαν 10 ᾿Εγίνωσχξ γάρ, ὅτι διὰ 
᾿ , - 
19 αὐτόν. Καϑημένου δὲ φϑόνον παραδεδώκεισαν αὐτὸν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς. 
αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 
ἃ ἃ Ree saat be ᾿ »»ν , , 
ἀπέστειλε πρὸς "αὐτὸν ἡ γυνὴ αὐτοῦ λέγουσα. μηδέν 
4 ~ , > , ‘ A 7 
σοι καὶ τῷ δικαίῳ ἐκείνῳ " πολλὰ γὰρ ἔπαϑον σήμερον 
Ἶ κατ ὄναρ δὲ αὐὖ- MARK XV. LUKE XXIII. JOHN XVIII. 
: \ re ᾿ 
20 τόν. Οἱ δὲ ἀρ- 11 Οἱ δὲ ἀρχιερεῖς 18 ᾿Ανέχραξαν δὲ 40 Εχραύγασαν οὖν 
~ A » 
χιερεῖς καὶ οἱ ἀνέσεισαν τὸν Oy- παμπληϑεὶ λέγον. πάλιν πάντες λέ- 
σ “ ~ ~ 
πρεσβύτεροι ἔπει. λον, wa μᾶλλον τες" aige τοῦτον, γοντὲς" μὴ τοῦ- 
\ a ~ 
σαν τοὺς ὄχλους, τὸν Βαραββᾶν ἀπόλυσον δὲ ἡμῖν τον,ἀλλὰ τὸν Bag- 
we αἰτήσωνται ἀπολύσῃ αὐτοῖς. τὸν Βαραββᾶν: αββᾶν. ἦν δὲ ὁ 


See ee 








τὸν Βαραββᾶν, 19 ὅςτις ἦν διὰ στέ- - Βαραββᾶς λῃστής. 
σὸν δὲ ᾿]ησοῦν σιν τινὰ γενομένην 
| ἀπολέσωσιν. ἐν τῇ πόλει καὶ φόνον βεβλημένος 
᾿ .; ᾿ἥποκρι- 20 εἰς φυλακήν. Πάλιν οὖν ὁ Πιλάτος 
ἢ ϑεὶς δὲ ὁ ἡγεμὼν εἶπεν MARK XV. προφεφώνησε ϑέλων ἀ- 


αὐτοῖς τίνα ϑέλετε ἀπὸ 21 Ὃ δὲ Πιλάτος ἀποκχρι- 31 πολῦσαι τὸν Ἰησοῦν. Οἱ 
τῶν δύο ἀπολύσω ὑμῖν; ϑεὶς πάλιν εἶπεν αὐτοῖς" δὲ ἐπεφῶώνουν λέγοντες " 
22 οἱ δὲ εἶπον" Βαραββᾶν. τὶ οὖν ϑέλετε ποι- σταύρωσον, σταύρωσον 
Aéyat αὐτοῖς ὁ Πιλάτος᾽ σω ὃν λέγετε βασιλέα 22 αὐτόν. “Ὁ δὲ τρίτονλεῖ- 
τί οὖν ποιήσω ᾿]Ιησοῦν, 13 τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων; Οἱ δ᾽ πε προς αὐτούς " τί γὰρ 
τὸν λεγόμενον Χριστόν; πάλιν ἔκραξαν' σταύ. χαχὸν ἐποίησεν οὗτος; 
λέγουσιν αὐτῷ πάντες" 14 ρῶσον αὐτόν. ὋὉ δὲ οὐδὲν αἴτιον ϑανάτου 
23 σταυρωϑήτω. ὯὉ δὲ ἦγε- Πιλάτος ἔλεγεν αὐτοῖς: εὗρον ἐν αὐτῷ" παιδεύ- 





SO ee et ee Oe ge 


5 Δ 





160 


THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE 


EVENTS 


[Parr VIII. 





MATTH. XXVII. 

\ Ν , A A 
μὼν ἔφη" τί γὰρ κακὸν 
ἐποίησεν ; οἱ δὲ περισ- 

ΞΡ , J 
σῶς ἔκραζον λέγοντες 
σταυρωϑήτω. 


MARK XV. 
, A ‘ > ’ 

τί γὰρ κακὸν ἐποίησεν ; 

οἱ δὲ περισσῶς ἔκρα- 

ξαν" σταύρωσον αὐτόν. 


LUKE XXIII. 
- 5 Ἁ » 3 
σὰς OVY αὑτον ἀπολύσω. 


23 Οἱ δὲ ἐπέκειντο φωναῖς 


, > , > 
μεγάλαις αἰτούμενοι av- 
τὸν σταυρωϑῆναι, καὶ 


- ‘A ~ 
κατίσχυον αἱ φωναὶ αὐτῶν καὶ τῶν ἀρχιερέων. 


MATTH. XXVII. 


~ “« σ 
24 ᾿Ιδὼν δὲ ὁ Πιλάτος, ὅτι οὐδὲν ὠφελεῖ, ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον ϑόρυβος γίνεται, λαβὼν ὕδωρ 
~ -- ""» »-- A ~ 
ἀπενίψατο τὰς χεῖρας ἀπέναντι τοῦ ὄχλου λέγων" ἀϑῶός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος 
~ , , [ ~ » ‘ , ‘ ~ ε \ ‘ 7 
τοῦ δικαίου τούτου" ὑμεῖς ὄψεσϑε. Καὶ ἀποκριϑεὶς πᾶς ὁ λαὸς εἶπε" τὸ" αἷμα 


25 


26 


> ~ 2 ὦ ε ~ 2 
αὐτοῦ ep ἡμᾶς καὶ 
ἐπὶ τὰ τέκνα ἡμῶν. 
Τότε ἀπέλυσεν αὐτοῖς 


τὸν Βαραββᾶ»---- 


MARK XV. 


15 Ὁ δὲ Πιλάτος, Bovio- 


Κ᾿ δ 4 
μένος τῷ ὄχλῳ τὸ ικα- 
γὸν ποιῆσαι, ἀπέλυσεν 
αὐτοῖς τὸν Βαραββᾶν.--- 


LUKE XXIII. 


24°O δὲ Πιλάτος énéxouwe 


γενέσϑαι τὸ αἴτημα αὐ- 


25 τῶν. “Anédvose δὲ [αὐ- 


~ A 4 , Ἁ 
τοῖς] τὸν διὰ στάσιν καὶ 
φόνον βεβλημένον εἰς 


; a ~ A ‘ ~ , ~ ~ 
τὴν puaanyy, ov ἠτοῦντο, τὸν δὲ ᾿]ησοῦν παρέδωκε τῷ ϑελήματι αὐτῶν. 


§ 149, Pilate delivers up Jesus to death. He is scourged and mocked.—Jerusalem. 


26 


27 


28 


Matra. XX VII. 26—30. 
--Τὸν δὲ Ἰησοῦν φρα- 
’ 
γελλώσας 
ἵνα σταυρωϑῇ. Tore οἱ 
στρατιῶται τοῦ ἡγεμό- 
γος, παραλαβόντες τὸν 
᾿Ιησοῦν εἰς τὸ πραιτώ- 
ριον, συνήγαγον ἐπὶ αὖ- 
τὸν ὅλην τὴν σπεῖραν. 
Καὶ ἐχδύσαντες αὐτὸν 
’ > οἂνὍ 
περιέϑηκαν αὐτῷ χλα- 
A ? 
μύδα κοκκίνην,! καὶ πλέ- 
ἕαντες στέφανον ἐξ ἀ- 
~ ‘ 
κανϑῶν ἐπέϑηκαν ἐπὶ 
τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ καὶ 
7 ES. 4 ‘ 
κάλαμον ἐπὶ τὴν δεξιὰν 
αὐτοῦ, καὶ γονυπετή- 
σαντες ἔμπροσϑεν αὐ- 
a ΜΝ Ὁ > ~ / 
τοῦ ἐνέπαιζον αὐτῷ λέ- 
- ε 
yorres’ χαῖρε, ὃ βασι- 
λεὺς τῶν “Lovdaior. 


, 
παρέδωκεν, 


30 Καὶ ἐμπτύσαντες εἰς 


Sixth Day of the Week. 


Marx XV. 15—19. 


15—Kai παρέδωκε τὸν 


᾿Ιησοῦν φραγελλώσας, 


16 ἵνα σταυρωϑῇ. Οἱ δὲ 


στρατιῶται ἀπήγαγον 

Ba ' ” ~ 25” σ 

αὐτὸν ἔσω τῆς αὐλῆς, O 

4 

ἐστι ἱπραιτώριον, καὶ 
~ σ 

συγκαλοῦσιν ὅλην τὴν 

σπεῖραν. 

Καὶ ἐνδύουσιν 

‘ 

αὐτὸν πορφύραν, καὶ 

, 3. ὧν , 

περιτιϑέασιν αὑτῷ πλέ- 


‘Eavtes ἀκάνϑινον στέ- 


᾿ 


φανον. 


τος Καὶ ἤρξαντο 
ἀσπάζεσϑαι αὐτόν" 
χαῖρε, βασιλεῦ τῶν ᾽]ου- 

δαίων. 
Καὶ ἔτυπτον αὐ- 


Joun XIX. 1—3. 
1 Τότε οὖν ἔλαβεν ὁ 
Πιλάτος τὸν ᾿Ϊησοῦν 
2 χαὶ ἐμαστίγωσε. Καὶ 
οἱ στρατιῶται 


πλέξαν- 
, > > 

τες στέφανον ἐξ axay- 

~ > , > ~ 

Sov ἐπέϑηκαν avrov 

τῇ κεφαλῇ καὶ ἱμάτιον 

πορφυροῦν περιέβαλον 
αὐτόν, 


8 Ο "καὶ ἔλεγον" χαῖρε, 

ὁ βασιλεὺς τῶν ᾿]ουδαί- 

\ Jp δ. ὧν 

ov: καὶ ἐδίδουν αὐτῷ 
ῥαπίσματα. 


Se os αὐ ὰ ᾿ 
se ὟΣ a he eS 








§§ 149, 150, 151.] UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 161 





MATTH. XXVII. MARK XY. 
: Ἄ ἢ ow A 4 ~ \ 
αὑτὸν ἔλαβον τὸν κάλαμον καὶ ἔτυ- τοῦ τὴν κεφαλὴν καλάμῳ, καὶ ἐνέπτυ- 
3 \ A > ~ ~ ‘ A 
πτον εἰς τὴν κεφαλὴν αὐτοῦ. ον αὐτῷ, καὶ τιϑέντες τὰ γόνατα 


προςεχύνουν αὐτῷ. 


§ 150. Pilate again seeks to release Jesus.—Jerusalem. 
Sixth Day of the Week. 


Joun XIX. 4—16. 
3 ~ Yi ~ ~ 
Ἐξῆλϑε οὖν πάλιν ἔξω ὁ Πιλάτος καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς" ide, ἄγω ὑμῖν αὐτὸν ἔξω, 
5 ἵνα γνῶτε, ὅτι ἐν αὐτῷ οὐδεμίαν αἰτίαν εὑρίσκω. (Ἐξῆλϑεν οὖν 6 ᾿Ιησοῦς ἔξω 
φορῶν τὸν ἀκάνϑινον στέφανον καὶ τὸ πορφυροῦν ἱμάτιον.) Καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς" 
6 ide, ὁ ἄνϑρωπος. “Ore οὖν εἶδον αὐτὸν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ ὑπηρέται, ἐκραύγασαν 
λέγοντες " σταύρωσον, σταύρωσον αὐτόν" λέγει αὐτοῖς ὁ Πιλάτος " λάβετε αὐτὸν 
7 ὑμεῖς καὶ σταυρώσατε᾽ ἐγὼ γὰρ οὐχ εὑρίσκω ἐν αὐτῷ. αἰτίαν. “Ἵπεκρίϑησαν 
αὐτῷ οἱ ᾿Ιουδαῖοι" ἡμεῖς νόμον ἔχομεν, καὶ κατὰ τὸν νόμον ἡμῶν ὀφείλει ἀπο- 
» 4 « \ «" ~ > , σ J: A ¢ , ~ ‘ 
8 ϑανεῖν, ὅτι ἑαυτὸν υἱὸν ϑεοῦ ἐποίησεν. “Ore οὖν ἤκουσεν 6 Πιλάτος τοῦτον τὸν 
9 λόγον, μᾶλλον ἐφοβήϑη. Καὶ εἰςῆλϑεν εἰς τὸ πραιτώριον πάλιν καὶ λέγει τῷ 
~ ~ J ee x 
10 ]ησοῦ" moder εἶ od; ὁ δὲ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἀπόκρισιν οὐκ ἔδωκεν αὐτῷ. Aeye οὖν 
2 ete 6 , > ‘ > ~ > ba σ 3 , mw ~ ’ὔ 
αὐτῷ ὁ Πιλάτος ἐμοῖ ov λαλεῖς ; οὐκ οἶδας, ὁτι ἐξουσίαν ἔχω σταυρῶώσαί σὲ 
11 καὶ ἐξουσίαν ἔχω ἀπολῦσαί σε; ᾿ΑΙπεκρίϑη ὁ Incovg: οὐκ εἶχες ἐξουσίαν οὐδέ- 
f τ᾽ ἐμοῦ, εἰ μὴ ἦν σοι δεδομένον KrwmOer διὰ τοῦτο ὁ παραδιδούς μέ σοι 
μίαν κατ᾽ ἐμοῦ, εἰ μὴ ἢν σοι δεδομένον ἄνωϑεν ὕτο ὃ πὰρ ἐμ 
᾿ , 3 ~ ae € gi 
12 μείζονα ἁμαρτίαν ἔχει. “Ex τούτου ἐζήτει ὁ Πιλάτος ἀπολῦσαι αὐτόν. ot δὲ ᾽]ου- 
δαῖοι ἔχραζον λέγοντες " ἐὰν τοῦτον ἀπολύσῃς, οὐκ εἶ φίλος τοῦ Καίσαρος " πᾶς 
13 ὁ βασιλέα ἑαυτὸν ποιῶν ἀντιλέγει τῷ Καίσαρι. “O οὖν Πιλάτος ἀκούσας τοῦτον 
᾿ , a ” ee ~ ΑΓ wee 5." ~py? > , , 
τὸν λόγον ἤγαγεν ἔξω τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν, καὶ ἐχάϑισεν ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος εἰς τόπον Leyo- 
oo A \ ~ Mg Α Α -“ 
14 μενον λιϑόστρωτον, Ἑβραϊστὶ δὲ. Γαββαϑᾶ" (ἣν δὲ παρασκευὴ τοῦ πάσχα, 
~ a ~ 
15 ὥρα δὲ ὡςεὶ ἕκτη) καὶ λέγει τοῖς ᾿Τουδαίοις " ἴδε, ὁ βασιλεὺς ὑμῶν. Οἱ δὲ ἐκραύ- 
¥ “4 ’ - 95 ’ ’ 3 ~ «ς , é A , 
γασαν" ἄρον, ἄρον, GTAVQMOOY αὑτὸν. λέγει αὑτοῖς ὁ Πιλᾶτος" τὸν βασιλέα 
- ~ A 
ὑμῶν σταυρώσω ; ἀπεχρίϑησαν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς " οὐκ ἔχομεν βασιλέα, εἰ μὴ Καίσαρα. 
Ἁ ~ σ ~ 
16 Τότε οὖν παρέδωκεν αὐτὸν αὐτοῖς, ἵνα σταυρωϑῇ.--- 


A 


δ 151. Judas repents and hangs himself'—Jerusalem. 


Sixth Day of the Week. 


Matru. XXVII. 3—10. ͵ 

8 Tore ἰδὼν ᾿Ιούδας ὁ παραδιδοὺς αὐτόν, ὅτι κατεχρίϑη, μεταμεληϑεὶς ἀπέ- 
4 στρεψε τὰ τριάκοντα ἀργύρια τοῖς ἀρχιερεῦσι καὶ τοῖς πρεσβυτέροις ' λέγων" 

ἥμαρτον παραδοὺς αἷμα ἀϑῶον. οἱ δὲ εἶπον" ti πρὸς ἡμᾶς ; σὺ ὄψει. 
ὅ Καὶ ῥίψας τὰ ἀργύρια ἐν τῷ ναῷ Acts I. 18, 19. 

ἀνεχώρησε, καὶ ἀπελϑὼν ἀπήγξατο. 18 Οὗτος μὲν οὖν ἐχτήσατο χωρίον ἐκ 
6 Οἱ δὲ ᾿ἀρχιερεῖς λαβόντες τὰ ἀργύρια μισϑοῦ τῆς ἀδικίας" καὶ πρηνὴς γε- 

εἶπον" οὐκ ἔξεστι βαλεῖν αὐτὰ εἰς τὸν γόμενος ἐλάκησε μέσος καὶ ἐξεχύϑη 


21 


162 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS [Parr VIIL. 








MATTH. XXVII: 
~ > 4 A σ ; > 
κορβανᾶν, ἔπει τιμὴ αἱματὸς ἔστι. 
7 Συμβούλιον δὲ λαβόντες ἡγόρασαν ἐξ 
αὐτῶν τὸν ἀγρὸν τοῦ κεραμέως, εἰς 
8 capi τοῖς ξένοις. Aid ἐχλήϑη oO 
ἀγρὸς ἐχεῖνος ἀγρὸς αἵματος ἕως τῆς 
9 σήμερον. Τότε ἐπληρώϑη τὸ ῥηθὲν 
ΟΝ ὁ , ~ ? , a Δ» A , 3 Ul Ἁ 
διὰ “]ερεμίου τοῦ προφήτου λέγοντος "ὃ καὶ ἔλαβον τὰ τριάκοντα ἀργύρια, τὴν 
\ ~ , a: > , VS ὧν ἡ my 1 ν᾿ Ὁ" ἄν Ὲ 
10 τιμὴν τοῦ τετιμημένου, OV ἐτιμήσαντο ἀπὸ υἱῶν ᾿Ισραὴλ, ἵ καὶ ἔδωκαν αὑτὰ εἰς 
τὸν ἀγρὸν τοῦ κεραμέως, καϑὰ συνέταξέ μοι κύριος. 


ACTS I, | 
19 πάντα τὰ σπλάγχνα αὐτοῦ. Καὶ γνω- - 
στὸν ἐγένετο πᾶσι τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν 
c ’ σ ~ 4 
]Ἱερουσαλῆμ, wore κληϑῆναι τὸ χω- 
, δον ~ 287 , eee 
ρίον ἐκεῖνο τῇ ἰδίᾳ διαλέκτῳ αὑτῶν 
"A 18 , ~ > re a 
κελδαμα, τοῦτ᾽ ἔστι χωρίον αἵματος. 


§ 152. Jesus is led away to be crucified.—Jerusalem. 
Sixth Day of the Week. 
Marx XV. 20—23. 


Marra. XXVII. 31—34. Joun XIX. 16, 17. ᾿ 


3953 » 

ἐνέπαιξαν 
3 ~ 5... ἢ ιν. 
αὐτῷ, ἐξέδυσαν αὐτὸν 
A [4 4 δ... 9 
τὴν χλαμύδα καὶ ἕνὲ- 


4A σ 
Καὶ ore 


δυσαν αὐτὸν τὰ ἱμάτια 
αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἀπήγαγον αὖ- 
τὸν εἰς τὸ σταυρῶσαι. 
\ t 
"Efeoyousvor δὲ εὕρον 
» ~ 
ἄνϑρωπον Κυρηναῖον, 
3 , , ~ 
ὀνόματι Σιμωνα" tov- 
σ ἣ 
τον ἠγγάρευσαν, ἵνα HOY 
τὸν σταυρὸν αὐτοῦ. 


~ ϑῳ. » > \ ‘ 
τῷ, ἐξέδυσαν αὑτὸν τὴν 
A 
πορφύραν καὶ ἐνέδυσαν 
a4 hse , A OM 
αὑτὸν TH ἱμάτια TH ἰδια, 
‘ > ’ 3 4 
καὶ ἐξάγουσιν αὑτὸν, 
ἵνα σταυρώσωσιν αὐτόν. 


21 Καὶ ἀγγαρεύουσι παρά- 


γοντά τινὰ Σίμωνα Κυ- 
ρηναῖον, ἐρχόμενον ἀπὶ 
3 - A , > 

ἀγροῦ, τὸν πατέρα -A- 
λεξάνδρου καὶ ῬῬούφου, 
ἵνα ἄρῃ τὸν σταυρὸν 


20 Καὶ ὅτε ἐνέπαιξαν av- 16 ---Παρέλαβον δὲ τὸν “In- 


σοῦν καὶ ἤγαγον. 
Καὶ βαστάζων τὸν 
σταυρὸν αὑτοῦ--- 


Luxe XXIII. 26—33. 
Kai ὡς ἀπήγαγον av- 
τόν, ἐπιλαβόμενοι Σίμω- 
γός τινος Κυρηναίου ἐρ- 
χομένου am ἀγροῦ ἐπέ- 
ϑηχαν αὐτῷ τὸν σταυ- 
ρὸν φέρειν ὄπισϑεν τοῦ 


27 Ἰησοῦ. Ἡκολούϑει δὲ 
αὐτῷ πολὺ πλῆϑος τοῦ 
28 λαοῦ καὶ γυναικῶν, at καὶ ἐκόπτοντο καὶ. ἐθρήνουν αὐτόν. Σεραφεὶς δὲ πρὸς 
αὐτὰς ὁ ᾿Ιησοὺς ‘eine’ ϑυγατέρες Ἱερουσαλήμ, μὴ κλαίετε ἐπὶ ἐμέ" πλὴν ἐφ᾽ 
29 ἑαυτὰς κλαίετε καὶ ἐπὶ τὰ τέκνα ὑμῶν. Ὅτι ἰδού, ἔρχονται ἡμέραι, ἐν αἷς 
ἐροῦσι" μακάριαι αἱ στεῖραι καὶ κοιλίαι, αἵ οὐκ ἐγέννησαν, καὶ μαστοί, οἵ οὐκ 
30 ἐϑήλασαν." Tore ἄρξονται. λέγειν τοῖς ὄρεσι" πέσετε ἐφ ἡμᾶς, καὶ τοῖς βουνοῖς " 
31 καλύψατο ἡμᾶς. Ὅτι εἰ ἐν τῷ ὑγρῷ ξύλῳ ταῦτα ποιοῦσιν, ἐν τῷ ξηρῷ 
32 τί γένηται; Ἤγοντο δὲ καὶ ἕτεροι δύο κακοῦργοι σὺν αὖ- | 
MARK XV. τῷ ἀναιρεϑῆναι. JOHN XIX. 


ἃ αὐτοῦ. 


MATTH. XXVII. 


33 Καὶ ἐλϑόντες εἰς 22 Καὶ φέρουσιν αὐ- 23. Καὶ ὅτε ἀπῆλϑον 1Ἱ ---ἐξῆλϑεν εἰς τὸν 7 
τόπον λεγόμενον τὸν ἐπὶ Γολγοϑᾶ ἐπὶ τὸν τόπον λεγόμενον xgavi- — 
Γολγοθᾶ, 6 ἐστι τόπον, ὅ ἐστι με. τὸν καλούμενον ου τόπον, ὃς λέγε- 
λεγόμενος κρανίον ϑερμηνευόμενον " Keavior,— rau Ἑβραϊσεὶ Γολ- 

34 τόπος, ' ἔδωκαν κρανίου τόπος. γοϑᾶ, 





. 9. Zech. 11, 12 sq. Comp. Jer. 32, 6 sq. 





b 29, Comp. Is.54,1. “ 30. Hos, 10,8. 





eet 











§§ 152, 153.] 


UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 


169 





MATTH. XXVII. 


αὐτῷ πιεῖν ὄξος μετὰ χολῆς μεμιγμέ- 
γον" χαὶ γευσάμενος οὐκ ἤϑελε πιεῖν. 


MARK XV. 


23 Καὶ ἐδίδουν αὐτῷ πιεῖν ἐσμυρνισμένον 


οἶνον" ὁ δὲ οὐκ ἔλαβϑ. 


§ 153. The Crucifixion.—Jerusalem. 
: Sixth Day of the Week. 


Marr. X XVII. 35-83. Marx X V.24—28. 


τη, καὶ ἐσταύρω- 


38 Τότε σταυροῦν- 27 σὰν αὐτόν.--- Καὶ 


35 


A > ~ , 
ται σὺν αὑτῷ dvo 
λῃσταί, εἷς ἐκ 

~ 4 ἂν» 
δεξιῶν καὶ εἷς 
5 > , 
ἐξ οὐωνύμω».-- 


σὺν αὐτῷ σταυ- 
~ , , 
ροῦσι δύο λῃστας, 
[2 3 - 4 
ἕνα ἐκ δεξιῶν noe 
“ 3 > , 
ἕνα ξξ εὐωνύμων 


28 αὐτοῦ. Καὶ ἐπλη- 


ρώϑῃ ἡ γραφὴ ἡ λέγου- 
σα ὃ καὶ μετὰ ἀνόμων 


Σταυρώσαντες δὲ 
αὐτὸν διεμερίσαν- 
το τὰ ἱμάτια αὖ- 
τοῦ,-- 


24 ἐλογίσϑη. --- Καὶ 


σταυρώσαντες αὖ- 
A , 
τὸν διαμερίζονται 


Ἁ « , > 
τὰ ματιὰ αὖ- 


_T0U,— 


Luxe XXIII. 33, 
34, 38, 

“ἫΝ 4 
σαν αὐτὸν καὶ 
τοὺς κακούργους, 
« Α > ~ 
ov μὲν &% δεξιῶν, 
a φΦὺν 3 
ov δὲ ξξ ἀριστε- 


384 ρῶν. Ὁ δὲ Ἰ1η- 


~ ow: , 
σοὺς éheys’ πά- 
τερ, ἄφες αὐτοῖς" 

> ‘ a μ ’ὕ 
οὐ γὰρ οἰδασι, τί 
ποιοῦσι. 


διαμεριζόμενοι 
‘ Gc , 3 
δὲ τὰ ἱμάτια αὖ- 
τοῦ--- 


Joun XIX. 18—24. 
25 “Hy δὲ ὥρα τρί- 33 —Exet ἐσταύρω- 18 


σ 3 A 5 
που αὑτὸν ἐ- 
σταύρωσαν, καὶ 
μετ αὐτοῦ ἄλλους 
δύο ἐντεῦϑεν καὶ 
> ~ , 
δγτευϑὲν, μέσον 
A ~ 
δὲ τὸν ᾿]ησοῦν. 


28 Οἱ οὖν στρατι- 


~ σ 3 ? 

ὦται, OTE ἐσταύ- 
A 3 

ρῶσαν τὸν Ly- 

σοῦν, ἔλαβον τὰ 
, rot 

ἱμάτια αὐτοῦ, καὶ 

ἐποίησαν τέσσαρα 


, A ~ 4 
μέρη, ἑκάστῳ στρατιώτῃ μέρος, καὶ τὸν χιτῶνα. ἦν δὲ ὁ χιτὼν ἄῤῥαφος, 
~ σ 
24 ἐκ τῶν ἄνωϑεν ὑφαντὸς δι᾿ ὅλου. Εἶπον οὖν πρὸς ἀλλήλους " μὴ σχίσωμεν 


--ἰβάλλοντες 24 


κλῆρον" [ἵνα πλη- 
ρωϑῇ τὸ ῥηϑὲν 
ὑπὸ τοῦ προφή- 


--ἰάλλοντες 34 


~ ter > [4 
κλῆρον ἐπὶ αὑτὰ, 
ld , at 
τίς τί ἄρῃ. 


b , Ἂς IAAL AO’ 
του" διεμερίσαντο TH ἱματιὰ μου 
~ 4 
ἑαυτοῖς, καὶ ἐπὶ TOY ἱματισμόν μου 
- A , > 
ἔβαλον κλῆρον] καὶ καϑήμενοι ἐ- 


τήρουν αὐτὸν ἐχεῖ. 
Καὶ ἐπέϑηκαν ἐ:- 
πάνω τῆς κεφα- 
λῆς αὐτοῦ τὴν 
αἰτίαν αὐτοῦ γε- 
t 
γραμμένην" OVTOS 
> > ~ « 
ἔστιν ]ησοῦς 0 
A Ie | 
βασιλεὺς τῶν Tov- 
δαίων. 


GY τῆς αἰτίας αὖ- 
τοῦ ἐπιγεγραμμέ- 
vn” 


ὁ βασιλεὺς 
τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων. 


--ἔβαλον 


κλῆρον. 


αὐτόν, ἀλλὰ λα- 
χωμεν περὶ αὐτοῦ, 
τίνος ἔσται. (ἵνα 
ἡ γραφὴ πληρωϑῇ 
ἡ λέγουσα “" διε- 


4 ; ~ 
μερίσαντο τὰ ἱμάτιά μου ἑαυτοῖς, 
Ἁ batt... 4 ’ 
καὶ ἐπὶ τὸν ἱματισμόν μου ἔβα- 
- « 4 F ~ 
Lov κλῆρον.) οἱ μὲν οὖν στρατιῶται 


\ , 
γραφή γεγραμμένη 
ἐπὶ αὐτῷ γράμμα- 
σιν Ἑλληνικοῖς καὶ 
καὶ 
Ἑβραϊκοῖς " οὗτός 
> « 4 
ἔστιν ὁ βασιλεὺς 

~ 3 , 
τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων. 


Ῥωμαϊκοῖς 


ταῦτα ἐποίησαν. 


26 Καὶ ἦν ἡ ἐπιγρα- 38 ν δὲ καὶ ἐπι- 19 -- Ἔγραψε δὲ καὶ 


τίτλον ὁ Πιλάτος 
‘ ” te, 
καὶ ednuev ἐπι 
τοῦ σταυροῦ. ἦν 
δὲ γεγραμμένον" 
᾿Ιησοῦς 6 Ναζω- 
~ ε A 
ραῖος ὃ βασιλεὺς 
~ > ’ 
τῶν ᾿]Ιουδαίων. 





8 2; Is. 5512, 


> 35 etc. Ps. 22, 19. 


164 


THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS 


[Parr VIII. 





JOHN XIX. 


~ - ‘ ~ 
0. Τοῦτον οὖν τὸν τίτλον πολλοὶ ἀνέγνωσαν τῶν Ιουδαίων, ὅτι ἐγγὺς ἦν ὁ τόπος 
em , σ΄ » , ©? ~ «5 οὗ 
τῆς πόλεως, ὅπου ἐσταυρώϑη ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς" καὶ ἦν γεγραμμένον Ἑβραϊστί, Ἕλλη- 


< - 3 ~ ~ ~ 
21 moti, ἹΡωμαϊστί. Ἔλεγον οὖν τῷ Πιλάτῳ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων" μὴ 


§ 164. 16 Jews mock at Jesus on the Cross. 


39 


4 


— 


γράφε" ὁ βασιλεὺς τῶν. ᾿Ιουδαίων- ἀλλ᾽ ὅτι ἐκεῖνος εἶπε" βασιλεύς εἶμι τῶν 
22 ᾿Ιουδαίων. ᾿“΄πεκρίϑη ὁ Πιλάτος " ὃ γέγραφα, γέγραφα. 


Marra. XXVIL 39—44, 


A 
Οἱ δὲ παραπορευόμενοι ἐβλασφή- 
μουν αὐτὸν κινοῦντες τὰς κεφαλὰς 
40 αὑτῶν ' καὶ λέγοντες" ὃ καταλύων 


A ‘ ‘ 3 Ly 
TOV VAOV και Ev TOLOLY 


ἡμέραις οἰκοδομῶν, σῶ- 
σον» σεαυτόν" εἰ υἱὸς εἶ 
τοῦ ϑεοῦ, κατάβηϑι 
> ‘ ~ ~ ¢€ , 
“20 τοῦ σταυροῦ.ἡ Ομοί- 
ὡς δὲ καὶ οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς 
ἐμπαίζοντες μετὰ τῶν 
‘\ 
γραμματέων καὶ πρεσ- 


42 βυτέρων ἔλεγον" ἄλλους 


᾿ἔσωσεν, ἑαυτὸν οὐ δύ- 
rata σῶσαι" εἰ βασι- 
λεὺς ᾿Ισραήλ ἐστι, κατα- 
Baro νῦν ἀπὸ τοῦ σταυ- 
ροῦ, καὶ πιστεύσομεν 


91 


82 


Jerusalem. 


Sixth Day of the Week. 


29. 


He commends his Mother to John.— 


Mark XV. 29—32, 
4 
Καὶ οἱ παραπορευόμενοι ἐβλασφή- 
μουν αὐτὸν κινοῦντες τὰς κεφαλὰς 
αὑτῶν καὶ λέγοντες" οὐά" 6 κα- 


, ‘ ‘ ‘ > 4 « 
ταλύων τὸν ναὸν καὶ ἐν τρισὶν ἧ- 
, > “« ! ~ \ 4 , > A 

30 μέραις οἰκοδομῶν,' σῶσον σεαυτὸν καὶ κατάβα ἀπὸ 
τοῦ σταυροῦ. 


ὋὉμοί.- 
ἀρχιερεῖς 
> , A > 7, 
ἐμπαίζοντες πρὸς ἀλλή- 
λους μετὰ τῶν γραμ- 
ματέων ἔλεγον" ἄλλους 
Υ «ς ‘ > , 
éowoer, ἑαυτὸν ov dv- 
vata σῶσαι. “O Xo- 

, ε ‘ bal 
στὸς, ὁ «βασιλεὺς τοῦ 


A c 
ως χαὶ οἱ 


᾿]σραήλ, καταβάτω νῦν 


~ ~ [4 
ἀπὸ τοῦ σταυροῦ, ἵνα 


Luxe XXIIL 35-37. 39-43. 
35 Καὶ εἱστήκει 6 λαὸς 


ϑεωρῶν" ἐξεμυχτήριζον 
A 

δὲ καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες σὺν 
αὐτοῖς λέγοντες " ἄλλους 
ἔσωσε, σωσάτω ἑαυτόν, 
2 t er > ‘ ς 

εἰ οὗτος ἔστιν ὃ Χρι- 

7 ε ~ ~ > 
στὸς, ὃ tov ϑεοῦ ἐχλε- 


A 
36 uzog. ᾿Ἐγέπαιζον δὲ αὖ- 


τῷ καὶ οἱ στρατιῶται, 
προζερχόμενοι καὶ ὄξος 


~ SS 
43 αὐτῷ. Πέποιϑεν ἐπὶ τὸν 
ϑεόν᾽ ῥυσάσϑω νῦν av- 


ἰδωμὲν καὶ πιστεύσωμεν. 37 προςφέροντες αὐτῷ! καὶ 
λέγοντες " εἰ σὺ εἶ ὁ βα- 
‘ ~ > ; 

σιλεὺς τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων, 
39 σῶσον σεαυτόν.--- Εἷς δὲ 
τῶν» κρεμασϑέντων κα- 

, > , > 
κούργων ἐβλασφήμει av- 

A ’ > \ € 
τὸν λέγων" εἰ σὺ εἶ ὁ 

- ~ ‘4 12 Φ > , » ~ , 

40 Χριστός, σῶσον σεαυτὸν καὶ ἡμᾶς. ᾿Α΄ποχριϑεὶς δὲ ὁ ἕτερος ἐπετίμα αὐτῷ λέ- 
“ὦ ~ ~ << ~, ‘ , “ἃ 

41 yor" οὐδὲ φοβῇ σὺ τὸν ϑεόν, ὅτι ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ κρίματι εἶ; Καὶ ἡμεῖς μὲν δικαίως 
ra 4 > » ‘ 

42 ἄξια γὰρ ὧν ἐπράξαμεν» ἀπολαμβάνομεν" οὗτος δὲ οὐδὲν ἄτοπον ἔπραξε. Καὶ 
~ ~ a * > ~ , ‘ 

43 ἔλεγε τῷ ᾿Ιησοῦ" μνήσϑητί pov, κύριε, ὅταν ἔλϑῃς ἐν τῇ βασιλείᾳ σου. Καὶ 

~ ~ wr ~ ww > ~ , 
εἶπεν ιαὐτῷ ὃ ᾿]ησοῦς" ἀμὴν λέγω σοι, σήμερον met ἐμοῦ ἔσῃ ἐν τῷ παραδείσῳ. 


σ - » «»ὔ 

τόν, εἰ ϑέλει αὐτόν "" εἶπε γάρ" ὅτι ϑεοῦ εἶμι υἱός. 
‘ 4 
44 Τὸ δ᾽ αὐτὸ καὶ οἱ λῃ- 
, 

forai συσταυρωϑέντες 

᾿ > ~ > , > "4 
αὑτῷ ὠνείδιζον αὑτὸν. 


καὶ οἱ συνεσταυρωμένοι 
> “~ > ’ > , 
αὐτῷ ὠνείδιζον αὐτόν. 





« 43, Comp. Ps. 22, 7. 8. 


—_——— 





OL μενον" “νὰ νι ϑνν. - νων. μὰ ...ὄ «.ὅὄἕὔ ὧν ᾿ ἀν 





Pe Κ ὙΠ 








§§ 154, 155.] 


UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 


165 





25 


Joun XIX. 25—27. 


Εἱστήκεισαν δὲ παρὰ τῷ σταυρῷ tov ᾿Ι]ησοῦ ἡ μήτηρ αὐτοῦ καὶ ἡ ἀδελφὴ τῆς 
26 μητρὸς αὐτοῦ, Μαρία ἡ τοῦ Κλωπᾶ, καὶ Μαρία ἡ Μαγδαληνή. ᾿Ιησοῦς οὖν 
ἰδὼν τὴν μητέρα καὶ τὸν μαϑητὴν παρεστῶτα, ὃν ἠγάπα, λέγει τῇ μητρὶ αὑτοῦ" 
27 γύναι, ἰδού, ὁ υἱός σου. Εἶτα λέγει τῷ μαϑητῇ᾽ ἰδού, ἡ μήτηρ σου. καὶ an 


3 , ~ 4 om” ers ¢ A > 8, 
exeivng τῆς ὥρας ἔλαβεν αὑτὴν ὁ μαϑητῆς εἰς TH Wie. 


§ 155. Darkness prevails. Christ expires on the Cross.—Jerusalem. 


Matra. XX VII. 45—50. 


45 


46 


"Ano δὲ ἕκτης woag 33 


σκότος ἐγένετο ἐπὶ πᾶ- 
\ ~ / σ 

σαν. τὴ» γῆν ἕως ὥρας 
ἐγνάτης. Περὶ δὲ τὴν 
> , σ > , 

evvatyy ὥραν ἀνεβοη- 
σὲν ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς φωνῇ με- 
γάλῃ λέγων" Hi, ἠλί, 


Sixth Day of the Week. 


Mark XV. 33—37. 


Γενομένης δὲ ὥρας 44 


ἕχτης σχότος ἐγένετο 
+ a \ ~ [4 
ép olny τὴν γῆν ἕως 


84 ὥρας ἐννάτης. Καὶ τῇ 


ὥρᾳ τῇ ἐννάτῃ ἐβόησεν 
δ᾽ Ἰησοῦς φωνῇ μεγάλῃ 
λέγων " ἐλωΐ, ἐλωΐ, λαμ- 


45 ἐγνάτης. 


Luxe X XIII. 44—46. - 

"Hy δὲ ὡςεὶ ὥρα ἕκτη, 
καὶ σχότος ἐγένετο ἐφ᾽ 
ὅλην τὴν γῆν ἕως ὥρας 
Καὶ ἐσκοτί- 
σϑη ὁ ἥλιος, --- 


ua σαβαχϑανί; 0 ἐστι : 
᾿μεϑερμηνευόμενον" ὁ 
ϑεός μου, ὁ ϑεός μου, 


λαμὰ σαβαχϑανί; cove 
ἔστι" θεέ μου, ϑεέ μου" 


ΣΉ ΒΟ ΤΥ π΄ τ 


- ’, > , a 
woe TL μὲ ἐγκατέλιπες ; 


a ΡΞ 


Joun XIX. 28—30. 
εἰδὼς ὁ 


5 ’ 3 a 
εἰς τί μὲ ἐγκατέλιπες ; 
A ~ ~ ~ ~ 
47 Twig δὲ τῶν ἐκεῖ ἑστώ- 35 Καί τινὲς τῶν παρ- 28 Μετὰ τοῦτο 
>? ~ vA , a+ 
]ησοῦς, ote πᾶντὰ ἤδη 
“ 3 , wo : , Φ 
ott Πλίαν φωνεῖ οὗτος τετέλεσται, ἵνα TELEO- 
ΜΗ ‘ ra a τοὶ 
48 Καὶ εὐϑέως δραμὼν εἷς 36 φωνεῖ. ϑῇ ἡ γραφή," λέγει" 
4 ~ ~ es 
ἰκαὶ γεμίσας σπόγγον 29 διψῶ. LxEvog οὖν ἔκει- 
+ Ἁ 
ZO ὄξους μεστόν᾽ οἱ δὲ 
» 
πλήσαντες σπόγγον 0- 
Eovg καὶ ὑσσώπῳ περι- 
ϑέντες προςφήνεγκαν αὖ- 


= 


τ 


τῶν ἀκούσαντες ἔλεγον' εστηχότων ἀκούσαντες 

ἔλεγον" ἰδού, ᾿Πλίαν 
A 

Δραμὼν δὲ εἷς 

} ἐξ αὐτῶν καὶ λαβὼν 

“ μὴ 

Ι σπόγγον, πλήσας τὸ ὅ- 

A A ’ 

ξους καὶ περιϑεις καλᾶ- 

> , > , € 

49 μῳ, ἐπότιζεν αὑτὸν. Ot 
᾿ 

δὲ λοιποὶ ἔλεγον " ἄφες, 


a ’ 

ὄξους, περιϑείς τὲ κα- 
, 

λάμῳ, ἐπότίζεν αὐτὸν 
, a “ 

λέγων" ἄφετε, ἰδωμεν, 

εἰ ἔρχεται ᾿Ηλίας καϑε- 


ἴδωμεν, εἰ ἔρχεται ᾿᾽Ηλί- λεῖν αὐτόν. LUKE XXIIL τοῦ τῷ στόματι. 
, oe , 7 Μ- \ 
ας σώσων αὐτόν. MARK XV. 46 Kai φωνήσας 30 Ore ovr thas τὸ 


πες Eee 


o£0¢ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς εἶ- 
τετέλεσται" 


φωνῇ μεγάλῃ ὁ 
3 - 5 2 
]1ησοὺς sine’ ma- πε’ 


50 Ὁ δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς πά- 31 Ὃ δὲ ᾿]ησοῦς ἀ- 
λιν χράξας φωνῇ φεὶς φωνὴν με- 

‘ , τιν ὧν \ { 3 ἢ > ~ ἢ ν , \ 

i μεγάλῃ ἀφῆκε τὸ γάλην ἐξέπνευσε. 780, εἰς χεῖράς σον καὶ κλίνας τὴν κχε- 

Ἷ πνεῦμα. παραϑήσομαι τὸ φαλὴν παρέδωκε 

Ἷ πνεῦμά μου. καὶ ταῦτα εἰπὼν ἐξέπνευσεν. τὸ πνεῦμα. 





: ᾿ς 8 AG εἰς. Ps. 32,23 [1]. » 28. Comp. Ps. 69, 22. 





Mee ee eee - 


166 


THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE EVENTS 


[Parr VIII. 





§ 156. The vail of the Temple rent, and graves opened. Judgment of the Centurion. 
The Women at the Cross.—Jerusalem. 


Marra. X XVII. 51—56. 


51 


5 


w 


54 


5 


οι 


56 


31 


4 
Kai ἰδού, τὸ καταπέ- 
τασμα τοῦ ναοῦ ἐσχί- 
> , ῇ 3 A » 
σϑη εἰς δυο ano ἄνω- 
‘ 
Sev ἕως κάτω, καὶ ἡ 


38 


Sixth Day of the Week. 
Marx XV. 38—41. 


Luxe XXIII. 45, 47—49. 


Καὶ τὸ καταπέτασμα 45 -- Καὶ ἐσχίσϑη τὸ xa- 


- ~ > , > , 
τοῦ ναοῦ ἐσχίσϑη εἰς δύο, 
> A » ov , 
ano ἄνωϑεν ἕως κάτω. 


ταπέτασμα τοῦ ναοῦ 
μέσον. 


~ > ’ Ἁ c , > ? 4 ‘ ~ > , 
γῆ ἐσείσϑη, καὶ αἱ πέτραι ἐσχίσϑησαν᾽" καὶ τὰ μνημεῖα ἀνεῴ- 
χϑησαν, καὶ πολλὰ σώματα τῶν κεκοιμημένων ἁγίων ἠγέρϑη, 
‘nat ἐξελϑόντες ἐκ τῶν μνημείων μετὰ τὴν ἔγερσιν αὐτοῦ 


5 ~ > ‘ Cs if 
εἰςῆλϑον εἰς τὴν ἁγίαν 
, ‘ > , 
πόλιν καὶ ἐνεφανίσϑη- 
σαν πολλοῖς. ‘O δὲ ἑχα- 
τόνταρχος καὶ οἱ pmeT 
αὐτοῦ τηροῦντες τὸν 
3 “« 5ς, ἡ A 
Inoovr, ἰδόντες tov σει- 
σμὸν καὶ τὰ γενόμενα, 
ἐφοβήϑησαν σφόδρα λέ. 
γοντες᾽ ἀληϑῶς ϑεοῦ 
“A z tc F \ 
υἱὸς ἤν οὗτος. Hoar δὲ 
ἐχεῖ γυναῖχες πολλαὶ 
3 A , ~ 
amo μαχρῦϑεν ϑεωροῦ- 
σ 3 , 
σαι, aitives ἠκολουϑη- 
σαν τῷ Ἰησοῦ ἀπὸ τῆς 
Γαλιλαίας διακονοῦσαι 
αὐτῷ. Ἐν αἷς ἦν Μαρία 
ἡ Μαγδαληνή, καὶ Μα- 
’ « “3 , A 
gia ἢ tov ᾿Ιακώβου και 
> ~ ’ A ς 
Ion μήτηρ, καὶ ἢ 
, ~ «Ἡ» 
μήτηρ τῶν υἱῶν Ζεβε- 
δαίου. 


89 ᾿Ιδὼν δὲ ὁ κεντυρίων ὁ 47 ᾿Ιδὼν δὲ ὁ ἑχατόνταρ- 


40 


41 


παρεστηκὼς ἐξ ἐναντίας 
- 4 
αὐτοῦ, ὅτι οὕτω κράξας 
te / > 
ἐξέπνευσεν, εἶπεν" ἀλη- 
~ εἰν" ι 
ϑὼς ὁ ἄνϑρωπος ovrog 
«" x ~ 
viog ἢν ϑεου. 


Ἦσαν δὲ 
καὶ γυναῖκες ἀπὸ μα- 
, ~ > 
χρόϑεν Fewpovoat, ey 
τ yf ‘ ’ « 
αἷς ἤν καὶ Μαρία x 
Μαγδαληνή, καὶ Μαρία 
ς ~ 3 , ~ 
ἢ tov LIaxwBov tov 
μικροῦ καὶ loon μήτηρ, 
‘ , a δ 
καὶ Σαλώμη αἵ καὶ OTE 
ἦν ἐν τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ ἦκο- 


λούϑουν αὐτῷ καὶ διη- 


‘ , 3p ἢ 
yoo τὸ γενόμενον ἐδό- 
face τὸν ϑεὸν λέγων" 
", 4... τ 
ovtms ὁ ἄνϑρωπος ου- 


48 τος δίκαιος ἦν. Καὶ πάν- 


τὲς οἱ συμπαραγενό- 

a > 4 ‘ 
μενοι ὄχλοι ἐπὶ τὴν 
ϑεωρίαν ταύτην, ϑεω- 
ροῦντες τὰ γενόμενα, 
τύπτοντες ἑαυτῶν τὰ 


49 στήϑη ὑπέστρεφον. Ei- 


στήκεισαν δὲ πάντες οὗ 
γνωστοὶ αὐτοῦ μακρύ- 
Dev καὶ γυναῖκες, αἱ 
συνακολουϑήσασαι av- 
τῷ ano τῆς Γαλιλαίας, 
ὁρῶσαι ταῦτα. 


κόνουν αὐτῷ᾽ καὶ ἄλλαι πολλαὶ αἱ 
~ > ἌΡ me , 
συναναβᾶσαι αὐτῷ εἰς “Ιεροσόλυμα. 


§ 157. The taking down from the Cross. The burial.—Jerusalem. 


Sixth Day of the Week. 


Joun XIX. 31—42. 


Οἱ οὖν ᾿]Ἰουδαῖοι, ἵνα μὴ μείνῃ ἐπὶ τοῦ σταυροῦ τὰ σώματα ἐν τῷ σαββάτῳ͵ 
ἐπεὶ παρασκευὴ ἦν, (ἦν γὰρ μεγάλη ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνου τοῦ σαββάτου,) ἠρώτησαν 
32 τὸν Πιλάτον, ἵνα κατεαγῶσιν αὐτῶν τὰ σκέλη καὶ ἀρϑῶσιν. Ἦλθον οὖν οἱ 
στρατιῶται, καὶ τοῦ μὲν πρώτου κατέαξαν τὰ σκέλη καὶ τοῦ ἄλλου τοῦ συσταυ- 
33 ρωϑέντος αὐτῷ. “Emi δὲ τὸν ᾿Ιησοῦν ἐλϑόντες, ὡς εἶδον αὐτὸν ἤδη τεϑνηκότα, 














ae 


= 





§§ 156, 167. 


UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 


167 





‘ » ~ 
35 πλευρὰν ἔνυξε, καὶ εὐθὺς ἐξῆλϑεν αἷμα καὶ 
7, A ~ 
TUQYHE, καὶ ἀληϑινὴ αὐτοῦ ἐστιν ἡ μαρτυρία" 
σ ‘ ~ ~ 
36 Wa καὶ ὑμεῖς πιστεύσητε. ᾿Εγένετο γὰρ ταῦτα, 


JOHN XIX, 
3 , 3 ~ A , ~ ~ ~ 
84 οὐ κατέαξαν αὐτοῦ τὰ σκέλη, ! ἀλλ εἷς τῶν στρατιωτῶν λόγχῃ αὐτοῦ τὴν 


ὕδωρ. 


Καὶ ὁ ἑωρακὼς μεμαρ- 
κἀκεῖνος οἶδεν, ὅτι ἀληϑῆ λέγει, 
ἵνα ἡ γραφὴ πληρωϑῇ ὀστοῦν 


37 οὐ συντριβήσεται αὐτοῦ. Καὶ πάλιν ἑτέρα γραφὴ λέγει: ἢ ὄψονται εἰς ὃν 
Marr. XXVII.57-61. Marx XV. 42—47. Luxe XXIII. 50---56. ἐξεκέντησαν. 
᾿Οψίας δὲ yevo- 42 Kai ἤδη ὀψίας 54 Καὶ ἡμέρα ἦν 38 Μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα 


57 


58 


, 3 a+ 
μένης ἤλϑὲεν ἃἂν- 
ϑρωπος πλούσιος 
ano Aopmadaias, 


, > ΔΗ, 
γενομέγης, ἐπεὶ ἣν 
σ 
παρασχευή, ὃ ἐσ- 


τι προσάββατον, 50 oxe.—Kai 


τοὔνομα ᾿Ιωσήφ, 45! ἦλϑεν ᾿Ιωσὴφ 6 


α ‘ ὯΝ. > 
OS και αὑτὸς ἐμα- 
’ ~ > 
Ontevoe τῷ In- 

~ a 

σοῦ. Ovtog προς- 
ελϑὼν τῷ Πιλά- 
τῷ ἠτήσατο τὸ 
σῶμα tov ᾿]ησοῦ. 
τότε ὁ Πιλάτος 
= » 3 

ἐκέλευσεν ἀποδο- 


ϑῆναι τὸ σῶμα. 


59 


ἀπὸ ᾿Αριμαϑαΐί. 
ας, εὐσχήμων βου- 
λευτής, ὃς καὶ 


παρασχευή, καὶ 
’ > , 
σάββατον ἐπέφω- 
3 , 
ἰδού, 
PAN > as 3 
ἀνῆρ ὀνόματι 1ω- 
’ ᾿ 
ong, βουλευτὴς 
ὑπάρχων, ἀνὴρ ἀ- 
\ A , 
yados καὶ δίκαι- 


αὐτὸς ἦν προςδε- 510g, ' (οὗτος οὐχ 


χύμενος τὴν βασι- 
λείαν τοῦ ϑεοῦ" 
τολμήσας εἰςῆλϑε 
πρὸς Πιλάτον καὶ 
ἠτήσατο τὸ σῶμα 


44 τοῦ Ἰησοῦ. Ὁ δὲ 


Πιλάτος ἐθαύμασεν, εἰ ἤδη 


γος τὸν κεντυρίωνα ἐπηρώ- 
τησὲν αὐτόν, εἰ πάλαι ἀπέ- 
45 ϑανε. Καὶ γνοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ 
κεντυρίωνος ἐδωρήσατο τὸ 


‘ 
Και 
- ¢ ? A 
σῶμα ὃ Lwong 
3 7, 4... 
ἐνετύλιξεν αὑτὸ 
σινδόνι καϑαρᾷ, 
‘yar ἔϑηκεν αὐτὸ 
ἐν τῷ καινῷ av- 

~ a 
τοῦ μνημείῳ, ὃ 
ἐλατόμησεν ἐν τῇ 

A 
πέτρᾳ, καὶ προς- 
κυλίσας λίϑον μέ- 
yar τῇ ϑύρᾳ τοῦ 


μνημείου ἀπῆλϑεν. 


λαβὼν τὸ 46 Καὶ 


- ~> , 
σῶμα τῷ Loong. 
ἀγοράσας 

A 
σινδόνα καὶ καϑε- 
λὼν αὐτὸν ἐνεί- 
Anos τῇ σινδόνι, 
καὶ 

᾿ς μῆς ἢ > ’ 
αὐτὸν ἐν μνημείῳ, 
Ἂ Ἢ , 
0 ἦν λελατομημέ- 
vov & πέτρας, 
καὶ  mMOOGEXVAIGE 
λίϑον ἐπὶ τὴν ϑύ- 
ραν τοῦ μνημείου. 


ἥ, 
ἥν συγκατατεϑει- 


μένος τῇ βουλῇ 


A «Ὁ , 3 
καὶ τῇ πράξει αὖ- 
τῶν;) ἀπὸ “Aor 
μαϑαίας πόλεως 

w -% ’ α 
τῶν ]Ιουδαίων, ος 


ἠρώτησε τὸν Πι- 
[4 ee A € 
λάτον ὁ Iwong ὁ 
ἀπὸ ᾿“ριμαϑαι- 
Ἃ \ 
ας, ὧν μαϑητῆς 
τοῦ “Inoov, κε- 
’ ‘ A 
χρυμμένος δὲ διὰ 
τὸν φόβον τῶν 
ϑ rd σ a 
Tovdaiwr, iva ἄρῃ 
τὸ σῶμα tov ᾿]η- 
σοῦ" καὶ ἐπέτρεψεν 
ὁ Πιλάτος. ἦλϑεν 
΄ « -% \ 
οὐν καὶ 708 TO 
σῶμα tov Incov. 


A 7 \ 4... Ὁ A : 
καὶ προςεδέχετο χαὶ αὐτὸς τὴν Ba- 
‘ <_f ~ ~ t 
TéOvyne’ καὶ προρκαλεσάμε- δ σιλείαν tov ϑεοῦ" οὗτος προςελ- 
ϑὼν τῷ Πιλάτῳ ἠτήσατο τὸ σῶμα 


tov Inoov. 


39 "ADs δὲ καὶ Ni- 


κόδημος, ὁ ἐλϑὼν πρὸς τὸν 
Ἰησοῦν νυκτὸς τὸ πρῶτον, φέ- 
ρῶν μίγμα σμύρνης καὶ ἀ- 
40 λόης ὡς λίτρας ἑκατόν. Ἔλα- 
βον οὖν τὸ σῶμα τοῦ ᾿ΪΙησοῦ 


κατέϑηκεν ὅ8 Καὶ καϑελὼν αὖ- 


τὸ ἐνετύλιξεν av- 
A ry 4 
τὸ σινδόνι, καὶ 


ay Pe ter 
EdnuEey αὐτὸ Ee 
41 ἐνταφιάζειν. Ἦν 


’ 4 - 

μνήματι λαξευτῷ, 
τ 3 5 Ios 

Ov οὐκ ἣν οὐδέπω 
οὐδεὶς κείμενος. 


ΝΥ gh 9,* 
καὶ ἔδησαν avto 
> ’ A ~ 
οϑονίοις μετὰ τῶν 
ἀρωμάτων, κα- 

‘ 

Yas ἔϑος ἐστὶ 
τοῖς ᾿Ϊουδαίοις 


4 ~ 

δὲ ἐν τῷ τόπῳ, 
σ 3 5 
omov ἑσταυρωϑη, 
~ 4 ~ 
κῆπος καὶ ἕν τῷ 





a 36. Ex. 12,46. Ps. 34, 20. 


b 37. Zech. 12, 10. 


168 EVENTS UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. [Parr VIII. 





JOHN XIX. 


“ τ A ~ t 
42 κήπῳ μνημεῖον καινόν, ἐν ᾧ οὐδέπω οὐδεὶς ἐτέϑη. Ἐχεῖ οὖν διὰ τὴν mage- 


61 


65 
66 


κ᾿ a Oe , 4 3 ‘ τ \ ~ ” Misia ~ 
σκευὴν τῶν Ιουδαίων, ott ἐγγὺς ἣν τὸ μνημεῖον, ἔϑηκαν τὸν ᾿]ησοῦν. 
ΜΑΤΤΗ. XXVII. MARK Xv. LUKE XXIlll. 


"Hy δὲ ἐχεῖ Magia ἡ 47°H δὲ Magia ἡ Mayda- 55 Κατακολουϑήσασαι δὲ 


A a Ἁ A ~ A ~ 

Μαγδαληνὴ καὶ ἡ ἄλλη ληνὴ καὶ Magia ᾿Ιωσὴῆ καὶ γυναῖκες, αἵτινες ἧ- 
Μαρία, καϑήμεναι ἀπ. ἐϑεώρουν, ποῦ τίϑετα. σαν συνεληλυϑυῖαι αὐ- 
VONTL τοῦ τάφου. τῷ ἐκ τῆς Γαλιλαίας, 
ἐθεάσαντο τὸ μνημεῖον, 
56 καὶ ὡς ἐτέϑη τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ. “Ὑποστρέψασαι δὲ ἡτοίμασαν ἀρώ- 

A , ‘ A A , .. - A ‘ > , 
ματα καὶ μύρα" καὶ TO μὲν σάββατον ἡσύχασαν κατὰ τὴν ἐντολήν. 


§ 158. The Watch at the Sepulchre-—VJerusalem. 


Seventh Duy of the Week, or Sabbath. 


Matru. XXVII. 62—66. 
ΤΊ δὲ 3 , [Δ ee A A a ΄ 9 Ἐπ. ~ | 
ἢ δὲ ἐπαύριον, ἥτις ἐστι μετὰ THY παρασκευήν, συνήχϑησαν οἱ ἀρχιερεῖς και 
« » \ , ! Y Ε , > , σ > ἂν ε λ , 
οἱ Φαρισαῖοι πρὸς Πιλάτον ' λέγοντες " κύριε, ἐμνήσθημεν, ort ἐκεῖνος ὁ mhavos 
” ~ \ oo Oe ais , ἥ > ~ Y 
εἶπεν ἔτι ζῶν" μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας ἐγείρομαι. Κέλευσον ovy ἀσφαλισϑῆναι τὸν 
, a - ’ «ς 7, Ψ 3 ’ c A 5 ~ A , 
τάφον ἕως τῆς τρίτης ἡμέρας, μήποτε ἔλϑοντες οἱ μαϑηται αὐτοῦ [νυκτὸς] κλέ- 
Woow αὐτὸν καὶ εἴπωσι τῷ λαῷ. ἠγέρϑη ἀπὸ τῶν νεκρῶν" καὶ ἔσται ἡ ἐσχάτη 
πλάνη χείρων τῆς πρώτης. Ἔφη αὐτοῖς ὃ Πιλάτος" ἔχετε κουστωδίαν" ὑπά- 
> , « δ « Ἁ , > , A , 
γετε, ἀσφαλίσασϑε ὡς οἰδατε. Oi δὲ mogevdertes ἡσφαλίσαντο τὸν τάφον 
σφραγίσαντες τὸν λίϑον μετὰ τῆς κουστωδίας. 





-—— 


᾿ 

Ὄ 
yy 
4 
z 
j 

; 
Ε΄. 
a 

> 

Ἧ 





PART IX. 


- 


OUR LORD’S RESURRECTION, HIS SUBSEQUENT APPEARANCES, AND HIS 
ASCENSION. 


Time: Forty days. 


§ 159. Morning of the Resurrection.—Jerusalem. 
First Day of the Week. 


Marx XVI. 1. 
1 Kui διαγενομένου tov σαββάτου Μαρία ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ καὶ Μαρία ἡ τοῦ ᾿Ιακώ- 
Ἁ , > , > , σ 3 - 3 ’ 3 , 
βου καὶ Σαλώμη ἡγόρασαν ἀρώματα, ἵνα ἐλϑοῦσαι ἀλείψωσιν αὑτὸν. 
Marra. XXVIII. 2--4. 

2 Καὶ ἰδού, σεισμὸς ἐγένετο μέγας " ἄγγελος γὰρ κυρίου καταβὰς ἐξ οὐρανοῦ προς- 
3 ελϑὼν ἀπεκύλισε τὸν λίϑον ἀπὸ τῆς ϑύρας καὶ ἐκάϑητο ἐπάνω αὐτοῦ. “Hy δὲ 

596... 5 ~ « > A ‘ 4 a > ~ \ « A , 3 A A ~ 
4 ἡ ἰδέα αὐτοῦ ὡς ἀστραπὴ καὶ TO ἔνδυμα αὐτοῦ λευκὸν woe χιῶν. Ano δὲ τοῦ 

φόβου αὐτοῦ ἐσείσϑησαν οἱ τηροῦντες καὶ ἐγένοντο ὡςεὶ νεκροί. 


§ 160. Visit of the Women to the Sepulchre. Mary Magdalene returns.—Jerusalem, 
First Day of the Week. 


Matra. XXVIII. 1. Marx XVI.2—4. Luxe XXIV.1—3: Joun XX. 1, 2. 


σχούσῃ εἰς μίαν 


σαββάτων, ἦλθε 


Magia ἡ Μαγδα- 
ληνὴ καὶ ἡ ἄλλη 
Μαρία ϑεωρῆσαι 
τὸν τάφον. 


τῶν ἔρχονται ἐπὶ 
τὸ μνημεῖον, ἀνα- 
φείλαντος τοῦ ἧ- 
8λίου. Καὶ ἔλεγον 
πρὸς ἑαυτάς" τίς 
ἡμῖν 
τὸν λίϑον ἐκ τῆς 


5 ’ὕ 
ἀποκυλίσει 


βαϑέος ἤἦλϑον ἐπὶ 
τὸ μνῆμα, φέρου- 
σαι ἃ ἡτοίμασαν 
ἀρώματα, καί τι- 
veg σὺν αὐταῖς. 
2 Εὗρον δὲ τὸν λί- 
Dov ἀποκεκυλι- 


22 


1 Owed δὲ σαββά- 2 Καὶ λίαν moat 1 Τῇ δὲ μιᾷ τῶν 1 Τῇ δὲ μιᾷ τῶν 
gov, τῇ ἐπιφω- τῆς μιᾶς σαββά- σαββάτων ὄρϑρου σαββάτων Μαρία 


ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ ἔρ- 
χεται moat σχο- 
τίας ἔτι οὔσης εἰς 
TO μνημεῖον, καὶ 
βλέπει tov λίϑον 
ἠρμένον ἐκ τοῦ 
μνημξίου. 


κ᾿. 
ὦ Σὰ 


170 


FROM OUR LORD’S RESURRECTION 


[Parr IX. 





MARK XVI, 


4 ϑύρας τοῦ μνημείου ; Kai ἀναβλέψα- 
σαι ϑεωροῦσιν, ὅτι ἀποχεχύλισται ὃ 
λίϑος" ἦν γὰρ μέγας σφόδρα. 


Ἰησοῦ. 
JOHN Xx. 


5 
LUKE XXIV. 
8 σμένον ἀπὸ τοῦ μνημείου" καὶ εἰςελ- 
~. τ A ~ ~ 
ϑοῦσαι οὐχ εὗρον τὸ σῶμα τοῦ κυρίου 


2 Τρέχει οὖ» καὶ ἔρχεται πρὸς Σίμωνα Πέτρον καὶ πρὸς τὸν ἄλλον μαϑητήν, ὃν 
~ ~ J so ~ 

ἐφίλει ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς, καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς" ἦραν τὸν κύριον ἐκ τοῦ μνημείου, καὶ οὐκ 

οἴδαμεν, ποῦ ἔϑηκαν αὐτόν. 


§ 161. Vision of Angels in the Sepulchre.—Jerusalem. 


Marx XVI. 5—7. 


5 Kat εἰςελϑοῦσαι sig τὸ μνημεῖον 4 
εἶδον veavioxoy χκαϑήμενον ἐν τοῖς 


First Day of the Week. 


δεξιοῖς, περιβεβλημένον στολὴν λευ- 


Marra. XXVIII. 5—7. 
5 ᾿Αποκριϑεὶς δὲ ὁ ἄγγε- 
λος εἶπε ταῖς γυναιξί" 
μὴ φοβεῖσϑε ὑμεῖς" οἷἵ- 
Sa γάρ, ὅτι ᾿Ιησοῦν τὸν 
ἐσταυρωμένον ζητεῖτε. 
6 Οὐκ ἔστιν ὧδε" ἠγέρϑη 
γάρ, καϑὼς εἶπε. δεῦτε, 
ἴδετε τὸν. τόπον, ὅπου 
7 ἔκειτο ὃ κύριος. 
ταχὺ πορευϑεῖσαι εἴ- 
mare τοῖς μαϑηταῖς αὖ- 
τοῦ, ὅτι ἠγέρϑη ἀπὸ 
τῶν νεχρῶν" καὶ ἰδού, 
προάγει ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν 
Γαλιλαίαν" ἐκεῖ αὐτὸν 
ὄψεσϑε. ἰδού, εἶπον ὑμῖν. 


Καὶ 


κήν" καὶ ἐξεϑαμβήϑη- 
A ~ 
θσαν. Ὁ δὲ λέγει αὐταῖς" 
μὴ ἐκϑαμβεῖσϑε: ᾿1η- 
σοῦν ζητεῖτε τὸν Νίαζα- 
ρηγὸν τὸν ἐσταυρωμέ- 
5 ’ > at 
γον" ἡγέρϑη, οὐκ. ἔστιν 
τ an ¢ , A 
ade’ ἰδὲ, ὃ τόπος, ὁπου 
Ἴ ἔϑηκαν αὐτόν. ᾽4λλ 
7 5 J ᾿ 4 ~ 
ὑπάγετε, εἴπατε τοῖς 
~ > ~ 4 ~ 
μαϑηταῖς αὐτοῦ καὶ τῷ 
σ 
Πέτρῳ, ὅτι προάγει ὑ- 
μᾶς εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν" 
ois sud x 
éxet αὑτὸν ὄψεσϑε, κα- 
ϑὼς εἶπεν ὑμῖν. 


“ 


Luxe XXIV. 4—8. 
Καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ διαπορεῖσϑαι 
3.1. ψ οὐδ ᾿ re Ψ 2 
αὑτὰς περὶ τούτου, καὶ ἰδοὺ, ἄνδρες 


δύο ἐπέστησαν αὐταῖς ἐν 
ἐσθήσεσιν ἀστραπτού- 
5 oa. ᾿Εμφόβων δὲ γε- 
γομένων αὐτῶν καὶ κλι- 
ψουσῶν τὸ πρόςωπον εἰς 
τὴν γῆν, εἶπον πρὸς αὖ- 
τάς" τί ζητεῖτε τὸν 
ζῶντα μετὰ τῶν γε- 
6 xoav; Οὐκ ἔστιν ὧδε, 
ἀλλ ἠγέρϑη. μνήσϑητε, 
ὡς ἐλάλησεν ὑμῖν ἔτι 
7 ὧν ἐν τῇ Γαλιλαίᾳ " λέ- 
γῶν" ὅτι δεῖ τὸν υἱὸν 
τοῦ ἀνθρώπου παρα- 
δοϑῆναι εἰς χεῖρας av- 
ϑρώπων ἁμαρτωλῶν 


~ 4 ~ ~ 

καὶ σταυρωϑῆναι καὶ τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ ἀναστῆ- 
Δ. ΄ ~ ε , : > ~ 

Sra. Καὶ ἐμνήσθησαν τῶν ῥημάτων αὑτοῦ. 


§ 162. The Women return to the City. Jesus meets them.—Jerusalem. 


First day of the Week. 


Marru. XXVIII. 8—10. 
8 Καὶ ἐξελϑοῦσαι ταχὺ ἀπὸ τοῦ 8. Καὶ ἐξελϑοῦσαι ἔφυγον ἀπὸ τοῦ 


μνημείου μετὰ φόβου καὶ χαρᾶς με- 
γάλης ἔδραμον ἀπαγγεῖλαι τοῖς μαϑη- 
9 ταῖς αὐτοῦ. ‘2g δὲ ἐπορεύοντο ἀπαγ- 


~ ~ > ~ \ 5 , 
γεῖλαι τοῖς μαϑηταῖς αὑτοῦ, καὶ ἰδού, 
©? ~ 3 3 pS , ὔ ¢ 9! ~ > , > 
ὁ Ἰησοῦς ἀπήντησεν αὐταῖς λέγων " χαίρετε. αἱ δὲ προςελϑοῦσαι ἐκράτησαν αὐτοῦ 
10 τοὺς πόδας καὶ προφεχύγνησαν αὐτῷ. Τότε λέγει αὐαῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς " μὴ φοβεῖσϑε" 


Mark XVI. 8. 


δι \. ΙΝ, , 4 
μνημείου" εἶχε δὲ αὐτὰς τρόμος καὶ 
” ‘ ? ‘ %o' 
ἔκστασις, καὶ ovdent οὐδὲν εἶπον" 
ἐφοβοῦντο γάρ. 


«Ἄλλα = 


δὲ 161, 162, 163, 164.] UNTIL HIS ‘ASCENSION. 171 





MATTH. XXVIII. ’ 
ὑπάγετε, ἀπαγγείλατε τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς μου, ἵνα ἀπέλϑωσιν εἰς τὴν Γαλιλαίαν, 
κἀχεῖ Us ὄψονται. 
Luxe XXIV. 9—11. 

.9 Καὶ ὑποστρέψασαι ἀπὸ τοῦ μνημείου ἀπήγγειλαν ταῦτα πάντα τοῖς ἕνδεκα 
10 καὶ πᾶσι τοῖς λοιποῖς. Ἦσαν δὲ ἡ Μαγδαληνὴ Μαρία καὶ ᾿Ιωάννα καὶ Μαρία 

᾿Ιακώβου καὶ αἱ λοιπαὶ σὺν αὐταῖς, αἱ ἔλεγον πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστόλους ταῦτα. 
11 Καὶ ἐφάνησαν ἐνώπιον αὐτῶν ὡςεὶ λῆρος τὰ ῥήματα αὐτῶν, καὶ ἠπίστουν αὐταῖς. 


§ 163. Peter and John run to the Sepulchre.—Jerusalem. 
First Day of the Week. 
Joun XX. 3—10. 
8 Ἐξῆλϑεν οὖν ὁ Πέτρος καὶ ὁ ἄλλος μαϑητής, καὶ ἤρχοντο εἰς τὸ μνημεῖον. 
4 Ἔτρεχον δὲ οἱ δύο ὁμοῦ" καὶ ὁ ἄλλος μαϑητὴς προΐδραμε τάχιον τοῦ Πέτρου 
'δ καὶ ἦλϑε πρῶτος εἰς τὸ μνημεῖον. Καὶ παρακύψας 





q ΠΤ κα XXIV. 12.  Phémer κείμενα τὰ ὀϑόνια" οὐ μέντοι εἰςῆλιϑεν. 
Ι 12‘O δὲ Πέτρος ἀναστὰς 6 Ἔρχεται οὖν Σίμων Πέτρος ἀκολουϑῶν αὐτῷ καὶ 
[ ἔδραμεν ἐπὶ τὸ μνημεῖον, εἰςῆλϑεν εἰς τὸ μνημεῖον καὶ ϑεωρεῖ τὰ ὀϑόνια 


4 , 7 , 1 A A ? Qe ce he. ἃ ~ ~ 
καὶ παρακυψὰας βλέπει 7 κείμενα! καὶ τὸ σουδάριον, ὃ ἣν ἐπὶ τῆς κεφαλῆς 
ee 2 , , ‘d > adh > \ ~ > , , > A A 
φὰ OD OVIA KEIMEVA μονα, αὕτου, OV μετὰ τῶν OFOViOY κείμενον, ἀλλὰ χωρις 
~ 4 
8 ἐντετυλιγμένον εἷς ἕνα τόπον. Tore οὖν εἰςῆλϑε καὶ 
ς 4 , oS A ~ ™ 9 \ ~ 
ὁ ἄλλος μαϑητήῆς, 0 ἐλϑῶὼν πρῶτος εἰς TO μνημεῖον, 
4 > ~ 4 ς Α ω ~ ὁ... 9 3 A a \ 
καὶ ἀπῆλϑε πρὸς sav- 9 καὶ ede καὶ ἐπίστευσεν" οὐδέπω γὰρ ἤδεισαν τῆν 
\ , ‘ > Trae ὩΣ eek ee wets - 3 
τὸν ϑαυμάζων τὸ γε- 10 γραφῆν, oct δεῖ αὐτὸν ἐκ νεκρῶν ἀναστῆναι. “An- 
t ; ~ τ , \ ¢ \ ς , 
yovos. ἤλϑον ovy πάλιν πρὸς ἑαυτοὺς οἱ μαϑηταί.͵ 


τ 


I eT ee Se Ee ee Ο ΎΥ 






§ 164, Our Lord is seen by Mary Magdalene at the Sepulchre.—Jerusalem. 








a αν το. 


First Day of the Week. 


Joun XX. 11—18. 
ι , 4 ἊΝ ς x : 
11 Magia δὲ εἱστήκει πρὸς τὸ μνημεῖον κλαίουσα ἔξω. ὡς οὖν ἔχλαιε, παρέκυψεν 
© - A, ἃ » 1 A ~ , > , 3 » - ’ Φ τ πὶ τὺς 
12 εἰς τὸ μνημεῖον, 'και ϑεωρεῖ δυο ἀγγέλους ἐν λευχοῖς καθεζομένους, ἕνα πρὸς τῇ. 
~ A ‘ ~ σ. + ἸᾺ A ~ ~ ~ 4 
13 χεφαλῇ καὶ ἕνα πρὸς τοῖς ποσίν, ὁποῦ ἔχειτο τὸ σῶμα TOV’ Ἰησοῦ. Καὶ λέγουσιν 
~ ~ , ~ σ μι ἢ ' 
αὐτῇ ἐκεῖνοι" γύται, τί κλαίεις; λέγει αὐτοῖς " ὅτι ἦραν τὸν κύριόν μου, καὶ οὐχ 


Marx XVI. 9—11. 14 οἶδα, ποῦ ἔϑηκαν αὐτόν. Καὶ ταῦτα 

- > ᾿ 4 Α (ἃ, , , > ~ ἊΦΨΦ , A > , 4 

f 9 ᾿Αναστὰς δὲ nowt πρώτῃ σαββάτου εἰποῦσα ἐστράφη εἷς τὰ ὀπίσω καὶ 
᾿ Digsece _ Ps mig ~ AURIS DAD wy tae © 4 72 

; ἐφάνη πρῶτον Μαρίᾳ τῇ αγδαληνῇ, ϑεωρεῖ τὸν ᾿]ησοῦν ἑστῶτα, καὶ οὐκ 
ae ὦ. ͵ ee «ἢ , Her Aye εὖ Mis 9 " »_ δ'ς 

ἀφ yo ἐχβεβλήκει ἑπτὰ δαιμόνια. 15 ἤδει, otto ]Ιησοὺς ἔστι. Aeyer αὑτῇ ὁ 


mf ~ »} .“ ’ λ ’ , “ἃ ζ 

ἡσοῦς " γύναι, τί κλαίεις ; τίνα, ζη- 
- 5 ’. Wx id « ’ 5 , 5 ~ , > A 3 , 

τεῖς ; ἐχείγη δοκοῦσα, οτι ὁ κηπουρὸς ἔστι, λέγει αὐτῷ κύριε, εἰ συ ἐβάστασας 

> Φ'᾽ > / wat 5.) ΑΝ Leap. δ δὼ , > ~~ ΕΥ̓ ~ 
16 αὐτόν, εἰπέ μοι, ποῦ ἔϑηκας αὐτόν" κἀγὼ αὐτὸν ἀρῶ. Aéya αὐτῇ δ᾽ Ἰησοῦς" 
~ ~ a - 
17 Μαρία. στραφεῖσα ἐκείνη λέγει αὐτῷ " ῥαββουνί (ὃ λέγεται, διδάσκαλε). “ΖΖέγει 
~ ~ 7 δ 3 ἐν 
αὐτῇ ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς" μή mov ἅπτου" οὔπω γὰρ ἀναβέβηκα πρὸς τὸν πατέρα μου" 


a lle 





172 FROM OUR LORD’S RESURRECTION [Parr IX. 





JOHN Xx. 
’ ‘ A. .. ἃ ibs ° 
πορεύου δὲ πρὸς τοὺς ἀδελφούς μου καὶ εἰπὲ adTOIG* ἀναβαίνω πρὸς τὸν πατέρα 
A ~ 
MARK XVI. μου καὶ πατέρα ὑμῶν καὶ ϑεόν μου 
10 ᾿Ἐκείνη πορευϑεῖσα ἀπήγγειλε ἑοῖς met 18 καὶ ϑεὸν ὑμῶν. Ἔρχεται Μαρία ἡ 
3 - ’ ~ A , 4 *9 I ~ 
αὑτοῦ γενομένοις, πενϑοῦσι καὶ κλαί- Μαγδαληνὴ ΚΟ ΌΌΝΝΝ vei μάϑη.- 
~ σ 
11 ovat. Κακεῖνοι ἀκούσαντες, ὅτι ζῇ ταῖς, ὅτι ἑώρακε τὸν κύριον καὶ ταῦτα 
A ~ 7 
καὶ ἐθεάϑη VA αὐτῆς, ἠπίστησαν. εἶπεν αὐτῇ. ' 


' 


§ 165. Report of the Watch.—Jerusalem. 
First Day of the Week. 
Marra. XXVIII. 11—15. 


11. Πορευομένων δὲ αὐτῶν, ἰδού, τινὲς τῆς κουστωδίας ἐλϑόντες εἰς τὴν πόλιν 
12 ἀπήγγειλαν τοῖς ἀρχιερεῦσιν ἅπαντα τὰ γενόμενα. Καὶ συναχϑέντες μετὰ τῶν 
πρεσβυτέρων, συμβούλιόν τε λαβόντες, ἀργύρια ἱκανὰ ἔδωκαν τοῖς στρατιώταις 


a” σ 4 ~ ~ 
18 'Aéyorteg* εἴπατε, ὅτι οἱ μαϑηταὶ αὐτοῦ νυχτὸς ἐλϑόντες ἔκλεψαν αὐτὸν ἡμῶν 


14 κοιμωμένων. Καὶ ἐὰν ἀκουσϑῇ τοῦτο ἐπὶ τοῦ ἡγεμόνος, ἡμεῖς πείσομεν αὐτὸν 
15 καὶ ὑμᾶς ἀμερίμνους ποιήσομεν. Οἱ δὲ λαβόντες τὰ ἀργύρια ἐποίησαν ὡς ἐδι- 
Renee, καὶ διεφημίσϑη ὁ λόγος οὗτος παρὰ Ιουδαίοις μέχρι τῆς σήμερον. 


§ 166. Our Lord is seen of Peter. Then by two Disciples on the way to Emmaus.— 
Jerusalem. Emmaus. | 


First Day of the Week. 


1 Cor. XV. 5. Luxe XXIV. 13—35. 
5 --ὥφϑη Κηφᾷ ΄-- 18. Καὶ ἰδού, δύο ἐξ αὐτῶν ἦσαν πορευ- 
Marx XVI. 12, 13. OMEVOL ἐν αὐτῇ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ εἰς κώμην ἀπέ- 
12 Μετὰ δὲ ταῦτα δυσὶν ἐξ αὐτῶν περι- χουσαν σταδίους ἑξήκοντα ἀπὸ Ἵε- 
πατοῦσιν ἐφανερώϑη ἐν ἑτέρᾳ μορφῇ, 14 ρουσαλήμ, 4 ὄνομα ᾿Εμμαούς. Καὶ 
πορευομένοις εἰς ἀγρόν. αὐτοὶ ὡμίλουν πρὸς ἀλλήλους περὶ 


πάντων τῶν συμβεβηκότων τούτων. 

15 Καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν ry ὁμιλεῖν αὐτοὺς καὶ σμζητεῖν, καὶ αὐτὸς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐγγίσας 
16 συνεπορεύετο avrois ot δὲ ὀφϑαλμοὶ αὐτῶν ἐκρατοῦντο τοῦ μὴ ἐπιγνῶναι αὐ- 
17 τόν. Εἶπε δὲ πρὸς αὐτούς" τίνες οἱ λόγοι οὗτοι, ove ἀντιβάλλετε πρὸς ἀλλήλους 
18 περιπατοῦντες, καί éote σκυϑρωποί; ᾿ΑΙποχριϑεὶς δὲ ὁ εἷς, ᾧ ὄνομα Κλεόπας, 
εἶπε πρὸς αὐτόν" σὺ μόνος παροικεῖς ἐν ἹΙερουσαλὴμ καὶ οὐκ ἔγνως τὰ γενόμενα 

19 ἐν αὐτῇ ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις ταύταις ; Καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ποῖα ; οἱ δὲ εἶπον αὐτῷ" 
τὰ περὶ Ἰησοῦ τοῦ Ναζωραίου, ὃ ος ἐγένετο ἀνὴρ προφήτης, δυνατὸς ἐν ἔργῳ καὶ 

20 λόγῳ ἐγαντίον τοῦ ϑεοῦ καὶ παντὸς τοῦ λαοῦ" ὅπως τὲ παρέδωκαν αὐτὸν οἱ 
ἀρχιερεῖς καὶ οἱ ἄρχοντες ἡμῶν εἰς κρίμα ϑανάτου καὶ ἐσταύρωσαν αὐτόν. 
“Ἡμεῖς δὲ ἠλπίζομεν, ὅτι αὐτός ἐστιν 6 μέλλων λυτροῦσϑαι τὸν ᾿Ισραήλ᾽ ἀλλάγε 
σὺν πᾶσι τούτοις τρίτην ταύτην ἡμέραν ἄγει σήμερον, ἀφ᾽ οὗ ταῦτα ἐγένετο. 
42 ᾿Αλλὰ καὶ γυναῖκές τιγες ἐξ ἡμῶν ἐξέστησαν ἡμᾶς, γενόμεναι ὄρϑριαι ἐπὶ τὸ 
23 μνημεῖον, ' καὶ μὴ εὑροῦσαι τὸ σῶμα αὐτοῦ ἦλϑον λέγουσαι καὶ ὀπτασίαν ἀγγέ- 


2 


-- 











ae eye 





— 


“»ν 











ee ee eee 


δῇ 165, 166, 167.] UNTIL HIS ASCENSION. © 173 





LUKE XXIV. 
¢ ~ 4A ~ ~ 4 -- he % 
24 λων ἑωρακέναι, οἱ λέγουσιν αὐτὸν ζῆν. Καὶ ἀπῆλϑόν τινες τῶν σὺν ἡμῖν ἐπὶ τὸ 
- τ σ΄ A ~ A A 
μνημεῖον, καὶ εὗρον οὕτω καϑὼς καὶ αἱ γυναῖκες εἶπον, αὐτὸν δὲ οὐκ εἶδον. 


} 4 A Wook 5 A > ’ ΠΣ ne ἢ ‘ a ~ , ~ , >, 4 
25 αι αὗτος εἶπε πρὸς αὐτοὺς " ὦ ἀνόητοι καὶ βραδεῖς τῇ καρδίᾳ. τοῦ πιστξύειν ἐπι 


- ‘ ~ ~ “ὦ 4 
26 πᾶσιν, οἷς ἐλάλησαν οἱ προφῆται. Οὐχὶ ταῦτα ἔδει παϑεῖν τὸν Χριστὸν καὶ 


i ~ 4 “- 4‘ 
ΒΥ εἰςελϑεῖν εἰς τὴν δόξαν αὑτοῦ ; Καὶ ἀρξάμενος ἀπὸ Μωσέως καὶ ἀπὸ πάντων 


~ ~ a — ἊΝ ~ 4 
28 τῶν προφητῶν διηρμήνευεν αὐτοῖς ἐν πάσαις ταῖς γραφαῖς τὰ περὶ αὑτοῦ. Καὶ 
cla A τ ~ 
ἤγγισαν εἰς THY κώμην, OV ἐπορεύοντο, καὶ αὐτὸς προςεποιεῖτο ποῤῥωτέρω πο- 
29 ρεύεσϑαι. Καὶ παρεβιάσαντο αὐτὸν λέ " weit ef ἡμῶν, ὅ ὸ 
0 : 0 ov λέγοντες" μεῖνον pe ἡμῶν, ott πρὸς 
¢ ? : en A , eo @ tf A 2 ὦ ~ ~ \ > ‘ 
30 ἑσπέραν ἔστι καὶ κέκλικεν ἢ ἡμέρα. καὶ εἰφῆλϑε τοῦ μεῖναι σὺν αὐτοῖς. Kat 
5. ἢ 3 ~ ~ mies | 3 3 “« me ‘ + 3 ’ a 
ἐγένετο EY TH κατακλιϑῆναι αὑτον Et αὐτῶν, λαβὼν τὸν ἄρτον εὐλόγησε καὶ 
~ ~ ‘ A 
31 κλάσας ἐπεδίδου αὐτοῖς. Avtar δὲ διηνοίχϑησαν οἱ ὀφϑαλμοὶ καὶ ἐπέγνωσαν 
> , ‘ be 4 3. “ἢ » Ὁ 3 ~ A A > , ¥ ἐδ 
32 αὐτὸν" καὶ αὑτὸς ἄφαντος ἐγένετο am αὐτῶν. Καὶ εἶπον πρὸς ἀλλήλους" ovyt 
« , € ἂν , Ύ 5 4 w « 5η ἢ ε» 3 ~ ¢ ~ Ν ὁ , 
ἡ καρδία ἡμῶν καιομένη ἣν ev ἡμῖν, ὡς shade ἡμῖν ev τῇ ὁδῷ καὶ ὡς διήνοιγεν 
¢ « ‘ , rN 2 , DS Siar ee ὧν at $5 ¢ , 
33 ἡμῖν τὰς γραφὰς ; Καὶ ἀναστάντες αὑτῇ τῇ woe ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς ]ερουσαλήμ, 
A t r A Ψ ‘ A A > ~.] , on Φ 
34 χαὶ evgoy συνηϑροισμένους τοὺς ἕνδεκα καὶ τοὺς σὺν avtoig! λέγοντας " ὅτι 
ι ᾿ Ln 
MARK XVI. ἠγέρϑη ὁ κύριος ὄντως καὶ ὥφϑη 
~ ~ ΟὟ - ~ > 
13 Κἀκεῖνοι ἀπελϑόντες ἀπήγγειλαν τοῖς 35 Σίμωνι. Καὶ αὐτοὶ ἐξηγοῦντο τὰ ἐν 
~ A ~ ~ 4 ae ~ 
λοιποῖς " οὐδὲ ἐκείνοις ἐπίστευσαν. . τῇ ὁδῷ καὶ ὡς ἐγνώσϑη αὐτοῖς ἐν Ti, 
~ + 
κλάσει TOV ἄρτου. 


§ 167. Jesus appears in the midst of the Apostles, Thomas being absent.—Jerusalem. 


Evening following the First Day of the Week. 


Mark XVI. 14—18. 1 Cor. XV. 5. ες Jonn XX. 19—28. 

14 Ὕστερον ἀγναχειμένοις 5 --εἶτα τοῖς δώδεκα. 19 Οὔσης οὖν ὀψίας τῇ 
αὐτοῖς τοῖς ἕνδεκα ἐφα- Luxe XXIV. 86--49. ἡμέρᾳ ἐκείνῃ, τῇ μιᾷ τῶν 
γερώϑη" καὶ ὠνείδισε 36 Ταῦτα δὲ αὐτῶν λα- σαββάτων, καὶ τῶν ϑυ- 
τὴν ἀπιστίαν αὐτῶν καὶ λοῦντων. αὐτὸς [ὃ 10: ρῶν κεκλεισμένων, ὅπου 
σκληροκαρδίαν, ὅτι τος σοῦς] ἔστη ἐν μέσῳ α΄ ἦσαν οἱ μαϑηταὶ ovrny- 
ϑεασαμένοις αὐτὸν ἐγη: τῶν καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς μένοι, διὰ τὸν φόβον τῶν 
γερμένον οὐκἐπίστευσαν. 37 εἰρήνη ὑμῖν. Πτοηϑέν- ᾿Ιουδαιων, ἦλϑεν ὁ ᾽Τη- 

τες δὲ καὶ ἔμφοβοι γενό. σοῦς καὶ ἔστη εἰς σὸ μέ- 
88 μενοι ἐδόχουν πνεῦμα ϑεωρεῖν. Καὶ εἶπεν ad- σον καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς" 


τοῖς" τί τεταραγμένοι ἐστέ ; καὶ διὰ τί διαλογισμοὶ εἰρήνη ὑμῖν. 
39 ἀναβαίνουσιν ἐν ταῖς καρδίαις ὑμῶν; Ἴδετε τὰς 
χεῖράς μου καὶ τοὺς πόδας KEP, ὅτι αὐτὸς ἐγώ εἶμι" ψηλαφήσατέ με καὶ Were * 
40 ὅτι πνεῦμα σάρκα καὶ ὀστέα οὐκ ἔχει, JOHN Xx. 
καϑὼς ἐμὲ ϑεωρεῖτε ἔχοντα. Καὶ τοῦτο 20 Καὶ τοῦτο εἰπὼν ἔδειξεν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖ- 
εἰπὼν ἐπέδειξεν αὐτοῖς τὰς χεῖρας καὶ ρας καὶ τὴν πλευρὰν αὑτοῦ. ἐχάῤρησαν 


ἜΝ, 4 ΄ Α 
ΑἹ τοὺς πόδας. Ἔτι δὲ ἀπιστούντων αὐ οὖν οἷ μαϑηταὶ ἰδόντες τὸν κύριον. 


τῶν ἀπὸ τῆς χαρᾶς καὶ ϑαυμαζόντων, | 


aN 
42 εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ἔχετέ τι βρώσιμον ἐγθάδε; Oi δὲ ἐπέδωκαν αὐτῷ ἰχϑύος 


~ 


174 





LUKE XXIV. 
43 ὀπτοῦ μέρος καὶ ἀπὸ μελισσίου κηρίου. Καὶ λαβὼν ἐνώπιον αὐτῶν ἔφαγεν. 
44 Εἶπε δὲ αὐτοῖς " οὗτοι οἱ λόγοι, οὗς ἐλάλησα πρὸφ ὑμᾶς ἔτι ὧν σὺν ὑμῖν; ὅτι δεῖ 


πληρωϑῆναι πάντα τὰ γεγραμμένα ἐν τῷ γόμῳ Μωῦσέως καὶ προφήταις HO 


45 τραλμοῖς megt ἐμοῦ. Τότε διήνοιξεν αὐτῶν τὸν νοῦν TOV συνιέναι τὰς γραφάς. 
46 Καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς ὅτι οὕτω γέγραπφαι; καὶ οὕτως ἔδει παϑεῖν τὸν Χρισεῦν' καὶ 
41 ὑνυπι ἐκ μερῶν τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ! καὶ νηδυχθῦναιϊ ἐπὶ τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ 
μετάνοιαν καὶ ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν εἰς πάντα τὰ ἔϑνη, ἀρξάμενον ἀπὸ “Tegov- 
48 σαλήμ. “Ὑμεῖς δέ ἐστε 


MARK XVI. 49 μάρτυρες τούτων. Kat ‘JOHN Xx. 

15 Καὶ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς" mo- ἰδού, ἐγὼ ἀποστέλλω 81 Εἶπεν οὖν αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾽]η- 
ρευϑέντες εἰς τὸν κόσμον τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ παι σοῦς πάλιν" εἰρήνη ὑμῖν" 
ἅπαντα κηρύξατε τὸ ες τρύς μου ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς "ὑμεῖς nada ἀπέσταλκέ μὲ 
αγγέλιον πάσῃ τῇ κτίσει. δὲ καϑίσατε ἐν τῇ πόλι ὁ πατήρ, κἀγὼ πέμπω 

16 Ὃ πιστεύσας καὶ βαπτι. Ἱερουσαλήμ, ἕως οὗ ὑμᾶς. 
σϑεὶς σωϑήσεται, ὁ δ ἐνδύσησϑε δύναμιν ἐξ᾽ 
ἀπιστήσας καταχριϑή- ὕψους. 


17 σεται. «Σημεῖα δὲ τοῖς 
’ ~ , 3 ~ > 27 nS , 3 - 
πιστεύσασι ταῦτα παρακολουϑήσει" ἐν τῷ ὀνόματί μου δαιμόνια ἐχβαλοῦσι" 
~ ~ 5) ‘ 
18 γλώσσαις λαλήσουσι καιναῖς" ' ὄφεις ἀροῦσι" κἂν ϑανάσιμόν τι πίωσιν, οὐ μὴ 
αὐτοὺς βλάψῃ ἐπὶ ἀῤῥώστους χεῖρας ἐπιϑήσουσι, καὶ dessa ἕξουσιν. 


JOHN XxX. 


22 23 Καὶ τοῦτο εἰπὼν ἐνεφύσησε καὶ λέγει αὐτοῖς " λάβετε πνεῦμα ἅγιον. “Ay τινων 


ἀφῆτε τὰς ἁμαρτίας, ἀφίενται αὐτοῖς" ἄν τινῶν χρατῆτε, κεχράτηνται. 


§ 168. Jesus appears in the midst of the Apostles, Thomas being present.—Jerusalem. 
Evening following the First Day of the Week next after the Resurrection. 
Joun XX. 24—29. 


"Θωμᾶς δέ, εἷς ἐκ τῶν δώδεκα, ὁ λεγόμενος Δίδυμος, οὐκ ἦν per αὐτῶν, ὅτε 
25 ἦλϑεν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς. Ἔλεγον οὖν αὐτῷ οἱ ἄλλοι μαϑηταί" ἑωράκαμεν τὸν κύριον. 
ὁ δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς" ἐὰν μὴ iM ἐν ταῖς χερσὶν αὐτοῦ τὸν τύπον τῶν ἥλων καὶ 
» βάλω τὸν δάκτυλόν μου εἰς τὸν τύπον τῶν ἥλων καὶ βάλω τὴν χεῖρά μου εἰς τὴν 
26 πλευρὰν αὐτοῦ, od μὴ πιστεύσω. Καὶ we? ἡμέρας ὀκτὼ πάλιν ἦσαν ἔσω οἱ μαϑηταὶ 
αὐτοῦ καὶ Θωμᾶς pet αὐτῶν. ᾿ ἔρχεται ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς τῶν ϑυρῶν κεχλεισμένων, καὶ 
27 ἔστη εἰς τὸ μέσον καὶ εἶπεν" εἰρήνη ὑμῖν. Εἶτα λέγει τῷ Θωμᾷ᾽ φέρε τὸν δάκτυλόν 
σου ὧδε καὶ ἴδε τὰς χεῖράς μου, καὶ φέρε τὴν χεῖρά σου καὶ βάλε εἰς τὴν πλευράν 
28 μον" καὶ μὴ γίνου ἄπιστος, ἀλλὰ πιστός. ᾿Απεχρίϑη: Θωμᾶς καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ ς 
29 ὁ κύριός μὸν καὶ ὃ ϑεύς μου. 4ἔγει αὐτῷ 6 ᾿Ιησοῦς" ὅτι ἑώρακάς με, πεπίστευ- 
nag" μακάριοι οἱ μὴ ἰδόντες καὶ “πιστεύσαντες. 


24 


FROM OUR LORD’S RESURRECTION [Parr IX. 





δὲ 168, 169.) UNTIL HIS ASCENSION. 175 





_ §.169. The Apostles go away into Galilee. Jesus shews himself to seven of them at 
the Sea of Tiberias— Galilee. 


Marr. XXVIII. 16. Joun X XI, 1—24, 
10 Οἱ δὲ ἕνδεκα μαϑηταὶ ἐπορεύϑη- 1 Μετὰ ταῦτα ἐφανέρωσεν ἑαυτὸν 
σαν sig τὴν Γαλιλαίαν "--- πάλιν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς τοῖς μαϑηταῖς ἐπὶ 
τῆς ϑαλάσσης τῆς TiBequidog: ἐφα- 
2 γέρωσε δὲ οὕτως. Ἦσαν ὁμοῦ Σίμων Πέτρος καὶ Θωμᾶς, ὁ λεγόμενος Δίδυμος, 
καὶ Ναϑαναήλ, ὁ ἀπὸ Kava τῆς Γαλιλαίας, καὶ οἱ τοῦ Ζεβεδαίου καὶ ἄλλοι ἐκ 
3 τῶν μαϑητῶν αὐτοῦ δύο. Ζέγει αὐτοῖς Σίμων Πέτρος" ὑπάγω ἁλιεύειν. λέγου-. 
σιν αὐτῷ ἐρχόμεϑα καὶ ἡμεῖς σὺν σοί. ἐξῆλϑον καὶ ἐνέβησαν εἰς τὸ πλοῖον 
4 εὐϑύς, καὶ ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ νυκτὶ ἐπίασαν οὐδέν. Πρωΐας δὲ ἤδη γενομένης ἔστη 6 
[ 
Ι͂ 


CE δου νιν, .-. ΦλιΔωδεα 


> “ A 7 ~ 
5 Inoovs εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν" οὐ μέντοι ἤδεισαν οἱ μαϑηταί, ὅτι ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐστι. Aéyet 
Υ » ~ ? Ὁ 
οὖν αὐτοῖς ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς" παιδία, μή to προςφάγιον ἔχετε ; ἀπεχρίϑησαν αὐτῷ" οὔ. 
A ~ ~ 
6°O δὲ εἶπεν αὐτοῖς " βάλετε sig τὰ δεξιὰ μέρη τοῦ πλοίου τὸ δίκτυον, καὶ εὑρή- 
‘ + Ψ ‘ ρον 25) Ys 46 ~ a be ~ ’ aes) ἐϑ , 
ο΄ aete. ἐβαλον ovr, καὶ οὐκέτι αὐτὸ ἑλκῦσαι ἰσχυσαν ἄπο TOV πλήϑους τῶν ἰχϑύων. 
, ς σας, ‘ De a aA ΟΥ̓ εἰ 9 ~ ~ , ς 7 ΄ 3 
7 “έγει οὖν ὃ μαϑητὴς ἐκεῖνος, ὃν ἠγάπα ὃ ᾿Ιησοῦς, τῷ Πέτρῳ" ὃ κύριός ἔστι. 
, 3 ’ ὅλον ἃ eee Oe tae Wee, , , x \ 
ο΄ Σίμων οὖν Πέτρος ἀκούσας, ὁτι ὃ κύριός ἐστι, tov ἐπενδύτην διεζώσατο, (ἣν yao 
4 A ‘ - ~ 
᾿ς 8 γυμνύς,) καὶ ἔβαλεν ἑαυτὸν εἰς τὴν ϑάλασσαν. Οἱ δὲ ἄλλοι μαϑηταὶ τῷ πλοι- 
‘4 , ‘SJ ? A ν᾿ A > εἰ ~ ~ > 3. ke “τιν ~ , 
j ἀρίῳ asad (ov γὰρ ἤσαν μαχρὰν ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς, add ὡς ἀπὸ πηχῶν διακοσίων») 
Ὕ ᾿ ~ 
ΠΟ 9 σύροντες τὸ δίκτυον τῶν ἰχϑύων. Ὡς οὖν ἀπέβησαν εἰς τὴν 7», βλέπουσιν 
610 ἀνϑρακιὰν κειμένην καὶ ὀψάριον ἐπικείμενον καὶ ἄρτον. “1 ἔγει αὑτοῖς ὁ Ἰησοῦς" 
11 ἐνέγκατε ἀπὸ τῶν ὀψαρίων, ὧν ἐπιάσατε γῦν. ᾿Ανέβη Σίμων Πέτρος καὶ εἴλ- 
ο΄ χῦσε τὸ δίκτυον ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς μεστὸν ἰχϑύων μεγάλων ἑκατὸν πέντήχοντα τριῶν." 
3 A ᾽ ᾿ > > , \ ’ r ? oO. USD ~ ~ 
12 χαὶ τοσούτων ovtwy οὐκ ἐσχίσϑη τὸ δίκτυον. Asya αὑτοῖς ὁ Inoovg: δεῦτε, 
Ἷ 2 Pak Cy es ae Pe ~ ~ 9 , > + {a> 3.) 7 
ἀριστήσατε. οὐδεὶς δὲ ἐξύόλμα τῶν μαϑητῶν ἐξετάσαι αὐτόν" σὺ τίς εἶ ; εἰδότες, 
σ ε ΠΟ δ, wy HIM DH WN wth | , ἢ + Y i 
13 ot 0 κύριός ἀστω. Ἐύχεται οὐν o Inoovg και λαμβάψει Fey ἄρτον xe δίδωσιν 
14 αὐτοῖς καὶ τὸ ὀψάριον ὁμοίως. Τοῦτο ἤδη τρίτον ἐφαγέρϑῃ, ὁ ὁ ᾿1ησοῦς τοῖς 
7 recta dic αὐτοῦ ἐγερϑεὶς ἐκ νεχρῶν. 
15 Ὅτε οὖν ἤρίστησαν, λέγει τῷ Σιμῶνι 113¢ 04 ¢ 0 Ansovs Σίμων ᾿Ιωνᾶ, ἀγα- 
᾿ς πᾷς pe πλεῖον τούτων; Aéyer αὐτῷ" ναί, κύριε, σὺ οἶδας, ὅτι φιλῶ σε. Eevee 
16 αὐτῷ: Booxe τὰ ἀρνία μου. “έγει αὐτῷ πάλιν δεύτερον Σίμων “Lora, ἀγα- 
q εκ’ ἶ ~ σ - ~ 
πᾷς we; λέγει αὐτῷ" ναί, κύριε, σὺ οἶδας, ὅτι φιλῶ oe. λέγει αὐτῷ" ποίμαινξ 
1 τὰ πρόβατά μου. “έγει αὐτῷ τὸ τρίτον" Σίμων ᾿Ιωνᾶ, φιλεῖς με; ἐλυπήϑη ὃ 
~ ~ \ ~ \ 
Πέτρος, ὅτι εἶπεν αὐτῷ τὸ τρίτον" φιλεῖς μὲ; καὶ εἶπεν αὐτῷ " κύριε, σὺ πάντα 
‘ , Pw "nw , ἢ Mees Ss ate te ἀρῆς ἢ Ny tr , 
οἶδας σὺ γινώσχεις, OT pen os. λέγει αὑτῷ ὁ - ]ησοῦς Boose τὰ γρίβατα HOW 
18 Aun ἀμὴν λέγω σοι, ὅτε ἧς γεώτερος, ἐζώννυες σεαυτὸν «καὶ περιεπάτει, ὕπου 
ἤϑελες " ὅταν δὲ γηράσῃς, ἐκτενεῖς τὰς χεῖράς. σου, καὶ ἄλλος σε ζώσει καὶ οἴσει, 
7 Π ~ 4 
19 ὅπου οὐ ϑέλεις. Τοῦτο δὲ εἶπε σημαίνων, ποίῳ ϑανάτῳ δοξάσει τὸν ϑεόν. καὶ 









4 ~ ~ 3 4 A , , Ἁ 
20 τοῦτο εἰπὼν λέγει αὐτῷ“ ἀκολούϑει μοι. ᾿Ἐπιστραφεὶς δὲ ὁ Πέτρος βλέπει τὸν 
, a et δ e- 2 ~ 2 ~ a pe eis > ~ ὃ , bee 
—_ padyriy, ov ἠγάπα ὁ Inoovs, ἀκολουϑοῦντα, ὃς καὶ ἀνέπεσεν ἐν τῷ δείπνῳ ἐπί. 
J ἣ ~ ~. ~ ὃς. Δ ¢ 
᾿ 21 τὸ στῆϑος αὐτοῦ ᾿καὶ size’ κύριε, τίς ἐστιν ὁ παραδιδούς oe; ' τοῦτον ἰδὼν ὃ 
J ~ ~ = \ , ἢ > ~ ες} ~ Ἂ 3 ΟΝ ἢ 
92 Πέτρος λέγει τῷ ᾿]ησοῦ" κύριε, οὗτος δὲ τί; Asyer αὐτῷ ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς" ἕαν αὑτὸν. 


176 FROM OUR LORD’S RESURRECTION - [Parr IX. 





τ 


JOHN XXI. 
ν᾽ > ‘ ~ - 
23 ϑέλω μένειν, ἕως ἔρχομαι, τί πρὸς σέ; σὺ ἀκολούϑει μοι. ᾿Εξῆλϑεν οὖν ὃ λόγος 
x , - 
οὗτος εἰς τοὺς ἀδελφούς, ὅτι ὁ μαϑητὴς ἐκεῖνος οὐκ ἀποϑνήσκει. καὶ οὐκ εἶπεν 
> ~ € 97 ἔων 3 2 , 244) See " iy δ“ " 
αὑτῷ ὁ ᾿]Ιησοῦς, ott οὐκ ἀποϑνήσκει, ἀλλ᾿ ἐὰν wvtov ϑέλω μένειν, ἕως ἔρχο- 
μαι, τί πρὸς σέ; 
t ~ ~ A Ε 
34 Οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ μαϑητὴς ὁ μαρτυρῶν περὶ τούτων καὶ γράψας ταῦτα, καὶ οἴδα- 
σ 7 Σ ~ 
μὲν, ὅτι ἀληϑής ἐστιν ἡ μαρτυρία αὐτοῦ. 


§ 170. Jesus meets the Apostles and above five hundred Brethren on a Mountain 


in Galilee. 
Matru. XXVIIL. 16—20. 1 Cor. XV. 6. 
16 —sig τὸ ὄρος, ov ἐτάξατο αὐτοῖς ὁ δ. Ἔπειτα ὥφϑη ἐπάνω πεντακοσίοις 
17 ᾿Ιησοῦς. Καὶ ἰδόντες αὐτὸν προςϑ- ἀδελφοῖς ἐφάπαξ, ἐξ ὧν οἱ πλείους 
18 κύνησαν αὐτῷ οἱ δὲ ἐδίστασαν. Καὶ μένουσιν ἕως ἄρτι, τινὲς δὲ καὶ ἐκοι- 
προςελϑὼν ὁ ᾿Ιησοῦς ἐλάλησεν αὐτοῖς μήϑησαν. 


’ὔ 5 , ~ 3 , > 
λέγων: ἐδόϑη μοι πᾶσα ἐξουσία ἐν 
~ ~ τ ἶ 
19 οὐρανῷ καὶ ἐπὶ γῆς. Πορευϑέντες οὖν μαϑητεύσατε πάντα τὰ ἔϑνη, βαπτίζον- 
~ ‘ ~ ~ A ~ 
τὲς αὐτοὺς εἰς TO ὄνομα TOV πατρὸς καὶ TOV υἱοῦ καὶ TOV ἁγίου πνεύματος, 
! , eee ~ t ¢ 3 , δι ine ae Nt ϑῳ, ft aN S 
20 ! διδάσκοντες αὐτοὺς τηρεῖν πάντα, ὅσα ἐνετειλάμην ὑμῖν" καὶ ἰδού, ἐγὼ μεϑ' 
ὑμῶν εἰμι πάσας τὰς ἡμέρας ἕως τῆς συντελείας τοῦ αἰῶνος. [Aunjy.] 


§ 171. Our Lord is seen of James; then of all the Apostles—Jerusalem. 


1 Cor. XV. 7. 


7 Ἔπειτα ὥφϑη ᾿Ιακώβῳ, εἶτα τοῖς ἀποστόλοις πᾶσιν. 
Acts 3. 3—8, 
- A , ς A ~ Ἁ Ἁ ~ os > ~ 
8. Οἷς καὶ παρέστησεν ἑαυτὸν ζῶντα μετὰ τὸ παϑεῖν αὑτὸν ἕν πολλοῖς τεκμη- 
glow, δι᾿ ἡμερῶν τεσσαράκοντα ὀπτανόμενος αὐτοῖς καὶ λέγων τὰ περὶ τῆς βασι- 
, ~ ~ A , , > ~ > κε , A 
4 λείας τοῦ ϑεοῦ. Καὶ συναλιζόμενος παρήγγειλεν αὑτοῖς ano “]εροσολύμων my 
5 χωρίζεσϑαι, ἀλλὰ περιμένειν τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν τοῦ πατρός, ἣν ἠκούσατέ μου" ὅτι 
2 , \ 5329 ’ eke \ , > , εὖ} > 
Ἰωάννης μὲν ἐβάπτισεν vdatt, ὑμεῖς δὲ βαπτισϑήσεσϑε ἕν πνεύματι ἁγίῳ ov 
‘ ‘ , c 7 « \ z , > ? > Ἢ , 
6 μετὰ πολλὰς ταύτας ἡμέρας. Οἱ μὲν οὖν συνελϑόντες ἐπηρώτων αὐτὸν Asyor- 
τες" κύριε, εἶ ἐν τῷ χρόνῳ τούτῳ ἀποκαϑιστάνεις τὴν βασιλείαν τῷ ᾿Ισραήλ ; 
~ ~ a 
7 Εἶπε δὲ πρὸς αὐτούς" οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστι γνῶναι χρόνους ἢ καιρούς, οὺς ὁ πατὴρ 
- ~ , 
8 ἔϑετο ἐν τῇ ἰδίᾳ ἐξουσίᾳ. ᾿4λλὰ λήψεσϑε δύναμιν ἐπελϑόντος τοῦ ἁγίου πνεύμα- 
τος ἐφ᾽ ὑμᾶς, καὶ ἔσεσϑέ μοι μάρτυρες ἔν τε ᾿Ἰερουσαλὴμ καὶ ἐν πάσῃ τῇ Lov- 
, ‘ , λο > , ~ ~ 
δαίᾳ καὶ Σαμαρείᾳ καὶ ἕως ἐσχάτου τῆς γῆς. 





δ 


a is 








\ 


δὲ 170, 171, 172, 173.] ὁ UNTIL HIS ASCENSION. 177 





§ 172. The Ascension.— Bethany. 


- 


Luxe XXIV. 50—53. 


50 ᾿Εξήγαγε δὲ αὐτοὺς ἔξω ἕως sig Βηϑανίαν, καὶ ἐπάρας τὰς χεῖρας αὖ- 


Marx XVI. 19, 20." τοῦ εὐλόγησεν αὐτούς. Acts I. 9—12. 
$s ~ ~ 

19‘O μὲν οὖν κύριος pe- 51 Καὶ ἐγένετο ἐν τῷ εὺ- 9 Καὶ ταῦτα εἰπὼν βλε- 
τὰ τὸ λαλῆσαι αὐτοῖς λογεῖν αὐτὸν αὐτούς, πόντων αὐτῶν ἐπήρϑη, 

> , > A > ’ ΄- J 3 - ‘ Ἂ i € / 
ἀνελήφϑη εἰς τὸν οὐρα διέστη ἀπ αὑτῶν καὶ καὶ νεφέλη ὑπέλαβεν 

, A 3 ? > > , 3 \ > 2. % 3 \ ~ > 
γον, καὶ ἕκαϑισδν Ex ἀνεφέρδτο εἰς τὸν OV- αὕτον ano τῶν ὀφϑαλ- 
δεξιῶν τοῦ ϑεοῦ. ραγόν. 10μῶν αὐτῶν. Καὶ ὡς 


> ν ἡ 5 Α 
ἀτενίζοντες ἧσαν εἰς τὸν 
3 \ , Mee V2) «# , , 4.1. kas, 
οὔρανον mopEevouevov αὐτοῦ, καὶ ἰδοὺ, ἄνδρες δύο παρειστήκεισαν αὑτοῖς ἕν 
~ ~ a , 

11 ἐσϑῆτι λευκῇ, | οἱ καὶ εἶπον" ἄνδρες Γαλιλαῖοι, ti ἑστήκατε ἐμβλέποντες εἰς τὸν 
> , t ae ~ e- ἃ 4 ᾧῳ ee ἃ ~ 5 4 3 4 a 2 , 
οὐρανόν ; οὗτος ὃ ᾿Ϊ]ησοῦς ὁ ἀναληφϑεὶς ag ὑμῶν εἰς TOY οὐρανὸν οὕτως ἐλεύ- 


Η σεται, ὃν τρόπον ἐϑεάσασϑε αὐτὸν 
LUKE XXIV. πορευόμενον εἰς τὸν οὐρανόν. 
52 Καὶ αὐτοὶ προςκυνήσαντες αὐτὸν ὑπές 12 Τότε ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς “]ερουσαλὴμ 
στρεψαν εἷς ᾿Ιερουσαλὴμ μετὰ χαρᾶς ἀπὸ ὕρους τοῦ καλουμένου ἐλαιῶνος, 
53 μεγάλης" καὶ ἧσαν διαπαντὸς ἐν τῷ ὅ ἐστιν ἐγγὺς ᾿Ϊερουσαλήμ, σαββάτου 
ἱερῷ αἰνοῦντες καὶ εὐλογοῦντες τὸν ἔχον ὁδόν. 
2 ? 
ϑεόν. [Any] sani i 5 


20 ᾿Εκεῖνοι δὲ ξξελθϑόντες ἐκήρυξαν πανταχοῦ, tov κυρίου συνεργοῦντος καὶ [ror 
λόγον βεβαιοῦντος διὰ τῶν ἐπακολουϑούντων σημείων. 


§ 173. Conclusion of John’s Gospel. 


Joun XX. 30—31. XXI. 25. 
80 Πολλὰ μὲν οὖν καὶ ἄλλα σημεῖα ἐποίησεν ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς ἐνώπιον τῶν μαϑητῶν 
ε - ο > a” , 3 ~ , , ~ A , σ 
31 αὑτοῦ, ἃ οὐκ ἔστι γεγραμμένα ὃν τῷ βιβλίῳ τοὐτῳ" ταῦτα δὲ γέγραπται, wo 
πἰστεύσητε, ὅτι ὁ ᾿]ησοῦς ἐστιν ὁ Χριστός, 6 υἱὸς τοῦ ϑεοῦ, καὶ ἵνα πιστεύοντες 
ζωὴν ἔχητε ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ. 
‘JOHN XXI. 
25 Ἔστι δὲ καὶ ἄλλα πολλά, ὅσα ἐποίησεν ὃ Inoovs, ἅτινα ξὰν γράφηται καϑ' 
Φ ὑδὲ a i A , ~ ‘ , λί "A , 
ἕν, οὐδὲ αὐτὸν οἶμαι TOY κόσμον χωρῆσαι τὰ γραφόμενα βιβλία. [-Auny.] 


Ζ 


82 


























ce 8 nee ἃ sin es ἐπ δ ἢ 
er? ma) ey ie τᾷ Are gy 


oad” augiey γὴν assis ΤΥ ΤῊ, 


ae Att}: ee ἂν, i ret shy, ΟΝ 


“δὴ sei τιν ἀνὰ, 9. ‘ Ῥ BP ra 
ah i, Ch sare ease Εν" πολ ων Payoh ‘* 


“ἃ. κε Ἧ. ; ee Tee 
tao: W Joy pity pave tard Bh. yess amigas wt. ave 


Ai δὼ a ue & σὴν, Ps iN oe REG se, oath x i 


~ 


“ἰὸν ih Prot. Sut é te ee: : est foe 





Loe τ “ia ὯΙ "i eEEROT UGTA Ἢ 


es ‘saan AeDeNRY seuiguik’ ott heh eh | oe ρεῦα: «τὰ δ σον κ᾿ ; 
«δῷ θα κα εὐθεῖ Ames Hoke a Samii st ψϑρουβνυρεῖεῆαι Pipi Toren 
te es ve sy ὙΝῈ ea ΠΝ Bates gp had Raha att yee 
with ‘ewoambret stony bi Rtg SRP ἐϑεσεν, ees Ter, mon ἐμ 
᾿ aah ohagty: eh Wanda) Ομέδηδον, hey aga. Tah elie. 
ny he thi at: a ‘spt eee αὐδ ον » ve wae} tila pen ce τι took 
aga hy “ded Fane Baw! De a oe ae he  enpagat 
; Th Bit οτρνοϑθ wie uta δ τοῖς ὧν αὐ tires mlm ἜΝ aa 
ΡΨ 87. BETES τλὐδὰ as Sadho genet 9 rhe sveideln ware 
ι . qin: Musial Bley act ἄν PARES Ye syne ctr ing rah Ar LAS abet 


49K 2RAM ἀν: 

ἦν... qordig gir upigtk “Gay Woyneimm anton arent 6 δι 

ten εὐρδν sak soci: ise i ni Bi 

¥ arenes phen eS, Ἢ 2 Snel ν, πῇ 

ἀν; Ῥ κατα δοριχος nol. ay 

εν! ἘΝ . earn yidaynes wide Wh . τ raga Pipa ὍΑ 

wt “pee iG AO BING ὧν ed Wein ibaa 

1 ale Gal OR Ai arinieaoae nant a ef sus 

ας wale Wee fede ve lene yates last aliy a αὐγῇ , 

aS ἐνῷ τα Ait sicter Stats, pe weg Menthe Bs 

:. pa ssp hye it's ge pete gris 
Regma. aki δ... ty agee 



























NOTES 


ON THE 


HARMONY OF THE FOUR GOSPELS. 


INTRODUCTION. 


Tue following Notes relate chiefly to questions which arise as to the mode and 
order of harmonizing the narratives of the four Evangelists; and touch only incident- 
ally upon other topics. 

The Gospels of Matthew, Mark, and Luke, along with many diversities, have never- 
theless a striking affinity with each other in their general features of time and place. 
But, when compared with John’s Gospel, there is seen to be a diversity no less striking 
between them and the latter, not only in respect to chronology, but likewise as to the 
part of the country where our Lord’s discourses and mighty works mainly occurred. 
The three speak only of one Passover, that at which Jesus suffered; and from this it 
would follow, that our Lord’s ministry continued at most only about six months. John 
expressly enumerates three Passovers, and more probably four, during Christ’s ministry ; 
which therefore must have had a duration of at least two and a half years, and more 
probably of three and a half. Again, Matthew, Mark, and Luke place the scene of 
Jesus’ public ministrations chiefly in Galilee ; whence he goes up to Jerusalem only just 
before his death. John, on the other hand, narrates the miracles and discourses of our 
Lord as occurring principally at Jerusalem, on various former occasions as well as at 
his last visit. 

The first difference is at once set aside by the remark, that although the three Evan- 
gelists do expressly mention only one Passover, yet they do not any where, nor in any 
way, affirm, or even imply, that there were no more; while the testimony of John is 
express and definite. And further, the incident, narrated by all the three writers, of the 
disciples plucking ripe ears of grain as they went through the fields, necessarily presup-- 
poses the recent occurrence of a Passover during our Lord’s ministry, different from the 
one at which hessuffered ; and this is further confirmed by Luke’s mention of the σάββα- 
toy δευτερόπρωτον in the same connection. See Matth. 12, 1. Mark 2,23. Luke 6, 1. See: 
also Notes on §§ 25, 37. , 

This difference being thus satisfactorily explained, the existence of the second differ- 
ence is of course accounted for. If John is right in enumerating several Passovers,. 


180 OUR LORD’S BIRTH AND CHILDHOOD. [Part I. 


he is right in narrating what took place at Jerusalem on those occasions. But, more 
than this, we find in the other Evangelists several things in which they too seem to 
allyde to earlier visits and labours of Jesus in the Holy City. So the language in which 
our Lord laments over Jerusalem, as having rejected his efforts, Matth. 23, 37. Luke 13, 
34. So too the mention of Scribes and Pharisees from Jerusalem, who seek to catch 
him in his words, Matth. 4, 25. 15, 1; and, further, his intimate relations with the family 
of Lazarus, Luke 10, 38.39; comp. John 11, 1.2. See, generally, Neander’s Leben 
Jesu, p. 384 sq. 3te Ausg. 

For these reasons, I do not hesitate to follow, with most Commentators, the chro- 
nology of John’s Gospel, and assign to our Lord’s ministry four Passovers, or a duration 
of three and a half years. _The second of these Passovers, which is less certain than 
the rest, and depends on the interpretation of John 5, 1, will be considered in its place; 
see Note on ᾧ 36. . 

The Gospels, and especially the first three, can in no sense be regarded as method- 
ical annals. It is therefore difficult, and perhaps impossible, so to harmonize them, in 
respect to time, as in all cases to arrive at results which shall be entirely certain and 
satisfactory. There is often no definite note of time ; and then we can proceed only upon 
conjecture, founded on a careful comparison of all the circumstances. In such cases, the 
decision must depend very much upon the judgment and taste of the Harmonist; and 
what to one person may appear probable and appropriate, may seem less so'to another. 

It is the aim of the present work, not so much to ascertain and fix the true and precise 
chronological order, (although this object is not neglected,) as to place side by side the 
different narratives of the same events, in an order which may be regarded as at least 
a probable one. In so doing I may hope to exhibit the legitimate uses of a Harmony, 
and accomplish a threefold purpose, viz. to make the Evangelists their own best inter- 
preters; to show how wonderfully they are supplemental to each other in minute as 
well as important particulars; and in this way to bring out fully and clearly the fun- 
damental characteristic of their testimony, UNITY IN DIVERSITY. 


οὰ δ χ ὦ Ὁ 
EVENTS CONNECTED WITH THE BIRTH AND CHILDHOOD OF OUR LORD. 
§§ 1—13. 


§ 1. The short Preface of Mark, and the longer one of John, do not belong here, but 
in Part Il. They both include a reference to the preaching of John the Baptist; but 
none at all to the infancy of Jesus. 


§ 2. The vision of Zacharias is assumed by some as having occurred on the great 
day of Atonement, the tenth of the seventh month. But on that day the: high-priest 
himself officiated, entering into the holy of holies; Lev. 16, 3.29, 32-34. Zacharias was 
an ordinary priest of the class of Abia, one of the twenty-four classes instituted by 

















αν κῶς νστ΄“. ας 





= 
a 
4 
4 
a 


—e ot 


ΓΝ τυ ΑΝ ee 








ἐμὰ τ χε: 


rors 7. 
πόσο ee 


δὲ 1-7.] NOTES.—-YEAR OF OUR LORD’S BIRTH. 181 


David for the service of the temple, which relieved each other in succession every 
Sabbath; see 1 Chr. 24, 3-19. 2 Chr. 8, 14. Joseph. Ant. 7.14.7. Their service included 
the daily burning of incense on the altar of incense in the first or outer sanctuary ; and 
this was what Zacharias was now doing; Luke 1, 9. Ex. 30, 6-8. 1 Chr. 23, 13.— 
It follows, that no inference whatever can hence be drawn as to the year, or season of 
the year, when the vision took place. Nor is it said how long a time elapsed between 
the vision and Elizabeth’s conception; the expression μετὰ δὲ ταύτας τὰς ἡμέρας in v. 24 
being quite indefinite. 


§ 8. The sixth month here refers back, not to the vision, but to the conception of 
Elizabeth; see v. 36. 1 . 


ὃ 4. The conjecture of Reland is probably correct, viz. that Ἰούδα in v. 39 is a 
softened form for Ἰούτα, Heb. ngs" or MD", 1. 6. Jutah or Juttah, a city of the priests in 
the mountains of Judah, south of Hebron; Josh. 15,55, 21,16. The place still exists un- 
der the same name. See Reland Palest. p. 870. Bibl. Researches in Palest. II. p. 628. 


§ 6. Mary remained with Elizabeth about three months, or nearly until the full time 
of the latter; and then returned to Nazareth; Luke 1,56. It was after this and after 
the birth of John, when Mary was now in her fourth or fifth month, and her pregnancy 
had become perceptible, that Joseph was minded to put her away. 


§ 7. The precise year of our Lord’s birth is uncertain. According to Matth. 2, 1-6, 
he was born during the lifetime of Herod the Great, and not long before his death. 
Herod died in the year of Rome (A. U.) 750, just before the Passover; see Jos. Antiq. 
17.8.1. ib. 17.9.3. This has been verified by calculating the eclipse of the moon, which 
happened just before his death; Jos. Ant. 17. 6. 4. Wurm in Bengel’s Archiv, I. p. 26. 
Ideler Handb. der Chronol. 11. p. 391 sq. If now we make an allowance of time for the 
purification, the visit of the Magi, the flight into Egypt, and the remaining there till 
Herod was dead,—for all which not less than six months can well be required,—it fol- 
lows, that the birth of Christ cannot in any case be fixed later than the autumn of 
A. U. 749. 

Another note of time occurs in Luke 3, 1. 2, where John the Baptist is said to have 
entered upon his ministry in the fifteenth year of Tiberius; and again in Luke 3, 23, 
where Jesus is said to have been “about thirty years of age” at his baptism. Now if 
both John and Jesus, as is quite probable, entered upon their ministry at the age of 
thirty, in accordance with the Levitical custom (Num. 4, 3. 35. 39. 43.47), by reckoning 
back thirty years we may ascertain the year of John’s birth, and of course also that of 
Jesus. Augustus died Aug. 29th, A. U. 767; and was succeeded by Tiberius, who had 
already been associated with him in the government for at least two years, and probably 
three. If now we reckon from the death of Augustus, the fifteenth year of Tiberius 
commenced Aug. 29th, A. U. 781; and going back thirty years, we find that John must 
have been born not earlier than August, A. U. 751, and our Lord of course not earlier 
than A. U. 762 ;—a result disagreeing with that obtained from Matthew by three years. 
If, on the other hand, we reckon from the time when Tiberius was admitted as co-regent 


182 OUR LORD’S BIRTH AND CHILDHOOD. [Part I. 


of the empire, which is shown to have been certainly as early as A. U.'765, and probably 
in A.U.764; then the fifteenth year of Tiberius began in A. U. 778, and it follows that 
John may have been born in A. U. 748, and our Lord in A. U. 749, In this way the 
results obtained from Matthew and Luke are more nearly:coincident. 

A third note of time is derived from John 2, 20, ‘‘ Forty and six years was this temple 
in building.” Josephus says, in one place, that Herod began to build the temple in the 
eighteenth year of his reign; while in another he specifies the fifteenth year; Ant. 15. 
11.1. B.J. 1.21.1. He also assigns the length of Herod’s reign at thirty-seven or 
thirty-four years; according as he reckons from his appointment by the Romans, or 
from the death of Antigonus; Ant. 17. 8. 1. B.J. 1.33.8. Herod was first declared 
king of Judea in A. U.714; Jos. Ant. 14. 14.4, 5. B.J. 1. 14.4. comp. Ant. 14. 16. 4. 
Ideler Handb. der Chron. Il. p. 390. Hence the eighteenth year of his reign, when 
Herod began to rebuild the temple, would coincide with A. U. 732; and our Lord’s first 
Passover, in the forty-seventh year following, would fall in A. Ὁ. 779. If now our 
Lord at that time was thirty and a half years of age, as is probable, this would carry 
back the year of his birth to the autumn of A. U. 748. 

Further, according to a tradition preserved by the Latin Fathers of the first five 
centuries, our Lord’s death took place during the consulate of the two Gemini, C. Ru- 
bellius and C. Fufius, that is, in A. U. 782. So Tertullian, Lactantius, Augustine, etc. 
See Tertull. adv. Jud. §8. Augustin. de Civ. Dei XVIII. 54. If now the duration of 
his ministry was three and a half years, then, as before, the year of his birth would 
be carried back to the autumn of A. U. 748. 

_ Some modern writers, taking into account the abode in Egypt and also the διετής of 
Matth. 2, 16, have supposed that Jesus must have been from two to three years old at 
Herod’s death; and hence they assume that he was born in A. U. 747. So Sancle- 
mente de vulgaris Are emendatione libb. IV, Rom. 1793. fol. Minter Stern der 
Weisen, etc. The same year, A. U. 747, is also fixed upon as the date of Christ’s 
birth, by those who regard the star in the east as having been the conjunction of the 
planets Jupiter and Saturn, which occurred in that year. So Keppler, Minter I. c. 
Ideler Handb. der Chronol. Berlin 1826. 

From all these data it would appear, that while our Lord’s birth cannot have taken 
place later than A. U. 749, it may nevertheless have occurred one or two years earlier. 

The present Christian era, which was fixed by the abbot Dionysius Exiguus in the 
sixth century, assumes the year of Christ’s birth as coincident with A. U. 754. It follows 
then from the preceding statements, that this our common era begins in any case more 
than four years too late; that is, from four to five years, at the least, after the actual 
birth of Christ. This era was first used in historical works by the Venerable Bede, 
early in the eighth century; and was not long after introduced in public transactions by 
the Frank kings Pepin and Charlemagne. 

In respect to the time of the year when Jesus was born, there is still less certainty. 
John the Baptist would seem to have entered upon his ministry in the spring; perhaps 
when the multitudes were collected in Jerusalem at the Passover. The crowds which 
followed him imply that it was not winter. The baptism of Jesus in the Jordan, proba- 
bly six months later, would then have occurred in autumn, It could not well have been 








a τϑννννωνν. “ἐν 














s 


δὲ 7-13.] NOTES.—THE GENEALOGIES. 183 


in the winter; nor does a winter seem to have intervened.’ If now we may assume, as 
is most probable, that John entered on his office when he had completed his thirtieth 
year; then the time of his birth was also the spring; and that of our Lord, six months 
later, was the autumn. Archbishop Newcome, quoting from Lardner, has the following 
remark: “Jesus was born, says Lardner, between the middle of August and the middle 
of November, A. U. 748 or 749. We will take the mean time, October 1.” See Lardner’s 
Works, Vol. I. p. 370, 372. Lond. 1835.—There is, on this point, no valid tradition. Ac- 
cording to the earliest accounts, the sixth of January, or Epiphany, was celebrated by the 
oriental church, in the third and fourth centuries, as the festival of the birth and baptism 
of Jesus; Cassian. Collat. X.c.2. In the occidental church, after the middle of the 
fourth century, the twenty-fifth of December (Christmas) began to be kept as the festival 
of Christ’s nativity; this day having been fixed upon, partly at least, as being the 
then current winter solstice. Thus, as late as the time of Leo the Great, (ob. 461,) there 
were many in Rome, “ quibus hec dies solemnitatis nostre non tam de nativitate Christi, 
quam de novi, ut dicunt, solis ortu, honorabilis videatur.” Leon. Magn. Serm. Χ ΧΙ, c. 
6. Gieseler Kirchengesch. I. p. 575. ᾿ The observance of this latter festival (Christmas) 
spread into the East; while that of the Epiphany, as the baptismal day, was adopted in 
the West. 

See, generally, Lardner’s Works, Vol. I. Book II. 3. p. 356 sq. Lond. 1835. Gieseler 
Kirchengesch. I. Ὁ. 62. p. 575. 3te Ausg. For the literature, see Hase Leben Jesu, §§ 34, 
35. 2te Aufl. 


§ 10. The visit of the Magi at Bethlehem naturally follows the presentation in the 
temple; since, after the jealousy of Herod had been once roused, this public presentation 
could not well have taken place. Joseph and Mary return from Jerusalem to Bethle- 
hem, distant five English miles, where they had now been detained for nearly two 
months. Luke indeed does not allude to this return (2, 39); but neither does he mention 
the flight into Egypt. 


§ 13. The genealogy in Luke is inverted, for the sake of more convenient com- 
parison. 

I. In the genealogy given by Matthew, considered by itself, some difficulties present 
themselves. 

1. There is some diversity among commentators in making out the three divisions, 
each of fourteen generations, v. 17. It is, however, obvious, that the first division be- 
gins with Abraham and ends with David. But does the second begin with David, or 
with Solomon? Assuredly with the former; because, just as the first begins ἀπὸ 
“ABgadu, so the second also is said to begin ἀπὸ Javid, The first extends ἕως Δαυΐδ, 
and includes him; the second extends ἕως τῆς μετοικεσίας, Ϊ, 6. to an epoch and not toa 
person; and therefore the persons who are mentioned as coéval with this epoch (ἐπὶ 
τῆς μετοικεσίας v. 11), are not reckoned before it. After the epoch the enumeration 
begins again with Jechoniah, and ends with Jesus. In this way the three divisions are 
made out thus: 


184 OUR LORD’S BIRTH AND CHILDHOOD. [Parr I. 

1. Abraham. 1. David. 1. Jechoniah. 
2. Isaac. 2. Solomon. 2. Salathiel. 
3. Jacob. 3. Roboam. 3. Zorobabel. 

~. 4. Judah. 4. Abiah. 4. Abiud. 
5. Phares. 5. Asa. 5. Eliakim. 
6. Esrom. 6. Josaphat. 6. Azor. 
7. Aram. 7. Joram. 7. Sadoe. 
8. Aminadab. 8. Uzziah (Ozias). 8. Achim. 
9. Naasson. 9. Jotham. 9. Eliud. 
10. Salmon. 10. Ahaz. 10. Eleazar. 
11. Boaz. 11. Hezekiah. 11. Matthan. 
12. Obed. 12. Manasseh. 12. Jacob. 
13. Jesse. 13. Amon. 13. Joseph. 
14. David. 14, Josiah. 14. Jesus. 


2. Another difficulty arises from the fact, that between Joram and Ozias, in v. 8, 
three names of Jewish kings are omitted, viz. Ahaziah, Joash, and Amaziah; see 2K. 
8, 25 and 2 Chr. 22,1. 2K. 11, 2. 21 and 2 Chr. 22,11. 2 K. 12,21. 14, 1 and 2 Chr, 24, 
27. Further, between Josiah and Jechoniah in v.11, the name of Jehoiakim is also 
omitted; 2 K. 23, 34. 2 Chr. 36,4. comp. 1 Chr. 3, 15. 16. If these four names are to 
be reckoned, then the second division, instead of fourteen generations, will contain 
eighteen, in contradiction to v. 17. To avoid this difficulty, Neweome and some others 
have regarded v. 17 as a mere gloss, “a marginal note taken into the text.” This 
indeed is in itself possible ; yet all the external testimony of manuscripts and versions is 
in favour of the genuineness of that verse. It is better therefore to regard these names 

85 having been customarily omitted in the current genealogical tables, from which 
Matthew copied. Such omissions of particular generations did sometimes actually 
occur, “ propterea quod male essent et impi,” according to R. Sal. Jarchi; see Jarchi 
on Gen. c. 11. ο. 16. Surenhus, Βίβλ. Καταλλ, p. 97. Lightfoot Hor. Heb. in Matth. 1, 8. 
A striking example of an omission of this kind, apparently without any such reason, is 
found in Ezra 7, 1-5 compared with 1 Chr. 6, 3-15. This latter passage contains the 
lineal descent of the high-priests from Aaron to the captivity; while Ezra, in the place 
cited, in tracing back his own genealogy through the very same line of descent, omits at 
least six generations. The two accounts stand thus: 


1 Chr. 6, 3-15. Ezra 7, 1-5. 1 Chr. 6, 3-15. Ezra 7; 1-5. 
1. Aaron. Aaron. 13. Azariah. 

2. Bleazar. Eleazar. 14. Johanan. 

3. Phinehas. Phinehas. 15. Azariah, Azarih. 
4, Abishua. Abishua., 16. Amarigh. Amariah. 
5. Bukki. Bukki. 17. Ahitub. Ahitub 
6. Uzzi. Uzzi. 18. Zadok. Zadok. 
7. Zerahiah. Zerahiah. 19. Shallum. Shallum. 
8. Meraioth. Meraioth. 20. Hilkiah. Hilkiah. 
9. Amariah. | QL. Azariah. Azatiah, 
10. Ahitub. 22. Seraiah. Seraiah. 
11. Zadok. 23. Jehozadak. 

12. Ahimaaz. 24. Ezra 





a - 7 


ae 


tee ESS em, 


PELE 


oD TE DN he MS 


§ 13.] NOTES.—THE GENEALOGIES. 185 


A similar omission is necessarily implied in the genealogy of David, as given Ruth 4, 
20-22. 1 Chr. 2, 10-12. Matth. 1, 5.6. Salmon was cotemporary with the capture of 
Jericho by Joshua, and married Rahab. But from that time until David, an interval of 
at least four hundred and fifty years (Acts 13, 20), there intervened, according to the 
list, only four generations, averaging of course more than one hundred years to each. 
But the highest average in point of fact is three generations to a century; and if reck- 
oned by the eldest sons they are usually shorter, or three generations for every seventy- 
five or eighty years. See Sir 1. Newton’s Chronol. p. 53. Lond. 1728. 

We may therefore rest in the necessary conclusion, that as our Lord’s regular 
descent from David was always asserted, and was never denied even by the Jews; so 
Matthew, in tracing this admitted descent, appealed to genealogical tables, which were 
public and acknowledged in the family and tribe from which Christ sprang. He could 
not indeed do otherwise. How much stress was laid by the Jews upon lineage in 
general, and how much care and attention were bestowed upon such tables, is well 
known. See Lightfoot Hor. Heb. in Matth. 1, 1. Comp. Phil. 3, 4. 5. 

II. Other questions of some difficulty present themselves, when we compare together 
the two genealogies. | 

1. Both tables at first view purport to give the lineage of our Lord through Joseph. 
But Joseph cannot have been the son by natural descent of both Joseph and Heli (Eli), 
Matth. 1, 16. Luke 3,23. Only one of the tables therefore can give his true lineage by 
generation. This is done apparently in that of Matthew; because, beginning at Abra-. 
ham, it proceeds by natural descent, as we know from history, until after the exile; and 
then continues on in the same mode of expression until Joseph. Here the phrase is 


‘changed; and it isno longer Joseph who “begat” Jesus, but Joseph “the husband. 


of Mary, of whom was born Jesus who is called the Christ.” See Augustine de Con- 
sensu Evangel. II. 5. 

2. To whom then does the genealogy in Luke chiefly relate? Ifin any way to 
Joseph, as the language purports, then it must be because he in some way bore the legal 
relation of son to Heli, either by adoption or by marriage. If the former simply, it is 
difficult to comprehend, why, along with his true personal lineage as traced by Matthew up. 
through the royal line of Jewish kings to David, there should be given also another sub- 
ordinate genealogy, not personally his own, and running back through a different and in- 
ferior line to the same great ancestor. If, on the other hand, as is most probable, this re- 
lation to Heli came by marriage with his daughter, so that Joseph was truly his son-in- 
law (comp. Ruth 1,8. 11. 12); then it follows, that the genealogy in Luke is in fact that of 
Mary the mother of Jesus. This being so, we can perceive a sufficient reason, why this 
genealogy should be thus given, viz. in order to show definitely, that Jesus was in the 
most full and perfect sense a descendant of David ; not only by law in the royal line of 
kings through his reputed father, but also in fact by direct personal descent through his - 
mother. 

That Mary, like Joseph, was a descendant of David, is not indeed elsewhere ex- 
pressly said in the New Testament. Yet a very strong presumption to that effect is to 
be drawn from the address of the angel in Luke 1,32; as also from the language of 


Luke 2, 5, where Joseph, as one of the posterity of David, is said to have gone up to 
24 


186 OUR LORD’S BIRTH AND. CHILDHOOD. [Parr I. 


Bethlehem, ἀπογράψασϑαι σὺν Magu x.2.4, to enrol himself with Mary his espoused 
wife. The ground and circumstances of Mary’s enrolment must obviously have been 
the same as in the case of Joseph himself. Whether all this arose from her having 
been an only child and heiress, as some suppose, so that she was espoused to Joseph in 
accordance with Num, 36, 8. 9, it is not necessary here to inquire. See Michaelis 
Mosaisches Recht, Engl. “ Commentaries on the Laws of Moses,” Part II. § 78. 

It is indeed objected, that it was not customary among the Jews to trace back descent 
through the female line, that is, on the mother’s side. There are however examples to 
show that this was sometimes done; and in the case of Jesus, as we have seen, there 
was a sufficient reason for it. Thus in 1 Chr. 2, 22, Jair is enumerated among the pos- 
terity of Judah by regular descent. But the grandfather of Jair had married the daugh- 
ter of Machir, one of the heads of Manasseh, 1 Chr. 2, 21. 7, 14; and therefore, in 
Num. 32, 40.41, Jair is called the son (descendant) of Manasseh. In like manner, in 
Ezra 2, 61 and Neh. 7, 63, a certain family is spoken of as “the children of Barzillai;” 
because their ancestor “took a wife of the daughters of Barzillai the Gileadite, and was 
called after their name.” See Surenhus. Bifi. καταλλ. p. 99. 

3. A question is raised as to the identity, in the two genealogies, of the Salathiel 
and Zorobabel named as father and son, Matth. 1, 12. Luke 3, 27. The Zorobabel of 
Matthew is no doubt the chief, who led back the first band of captives from Babylon, 
and rebuilt the temple, Ezrac.2-6. He is also called the son of Salathiel in Ezra 3, 2. 
Neh. 12, 1. Hagg. 1, 1. 2, 2.23. Were then the Salathiel and Zorobabel of Luke the 
same persons? Those who assume this, must rest solely on the identity of the names; 
for there is no other possible evidence to prove, either that they were cotemporary, or 
that they were not different persons. On the other hand, there are one or two con- 
siderations, of some force, which go to show that they were probably not the same 
persons. 

First, if Salathiel and Zorobabel are indeed the same in both genealogies, then 
Salathiel, who according to Matthew was the son of Jechoniah by natural descent, 
must have been called the son of Neri in Luke either from adoption or marriage. In 
that case, his connection with David through Nathan, as given by Luke, was not his 
own personal genealogy. It is difficult therefore to see, why Luke, after traeing back 
the descent of Jesus to Salathiel, should abandon the true personal lineage in the royal 
line of kings, and turn aside again to a merely collateral and humbler line. If the 
mother of Jesus was in fact descended from the Zorobabel and Salathiel of Matthew, 
she, like them, was descended also from David through the royal line. Why rob her 
of this dignity, and ascribe to her only a descent through an inferiorlineage? See 
Spanheim Dubia Evangel. I. p. 108 sq. 

Again, the mere identity of names under these circumstances, affords no proof; for 
nothing is more common even among cotemporaries. Thus we have two Ezras; one 
in Neh. 12, 1. 13. 33; from whom Ezra the scribe is expressly distinguished in v. 36. 
We have likewise two Nehemiahs; one who went up with Zorobabel, Ezra 2, 2; and 
the other the governor who went later to Jerusalem, Neh, 2,9 sq. So too, as cotempora- 
ries, Joram son of Ahab king of Israel, and Joram (Jehoram) son of Jehoshaphat king of 
Judah; 2 K. 8, 16. coll. v. 23. 24. Also, Joash king of Judah and Joash king of Israel ; 











δὲ 13-16.] NOTES. 187 


2K. 13, 9, 10. Further we find in succession among the descendants of Cain the 


following names: Enoch, Irad, Mehujael, Methusael, Lamech, Gen. 4, 17, 18; and later 
among the descendants of Seth these similar ones: Enoch, Methuselah, Lamech, 


. Gen. 5, 21-25. See Spanheim|.c. p.110sq. Surenhus, |. c. p. 134. 


Various artificial theories of inheritances and levirate marriages have at different 
times been proposed, in order to explain and harmonize the two genealogies. In respect 
to all these, it may suffice here to quote the words of Lightfoot: “Nec opus est, nec 
ratio ulla, nec fundamentum omnino ullum, quo fingamus conjugia nescio que, et 
fratriationes nescio quas, ut tollatur scrupulus hoc in loco, ubi quidem non est scrupulus 
omnino ullus.” Hor. Heb. in Luc. 3, 23. 


‘ PART ITI. 
ANNOUNCEMENT AND INTRODUCTION OF OUR LORD’S PUBLIC MINISTRY. | 


δὲ 14—20. 


§ 14. For the time when John the Baptist entered upon his public ministry, see Note 
on §7.—Matth. 3, 11 and the parallel passages, see in the next Note. 


§ 15. For the time of our Lord’s baptism, see Note on § 7.—We may here, once for 
all, make a remark upon the difference of the words as quoted in Matth. 3, 17 and the 
parallel passages. A like difference is seen in the four copies of the title on the cross, 
Matih. 27, 37. Mark 15, 26. Luke 23, 38. John 19,19. And still more, in the solemn 
words of our Lord at the institution of the cup, Matt. 26,28. Mark 14, 24. Luke 22, 20. 
1 Cor. 11,25. Similar varieties of expression in the different reports of the same lan- 
guage are found in the following passages, as well as very many others: Matth. 3, 11. 
Mark 1, 7. Luke 3, 16. John 1, 27.—Matth. 9, 11. Mark 5, 16. Luke 5, 30.—Matth. 15, 27. 
Mark 7, 28.—Matth. 16, 6-9. Mark 8, 17-19.—Maitth. 20, 33. Mark 10, 51. Luke 18, 41.— 
Matth. 21,9. Mark 11, 9. Luke 19, 38.—Matth. 26, 39. Mark 14, 36. Luke 22, 42.—Matth. 
28, 5.6. Mark 16, 6. Luke 24, 5. 6.—All these examples ge only to show, that where the 
Evangelists profess to record the expressions used by our Lord and others, they usually 
give them according to the sense, and not according to the letter. As Le Clerc expresses 
it: “ Apostoli magis sententiam, quam locutiones, exprimere volunt;” Harm. p. 518. 


§ 16. That the temptation of Jesus took place immediately αἴδι his baptism, appears 
from the εὐθύς of Mark 1, 12; and also from a comparison of John 1, 29. 35. 44.— 
According to Mark and Luke, Jesus was subjected to temptation during the forty days. 
Matthew and Luke specify three instances of temptation, but in a different order. One 
of these apparently must have occurred at the end of the forty days. The order of 
Matthew is perhaps the most natural of the two; though, as the accounts were probably 
derived from information given by our Lord himself, at various times, in his intercourse 
with his disciples, the true order may have been different from either. 


188 FROM THE FIRST PASSOVER UNTIL THE SECOND. [Parr III. 


§ 18. In v. 21 the Baptist declares that he was not Elias; meaning that he was not 
Elias risen from the dead. In Matth. 17, 12 Jesus says that “Elias is come already ;” 
meaning that John had come “in the spirit and power of Elias;” Luke 1, 17.—In v. 33, 
John the Baptist says he knew not Jesus; though in Matth. 3, 14 (§ 15) he appears to 
have known who he was. That is to say; John must have been acquainted with the 
events of his own childhood and that of Jesus; he had now come preaching and bap- 
tizing as his forerunner, v. 31; but he knew not Jesus personally before he came to be 
baptized ; at which time God had promised him a sign, by which he might know cer- 
tainly that Jesus was the Messiah. 


§ 20. The third day refers back to John 1,44. The journey in returning to Galilee 

did not require more than two days; the distance being, in any position of Bethania or 

-Bethabara, not over about fifty miles. Cana, now Kéna el-Jelil, was situated about 

seven miles north of Nazareth, and about three miles N. by E. of Sepphoris; see Bibl. 
Res. in Palest, III. p. 204. 


PART III. 


OUR LORD’S FIRST PASSOVER, AND THE SUBSEQUENT TRANSACTIONS UNTIL 
THE SECOND. 


§§ 21—35. 


§ 21. This our Lord’s first passover is mentioned only by John ; though the language 
of the other Evangelists implies, that he had been again in Judea; Matth. 4, 12. Mark 
1, 14.—John connects with this first passover the cleansing of the temple and the casting 
out of the traders; while the other Evangelists, describe a like transaction at his last 
passover, Matth. 21,12sq. Mark 11, 15 sq. Luke 19,45sq. The question is raised, 
whether these were different transactions; and whether there is not here a neglect of the 
order of time, either by John or in the other Gospels. As the language and the note 
of time in all the Evangelists in respect to both the instances, is entirely definite and 
specific, the answer may be said to depend upon a further question, viz. Whether our 
_ Lord would be likely to repeat a highly symbolic and important public act, after an 

interval of two or three years? That he was accustomed to repeat the substance of 
‘his discourses, or at least the more striking parts of them, at different times and before 
different persons, is sufficiently obvious. Compare Luke 11, 37-54 uttered in Galilee, 
with Matth. 23, 1-39 delivered at Jerusalem; likewise Matth. 5, 13 in the Sermon on the 
Mount, with Mark 9, 50 and Luke 14, 34. 35, spoken elsewhere; and also the different 
examples of the Lord’s prayer, Matth, 6, 9-13, Luke 11,2-4. Further, Matth, 5, 29, 
30 compared with Mark 9, 43-47; and Matth. 6, 25-33, with Luke 12, 22-31. Such 
examples indeed may be multiplied almost indefinitely, as the pages of the Harmony 
every where show. Now if this is true in respect to the discourses of Christ, why 
might he not just as well have repeated, after a long interva] and before different per- 


a 





νυ ἤν... 
- Se pe 


Fe SP ot eae Me Vee Re τ 


Ve 


SR ον“ 0 
; 


fT ae ee EE ng Oe ey SS 


ΙΝ... 
Ἐ 


pasts 


a Oe ee 


Sn a re 


MSE are 


oe 


§§ 18-29.] NOTES. af 189 


sons, a public symbolical act, so significant in itself, and so expressive of his character 
and authority as the Messiah? The Jews, it seems, did not question his right to per- 
form such an act, provided he was a true prophet. They only demanded some sign of 
his authority ; John 2,18. This Jesus gave, and had already given in his mighty 
works, wrought at the same passover, v.23; works which drew from Nicodemus, a 
Pharisee and member of the Sanhedrim, the admission, that he was “a teacher come 
from God ;” John 3, 2. 
On the “three days” in John 2, 20, see Note on § 49. 


§§ 23, 24. The order is here determined by comparing John 3, 24 with Matth. 4, 12. 
Mark 1,14. Jesus goes out with his disciples from Jerusalem into the country of 
Judea ; where he remains until after John was cast into prison. See the next Note. 


§ 25. John 4, 35 contains a specification of time which is tolerably definite: “Say ye 
not, There are yet four months, and the harvest cometh?” According to Lev. 23, 5-7. 
10.11.14. 15, and Jos. Antiq. 3. 10. 5, the first-fruits of the barley-harvest were presented 
on the second day of the paschal week ; while the wheat-harvest was two or three 
weeks later; see Bibl. Res. in Palest. II. p.99sq. Hence this journey of our Lord must 
have been made in the latter part of November or in December, about eight months 
after the preceding passover. It follows, that the public ministry of John the Baptist 
had continued for at least a year and six months, before his imprisonment. 


§ 28. The visit to Nazareth is inserted here on the testimony of Luke 4, 16 sq. 
which is supported by Matth. 4, 13. The visit mentioned in Matth. 13,54sq. Mark 6, 1 Βα. 
was later, and took place after the raising of Jairus’ daughter.—Our Lord’s escape from 
the crowd, Luke 4, 30, does not seem necessarily to imply any thing directly super- 
natural; comp. John 8, 59. 10, 39. 


§ 29. That the call of the four Apostles belongs here, in accordance with Mark’s 
order, is obvious; since they were present with Jesus at the healing of the demoniac and 
of Peter’s wife’s mother, δὲ 30, 31—The three accounts all evidently relate to the same 
transaction. Luke relates more particularly the former part, including the putting off 
upon the lake in Simon’s boat and also the miraculous draught; and passes lightly 
over the latter part. Matthew and Mark, on the other hand, narrate the former part 
only generally ; but the latter part with more detail. In the one part, Luke introduces 
circumstances which the others omit; in the other part, Matthew and Mark mention 
facts which Luke has not noted, The remark of Spanheim is here just: “ Quae narran- 
tur a Luca, illa non negantur a Matthaeo, sed praetermittuntur tantum. Nihil vero fre- 
quentius, quam quaedam praetermitti ab his, suppleri ab aliis; ne vel scriptores sacri 
ex compacto scripsisse viderentur, vel lectores uni ex illis, reliquis spretis, haererent,” 
Dubia Evang. Tom. ΠΗ]. Dub. 72. vii. 


190 FROM THE SECOND PASSOVER UNTIL THE THIRD. [Parr lV. 
PART IV. 
OUR LORD’S SECOND PASSOVER, AND THE SUBSEQUENT TRANSACTIONS UNTIL THE 
THIRD. 
’ §§ 36—66. 


§ 36. On the phrase ἑορτὴ τῶν ᾿Ιουδαΐων -John 5, 1, turns mainly the question as to 
the duration of our Lord’s public ministry. John notes distinctly three Passovers ; 
John 2, 13. 6, 4. 12,1. If now this ἑορτή be another Passover, then our Lord’s public 
labours continued during three and a half years; if not, then the time of his ministry 
must in all probability be reckoned one year less. 

The only reasonable ground. of doubt in this case, is the absence of the article 
before ἑορτή. Did the text read ἡ ἑορτὴ τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων, (as is actually the case in Codd. 
C, E, L, in several cursive Manuscripts, in‘Ed. Complut. and elsewhere,) then, as most 
admit, it would with sufficient definiteness denote the Passover; comp. Matth. 26, 5. 
Luke 2, 42. John 4, 45. 11, 56. al. Liicke and De Wette do indeed attempt to invalidate 
such a conclusion; but apparently without any good ground. At any rate, even as the 
text now stands, it may assuredly in itself just as well denote the great Jewish festival, 
as any other. The following considerations seem to show, that it does most probably 
thus stand for a Passover, viz. the second in our Lord’s public ministry. 

1. The word ἑορτή without the article is put definitely for the Passover, in the phrase 
κατὰ ἑορτήν Matth. 27, 15. Mark 15, 6. Luke 23, 17. Comp. John 18, 39. 

2. In Hebrew a noun before a genitive is made definite by prefixing the article, not 
to the noun itself, but to the genitive; see Gesen. Heb. Gr. ὃ 109.1. Nordheim. Heb. 
Gr. II. p. 14.7. This idiom is transferred by the LXX into Greek; 6. g. Deut. 16, 13 
ἑορτὴν τῶν σχηνῶν ποιήσεις σεαυτῷ, Heb. MDH 3N, i.e. the festival of Tabernacles, 
2 K. 18, 15 ἐν ϑησαυροῖς οἴκου tov βασιλέως, Heb. 285 ma ΤΟΣ ἼΝΣ. So too in the 
New Testament; Matth. 12, 24 ἐν τῷ Βεελζεβοὺλ ἄρχοντι τῶν δαιμονίων, i.e. the prince 
of demons. Luke 2, 11 é πόλει, Aavid (the proper name being itself definite), i. 6. not 
a city of David, but the city, as in English David’s city, Heb. "13 ""9. Acts 8, 5 sis 
πόλιν τῆς Σαμαρείας, i.e. the city (metropolis) of Samaria; see v.14. Hence, in the 
passage before us, according to the analogous English idiom, we may render the 
phrase ἑορτὴ τῶν ᾿Ιουδαίων by the Jews’ festival ; which separ it πρός ρα as the 
Passover. Similar and illustrative is the phrase in John 6, 4: ἦν δὲ ἐγγὺς τὸ πάσχα, 
7 ἑορτὴ τῶν Ἰουδαίων. See Hengstenberg’s Christol. II. p. 565. 

3. It is not probable, that John means here to imply that the festival was indefinite 
or uncertain. Such is not his usual manner. The Jewish festivals were to him the 
measures of time; and in every other instance they are definitely specified. So the 
Passover, John 2, 23. 12, 1; even when Jesus does not visit it, 6,4; and also when it is 
expressed only by 7 ἑορτή, 4, 45. 11, 56. 12, 12.20. al. So too the festival of Taber- 
nacles, % ἑορτὴ τῶν “I. ἡ oxnvonnyia 7,2; and of the Dedication, τὰ ἐγκαίνια 10, 22. 
This is all natural in him ; for an indefinite festival could afford no note of time. 





OE ΥΉΉΡΥΥ (σαν Ὁ 





2 a ee en RE as 


ᾧ 36.] NOTES.—THE FESTIVAL IN JOHN V. 





4, The plucking of the ears of grain by the disciples (§ 37 and Yor), dibieg shad a. 


Passover had just been kept; which tallies accurately with this visitdfonr, bat paiph 
Jerusalem. — 


5. This ἑορτή could not have been the festival either of Pentecost or of Tabernacles 
next following our Lord’s first Passover. He returned from Judea to Galilee not until 
eight months after that Passover, when both these festivals were already past; see 
Note on § 25.—That it might by possibility have been the Pentecost after a second 
Passover not mentioned, and before that in John 6, 4, cannot perhaps be fully dis- 
proved ; but such a view has in itself no probability, and is apparently entertained by 


-- noone. At any rate, it also would give the same duration of three and a half years to 


our Lord’s ministry. 

6. Nor can we well understand here the festival of Purim, which occurred on the 
fourteenth and fifteenth of the month Adar or March, one month before the Passover; 
see Hsth, 9, 21. 22. 26-28. Against this the following considerations present them- 
selves: (a) The Jews did not go up to Jerusalem to celebrate the festival of Purim. 
The observance of it among that people throughout the world consisted solely in read- 
ing the Book of Esther in their synagogues on those days, and making them “ days of 
feasting and joy and of sending portions [dishes] one to another and gifts to the poor ;” 
Esth. 9,22. Jos. Ant. 11. 6. 13. Reland Antiqq. Heb. IV.9. But the “multitude” 
John 5, 13, seems to imply a concourse of strangers at one of the great festivals.—(b) 
It is very improbable, that Jesus would have gone upto Jerusalem at the Purim, to 
which the Jews did not go up, rather than at the Passover, which occurred only a 
month later. His being once present at the festival of Dedication (John 10, 22) is not 
a parallel case; since he appears not to have gone up for that purpose, but this festival 
occurred while he remained in or near Jerusalem after the festival of Tabernacles, 


John 7, 2 sq.—(c) The infirm man was healed on the Sabbath, John 5, 9; which Sab- 


bath belonged to the festival, as the whole context shows, John 5, 1. 2. 10-13. But the 
Purim was never celebrated on a Sabbath; and, when it happened to fall on that day, 
was regularly deferred; see Reland ]. c. 

7. The main objection urged against taking this ἑορτή as a νων νδη is the circum- 
stance, that in such case, as our Lord did not go up to the Passover spoken of in John: 
6, 4, but only at the subsequent festival of Tabernacles in John 7, 2 sq. he would thus 
have absented himself from Jerusalem for a year and six months; a neglect, it is: 
alleged, inconsistent with his character and with a due observance of the Jewish law. 
But a sufficient reason is assigned for this omission, viz. “because the Jews sought to 
kill him,” John 7, 1. comp. 5,18. It obviously had been our Lord’s custom ‘to visit the 


_ Holy City every year at the Passover; and because, for the reason assigned, he once: 
‘ let this occasion pass by, he therefore went up six months afterwards at the festival of. 
_ Tabernacles. ΑἹ] this presents a view perfectly natural; and covers the whole ground. 

ἢ Nor have we any right to assume, as many do, that our Lord regularly went up to: 
Ἶ Jerusalem on other occasions, besides those specified in the New Testament. 


In this instance, the most ancient view is that which interprets ἑορτή of a Passover.’ 


So Ireneus in the third century: “Et posthac iterum secunda vice adscendit [Jesus] 
ἴῃ diem Paschae in Hierusalem, quando paralyticum, qui juxta natatoriam jacebat: 


192 FROM THE SECOND PASSOVER UNTIL THE THIRD. [Parr IV. 


XXXviii annos curavit ;” adv. Her. 2. 39. The same view was adopted by Eusebius, 
Theodoret, and others; and in later times has been followed by Luther, Scealiger, 
Grotius, Lightfoot, Le Clerc, Lampe, Hengstenberg, etc. Cyril and Chrysostom held 
to a Pentecost, as also the Harmony ascribed to Tatian; and so, in modern times, 
Erasmus, Calvin, Beza, Bengel, etc. The festival of Purim was first suggested by 
Keppler (Eclogae Chronicae pp. 72, 129 sq. Francof. 1615); and at the present day 
this is the only view, aside from the Passover, that finds advocates. Those who hold it, 
as Hug, Neander, Olshausen, Tholuck, Meyer, (Liicke and De Wette leave the ques- 
tion undecided,) regard John 6, 4 as having reference to the second Passover during 
our Lord’s ministry; which thus becomes limited to two and a half years,—See, gener- 
ally, Hengstenberg’s Christol. II. p. 561 sq. Neander’s Leben wir 3te Ausg. p. 434, 
Anm. Liicke Comm. ib. Joh. in loc. IL. p. 1 sq. 


§ 37. The circumstances here narrated sti that a Passover had just been cele- 
brated; see Note on § 25. The σάββατον δευτερόπρωτον was probably the first Sabbath 
after the second day of the Passover or of unleavened bread ; that is, the first of the seven 
Sabbaths reckoned between that day and Pentecost; see the Lexicons, also Scaliger 
Emendat. Tempp. V1. 557. Our Lord would seem to have hastened away from Jerusa- 
lem; for which a reason is found in John 5, 16. 18. 


§ 40. The appointment of the Twelve follows here according to Mark and Luke 
Matth. 10, 2-4 gives their names, as having been already appointed. Lebbeus, called 
also Thaddeus by Matthew and Mark, is the same as Jude the brother of James in 
Luke. The epithet ὃ ζηλωτής, Zealot, is the Greek translation of ὃ χανανίτης derived 
from Heb. 83p, Aram. j82P. See the Lexicons. 


§ 41. The Sermon on the Mount follows here, in accordance with the order of Luke. 
The correctness of this order so far as it respects Matthew, depends on the question : 
Whether the discourse as reported by the two Evangelists is one and the same, and 
was delivered on the same occasion? This question is answered at the present day by 
interpreters, with great unanimity, in the affirmative; and mainly for the following 
reasons. 

1. The choice of the Twelve by our Lord, as his ministers and witnesses, furnished 
an appropriate occasion for this public declaration respecting the spiritual nature of his 


kingdom, and the life and character required of those who would become his true — 


followers. Luke expressly assigns this as the occasion ; and although Matthew is si- 
lent here and elsewhere as to the selection of the Apostles, yet some passages of the 
discourse as reported by him, seem to presuppose their previous appointment as teach- 
ers; see Matth. 5, 13. 14. 7, 6. 


2. The beginning and the end of both discourses, and the general course of thought — 


in both, exhibit an entire accordance one with the other. 

3. The historical circumstances which follow both discourses are the same, viz: 
the entrance into Capernaum and the healing of the Centurion’s servant. 

The main objection which has been felt and urged against the identity of the two 


discourses, is the fact, that Matthew’s report contains much that is not found in Luke, 


nn nee 


' 











δῇ 37-42.] NOTES.—THE SERMON ON THE MOUNT. 193 


while, on the other hand, Luke adds a few things not found in Matthew, as wv. 24-26. 
38-40. 45; and, further, his expressions are often modified and different, as in vv. 20. 
29. 35. 36, 43. 44.46. But this objection vanishes, if we look at the different objects 
which the two Evangelists had in view. Matthew was writing chiefly for Hebrew 
Christians; and it was therefore important for him to bring out, in full, the manner in 
which our Lord enforced the spiritual nature of his dispensation and doctrine, in oppo- 
sition to the mere letter of the Jewish law and the teaching and practice of the Scribes 
and Pharisees. This he does particularly, and with many examples, in Matth. 5, 18-33. 
6, 1-34. Luke, on the contrary, was writing mainly for Gentile Christians; and hence 
he omits the long passages of Matthew above referred to, and dwells only upon those: 
topics which are of practical importance to all. In other respects, the discourses, as 
given by the two writers, do not differ more than is elsewhere often the case in different: 
reports of the same discourse. Compare Matth. 24, 1-42 with Mark 13, 1-37 and Luke 
21, 5-36; also Matth. 28, 5-8 with Mark 16, 6-8 and Luke 24, 5-8. See also Note: 
on ὃ 15. , 

_ Augustine, in order to avoid thé like difficulty, supposed that our Lord first held the 
longer discourse in Matthew before his disciples on the top of the mountain; and after- 
wards descended and delivered the same in the briefer form of Luke to the multitudes 
below; De consensu Evangelistarum, 11. 45. But this is unnecessary ; and the order of 
circumstances would seem rather to have been the following: Our Lord retires to the 
mountain and chooses the Twelve; and with them descends to the multitudes on the: 
level place or plain, where he heals many. (§ 40.) As they press upon him, he again 
ascends to a more elevated spot, where he can overlook the crowds and be heard by 
them ; and here, seating himself with the Twelve around him, he addresses himself 
to his disciples in particular and to the multitudes in general. See Matth. 5, 1. 2. 
Luke 6, 20; also Matth. 7, 28. Luke 7, 1. 

The mountain where these events took place, was doubtless some part of the high 
ground on the west of the Lake of Tiberias, not far from Capernaum. The Romish 
church has the tradition, that the singular hill called Tell Hattin,or Kiran Hattin, was. 
the spot; and that hill is hence known to travellers as the Mount of Beatitudes. But. 
this eminence is seven or eight miles distant from the probable site of Capernaum ;. 
which seems inconsistent with Matth. 8, 5. Luke 7, 1.. And further, this tradition is cur-. 
rent only among foreign Latin monks, and cannot be traced back, even among them, . 
beyond the twelfth century ; while the Greek church, which has been native upon the 
soil from the earliest centuries, knows nothing of it; and has indeed no tradition what- 
ever connected with the Sermon on the Mount. See Bibl. Researches in Palestine, . 
IIL. p. 240. 


§ 42. In Matthew, the Centurion seems to come in person to Jesus; in Luke, he sends. 
the elders of the Jews. This diversity is satisfactorily explained by the old law-maxim:. 
Qui facit per alium, facit per se. Matthew narrates briefly ; Luke gives the circum- 
stances more fully. In like manner, in John 4,1, Jesus is said to baptize, when he. 
did it by his disciples. In John 19, 1, and elsewhere, Pilate is said to have- 
scourged Jesus; certainly not with his own hands. In Mark 10, 35, James and John: 


25 


194 FROM THE SECOND PASSOVER UNTIL THE THIRD. [Part IV. 


come to Jesus with a certain request; in Matth. 20, 20, it is their mother who prefers the 
request. In 2 Sam. 24, 1, God moves David to number Israel ; in 1 Chr. 21, 1, itis Sa- 
tan who provokes him. 


§ 44. Matthew places this narrative after the sending out of the Twelve, Matth. 11, 
1.2. This appears to be too late; for during their absence John was beheaded; see 
Mark 6, 30. Matth. 14,13. The order of Luke is therefore retained. Our Lord was 
probably at or near Capernaum; comp. § 45. 


§ 48. The order of Mark is here resumed, who places these transactions next after 
the appointment of the Twelve, omitting the Sermon on the Mount and other inter- 
vening matters. The narrative of Luke is obviously parallel; although given by him 
in a different place. See Introd. Note to Part VI. p. 199. 


§ 49. The specification in Matth. 12, 40, that Jesus should be “three days and three 
nights” in the sepulchre, seems at first view not to harmonize with the accounts of his 
burial and resurrection. From these latter it appears, that he was laid in the tomb 
before sunset on the sixth day of the week or Friday, and rose again quite early on the 
first day of the week or Sunday; having lain in the grave not far from thirty-six hours. 
See §§ 159, 160, and Notes. This accords with the usual formula which our Lord em- 
ployed in speaking of his resurrection, viz. that “he should rise on the third day;” 
Matth. 16, 21. 20,19. Mark 9, 31. 10, 34. Luke 9, 22. 18, 33. ete. Equivalent to thisis 
also the expression, “after three days I will rise again,” Matth. 27, 63. Mark 8,31. John 
2,19. etc. This latter idiom is found also in John 20, 26, where eight days is put for a 
week. So tooin German, the expression: nach drey Tagen, “after three days,” is always 
the same as: am dritten Tage, “on the third day,” the day after to-morrow; and acht 
Tage, “eight days,” is the more common phrase instead of eine Woche, “a week.” 

In the present instance, Matth. 12, 40, the apparent difficulty arises from the form of the 
expression “three days and three nights,” which our Lord uses here, and here alone, 
because he is quoting from Jonah 2, 1. [1, 17.] The phrase is doubtless in itself equivalent 
to the Greek γυχϑήμερον, a day and night of twenty-fourhours. But the Hebrew form 
midsb πρῶ ones n> three days and three nights, was likewise used generally 
and indefinitely for three days simply; as is obvious from 1 Sam. 30, 12. 13, and the 
circumstances there narrated. Such also is manifestly the case here. 


§ 5). The order here connects back with Luke 11, 36, in § 49. Jesus receives the 
invitation of the Pharisee ἐν δὲ τῷ λαλῆσαι, whilehe was speaking. See Introd. Note to 
Part VI. p. 199. 


§ 52. Luke c. 12 is directly connected with the preceding by the phrase ἐν οἷς, mean- 
while. 


§ 53. The order is here fixed by v. 1. 


§ 54. The order here depends on Matth. 13, 1; the intervening events in δῇ 51-57 
being supplied by Luke. The place may be Capernaum ; but this is not certain. 





CO δ νμμνμαμσνκκυνινκν ννω. κω. «νὰ 


—" = 7 


NE ee SS eee 








δὲ 44-64. | NOTES. 195 


§ 56. Mark here fixes the order of time, “the same day at evening.” The incident 
of the Scribe and of another disciple, which Matthew gives definitely here, is related by 
Luke in a wholly different connection without any note of time. It is transferred hither, 
because it is of such a nature that it cannot well be supposed to have occurred twice. 
The conversation takes place, as our Lord was on his way from the house (Matth. 13, 
36) to the boat. : 


§ 57. Origen says that a city Τέργεσα anciently stood on the eastern shore of the 
lake of Tiberias, Opp. IV. p. 140. Gadara was a larger city, whose district or jurisdic- 
tion apparently extended to the lake, and included Gergesa. In Matth. 8,28, Griesbach 
and Knapp read Ζερασηνῶν, and Scholz Γαδαρηνῶν. 

Mark and Luke speak of only one demoniac; Matthew of two. Here the maxim of 
Le Clerc holds true: Qui plura narrat, pauciora complectitur ; qui pauciora memorat, 
plura non negat. Something peculiar in the circumstances or character of one of the 
persons; rendered him more prominent, and led the two former Evangelists to speak of 
him particularly. But their language does not exclude another.—A familiar example 
will illustrate the principle. In the year 1824, Lafayette visited the United States; and 
was every: where welcomed with honours and pageants. Historians will describe these 
as a noble incident in his life. Other writers will relate the same visit as made, and the 
same honours as enjoyed, by two persons, viz. Lafayette and his son. Will there be any 
contradiction between these two classes of writers ? Will not both record the truth ? 
See Bibliotheca Sacra, 1845. No. I. p. 169. 


§§ 58, 59. The call of Levi or Matthew is placed by the three Evangelists imme- 
diately after the healing of the paralytic in Capernaum; see δὲ 34, 35. Very naturally 
too, they all three connect with his call an account of the feast which he afterwards 
made for Jesus; in order to bring together and present at once all that was personal to 
Matthew. But from Matth. 9, 18, it appears, that while our Lord was reclining and dis- 
coursing at that feast, Jairus comes to beseech him to visit his daughter lying at the 
point of death; and Jesus goes with him. Now this transaction, according to Mark and 
Luke, did not happen until immediately after the return from the eastern shore of the 
lake. Hence the narrative of the feast is also to be transferred to this place; and that 
too with the more certainty, because the Twelve appear to have also been present at 
it; see Matth. 9, 10. Mark 2, 15. 


§§ 63, 64. While the Twelve are absent preaching in the name of Christ, Herod 
causes John the Baptist to be beheaded in the castle of Machaerus at the southern ex- 
tremity of Perea, near the Dead Sea; Jos. Antiq. 18. 5. 2. In consequence of the 
preaching of the Apostles, Herod hears the fame of Jesus; is conscience-smitten ; and 
declares him to be John, risen from the dead. The disciples of John come and tell 
Jesus; and the Twelve also return with the same intelligence; upon which Jesus 
retires to the northeastern coast of the lake, not far from the northern Bethsaida or 
Julias; see Bibl. Res. in Palest. III. p. 308. All these events seem to have taken place 
near together. ᾿ ἶ 


196 FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER, ETC. [Parr V. 


. Matthew and Mark narrate the death of the Baptist in explanation of Herod’s de- 
claration. The account of his imprisonment is transferred to § 24. 

According to John 6, 4, the Passover was now at hand, viz. the third during our 
Lord’s ministry. John therefore had lain in prison not far from a year and six months; 
and was beheaded about three years after entering upon his public ministry. See Note 
on § 25. 


§§ 65, 66. From the region of the northern Bethsaida or Julias, the disciples embark 
for Bethsaida of Galilee, Mark 6, 45; or for Capernaum according to John 6,17. They 
land on the plain of Gennesareth, Matth. 14, 34. Mark 6,53. The next day the mul- 
titudes follow in boats to Capernaum seeking for Jesus, and find him there ; John 6, 24. 
25. 59. It follows as a necessary conclusion, that Capernaum was.on or near the plain 
of Gennesareth; most probably at its northeastern extremity. For the topography of 
this region, see Bibl. Res. in Palest. III. p. 288 sq. comp. p. 282 sq. 

In John 7, 1, areason is assigned why Jesus did not go up at this time to the Passover 
mentioned in John 6, 4. This was the third Passover during his ministry. 


PART 7, 


FROM OUR LORD’S THIRD PASSOVER UNTIL HIS FINAL DEPARTURE FROM GALILEE 
AT THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES. 


§§ 67—82. 


§ 67 sq. The order of events, as far as to § 79 inclusive, is in accordance with both 
Matthew and Mark; with whom Luke also coincides, so far as he touches upon the 
same transactions. 


§ 68. Jesus retires from Galilee, first to the region of Tyre and Sidon, then to the 
Decapolis, and afterwards to the district of Cesarea Philippi. All these were districts 
not under the jurisdiction of Herod; whose domain included Galilee and Perea. Not 
improbably Jesus may have withdrawn from Galilee at this particular time, because the 
attention of Herod had been thus turned to him after the death of John the Baptist; 
and perhaps too on account of Herod’s temporary presence in that province, by which 
his own personal danger would naturally be increased. See Note on §§ 63, 64. 


§ 69. The Decapolis was on the 8. and 8. E. of the Lake of Tiberias. Our Lord in 
returning from Tyre and Sidon had probably passed through Galilee. The feeding of 
the four thousand obviously took place in the Decapolis; since Jesus immediately 
afterwards passes over the lake to Magdala on its western shore. 


§ 72. The healing of the blind man atthe northern Bethsaida, is related only by 
Mark. It took place on the way from the eastern shore of the Jake toward Cesarea 
Philippi. pes 








δὲ 65-82. ] NOTES. 197 


§74. The μετὰ τρεῖς ἡμέρας of Mark 8, 31, is equivalent to the τῇ τρίτῃ ἡμέρᾳ of 
Matth. 16, 21. Luke 9, 22. See Note on § 49. 


§ 75. On Matth. 17, 12, see Note on § 18. 


_ § 80. The sending out of the Seventy obviously took place at or near Capernaum ; 
see vv. 13.15. It comes therefore here in its order, before our Lord leaves Galilee to 
go up to the festival of Tabernacles. The words μετὰ ταῦτα, in v. 1, refer to the general 
series of events narrated in the preceding chapter; not to v.51 sq. in particular. The 
incident of the Scribe, which there follows (v.57 sq.) was in fact much earlier; see 
in § 56 and Note. ; 

According to Luke 10, 1, the Seventy were to go to every city and place, whither our 
Lord himself would come. To what part of the country, then, were they sent? Not 
throughout Galilee ; for Jesus apparently never returned to that province; and besides, 
both himself and the Twelve had already preached in all the towns and villages. Not 
in Samaria; for he merely passes through that district without making any delay 
Possibly into some parts of Judea, whither our Lord himself afterwardscame; but more 
probably along the great valley of the Jordan and throughout the populous region of 
Perea, which our Lord traversed and where he taught, after the festival of Dedication, 
and as he for the last time went up to Jerusalem; see John 10, 40. Matth. 19, 1. Mark 
10, 1. Luke 13, 22.—In accordance with this view, the return of the Seventy took place 
in Jerusalem or Judea, not long before the festival of Dedication (§ 89); immediately 
after which festival Jesus withdrew into Perea to follow up their labours, John 10, 40 sq. 
See Introd. Note to Part VI. p. 199, | 

Our Lord’s instructions to the Seventy have a striking resemblance to those given to 
the Twelve; see in ὁ 62, 


§ 81. Our Lord evades the hypocritical urgency of his relatives; and afterwards goes 
up to the festival more privately ; that is, with less of public notoriety and without being 
followed as usual by crowds. The journey mentioned in Luke 9, 51 was obviously 
his last journey from Galilee to Jerusalem; and v.53 shows that he was passing on 
rapidly and without delay. In both these circumstances, Luke accords with John; and 
the two accounts are therefore properly arranged together. See more in Introd. 
Note to Part VI. p. 198. 


§ 82. The healing of the ten lepers evidently connects itself with the same journey 
through Samaria; and is narrated by Luke out of its proper order. Compare the 
incident of the Scribe and another, Luke 9, 57 sq. and see Note on § 56. 


198 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES, ETC, [Part VI. 


PART! Wa3 


THE FESTIVAL OF 'TABERNACLES, AND THE SUBSEQUENT TRANSACTIONS UNTIL 
OUR LORD’S ARRIVAL AT BETHANY SIX DAYS BEFORE THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 


§§ 83—111. 


IntTropuctory Nore. 


In this interval of time, from the festival of Tabernacles to our Lord’s last arrival at 
Bethany, we encounter one of the most difficult portions of the whole Gospel Harmony. 
According to John’s narrative, Jesus, after leaving Galilee to go up to the festival of 
Tabernacles in October (John 7, 10), did not return again to Galilee; but spent the 
time intervening before the festival of Dedication in December, probably in Jerusalem, 


or, when in danger from the Jews, in the neighbouring villages of Judea; John 8, 59. 


Luke 10, 38 sq. Had Jesus actually returned to Galilee during this interval, it can hardly 
be supposed that John, who had hitherto so carefully noted our Lord’s return thither 
after each visit to Jerusalem, would have failed to give some hint of it in this case also, 
either after c. 8, 59, or after c. 10, 21. But neither John, nor the other Evangelists, afford 
any such hint—Immediately after the festival of Dedication, Jesus withdrew from the 
machinations of the Jews beyond Jordan; whence he was recalled to Bethany by the 
decease of Lazarus; John 10, 40.11,7. He then once more retired to Ephraim; and is 
found again at Bethany six days before the Passover ; John 11, 54, 12, 1. 

Matthew and Mark contain no allusion at all to the festival of Tabernacles; nor do 
we find any express mention of it in Luke. Yet Luke 9, 51 is most naturally referred 
to our Lords journey at that time; and it implies also that this was his final departure 
from Galilee; see Note on ὃ 81. Luke and John are therefore here parallel. The 
circumstances of danger, which had induced Jesus during the summer to retire from 
Galilee in various directions (see Note on § 68), as well as the approach of the time 
when “he should be received up,” are reasons of sufficient weight to account for 
his having transferred, at this time, the scene of his ministry and labours from the 
north to Jerusalem and Judea, including excursions to the country on and beyond the 
Jordan. 

In regard to the transactions during the whole interval of time comprised in this 
Part, Matthew and Mark are silent; except where they relate that our Lord, after his 
departure from Galilee, approached Jerusalem for the last time through Perea and by 
way of Jericho, where he was followed by multitudes ; Matth. 19, 1. 2. 20, 29. Mark 10, 
1.46. With the transactions recorded by these two Evangelists during this last 
approach, Luke also has some things parallel; Luke 18, 15-43. The arrival at Beth- 
any is common to the three ; and in this they all accord with John; Matth. 21,1. Mark 
11, 1. Luke 19, 29. John 12, 1, 12 sq. 

There exists consequently no difficulty in harmonizing Matthew and Mark, and so 
much of Luke as is parallel to them (18, 15 sq.) with John. But in Luke, from c. 9, 51, 








—— ee Se 





Ye 





Inrrop. } NOTES.—ORDER OF JOHN AND LUKE. | 199 


where Jesus leaves Galilee, to c. 18, 14, where the record again becomes parallel with 
Matthew and Mark, there is a large body of matter peculiar for the most part to Luke, 
and relating prima facie to the time subsequent to our Lord’s departure from Galilee. 
How is this portion of Luke’s Gospel to be arranged and distributed, in order to har- 
monize with the narrative of John? The difficulty of course does not exist in the case 
of those Harmonists, who, like Calvin, Griesbach, and others, attempt to bring together 
only the first three Evangelists. 

Those Harmonists who have likewise included John’s Gospel, have hitherto gener- 
ally, and perhaps universally, assumed a return of our Lord to Galilee after the festival 
of Tabernacles; and this avowedly in order to provide a place for this portion of Luke’s 
Gospel. But the manner in which it has been arranged, after all, is exceedingly 
various. Some, as Le Clerc, insert nearly the whole during this supposed journey ; 
Harm. Evang. p. 264sq. Others, as Lightfoot, assign to this journey only what pre- 
cedes Luke 13, 23; and refer the remainder to our Lord’s sojourn beyond Jordan, John 
10, 40; see Chron. Temp. N. T. Opp. II. p. 37, 39. In like manner Schleiermacher, 
Neander, Olshausen, and others, assume a return to Galilee before the festival of 
Dedication ; but differ greatly in their distribution of this part of Luke. See Schleierm. 
Schriften des Luk. p. 161 sq. Neand. Leben Jesu, p. 538. 3te Ausg. Olshaus. Comm. I. 
p- 571 sq. 3te Ausg. 

If now we examine more closely the portion of Luke in question (9, 51—18, 14), we 
perceive, that although an order of time is discoverable in certain parts, yet as a whole 
it is wanting in exact chronological arrangement. This indeed is admitted, at the present 
day, by all Harmonists and Commentators. It would seem almost, as if, in this portion 
peculiar to Luke, that Evangelist, after recording many of the earlier transactions of _ 
Jesus in Galilee, in accordance with Matthew and Mark, had here, upon our Lord’s 
final departure from that province, brought together this new and various matter of his 
own, relating partly to our Lord’s previous ministry in Galilee, partly to this journey, 
and still more to his subsequent proceedings, until the narrative (in c. 18, 15) again 
becomes parallel to the accounts of Matthew and Mark. Such, for example, is the inci- 
dent of the Scribe and of another in Luke 9, 52 sq.—an occurrence of such a nature that 
we cannot well suppose it to have happened twice, and which Matthew narrates at 
Capernaum, on the occasion of our Lord’s first excursion across the lake; see § 56. 
The sending forth also the Seventy evidently took place at or near Capernaum, c. 10, 
1 sq. see § 80 and Note. The transactions narrated in c. 10, 17—11, 13, have marks of 
chronological connection ; and the scene of them is obviously Jerusalem or its vicinity ; 
see § 86-89 and Notes. The healing of a demoniac and the consequent blasphemy of 
the Scribes and Pharisees in Luke 11, 14. 15. 17 sq. is parallel with the same events in 
Matthew and Mark, which these two Evangelists describe as having occurred in Galilee ; 
see §48 and Note. With this passage again Luke 11, 37-54 is immediately connected 
by the words ἐν δὲ τῷ λαλῆσαι, see § 51 and Note. The transition to the next chapter 
(c. 12) is made by the phrase ἐν οἷς, marking proximity of time; § 52 and Note. And, 
further, the words παρῆσαν δέ τινες Luke 13, 1, show that the conversation there given 


_ (vv. 1-9) immediately followed.—The remainder of this portion of Luke, c. 13, 10—18, 14 


(with the exception of c. 17, 11-19, which obviously connects itself with the journey 


200 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES, ETC. [Part VI. 


in ο. 9, 51), contains absolutely no definite notation of time or place; nor any thing 
indeed, to show, that the events happened in the order recorded, or that they did not 
take place at different times and in different parts of the country. The only passage 
to which this remark does not perhaps fully apply, is ο. 13; 22-35. 

For these reasons, like Newcome, [ have distributed Luke 9, 51—10, 16, and 11, 14— 
13, 9, (as also 17, 11-19,) in Parts IV, V, as already specified, among the transactions 
of our Lord’s ministry in Galilee, between his second Passover and his journey to the fes- 
tival of Tabernacles, The remainder of this whole portion of Luke, viz. c. 10, 17—11, 13, 
and 13, 10—17, 10, as also 17, 20—18, 14, remains to be disposed of in the present Part. 

With many leading modern Commentators, I prefer here to follow the narrative of 
John, and infer that our Lord did not again return to Galilee after the festival of 
Tabernacles. So Liicke, Tholuck, Hengstenberg, De Wette, Meyer, and others; see 
their Commentaries on John 1. c. also Hengstenb. Christol. II. p. 567. On this princi- 
ple, therefore, the present Harmony is constructed. Hence, Luke 10, 17—11, 13 is 
inserted between the festival of Tabernacles and that of Dedication; see the particu- 
lars in the Notes on δ 86-89. 

More difficult is it to assign the proper place for Luke 13, 10—17, 10; the trans- 
actions recorded in which all cluster around or follow ὁ. 13, 22, where Jesus is repre- 
sented as travelling leisurely through the cities and villages towards Jerusalem. Now 
this journey cannot have been the same with that in Luke 9,51 and John 7, 10; because 
there Jesus went up privately, while here he is accompanied by multitudes, Luke 14, 25. 
Nor can it have been a later journey from Galilee ; for that in Luke 9, 51 was the 
final one. Nor indeed were the Jews accustomed to go up from the country to Jeru- 
salem at the festival of Dedication; see Note on § 91. Lightfoot Hor. Heb. in Joh. 
10,22. Besides, Luke 13, 22 stands in connection with the warning received by our 
Lord against Herod, vv. 31-33 ; which under the attendant circumstances cannot well 
be regarded as having been given in Galilee; much less in Jerusalem, as Lightfoot 
supposes; Chron. Temp. N. T. Opp. IL p. 39. But Herod was lord also of Perea; 
and in that province he had imprisoned and put to death John the Baptist; Joseph. 
Ant. 18.5.2. It would therefore be natural, that our Lord, who had been less known 
in that region, and who now appeared there, followed by multitudes, should receive 
warning of the danger he was thus incurring. Hence, I have ventured to assign this 
part of Luke (13, 10—17, 10) to that period of our Lord’s life and ministry, which was 
passed in Perea after the festival of Dedication. 9 

Our Lord first withdrew soon after that festival from the plots of the Jews into Perea. 
“ He wentaway again beyond Jordan, into the place where John at first baptized ; and 
there he abode. And many resorted unto him” and believed; John 10, 40-42. How 
long Jesus remained in that region before he was recalled by the death of Lazarus, can 
be only matter of conjecture. In that interval Lightfoot places all this part of Luke 
after c. 13, 22; see Opp. 11. p. 39. In this 1 am unable to accord with that profound 
scholar; because the language of John does not necessarily imply that our Lord at this 
time made any journey or circuit in Perea itself. At least it could not then and there 
be said of him in any sense, that “he went through their cities and villages, teaching, 
and journeying towards Jerusalem,” Luke 13, 22; forhe had just departed from Jerusa- 


| 











Inrrop. | NOTES.—ORDER OF JOHN AND LUKE. 201 


lem, aud was recalled to Bethany by a special message from the sisters of Lazarus, 
John 11, 3.7. All this would seem to imply rather, that Jesus remained during this ex- 
cursion, at least mainly, in the district “ where John had baptized ;” so that Martha and 
Mary knew at once where to send for him. It follows also as a natural inference, that 
this first sojourn beyond Jordan could not well have been a long one, nor probably have 
occupied more than a few weeks out of the four months intervening between the 
festival of Dedication and the Passover. 


After the raising of Lazarus, Jesus again retired from the machinations of the Jews. 


to “a country near to the wilderness, into a city called Ephraim, and there continued 


with his disciples ;” Jobn 11,54. The Evangelist John records nothing more of his 
movements, until he again appears in Bethany six days before the Passover; John -12; 
1. But the expression used by John as to his sojourn at Ephraim, (κἀκεῖ διέτριβε μετὰ 
τῶν μαϑητῶν αὑτοῦ, there he passed the time,) does not preclude the-idea of excursions. 
from that place, nor of a circuitous route on his return to Bethany and Jerusalem at the 
Passover. Now Matthew, Mark, and Luke, affirm expressly, that on this return Jesus 
went up to Bethany from Jericho;“and the two former narrate, as expressly, that in thus 
reaching Jericho he had come “into the coasts of Judea by the farther side of Jordan,” 
where great multitudes followed him, and he healed them and taught them, as he was. 
wont; Matth. 19, 1.2. Mark 10,1. With all this the language of Luke 13, 22 accords 
perfectly: “And he went through the cities and villages, teaching, and journeying to- 
wards Jerusalem;” as does also the mention of the multitudes in Luke 14,25. With 
this too accords Luke 13, 31-35, including the warning against Herod and our Lord’s. 
reply; as also the touching lamentation over Jerusalem, where Jesus was so soon to 
perish. With this accords, further, the fact, that the narrative of Luke subsequent to 
the portion in question, viz. Luke 18,15 sq. is parallel with that of Matthew and Mark. 
during this same journey; see §§ 105-109. 

After long consideration, therefore, I do not hesitate to refer Luke 13, 22, with the 
transactions and discourses of which it forms the nucleus, mainly to a journey of our 
Lord through the populous region of Perea, on his return to Bethany after sojourning in 
Ephraim. There may also have been excursions from that city to the neighbouring 
villages of Judea, or even to the Jordan valley. This city Ephraim I hold to be proba- 
bly identical with Ephron and Ophrah of the Old Testament; and therefore apparently 
represented by the modern Taiyibeh, situated nearly twenty Roman miles N. N. E. of. 
Jerusalem, and five or six Roman miles N. Εἰ. of Bethel, on the borders of the desert 
which stretches along on the west of the Dead Sea and the valley of Jordan; see Note 
on § 93. It occupies a lofty site; and from it one overlooks the adjacent desert, the 
Jordan with its great valley, and the mountains of Perea beyond, with the Saracenic 
castle er-Ribiid, near ’Ajliin, in the northern part of Perea, bearing about N. E. Even 
at the present day the hardy and industrious mountaineers of this place have much in- 
tercourse with the valley, and till the rich fields and reap the harvests of Jericho; see 
Bibl. Res. in Palest. Il. p. 121. p.276. It was therefore quite natural and easy for our 
Lord, from this point to cross the valley and the Jordan, and then turn his course to-- 
wards Jericho and Jerusalem; while at the same time he exercised his ministry among - 
the cities and villages along the valley and in the eastern region. Thither, indeed, he. 


26 


202 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES, ETC. [Parr VI. 


not improbably had sent before him the Seventy disciples (see Note on § 80); and 
some parts of the same district he himself had already visited. 

[have therefore inserted the whole of Luke 13, 11—17, 10, perhaps for the first time, 
after the mention of our Lord’s sojourn at Ephraim ; as belonging naturally to that pe- 
riod and to this return-journey through Perea. And then it only remained to let Luke 
17, 20—18, 14 follow directly afterwards; because there is no’ mark nor authority for 
placing it any where else; and because too it immediately precedes, and thus connects 
with, that portion of Luke which is subsequently parallel to Matthew and Mark. Not 
that I would by any means assert, that all the events and the discourses of our Lord 
here given, are recorded by Luke in their exact chronological order; for this portion of 
his Gospel presents very much the appearance of a collection of discourses and transac- 
tions in themselves disconnected. Yet, as there are no marks nor evidence, internal or 
external, by which to arrange them differently, it seems hardly advisable, on mere con- 
jecture, to abandon the order in which they have been left to us by Luke himself: 

If it be objected, that this arrangement crowds too many incidents and discourses 
into this journey through Perea, the reply is not difficult. Matthew and Mark confine 
their previous narratives chiefly to Galilee; and give comparatively little of what took 
place later in Perea. Luke, besides recounting the like events in Galilee, has a large 
amount of matter peculiar to himself, without any definite notation of time and place ; 
and it is therefore not unnatural to suppose, that an important portion of it may relate 
to this last journey. Again, there is room for allowing to this journey in Perea an in- 
terval of time, amply sufficient for all these transactions, and indeed many more. If we 
assume, that our Lord’s first sojourn beyond Jordan, his return to Bethany,and the sub- 
sequent departure to Ephraim, occupied even two months, (which is a large allowance, ) 
there still remained nearly two months before the Passover, in which to make excur- 
sions from Ephraim, and also traverse leisurely the distance through Pereato Bethany, 
requiring in itself, at the utmost, not more than five days of travel. If now we compare 
the transactions thus spread out over these two months (or not improbably over a longer 
interval,) with those recorded during the following six days next before the Passover 
(see Part VII), we shall hardly be very strongly impressed with the idea, that too 
much in proportion is thus allotted to this journey. 


§ 83. Jesus had now been absent from Jerusalem a year and six months, since his 
second Passover, 


δῇ 86, 87. Our Lord had left the temple, and apparently the city; John 8,59. The 
healing of the blind man occurred later; see Note on § 90, While thus absent from 
the city, and yet in its vicinity, Jesus visits Bethany and is received by Martha and 
Mary. That visit is placed by Luke in immediate connection with the incident of the 
lawyer and the parable of the Good Samaritan; which therefore are inserted here. 
The scene of that parable also implies, that it was spoken in the vicinity of Jerusalem 
and Bethany. ; 


§ 88. Jesus repeats on this occasion the same model-form of prayer taught in the 
Sermon on the Mount, § 41. Luke’s order is here retained; as there is no evidence 
by which to assign any other. 











ee a a I a ee Se as SE eH 


Πα ee ΞΕ. ee 


yo, 








δὲ 83-93. ] NOTES.—CITY OF EPHRAIM, ETC. 203 


§ 89. Luke relates the return of the Seventy in immediate connection with their 
appointment (Luke 10, 1-16), evidently by anticipation. Their appointment appears 
to have been one of our Lord’s last acts in Galilee ; and they went forth, probably into 
Perea and elsewhere, while he proceeded to Jerusalem; see Note on § 80. Their 
return to him at or near Jerusalem, is therefore here placed as late as may be, before 
the festival of Dedication. 


§ 90. With the healing of the blind man the discourse in John 10, 1 sq. stands in 
immediate connection ; see 6. 9, 40. And in the words of our Lord, John 10, 26, spoken 
at the festival of Dedication, there is a direct allusion to the figurative representation 
of the shepherd and his sheep in the same discourse. This implies that the same 
audience was then present, at Jeast in part; and consequently, that the discourse in 
question had been delivered not long before. For these reasons the healing of the 
blind man would seem also to have taken place near the beginning of the festival of 
Dedication, or at least not long before; 


§ 91. The festival of Dedication, τὰ ἐγκαίνια, was instituted by Judas Maccabeus 
to commemorate the purification of the temple and the renewal of the temple-worship, 
after the three years’ profanation by Antiochus Epiphanes. It was held during eight 
days, commencing on the 25th day of the month Kislev, Heb. "202, which began with 
the new moon of December. See 1 Mace. 4, 52-59. 2 Macc. 10, 5-8. Josephus calls 
it φῶτα, i.e. festival of lights or lanterns, and speaks of it as a season of rejoicing; 
Antiq. 12. 7.6, 7. It was celebrated by the Jews, not at Jerusalem alone, like the great 
festivals of the law; but at home, throughout the whole country, by the festive illumin- 
ation of their dwellings; see Lightfoot Hor. Heb. in Joh. 10, 22.—According to John’s 
narrative, Jesus was now at Jerusalem, not because the Jews were accustomed to go up 
thither at this festival, but because he had remained in the vicinity since the festival of 
Tabernacles; see Introd. Note to Part VI. p. 200. 

The place “where John at first baptized” (10, 40) was Bethany beyond Jordan, 
or Bethabara in the Jextus receptus; see John 1,28. Nothing more is known as 
to its situation. On our Lord’s sojourn here, and also the probable length of it, see 
Introd. Note to Part VI. pp. 200, 202. 


§ 93. As the Sanhedrim had now determined, in accordance with the counsel of 
Caiaphas, that Jesus should be put to death, he therefore withdraws from Jerusalem to 
a city called Ephraim “near to the wilderness ;” John 11,54, This place has never 
yet been identified with any modern site. The following comparisons and combina- 
tions may perhaps throw some light upon it. 

This city Ephraim (Ἐφραΐμ, ᾿Εφρέμ) is doubtless the same with the Ephraim or 
Ephron of 2 Chr. 13, 19, Heb. "ΕΣ in Keri, ji"B2 in Chethib, Sept. ᾿Εφρών, which 
place Abijah king of Judah, after his great battle with Jeroboam, took from the latter 
along with Bethel and Jeshanah. It was therefore a strong place, and lay not far remote 
from Bethel. So too Josephus relates, that Vespasian marched from Cesarea to the hill- 
country, subdued the toparchies of Gophna and Acraba with the small cities (πολίχνια) 
Bethel and Ephraim ( Ἐφραΐμ), and then proceeded to Jerusalem; Jos. B. J. 4. 9. 9, 


204 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES, ETC. [Parr VI. 


The same is also doubtless the Ephron ( Ἐφρών) of Eusebius and Jerome; which the 
former places at eight, and the latter (correcting Eusebius) at nearly twenty Roman 
miles, north of Jerusalem; see Onomast. art. Ephron. 

Bethel, according to Eusebius and Jerome, was twelve Roman miles from Jeru- 
salem towards the north; and its remains exist there at the present day ; Onomast. art. 
Bethel. Bibl. Res. in Palest. II. p. 127. Ephraim or Ephron, then, being in the twen- 
tieth mile from Jerusalem, was seven miles beyond Bethel. But Ephraim, according 
to John 11, 54, was “near to the wilderness” or desert; and the only desert in that 
region is on the east of Bethel, viz. the desert of Judea lying on the west of the Dead 
Sea and the valley of the Jordan, and extending northwards at least as far as to the 
parallel of Shiloh, if not farther. Ephraim was also a place of strength, like Bethel. 
All these combinations point definitely and distinctly to the lofty site of the modern 
et-Taiyibeh, situated two hours northeast of Bethel and six hours and twenty minutes 
north-north-east of Jerusalem, (reckoning three Roman miles to the hour,) adjacent to 
and overlooking the broad tract of desert country lying between it and the valley of the 
Jordan; a position so remarkable and commanding, that we cannot suppose it to have 
been left unoccupied in ancient times; see Bibl. Res. in Palest. II. p. 121-124. This 
then was the Ephraim or Ephron of both the Old and New Testaments. 

There was another similar name in the Old Testament, viz. Ophrah in Benjamin, 
Heb. 75%, Sept. ᾿ξφραϑά, Josh. 18, 23. 1 Sam. 13,17. This was apparently the 
Aphra (-Apoe) of Eusebius and Jerome, situated jive Roman miles east of Bethel; 
Onomast. art. Aphra. The question suggests itself, whether perhaps Ophrah and 
Ephron (723, jinD2) were any thing more than different forms of the same name 
belonging to one and the same place? This would seem not improbable; since both 
forms have the same general signification, fawn, fawn-like, from the noun "ἘΦ a fawn ; 
the one being simply the feminine form of the noun, and the other taking the very 
common termination ji. The same idea is favoured, too, by the like analogy in the 
Hebrew forms for Shiloh, viz. n>" and 4%>"w3; this latter being found in the gentile 
noun "21>" Shilonite, and in the Greek Σιλοῦν of Josephus; see Gesen. Heb. Lex. 
art. A>" no. 2. So likewise in the forms >} Giloh and "2555 Gilonite; compare 
also "ixm Hazor and 4i"8" Hezron, Josh. 15, 25. Further, the great laxness and 
variety of manner with which Hebrew names are written in Greek, leaves ample room 
for supposing such an identity. Thus another Ophrah (782) in Manasseh is written 
in the Sept. ᾿Εφραϑά, Judg. 6, 11. 8, 27.32. 9,5; and by Josephus ᾿Εφράν, Antiq. 5. 
6.5. Lastly, the position assigned to Ophrah by Jerome, viz. five Roman miles east 
of Bethel, is from the nature of the country applicable only to the same Taiyibeh above 
described. 

The coincidence of all these circumstances leaves little room for doubt, that Opbrah 
and Ephron of the Old Testament and Ephraim of the New were all identical, and are 
all represented by the modern Taiyibeh. This then was the place to which our Lord 
withdrew. 

For our Lord’s sojourn in Ephraim, and his return thence through Perea to Bethany, 
see Introd. Note to Part VI. p. 201 sq. 












ἧς ται 


RE Re ee 


ἕω 
= 


προσ. ΝΣ 


ΤΟ ΠΏ ΨΥ 


πες προ a IRL Rael <A μον 


A a OD a 


~ 


δὲ 93-109. ] NOTES.—THE BLIND MEN AT JERICHO, ETC. 205 


§ 94. Matthew and Mark, having omitted all mention of our Lord’s presence and 
teaching in Jerusalem at the festivals of Tabernacles and of Dedication, as likewise of 
the raising of Lazarus and other events, now resume their narrative by relating, that 
after Jesus had left Galilee he approached Jerusalem, as the Passover drew nigh, by 
passing through the country beyond Jordan. The πέραν τοῦ ᾿Ιορδάνου of Matthew is 
explained by the διὰ τοῦ πέραν τοῦ Ἰορδάνου of Mark; comp. Sept. ed. Breiting. in 
Josh. 1, 14.15, where we have ἔδωκε Mwiaie πέραν tov Ιορδάνου, and ἔδωχε Mwivonc 
ἐν τῷ πέραν tov ᾿Ιορδάνου. Both Evangelists speak of the great multitudes that fol- 
lowed Jesus. , > 

Luke 13, 10-21 is inserted here, because it immediately precedes, and is thus con- 
nected with, the notice of our Lord’s journeying towards Jerusalem in Luke 13, 22: 
see § 95 and Note. 


§ 95. For the reasons why Luke 13, 22 is arranged in this connection, see Introd. 
Note to-Part VI. pp. 200, 201. For the appropriateness of this arrangemeut, so far as it 
respects vv. 31-35, see the same Note, p. 200. 

The lamentation over Jerusalem in v. 34 arises naturally from the mention of that 
city in v. 33. In Matth. 23, 37 sq. the same lamentation is repeated in connection with 
our Lord’s denunciation of the Scribes and Pharisees in Jerusalem. Luke’s phrase 
ov μή με ἴδητε κ. τ. λ. is explained by the οὗ μή με ἴδητε ἀπάρτι κ.τ.}. of Matthew, im- 
plying that he was now about to withdraw from the world, and that Jerusalem, which 
then rejected him, would not again behold him and enjoy the privilege of his presence, 
until compelled by his glorious manifestation to acknowledge him as the true Messiah. 


§ 96-103. These sections are placed here for the reasons assigned in the Introd. 
Note to Part VI. p. 202. 


§ 104. This section properly comes in here before § 105, where Luke is again 
parallel with Matthew and Mark. 


§ 107. This transaction probably occurred in Perea; as Jesus had not yet arrived at 
Jericho. The word ἀναβαΐνω is used of any journey to Jerusalem or Judea; see Luke 2, 
4, John 7, 8. 12, 20. Acts 18, 22, 


§ 108. In Matthew it is the mother of James and John who makes the request ; in 
Luke it is the two disciples themselves ; see Note on § 42. 


§ 109. Mark and Luke here speak of one blind man; Matthew of two. The case is 
similar to that of the demoniacs of Gadara; see Note on § 57. 

More difficult is it to harmonize the accounts as to the place where the miracle was 
wrought. Matthew and Mark narrate it as having occurred when Jesus was departing 
from Jericho (ἐχπορευομένου αὐτοῦ ἀπὸ Ἱεριχὼ); while Luke seems to describe it as 
happening during his approach to the city (ἐν τῷ ἐγγίζειν αὑτὸν εἷς Ἱεριχώ). Several 
ways of solving this difficulty have been proposed. 

1, The language of Mark is: καὶ ἔρχονται εἰς Ἱεριχώ, “they came to Jericho.” This, 
it is said, may be understood as implying, that Jesus remained some days at least in 


206 FROM THE FESTIVAL OF TABERNACLES, ETC. [Part VI. 


Jericho, where he would naturally visit points of interest in the vicinity ; as, for example, 
the fountain of Elisha, a mile or more distant. The miracle therefore may have been 
wrought, ‘not when he was finally leaving Jericho for Jerusalem; but when he was 
occasionally going out of, and returning to, Jericho. So Newcome, Harm. Note on § 108. 

2. The verb éyyifew, it is said, may signify not only to draw near, but also fo be near, 
i. g. ἐγγὺς εἶναι. Hence, the language of Luke may include also the idea expressed by 
Matthew and Mark, i. 6. while he was still near the city. So Grotius,Comm. in Matth. 
20,30. Passow in his Lexicon gives a like definition: nahe seyn, nahe kommen, sich 
nihern, i. e. to be near, to draw near ; but neither he nor Grotius brings forward any 
references to classic authors in support of such ameaning. Indeed, it is very doubtful, 
whether this definition can be fully sustained by classic authority. Yet in the New 
Testament and Septuagint there are passages, which go toimply such a usage. Thus, 
Luke 19,29 ὡς ἤγγισεν εἰς Βηϑφαγὴ καὶ Βηϑανίαν, while we read in Matth. 21, 1 ote 
ἤγγισαν εἷς Ἱεροσόλυμα, καὶ ἦλϑον εἰς Βηϑφαγὴ πρὸς τὸ ὅρος τῶν ἐλαιῶν, implying that 
they had already arrived at Bethphage and Bethany. So trop. Phil. 2, 3 uszot ϑανάτου 


ἤγγισε, he was nigh unto death. The usage of the LXX is more definite; as they — 


often put éyyifew for Heb. ip, even of place. So of Naboth’s vineyard, 1 K. 21, 2 
ὅτι ἐγγίζων οὗτος τῷ οἴκῳ μου, because it is near wnto my house. Also Deut. 21, 3, 
ἡ πόλις ἡ ἐγγίζουσα τῷ τραυματίᾳ, the city next [nigh] unto the slain man, v. 6. 22, 2; 
and trop. Jer. 23, 23. Ruth 2, 20. 2Sam. 19,42. These instances seem sufficient to 
bear out the proposed interpretation in Luke; which is also adopted by Le Clere, 
Doddridge, Pilkington, and others——Nor is this method of explanation “made useless 
for the purpose of reconciling the Evangelists, by Luke 19, 1,” as Neweome asserts. 
In connection with Jericho, Luke first of all relates this striking miracle; then goes back 
and mentions that Jesus “entered and passed through Jericho ;” and lastly records the 
visit to the house of Zaccheus, apparently within the city. Luke 19, 1 therefore is not 
more at variance with this view respecting the miracle, than it is with the visit to Zac- 
cheus. It is a passing announcement of a general fact, in connection with which other 
more important circumstances are related, but not in the order of time. 

3. Less probable than either of the above is the solution of Lightfoot and others, 
who assume that Jesus healed one blind man before entering the city, and another on 
departing from it. See Lightfoot Chron. Tempor. in N. T. Opp. IL p. 42. 


§ 111. The phrase ἐκ τῆς χώρας John 1], 55, does not refer to the region of Ephraim ; 
for then it must have read ἐκ ταύτης χώρας. Besides, those coming from that vicinity 
would hardly have madesuch inquiries. The phrase therefore signifies from the coun- 
try, generally, as distinguished from Jerusalem ; compare in Luke 21, 21. 

“ Six days before the Passover” is equivalent to “ the sixth day” before that festival ; 
see Note on §49. As our Lord ate the paschal supper on the evening following Thursday, 
(which evening was reckoned in the Jewish manner to Friday,) the sixth day before it 
was Saturday or the Jewish Sabbath. On that day, then, Jesus came to Bethany ; 
probably after a Sabbath day’s journey. Compare Matth. 12, 1;. also § 37. 

John 12, 2-8, where the supper at Bethany is described, is postponed in accordance 
with the order of Matthew and Mark ; see Note on § 131. 


a 
“πων οἱ 


ee ae ee es ee ee le ee 


ΡΨ ΡΟ ΨΥ 


See Ὅν Ἐν Ψ 





Inrrop. ] NOTES.—SCHEDULE OF DAYS. 207 


Pedic LW Er, 


OUR LORD’S PUBLIC ENTRY INTO JERUSALEM, AND THE SUBSEQUENT TRANSAC- 
TIONS BEFORE THE FOURTH PASSOVER. 


δὲ 112—132. 


Intropucrory Nore. 


Tue Jewish day of twenty-four hours was reckoned from sunset to sunset; as is 
still the case in oriental countries. (The paschal lamb was killed on the fourteenth day 
of Nisan towards sunset; and was eaten the same evening, after the fifteenth day of 
Nisan had begun; Ex. 12, 6. 8, and Introd. Note to Part VIII. Our Lord was crucified 
on the day before the Jewish Sabbath, that is, on Friday, Mark 15, 42; and as he had 
eaten the Passover on the preceding evening, it follows that the fourteenth of Nisan fell 
that year on Thursday, reckoned from the preceding sunset. Hence, the sixth day be- 
fore the Passover, when Jesus came to Bethany, was the Jewish Sabbath or Saturday 
(see Note on § 111); and the transactions of the following week, comprised in Parts 
VII and VIII, may be distributed according to the following Schedule; which agrees in 
the main with the Schema of Lightfoot; see Hor. Heb. in Joh. 12, 2. 


eek, 


ScHEDULE or Days. 


st Day of 


Sar. reckoned from preced. sunset. The Jewish Sabbath, Jesus arrives at 
Bethany, John 12, 1. | 

10. 1. Sunp. from preced. sunset. Jesus makes his public entry into Jerusalem, ὃ 112; 

and returns at night to Bethany, Mark 11, 11.—On this day the paschal 

lamb was to be selected, Ex. 12, 3. 


11. 2. Monn. from preced. sunset. Jesus goes to Jerusalem; on his way the incident of 


the barren fig-tree. He cleanses the temple, § 113; and again returns 
to Bethany, Mark 11, 19. 


12. 3. Tunsp. from preced. sunset. Jesus returns to the city; on the way the disciples 


see the fig-tree withered, Mark 11, 20. Our Lord discourses in the 
temple, § 115-126; takes leave of it; and, when on the Mount of Olives, 
on his way to Bethany, foretells his coming to destroy the city, and pro- 
ceeds to speak also of his final coming to judgment, δὲ 127-130. 

13. 4. Wenn. from preced. sunset. The rulers conspire against Christ. On the eve of 
this day, (i.e. the evening following Tuesday,) our Lord had partaken 
of the supper at Bethany; where Mary anointed-him, and where Judas 
laid his plan of treachery, which he made known to the chief priests in 
the course of this day.—Jesus remained this day at Bethany. 

14, 5. Tuursp. from preced. sunset. Jesus sends two disciples to the city to make ready 
the Passover. He himself repairs thither in the afternoon, in order to 
eat the paschal supper at evening. 


208 THE FIVE DAYS PRECEDING THE FOURTH PASSOVER. [Parr VII. 


Sa Sy 
ΕΞ as ScHEDULE oF Days CONTINUED. 

az as 

15. 6. Frip. from preced. sunset. At evening, in the very beginning of the fifteenth of 


Nisan, Jesus partakes of the paschal supper; institutes the Lord’s Sup- 
per; is betrayed and apprehended; δὲ 133-143. He is brought first 


before Caiaphas, and then in the morning before Pilate; is condemned,» 


crucified, and before sunset laid in the sepulchre; δὲ 144-158. 
16.7. Sat. . The Jewish Sabbath. Our Lord rests in the sepulchre. 
17. 1. Sunv. Jesus rises from the dead at early dawn; see ὃ 159 and Note. 
’ 


δ 112. The time is specified in John 12, 12. The other Evangelists do not notice 
the fact, that Jesus had remained at Bethany the preceding night. 


§ 113. Mark 11, 11. 12 specifies the time very exactly. On the cleansing of the 
temple, see Note on § 21. 

Luke 21, 37. 38 isinserted here, because in Luke’s order it is only retrospective ; 
being placed after our Lord’s discourses on the Mount of Olives, when he had already 
taken leave of the temple, to which he returned no more. 


Ν 


δὲ 114-130. These sections include the numerous discourses and transactions of the 
third day of the week. 


§ 114. The-account of the withering away of the fig-tree might in itself well be 
connected with the preceding Section. But according to Mark 11, 20, this occurrence 
took place on the subsequent day. 


§ 123. In Matthew, verses 13 and 14 are transposed, as in the best editions. 


§ 125. This incident of the Greeks is inserted here on the third day of the week, 
rather than on the first, because of John 12, 36;- which implies that Jesus afterwards 
appeared no more in public as a teacher. He immediately takes leave of the temple. 


§ 126. The Evangelist John here gives his own reflections upon the unbelief of 
the Jews. From v. 44 we are not to understand, that Jesus, after having left the 
temple, returned and uttered this additional discourse. It is rather the vivid manner of 
the Evangelist himself; who thus introduces Jesus as speaking, in order to recapitulate 
the sum and substance of his teaching, which the Jews had rejected. 


§§ 127-130. See, on the topics of these Sections, an article by the author of this 
work, in the Bibliotheca Sacra, 1843, No. III. pp. 531 sq. 


§ 127. Our Lord takes leave of the temple, to which he returns no more; at the 
same time foretelling its impending destruction. On his way to Bethany, he seats him- 
self for a time upon the Mount of Olives, over against the temple, where the city was 
spread out before him as on a map; and here four of his disciples put to him the ques- 
tion, “ When shall these things be?” According to Matthew they add: “And what 
ths sign of thy coming, and of the end of the world?” They were still in darkness ; 


Sag χα . 


aw 


τ τὸ δ΄ νας γὼ τῶν ape ga 





— ὦ 


von 


ae 





δ 112-130. ] NOTES. 209 


and believed, like the other Jews, that the Messiah was yet to go forth as an exalted 
temporal prince, to subvert the then present order of things, to overthrow their enemies 
and subdue all nations, and thus restore pre-eminency and glory to the Jewish people, 
and reign in peace and splendour over the world; see Luke 24, 21. Acts 1,6. This 
was the expected coming and the end of the world, or present state of things, referred 
to in Matth. 24,3; as also in Luke 17, 20 sq. 19, 11. See Biblioth. Sacra, 1. 6. pp. 


_ 531-535. 


Jesus does not directly answer the question of the four Apostles; but speaks of 
deceivers and calamities and persecutions, that should arise. His language here is 
strictly introductory to the next Section. 


§ 128. That the “abomination of desolation” Matth. 24, 15 etc. refers to the Roman 
armies by which Jerusalem was besieged and destroyed, is shown conclusively by 
Luke 21, 20. 

The subsequent desolation and.calamity spoken of in Matth. 24, 29-31 and the 
parallel passages, I refer to the overthrow and complete extirpation of the Jewish 
people fifty years later under Adrian; when they were sold as slaves and utterly 
driven out from the land of their fathers. See Minter’s Jiidischer Krieg, Leipz. 1821; 
translated by W. W. Turner in the Biblioth. Sacra, 1843. No. III. p. 393 sq. Comp. 
ibid. p. 550 sq.. The figurative language of these verses is similar to that of many 
passages in the Old Testament, which refer to civil commotions and historical events; 
comp. Is. 13, 9 sq. 19, 1.5sq. 34, 2.4 sq. Ezek. 32, 2.7. Ps. 18, 7-14. 68,1 sq. etc. See 
Biblioth. Sac. 1843, No. II. p.545sq. Further, Luke 21, 28 shows decisively, that it can- 


not have reference to the general judgment of the great and final day ; and the same ap- 
pears also from the limitation to “ this generation,” Matth. 24, 34 and the parallel passages. 


Matth. 24, 36-42 connects itself directly with what precedes, see v. 36; and refers 
likewise to the overthrow of the Jewish people and, dispensation ; comp. Luke 17, 20-37. 
But with v. 42 of Matthew, all direct reference to the Jewish catastrophe terminates. 
This appears from the nature of the language ; and also further from the fact, that thus 
far both Mark and Luke give parallel reports; while at this very point their reports 
cease, and all that follows belongs to Matthew alone. This goes to show, that the dis- 
course of our Lord up to this point is to be regarded as a whole, which is here com- 
pleted; having reference to his coming for the overthrow of Judaism. At this point a 
new topic is introduced. 


δῇ 129, 130. Our Lord here makes a transition, and proceeds to speak of his final 
coming at the day of judgment. This appears from the fact, that the matter of these 
Sections is added by Matthew after Mark and Luke have ended their parallel reports 
relative to the Jewish catastrophe ; and Matthew here commences, with v. 43, the dis- 
course which Luke has given on another occasion, Luke 12, 39sq. This discourse in 
Luke has reference obviously to our Lord’s final coming; and that it has here the same 
reference is apparent from the appropriateness of the subsequent warnings, and their 
intimate connection with Matth. 25, 31-46; which latter all interpreters of note agree 
in referring to the general judgment. See Biblioth. Sac. 1. ὁ. p. 553 sq. 

27 


210 THE FIVE DAYS PRECEDING THE FOURTH PASSOVER. [Parr VII. 


§ 131. On the fourth day of the week the chief priests and others, after deliberation, 
came to the formal conclusion to seize Jesus and put him to death ; Matth. 26, 8. 4. ete. 
As the means by which this purpose was aided and accomplished, the first three 
Evangelists narrate the treacherous intent of Judas; which again two of them intro- 
duce by describing the circumstances under which it arose during the supper at 
Bethany. According to Matthew and Mark this supper would most naturally seem to 
have taken place on the preceding evening ; that is, the evening which ushered in, and 
was reckoned to, the fourth day of the week. John’s order would apparently assign it 
to the evening after the day on which Jesus came to Bethany. 

As in the accounts of this supper itself} neither of the Evangelists has specified any 
note of time, we are left to infer from other circumstances, whether it more probably 
took place on the evening after the Sabbath, as John seems to imply; or, on the even- 
ing following the third day of the week, in accordance with Matthew and Mark, after 
our Lord had taken his final leave of the temple. The following are some of these 
circumstances. 

1. The formal determination of the chief priests to put Jesus to death, was made 
early on the fourth day of the week, Matth. 26, 1-5. Mark 16, 1. etc. It was not until 
afterwards that Judas came to them with his proposal of treachery, which they received 
with joy, Matth. 26, 14. Mark 16, 10. 11. ete. 

2. Matthew and Mark narrate the supper as the occasion which led to the treachery 
of Judas. Stung by his Master’s rebuke, he is represented as going away to the chief 
priests and offering to betray him. This act would then seem to have been done under 
the impulse of sudden resentment ; and this view of the matter receives also some sup- 
port from his subsequent remorse and suicide. ΑἹ] this accords well with the order of 
Matthew and Mark. But if the supper took place on the evening after Jesus came to 
Bethany, then Judas had already cherished this purpose of treachery in his heart for 
nearly four days without executing it; and that too while our Lord was daily teaching 
in the temple, and there was abundant opportunity to betray him. Such a supposition, 
under the circumstances, is against probability. 

3. The language of Matthew, τότε πορευϑεὶς v. 14, seems necessarily to connect 
the visit of Judas to the chief priests immediately with the supper, which therefore 
must have taken place on the preceding evening. On the other hand, it would be 
very natural for John to anticipate the time of the supper and narrate it where he 
does, in order there to bring together and complete all that he had to say further of 
Bethany ; which indeed he mentions no more. 

There is no sufficient reason for supposing, with Lightfoot and others, that the sup- 
per in John is a different one from that in Matthew and Mark. The identity of circum- 
stances is too great, and the alleged differences too few, to leave a doubt on this point. 
Matthew and Mark narrate it as in the house of Simon the leper; John does not say 
where it took place, but he speaks of Lazarus as one of those who reclined at the table, 

implying that the supper was not in his own house. It was not, and is not now, cus- 
tomary in the East, for females to eat with the males; and therefore Lazarus, in his own 
house, would have been the master and giver of the entertainment. In the two former 
Evangelists, the woman anoints the head of Jesus; in the latter his feet; yet neither 


Ee oe ἐμ. 


es ee ee ee 


— 


—— 


Ο 


δ 131, 182.] NOTES.—THE SUPPER AT BETHANY, ETC. Q11 


excludes the other. Matthew and Mark do not here name Mary ; nor have they any 
where else mentioned her or Martha or Lazarus. Nor do they in this connection name 
Judas; whom we know as the fault-finder only from John. 


§ 132. “The first day of unleavened bread” is here the fourteenth of Nisan; on 
which day, at or before noon, the Jews were accustomed to cease from labour and put 
away all leaven out of their houses; Ex. 12, 15-17. Lightfoot Opp. I. p. 728 sq. Hor. 
Heb. in Marc. 14,12. On that day towards sunset the paschal lamb was killed; and 
was eaten the same evening, after the fifteenth of Nisan had begun; at which time, 
strictly, the festival of unleavened bread commenced and continued seven days. In’ 
popular usage, however, the fourteenth day, being thus a day of preparation, was 
spoken of as belonging to the festival; and therefore is here called the “first” day 
That such a usage was common, appears also from Josephus; who, having in one place 
expressly fixed the commencement of the festival of unleavened bread on the fifteenth 
of Nisan, πέμπτῃ δὲ καὶ δεκάτῃ διαδέχεται τὴν τοῦ Πάσχα ἢ τῶν ἀζύμων ἑορτή, Antig. 3. 
10. 5, speaks nevertheless in another passage of the fourteenth as the day of that fes- 
tival: καὶ τῆς τῶν ἀζύμων ἐνστάσης ἡμέρας τεσσαρεςκαιδεκάτῃ Ξανϑικοῦ μηνός (κατὰ 
᾿ δὲ ἡμᾶς Nivav), Β. 1. δ. 8. 1. comp. Ant. 11. 4. 8. In this way, further, the same his- 
torian could say, that the festival was celebrated for eight days: ἑορτὴν ἄγομεν ἐφ᾽ ἡμέ- 
ρας outa, τὴν τῶν ἀζύμων λεγομένην, Jos. Ant. 2. 15. 1. 

On this fifth day of the week, as the circumstances show, our Lord, after. sending 
Peter and John to the city to prepare the Passover, himself followed them thither with 
the other disciples, probably towards evening. 

On the Passover in general, see Introd. Note to Part VIII. 


|g Ue Aad eae od 


THE FOURTH PASSOVER; OUR LORD’s PASSION; AND THE ACCOMPANYING EVENTS: 
UNTIL THE END OF THE JEWISH SABBATH. 


§§ 133--- 158. ; 


΄ 


Inrropuctrory Norre.—TuHeE Passover. 


As the events of our Lord’s Passion were intimately connected with the celebration 
of the Passover, it seems proper here to bring together, in one. view, those circum-. 
stances relating to that festival, which may serve to illustrate the sacred history. A 
more complete article upon this whole subject, (of which the following Note is an’ 
abstract,) was published by the author of these Notes in the Bibliotheca Sacra for: 
August 1845, p. 405-436 ; to which the reader is referred. " 

I. Time of killing the Paschal Lamb. The paschal lamb (or kid Ex. 12,5) wasto be- 
selected on the tenth day of the first month, Ex. 12,3. On’the fourteenth day of the: 
same month, (called Abib in the Pentateuch, and ΠΝ Nisan, Deut. 16, 1. Esth. 8, 7,) 
the lamb thus selected was to be killed, at a point of time designated by the expression 
mash 2, between the two evenings, Ex. 12,6. Lev. 23,5. Num. 9, 3.5; or, as is. 


212 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE CRUCIFIXION. [Parr VIIL. 


elsewhere said, Yat NiZD 2792, at evening about the going down of the sun, Deut. 
16,6. The same phrase, 572533 73, is put for the time of the daily evening sacri- 
fice, Ex. 29, 39.41. Num. 28, 4. The time thus marked was regarded by the Samari- 
tans and Karaites, as being the interval between sunset and deep twilight; see Reland 
de Samar. ὁ 22, in Diss. Misc. T. Il. Trigland. de Karaeis c. 4. So also Aben Ezra ad 
Ex. 12,6. But the Pharisees and Rabbinists, according to the Mishnah (Pesach. 5. 3), 
held the first evening to commence with the declining sun, Gr. δείλη πρωΐα, and the 
second evening with the setting sun, Gr. δείλη ὀψία. Hence, according to them, the 
paschal lamb was to be killed in the interval between the ninth and eleventh hour, 
equivalent to our three and five o’clock p.m. That this was in fact the practice among 
the Jews in the time of our Lord, appears from the testimony of Josephus: Πάσχα 
καλεῖται, καϑ' ἣν ϑύουσι μὲν ano ἐγνάτης ὥρας μέχρι ἑνδεχάτης, Jos. B. J. 6.9.3. The 
daily evening sacrifice also was offered at the ninth hour or three o’clock p. m. Jos. 
_ Antiq. 14.4.3. Pesach. 6.1. comp. Acts 3. 1 et Wetstein in loc—So the Greek δεέλη. ~ 
Hesych. δείλη πρωΐα, ἢ ust ἄριστον ὥρα" δείλη ὀψία, ἢ περὶ δύσιν ἡλίου. Eustath. 
ad Od. 17. p. 285, ἡ ὀψία δείλη, τὸ περὶ ἡλίου δυσμῆς" δείλη πρωΐα, τὸ εὐθὺς ἐκ μεσημ- 
βρίας. 

The true. time, then, of killing the Passover in our Lord’s day, was between the 
ninth and eleventh hour, or towards sunset, near the close of the fourteenth day of 
Nisan. | 

Il. Time of eating the Passover. This was to be done the same evening. “ And 
they shall eat the flesh in that night, roast with fire, and unleavened bread, and with 
bitter herbs shall they eat it,” Ex. 12,8. The Hebrews in Egypt ate the first Pass- 
over, and struck the blood of the victims on their doorposts, on the evening before the 
last great plague; at midnight the Lord smote all the first-born; and in the morning 
the people broke up from Rameses on their march towards the Red Sea, viz. “on the 
fifteenth day of the first month, on the morrow after the Passover,” Num. 33, 3. 

It hence appears, very definitely, that the paschal lamb was to be slain in the after- 
noon of the fourteenth day of the month; and was eaten the same evening; that is, on 
the evening which was reckoned to and began the fifteenth day. 

Ill. Festival of unleavened Bread. From Ex. 12, 17. 18, comp. Deut. 16, 3.4; and 
from Lev. 23, 6, comp. Num. 28, 17; it appears, that the festival of unleavened bread 
began strictly with the passover-meal, at or after sunset following the fourteenth day, 
and continued until sunset at the end of the twenty-first day. Comp. Jos. Ant. 3. 10. 5. 

We have already seen that it was customary for the Jews, on the fourteenth day of 
Nisan, to cease from labour at or before mid-day; to put away all leaven out of their 
houses before noon; and to slay the paschal lamb towards the close of the day; see 
above and Note on ὃ 132. Hence, in popular usage, the fourteenth day very naturally 
came to be reckoned as the beginning or first day of the festival, Matth. 26, 17. Mark 
14, 12; and Josephus also could say, that the festival was celebrated for eight days; 
see Note on § 132. 

It is hardly necessary to remark, that in consequence of the close mutual relation 
between the Passover and the festival of unleavened bread, these terms are often used 
interchangeably, especially in Greek, for the whole festival, including both the paschal 


Inrrop. ] NOTES.—THE PASCHAL SUPPER AND SACRIFICES. 213 


supper and the seven days of unleavened bread; see Luke 22, 1. John 6, 4. Acts 12, 
3.4. Jos. Ant. 2, 1.3. comp. B. J. 5. 3. 1. 

IV. Other Paschal Sacrifices. 1. In Num. 28, 18-25, it is prescribed, that on the 
first and last days of the festival, the fifteenth and twenty-first of Nisan, there should be 
a holy convocation, in which “no manner of servile work” should be done. And on 
each of the seven days, besides the ordinary daily sacrifices of the Sanctuary, there was 
to be “a burnt offering unto the Lord; two young bullocks, and one ram, and seven 
lambs of the first year ;” also a meat offering, and “one goat for a sin-offering.” The 
first and last days of the festival, therefore, were each a day of convocation and of rest, 
and hence were strictly Sabbaths; distinct from the weekly Sabbath, except when 
one of them happened to fall upon this latter. 

2. On the morrow after this first day of rest or sabbath, that is, on the sixteenth day 
of Nisan, the first fruits of the harvest were offered, together with a lamb as a burnt- 
offering ; Lev. 23, 10-12. This rite is expressly assigned by Josephus, in like manner, 
to the second day of the festival, the sixteenth of Nisan; Antiq. 3.10.5. The grain 
offered was barley; this being the-earliest ripe, and its harvest occurring a week or two 
earlier than that of wheat; Jos.1.c. Bibl. Res. in Palest. IL. p. 99. Until this offering was 
made, no husbandman could begin his harvest; nor might any one eat of the new grain ; 
Lev. 23, 14. It was therefore a rite of great importance; and in the time of our Lord and 
later was performed with many ceremonies. See Biblioth. Sacra, |. ὁ. p. 408. Comp. 
Lev. 2, 14-16. Jos. Ant. 3.10.5. Lightfoot Hor. Heb. in Joh. 19, 31. Reland Antiqq. 
Sac. 4. 3. 8. 

3. There was also another sacrifice connected with the Passover, known among the 
{ater Hebrews as the Khagigah (373m); of which there are traces likewise in the Old 
Testament. Itwasa festive thank-offering, (bt mai, Engl. Vers. peace-offering, ) 
made by private individuals or families, in connection with the Passover, but distinct 
from the appointed public offerings of the temple. Such voluntary sacrifices or free- 
will offerings were provided for and regulated by the Mosaic law. The fat only was 
burned on the altar (Lev. 3, 3. 9. 14); the priest had for his portion the breast and right 
shoulder (Lev. 7, 29-34. 10, 14); and the remainder was eaten by the bringer with his 
family and friends in a festive manner, on the same or the next day; Lev. 7, 16-18, 22, 


29, 30. Deut. 12, 17. 18, 27. 27,7. These private sacrifices were often connected with 


the public festivals, both in honour of the same, and as a matter of convenience; Num. 
10, Deut. 14, 26. 16, 11. 14. comp. 1 Sam. 1, 3-5. 24, 25. 2, 12-16.19. They might be 
eaten in any clean place within the city (Lev. 10, 14. Deut. 16, 11. 14); but those only 
might partake of them, as likewise of the Passover, who were themselves ceremonially 


‘clean; Num. 18, 11.13. John 11,55. comp. Num. 9, 10-13. 2 Chr. 30, 18. Jos. B. J. 


6. 9. 3. 

Such voluntary private sacrifices in connection with the Passover seem to be implied 
in the Old Testament, in Deut. 16, 2. 2 Chr. 30, 22. 24. 35, 7-9; see more in Biblioth. 
Sacra, |. c.p.409 sq. Hence, as being a sacrifice, thus connected with a festival, these 
private free-will offerings were themselves called, at least by the later Hebrews, by the 
name Khagigah (3°37), a festival ; a word strictly synonymous with the earlier 35; 
see Buxtorf’s Lex. sub voc. The earlier Rabbins connect the Khagigah directly with 


214 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE CRUCIFIXION. [Paar VIII. 


Deut. 16, 2, as above; Pesach. fol. 70. 2. Lightfoot Hor. Heb. in Joh. 18, 28. There was, 
however, some difference of opinion among them, as to the particular day of the paschal 
festival, on which the Khagigah ought to be offered, whether on the fourteenth or 
fifteenth of Nisan; but the weight of authority was greatly in favour of the fifteenth 
day; Lightfoot lc. Yet the later accounts of the mode of celebrating the paschal 
supper seem to imply, that a Khagigah was ordinarily connected with that meal. In- 
deed, mention is made of a “ Khagigah of the fourteenth day,” so called in distinction 
from the more important and formal ceremonial Khagigah of the passover festival; 
which latter was not regularly offered until the fifteenth day, when the paschal supper 
had already been eaten, The former was then a mere voluntary oblation of thanks- 
giving, made for the purpose of enlarging and diversifying the passover-meal. See 
Lightfoot Ministerium Templi 13. 4. id. c. 14. Reland Antiqq. Sac. 4. 2. 2. 

V. The Paschal Supper. For a full account of this meal, both in its original institu- 
tion and as it was probably celebrated in the time of our Lord, see Biblioth. Sacra, |. c. 
p.41lsq. That the Jews in the course of ages had neglected some of the original pre- 
cepts, and also introduced various additional ceremonies, is evident from the manner in 
which our Lord celebrated the supper, as narrated by the Evangelists. What all these 
additions were, we have no specific historical account from cotemporary writers; yet 
the precepts preserved in the Mishnah and Talmud of Jerusalem, (compiled in the third 
century from earlier traditions,) probably refer to the most important of them, and serve 
to throw light upon some of the circumstances connected with the institution of the 
Lord’s Supper. See the tract Pesachin c. 10. Lightfoot Minist. Templi c. 13. Hor. Heb. 
in Matth. 26, 26.27. Othon. Lex. Rabb. p. 504sq. Werner de poculo Benedict. in 
Ugolini Thesaur. T. XXX. Wetstein in Matth.|.c. See too Biblioth. Sac. 1. c. p.411 κα. 

According to these authorities, four cups of red wine, usually mingled with one 
fourth part of water, were drunk during the meal, and served to markits progress. The 
first was merely preliminary, in connection with a blessing invoked upon the day and 
upon the wine; and this corresponds to the cup mentioned in Luke 22,17. Then fol- 
lowed ablutions, and the bringing in of bitter herbs, the unleavened bread, the roasted 
lamb, and also the Khagigah of the fourteenth day, anda broth or sauce (Ὁ 1) made 
with spices. After this followed the instructions to the son etc. respecting the Passover; 
and the first part of the Hallel, or song of praise, Pss. 113. 114, was repeated. The second 
cup wasnowdrunk. Next came the blessing upon each kind of food, and the guests partook 
of the meal reclining; the paschal lamb being eaten last. Thanks were then returned, 
and the third cup drunk, called 13439 045, the cup of blessing ; comp. τὸ ποτήριον τῆς 
εὐλογίας 1 Cor. 10,16. The remainder of the Hallel, Pss. 115-118, was now repeated 
and the fourth cup drunk; which was ordinarily the end of the celebration. Sometimes 
a fifth cup might be added, after repeating the great Hallel, Pss. 120-137. 

The institution of the Lord’s Supper probably took place at the close of the proper 
meal, immediately before the third cup, or cup of blessing, which would seem to have 
made part of it; comp. 1 Cor. 10, 16. 

VI. Did our Lord, the night in which he was betrayed, eat the Passover with his 
Disciples? Had we only the testimony of the first three Evangelists, not a doubt upon 
this question could ever arise. Their language (see § 132) is full, explicit, and de- 


InTRop. | NOTES.—DID JESUS EAT THE PASCHAL SUPPER? 215 


cisive, to the effect, that our Lord’s last meal with his disciples was the regular and or- 
dinary paschal supper of the Jews, introducing the festival of unleavened bread, on the 
evening after the fourteenth day of Nisan. Mark says expressly, 14, 12: ὅτε τὸ πάσχα 
ἔϑυον, when THEY killed the Passover ; which, whether the subject of ἔϑυον be the Jews 
or be indefinite, implies at least the regular and ordinary time of killing the paschal 
lamb. Luke’s language is, if possible, still stronger, 22,7: “ Then came the day of un-’ 
leavened bread, ἐν ἡ ἔδει ϑύεσϑαι τὸ πάσχα when the passover must be killed, i. 6. ac- 
cording to law and custom. This marks of course the fourteenth day of Nisan; and on 
that same evening our Lord and his disciples sat down to that same passover-meal, 
which had thus by his own appointment been prepared for them, and of which Jesus 
_ speaks expressly as the Passover, v. 15. Philologically considered, there cannot be a 
shadow of doubt, but that Matthew, Mark, and Luke, intended to express, and do ex- 
press, in the plainest terms, their testimony to the fact, that Jesus regularly partook of 
the ordinary and legal passover-meal on the evening after the fourteenth of Nisan, at 
the same time with all the Jews. ὦ 

When, however, we turn to the Gospel of John, we seek in vain in this Evangelist 
for any trace of the paschal supper in connection with our Lord. John narrates indeed 
(c. 13) our Lord’s last meal with his disciples; which the attendant and subsequent cir- 
cumstancesshow to have been the same with that, which the other Evangelists describe 
as the Passover. Upon just that point John is silent; but from this silence the inference 
ean never be rightfully drawn, that this last meal was not the Passover; any more than 
John’s similar silence in respect to the Lord’s Supper warrants the conclusion that no 
such rite was ever instituted. John, as all admit, wrote his Gospel as a supplement to 
the others; and hence, in speaking of this last meal, he narrates only such circumstances 
as had not been fully set forth by the other Evangelists. He does not describe thismeal 
as being the Passover, nor make any mention of the Eucharist, because this had been 
done, in both cases, in the most explicit manner, by Matthew, Mark, and Luke. In this 
way the difference of the two,reports of the same occasion, is satisfactorily accounted for. - 

But there are a few expressions in John’s Gospel, in connection with this meal and 
especially with our Lord’s Passion, which taken together might, at first view and if we 
had only John, seem to imply, that on Friday, the day of our Lord’s crucifixion, the 
regular and legal] Passover had not yet been eaten, but was still to be eaten on the even- 
ing after that day. The following are the passages. 

a) John 13, 1 πρὸ δὲ τῆς ἑορτῆς τοῦ πάσχα. This form of expression, it is said, shows 
that our Lord’s last meal with his disciples took place before the Passover, and could 
not therefore itself have been the paschal supper. 

b) John 18, 28 “ And they themselves [the Jews] went not into the judgment-hall, 
lest they should be defiled, ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα φάγωσι τὸ πάσχα, but that they might eat the Pass- 
over.” From this last phrase, it appears, as is averred, that the Jews were expecting 
to partake of the paschal supper the ensuing evening; andof course had not eaten it 
already. 

c) John 19, 14 ἦν δὲ παρασχευὴ τοῦ πάσχα. This “preparation of the passover,” 
being the day on which Christ suffered, necessarily implies, it is alleged, the day before 
thie passover-meal ; which of course was to be eaten that evening 


216 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE CRUCIFIXION. [Parr VIII. 


d) John 19, 31 ἦν γὰρ μεγάλη ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνου τοῦ σαββάτου. The next day after the 
crucifixion being the Jewish Sabbath, and that Sabbath being “a great day,” we must 
infer, it is argued, that it was thus called “great” because it coincided with the first day 
of the festival or fifteenth of Nisan, and was thus doubly consecrated. 

These four are the passages mainly urged. Some other considerations are brought 
forward as auxiliary. 

e) In John 13, 27-30, when Jesus said to Judas, “ That thou doest, do quickly,” 
some of the disciples supposed this to mean, “ Buy that we have need of for the feast.” 
Now as this was said apparently near the close of the meal, it follows, as some urge, 
that the passover-meal was yet to come. 

Ff) To the same effect, it is said, is the circumstance, that on the day of the cruci- 
fixion the Sanhedrim was convened, sat in judgment upon Jesus, and delivered him 
over to death,—a public judicial act, which according to the Talmudists was unlawful 
upon the Sabbath and upon all great festival days. See Lightfoot Hor. Heb. in Matth. 
27, 1. Jahn Bibl. Archeol. IL. ii. p. 309. De Wette Archeeol. ὃ 218. — 

It is apparent, that the whole inquiry relates simply to the time of the Passover. 
According to all the four Evangelists, our Lord was crucified on Friday, the day before 
the Jewish Sabbath; and his last meal with his disciples took place on the preceding 
evening, the same night in which he was betrayed. The simple question, therefore, 
at issue is, Did this Friday fall upon the fifteenth day of Nisan, or upon the fourteenth 7 
Or, in other words, did our Lord on the evening before his crucifixion eat the Passover, 
as is testified by the first three Evangelists; or was the Passover still to be eaten on the 
evening after that day, as John might seem to imply ? 

This question has been more or less a subject of discussion in the church ever since 
the earliest centuries; chiefly with a view to harmonize the difficulties. It is only in 
recent years, that the apparent difference between John and the other Evangelists, has 
been urged to the extreme of attempting to make it irreconcilable. 

VILL. Examination of Passages in John’s Gospel, etc. Admitting, as we must, 
and as we have already seen (p. 215), that the testimony of Matthew, Mark, and Luke, 
is too definite and explicit to be in any way set aside or modified, let us examine more 
closely the passages in John; and thus see, whether they may, or may not, without vio- 
lence and without any strained interpretation, be so understood, as to remove all appear- 
ance of discrepancy. 

John obviously wrote his Gospel as supplementary to the other three. He had them 
then before him, and was acquainted with their contents. He was aware that the other 
three Evangelists had testified to the fact, that Jesus partook of the Passover with his 
disciples. Did John believe, that their testimony on this point was wrong; and did he 
mean to correct it? Ifso, we should naturally expect to find some notice of the correc- 
tion along with the mention of the meal itself, which John describes, as well as they. 
Indeed, that would have been the appropriate and only fitting place for such a correction, 
But John has nothing of the kind; and we are therefore authorized to maintain, that it 
was not John’s purpose thus and there to correct or contradict the testimony of the other 
Evangelists; and if not there, then much less by mere implication in other places and 
connections. 


INTROD.] NOTES.—THE PASSOVER: PASSAGES IN JOHN’S GOSPEL. 217 


A) John 13,1 πρὸ δὲ τῆς ἑορτῆς τοῦ πάσχα, see p. 215. a. ~Here something may 
depend on the import of the word ἑορτή, of which the proper and only signification 
(like Heb. 491) is festival, not feast ; that is, it implies every where a yearly @ay or 
days of festive commemoration; never a single meal or entertainment.’ So in Num. 
28, 16. 17, where the paschal supper, prepared on the fourteenth of Nisan and eaten at 
evening, is distinguished from the festival, Heb. Ἀπ, Sept. ἑορτή, which began on the 

‘fifteenth and continued for seven days. See further Luke 2, 41. 22; 1; also the Lexi- 
cons and Concordances of the New Testament and Septuagint. 

' Some interpreters take the phrase πρὸ τῆς ἑορτῆς as qualifying the action expressed 
in v. 4, thus making of these four verses one sentence, as in the editions of Griesbach 
and Knapp. But the sentence thus formed is exceedingly involved and intricate, wholly 
unlike John’s usual manner, and that without any necessity. The second εἰδώς (v. 3) 
is in. no sense a-‘resumption of the first; and strict grammatical construction certainly 
requires v. 1 to be made independent. All this is admitted even by De Wette, the 
strenuous opposer of any conciliation between John and the other Evangelists; and is 
particularly urged by Liicke and Meyer, who on the general question take the same 
side with De Wette. We find accordingly v. 1 marked as independent in the editions 
of Mill, Wetstein, Bengel, Hahn, Lachmann, Tischendorf, and others; and likewise so 
regarded by a host of leading commentators.—The force of πρὸ τῆς ἑορτῆς being thus 
limited to v. 1, it may there qualif y either εἰδώς x. 7.2. or the words εἰς τέλος ἢγάπησεν 
αὐτούς. 

If we take it as qualifying "εἰδώς, then the sense is: “ Jesus, knowing before the fes- 
tival of the Passover, that his hour was come,” etc. comp. John 12, 23. Matth. 17, 9. 
22 sq. 20, 17-19.al. In this way the passage has no bearing whatever upon the pre- 
sent question as to the Passover. So Meyer, with emphasis. 

If, on the other hand, πρὸ τῆς ἑορτῆς be regarded as qualifying εἰς τέλος ἠγάπησεν 
αὐτούς, it is equivalent to τὸ προεόρτιὸν, the time immediately before the festival, and 
refers to the commencement (at evening) of the fifteenth day of Nisan, as'the first or 
opening day of the festival of unleavened bread, distinct from the mere paschal 
supper; see Num. 28, 16. 17, cited above. The phrase πρὸ τῆς ἑορτῆς is in that case 
equivalent to the Engl. festival-eve, and here marks the evening immediately before 
the ἑορτή or festival proper; on which eve, during the supper, our Lord “manifested his 
love for his disciples unto the end,” by the touching symbolical act of washing their 
feet. So in Philo προεύρτιον is i. gq. παρασκευή, de Vita contempl. p. 616. The follow- 
ing remarks of Liicke are to the point: “ As John wrote for Greeks and other readers 
unacquainted with the Jewish mode of reckoning time, and is here directly speaking 
only of the preparation of the meal and what preceded it,—while the preparation of the. 
passover-meal did actually take place on the fourteenth of Nisan, the true προεύρτιον,---- 
he therefore could very properly use the expression πρὸ τῆς ἑορτῆς τοῦ πάσχα without 
intending to say, that the meal itself was eaten on the fourteenth day. At any rate, 
the word πρό is here too indefinite and relative, to draw from it the inference, that the 
meal described was eaten on the evening which followed the thirteenth and began the 
fourteenth of Nisan.” Comm. zu Joh. 13, 1. 


28 


218 | THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE CRUCIFIXION. [Parr VIII. 


In any case, therefore, this passage does not require us to admit the inference which 
some have drawn from it. — 

B). John 18, 28 ἀλλ᾽ ἵνα φάγωσι τὸ πάσχα, see p. 215. δ. This passage is perhaps the 
strongest of all. To bring out from it, however, the inference, that on the day of the 
erucifixion thé paschal supper had not yet been eaten, the expression φαγεῖν τὸ πάσχα | 
must be taken in the limited sense, to eat the paschal supper ; and this, it is affirmed, 
is the true and only usage of the phrase elsewhere in the New Testament. This 

last assertion is correct; for, besides the present instance, the expression φαγεῖν τὸ 
πάσχα occurs only five times in the New Testament, viz. Matth. 26, 17. Mark 14, 12. 14. 
Luke 22, 11. 15; and but once in the Greek version of the Old Testament, viz. 2 Chr. 
30, 18; in all which passages the context limits it necessarily to the paschal supper. 
But it by no means hence follows, where the phrase is used generally and without the 
mention of any restrictive circumstances, that there also it must be taken in a like 
limited sense. ΝΣ 

The word πάσχα, at least, is not always so taken. In the New Testament the 
word is found in no less than three main significations: a) The paschal lamb ; Mark 
14, 12. Luke 22, 7. metaph.1 Cor. 5,7. δ) The paschal meal ; Matth. 26, 18.19. Luke 
22, 8. 13. Heb. 11, 28; and so five times in the phrase φαγεῖν τὸ πάσχα as above cited. 

.6) Thepaschal festival, comprising the seven days of unleavened bread; Luke 22, 1 ἢ ἑορτὴ 
τῶν ἀζύμων ἡ λεγομένη πάσχα. 2,41 coll. 43. Matth. 26,2. John 2,13. 6,4. 11, 55.al—As 
now there is nothing in the circumstances nor in the context of John 18, 28, to limit the 
meaning of τὸ πάσχα in itself either to the paschal lamb or paschal meal, we certainly 
-are not beund by any intrinsic necessity so to understand it here inthe phrase φαγεῖν 
τὸ πάσχα. If, on the other hand, we adopt for it in this place the wider sense of pas- 
chal festival, two modes of interpretation are admissible. . 

1. The first mode takes τὸ πάσχα in its literal and widest sense of passover festival ; 
but modifies the force of φαγεῖν, In this way the phrase φαγεῖν τὸ πάσχα reay be un- 
derstood as put, in a loose popular usage, instead of the common ποιεῖν τὸ πάσχα, to keep 
or celebrate the passover. The Hebrew exhibits a like phraseology in respect to this 
very festival; 2 Chr. 30, 22°25 myst ΣΎ ΓΙ ΤΣ sda and theydid eat the festival 
seven days. So the Seventy at least understood it, as is manifest from their version: 
χαὶ συνετέλεσαν τὴν ἑορτὴν τῶν ἀζύμων ἑπτὰ ἡμέρας, and they fulfilled (kept) the festival 
of unleavened bread seven days. 

2. The second mode retains φαγεῖν in its literal acceptation; takes πάσχα still in its 
widest signification; but assigns to the latter, by metonymy, the sense of paschal sa- 
crifices, that is, the voluntary peace-offerings and thank-offerings made in the temple 
during the paschal festival, and more especially on the fifteenth day of Nisan, called in 

later times Khagigah ; see p. 213 above. That the word πάσχα, in the general sense of 
festival, is susceptible of such a metonymy, is apparent from Hebrew analogies. So 
according to modern interpreters, in the same passage, 2 Chr. 30, 22 147 festival, by 
meton. festive-offerings ; where the next clause, specifies the kind of sacrifices, viz. 
peace-oflerings ; see the Lexicons of Simonis, Gesenius, etc. So too 51, the common 
word for festival ; 6. g. Ps. 118, 27 ἘΞΡ 3. am-sON bind the sacrifice ( festive-offering) 
with cords, etc. Ex. 23, 18. Mal. 2,3. The same metonymy is found likewise in the 


Inrrop.] NOTES.—THE PASSOVER: PASSAGES IN JOHN’S GOSPEL. 219 


Talmud, where it is asked: MOD "δ what isthe Passover? and the reply is: "Ὁ 
MoD the peace-offerings of the Passover, that is, the Khagigah. Rosh Hashshana 5. 1. 
See Reland Antt. Sac. 4. 3. 11. 7 
Itis manifest, that both the above methods of interpretation are founded on fair 
analogies; and that either of them relieves us from the necessity of referring the phrase 
in question to the paschal supper, and thus removes the alleged difficulty. |The chief 
priests and other members of the Sanhedrim, on the morning of the first day of the 
festival, were unwilling to defile themselves by entering beneath the roof of the Gentile 
procurator ; since in that way they would have been debarred from partaking of the 
sacrificial offerings and banquets, which were customary on that day in the temple 
and elsewhere; and in which they, from their station, were entitled and expected to 
participate. | 
This view receives some further confirmation from the circumstance, that the de- 
filement which the Jews would thus have contracted by entering the dwelling of a hea- 
then, could only have belonged to ‘that class of impurities, from which a person might 
be cleansed the same day by ablution; the D4" "2234 ablutions of a day, so called by 
the Talmudists. See Lev. 15, 5 sq. 17, 15. 22, 6.7. Num. 19, 7 sq. Maimonid. Pesach. 6. 
1. Lightfoot Hor. Heb. in Joh. 18, 28. Winer Realw. 11. p. 377. Ifnow τὸ πάσχα in | 
John 18, 28 was truly the paschal supper, and was not to take place until the evening 
after the day of the crucifixion, then this defilement of a day could have been no bar to 
their partaking of it; for at evening they were clean. Their scruple, therefore, in order 
to be well-founded, could have had reference only to the Khagigah or paschal sacrifices. 
offered during the same day before evening. See Bynaeus de Morte J. C. 3. 1. p. 13. 
©) John 19, 14 ἦν δὲ παρασκευὴ τοῦ πάσχά, see p. 215.c. Does this παρασκευή refer, 
-as usual, to the Jewish Sabbath, which actually occurred the next day? or does it here 
refer to the first day of the festival of the Passover per 86, as distinct from the Sabbath ἢ 
It is only on the latter supposition, that the passage can be made in any way to 
conflict with the testimony of the other Evangelists. : 
The Greek word παρασκευή is elsewhere found five times in the New Testament, 
viz. Matth. 27, 62. Mark 15, 42. Luke 23, 54. John 19, 31.42. Mark defines it to be 
the προσάββατον; fore-sabbath, the day or hours immediately preceding the weekly 
Sabbath and devoted to preparation for that sacred day. No trace of any such observ- 
ance is found in the Old Testament. Yet the strictness of the law respecting the Sab- 
bath, which forbade the kindling of fire and of course the preparation of food on that day’ 
.( Ex. 35, 2. 3. comp. 16, 22-27), would very naturally lead to the introduction of such a 
custom. After the exile, the προσάββατον is once mentioned in the Apocrypha, Judith 
8, 6. In later times, ἢ παρασκευή would seem to have become the usual Greek term for- 
this observance; asin the New Testament and in Josephus; Ant. 16.6.2. Philo calls 
it προεόρτιον, de Vita contempl. p. 616. In the still later Hebrew, it bore the specific- 
appellation of RMI, eve, as being the Maun 349, eve of the Sabbath ; Buxtorf Lex.. 
p. 1659. Primarily and strictly this παρασκευή or eve would seem to have commenced: 
not earlier than the ninth hour of the preceding day; as is perhaps implied in the de- 
cree of Augustus in favour of the Jews, preserved by Josephus, Ant. 16. 6.2: éyyvag τε. 
un ὁμολογεῖν αὐτοὺς ἐν σάββασιν ἢ τῇ πρὸ ταυτῆς παρασκευῇ ἀπὸ ὥρας ἐννάτης, But in: 


220 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE CRUCIFIXION. [Part VIII. 


process of time, the same Hebrew word came in popular usage to be the distinctive 
name for the whole day before the Jewish Sabbath, that is, for the sixth day of the 
week or Friday; Bereshith Rabba § 11. Buxtorfj Lex. p. 1659 sq. Compare also the 


German Sonnabend for Saturday. Nor was the use of the Hebrew word for the Greek | 


term παρασκευή confined to the Jews; for the like Syriac form, Ἰδϑος, is found for 
παρασχευή in the Syriac version of the New Testament; and in like manner, the 
corresponding Arabic word, Xe |. is given in the Camoos as an ancient name for 
Friday ; see Golius p. 1551. Freytag ΠΙ. p. 130. We are therefore entitled to infer, 
that 7 παρασκευή, thatis, the παρασκευή of the weekly Sabbath, became at an early date 
among Jews, Syrians, and Arabs, a current appellation for the sixth day of the week. 
Compare also the very peculiar phraseology of Matth. 27, 62, 

The reasons which operated to introduce a προσάββατον, or preparation for the 
Sabbath, did not exist in the case of the other festivals, on which the preparation of food 
was not forbidden; Ex. 12,16. Nevertheless, what had become customary in respect 
to the Sabbath, would naturally be imitated in other cases; and accordingly, after the 
exile, we find mention of the προγουμηγνία, eve of the new-moon, Judith 8, 6. In the Tal- 
mudists, a passover-eve, NORM 31, is likewise spoken of; Buxtorf Lex. p. 1765. But 


oy? 


what this could well have been, so long as the Passover (paschal supper) was regularly. 
celebrated at Jerusalem, it is difficult to perceive. The eve (27%) before the Passover - 
festival could have included, at most, only the evening and the few hours before — 
sunset at the close of the fourteenth of Nisan; like the primary usage in respect to the : 


προσάββατον, as we have just seen. But according to all usage of language, both in 
the Old and New Testament, those hours and that evening were the Passover itself, 
and not its preparation; unless indeed the paschal meal and its accompaniments be 
called the preparation of the subsequent festival of seven days; which againis contrary 
to all usage. It would seem most probable, therefore, that this mode of expression did 
not arise until afterthe destruction of the temple and the consequent cessation of the 
regular and legal passover-meal; when of course the seven days of unleavened bread 
became the main festival. . 

But even admitting that a passover-eve (MO8i3 33D) did exist in the. time of our 
Lord ; still, the expression could in no legitimate way be so far extended as to include 
more than a few hours before sunset, It could not have commenced apparently before 
the ninth ‘hour, when they began to kill the paschal lamb; see p.211sq. On the other hand, 
the Hebrew term 872772, for which the Greek παρασκευή stands in the New Testa- 
ment, was employed, as we have seen, as a specific name in popular usage for the 
whole sixth day of the week or Friday, not only by the Jews, but also by the Syrians 
and Arabs. Hence, when John here says: ἦν δὲ παρασκευὴ τοῦ πάσχα, ὥρα δὲ ὡςεὶ ἕκτη, 
there is a twofold difficulty in referring his language to a preparation or eve of the reg- 
ular Passover; first, because apparently no such eve or preparation did orcould well then 
exist; and secondly, because, it being then the sixth hour or mid-day, the eve or time of 
preparation (supposing it to exist) had not yet come, and the language was therefore 
inapplicable. But if John be understood as speaking of the weekly magacxsuy or 


προσάββατον, which was a common name for the whole of Friday, then the mention of 


the sixth hour was natural and appropriate. 


Inrrop.] NOTES.—THE PASSOVER: PASSAGES IN JOHN’S GOSPEL. 221 


‘We come then to the conclusion, that if John, like Mark in c. 15,42, had here defined 
the phrase in question, he would probably have written on this wise: ἦν δὲ παρασκευὴ 
τοῦ πάσχα, 0 ἐστι προσάββατον τοῦ πάσχα, that is, the paschal Friday, the day of pre- 
paration or fore-sabbath which occurred during the paschal festival. In a similar man- 
ner Ignatius writes, σάββατον τοῦ πάσχα, Ep. ad Phil. c, 13; and Socrates also, σάββα- 
Tov τῆς ἑορτῆς, Hist. Ecce. 7.22. And further, in the only other two instances where 
John uses the word παρασκευή, he applies it to this very same day of our Lord’s cruci- 
fixion, and in this very same sense of the weekly παρασκευή, preceding the weekly 
Sabbath; John 19, 31. 42. 

D) John 19, 31 ἦν γὰρ μεγάλη 7 ἡμέρα ἐκείνου τοῦ σαββάτου, see p. 216.d. Here, as ᾿ 
is alleged, it is the coincidence of the first festival day with the Sabbath, that madethe 
latter ἃ “ great” day. This would certainly be the effect of such a coincidence ; but 
the Sabbath of the Passover would also be stilla “great” day, even when it fell upon 
the second day of the festival. The last day of the festival of Tabernacles is called “ that 
great day ;” though in itself not more sacred than the first day ; John 7, 37. comp. Lev. 
23, 33-36. So 8IP2 NP, the calling of assemblies, Is. 1, 13, is rendered ἡμέρα μεγάλη 
by the Seventy, implying that in their estimation any day of solemn convocation was ἃ 
great day. The Sabbath, then, upon which the sixteenth of Nisan or second day of the 
festival fell, might be called “great” for various reasons. First, as the Sabbath of the 
great national festival, when all Israel was gathered before the Lord. Secondly, as the 
day when the first fruits were presented with’ solemn rites in the temple ; a ceremony 
paramount jnits obligations even to the Sabbath; see above p. 213. Lightfoot Hor. Heb. 
in Joh. 19, 31. Reland. Antiqq. Sac. 4. 2. 4. p. 227. Thirdly, because on that day they 
began to reckon the fifty days before the festival of Pentecost, Lev. 23, 15 sq. In all 
these circumstances there is certainly enough to warrant the epithet “ great” as applied 
to the Sabbath on which the sixteenth of Nisan might fall, as compared with other 
Sabbaths.—There exists, therefore, no necessity, and indeed no reason, for supposing, 
that John by this language meant to describe the Sabbath in question as coincident with 
the first paschal day or fifteenth of Nisan. 

E) John 13, 27-30; see p. 216. e. Here the words: “Buy what we have need of 
εἰς τὴν ἑορτήν for the festival,” have been misunderstood, by taking ἑορτή for the paschal 
supper, a signification which is quite foreign to it; see p.217 above. The disciples 
thought Judas was to buy the things necessary for the festival on the fifteenth and 
following days. Ifnow our Lord’s words were spoken on the evening preceding and 
introducing the fifteenth of Nisan, they were appropriate ; for some haste was necessary, 
since it was already quite late to make purchases for the next day. But if they were 
uttered on the evening preceding and introducing the fourteenth of Nisan, they were 
not thus appropriate; for then a whole day was yet to intervene before the festival. 
This passage therefore confirms, rather than contradicts, the testimony of the other 
- Evangelists. : 

ἘΝ) There remains the objection, that a public judicial act, like that by which Jesus 
was condemned and executed, was unlawful upon the Sabbath and on all great festival 
days; see above, p. 216. This consideration has, at first view, some weight, and has 

. 


222 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE CRUCIFIXION. [Part VIII. 


been often and strenuously urged; yet it is counterbalanced by several circumstances 
which very greatly weaken-its force. - 

The execution itself took place under Roman authority; and therefore does not 
here come into account. And as to the proceedings of thé Sanhedrim, even admitting 
that the prohibitory precepts already existed, (which is very doubtful, ) yet there are in the 
Mishna and Gemara other precepts of equal antiquity and authority, which actually 
direct aud regulate the meeting and action of that body on the Sabbath and on festival 
days; see Mishn. Sanhedr. 10.4. Gemar. Sanhedr. 10. Tholuck Comm. zu Joh. p. 
304 sq.6te Aufl. But besides all this, the chief priests and Pharisees and Scribes, who 
composed the Sanhedrim, are every where denounced by our Lord as hypocrites, ‘ who 
say, and donot; who bind heavy burdens upon others, but themselves touch them not 
with one of their fingers;’ Matth. 23, 1sq. Such men, in their rage against Jesus, 
would hardly have been restrained even by their own precepts. They professed like- 
wise, and perhaps some of them believed, that they were doing God service; and re- 
garded the condemnation of Jesus as a work of religious duty, paramount to the obliga- 
tions of any festival. Nor are other examples of such a procedure by any means 
wanting. We learn from John 10, 22. 31, that on the festival of Dedication, as Jesus 
was teaching in the temple, “the Jews took up stones to stone him.” On the day 
after the crucifixion, which, as all agree, was a Sabbath and a “ great day,” the Sanhe- 
drim applied to Pilate for a watch; and themselves caused the sepulchre to be sealed, 
and the watch to be set; Matth. 27, 62.sq. A stronger instance still is recorded in John 
7, 32. 37. 44.45; where it appears, that on the last great day of the festival of Taber- 
nacles, the Sanhedrim having sent out officers to seize Jesus, “some of them would 
have taken him, but no man laid hands on him;” so that the officers returned without 
him to the Sanhedrim, and were in consequence censured by that body. The cireum- 
stances show conclusively, that on this last great day of that festival, the Sanhedrim 
were in session and waiting for Jesus to be brought before them as a prisoner. Nor was 
it merely a casual or packed meeting, but one regularly convened; for Nicodemus 
was with them, v.50. And finally, according to Matth. 26, 3-5, the Sanhedrim, when 
afterwards consulting to take Jesus and put him to death, decided not to do it on the 
festival. Why? because it would be unlawful? Not at all; but simply “lest there 
- should be an uproar among the people.” But when, through the treachery of Judas, 
this danger was avoided, the occasion was too opportune not to be gladly seized upon 
even on a great festival day. | 

All these considerations seem to me to sweep away the whole force of this objec- 
tion; on which Scaliger and Casaubon, as also Beza and Οἷον, laid great stress; and 
which Liicke has again brought forward and urged with no little parade. 

Such then is.a general review of the passages and arguments, on the strength of 
which the alleged discrepancy between John and the other Evangelists in respect-to 
this Passover has usually been maintained. Nothing has here been assumed, and nothing 
brought forward, except as founded on just inference and safe analogy. After repeated 
and calm consideration, there rests upon my own mind a clear conviction, that there is 
nothing in the language of John, or in the attendant circumstances, which upon fair 
interpretation requires or permits us to believe, that the beloved disciple either intended 








eee 


— 


as a 


ee aon a el oe 


InrRop.] | NOTES.—THE PASSOVER: HISTORICAL TESTIMONY. 223 


to correct, or has in fact corrected or contradicted, the explicit and unquestionable 
testimony of Matthew, Mark, and Luke. 

- Vill. Early Historical Testimony. Some circumstances in the early history οἵ the 
Christian church seem to favour the idea, that among the primitive teachers, those 
who were most familiar with the writings and views~of the Apostle John, held to the 
belief that our Lord did celebrate the regular Passover with his disciples on the even- 
ing before his crucifixion. The question which we have been discussing, seems to have 
first arisen in connection with the great passover controversy, in the latter part of the 
second century. ‘he churches of Asia Minor, gathered chiefly from Jewish converts, 
continued the keeping of the Passover on the evening after the fourteenth of Nisan, 
simultaneously with the Jews; and made this the central point of their celebration. of 
our Lord’s passion and resurrection, on whatever day of the week it might occur. But 
the Western churches, formed mostly from Gentile converts, discarded the Passover; 
and celebrated annually the resurrection of our Lord on a Sunday, and observed the - 
preceding Friday as a day of penitence and fasting. 4. 

/The advocates of the course pursued by the Western churches, took the ground, 
that “the last meal of Jesus with his disciples was not the Passover; since according 
to John’s Gospel Christ partook of it on the thirteenth of Nisan; while on the following 
day, which was the appointed time for the Jewish Passover, he offered up himself as 
the true sacrifice for mankind, of which the Passover was the type;” see in Chron. 
Pasch. I. p. 13. ed. Dindorf. On the other side, Polycarp testified that he had once cele- 
brated the regular Jewish Passover with the Apostle John; and Polycrates, bishop of 
Ephesus, in an epistle to Victor bishop of Rome, appealed to the testimony of the 
Apostles John and Philip, and that of other bishops and teachers, “ that all kept the 
day of the Passover on the fourteenth according to the Gospel;” Euseb. Hist, Ecc. 
V. 24. It is hence evident, that the teachers and churches of Asia Minor, among 
whom John had lived and taught, celebrated the Passover on the evening after the 
fourteenth of Nisan, in agreement, as they held, with the example of John himself, and 
κατὰ τὸ εὐαγγέλιον, “according to the Gospel ;” a phrase which can have reference 


. only to that single celebration of the Passover, which, according to Matthew, Mark, and 


Luke, our Lord held with his disciples the evening on which he was betrayed. We 
are therefore entitled to draw from the language of Polycrates this inference, viz. that 
he and those before him in Asia Minor, who had been familiar with John and other 
Apostles, had no belief that John’s Gospel contained any thing respecting the Passover 
at variance with the testimony of the other Evangelists. See the subject more fully 
treated in Biblioth. Sac. 1. c. Ῥ. 428 sq. 

Conclusion. It has been the object of this Note to show, that upon all grounds, both 
of philology and history, the conclusion is valid and irrefragable, that the testimony of 
John in respect to the Passover need not be, and is not to be, understood as conflicting 
with that of Matthew, Mark, and Luke. In the face of evidence so decisive, it is pain- 
ful to find professed teachers of the Bible pressing the alleged difficulty to an extreme, 


in order to overthrow the authority of Holy Writ; and declaring ostentatiously, that 


“the important contradiction between John and the other Evangelists remains firm, 
and all attempts to remove it are false!” De Wette Handb. zu Joh. 13, 1. 


224 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE CRUCIFIXION. [Parr VIII. 


For a review of other proposed methods of conciliation, and for the literature of the 
subject, the student is referred to the author’s article above mentioned, in the Biblioth. 
Sacra, for Aug. 1845, p. 405-436. See also Winer’s Realw. art. Pascha, II. Ὁ. 238 κα. 


§ 133. For the cup mentioned by Luke in v. 17, see the preceding Introductory 
Note, p. 214. 

The contention among the disciples had apparently occurred quite recently, yerbaps 
even in the guest-chamber while taking their places at the table. That they were 
prone to yield to such a spirit, is evident from the instances recorded in § 79 and also 
§ 108. Our Lord on this solemn occasion reproves them; especially by the touching 
act of washing their feet; see § 134.—The aorist ἐγένετο Luke 22, 24, is to be rendered 
as the pluperfect; see Note on § 145. 


§ 134. The washing of the disciples’ feet by their Lord and Master was an impres- 
sive lesson, that they should live in harmony and love and humility one with another. 
The occasion of this act was their previous contention, as related by Luke in § 133. 
Compare Luke 24, 26 sq. with John 13, 16sq. John’s narrative is supplementary to 
that of Luke; and therefore he does not speak of the contention itself, because the 
latter had already described it. 

On the phrase πρὸ τῆς ἑορτῆς τοῦ πάσχα, v. 1, see above in Introd. Note, p. . 317.- 
The phrase δείπνου γενομένου v. 2, is here equivalent to “supper being come,” or 


“during supper ;” see v.4 and v.12. The time of the action was probably after they” 


had taken their places at table, and before they had partaken of the proper meal ; per- 
haps between the first and second cups of wine; see p. 214 above. 


§ 135. The sequence of the transactions during the supper appears to have been 
the following: The taking of their places at table; the contention; the first cup of 
wine ; the washing of the disciples’ feet and reproof (§§ 133, 134); the pointing out of 
the traitor (§ 135); the foretelling of Peter’s denial (§ 136); institution of the Lord’s 
Supper (§ 187), ete. Luke’s order differs from that of Matthew and Mark, in placing 
by anticipation the institution of the Eucharist before the pointing out of the traitor, ete. 
He was apparently led to this by the mention of the first cup of wine, vv. 17. 18. After- 
wards he returns and narrates the previous circumstances. 

In the present section, Jesus first declares that one of the twelve shall betray him ; 
they in amazement inquire, “Lord is it 1? isitI?” and Peter makesa sign to John leaning 
on Jesus’ bosom, that he should ask, who it was. John does so; and Jesus gives him 
privately a sign by which he may know the traitor, viz. the sop. The amazement 


and inquiry still continuing, Jesus gives the sop to Judas; who then conscience-. 


smitten, but desiring to conceal his confusion, asks as the others had done, “Lord, is 
it?” Jesus answers him, and he immediately goes out, before the institution of the 
Eucharist; comp. John 13, 26 sq.—For John 13, 28, 29, see Introd. Note, p. 221. 


§ 136. Mark says, “Before the cock crow twice,” v. 30; the other Evangelists 
have simply, “ Before the cock crow ;” see Note on § 144. 


ee ee 





δὲ 133-144.] NOTES.—PETER’S DENIALS, ETC. 225 


§ 137. The institution of the Lord’s Supper took place obviously at the close of the 
passover-meal, and in connection with the “ cup of blessing,” or third cup, which ter- 
minated the meal proper; comp. 1 Cor. 10, 16, and see p. 214 above. With this view 
accords the μετὰ τὸ δειπνῆσαι of Luke 22, 20 and 1 Cor. 11, 25. Matthew and Mark 
speak of Jesus as breaking the bread ἐσθιόντων αὐτῶν, which implies nothing more 
than “during the meal,” while they were yet eating; and does not require the institu- 

on of the bread to be separated from that of the cup. 


§ 142. Matthew relates that our Lord went away thrice and prayed. Mark speaks 
of his going away twice only, but mentions his coming again the third time, v. 41; 
and therefore accords with Matthew. According to Luke, Jesus goes away and prays, 
and an angel strengthens him ; after which he prays the “ more earnestly,” v. 44. The 
three Evangelists, therefore, agree in their narratives. 


§ 143. Jesus advances to meet the crowd, and declares himself to be the person 
whom they sought. At the same time Judas, in order to fulfil his bargain, comes 
up and salutes him with a kiss. ~ 


§ 144. An oriental house is usually built around a quadrangular interior court; into 
which there is a passage (sometimes arched) through the front part of the house, closed 
next the street by a heavy folding gate, with a smaller wicket for single persons, kept 
by a porter. In the text, the interior court, often paved or flagged, and open to the 
sky, is the αὐλή, where the attendants made a fire; and the passage beneath the front 
of the house, from the street to this court, is the προαύλιον or πυλών. The place where 
Jesus stood before the high priest, may have been an open room or place of audience 
on the ground-floor, in the rear or on one side of the court; such rooms, open in front, 
being customary. It was close upon the court; for Jesus heard all that was going on 
around the fire; and turned and looked upon Peter; Luke 22, 61. 

Peter’s first denial took place at the fire in the middle of the court, on his being 
questioned by the female porter.—Peter then, according to Matthew and Mark, re- 
treats into the passage leading to the street (πυλών, προαύλιον), where he is again 
questioned, and makes his second denial. Luke and John do not specify the place. 
The Evangelists differ in their statements here, as to the person who now questioned 
him. Mark says the same maid, 4 παιδίσκη, saw him again (πάλιν), and began to 
question him, v. 69; Matthew has ἄλλη, another maid, v. 71; Luke writes ἕτερος, 
another person, or another man, ἄγϑρωπος, v. 58; while John uses the indefinite form 
εἶπον, they said. As, according to. Matthew (v..71) and Mark (v. 69), there were sev- 
eral persons present, Peter may have been interrogated by several.—The third denial 
took place an hour after, probably near the fire, or at least within the court, where our 
Lord and Peter could see each other; Luke 22,61. Here Matthew and Mark speak 
of several interrogators, Luke has ἄλλος τις, and John specifies the servant of the high 
priest. 

The three denials are here placed together for convenience, although during the 
intervals between them the examination of Jesus was going on before the high priest; 
the progress of which is given in ὁ 145. 


29 


226 THE FOURTH PASSOVER AND THE CRUCIFIXION. [Parr VIII. 


Mark relates that the cock crowed twice, vv. 68, 72 ; the others speak only of his 
crowing once. This accords also with their respective accounts of our Lord’s prophe- 
cy; see § 136. The cock often crows irregularly about midnight or not long after; 
and again always and regularly about the third hour or day-break. When therefore — 
“the cock-crowing” is spoken of alone, this last is always meant. Hence the name 

-ἀλεκτοροφωνία, cock-crowing, for the third watch of the night, which ended at the third 
hour after midnight; Mark 13, 35. Mark therefore here relates more definitely; the 
others more generally. 


§ 145. This examination by Caiaphas, John 18, 19-23, took place soon after Peter's 
first denial; see ὃ 144. Not improbably the high-priest again withdrew, after having 
sent off messengers to convoke the Sanhedrim, which met at early dawn, Luke 22, 66.— 
Luke 22, 63-65 is transposed, in accordance with Matthew and Mark. 

The aorist ἀπέστειλεν in John 18, 24, is to be rendered by the pluperfect: “ Annas 
had sent him,” etc. Such a use of the aorist is not unfrequent, where an earlier cir- 
cumstance is inserted afterwards, Matth. 14, 3. 4.126, 48. Luke 22, 24; or also in rela- 
tive clauses, Luke 19, 15, 24, 1. John 11, 30. Acts 1,2. See Winer Gramm. ὃ 41. 5. 
Buttmann ὃ 137. 3. n. 1. Kiihner Ausf. Gramm. ὃ 444. 


§ 146. On John 18, 28, see Introd. Note, p. 218. 


§ 149. The χλαμὺς κοκκίνη of Matth. 27, 28, and theiuatoy πορφυροῦν of John 19, 2, 
are put for the paludamentum or military cloak worn by officers; see Adam’s Rom. 
Antiqq. p. 371. The terms κόκκινος coccus-dyed, crimson, and πορφυροῦς purple, seem 
to be nearly synonymous; just as in English purple-red and crimson are often inter- 
changed. So Hor. Sat. II. 6. 102 “rubro cocco tincta vestis,? which in v. 106 is “ ves- 
tis purpurea.” | 


δ 150. On the phrase παρασκχευὴ τοῦ πάσχα, v. 14, see the Introd. Note, p. 219.—In the 
same verse, the expression wea δὲ wcel ἕκτη does not accord with the wea τρέτη of Mark 
15, 25; see in§ 153. But the ὥρα τρέτη of Mark, as the hour of the crucifixion, is sus- 
tained by the whole course of the transactions and circumstances; as also by the fact 
‘stated by Matthew, Mark, and Luke, that the darkness commenced at the siath hour, 
after Jesus had already for some time hung upon the cross; see § 155. init. The read- 
ing ἕκτη in John is therefore probably an early error of transcription for τρέτη (ς΄ for Γ΄. 
‘Indeed, this last reading is found in Cod, Bezae and Cod. Reg. 62, as well as several other 
authorities ; so that its external weight is marked by Griesbach as nearly or quite equal 

-to that of the common reading; while the internal evidence in its favour is certainly far 

greater; see Griesbach and Wetstein in loc.—The suggestion of some commentators, 
that John here computes the hours from midnight, seems to be without any historical 
foundation. The time also which would thus result, viz. sunrise, would be much too 
-early for the course of events. 


§ 151. Judas repented, it would seem, as soon as he saw that Jesus was delivered 
over to be crucified. Till then he had hoped, perhaps, to enjoy the reward of his 
treachery, without involving himself in the guilt of his Master’s blood. 


§§ 145-155.] NOTES. Q27 


According to Matthew (v. 5), Judas “strangled” i. 6. hanged himself, ἀπήγξατο. 
Luke says in Acts 1, 18, “falling headlong (πρηνὴς γενόμενος) he burst asunder.” 
These two accounts are not inconsistent with each other; the rope breaking, the fall 
might easily be such as to cause the bursting of the abdomen. 

In Acts 1, 18 ἐχτήσατο is to be rendered: he gave occasion to purchase, was the occa- 
sion of purchasing. For such an usage, see Heb. 2, 10. Matth. 27, 60. John 3, 22 coll. 
4,1.2. Rom. 14, 15. 1 Cor. 7, 16. 1 Tim. 4, 16. etc. 

The quotation in Matth. 27, 9.10, is found, not in Jeremiah, but in Zech. 11, 12 sq. 
The reading Ἱερεμίου is therefore most probably an early error of a transcriber, misled 
bya reminiscence of Jer. 18, 1 sq. The Syriac version, the earliest of all, as also sev- 
eral other versions and manuscripts, have simply διὰ tov προφήτου, which is apparently 
the true reading. Other later authorities read Ζαχαρίου. See Wetstein and Griesbach 
in loc. 


δ 162. Jesus bore his cross at first; but he being probably faint from exhaustion, 
Simon was compelled to bear it after him. 

The ὄξος μετὰ χολῆς μεμιγμένον of Matthew 27, 34, is the same with the ἐσμυρμισμένον 
οἶνον of Mark 15, 23, viz. cheap acid wine mingled with myrrh. Such a drink was given 
to persons about to be executed, in order to stupify them. Babylon. Sanhedr. fol. 43.1: 
“ prodeuntiad supplicium capitis potum dederunt, granum thuris in poculo vini, ut turba- 
retur intellectus ejus ;” in allusion to Prov. 31,6. See Lightfoot Hor. Heb. in Matth.1, c. 


§ 153. Various slight transpositions in the verses are made in this Section, in order to 
present their parallelism to the eye-—On the four different forms of the title on the 
cross, see Note on § 15. 


§ 154. According to Matthew and Mark, both the malefactors reviled Jesus; while ac- 
cording to Luke, one was penitent. In the former Evangelists, there is here an enallage 
of number; the plural being put for the singular. This is often done, where the pre- 
dicate relates strictly to one subject, while yet the writer expresses the idea generally. 
So Maitth. 26, 8 coll. John 12, 4. Matth. 2, 20. 9, 8. Mark 7,17 coll. Matth. 15, 15. Mark 
5, 31 coll. Luke 8,45. Matth. 24, 1 coll. Mark 13, 1. John 19, 29 coll. Matth. 27, 48. etc. 
See Winer Gramm. ὃ 27. 2.—For the ὄξος in Luke 23, 36, see Note on § 155. 


§ 155. In Matth. 27, 46 ἠλέ is the Heb. "8; and in Mark 15, 34 ἐλωΐ is the Aram.. 
"2X; both signifying my God. 7 

The ὄξος in Matth. 22, 48 and the parallel verses, is here the posca or common 
drink of the Roman soldiers, viz. cheap acid wine mingled with water. In Matthew 
and Mark the sponge is said to be put upon a reed; in John, upon hyssop. Here pro-- 
bably a stalk or stem of hyssop is to be understood; the cross not being of any great 
height. The particular plant designated by the 3118 and ὕσσωπος of the Hebrews, has. 
not yet been fully ascertained by botanists. It probably included not only the hyssop 
of the shops, but also other aromatic plants, as mint, wild marjoram, etc. See Celsius. 
Hierobot. 1. p. 407 sq. Rosenm. Bibl. Archaeol. IV. i. p. 108. Winer Bibl. Realw. art.. 
Ysop, 11. p. 819. 


228° THE RESURRECTION AND ASCENSION. [Parr IX. 


§ 156. Matth. 27, 55. 56 etc. refers to a later point of time than John 19, 25 sq. 
Mary and the other women had now retired to a distance from the scene of suffering. 


§ 157. On the phrase μεγάλη ἡ ἡμέρα ἐκείνου τοῦ σαββάτου, John 19, 31, see 
Introd. Note, p. 221. 

Luke 23, 54 καὶ σάββατον ἐπέφωσκε, lit. and the Sabbath was dawning, i. 6. drew 
on; the word ἐπέφωσκε, which properly belongs to the natural day, being here figura- 
tively and poetically applied to the civil day, which among the Jews began at sunset. 
This interpretation is here the necessary one; see the ὑψέας γεγομέγης of Matthew and 
Mark, and the ἡμέρα ἦν παρασκευή of Luke himself. 

It was according to custom among. the Jews, that the bodies of persons publicly 
executed should be taken down and ‘buried before sunset. So Joseph. B. J. 4. 5. 2: 
Τοσαύτην Ιουδαίων περὶ τὰς ταφὰς πρόνοιαν ποιουμένων, ὥςτε καὶ τοὺς ἐκ καταδίκης 


> , ‘ ; Car ~ νὼ“ 
ἀγεσταυρουμένγους πρὸ δύντος ἡλίου καϑελεῖν τε καὶ ϑάπτειν». 


PART IX. 


OUR LORD’S RESURRECTION, HIS SUBSEQUENT APPEARANCES, AND HIS 
ASCENSION. 


δὲ 159—173. 


Intropuctrory Nore. 


A ruLt discussion upon this part of the Gospel History, embracing a review of the 
main difficulties in the way of harmonizing the accounts of the four Evangelists, was 
published by the author of these Notes, in the Bibliotheca Sacra for Feb. 1845, p. 162 
sq. To this the student is referred fora more complete examination of the subject. 

It is no doubt true, that more of these apparent difficulties are found in this short 
portion of the Gospels, than in almost all the rest. This has its cause in the circum- 
stance, that each writer here follows an eclectic method, and records only what apper- 
‘tained to his own particular purpose or experience. Thus many of the minor and con- 
necting facts have not been preserved ; and the data are therefore wanting to make out 
a full and complete harmony ofall the accounts, without an occasional resort to something 
of hypothesis. Had we all the facts, we may well rest assured, that this part of the sacred 
history would at once prove to be as exact, as consistent, and as complete, as any and 
every other portion of the Word of God. 

The general results of the investigations upon which we are now entering, may be 
presented in the following summary view of the events and circumstances connected 
with our Lord’s resurrection and ascension, in the order of their occurrence. 

The resurrection took place at or before early dawn on the first day of the week ; 
when there was an earthquake, and an angel descended and rolled away the stone 
from the sepulchre and sat uponit; so that the keepers became as dead men from terror. 
At early dawn, the same morning, the women who had attended on Jesus, viz. Mary 
Magdalene, Mary the mother of James, Joanna, Salome, and others, went out with 


In'rRop. | NOTES.—ORDER OF EVENTS. 229 


spices to the sepulchre in order further to embalm the Lord’s body. They inquire 
among themselves, who should remove for them the stone which closed the sepulchre. 
On their arrival they find the stone already taken away. The Lord had risen. The 
women knowing nothing of all that had taken place, were amazed; they enter the 
tomb, and find not the body of the Lord, and are greatly perplexed. At this time Mary 
Magdalene, impressed with the idea that the body had been stolen away, leaves the 
sepulchre and the other. women, and runs to the city to tell Peter and John. 

The other women remain still in the tomb; and immediately two angels appear, 
who announce unto them that Jesus is risen from the dead, and give them a charge 
in his name for the Apostles. They go out quickly from the sepulchre, and proceed 
in haste to the city to make this known to the disciples. On the way Jesus meets them, 
permits them to embrace his feet, and renews the same charge to the Aposiles. The 
women relate these things to the disciples; but their words seem to them as idle tales, 
and they believe them not. 

Meantime Peter and John had run to the sepulchre, and entering in had feud it 
empty. But the orderly arrangement of the grave-clothes and of the napkin, convinced 
John that the body had not been removed either by violence or by friends; and the germ 
of a belief sprung up in his mind, that the Lord had risen. The two returned to the 
city. Mary Magdalene, who had again followed them to the sepulchre, remained 
standing and weeping before it; and looking in she saw two angels sitting. Turning 
around she sees Jesus; who gives to her also a solemn charge for his disciples. 

The further sequence of events, consisting chiefly of our Lord’s appearances, pre- 
sents comparatively few difficulties. The various manifestations which the Saviour 
made of himself to his disciples and others, as recorded by the Evangelists and Paul, 
may accordingly be arranged and enumerated as follows: 

1. To the women returning from the sepulchre. Reported only by Matthew. 

See § 162. 
To Mary Magdalene, at the sepulchre. By John and Mark. § 164. 
3. To Peter, perhaps early in the afternoon. By Luke and Paul. § 166. 


ὃ 


4, To the two disciples going to Emmaus, tow area evening. © By Luke and Mark. 
§ 166. 
To the Apostles (except Thomas) assembled at evening. By Mark, Luke, John, 
and Paul. § 167. 
N.B. These five appearances all took place at or near Jerusalem, upon the first 
day of the week, the same day on which the Lord arose. 


On 


6. To the Apostles, Thomas being present, eight days afterwards at Jerusalem. 


Only by John. § 168. r 
7. To seven of the Apostles on the shore of the Lake of Tiberias. Only by John. 
δ 169. ΄ 


8. To the eleven Apostles and to five hundred other Brethren, on a mountain in 
Galilee. By Matthew and Paul. § 170. 

9. To James, probably at Jerusalem. Only by Paul. § 171. 

10. To the eleven at Jerusalem, immediately before the ascension. By Luke in 
Acts, and by Paul. § 171. 

Then follows the ascension. § 172. 


230 THE RESURRECTION AND ASCENSION. [Parr IX. 


§ 159. The women had rested on the seventh day, according to Luke 23, 56; and 
the Sabbath being past (διαγενόμενον) Mark relates (v. 1) that they brought spices to 
anoint the body. This purchase would seem to have been made in the evening after 
the Sabbath; since Mark proceeds in v.2 to narrate what they did early the next 
morning. In that case Luke (I. 6.) speaks of the spices by way of anticipation—Or, if 
with some, we follow Luke and regard the spices as having been purchased before the 
Sabbath; then the ἠγόρασαν of Mark 16, 1 is to be rendered in the pluperfect, as in 
the English version ; see Note on § 145. This however is less in accordance with the 
διαγενομένου tov σαββάτου of Mark. 

The angel had descended and the earthquake had taken place, before the arrival of 
the women. Our Lord therefore had arisen from the tomb at or before early dawn. See 
the next Note.—Verses 2-4 of Matthew are here transposed into their natural order. 
As they stand in Matthew, the aorists éyéveto and ἀπεχύλισε must be rendered as the 
pluperfect: “had been” and “had rolled away ;” see Note on § 145. 

The body of our Lord was laid in the sepulchre before sunset on Friday ; and he 
rose early on the morning of Sunday. He therefore rose on the third day ; having 
lain in the tomb during one whole day and a part of two others; in all not far from 


thirty-six hours. On the expressions: the third day and after three days, see Note 
on § 49. 


§ 160. The point of time when the women visited the sepulchre is very definitely 
marked by all the Evangelists, viz. Matthew τῇ ἐπιφωσκούσῃ sc. ἡμέρᾳ, Mark λέαν 
πρωΐ, Luke ὕρϑρου βαϑέος, John πρωΐ σκοτίας ἔτι οὔσης. These expressions all go to 
fix the time at what we call carly dawn, or early twilight; after the break of day, but 
while the light is yet struggling with darkness. , 

But Mark, in v. 2, has added the phrase ἀνατείλαντος tov ἡλίου, which according to 
every law of the aorist must be rendered: the sun being risen; or, as the English ver- 
sion has it, at the rising-of the sun. These words seem, at first, to be directly at variance 
with the language of the other three Evangelists, and with the λέαν πρωΐ of Mark him- 
self. Nor does the reading ἀγατέλλοντος in Cod. Bezae, nor the insertion of & before 
ἀνατείλαντος as in Cod. Colb. and others, help the matter. The latter is incompatible 
with the signification of the aorist ; while the present ἀνατέλλοντος is just as inconsistent 
with the preceding λίαν πρωΐ, It matters little here, whether the sun was in the act of 
rising above the horizon, or already just risen. 

Yet as Mark by the expression λέαν πρωΐ has definitely fixed the time in accordance 
with all the other Evangelists, we cannot suppose that by the subsequent phrase ἀγα- 
τείλαντος tov ἡλίου he meant to contradict himself and them. He must therefore have 
employed this latter expression in a broader and less definite sense, not inconsistent 
with λέαν πρωΐ, As the sun is the source of light and day, and his earliest rays pro- 
duce the contrast between night and dawn, so the term sun-rising might easily come 
in popular usage, by a metonymy of cause for effect, to be put for all that earlier inter- 
val, when his rays still struggling with darkness do yet usher in the day. 

Accordingly, we find such a popular usage existing among the Hebrews and in the 
Old Testament. Thus in Judg. 9, 33, Zebul, after directing Abimelech to lie in wait 
with his people in the field during the night, goes on to say: “ And it shall be, in the 


ee a-Rainweies: οὐδ 








δὲ 159-162. | NOTES.—SUN-RISING, ETC. 231 


morning, as soon as the sun is up (Heb. ὅπ m4t5), thou shalt rise early and set 
upon the city ;” Sept. xo? ἔσται τοπρωὶΐ ἅμα τῷ ἀνατεῖλαι τὸν ἥλιον z.1.4. Here we 
have the very same use of the aorist, and the very same juxtaposition of πρωΐ and 
ἅμα τῷ ἀνατεῖλαι τὸν ἥλιον, and yet we cannot for a moment suppose that Abimelech 
was to wait till the sun actually appeared above the horizon, before he made his onset. 
So the Psalmist, Ps. 104, 22, speaking of the young lions that by night roar after their 
prey, procceds thus: “ The sun ariseth, they gather themselves together, and lay them 
down in their dens ;” Sept. ἀνέτειλεν ὃ ἥλιος x.1.4., still in the aorist. But beasts of 
prey do not wait for the actual appearance of the sun above the horizon ere they shrink 
away to their lairs; the break of day, the dawning light, is the signal for their retreat. 
See also Sept. 2 K. 3, 22. 2 Sam. 23, 4. In all these passages the language is entirely 
parallel to that of Mark 16, 2; and they fully illustrate and confirm the principle, that 
the sun-rising is here used by Mark in a popular sense, as equivalent to the rising of 
the day, or early dawn.—This use too of the aorist in the Septuagint, serves to show 
that Rndceethay roc; not ἀνατέλλοντος, is the true reading in the Greek. 

There was probably something in respect to Mary Magdalene, which gave her a 
peculiar prominence in these transactions. This may be inferred from the fact, that 
John mentions Mary Magdalene, and her alone; while the other Evangelists likewise 
name her first, as if holding the most conspicuous place.—On the different names and 
number of the women, as narrated by the different Evangelists, see Note on § 57. 

Mary Magdalene, amazed at not finding the body of Jesus, and supposing it to have 
been stolen, leaves the other women, probably in the sepulchre, and returns to the city - 
to tell Peter and John. To them she uses the phrase οἴδαμεν v.2, meaning herself and 
‘the other women; but afterwards, when she speaks to the angels, it is οἶδα, v. 13. 


§ 161. Luke speaks of two angels; Matthew and Mark of only one; see the Note 
on § 57.—Mark says he was sitting; Luke speaks of them apparently as standing, 
ἐπέστησαν, ν. 4. But ἐφίστημι, in its appropriate and acknowledged usage, is to appear 
suddenly, to be suddenly present, without reference to its etymology ; comp. Luke 2, 9 
Acts 12,7. So Passow, plétzlich erscheinen. See also Reiske Indic. Opp. Demosth. 
art. ἐφιστάναι. Sturz Lex. Xenoph. ib. 

In Matthew, the angel addresses the women apparently while still sitting on the 
stone outside of the sepulchre; in Mark and Luke, on the contrary, the conversation 
takes place in the sepulchre. But although Matthew does not speak of the women as 
entering the tomb, yet in v.8 he describes them as coming out of it (ἐξελϑοῦσαι); sO 
that of course his account too implies, that the interview took place within the tomb, as 
narrated by Mark and Luke. 6 ; 

In recording the charge sent by the angels to the Apostles, Matthew and Mark 
dwell more upon Galilee ; and Luke more upon the Lord’s previous announcement of 
his resurrection. 


, ΄ 
§ 162. It is evident that Mary Magdalene was not with the other women, when 
Jesus thus met them on their return. Her language to Peter and John forbids the 


supposition, that she had already seen the Lord; see John 20,2. See Biblioth. Sacra, 
Feb. 1845, p. 171. 


232 THE RESURRECTION AND ASCENSION. [Part IX. 


§ 163. Mary Magdalene had gone to Peter and John only ; who would seem to have 
lodged by themselves in a different part of the city. The other women went apparently 
to the rest of the disciples. "When therefore it is here said of John, on his entering the 
sepulchre (v. 8), that “he saw and believed,” this is not at variance with v. 9, nor yet 
with Luke 24, 11. What was it that John thus believed? Not the mere report of 
Mary Magdalene, that the body had been taken away; for so much he must have 
known and believed, when he stooped down and looked into the sepulchre. His belief 
must have been of something more and greater. The grave-clothes lying orderly in 
their place, and the napkin folded together by itself; made it evident that the tomb had 
not been rifled, nor the body stolen by violent hands; for these garments and the spices 
would have been of more value to thieves, than merely a naked corpse; at least, thieves 
would not have taken the pains thus to fold the garments together. The same circum- 
stances showed also that the body had not been removed by friends; for they would 
not thus have left the grave-clothes behind. All these considerations excited in the 
mind of John the germ of a belief, that Jesus was risen from the dead. He believed 
(ἐπίστευσε) because he saw; “for (γάρ) as yet they knew not the Scripture,” v. 9. He 
now began to recall and understand our Lord’s repeated declaration, that he was to rise 
again on the third day; a declaration on which the Jews had already acted in setting 
a watch. See Matth. 16, 21. 17, 23. Luke 9, 22. 24, 6, 7. etc. Matth. 27,63 sq. In this 
way, the apparent want of connection (sometimes urged) between verses 8 and 9, dis- 
appears; and the word ἐπίστευσε is left in the signification of a religious belief usual to 
- itin John’s Gospel. See John 3, 15. 16 sq. 10, 26. 19, 35. al. saep. 


§ 164. Mary Magdalene now manifestly sees the angels for the first time ; and this 
circumstance also goes to show, that she had previously left the other women at the 
sepulchre before the angels appeared to them. | 

A main difficulty occurs here in fixing the order of time, between our Lord’s appear- 
ance to Mary Magdalene and that to the other women in § 1632. This arises from the 
use of the word πρῶτον in Mark 16, 9, which seems to imply that this appearance to 
Mary Magdalene was the first of all: ἐφάνη πρῶτον Magig τῇ Μαγδαληγῇ. Yet the 
whole course of events and circumstances shows conclusively, that Jesus had previously 
appeared to the other women. We are therefore compelled, and that in accordance 
with good and ordinary usage, to regard πρῶτον as put here not absolutely, but rela- 
tively. That is to say, Mark narrates three and only three appearances of our Lord ; 
of these three that to Mary Magdalene takes place first, πρῶτον, and that to the assem- 
bled disciples the same evening occurs last, ὕστερον, v. 14. Now in any series or sue- 
cession of events, where πρῶτον and ὕστερον are employed, whatever may be the num- 
ber of intervening terms, πρῶτον marks the first of the series, and ὕστερον the last of 
the same series, and no other. So here in Mark, ὕστερον is put with the third appear- 
ance narrated; but had Mark mentioned four, then ὕστερον could not have stood with 
the third, but must have been used with the fourth or last; and so in every case. 
Hence as ὕστερον is here put relatively, and therefore does not exclude the subsequent 
appearances of our Lord to Thomas and in Galilee; so too πρῶτον here stands rela- 
‘tively, and does not exclude the previous appearance to the other women. Similar 
examples are found in 1 Cor. 15, 5-8, and in John 21, 14, 


EE — τὰν δεν 


δὲ 163-170. ] NOTES.—APPEARANCES OF OUR LORD. 233 


In this way the whole difficulty in the case before us vanishes; and the complex 
and cumbrous machinery of earlier commentators becomes superfluous. 


ὁ 166. This appearance of our Lord to Peter, is mentioned only by Paul and by 
Luke, v.34. It had not taken place when the two disciples left Jerusalem for Emmaus ; 
or at least they had not heard of it. It had occurred when they returned; and that 
long enough before to have been fully reported to all the disciples and believed by 
them. It may perhaps have happened about the time the two disciples set off, οὐ. 
shortly afterwards. 


§ 167. Paul speaks of the Apostles by their usual appellation, as the twelve, 1 Cor. 
15,5; Matthew, Mark, and Luke here speak of them as the eleven; Matth. 28, 16. 
Mark 16, 14. Luke 24, 33. Yet on this particular occasion, only ten were actually pre- 
sent; see John 20, 24. 

When the disciples beheld their. risen Lord, they thought they saw a spirit. Jesus 
reassures them; and presents to. them indubitable evidence, that the same body of 
flesh and bones which had been crucified and laid in the sepulchre, was now risen and 
alive before them. On the general subject of the nature of our Lord’s resurrection- 
body, see a full discussion by the author of these Notes in the Bibliotheca Sacra for 
May 1845, p. 292 sq. | 

Then follows our Lord’s charge and commission to the eleven Apostles, delivered 
to them here in private by themselves; and distinct from the public and more general 
commission recorded in Matth, 28, 19. 20.—As a symbol of this commission to them in 
particular, and of the power which they should shortly receive through the Spirit im- 
parted from on high, “he breathed on them, and said, Receive ye the Holy Ghost ;” 
John 20, 22. There was in this emblem a recognition and reiteration of the gracious 
promise of the Spirit before made; which was to be abundantly fulfilled on the day of 
Pentecost. See John 14, 26. 16, 7 sq. Acts 2, 1 sq. 


§ 169. This appearance of our Lord to the seven disciples at the Lake of Galilee, 
is shown to have preceded that upon the mountain, by John 21,14. It was his third ap- 
pearance to the Aposiles; see δῇ 167, 168. They were now waiting the appointed time, 
to meet Jesus upon a certain mountain; Matth. 28, 16, 


§ 170. The set time had now come; and the eleven disciples went away into the 
mountain, “where Jesus had appointed them.” It would seem probable, that this time 
and place had been appointed of our Lord for a solemn and more public interview, not 
only with the eleven whom he had already met more than once, but with all his dis- 
ciples in Galilee ; and that therefore it was on this same occasion, when, according to 
Paul, “he was seen of above five hundred brethren at once.” That the interview in 
Matthew was not confined to the eleven alone, seems evident from the fact that “some 
doubted ;” for this could hardly be supposed true of any of the eleven, after what had 
already happened to them in Jerusalem and Galilee, and after having been appointed to 
meet their risen Lord at this very time and place. The appearance to the five hundred 
must at any rate be referred to Galilee; for even after our Lord’s ascension, the num- 


30 » 


234 THE RESURRECTION AND ASCENSION. [Parr IX. 


ber of the names in Jerusalem were together only about an hundred and twenty; Acts 
1,15. And further, Paul in enumerating the appearances of Jesus, in 1 Cor. 15, 5-8, 
specifies only those to Apostles, with this single exception; which therefore seems of it- 
self to imply, that the eleven also were here included. I thérefore, with many leading 
commentators, do not hesitate to regard the interviews thus described by Matthew and 
Paul, as identical. It was a great and solemn occasion. Our Lord had directed, that 
the eleven and all his disciples in Galilee should thus be convened upon the mountain. 
It was the closing scene of his ministry in Galilee. Here his life had been spent. Here 
most of his mighty works had been done and his discourses held. Here his followers 
were as yet most numerous. He therefore here takes leave on earth of those among 
whom he had lived and laboured longest; and repeats to all his disciples in public the 
solemn charge, which he had already given in private to the Apostles: “‘Go ye there- 
fore and teach all nations ;—and lo, 1 am with you always, even unto the end of the 
world.” It was doubtless the Lord’s last interview with his disciples in that region; 
his last great act in Galilee. 


§ 171. Luke relates, in Acts 1, 3, that Jesus showed himself alive to the Apostles 
“after his Passion, by many infallible proofs, being seen of them forty days, and speak- 
ing of the things pertaining to the kingdom of God.” This would seem to imply inter- 
views and communications, as to which we have little more than this very general notice. 
One of these may have been-the appearance to James, mentioned by Paul only (1 Cor. 
15, 7), and subsequent to that to the five hundred brethren. It may be referred with 
most probability to Jerusalem, after the return of the Apostles from Galilee. 

Afterwards, our Lord again, according to Paul, “was seen of all the Apostles.” 
This was apparently an appointed meeting; the same which Luke speaks of in 
Jerusalem, immediately before the ascension. It was of course the Lord’s last interview 
with his Apostles. 


§ 172. During the preceding discourse, Acts 1, 7. 8 (δ 171), or in immediate con- 
-nection with it, our Lord leads the Apostles out as far as to Bethany (ἕως εἰς Βηϑανί-- 
av); and lifting up his hands he blessed them; Luke 24, 50. This act of blessing must 
be understood, by all the laws of language, as having taken place at or near Bethany. 

The connecting particle is not δέ, as in the beginning of the verse, but καί, and this 
again is followed by another zai, “Andit came to pass, wHILe he blessed them, he 
-was parted from them, and carried up into heaven.” Our Lord’s ascension, then, took 
place at or near Bethany. Indeed, the sacred writer could hardly have found words to 
express the fact more definitely and fully ; and a doubt on this point could never have 
suggested itself to the mind of any reader, but for the language of the same writer in 
Acts 1, 12, where he relates: that afler the ascension the disciples “returned unto Je- 
rusalem from the mount called Olivet.” Luke obviously did not mean to contradict him- 
self; and the most that this expression can be made to imply, is, that from Bethany 
-where their Lord had ascended, which lies on the eastern slope of the Mount of Olives, 
a mile or more below the summit of the ridge, the disciples returned to Jerusalem by a 
path across the Mount. Indeed, Bethany is described in the New Testament as 
-connected with, or as a part of, the Mount of Olives, πρὸς TO Ogos τῶν ἐλαιῶν, Mark 11, 


t ~ 


§§ 171, 172.) NOTES.—PLACE OF THE ASCENSION. 235 


1. Luke 19, 29. And further, where Matthew and Mark speak of Jesus, during the week 
of his Passion, as going out at evening from Jerusalem to lodge at Bethany, Luke says 
expressly that he spent the nights (τὰς νύχτας ηὐλίζετο) going out into the Mount of 
Olives ; see Matth. 21,17. Mark 11, 11.19.20. Luke 21, 37. This serves to show, that 
Luke, in c. 24, 50 and Acts 1, 12, uses the terms Bethany and Mount of Olives inter- 
changeably, and almost as synonymous. 

Yet from this remark in Acts there arose, probably early in the fourth century, the 
legend which fixed the place of the ascension on the reputed summit of the Mount of 
Olives. Ifthat was indeed the true spot, then our Lord ascended from it in full view 
of all the inhabitants of Jerusalem ; a circumstance not hinted at by the sacred writers, 
nor atall in accordance with the life and character of the Saviour. . 

For a full discussion of this topic, in reply to the objections of the Rev. Mr. Newman 
of Oxford, see an article by the author of these Notes, in the Bibliotheca Sacra for Feb. 
1843, p. 176 sq. 


‘ 


= 
\ 


FINIS., 





Put ee be 
a eta 





to ee . 
᾿ τί ΤῊΣ " 









~ 


oie et, AP - ΨΥ - me PD 
3 F 
‘ a SW a x & ᾿ < i P 


* - : » - 
OP ater OSE PAG κ᾽. ARRAS ΗΔ; 
ry t ‘ δ 
ΓΤ ΑΦΩ͂ΚΑ Jy A , 5 iad +. ͵ 
ΝΣ ἢ, vob cies ey Ly Py ἃ ὙΦ ΤΥ τ tee sa Phe 







- 








za 
a - 








Ἢ “ὦ Ἴ . Mt οὖ 
a ὁ ; at he oie ee Ley 
am τῳ ghey yay tiytig: ‘eM "αρε,, i: 


r i 
A Γ 
‘ 
















. = Meer Regt ae ΨΨΕ YR 


ie Pi 


; {toe 











THIS BOOK 1g DUE ON THE LAST DATE 
STAMPED BELOW 


“τὐ-ὦ5. 


AN INITIAL F 








LD 21—100m-7,’40 (6936s) 





i Ἢ δι: . OOS SE RE EER REELS SE SESSA SLEAZE AES RER SE TAA SES SS HS »ενε τυ νυϑοιο πεν  ν ᾿" ~~ . ~~" — “ AeA ae RAL Ὁ ἢ sh Oe &% Ἢ 
ee a SRN SEN SSK SR Rh iwihnqa0»x»w»w»w»wgweygweweyeae a RARER SARE SERRE RRMA RARER RE REEL RE ROR RS 


ALT Sil RII RAR RAIIRAIERIRISIRIARIIIRIIAIIIIAIIAIIAIIAAAIAAAAIIAACAAIRRAAARAAAAAARAAAAARARALMINI 





¥ 
Ν πε 
. 


FEL, 


MILLE de 


SIME ES SESS EE RRA RRS ESS eS S ex . SQ 
SRN aS SOS SE RY. CC ER REE EER SEE GAAS SSS WS WV crs SSNs pen 
Ἂ Ἴς ὅς τὴν : Nee δὼ i Se, me . BONS νι = λ tie νς a =. Ἢ ΝΟΥ δ ~~ 


‘ 
ἢ LET ΟΝ 
>: 


442428246048 a 














SSSR 


a Mn ΝΣ BE a AR ET ee ie ne ag my, a eet pee nee inh SE a kb τὸν 





ἈΝ: 





NS ΝΝ 


ἙΝ δὺς 











‘ Δ 

Ἁ 

* 

3 

‘ » 
‘ * 
Ἂς ἢ 
x εν 
Ἂς 
» 

x 


ῃ Fi Js ν 
gg AAA A ΣΤΥ ΠΣ Υ ΣΎ 





»,»᾽’»Ἵ,ἌΖἔΗΨ»9"»22 
ΚΣ ; 





VME ELLE 


PLLA A PLP EP BAP ES AF IPAPL LG SS 2 
Pee Se a ek “ oF ae ar es Pe 
COREA FLO ONS Pe Pa ee 





CAA Re dt ot ew Mae 
a fp 





ULL EEE 


KRMEEEP EA LG EAMES, 
Pi 7 Fa £3 » 4 
, / 
Wp ALA ,, 4 4 
F234 A, 





MM Ltd ba 
Sk Sg fAIG 9A COZ 


Log “ 


YY, 
773 
222 





Κ᾽ tae edepde COLD MED 


— gal 








“ 


LE 
Wy 
YY 


SIE ILLS 
SSL IIS SPS V 
LPL AS 





ἣν A, PP PLE Sa dat δ᾽ “ ra 














ONS SAQv > 
~ RNS > ΔΝ 
ERNE 
SSS 


Se 





~ 
<a Ve 


: SASS 
DIO MMMM MM 








PALS, FA fe IS SP Toff gf ‘3 Ὁ» 
PSS PS LS 2 7, yf ““. ee 4 
LSD ESSA SES SAGES EE: SSE S 








ζ΄ 





